PDF Specs Text and Tech Schedules

EEPCO
STANDARDISED
EEPCO
SPECIFICATIONS
Schedule of EEPCo Specifications

No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Spec No
TS-CO-01
TS-CO-02
TS-CO-03
TS-CO-04
TS-CO-05
TS-CO-06
TS-GN-01
TS-GN-02
TS-GN-03
TS-GN-05
TS-GN-06
TS-IN-01
TS-IN-02
TS-IN-03
TS-MA-02
TS-ME-01
TS-ME-02
TS-ME-03
TS-SG-01
TS-SG-02
TS-SG-03
TS-SG-04
TS-SG-06
TS-SG-07
TS-SG-09
TS-SG-12
TS-SG-13
TS-SG-14
TS-TR-01
TS-TR-02
TS-TR-06
TS-UV-01
Spec Title
Overhead Conductors and Accessories
LV AB Cables and Accessories
MV UG cables and Accessories
LV - XLPE Power Cables
MV and LV Insulators
Spun concrete poles and Accessories
EEPCO System and Environmental Data
General Contractual Obligations
General management Requirements
Street Light Materials
Mini SCADA System
Installation of 15kV lines
Installation of ABC
Installation of Underground Cables
Earthing Materials
kWh Meters
Meter Boxes and meter CTs
Consumer Connection Cables
Pole mounted MV Drop out Fuses
MV Surge Arrestors
Pole mounted Distribution Box
LV Pole mounted Fuse Switch & Cut out
15kV Pole Mounted Load Break Switch
15kV Pole mounted Air Break Switch
Pole Mounted Autorecloser
15kV Ring Main Units
Pole Mounted 15kV Switched Capacitors
Pole Mounted 15kV Sectionalisers
3 Phase Distribution Transformers
Compact Substations
15kV Voltage Boosters
Utility Vehicles
STANDARDISED SPECIFICATIONS PAPER

Paper on the production of modular specifications for the distribution Rehabilitation Project.
1.
INTRODUCTION
The 8 Regional Town Distribution Rehabilitation is a subproject of the World
Bank Energy Access Project Additional Financing Project. The two main
components comprise the Transmission Rehabilitation and the Distribution
Rehabilitation which in turn includes the Rural and the Urban (7 towns + Addis
Ababa rehabilitation)
London Power Associates Ltd. in association with Global Energy Consulting
Engineers Pvt Ltd. from India and the local firm Hagbes Ltd. have been awarded a
contract to undertake the Design, Procurement and Supervision Implementation for
the distribution component including the Rural and Urban components.
Part of the consultancy services was to review and modify/upgrade the
specifications for equipment and materials associated with the project.
The consultant has undertaken extensive review of the current EEPCo specifications
and based on his experience has produced updated specifications.
This section of the report addresses the issues of standardised specification and their
adoption by EEPCo company wide and the creation of a department that will handle
the management of these specifications.
It should be noted that ALL orderly run utilities have produced their standardised
specifications and the larger utilities have even more detailed specifications for
equipment types. The bigger and more well run the utility is the larger number of
specifications they have to ensure good management.
2.
STANDARDISED SPECIFICATIONS
In order to improve the management efficiency of the utility and make it easy to
produce tenders for goods and works it is of paramount importance to set up
standardised specifications for equipment and installation works. These documents
should be set up to reflect all hard earned experience of the utility in order to build
on the past and avoid mistakes.
These specifications shall become the standard of equipment and works throughout
the utility and country in order to ensure system uniformity & integration and lead to
cost effectiveness, minimisation of spares and maintenance, improve in Health &
Safety, better environmental management etc. Industry shall also follow the same
standard specifications in order to ensure that the electrical system follows the same
rules and policies across the country.
3.
DEPARTMENTAL STRUCTURE
A department within EEPCo shall be established charged with the production,
update, control, maintenance and circulation of these specifications.
These specifications shall be supplied to any consultant who undertakes system
development or design leading to procurement.
The consultants shall either use them as they are, or be requested to review them
with the view of improving adding details, modify / upgrade them under the
approval of EEPCo.
Any deficiencies or improvements to the specifications shall be undertaken in a
controlled manner and shall not be introduced without the express approval of the
specifications department.
Additional specifications shall be produced following the same style, format and
philosophy of the specifications.
EEPCo standards department shall be responsible for the orderly development of
these specifications and for their circulation, dissemination and adherence.
4.
INTRODUCTION OF MODULAR SPECIFICATIONS

The specifications for equipment and works shall be produced in self-contained
modular documents.
Common items shall not be repeated in each specification but they shall be arranged
in separate documents for ease of reference and maintenance/update. In general,
items shall be defined in one document only and not repeated in every document to
avoid mistakes / errors.
Thus there must be one specification with general System data and conditions,
where all the system characteristics such as voltage levels, insulation levels,
environmental conditions etc reside and can be easily referred to.
The consultant has adopted this approach in the production of the specifications in
a modular, stand-alone form for each equipment or group of equipment that would
be easy to understand and procure.
For example the specification for the distribution transformers covers the range of
sizes of distribution transformers pole, or ground mounted.
A separate specification covers the unit substations or package substations which
comprise of a cabinet with transformer MV switchgear and LV switchboard.
Each specification shall consist of two parts namely:
a)
Specification document
This shall contain the scope, international standard bodies compliance, testing
requirements, technical details etc. and shall be in text format.
b)
Technical schedule
This shall be the list of the technical requirements associated with the specification.
They have been produced in a spread sheet form as it would be easy to compare the
returned data from bids. It is also easy to carry out check on the numbers. These
spread sheets can be given to the Bidders in electronic form to facilitate ease of
assessment.
Once the system has been operating for a few years the specifications can be in a
single text document for ease of management.
The decision to group several equipment at this stage comes in for convenience. As
the utility expands and the management of the specifications improves it will break
down these current specifications into further modules to suit its operational
requirements. For example the distribution transformers specification could be

broken down to ground mounted and pole mounted transformer specifications.
5.
HOW WILL THE STANDARDISED SPECS BE USED

The required /relevant equipment specifications and the associated technical
schedules shall be attached to any bidding documents. If there are more than one set
of technical schedules then only the relevant schedule shall be attached.
A bid for supply and install complex say distribution network, may require a range of
specifications to be included.
This means that a range of stand-alone specifications will be included with the bid
simply as a list. The technical schedules have been produced in a spread-sheet form
and the spread sheets should be provided with the bidding package to the bidders so
that they can fill in the technical schedules in electronic form to enable ease of
evaluation and record keeping.
6.
PUBLICATION OF SPECIFICATIONS
The specifications once establishes shall become public domain and should be
available in the web for the industry to have easy access. The latest specification shall
be published. In this way it would not even be necessary to include the specifications
in the bidding document, but simply quote them. This is the mechanism of also
referring to the international standards by just quoting the standard number.
The specifications department shall be responsible for the maintenance of the
specifications on the web site, or through the web management department.
7.
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
The issue of quality of equipment is of major concern to ALL utilities around the
world and especially to the developing world. Utilities in the developed countries as
a rule have very tight regulations on the equipment that comes into the country and
in this way there are many safeguards in an attempt to ensure good quality of
equipment.
In developing countries as the specifications are not generally of good standard and
the international community through aid programs require that bidding is open to
international bidders the ground is open to abuse. Many utilities end-up with low
quality goods which in the long term cost more than buying good products in the
first place.
The solution is not simple and there is no simple remedy. If the specifications are
made too tight they may be seen as favouring only certain manufacturers or
describing a particular product. In contracts for equipment such as the World Bank
it is also not possible to request the submission of samples and carry out an
examination of the quality and reject goods which look of poor quality even if they
satisfy the specification as this will be against the rules which specify that the criteria
must be included in the tender and only those can be used to decide on compliance
and not subjective comparisons of equipment offered.
Several utilities however in the developed world have what is called an approved list
of manufacturers and products. The utility has carried extensive research of sample
products submitted or collected by the utility and approved the equipment, and
subsequently have established the list of equipment that are suitable and accepted to
be used within the utility.
This can be seen as a prequalification process but the range of manufacturers must
be wide enough to encourage competition, otherwise it may be seen as market fixing
and preferential treatment of manufacturers.
This approach can certainly be used if the utility uses own funds or government
funds provided that the government has accepted the approved manufacturers list.
8.
SPECIFICATIONS PRODUCED
At this stage LPA who has been assigned to carry out the 8 towns design has
produced the specifications required for the project following this format.
The specifications produced are as shown on the contents table.
EEPCo will have to adopt this POLICY and develop all the specifications required
for the operation of the company in due course. This may be achieved either by
undertaking the development in house or through the consultants with every project
that is being implemented. This would be easy but it can harbour pitfalls with the
consultants as EEPCo would have to have a tight control, and departments other
than the project management will have to be involved with the consultants.
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-CO-01
Overhead Conductors and Accessories
Rev -4- April 2013
SECTION 1- SCOPE
SPECIFICATION TS-CO-01
EEPCO
DOCUMENT REVISION SHEET

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 1
Dec 2012
First Issue
Rev 2
Feb 2013
Additional sizes of AAAC
Rev 3
23 March 2013
Insulated XLPE added
Rev 4
8 April 2013
Conductor sizes to conform to BS standards.
TS-CO-01 R4 Overhead Conductors & Accessories-C.docxRev -4- April 2013
Page: i , 11-Apr-13
SECTION 1- SCOPE
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
OVERHEAD CONDUCTORS & ACCESSORIES
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
SYSTEM PARAMETERS & SERVICE CONDITIONS
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT:
4.
INSPECTION AND TESTING
4.1
4.2
TYPE TESTS
ROUTINE TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS
2
2
5.
ALL ALUMINIUM ALLOY CONDUCTOR (AAAC)
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
GENERAL
CONDUCTOR REQUIREMENT
STRANDING
JOINTS IN WIRES
TOLERANCES
SURFACE CONDITIONS
GREASING OF CONDUCTORS
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
INSULATED AAAC CONDUCTOR

STRANDED BARE COPPER CONDUCTOR
GALVANIZED STEEL WIRE
ROUND TIE WIRE
MARKING, PACKING, & SHIPMENT
5
5
5
6
6
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
CONDUCTOR DRUMS AND PACKING

DRUM SIZES
CONDUCTOR DRUM LENGTH
DRUM MARKING
DRUM WARRANTEES
SHIPMENT
6
7
7
8
8
8
11.
AAA CONDUCTOR ACCESSORIES
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
GENERAL
PARALLEL GROOVE CLAMPS
CABLE LUG
PARALLEL GROOVE CLAMPS FOR ALUMINUM TO COPPER
CONNECTION
INSULATED MID SPAN JOINTS
COMPRESSIBLE MID-SPAN JOINT
STRAIN CLAMP
SOCKET
BALL EYE
EARTHING ROD WITH CLAMP
SPLICING SLEEVE
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
11.10
11.11
Page: ii , 11-Apr-13
9
9
10
11
12
12
13
13
14
15
15
EEPCO
SECTION 1- SCOPE
11.12
11.13
11.14
11.15
11.16
11.17
BOLTED PARALLEL GROOVE CLAMPS

MARKING
PREFORMED TIE FOR STRING INSULATOR
PREFORMED TIES FOR LINE POST INSULATOR
TERMINAL LUGS
PACKING AND MARKING
15
16
16
17
17
17
12.
13.
QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

SCHEDULES
17
18
13.1
13.2
13.3
SCHEDULE FOR OVERHEAD CONDUCTOR AND ACCESSORIES

NON COMPLIANCE SCHEDULE
TEST CERTIFICATES SCHEDULE
18
19
20
Page: iii , 11-Apr-13
SECTION 1- SCOPE
EEPCO
OVERHEAD CONDUCTORS & ACCESSORIES

1.
SCOPE
This specification covers the Design, Manufacture, Testing and delivery of
Overhead both bare and XLPE insulated All Aluminium Alloy Conductors
(AAAC).
2.

See Specification TS-GN-01 EEPCO system and Environmental Data.
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The materials supplied shall conform to the latest edition of the appropriate IEC
standards and/or other recognized international standards. In particular:
3.1
AS 3675
Conductors covered overhead for working voltages 6.35/11

kV up to and including 19/33 kV
IEC 60028
International Standard of resistance for copper
IEC 60060
High voltage test techniques
IEC 60104
Aluminium-magnesium-silicon alloy wire for overhead line

conductors
IEC 60229
Tests on cable over sheaths which have a special protective

function and are applied by extrusion
IEC 60287
Electric Cables -Calculation of the current rating
IEC 60811
Common test methods for insulated and sheathing materials
IEC 60889
Hard drawn aluminium wire for overhead line conductors
IEC 61089
Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded

conductors
BS 3242
All Aluminium Alloy Conductor
ASTM D2303
Inclined plane non-tracking test method.
ASTMB399
AAAC conductors
CONFLICT:
See spec TS-GN-02 General Contractual obligations.
4.

See spec TS- GN-02 General Contractual obligations.
Page: 1 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
4.1
SECTION 4- INSPECTION AND TESTING
TYPE TESTS
Test results shall be provided according to IEC requirements, not later as
specified in the technical schedules or elsewhere, and they will comprise of the
following:
a)
Mechanical tests (Tensile and Elongation tests and Wrapping tests)
b)
Resistance tests.
c)
Tests on sheath (of insulated conductors only)
d)
Abrasion test
e)
Electrical test
4.2

Each separate consignment of material shall be accepted or rejected by the
Purchaser, depending on the results of tests carried out on the consignment
"Before Stranding" tests shall be carried out on samples of wire, selected from not
less than 10% of the individual lengths of wire to be included in any one
consignment.
Each sample shall be of sufficient length to provide one test specimen for each of
the specified tests.
"After Stranding" tests shall be carried out on samples selected from every drum
in the consignment. Each sample shall be of sufficient length to provide one test
specimen for each of the appropriate tests.
If any one sample fails to pass any one of the tests nominated for the
conductor/wire, then samples shall be taken from every drum in the consignment
and any drum length from which a sample proves defective shall be rejected. On
no account shall any rejected material be presented again for test unless with the
written approval of, and under conditions determined by the Purchaser.
Each sample shall be subjected to the tests described hereafter. Test methods,
shall be in accordance with IEC 61089, unless otherwise specified.
a)
b)
Each Aluminium Wire Sample
Diameter Measurement
Tensile Strength Measurement -IEC 61089
Resistivity Test IEC 61089
Wrapping Test IEC 61089
Each Complete Conductor Sample
Lay Ratio of Each Layer (to be measured).
Tensile Strength of Complete Conductor
This shall be measured in accordance with IEC 61089 . Alternatively, the

Tensile Strength may be calculated from the results of tests on individual
wires using the method of IEC 61089 .
Page: 2 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 5- ALL ALUMINIUM ALLOY

CONDUCTOR (AAAC)
Resistivity of Complete Conductor
This shall be measured in accordance with IEC 61089 , as applied to

individual aluminium wires. Alternatively, the resistivity may be calculated
from the results of tests on individual wires, using the method of IEC
61089 .
Electrical tests on sheath as per IEC 62230 on insulated conductors only)
5.
ALL ALUMINIUM ALLOY CONDUCTOR (AAAC)
5.1
GENERAL
All Aluminium Alloy Conductors (AAAC) bare conductor shall have the
following characteristics.
All details shall be according to IEC standard and IEC 61089.
5.2
CONDUCTOR REQUIREMENT
The required characteristics of the All Aluminium Alloy conductors are as
follows:
Number
of strands
Diameter
of strands,
mm
Nominal
Al. area,
mm2
Calculated
Al. area
mm2
AAAC 25 mm2
2.3
25
29
AAAC 50 mm2
3.3
50
59.87
AAAC 100 mm2
19
2.82
100
118.7
AAAC 150 mm2
19
3.48
150
180.7
AAAC 200 mm
37
2.87
200
239.4
Type
5.3
STRANDING
In all constructions, successive layers shall have opposite directions of lay, the
outermost layer being right-handed. Right-handed lay and left- handed lay shall
be as defined in the latest edition of IEC 61089 .
The wires in each layer shall be evenly and closely stranded.
The lay ratios of different layers shall comply with BS 7884 (aluminium
conductors), as applicable.
In conductors having multiple layers, the lay ratio of a layer shall not be larger
than the lay ratio of the layer directly below it.
5.4
JOINTS IN WIRES
Joints in wires shall comply with the requirements of BS 7884 (aluminium
conductors),
Page: 3 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
5.5
SECTION 5- ALL ALUMINIUM ALLOY

CONDUCTOR (AAAC)
TOLERANCES
Wire diameter shall not depart from the normal value by more than +/-1%.
No diameter of a wire shall differ from the standard diameter by more than plus
or minus 2%.
The mean diameter of a wire shall not differ from the standard diameter by more
than plus or minus 1%.Standard length 5%.
Measurements of resistance shall be carried out to an accuracy of at least 0.1%
5.6
SURFACE CONDITIONS
All wires making up the conductor shall be free from points, sharp edges,
abrasions or other imperfections that would tend to increase radio inference and
corona loss. The conductors shall also be free from metal particles and dirt.
The making and lying of the conductor strands shall be such as to produce a
conductor free from a tendency to untwist or spring apart when cut. The
stranding shall be such that when subjected to 50% of ultimate strength there
shall be no high wires but a cylindrical form shall be maintained.
5.7
GREASING OF CONDUCTORS
(i)
The inner layers of all aluminium conductors shall be covered with approved
anti-corrosive grease having a high melting point. The grease shall completely fill
the interstices between the strands. There shall be no excess grease remaining on
the outer surface which might cause adherence of grit and other material during
pulling out and erection. The minimum drop point (IP 31) of the grease shall be
110oC, and it shall not migrate towards the bottom of the conductor when the
conductor is maintained continuously at a temperature of 95o.
(ii)
All greases shall permit operation of the conductors at a temperature of 80o.
(iii)
No mixes of different greases in any one length of conductor shall be permitted

without the approval of the Purchaser.
(iv)
The specified characteristics of the grease shall be unimpaired after heating to

15oC above its drop point for 150 hours.
(v)
The grease shall protect the conductor from corrosion in service which may
include operation in atmospheres containing salt spray or industrial pollution.
(vi)
The grease shall not corrode component wires of conductors.
(vii)
The grease shall be compatible with any wire drawings lubricant present on the
wires.
(viii)
The grease shall not flow within, nor exude from the conductor, at temperatures
up to and including 110oC.
(ix)
The grease shall retain its properties including pseudo plasticity, thixotrophy,
syneresis, resistance to oxidation and chemical stability at all operating
temperatures between -10oC and +100oC.
(x)
The grease must not present a health hazard and shall meet all relevant current
health safety requirements.
Page: 4 , 11-Apr-13
SECTION 6- INSULATED AAAC

CONDUCTOR
EEPCO
6.
(xi)
All conductors shall be fully greased and wiped in such a way that all wires in the
conductor are covered with grease except the outer surface of those in the out
layer, all the inner interstices filled with grease and the outer interstices have a
small quantity of grease remaining along the lines of contact of the wires
(xii)
The Supplier shall give details of the proposed greasing system and name the
grease to be used in the Technical Data Schedules. He shall also give details of
the proposed wiping system.
(xiii)
The Supplier shall specify the minimum weight of grease (kg/km) in each of the
conductors offered in the attached technical Data Schedules.
(xiv)
Corresponding to "category 4" greasing according to Draft Engineering

Recommendation L.38/1, the Electricity Council Engineering Management
Conference, January 1988). It is essential that the wiping die associated with
Category 4 greasing be totally effective. If the Supplier is unable to guarantee
cleanliness (absence of grease) of the outer surface of the conductor with level 4
greasing maintaining cleanliness should be offered for consideration.
(xv)
The Supplier shall give details of the control supervision and testing measures
taken to ensure that there are no discontinuities in greasing.
INSULATED AAAC CONDUCTOR

Covered Conductors (CC) shall be supplied if so specified in the scope of supply.
Covered (partially insulated) is required for overhead lines where there is a
likelihood of tree contact that may cause transient supply interruptions.
The specifications for the conductor shall be as stated in section 5 above.
The insulation shall be Cross-linked polyethylene with a density 0.93 g/cm and of
ultra violet resistant quality:
Melt flow index:
max.0.5
Minimum covering thickness: 2.55 mm
7.
STRANDED BARE COPPER CONDUCTOR

Bare annealed circular non-compacted copper conductor wires of size
35mm(7/2.5) according to IEC 228 to be used as earthing conductors in 33 kV
and 0.4 kV conforming to IEC 228 or equivalent standard are also required for
overhead networks. The technical schedule may be referred for other particulars.
8.
GALVANIZED STEEL WIRE

Galvanized steel stay wire stranded and wire diameter 7x2.65 mm, overall
diameter 8.0mm. The guy wire shall be manufactured to BS 183, and must have
minimum tensile stress of 1000N/mm and a minimum breaking load of 38.60
KN. The steel shall be protected from rust by galvanizing in accordance with BS
443. Delivery shall be in coils of 30 kgs wrapped in protective material.
Page: 5 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
9.
SECTION 9- ROUND TIE WIRE
ROUND TIE WIRE

The round tie wire of 6mm dia. shall be made of annealed or tempered aluminium
manufactured according to BS 1475 or equivalent. The tie wires are intended for
binding all aluminium conductors onto pin type insulators. The technical schedule
may be referred to for other particulars .
10.

In addition to the clause on packing etc. given in the Spec. No. TS-GN-02, the
following shall be given special attention.
10.1
CONDUCTOR DRUMS AND PACKING

The conductors shall be packed in non-returnable wooden drums suitable for
storage for up to 3 years in tropical climates.
Alternatively non-returnable painted steel drums will be also accepted. painting
shall conform to IEC or British standards.
Wooden/ steel drum will be treated at par for evaluation purpose and accordingly
the Bidder should quote the package.
Drums shall be sturdy and of sufficiently large diameter to prevent damage during
shipping, storage in tropical climate, handling during stringing operations.
Conductor drums shall conform to DIN 46391 or equivalent standards.
No drum shall contain more than one length of conductor.
The following shall apply for all drum types.
a)
Drum Drawings and specifications

The bidders should submit their drawings of the conductor drums along with the
bid. After placement of letter of intent the supplier shall submit four copies of
fully dimensioned drawing of the drum for purchaser's approval. After getting
approval from the purchaser, supplier shall submit 3 copies of the approved
drawings.
b)
Wood type and treatment

All wooden components shall be manufactured out of seasoned New soft wood
free from defects that may materially weaken the component parts of the drums.
Preservative treatment for anti-termite/anti fungus shall be applied to the entire
drum with preservatives of a quality which is not harmful to the conductor.
The surface of the conductor drum where conductor is stored shall be free from
sharp objects such as nail tis or protruding heads, which might damage the
conductor.
c)
Construction
Drum flanges shall be 2-layer construction with minimum 60 mm thickness. Each
layer shall be nailed and fixed with grip nails at approximately 90 degrees. Nails
shall be driven from the inside face of the flange, punched and then clenched on
the outer face. There shall not be less than 2 nails per board in each circle.
Page: 6 , 11-Apr-13
SECTION 10- MARKING, PACKING, &

SHIPMENT
EEPCO
d)
Spindle holes
Reels shall be constructed so that they must be supported either on an axle
through the reel flange. A round spindle hole of minimum diameter 120mm is
required at the centre of the wooden drums. Spindle hole/supports shall be
reinforced with a suitable steel flange.
e)
Conductor ends
The inner as well as outer end of conductor shall be brought out on the drum
flange and shall be clamped in such a manner to make the conductor length
marking easily visible.
Each end of conductor shall be crimped to prevent unwinding and causing
danger.
f)
Conductor wrapping with plastic

Before conductor reeling, thick plastic or card board or double corrugated or
thick bituminized waterproof paper shall be secured to the drum barrel and inside
of flanges of the drum by means of a suitable adhesive. All materials shall be dry
before use. After reeling the conductor the exposed surface of the outer layer of
conductor shall be wrapped with thin polythene sheet across the flanges to
preserve the conductor from dirt, grit and damage during transportation and
handling and also to prevent ingress of rain water during storage/transport.
g)
Lugging
The conductors shall be lagged or covered with suitable material to provide
physical protection during transit and during storage and handling operations.
Preferable mode of lugging shall be by wooden lagging on the circumference with
a thickness of at least 40 mm.
10.2
DRUM SIZES
The drums shall have the following dimensions:
Max. Diameter:
2280 mm;
Max. Width:
1140 mm;
Specific drum dimensions shall be as stated in the technical schedules.

The Supplier shall state the drum dimensions and mark them on the drum.
10.3
CONDUCTOR DRUM LENGTH

Standard length shall be considered as 2500m if not otherwise specified. The
length of conductor for drum shall be as specified in the technical schedules.
A variation of + 5% of the conductor drum length may be acceptable.
All conductor lengths cut and used for various tests shall be to contractor's
account and shall not be included in conductor length to be supplied.
Bidder shall also indicate the maximum single length, over and above the standard
length, he can manufacture in the guaranteed technical particulars of offer. This
may be required for special stretches like river crossing etc. The Purchaser
Page: 7 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO

SHIPMENT
reserves the right to place orders for the above lengths on the same terms and
conditions appliconductor for the standard lengths during the validity of the
Contract.
10.4
a)
DRUM MARKING
Direction of drum rolling
The direction for rolling as indicated by an arrow together with the words "Roll
this way" shall be marked on each flange.
Each drum shall be marked to indicate weather proofing.
b)
Drum Labels/Marking
The drum shall have metallic or plastic plates /labels or shall have the data
indelibly branded on the conductor drum for shipping purpose. In any case all
branding shall be indelibly marked to indicate the following:
1) Name of Purchaser EEPCO
2) Contract Number,
3) Manufacturers name,
4) Trade mark/model if any,
5) Conductor type, name and specification
6) Conductor size and stranding,
7) Exact length of conductor (in meters) contained in the drum,
8) Gross weight (kgs) of the loaded drum,
9) Net weight (kgs) of the conductor,
10) Drum Serial Number,
Each case/consignment shall contain a fully detailed packing list covering the
above details in a sealed waterproof envelope.
Three copies of each packing list shall be sent to the Employer prior to dispatch.
10.5
DRUM WARRANTEES
The bidder/contractor would implicitly guarantee the soundness of the conductor
drums for three (3) years.
Should the drums fail within this period, due to poor quality of materials and
workmanship, the contractor shall be responsible for re-drumming the
conductor/conductor to new drums provided free of charge by the contractor.
Damage due to careless handling and storage by the client shall not be covered
under this guarantee.
Damage due to careless handling and storage by the contractor or his agents shall
be fully covered under this guarantee.
10.6
SHIPMENT
The Contractor shall be responsible for CIF / CIP (or as specified in the tender)
delivery of all goods to the point of delivery specified in the tender inquiry.
Page: 8 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 11- AAA CONDUCTOR

ACCESSORIES
11.
AAA CONDUCTOR ACCESSORIES
11.1
GENERAL
Conductor connectors are required for aluminium alloy non-tension and tension
joints, and for connecting aluminium alloy conductor to terminals of outdoor and
indoor electrical equipment. These shall be complete with any special tools, bolts
and washers appropriate to the application for which they are to be used.
The edges of the connector barrels shall be rounded to assist stress relief when
the connectors are used with covered (partially insulated) conductors. All
connectors shall be supplied pre-filled with high quality oxide inhibiting
compound and shall be protectively capped to prevent spillage or spoilage of this
compound. All connectors shall be clearly and permanently marked with the
correct size and category.
In addition all connectors shall comply with the following:
The current must be uniformly distributed among the strands of the conductors
The connector must have at least the same conductance as the conductor and
carry the full continuous current rating of the conductor size they are designed for
The original quality of contacts shall be maintained throughout the connectors
service life
Glow discharges and radio interferences must be reduced to a minimum.
All compression connectors shall be suitable for installation using either manual
or hydraulic compression tools. Details of dies and tools required for the
compression connectors offered shall be submitted with the Bidder. Complete
instructions for the installation of each type of connector shall be provided by the
contractor.
Preformed ties shall be supplied for conductor dead ends, guy dead ends and
conductor ties. Bolted parallel groove clamps shall be used for jumpers spur takeoffs and connections to Fuse cut outs.
The Preformed ties for bare conductor and stay wire shall be adequate strength,
must not slip whilst in service and compatible with the AAAC and AAC
conductors, and galvanized steel guy wires specified. The Contractor shall ensure
that all preformed ties are compatible for installation with the insulators and
thimbles specified or as required for correct construction
11.2
PARALLEL GROOVE CLAMPS

For Aluminium to Aluminium Connection for overhead power
lines/requirements.
11.2.1
Design
The clamp shall be suitable for one or more of the aluminium standard
conductors according to DIN 48201. DIN 48215for overhead power lines.
The size of the clamps shall be suitable for the conductors of sizes mentioned in
clause.5.2 above.
Page: 9 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
11.2.2

ACCESSORIES
Material
The clamps shall be manufactured from materials, which withstand the
mechanical loads and service conditions.
All materials of clamps shall be corrosion resistant and shall not deteriorate in
service. The tensile strength of the body shall be at least 300 N/mm2.The clamp
shall be greased during manufacture.
11.2.3
Markings
The clamp shall be marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer and
the type or catalogue number of the clamp.
11.2.4
Quotation
The quotation shall be accompanied at least by the following information in three
copies.
(i)
type test reports (if available)
(ii)
the binding dimensional and assembly drawings
(iii)
all materials and coatings specified according to ISO, IEC, BS or DIN standards.
(iv)
main dimensions and construction
(v)
technical characteristics
(vi)
manufacturers type designation
(vii)
markings
(viii)
questionnaire for technical particulars attached

If the manufacturer cannot comply with any requirement of this specification, the
exception shall be clearly stated in the quotation; otherwise it is taken for granted
that the items quoted meet the requirements.
11.3
CABLE LUG
11.3.1
Design
Straight and angle cable lugs shall be made of tinned brass. Both the tube and eye
shall be suitable for copper and aluminium conductors and be delivered with all
necessary bolts, nuts and washers.
11.3.2
Materials
The cable lugs shall be manufactured from materials which withstand the
mechanical loads and services conditions. All materials of the cable lugs shall
resist corrosion and shall not deteriorate in service.
11.3.3
Marking
Each cable lug shall be marked with name or trade mark of the manufacturer and
the specified cross-section of the conductor.
Page: 10 , 11-Apr-13

ACCESSORIES
EEPCO
11.4
PARALLEL GROOVE CLAMPS FOR ALUMINUM TO

COPPER CONNECTION
11.4.1
Design
The parallel groove clamps for A1-Cu-connection Clamps will be used for nontension connecting of aluminium and copper conductors complying withthe
following standards.
DIN 48215
Clamps and connectors for overhead power line
DIN 48201
Aluminium standard conductors
BS 6485
PVC-covered conductors for overhead power lines.
BS 6360
Specification for conductors in insulated cables.
The clamp shall be suitable for the Aluminium-alloy conductors and for the
copper conductors according to BS 6485 or BS 6360 .
Cu 2.5 mm2
Cu 16 mm2
Cu 4 mm2
Cu 25 mm2
Cu 6 mm2
Cu 35 mm2
Cu 10 mm2
11.4.2
Material
The parts of the clamps shall be manufactured from materials, which withstand
the mechanical loads and environmental circumstances. All ferrous parts shall be
hot-dip galvanized.
The tensile strength of the body shall be at least 300 N/mm2.
The clamp shall be greased during manufacture.
Each clamp shall be marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer.
The markings shall be legible and durable.
11.4.3
Quotation
The quotation shall be accompanied at least by the following information in three
copies:
(i)
Type test reports (if available)
(ii)
The binding dimensional and assembly drawings
(iii)
All materials and coatings specified according to ISO, IEC, BS or DIN standards.
(iv)
Main dimensions and construction
(v)
Technical characteristics
(vi)
Manufacturers type designation
Page: 11 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO

ACCESSORIES
(vii)
Markings
(viii)
Questionnaire for technical particulars attached

11.5
INSULATED MID SPAN JOINTS

The joints shall be capable of achieving at least 85% of the breaking load of the
conductor. They shall be insulated type. The cast parts must be compact and
contain no pores or slag. They must fit each other perfectly and prevent any
possibility of fitting in wrong direction. Tubular joints into which conductors
inserted at both ends shall be designed so that the penetration of the conductors
beyond their meeting point shall be prevented. Each kit shall be complete,
containing all accessories, for the respective number of cores of the ABC.
11.6
COMPRESSIBLE MID-SPAN JOINT
11.6.1
Design
The mid span compressible joints shall be suitable for all aluminium conductors
to DIN 48207. The tensile strength of the body of the joints shall be at least 300
N/mm2 and shall be able to achieve at least 85% of the corresponding breaking
load of the conductor.
The conductor joint shall be suitable for the following all aluminium conductors
according to DIN 48201.
Mid span Compressible joints for AAAC offered shall be suitable for the
conductors mentioned at clause 5.2 above.
11.6.2
Material
The parts of the joints shall be manufactured from materials, which withstand the
mechanical loads and the prevailing service conditions. Material of the conductor
joints shall be corrosion resistant and shall not deteriorate in service.
11.6.3
Markings
The joints shall be marked at least with the conductor size it is meant for, the
name or trademark of the manufacturer and the catalogue number of the joint.
11.6.4
Quotation
The quotation shall be accompanied at least by the following information.
(i)
Type test reports (if available)
(ii)
Dimensional drawings
(iii)
All materials and coatings specified according to relevant standard
(iv)
Technical characteristics
(v)
Markings
(vi)
Questionnaire for technical particulars attached
Page: 12 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO

ACCESSORIES
11.7
STRAIN CLAMP
Bolted dead-end strain clamps, clevis type, minimum breaking load 40 kN, all
ferrous parts to be hot-dip galvanized. Nominal size of coupling shall be 16mm
according to IEC 120. Suitable for conductor diameter 6 - 18 mm.
11.8
SOCKET
11.8.1
Socket Eye
This Specification specifies the design, manufacture and testing requirements for
the Standards
IEC 60120 Dimensions of ball and socket couplings of disc insulator units.
IEC 60372 Locking devices for ball eye and socket eye couplings of disc insulator
units
11.8.2
Design
The socket eyes to be used together with string insulator units of cap and pin type
U40BL in accordance with IEC 305 with an electro-mechanical failing load of 45
kN to be used in the 33 kV distribution networks.
The socket eye shall be designed for a mechanical failing load of 45 kN.
The dimension and tolerances of the ball and socket coupling shall comply with
IEC 120. The sizes of the socket couplings to be used are the standard size
coupling 11 as specified in IEC 120. In addition to this the internal height of the
socket shall also meet the requirement of IEC 372.
The dimensions and tolerances of the split-pins shall meet the requirements of
IEC 372.
Cast fittings with socket shall be made of either malleable cast iron or approved
equal. Forged steel fittings with socket shall be made from steel of a suitable
grade.
Material of split-pins shall be a copper alloy or stainless steel complying with the
requirements of IEC 372.
All ferrous metal parts exposed to corrosion shall be protected by hot-dip
galvanizing.
11.8.3
Markings
The split-pins shall be installed into the locking position in sockets.
Each socket eye shall be marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer,
type or catalogue number of fitting and the minimum failing load.
11.8.4
Testing
The sample and routine tests shall be carried in accordance with BS 3288: Part 1.
Test on split-pins shall be made according to IEC 372.
Page: 13 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO

ACCESSORIES
The dimensions of ball and socket couplings shall be checked on random samples
using gauges in accordance with IEC 120.
11.8.5
Quotation
The quotation shall be accompanied by the following information:
(i)
(ii)
dimensional drawings
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
markings
(vii)

11.9
BALL EYE
11.9.1
Design
The ball eyes to be used together with string insulator units of cap and pin type
U70BL in accordance with IEC 305 for use in 33 kV overhead distribution lines.
The ball eye shall be designed for a mechanical failing load of 45 kN. The
dimension and tolerances of the ball and eye coupling shall comply with the
standard coupling size 11 of IEC 120 and IEC 372. In addition to this the
internal height (H2) of the ball shall also meet the requirement of IEC 372. The
ball eye dimension shall meet the requirements of BS 3288.
11.9.2
Materials
Ball eyes shall be made by forging from steel of suitable grade. All ferrous parts
exposed to corrosion shall be protected by hot-dip galvanizing.
11.9.3
Markings
Each ball eye shall be marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer
and the type or catalogue number the coupling size and mechanical failing load.
The markings shall be legible and durable.
11.9.4
Testing
Testing shall be in accordance with standards referred by the manufacturer.
11.9.5
Quotation
The quotation shall be accompanied by the following information:
(i)
(ii)
dimensional drawings
(iii)
Page: 14 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO

ACCESSORIES
(iv)
(v)
markings
(vi)
(vii)

11.10
EARTHING ROD WITH CLAMP

Profiled earthing rods of hot galvanized steel with connecting lugs. Cross-section
and length of profile shall be 50x50x3 mm and 3 m long, respectively. The
earthing rod should also be in accordance with the corresponding drawing of this
tender.
Earthing rod clamps of malleable cast iron hot galvanized suitable for stranded
copper conductor of 25-35 mm2.
11.11
SPLICING SLEEVE
These shall be supplied for jointing the following bare MV conductors.
Nominal Size (mm)
200
150
100
50
25
Material to be Terminated
AAAC
AAAC
AAAC
AAAC
AAAC
The minimum failing load of splicing sleeve shall be greater than the breaking load
of the matching conductor. The splicing sleeve shall be suitable for jointing
AAAC .overhead conductor and shall provide conductivity that is equal or better
to the conductor.
11.12
BOLTED PARALLEL GROOVE CLAMPS

Conductor connectors are required for jumpers, spur take-offs, and drop
connections to Fuse cut outs for AAAC non-tension connections. IEC61238or
other national or international Standards which ensure equal or higher quality shall
be applicable.
The edges of the connector barrels shall be rounded to assist stress relief when
the connectors are used with covered (partially insulated) conductors.
All connectors shall be supplied pre-filled with high quality oxide inhibiting
compound and shall be protectively capped to prevent spillage or spoilage of this
compound. All connectors shall be clearly and permanently marked with the
correct conductor size range and category.
The clamps shall be made of corrosion-resistant alloy with a minimum tensile
strength 400 MPa. The resistance of all clamps shall not be more than 50% of the
resistance of the conductor itself over the same length as the clamp.
Page: 15 , 11-Apr-13

ACCESSORIES
EEPCO
a)
The connectors shall:
(i)
Have serrated conductor groves,
(ii)
Interlocking fingers,
(iii)
Be recessed to prevent bolt head turning during tightening,
(iv)
Have a one, two, or three bolt pattern to suit conductor size and current rating,
(v)
Have bolts of sufficient length to allow installation without disassembling the

connector,
(vi)
Have conductor entries of a generous radius to prevent damage to strands, and
(vii)
Be pre-filled with joint compound.

The Bidder shall submit type test certificates with the bid to demonstrate
compliance with the requirements of this specification.
b)
Types
Clamp shall be supplied for the following type of conductors:
Side A
Nominal Size
mm
200
150
100
50
25
11.13
Material to be
connected
AAAC
AAAC
AAAC
AAAC
AAAC
Side B
Nominal Size
Material to be
mm
connected
200
AAAC
150
AAAC
100
AAAC
50
AAAC
25
AAAC
MARKING
Each connector shall be legibly marked with the manufacturers catalogue number
and conductor diameter range for each grove, and each shall be supplied in a clear
plastic package.
Packaging
Each connector shall be supplied in an individual sealed clear plastic bag or
pocket. The bag shall be adequately durable to ensure no grease or oxide
inhibiting compound is lost or spoiled prior to the time of installation. The bag
shall be labelled with the makers name or trade mark, and the size range of the
fitting. Bags shall be further packaged in cardboard or similar containers in
quantities of approximately 100 fittings of the identical description.
11.14
PREFORMED TIE FOR STRING INSULATOR

These shall be supplied for termination of the following MV conductors and guy
wires.
Nominal Size (mm)
200
150
100
Material to be terminated
AAAC
AAAC
AAAC
Page: 16 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
50
25
11.15
SECTION 12- QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
AAAC
AAAC
PREFORMED TIES FOR LINE POST INSULATOR

These shall be supplied for MV line construction as follows:
Nominal size (mm)
200
150
100
50
25
Material to be compressed
AAAC
AAAC
AAAC
AAAC
AAAC
All preformed ties shall be supplied with a neoprene pad for insertion over the
conductor where it rests in the insulator top or side groove.
11.16
TERMINAL LUGS
Terminal lugs shall be heavily tinned plated aluminium and of the compression
type pre-filled with compound and suitable for connection of conductor onto
copper terminals using suitable bolts. Terminal lugs with one 13 mm hole in palm
for AAAC
11.17
PACKING AND MARKING
11.17.1
Packing
The accessories shall be packed in individual sealed clear plastic bags. The bags
shall be adequately durable and should not be spoiled prior to the time of use of
the accessories. The bags shall be further packaged in wooden or similarly strong
containers in quantities of approximately 100 fittings of identical description.
11.17.2
Marking
The bags shall be labelled with the makers name or trade mark, the size, range of
the accessories etc.
Each connector shall be legibly marked with the manufacturers catalogue number
and conductor diameter range for each grove, and each shall be supplied in a clear
plastic package.
12.

A Quality Assurance Plan (QA Plan) including customer hold points covering the
manufacturing activities of the material shall be required to be submitted by the
Bidder with the tender.
The contractor shall follow the approved Quality Assurance Plan. If desired by
the purchaser, he shall give access to all the documents and materials to satisfy the
purchaser that the Quality Assurance Plan is being properly followed.
Page: 17 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
13.
SECTION 13- SCHEDULES
SCHEDULES
If the technical schedules are to be included in the same file then use this section
13.1
SCHEDULE FOR OVERHEAD CONDUCTOR AND

ACCESSORIES
Please see separate technical schedule TS-CO-01 S.
Page: 18 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
13.2

Schedule Ref TS-CO-01-NC1
The bidder shall provide a list of non compliances with this specification,
documenting the effects that such non compliance is likely to have on the
equipments life, operating characteristics and system performance. Each non
compliance shall make reference to the relevant specification clause.
Specification
Clause
Non Compliance description
Page: 19, 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
13.3

Item Reference TS-CO-01-TC1
The bidder shall provide a list of the test certificates included with the bid. The list
shall include type test certificate routine test report references. Each certificate
listed shall as far as possible refer to the relevant specification clause.
Specification
Clause
Test Certificate Schedule
Page: 20, 11-Apr-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule: TS-CO-01-S1

Technical Schedule for Bare AAAC Overhead Conductors
No
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
Bid Offer Requirement Bid Offer Requirement Bid Offer Requirement
Bid
Offer
Overhead AAAC Conductors:

1
Manufacturer
Manufacturer's Code N
Type
Standard
Conductor Material
Conductor Code Name
- Aluminium Area
60889 and 61089

and BS3242
60889 and 61089

and BS3242
60889 and 61089

and BS3242
60889 and 61089

and BS3242
60889 and 61089

and BS3242
AAAC
AAAC
AAAC
AAAC
AAAC
mm2
25
50
100
150
200
N/mm
7/2.3
7/3.3
19/2.82
19/3.48
37/2.87
- Overall condutor geometric Area

- N and diameter of individual
wires
- Overall Diameter
mm
6.9
9.9
14.1
17.4
20.09
10
- Maximum DC resistance at 20C
ohm/km
1.1453
0.5498
0.2787
0.1831
0.1385
11
- Nominal breaking strength
kN
9.44
16.78
33.32
50.64
67.09
12
- Weight
IEC
Ash
kg/km
79.5
164
326
497
659
13
Maximum current rating
14
Temperature Range
-5 to +45
-5 to +45
-5 to +45
-5 to +45
-5 to +45
15
Humidity
70
70
70
70
70
16
Drum:
2000
2000
2000
1000
1000
17
- Maximum drum wound lengths
18
- Dimension (diameter x width)
mm mm
19
- Gross weight
kg
File:TS-CO-01 S Overhead Conductors & Accessories R3 -C(1).xlsm- sheet:TS-CO-01-S1
Page 1
Date: 11/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for Insulated AAAC Overhead Conductors
No
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
Bid Offer Requirement Bid Offer Requirement Bid Offer
Requirement
Bid
Offer
Insulated Overhead AAAC Conductors:

1
Manufacturer
Manufacturer's Code N
Type
Standard
Conductor Material
Conductor Code Name
IEC
60889 and 61089

and BS3242
60889 and 61089

and BS3242
60889 and 61089

and BS3242
60889 and 61089

and BS3242
60889 and 61089

and BS3242
AAAC
AAAC
AAAC
AAAC
AAAC
Ash
Conductor Characteristics
7.1
- Aluminium Area
mm2
25
50
100
150
200
7.2
N/mm
7/2.3
7/3.3
19/2.82
19/3.48
37/2.87
7.4
- Overall condutor geometric Area

- N and diameter of individual
wires
- Overall Diameter
mm
6.9
9.9
14.1
17.4
20.09
7.5
- Maximum DC resistance at 20C
ohm/km
1.1453
0.5498
0.2787
0.1831
0.1385
7.6
- Nominal breaking strength
kN
9.44
16.78
33.27
50.64
67.09
7.7
- Weight
kg/km
79.5
164
XLPE
XLPE
XLPE
XLPE
XLPE
>=2.55
7.3
Insuslation
8.1
- Material
8.2
- Thicknes
mm
>=2.55
>=2.55
>=2.55
>=2.55
8.3
- Density
g/cm
>=0.93
>=0.93
>=0.93
>=0.93
>=0.93
8.4
- Colour
Black or gray
Black or gray
Black or gray
Black or gray
Black or gray
0.5
8.5
- Meltfolw Index
Max
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
Maximum current rating
10
Temperature Range
-5 to +45
-5 to +45
-5 to +45
-5 to +45
-5 to +45
11
Humidity
70
70
70
70
70
12
Drum:
2000
2000
2000
1000
1000
13
- Maximum drum wound lengths
14
- Dimension (diameter x width)
mm mm
15
- Gross weight
kg
File:TS-CO-01 S Overhead Conductors & Accessories R3 -C(1).xlsm- sheet:TS-CO-01-S2
Page 2
Date: 11/4/2013,
LPA-GECE Techncial Schedule TS-CO-01-S3
EEPCo
Technical Schedule for AAAC Condctor Fittings & Miscellaneous

No
Item
1. Stranded Bare copper conductor
Unit
Requirement
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type designation
Standard
Overall diameter,
mm
7.5
Cross section,
mm
35
No of Strand
Diameter of strand,
mm
2.5
DC resistance at 200C,
ohm/km
0.5
10
Continuous current carrying capacity,
11
Weight,
12
13
IEC 228
230
kg/km
310
Modules of elasticity,
kpa
11x10 7
Rated tensile strength,
kN
8.7
14
Coefficient of linear expansion
,/0C
16.6x10 -6
15
Standard delivery length per reel,
16
Overall reel dimensions, m
16.1
Diameter
16.2
Width
17
Approximate gross weight of reel,
kg
18
Net weight of Copper/Coil
kg
No
Bid Offer
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
kN
> 4.5
N/mm2
>1
2. Galvanized steel wire 7 x 2.6 mm2

2.1
Manufacturer
2.2
Country of origin
2.3
Type designation
2.4
Standard
2.5
Diameter of wire
2.6
No of strands
2.7
Breaking load kN
40
2.8
Tensile Strength
1000
8
7 / 2.6mm
2.9
Thickness of Zinc coating
250g/m2
2.10
Length of stranded per coil
100 mt
2.11
Net weight per coil
No
Item
3. Aluminum Round Tie Wire for All
Aluminum Conductors
3.1
Manufacturer
3.2
Country of origin
3.3
Standard applied
3.4
Type designation
3.5
Material designation according to BS
3.6
Breaking load
3.7
Tensile Strength
3.8
Diameter
mm
3.9
Net weight per coil
kg
30
25
FIle:TS-CO-01 S Overhead Conductors & Accessories R3 -C(1).xlsm, Shet:TS-CO-01-S3
Page:3, Date: 11/4/2013
No
Item
4. Parallel Groove Clamps Al/Al 25160
mm2
4.1
Manufacturer
4.2
Country of origin
4.3
Type Designation
4.4
4.5
EEPCo
Unit
Requirement
Range of main conductor cross-section
mm2
Al 25200mm2
Range of branch conductor cross-section
mm2
Al 25200mm2
4.6
Range of main conductor diameter
mm
4.7
Range of branch conductor diameter
mm
4.8
Material of main conductor
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
4.9
Material of branch conductor
4.10
Material standard
4.11
Tensile strength of the body
4.12
Strength class of bolts and nuts
4.13
Thread size of bolts and nuts
4.14
Tightening torque of bolts
4.15
Thickness of zinc coating
4.16
Net weight per piece
4.17
Standard package size
No
Item
5. Cable Lugs 35, 75,120,185,300 mm2
diameter
5.1
Manufacturer
5.2
Country of origin
5.3
Type designation
5.4
Standard referred
5.5
Material
5.6
Material standard
5.7
Range of conductor cross- section, mm2
35,75,120,185,300
5.8
Diameter of the eye of the cable lug, mm
35,75,120,185,300
5.9
Tensile strength, N/mm2
5.10
Joints compound used
5.11
Thickness of zinc coating, mm
5.12
Net weight per piece, kg
No
Item
6.Parallel Groove Clamps Al 25200
mm2/Cu 10120 mm2
6.1
Manufacturer
6.2
Country of origin
6.3
Type Designation
6.4
mm2
Al 25200mm2
6.5
Range of branch conductor cross-section
mm2
Cu 10120 mm2
6.6
Range of main conductor diameter
mm
6.7
Range of branch conductor diameter
mm
6.8
6.9
Material of branch conductor
6.10
Material standard
6.11
6.12
Strength class of bolts and nuts
6.13
Thread size of bolts and nuts
6.14
N/mm2
Bid Offer
300
M10
mm
85
g
pcs
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
DIN48215
Tinned Brass
DIN48215
300
>10 (thin quoting)
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Aluminum Alloy
Copper
N/mm2
300
M10
Page:4, Date: 11/4/2013
No
Item
6.15
6.16
6.17
No
EEPCo
Unit
Requirement
mm
43
Bid Offer
g
Pcs.
Item
Unit
Requirement
mm2
Al 25100mm2
Bid Offer
7. Mid span joint for AAAC 95 mm2

7.1
Manufacturer
7.2
Country of origin
7.3
Type Designation
7.4
7.5
Aluminum Alloy
7.6
Material standard
7.7
N/mm2
300
7.8
Breaking load of joint (UTS)
KN
40
7.9
mm
7.10
Kg
7.11
Pcs.
0.178

8.1
Manufacturer
8.2
Country of origin
8.3
Type Designation
8.4
8.5
Al 2550mm2
8.6
Material standard
Aluminum Alloy
8.7
8.8
KN
25
8.9
mm
0.118
8.10
Kg
8.11
Pcs.
No
Item
N/mm2
300
Unit
Requirement
mm2
Al 25125mm2
Bid Offer

9.1
Manufacturer
9.2
Country of origin
9.3
Type Designation
9.4
9.5
9.6
Material standard
9.7
9.8
KN
9.9
mm
9.10
Kg
9.11
Pcs.
No
Item
Aluminum Alloy
N/mm2
Unit
0.118
Requirement
Bid Offer
10.Mid span joint for AAAC 150 mm2

10.1
Manufacturer
10.2
Country of origin
10.3
Type Designation
10.4
Page:5, Date: 11/4/2013
No
Item
EEPCo
Unit
Requirement
10.5
Al 25200mm2
10.6
Material standard
Aluminum Alloy
10.7
N/mm2
10.8
KN
10.9
mm
10.10
Kg
10.11
Pcs.
Bid Offer
0.118
11.Mid span joint for AAAC 200 mm2

10.1
Manufacturer
10.2
Country of origin
10.3
Type Designation
10.4
10.5
Al 25200mm2
10.6
Material standard
10.7
N/mm2
Aluminum Alloy
10.8
KN
10.9
mm
10.10
Kg
10.11
No
0.118
Pcs.
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
12. Strain Clamp

11.1
Manufacturer
11.2
Country of origin
11.3
Type Designation
11.4
Range of conductor diameter
11.5
Material
11.6
Material standard
11.7
Size
11.8
Minimum failing load
11.9
Strength class of bolts
11.10
N-m
11.11
Thickness of zinc coating,
mm
11.12
Net weight per piece,
11.13
No
mm
BS 3288,IEC 120
120
KN
70
M12
85
g
pcs
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
13 Socket Eye
12.1
Manufacturer
12.2
Country of origin
12.3
Type Designation
12.4
Material standard
12.5
Mechanical failing load
12.6
Mechanical routine test load
kN
70
12.7
Diameter of eye
kN
40
12.8
Size of coupling according to IEC 120
mm
17.5
12.9
mm
85
12.10
kg
12.11
No
Forged steel
BS 3288
pcs
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
14. Ball Eye
Page:6, Date: 11/4/2013
No
Item
EEPCo
Unit
Requirement
13.1
Manufacturer
13.2
Country of origin
13.3
Type Designation
13.4
Material standard
13.5
kN
70
13.6
Mechanical routine test load
kN
40
13.7
Diameter of eye
mm
13.8
Size of coupling according to IEC 120
mm
16
13.9
mm
85
13.10
kg
13.11
No
Item
15. Earth Rod and Clamp
14.1
Manufacturer
14.2
Country of origin
14.3
Type Designation
14.4
Standard referred
14.5
Material of rod and clamp
14.6
Standard Reference
14.7
Material Standard
14.8
Section profile
14.9
14.10
Bid Offer
Forged steel
pcs
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Galvanised steel
DIN 50975
DIN 50976
mm
50 x 50 x 3
Length of the rod
Net weight of rod and clamp per piece
Page:7, Date: 11/4/2013
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-CO-02
LV ABCables& Accessories
Rev -4-April 2013
REVISION AND CONTENTS
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
Jan 2011
First Issue
Rev1
Dec2012
Some text modified
Rev2
Feb2013
Spec fitted in specified template
Rev 3
20 April 2013
Tech. Spec title changed from Aerial Bundled Conductors to LV AB

Cables and Accessories and some details added.
Rev 4
30 April 2013
Messenger details changed
TS-CO-02 R4 LV AB cables & Accessories 2013-04-30.docx
Rev -4-April 2013
Page: i , 1-May-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
LV AB CABLES& ACCESSORIES
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT:
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
TYPE TESTS
ROUTINE TESTS
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
2
2
3
5.
DESIGN
5.1
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
GENERAL
ABC CONFIGURATIONS - SIZES
CONSTRUCTION OF CONDUCTORS
MESSENGER (NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR ) :
INSULATION
4
5
5
5
6
6.
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
ABC PHASE IDENTIFICATION

CABLE IDENTIFICATION
CABLE DRUMS AND PACKING
DRUM SIZES
CABLE DRUM LENGTH
DRUM MARKING
DRUM WARRANTEES
SHIPMENT
6
7
7
8
9
9
10
10
7.
8.
9.
10.
LV AB CABLE ACCESSORIES
PACKING AND MARKING
SCHEDULE FOR LV AB CABLES ANDACCESSORIES
10
16
16
17
10.1
10.2

17
18
TS-CO-02 R4 LV AB cables & Accessories 2013-04-30.docx
Rev -4-April 2013
Page: ii , 1-May-13
SECTION 1- SCOPE
EEPCO
LV AB CABLES& ACCESSORIES
1.
SCOPE
This specification covers the Design, Manufacture, Testing and delivery
requirements of Cross Linked Poly Ethylene insulated (XLPE) Aluminium Cables
twisted over a central bare Aluminium alloy messenger wire (along with associated
accessories) for use as LV overhead line.
ABC conductors shall be according to the French general standard NFC 33
2.

See Specification TS-GN-01 EEPCO System and Environmental data.
The Equipment/Material shall be used in installations at altitudes up to 3000M.
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
IEC 60071
Insulation co-ordination
IEC 60228
Conductors of insulated cables
IEC 60230
Impulse tests on cables and their accessories
IEC 60885
Electrical test methods for electric cables
IEC 60811
Overhead distribution cables of voltage 0.6/1kV
VDE 0276part
626
Overhead Distribution cables of Rated voltage 0.6/1kV

elaborated by European Committee for Electro Tech
Standardisation
NFC 33-040 1998
Suspension Equipments for Overhead distribution with

Bundle assembled cores, of rated voltage 0.6/1 kV
NFC 33-0411998
Anchoring devices for Overhead Distribution with bundle

assembled cores, of rated voltage 0.6/1 kV
NFC 33-0211998
Pre-insulated compression type connecting equipment for

Overhead Distributions and Services with bundle assembled
cores, of rated voltage 0,6/1 kV
NFC 33-020 1998
Insulation piercing connectors for overhead distributions and

services with bundle assembled cores, of rated voltage 0,6/1
kV.
NFC-004-1998
Connecting equipment for overhead distributions and services

of rated voltage 0,6/1 kV, with at least one insulated core
Electrical ageing test
NFC 330421998
Anchoring devices for overhead and underground services

with insulated cables, of rated voltage 0,6/1 kV.
LPA/GECE/TS-CO-02 R4 LV AB cables & Accessories 2013-04-30.docx
Rev -4-April 2013
Page: 1, 1-May-13
EEPCO
3.1
NFC 332091998
Bundle assembled cables for overhead systems of rated voltage

0.6/1 kV.
ASTM D 1603
Carbon Black content of Olefin materials
CONFLICT:
See spec TS-GN-02.
4.

See specTS- GN-02
4.1
TYPE TESTS
Type test includes all the items listed below and shall be performed on each rated
cross-sectional area per IEC. As long as design, material and manufacturing
methods are not changed so that the tested properties are unfavorably affected,
the test need not be renewed.
4.1.1
Tests on phase/street light conductor

(i)
Tensile test.
(ii)
Wrapping test.
(iii)
Resistance Test
4.1.2
Physical tests for Cross-link polyethylene insulation

(i)
Tensile strength and elongation at break
(ii)
Ageing in air oven
(iii)
Hot Set Test
(iv)
Shrinkage Test
(v)
Water Absorption (Gravimetric)
(vi)
Test for thickness of insulation
(vii)
Insulation resistance test
(viii)
High Voltage Test
4.1.3
Tests for messenger conductor

a)
Breaking Load Test ( To be made on the finished conductors)
b)
Elongation Test
c)
Resistance Test
4.2
ROUTINE TESTS
Sample test of a manufactured lot of cables is performed and includes all items as
follows:
4.2.1
Conductors Resistance
The resistance of the conductors is measured with DC voltage on a complete
cable. The value of resistance/length, converted into 20C with a correction
Rev -4-April 2013
Page: 2, 1-May-13
EEPCO
factor according to IEC 60228, must not exceed the values for Aluminium
conductors given in IEC 60228.
4.2.2
Check of Dimensions
The thickness of the conductor insulation is determined according to IEC
publication 60811. The prescribed thickness shall be kept within the tolerances
given in IEC publication 60502-1, clause 4.2 (c) and (d).
The diameter D of the core including insulation is measured and shall be within
the tolerance limits given.
4.2.3
Tensile Test
The test shall be performed according to IEC 60228.
4.2.4
Visual Inspection
A specimen of 0.5 m is selected and visually inspected. In all cores the conductor
insulation shall lie close to the conductor, but it shall be possible to remove it
without pieces of the insulation remaining on or between the strands of the
conductor.
4.2.5
Voltage test
The routine test includes voltage test (dry test) with AC voltage of 10 kV, 50 Hz,
which is applied between the earthen conductor in each cable core and an
electrode through which this core is passing. The electrode can consist of a closemeshed wire network, metal balls or a similar device which completely encloses
the core of ionized air. Each point of the surface of the core shall be in the
electric field at the electrode for at least 0,1s . Any break down shall not be
allowed.
4.3
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
All the tests indicated aboveshall be conducted.
4.3.1
Bending Test on complete cable:

The test shall be performed on a sample of complete cable. The sample shall be
bent around a test mandrel at room temperature for at least one complete turn. It
shall then be unwound and the process shall be repeated after turning the sample
around its axis 180o.The cycle of these operation shall then be repeated twice
more. The diameter of the mandrel shall be10 x (D + d ).
Where
D=actual diameter of the cable (i.e. the minimum circumscribing circle

diameter)
d = actual diameter of the conductor, mm.
No Cracks visible to the naked eye are allowed.

The results of bending tests shall be furnished along with the type test report.
4.3.2
AC Voltage Test
AC voltage test is performed as a wet test. Before the test, at least 10 m of cable
shall have been immersed for 24 h in water having a temperature of 20 C. The
Rev -4-April 2013
Page: 3, 1-May-13
EEPCO
SECTION 5- DESIGN
cable shall then withstand 4 kV, 50 Hz, for 4 h between the conductor and the
water.
4.3.3
Carbon Black Content of the Insulation

The carbon black content of the insulation which is determined according to
ASTM D 1603, shall be between 2 and 4 % by weight; the size of the particles
shall be less or equal to 20 Nm. The carbon black shall be well spread.
4.3.4
Ageing Test of Conductors Insulation

The test is performed according to IEC publication 60811.
The ageing is performed at a temperature of 150 2 C during 10 x 24 h.
a)
Requirements before ageing:
(i)
Tensile strength min. 14.4 N/mm.
(ii)
Elongation min. 200 %.
b)
Requirements after ageing:

The value of tensile strength and elongation shall not have changed by more than
25 % of the original value.
Tensile Test of Complete Conductor
For the test, a specimen of about 0,5 m is taken from the cable, the cores are
separated, the insulation is removed and the conductors are placed in the tensile
test machine. The distance between the clamping devices shall be at least 300 mm.
The clamping shall be such that the load is evenly distributed among the wires and
so that their strength is reduced as little as possible.
The requirements according to the relevantstandard shall be fulfilled. If a break
occurs in or just near the clamping devices and the breaking load requirement is
not fulfilled, the test shall be repeated.
Test requirements shall be according to the standards applied.
4.3.5
Tensile Test on Whole Cable

A specimen of the cable with a length of at least 12 m with insulation is braced so
that the distance between the clamping devices of the tensile test machine is at
least 10 m. The clamping devices shall be so designed that the insulation and the
conductor do not slip in relation to each other and so that the strength of the
cable is reduced as little as possible. The insulation shall remain on the conductors
where they enter the clamping devices. Test requirements shall be according to
the relevant standard. If a break occurs in or just near the clamping devices and
the breaking load is not fulfilled, the test shall be repeated.
5.
5.1
DESIGN
GENERAL
The first part of the designation refers to the number and size (nominal cross
sectional area) of the phase conductor and the last part to size of the messenger.
Rev -4-April 2013
Page: 4, 1-May-13
SECTION 5- DESIGN
EEPCO
The compressed, stranded conductors of aluminium, with a cross-section area up

to 50mm shall have at least 6 strands and a conductor with a cross sectional area
above 95mm shall have at least 15 strands.
The insulated messenger wire cable consists of three black, weather resistant,
cross-linked polyethylene insulated AAAC conductors twisted around an insulated
aluminium alloy.
The cable shall have a symmetrical right hand lay with a length of lay of about 40
times the diameter Do over the cores, laid up. In addition the pitch of laying shall
be such as to allow easy separation of conductors when making connection but
also maintain the bundle cohesion in line angles.
The cable shall be rated for 600/1000V.
The cores shall be of the same length and lie close to each other.
The properties of individual cables and the bundle (such as lay pitch, Electrical
and Mechanical properties) shall conform to relevant Clauses in NFC 33-209.
5.1
5.2
ABC CONFIGURATIONS - SIZES

Type
Phase conductor
(mm2)
Messenger
(mm2)
Street lighting
conductor (mm2)
3x95
70
16
3x95
70
3x50
35
3x50
35
3x35
25
3x25
25
3x120
95
16
16
CONSTRUCTION OF CONDUCTORS
All conductors shall be constructed to IEC 61089. The properties of the
Aluminium wires before stranding shall be as below.
Tensile strength not less than
90 N/mm2
Resistivity at 20C not exceeding
0.02845 ohm/mm/m
The messenger, which is also the neutral conductor, takes all of the mechanical
stresses.
5.3
MESSENGER (NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR ) :

The messenger shall be an All-Aluminium-Alloy conductor composed of wires
drawn from rod, which is manufactured in a continuous casting and rolling
procedure. The properties for the individual wires before stranding shall be
Rev -4-April 2013
Page: 5, 1-May-13
EEPCO

SHIPMENT
Tensile strength not less than
278 N/mm
Resistivity at 20C not exceeding
0.0328 ohm/mm/m
Density at 20C
2.7 kg/m
No joints are allowed in the messenger except those made on the base rod or wire
before final drawing. The messenger shall be round, stranded and compacted to
have smooth round surface.
The messenger takes all the mechanical stress and also serves as a neutral
conductor.
The other parameters are mentioned in the technical schedule TS-CO-02 S.
In addition to the above the following specification shall apply:
5.4
INSULATION
The Insulating Material shall be of black weather resistant cross linked
thermosetting polyethylene (XLPE) conforming to NFC 32-020 and shall be
suitable for climatic conditions of the country.
The mechanical strength and other mechanical properties such as tensile strength,
minimum elongation at break and physical/chemical properties shall conform to
the relevant Clauses in NFC 32-020.
The minimum tensile strength shall not be less than 14.5 Mpa and the minimum
elongation at break shall be 200%.
Adherence of the insulating sheath to the strain bearing neutral conductor shall be
adequate enough to prevent the slipping of the insulating sheath. The required
adherence shall be achieved by the use of paper material or other technique.
The insulating sheath shall be fully pressure extruded on the bare conductors of
the phases / street lamp / neutral messenger.
6.

6.1
ABC PHASE IDENTIFICATION

The phase identification marking shall either be Numerals or Ribs. When Ribs are
provided to identify cores, they shall be so made to enable workmen to identify
the cores easily.
In the case of ridges the three phase conductors shall be indelibly marked with
one, two or three, as appropriate, longitudinal ridges formed from the insulation
material. Approx. ridge dimensions are Width: 1.0 mm, Height0.4 mm, Distance
between ridges 2. mm. The ridge shall run along the length of the phases. The
neutral conductor shall have
In case of numbers the letter size shall be either relief or embossed.
Rev -4-April 2013
Page: 6, 1-May-13
EEPCO
6.2

SHIPMENT
Cable identification shall include embossing of the outer over sheath with the
following details:a)
EEPCO
b)
Manufacturers name
c)
Cable size
d)
Rated Voltage
e)
Year of Manufacturer
The letters and figures shall be raised and shall consist of upright block characters.
There should be at least one such marking set at every 2m to suit manufacturing
process.
6.2.2
Cable length marking

The messenger over sheath shall be sequentially marked at one (1) metre intervals
from zero up to the specified drum length, so as to indicate the amount of cable
remaining on the drum.
6.3

The LV cables shall be packed in non-returnable wooden drums suitable for
shipping, storage intropical climate, handling during stringing operations.
Cable drums shall conform toDIN 46391 or equivalent standards.
No drum shall contain more than one length of cable.
a)

drawings.
b)

Rev -4-April 2013
Page: 7, 1-May-13

SHIPMENT
EEPCO
The surface of the cable drum where cable is stored shall be free from sharp
objects such as nail tis or protruding heads, which might damage the conductor.
c)
Construction
d)
Spindle holes
e)
Cable ends
The inner as well as outer end of cable shall be brought out on the drum flange
and shall be clamped in such a manner to make the cable length marking easily
visible.
Each end of cable shall be durably sealed at both ends with hot melted paste and
provided with shrinkable end caps to prevent ingress of moisture.
f)
Cable wrapping with plastic

Before cable reeling, thick plastic or card board or double corrugated or thick
bituminized waterproof paper shall be secured to the drum barrel and inside of
flanges of the drum by means of a suitable adhesive. All materials shall be dry
before use. Medium grade Kraft paper shall be used in between the layers of the
conductor. After reeling the conductor the exposed surface of the outer layer of
g)
6.4
Lugging
The cables shall be lagged or covered with suitable material to provide

physical protection during transit and during storage and handling
operations.
Preferable mode of lugging shall be by wooden lagging on the

circumference with a thickness of at least 40 mm.
DRUM SIZES
Max. Diameter:
2280mm;
Max. Width:
1140mm;

Rev -4-April 2013
Page: 8, 1-May-13
EEPCO

SHIPMENT
CABLE DRUM LENGTH
6.5
Standard length shall be considered if not otherwise specified as:

For conductors less than 3x95mm
1000m
For conductors 3x95mm2 and above
500m
The length of cable for drum shall be as specified in the technical schedules.
A variation of + 5% of the cable drum length may be acceptable.
All cable lengths cut and used for various tests shall be to contractor's account
and shall not be included in cable length to be supplied.
conditions applicable for the standard lengths during the validity of the Contract.
6.6
DRUM MARKING
a)

b)
Drum Labels/Marking
indelibly branded on the cable drum for shipping purpose. In any case all
2) Contract Number,
Rev -4-April 2013
Page: 9, 1-May-13
EEPCO
6.7
SECTION 7- LV AB CABLE ACCESSORIES
DRUM WARRANTEES
The bidder/contractor would implicitly guarantee the soundness of the cable
cable/conductor to new drums provided free of charge by the contractor.
6.8
SHIPMENT
7.
LV AB CABLE ACCESSORIES
7.1.1
General
The design, performance and test requirements shall confirm to this specification
and the following standards. However in case of any conflict, the requirements of
this specification shall prevail.
Specification/Standard Number
NFC33-020
NFC33-209
NFC20-540
NFC33-004
NFC33-040
NFC33-041
Title
Insulation Piercing Connectors
LV Aerial Bunched Cables
Environment Testing for Outdoor
Electrical Ageing Test
Suspension Equipments
Anchoring Devices
The devices shall also be compatible with the cables of sizes & dimensions as
defined in the Cable Specifications for the cables with which they are intended to
be used.
a)Since ABC accessories are to be used with insulated neutral-cum-messenger,
their design should incorporate specific features to prevent damage to the
insulation when meeting the required electrical, mechanical & thermal
requirements.
b)All mechanical, electrical & thermal ratings should meet or exceed90%ofthe
corresponding ratings of the cable, or the values specified here in, whichever are
more stringent.
c) The accessories should provide Double Insulation so that a single point
failure of insulation will not result in the system tripping.
The ABC Accessories shall consist of the following:
Insulation Piercing
Connectors(IPC)
For making tap-off/branch connectors/service

connector to an ABC line
Rev -4-April 2013 Page: 10, 1-May-13
EEPCO
Anchoring Assembly(AA)
For fitting on to a pole for anchoring the end of a

length of ABC, or for a major change in direction.
Suspension
For supporting a length of ABC at an
clampassembly(including
intermediate pole in a length, with small angle of
angles up to 30 degrees)
deviation.
Large angle assembly (angles For supporting a length of ABC at an
over 30 degree)
intermediate pole in a length, with large angle of
deviation.
Service clamp(sc)
For anchoring insulated service lines (armoured or
un-armoured)
Transformer
For connection to the transformer bushing.
Junction Sleeves
For Phases, neutral messengers &Street lighting
conductor.
ABC Service Main
For Distribution of multiple no of service
Distribution Box
Connections from Main AB cable
Dead end clamp assembly
Dead-end clamps for use of dead-ending and
angular straining aerial bundled conductor cables ,
to hook on poles or walls.
Pre-insulated mid-span joints Tubular joints into which conductors inserted at
both ends shall be designed so that the
penetration of the conductors beyond their
meeting point shall be prevented
The following accessories are required for the installation of the LV aerial bundled
cables on poles and facades.
7.1.2
Insulation Piercing Connectors (IPC)

Insulation Piercing Connectors (IPC) are used for taking Tee/Tap-off/Service
connectors to an ABC/Bare Overhead Line.
Insulation Piercing Connectors are designed to make a connection between the
uncut main conductor and a branch cable conductor without having to strip either
cable to expose the conductor. Instead, the tightening action of the IPC will first
pierce the insulation, then make good electrical contact between the main end and
branch conductor while simultaneously insulating and sealing the connection.
a)
Constructional Features of IPC

The housing shall be made entirely of mechanical and weather resistant plastic
insulation material and no metallic part outside the housing is acceptable except
for the tightening bolt.
Any metallic part that is exposed must not be capable of carrying a potential
during or after connector installation.
Screws or nuts assigned for fitting with IPC (Insulating Piercing connector), must
be fitted with T o rque limiting shear heads to prevent o v e r tightening or under
tightening (min & max torque values to be specified by Manufacturer).
The IPC must perform piercing and connection on Main and Branch cable
simultaneously.
EEPCO
The IPCs shall be water proof and the water tightness shall be ensured by
appropriate elastomer materials and not by grease or paste alone.
Design of IPC should be such as to not cause damage to t h e insulation of
adjacent conductors due to vibration and relative movement during service.
The connector shall have a rigid removable end cap which can be slide fitted on
the main connector body on either right or left by the installer(depending on site
requirement)for sealing the cut end of the branch cable. Once the connector is
fitted, it should not be possible to remove the cap without removing the
connector.
7.1.3
Suspension Clamps
Suspension clamps for supporting on straight lines of aerial bundles conductor
cables and on angles up to 90.The main body of the suspension clamp shall be
manufactured from metal or a composite insulating material. Where the body of
the clamp is metal, a secondary insulation shall be provided between the cable and
metal component of the fitting. The design of the suspension clamp shall be such
that during the installation of the cable, the cable can be loosely supported
without damage to the insulation of the cable. The suspension clamps shall be
preferably of a type which can be installed without the use of tools. Where tools
shall be used, they are to be of a type and range normally used for overhead line
construction.
7.1.4
Anchoring clamp for Insulated Messenger

The clamps should be designed to Anchor LV AB cable with insulated
messenger. The clamp should consists of an Aluminium alloy corrosion resistant
castled body, bail of stainless steel and self adjusting plastic wedges which shall
anchor/hold the neutral messenger without damaging the insulation.
No losable part in the process of clamping arrangement.
The clamp should conform to the s tandard NFC 33041 and 33042. The clamp
body should be made of corrosion resistant Aluminium alloy, bail should be of
stainless steel and wedges should be weather and UV resistant polymer.
Ultimate tensile strength of the clamp should not be less than 15km for 50/70
sq.mm insulated messenger wire 10kN for25/35 sq.mm insulated messenger wire.
Slip load of the clamp should not be less than 3 kN for 50/70 sq.mm messenger
wire 2kN for 25/35sq.mm. messenger wire.
Anchoring assemblies are used to firmly attach the messenger of ABC to a
support and transmit the mechanical tension at the end of a run or to the
supporting structures at a major change in direction.
7.1.5
Each Anchoring Assembly shall include.

One number tension bracket.
One number wedge type tension clamp
Flexible Rope for fixing tension clamp to bracket.
Anchoring assemblies shall be supplied in sets to ensure compatibility of the
materials against corrosion or wear of moving parts.
EEPCO
7.1.6
Tension Bracket-AA
The tension bracket shall be made out of a single piece of Aluminium Alloy(AA)
Suitable for attachment to a pole either by 16mm galvanized steel bolt(s) or
two stainless Steel straps of 20x0.7mm.
The tension bracket should be designed to ensure the Flexible rope can not slip
out at any angle.
7.1.7
Flexible Rope of AA
The Anchoring assembly shall be supplied with a stainless steel flexible rope to
connect the Tension Clamp to the Tension Bracket. The rope should have
sufficient flexibility to ease the tensional movement of the ABC System.
The Rope should be pre-fitted with compression type end fittings to secure the
tension clamp.
A wear resistant moveable saddle should be un-loosably fitted on the Rope to
prevent abrasion at the point of fitting into the tension bracket.
The Rope should have sufficient mechanical strength to with stand the
mechanical test for the complete assembly tests in this specification.
Wedge Type Tension Clamp of AA
Wedge type clamps shall be used for clamping the messenger without damaging
the insulation.
The clamp shall be capable of clamping an uncut messenger so that it can
continue with out break to the connecting point or next span.
The clamp shall be fully insulating type of mechanical and weather resisting
thermoplastic.
No bolts or loose parts are allowed as part of the clamping system.
No tools shall be needed for fitting the messenger in to the clamp.
After fitting the insulated messenger in the clamp, load T start will be held for 1
minute & then load increased to T final at rate between 50007,500N/mtr. In
each case there shall be no breakdown of any part of clamp and slippage of
messenger in relation to the clamp.
7.1.8
Suspension clamp for insulated neutral messenger:

The clamp should be designed to hang LV-AB cable with insulated neutral
messengers. The neutral messengers should be fixed by an adjustable grip device.
A movable link should allow longitudinal and transversal movement of the clamp
body.
The clamp should conform to the standard NFC 33040 or equivalent standard, if
any.
The clamp and the link made of Polymer should provide an additional insulation
between the cable and the pole.
EEPCO
The clamps and movable links should be made of weather and UV resistant glass
fibre reinforced polymer.
Clamps should be fixed with pole by eyehook/bracket..Bracket should be made
of corrosion resistant aluminium alloy.
Ultimate tensile strength of the clamp should not be less than 15KN for 50/70
sq.mm insulated messenger wire 4.3kN for 25/35 sq.mm insulated messenger
wire.
Maximum allowable load of the clamp should not be less than 20kN for 50/70
sq.mm insulated messenger wire/15kN for 25/30 sq.mm insulated messenger
wire.
Suspension Assembly is used for supporting an ABC by installation on the
messengeratanintermediatepointofsupportsuchasapole.Itcanaccommodate
smallanglesofdeviationupto30O.
Each Suspension Assembly shall consist of,
One number Suspension Bracket.
One number moveable(articulated) connecting link.
One number Suspension Clamp.
Suspension Assemblies shall be supplied in sets to ensure compatibility of the

materials against corrosion or wear of rotating/moving parts.
7.1.9
Suspension Bracket of SA
The Suspension Bracket shall be made from single piece aluminium alloy suitable
for attachment to a pole by either.
16mm galvanized steel bolt or
Two stainless steel straps.
The Suspension Bracket shall be provided with an upper bulge to prevent the
clamp from turning over on the Bracket for more than 45O from the horizontal or
to within less than 60mm from the pole/fixing structure.
The Suspension Bracket should be so designed to ensure that the articulated link
can not slip out of it.
7.1.10
Movable (Articulated) Link of SA

Movable Links are used between the Suspension Bracket and Suspension Clamp
to allow a degree of movement and flexibility between the two.
Moveable Links should be made fully of insulating type of mechanical and
weather resistant thermoplastic. A metallic wear resistant ring should however be
fitted at point of contact between the Suspension Bracket and the movable link.
The Movable link should be unlosably fitted to the Bracket and the Clamp.
7.1.11
Suspension Clamp of SA
Suspension Clamps are used for locking the messenger of the ABC bundle
without damaging the insulation or allowing the messenger to become
dismounted from the fitting.
EEPCO
The Suspension Clamp shall accommodate messenger wires from 25 to 95sq.mm.

The Suspension Clamp shall be made fully of insulating type of mechanically
strong and weather resistant plastic.
Bolts should not be used for clamping/locking the messenger in the Clamp.
There shall be no losable parts in the Suspension clamp.
The Suspension Clamp should be unlosably fitted to the rest of the Suspension
Assembly.
7.1.12
Service clamp
The clamps should be designed to anchor insulated service lines(armoured or unarmoured) with 2/4 conductors.
The clamps should be made of weather and UV resistant polymer.
The clamp should conform to the standard NFC 33042 or equivalent standard , if
any. No losable Breaking Load of the clamp should not be less than 3KN.
7.1.13
Transformer connection
In the case where AB cables are connected directly to the transformers the
connection to the transformer should be made with Pre-Insulated lugs for phase
and street lighting conductors and with an Aluminium Lug for neutral Messenger
The Barrel of the lug normally insulated with an Anti-UV black thermoplastic
tube sealed with a flexible ring. Die reference, size and strip length are to be
indicated on the plastic.
Sizes covered 16-70 & up to 95mm2Aluminium XLPE insulated cable. Reference
standard NFC 33021or equivalent standard, if any.
7.1.14
Junction sleeves
The sleeves should be Pre-insulated for phases, neutral messengers and street
lighting conductors.
Sleeve should be made of Aluminium, insulated with an Anti-UV black thermo
plastic tube hermetically sealed two ends with 2 flexible rings.
Die reference, size and strip length are indicated on the sleeve itself.
Sizes needed: To suit all the sizes being procured.
Reference standard: NFC33021orequivalent standard, if any.
Design as per furnished drawing.
7.1.15
Eye hooks
Eye hooks should be designed as to hold suspension clamps and Dead end
clamps and to be installed with the pole clamp.
Eye hooks should be made of forged Galvanised steel.
The clamps corrosion resistance should conform to the standards.
EEPCO
SECTION 8- PACKING AND MARKING
Bolts and nuts should be made of hot dip Galvanised steel according to VDE
0210 and VDE 0212.
Ultimate Tensile strength (UTs)of the clamp should be 20KN.
7.1.16
Dead-end clamps
The design of the clamp shall provide additional insulation between the insulated
conductor and all metallic pats of the clamp. The clamp portion of the dead-end
clamp shall, when assembled onto the appropriate cable size, sustain at least 95%
of the breaking load of the cable. The dead end clamps shall be preferably
designed to allow the cable to enter the fitting with a minimum separation of the
cable cores.
8.
PACKING AND MARKING
8.1.1
Packing
The accessories shall be packed in individual sealed clear plastic bags. The bags
shall be adequately durable and should not be spoiled prior to the time of use of
the accessories. The bags shall be further packaged in wood or other similarly
strong containers in quantities of approximately 100 fittings of identical
description.
8.1.2
Marking
The marking on the packing shall be
9.
a)
Manufacturers Name
b)
Trade Mark, if any,
c)
Item Number or identification number
d)
Size of the item
e)
Voltage Grade
f)
Gross mass of the packing.

EEPCO
10.
SECTION 10- SCHEDULE FOR LV AB CABLES

ANDACCESSORIES
SCHEDULE FOR LV AB CABLES

ANDACCESSORIES
10.1

Schedule RefTS-CO-02-NC1
equipments life, operating characteristics and system performance. Eachnon
Specification
Clause
EEPCO
10.2
SECTION 10- SCHEDULE FOR LV AB CABLES

ANDACCESSORIES

Specification
Clause
LPA-GECE
No
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for LV AB Cables
Unit
Requirement
Item
General Requirements
Bid Offer
Requirement
16mm
conductor
Bid Offer
Requirement
25mm
conductor
35mm
conductor
Manufacturer
Manufacturer's Code
Type
Standard
IEC
60502
60502
60502
Rated voltage (Phase/Line)
kV
0.6 / 1
0.6 / 1
0.6 / 1
Maximum rated voltage
kV
0.44
0.44
0.44
One minute voltage test
kV
Impulse withstand voltage 1.2 x 50 s
kV
20
20
20
Cross section
mm
16
25
35
10
Current rating at 30C air temp
11
Rated DC resistance at 20C
/km
1.91
1.2
0.868
12
Diameter over bare conductor/messenger
mm
4.4
5.8
6.8
13
Inductive reactance
/km
14
Average insulatation thickness
mm
1.2
1.2
1.4
15
Nominal diameter over insulation
mm
6.8
8.2
9.6
16
Minimum tensile strength
kN
17
Length of cable per drum
km
18
Gross weight of Cable per drum
kg
19
Net weight of cable per drum
kg
File:TS-CO-02-S R4 LV AB cables & Accessories 2013-04-30.xlsm- sheet:TS-CO-02-S1
Bid Offer
Page 1
Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
EEPCo

Unit
Requirement
Item
Bid Offer
Requirement
Requirement
95mm
conductor
120mm
conductor
50mm
conductor
Manufacturer
Manufacturer's Code
Type
Standard
IEC
60502
60502
60502
kV
0.6 / 1
0.6 / 1
0.6 / 1
kV
0.44
0.44
0.44
kV
kV
20
20
20
Cross section
mm
50
95
120
10
11
/km
0.641
0.32
0.253
12
mm
9.6
12.7
13
Inductive reactance
/km
14
mm
1.4
1.4
1.4
15
mm
10.8
12.4
15.5
16
kN
17
km
18
kg
19
kg
Bid Offer
1.4
Page 2
Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
EEPCo

Unit
Requirement
Item
Bid Offer
Requirement
25mm
messenger
Bid Offer
Requirement
35mm
messenger
Bid Offer
Requirement
70mm
messenger
95mm
messenger
Manufacturer
Manufacturer's Code
Type
Standard
IEC
60502
60502
60502
60502
kV
0.6 / 1
0.6 / 1
0.6 / 1
0.6 / 1
kV
0.44
0.44
0.44
0.44
kV
kV
20
20
20
20
Cross section
mm
25
35
70
95
10
11
/km
1.38
0.986
0.493
0.363
12
mm
5.8
6.8
9.6
11.5
13
Inductive reactance
/km
1.4
1.4
1.4
14
mm
1.2
1.4
1.4
1.4
15
mm
8.2
9.6
12.4
14.3
16
kN
7.4
10.3
20.6
27.9
17
km
18
kg
19
kg
Bid Offer
Page 3
Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for LV AB Cable Accessories
No
Item
(I)Suspension Clamp,ABC
Unit
1
2
3
4
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Type designation
Standard referred
5
6
Material
Material standard
Range of conductor cross-section
mm
mm
9
10
11
Tensile strength
kN
mm
kg
Requirement
Bid Offer
Wedge type
IEC
Aluminum alloy
IEC60826,
IEC5041
25 - 95
7-14
15
140
(II) Dead End Clamp, ABC

1
2
3
4
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Type designation
Standard referred
5
6
Material
Material standard
8
9
10
11

Tensile strength
mm
mm
kN
mm
kg
IEC 61284, IEC

60826
Aluminum alloy
IEC 61284, IEC
60826
25 95
41104
>15
140
(III) Insulation Piercing Clamps, Al/Cu

1
2
3
4
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Type designation
Material
5
6
Material standard
7
8
9
10
Range of conductor diameter, Al/Cu

Tensile strength
mm2
mm
kN
m
Kg
Aluminum Alloy
and insulating
material
BS
1650/2535
5
85
Page 4
Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
No
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
(IV)Insulation Piercing Clamps, Al/Al

1
2
3
4
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Type designation
Material
5
6
Material standard
7
8
9
10
Range of conductor diameter, Al/Al

Tensile strength
mm
mm
kN
m
kg
Aluminum Alloy
and insulating
material
BS
1650/1650
5
43
(V) Suspension Hook, ABC, Normal Type I

1
2
Manufacturer
Country of origin
3
4
5
Manufacturing capacity per month

Standard applied
Yield strength of hook (N/mm2)
Complete dimension of hook
a. Length
b. Width
c. Rod diameter
d. Thread nominal diameter
e. Thread minor diameter
f. Washer outside and inside diameter
7
8
9
10
VI
1
2
3
4
5
6
N/mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
g. Washer thickness
mm
h. Length of thread
i. Thread length
mm
Galvanization
Thickness of galvanization
Standard packing size, sacks per piece
mm
kg
346
16
16
14
As per BS
standard
As per BS
standard
2
50
Hot-dip
galvanized
85
Suspension Hook, ABC Type II, (for LV under MV )

Manufacturer
Country of origin
Standard applied
Yield strength of hook
a. Length
b. Width
N/mm
mm
mm
400
16
Page 5
Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
Item
c.
d.
e.
f.
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
Rod diameter
Thread nominal diameter
Thread minor diameter
Washer outside and inside diameter
mm
h. Length of thread
i. Thread length
mm
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Standard applied
a. Length
b. Width
c. Rod diameter
Bid Offer
As per BS
standard
As per BS
standard
2
50
Hot-dip
galvanized
85
N/mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
g. Washer thickness
mm
h. Length of thread
i. Thread length
mm
Galvanization
8
9
10
1
2
3
mm
kg
Requirement
16
14
Dead End Hook, ABC Normal, Type I
VIII
Unit
mm
mm
mm
mm
g. Washer thickness
Galvanization
VII
EEPCo
mm
kg
352
16
16
14
As per BS
standard
As per BS
standard
2
50
Hot-dip
galvanized
85
Dead End Hook, ABC, Type II, (for LV under MV )

Manufacturer
Country of origin
Page 6
Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
4
5
6
Item
Standard applied
a. Length
b. Width
c. Rod diameter
Unit
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
h. Length of thread
i. Thread length
mm
Galvanization
8
9
10
IX
Requirement
Bid Offer
N/mm
g. Washer thickness
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
EEPCo
mm
kg
400
16
16
14
As per BS
standard
As per BS
standard
2
50
Hot-dip
galvanized
85
Dead end tube
Type designation
Material
Dimension ( thickness and length)
Tensile strength
No of dead end tube per packet
Net weight per packet , g
Conductor crossection in mm2
X
mm
N/mm
gms
mm
PVC
3 and 30
> 40
50
50
Nylon tie
No
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Type designation
Material
Dimension ( thickness, width, length)
Tensile strength
No of tie wire per packet
Net weight per packet ,
Unit
mm
N/mm
Specification
Requirement
Bid Offer
Nylon
1.7,10,400
100
100
gms
Page 7
Date: 30/04/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-CO-03
MV UG Cables and Accessories
Rev-3- April 2013
MV UG CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
12 Dec 2012
Some text modified
Rev1
Feb 2013
Spec fitted in the specified template
Rev 2
Mar 2013
Insulation parameters modified
Rev 3
April 2013
Single core cables included
TS-CO-03 R3a MV UG Cables and accessories 2013-04-28Rev-3- April 2013
Page: i , 27-Jun-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
GENERAL
TYPE TESTS
ROUTINE AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS
AFTER INSTALLATION CABLE TESTS
2
2
2
3
5.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
CONDUCTORS
CONDUCTOR SCREEN
INSULATION
CORE IDENTIFICATION
INSULATION SCREEN
WATER PROOFING
OUTER SHEATH
LAYING UP
INSTALLATION DATA
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
6.
CABLE CHARACTERISTICS
6.1
6.2
6.3
VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS
SIZES OF UG CABLES REQUIRED
CURRENT CARRYING CAPACITYCONDITIONS
4
5
5
7.
MARKING, PACKING, &SHIPMENT
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
DRUM SIZES
CABLE DRUM LENGTH
DRUM MARKING
DRUM WARRANTEES
SHIPMENT
5
6
7
7
7
8
8
8.
9.

MV TERMINATING KITS AND JOINTING KITS
8
9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
GENERAL
TERMINATION AND JOINTING MATERIALS
MV TERMINATION KITS FOR OVERHEAD LINES
MV TERMINATION KITS TO GROUND MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR
Page: ii , 27-Jun-13
9
9
10
10
EEPCO
9.5
9.6
MV THROUGH JOINT KITS

TOOLS
10
10
10.
PACKING AND MARKING
11
10.1
10.2
PACKING
MARKING
11
11
11.
SCHEDULES
12
11.1
11.2

12
13
Page: iii , 27-Jun-13
SECTION 1- SCOPE
SPECIFICATION MV UG
CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
EEPCO

1.
SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing and delivery of medium
voltage (33 and 15kV) , three-core and single core XLPE insulated underground
cable having stranded Copper or Aluminium conductors, copper wire screen and
extruded PVC or PE over sheath and accessories.
The cable for the 15kV system shall be a standard 24kV cable with accessories( at
Mean Sea Level - MSL). This will cater for installations at altitudes up to 3000M.
The cable for the 33kV system shall be 36kV maximum equipment voltage. All
the accessories for the 33kV cable must be for an altitude of 3000M. This means
that all accessories such as terminations shall be effectively for a 45 kV system.
2.

See Specification TS-GN-01 EEPCO System and Environmental Data.
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The cables and accessories supplied under this Section of the Contract shall
conform to the latest edition of the appropriate IEC standards or other
recognized international standards. In particular:
IEC60060
IEC60071
BS 7870-4.10
IEC60228
IEC60229
IEC60230
IEC60502
IEC60811
IEC60885
ASTM D2303
DIN/VDE0273
DIN 46391
3.1
High voltage test techniques

33kV stranded power cables
Tests on cable oversheaths
Impulse tests on cables and accessories
Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories
for rated voltages from 1 kV up to 30 kV
Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials
of electric cables and optional cables
Power cable accessories with rated voltages up to 30 kV
Inclined plane non-tracking test method.
Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Cables.
Cable Delivery Drums
CONFLICT
See specification TS-GN-02 General Contractual obligations.
Page: 1, 27-Jun-13
SPECIFICATION MV UG
EEPCO
4.
4.1
GENERAL
Please see Spec. TS-GN-02 General Contractual obligations.
4.2
TYPE TESTS
The following type tests as per the relevant standard shall be conducted on cables
of identical design to prove that one cable of each class satisfies all the design
requirements set out in this specification.
4.2.1
For Cable
1) Partial discharge test,
2) Bending test, plus partial discharge test,
3) Dielectric power factor as function of voltage and capacitance measurement, and
as a function of temperature,
4) Heating cycle test plus partial discharge test,
5) Impulse withstand test, followed by power frequency voltage test,
6) High voltage ac test,
7) Non-electrical tests as stated in IEC
The following additional type tests shall be carried out.
8) Extruded Insulation Shielding Test per AEIC CS-5.
9) Insulation Shield Stripping Test per AEIC CS-5.
4.2.2
For Accessories
(i)
AC voltage withstand test
(ii)
Loading cycle tests
(iii)
Partial discharge test
(iv)
Impulse voltage withstand test
(v)
Thermal short circuit test
(vi)
DC voltage withstand test
(vii)
Humidity test (only for terminations)
(viii)
4.3
Non-tracking tests.
ROUTINE AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS

During the course of fabrications tests shall be made on samples from each 100
km of conductor to determine weight, ultimate strength and dc resistance. All
factory tests, type tests and sample tests shall be performed in accordance with
IEC 1089, clause 6.
The tests will be divided into the following categories and conducted as per the
relevant standard.
Page: 2, 27-Jun-13
SPECIFICATION MV UG
SECTION 5- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
EEPCO
4.4
Check for compliance with specifications herein and with the scheduled
quantities.
Conductor electrical resistance measurements
Partial discharge test, (MV CABLES ONLY)
High-voltage test

The Contractor shall carry out an insulation test of the installed cable and its
accessories before energizing the cable. For MV cables, resistance and VLF tests
shall be carried out.
5.
Three-core 24kV, 36kV, single core 24kV copper conductor, Three core 24kV
aluminium , cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated, screened, PVC sheathed
underground cable shall be supplied for use in 15kV and 33kV distribution
circuits.
5.1
CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
The cable shall comprise three core circular stranded copper conductors, each
with extruded semi-conducting shielding, cross-linked polyethylene insulation
semi-conductor shielding, hygroscopic powder waterproofing and copper tape
screen. The three cores shall be laid up to form a circular cross-section using PVC
fillers and bound overall with polyester tapes. The cables shall be bedded with
extruded PVC, and sheathed overall with black PVC.
5.2
CONDUCTORS
The conductor shall be a circular compacted conductor of stranded plain annealed
copper or aluminium of cross-section as required for cable class 2 conductors in
accordance with IEC 60228.
5.3
CONDUCTOR SCREEN
The conductor screening shall be proposed by the manufacturer. The screen may
consist of a layer of at least 0.5mm thick extruded semi-conductive compound
bonded to the XLPE insulation.
5.4
INSULATION
The insulation shall consist of high quality extruded cross-linked polyethylene
(XLPE) of suitable thickness for a voltage rating of 20/36 kV (Uo/U) for 33kV
system and 24kV for 15 kV system at 50 Hz.
5.5
CORE IDENTIFICATION
a)
The cores shall be identified by the number 1, 2 and 3 printed on the outer
extruded semi-conductor.
The insulation screen shall be a semi-conductive polymer layer. This layer is
covered by a bedding of conductive swelling tape to ensure longitudinal water
tightness.
Page: 3, 27-Jun-13
SPECIFICATION MV UG
SECTION 6- CABLE CHARACTERISTICS
EEPCO
b)
5.6
The earthing screen shall be copper wires with an open pattern counter wound
copper strip.
INSULATION SCREEN
The insulation screen shall be a semi conductive polymer layer.
5.7
WATER PROOFING
A layer shall be included to prevent longitudinal and transversal water
ingresstransversally and longitudinally watertight design. With this option, the space
between the earthing screen wires is filled with a semi-conductive rubber based
filling sheath. An aluminium foil and a PE sheath are sandwiched on top of the
filling sheath, with a copper wire for equi-potential bonding to prevent any
potential difference between copper screen and aluminium foil.
5.8
OUTER SHEATH
The over sheath shall consist of an extruded layer of black PVC or PE complying
with the requirements of compound ST2 type specified in IEC 502. The over
sheath shall be spark tested in accordance with IEC 229. The outer sheath shall be
3.5 mm thick black extruded PVC, containing a termite repellent additive.
5.9
LAYING UP
The screened conductors of the three cores shall be laid up together with PVC
fillers to form a circular cross-section and bound overall with two polyester tapes.
5.10
INSTALLATION DATA
Core screen will be earthed at both ends and cables will be directly buried
underground. Depth of laying is 0.9m for 15 kV cables and 1.1m for 33 kV cables
Short lengths will be installed in air, pipes and ducts.
In addition the Bidder shall advise rating/derating factors for variations in the
above conditions as well for multiple circuits.
6.
CABLE CHARACTERISTICS
6.1
VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS
The cable shall fulfil at least the following conditions:
33kV
15kV
Nominal voltage Uo/U.
33 kV
15 kV
Highest voltage for the cable
36 kV
24 kV
Impulse withstand level.
250kV
125 kV
Power frequency withstands level
95kV
50kV
System frequency
50 Hz
50 Hz
Page: 4, 27-Jun-13
SECTION 7- MARKING, PACKING,

&SHIPMENT
SPECIFICATION MV UG
EEPCO
6.2
SIZES OF UG CABLES REQUIRED

Voltage rating
Cross sectional area.
33kV
95mm,185mm and 300mm Copper cables
15kV
95mm, 185mm and 300mm Copper cables

and 240mm, Aluminium Cables
6.3
CURRENT CARRYING CAPACITYCONDITIONS

The cables may be laid directly in the soil, or run in air or ducts, with air and
ground temperatures as prevailing in Ethiopia.
The current capacity shall be stated by the bidder for the following defined
conditions:
7.
Nominal ground temperature

Maximum conductor temperature
Thermal resistivity of soil
Depth of burial
Maximum ambient air temperature
30 C
90 C
1.2 C m/W
0.8 m
45oC
Minimum ambient air temperature
-5oC
Average ambient air temperature.
25 oC
Minimum soil temperature
10 oC
MARKING, PACKING, &SHIPMENT

In addition to the clause on packing etc. given in the Spec. No.TS-GN-02, the
7.1
Cable identification shall include embossing of the PVC over sheath with the
EEPCO
b)
Manufacturers name
c)
Cable size
d)
Rated Voltage
e)
Year of Manufacture
process.
Page: 5, 27-Jun-13
SPECIFICATION MV UG
EEPCO
7.1.2

&SHIPMENT

Each cable over sheath shall be sequentially marked at one (1) metre intervals
7.2

The MV cables shall be packed in non-returnable wooden drums suitable for
Cable drums shall conform to DIN 46391 or equivalent standards.
a)

drawings.
b)

c)
Construction
d)
Spindle holes
e)
Cable ends
Page: 6, 27-Jun-13

&SHIPMENT
SPECIFICATION MV UG
EEPCO
visible.
f)

g)
Lugging
The cables shall be lagged or covered with suitable material to provide physical
protection during transit and during storage and handling operations.
Preferable mode of lugging shall be by wooden lagging on the circumference with
a thickness of at least 40 mm.
7.3
DRUM SIZES
Max. Diameter:
2280mm;
Max. Width:
1140mm;

CABLE DRUM LENGTH
7.4

length of cable for drum shall be as specified in the technical schedules.
7.5
DRUM MARKING
a)
Page: 7, 27-Jun-13
SPECIFICATION MV UG
EEPCO
b)
Drum Labels/Marking
branding shall be indeliblymarked to indicate the following:
2) Contract Number,
7.6
DRUM WARRANTEES
7.7
SHIPMENT
8.

Page: 8, 27-Jun-13
SPECIFICATION MV UG
EEPCO
SECTION 9- MV TERMINATING KITS AND

JOINTING KITS
9.
MV TERMINATING KITS AND JOINTING KITS
9.1
GENERAL
All high voltage terminations and joints shall be cold-applied elastomeric type.
They shall be factory engineered kits containing all the necessary components to
reinstate the cable insulation, metallic shielding of each core, together with the
reinstatement of the sheath, equivalent to the cable being terminated.
The Bidder shall submit at bidding and supply for the contract complete
illustrated instructions describing the methods for terminating or jointing the
cable.
Each terminating or jointing kit shall be in a separate package and a list of
materials indicating quantities and weights in the kit, and an illustrated instruction
sheet shall be included in the package. The Kits shall contain sufficient cleaning
solvents and cleaning cloths for the proper making of the joint or termination.
Voltage stress relief shall be provided and this shall be inherent in the heat
recoverable polymeric material.
The termination or joint shall be capable of tolerating any variances in the
manufactured dimensions of the cable such as oval, out of round, sectored or
oversize cable cores. The termination shall be capable of immediate energisation
once all components have been installed. The terminating or jointing materials
shall not be subject to storage limitations such as controlled temperature or
humidity restrictions, nor have shelf life limitations.
9.2
TERMINATION AND JOINTING MATERIALS

Termination and jointing materials for MV power cables shall provide for high
permittivity electrical stress control, non-tracking exterior surfaces and complete
environmental sealing. Electrical stresses shall be controlled by a high permittivity,
high resistivity, cold-applied elastomeric tubing. Cold-applied elastomeric
materials and terminations shall comply with requirements of IEC 60502, IEC
60446 Appendix C, IEC 60060 sub-clause 11.3.3, IEC 60071, IEC 60507 Section
3, and VDE 0278.
The materials and the completed terminations and joints shall be for the
appropriate type of service, size and voltage and shall include ferrules, lugsand
other materials necessary for the terminating and jointing of the conductor and
clamps, braid, etc. necessary for the terminating and jointing of screen and sheath
for earth continuity. All cold shrinkable polymeric tubing and pre-moulded
materials shall be ultra violet stable, non-tracking (per ASTM 02303) and suitable
for operation in the presence of severe external contamination and environmental
pollution.
Three-core cable terminations shall use a moulded cable breakout to provide
mechanical stress relief and sealing.
Page: 9, 27-Jun-13
SPECIFICATION MV UG
EEPCO
SECTION 9- MV TERMINATING KITS AND

JOINTING KITS
The entire termination or joint shall be environmentally sealed and capable of

preventing the ingress of external moisture and contamination.
Indoor terminations and terminations in a cable box shall fully insulate all bare
metal adjacent to the termination.
9.3
MV TERMINATION KITS FOR OVERHEAD LINES

24kV and 45kV termination kits shall be supplied for terminating the XLPE cable
specified onto overhead outdoor line terminations. This kit shall include a
galvanized steel mounting arrangement that will enable the joint to be attached to
concrete distribution poles.
The termination kits shall comprise:
a)
Compression lugs
b)
Sealant tape
c)
Non-tracking lug sealing sleeve
d)
Non-tracking weather resistant exterior
e)
Stress control equipment
f)
Non-tracking three-way shed
g)
Non-tracking cable breakout
h)
Copper braid for earthing onto screen
i)
Jointing instructions
All other items necessary to complete the kit
9.4
MV TERMINATION KITS TO GROUND MOUNTED

SWITCHGEAR
24kV and 45kV termination kits with all accessories required for connection of
MV XLPE 3 core and single core cables as mentioned above to the switchgear/
Ring Main Units and Compact Substations shall also be supplied.The terminations
shall be of prefabricated type and they shall be easy to install.
9.5
MV THROUGH JOINT KITS

The 24kV and 45kV underground straight through joint assemblies shall be
supplied for use with XLPE cable specified above.The jointing shall be suitable
for XLPE cables specified aboveand meet the requirements of the single core and
three corecables.
The terminations shall be of prefabricated type and they shall be easy to install.
Kits shall be provided for 3 core and single core cables.
9.6
TOOLS
The following tools of well-proven design and performance shall be supplied for
cable laying, terminating and jointing.
Page: 10, 27-Jun-13
SPECIFICATION MV UG
SECTION 10- PACKING AND MARKING
EEPCO
Foot operated hydraulic 12 tone compressor complete with dies to fit all
compression terminals and connectors as supplied with the terminating kits. One
tool shall be suitable for all die sizes, and shall be complete with:
a)
Recommended kit of spares, each kit to include at least three sets of all seals and
other items required during normal servicing.
b)
Pressure test gauge including test blank dies.
c)
Complete set of repair and service tools.
d)
Maintenance and operating instructions.
e)
Service and repair manual.
f)
Strong metal box for protection of hydraulic compressor unit when not in use.
g)
Hand operated hydraulic compression tool.
h)
Shear type cable cutters for cutting maximum cable size provided.
i)
Pencilling tool for XLPE insulation for shaping all cables specified.
j)
Cable pulling sock -flexible steel wire woven, completed with swivel, for pulling
all cables specified.
k)
Cable rollers in-line suitable for cables with maximum diameter of 3x300 mm.
10.
PACKING AND MARKING
10.1
PACKING
The cable termination kits and jointing kits shall be packed in individual sealed
clear plastic bags. The bags shall be adequately durable and should not be spoiled
prior to the time of use of the accessories. The bags shall be further packaged in
cardboard or similar containers in reasonable quantities.
10.2
MARKING
The marking on the packing shall be,
a)Manufacturers Name,
b)Trade Mark, if any,
c)ItemNumber or identification number,
d)Size of the item,
e)Voltage Grade,
f)Gross mass of the packing.
Page: 11, 27-Jun-13
SPECIFICATION MV UG
EEPCO
11.
SCHEDULES
Please see separate technical schedule, TS-CO-03 S for MV cables and
accessories.
11.1

Schedule Ref MV UG Cables and Accessories-NC1
Specification
Clause
Page: 12, 27-Jun-13
SPECIFICATION MV UG
EEPCO
11.2

Item Reference MV UG Cables and Accessories-TC1
Specification
Clause
Page: 13, 27-Jun-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for 36kV Underground Copper Cables
No
Item
Unit
I. General
1
2
3
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Type designation
Standard
Voltage between phases of three phase circuit
6
7
8
8.1
8.2
8.3
9
Number of cores
Normal cross sectional area of conductor,
Conductor details
material
design
overall diameter,
Conductor screen
9.1
Material
8.2
11
thickness, mm
Maximum dielectric stress at conductor
screen (assumed smooth)
Insulation
11.2
Material
10
11.2
12
12.1
12.2
minimum radial thickness of insulation

between conductor screen & core screen
Core screen
material
thickness
Requireme
nt
3cx95mm
Bid Offer
Requireme
nt
3cx185mm
UG
IEC 60502/
BS662
UG
IEC 60502/
BS662
kV
36
mm
Bid Offer
Requireme
nt
3cx300mm
Bid Offer
Requireme
nt
1cx300mm
UG
UG
BS 7870
BS 7870
36
36
36
Three
95
Three
185
Three
300
One
300
Copper
Copper
Copper
Copper
Extruded
XLPE semi
conductive
Extruded
XLPE semi
conductive
Extruded
XLPE semi
conductive
Extruded
XLPE semi
conductive
Extruded
XLPE semi
conductive
Extruded
XLPE semi
conductive
Extruded
XLPE semi
conductive
Extruded
XLPE semi
conductive
Copper wire
Copper wire
Copper wire
Copper wire
Bid Offer
mm
kV/cm
mm
mm
File:TS-CO-03-S R3 MV UG Cables and accessories 2013-04-28.xlsm- sheet:TS-CO-03-S1
Page 1
Date: 06/05/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
Item
Unit
I. General
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
24.1
24.2
24.3
EEPCo
Maximum DC resistance of conductor of

cable at 20C
Maximum AC resistance of conductor of
cable at 90C,
Equivalent star reactanceof three phase of
three phase of circuit of 50Hz ohm/km
Maximum DC resistance of metallic screen of
cable at 20C, ohm/km
Maximum electric capacitance per core of
cable
Maximum charging current per conductor of
cable at nominal voltage,
Current carrying capacity in soil at 20C
Maximum value of tangent of dielectric loss
angle of cable at normal frequency at a
Conductor short circuit current carrying
capacity (for 1 second) with cable loaded with
nominal current before short circuit and final
conductor temperature of 25C
Metallic sheath short circuit current carrying
capacity (for 1 second) with cable loaded with
nominal current before short circuit and final
sheath temperature of 25C
Nominal overall diameter of complete cable
Minimum radius of bending in which cable
can be
laid direct in ground or in air,
in ducts,
with cable placed in position adjacent to
joints and terminations,
Requireme
nt
3cx95mm
Bid Offer
Requireme
nt
3cx185mm
Bid Offer
Requireme
nt
3cx300mm
Bid Offer
Requireme
nt
1cx300mm
ohm/m
193
99.1
60.1
60.1
ohm/m
248
128
80
80
13.3
26.6
43.8
43.8
Bid Offer
ohm/m
ohm/m
nF/km
mA/m
A
kA
kA
mm
m
m
m
Page 2
Date: 06/05/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for 24kV Underground Copper Cables
No
Item
I. General
1
2
3
4
Unit Requirement Bid Offer Requirement Bid Offer Requirement Bid Offer Requirement Bid Offer Requiremen Bid Offer
t
three core
three core
three core
single core
three core
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Type designation
Standard
UG
IEC 60502/
BS662
Voltage between phases of three phase
24
Number of cores
Three
Normal cross sectional area of conductor, mm 95
UG
IEC 60502/
BS662
24
Three
185
UG
IEC 60502/
BS662
24
Three
300
UG
IEC 60502/
BS662
24
single core
300
UG
IEC 60502/
BS662
24
Three
240
8
8.1
Conductor details
material
Copper
Copper
Copper
Copper
Aluminium
8.2
8.3
9
9.1
design
overall diameter,
Conductor screen
material
IEC 228
IEC 228
IEC 228
IEC 228
IEC 228
Extruded
XLPE semi
conductive
Extruded
XLPE semi
conductive
Extruded
XLPE semi
conductive
Extruded
XLPE semi
conductive
Extruded
XLPE semi
conductive
9.2
10
thickness,
Maximum dielectric stress at conductor
screen (assumed smooth)
Insulation
material
kV/cm
kV/cm
kV/cm
kV/cm
kV/cm
Extruded
mm XLPE semi
Extruded
XLPE semi
Extruded
XLPE semi
Extruded
XLPE semi
Extruded
XLPE semi
Copper wire
mm
ohm/k 0.193
m
Copper wire
Copper wire
Copper wire
Copper wire
0.0991
0.0601
0.0601
0.125
ohm/k 0.247
m
0.128
0.08
0.08
0.16
5
6
7
11
11.1
11.2
12
12.1
12.2
13
14
15
16
minimum radial thickness of insulation

between conductor screen & core screen
Core screen
material
thickness
Maximum DC resistance of conductor of
cable at 20C
Maximum AC resistance of conductor/
km of cable at 90C
Equivalent star reactance of three phase
of
circuit ofDC
50resistance
Hz,
Maximum
of metallic
screen of cable at 20C
mm
mm
ohm/k
ohm/k
File:TS-CO-03-S R3 MV UG Cables and accessories 2013-04-28.xlsm - sheet:TS-CO-03-S2
Page 3 Date: 06/05/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
17
18
19
20
Item
Maximum electric capacitance per core
of cable
Maximum charging current per
conductor of cable at nominal voltage,
24.4
Current carrying capacity in soil at 20C

Maximum value of tangent of dielectric
loss angle of cable at normal frequency at
aConductor
conductorshort
temperature
of 20C
circuit current
carrying
capacity (for 1 second) with cable loaded
with nominal current before short circuit
Metallic sheath short circuit current
carrying capacity (for 1 second) with
cable loaded with nominal current before
short circuit
and diameter
final sheath
temperature
Nominal
overall
of complete
cable, mm
Minimum radius of bending in which
cable can be
laid direct in ground or in air
in ducts
joints
and terminations
laid direct
in ground or in air
24.5
in ducts
21
22
23
24
24.1
24.2
24.3
24.6
EEPCo

joints and terminations
Unit Requirement Bid Offer Requirement Bid Offer Requirement Bid Offer Requirement Bid Offer Requiremen Bid Offer
t
F
mA/k
m
A
kA
kA
No smaller
than 12 times
No smaller
than 12 times
No smaller
than 12 times
No smaller
than 12 times
No smaller
than 12 times
No smaller
than 12 time
of the outer
sheath
No smaller
No smaller
than 12 time
of the outer
sheath
No smaller
No smaller
than 12 time
of the outer
sheath
No smaller
No smaller
than 12 time
of the outer
sheath
No smaller
No smaller
than 12 time
of the outer
sheath
No smaller
than 12 time
of the outer
sheath
No smaller
than 12 time
of the outer
sheath
No smaller
than 12 time
of the outer
sheath
No smaller
than 12 time
of the outer
sheath
No smaller
than 12 time
of the outer
sheath
No smaller
than 12 time
of the outer
sheath
than 12 time
of the outer
sheath
than 12 time
of the outer
sheath
than 12 time
of the outer
sheath
than 12 time
of the outer
sheath
m
m
m
m
File:TS-CO-03-S R3 MV UG Cables and accessories 2013-04-28.xlsm - sheet:TS-CO-03-S2
Page 4 Date: 06/05/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule for MV UG Cable Accessories

I). Medium Voltage Self Bonding Tape
1
Manufacturer
2
Country of origin
3
Type designation
4
Voltage level,
kV
5
Material standard
6
Length of Tape per reel,
m
II) PLUG IN TERMINATION BOLTED TYPE,24 kV
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Item
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Type designation
Cross-section of cable,
Power impulse withstand voltage,
Lightning impulse withstand voltage
Material of the body
Net weight of termination kit,
TS-CO-03 S
Unit
Requirement
mm
kV
g
III) CABLE JOINT(26 & 45kV)
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bid Offer
TS-CO-03 S
Item
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Type designation
Power frequency withstand Voltage level,
Lightning impulse withstand Voltage level,
Materials of the body
Maximum voltage stress,
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
Bid Offer
kV
kV
kV/mm
IV)CABLE TERMINAL INDOOR TYPE
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Item
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Type designation
Power frequency withstand voltage
Tail length, mm
Material of stress relief cone
Maximum voltage stress
Net weight of termination kit
Unit
kV
kV
kV/mm
kg
V) CABLE TERMINAL OUTDOOR TYPE
No
1
2
Item
TS-CO-03 S
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Page 5
Date: 06/05/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for MV UG Cable Accessories
3
4
5
6
7
8
Type designation
Tail length, mm
Material of stress relief cone
9
10
Maximum voltage stress,

kV
kV
kV/mm
kg
VI) MEDIUM VOLTAGE SELF BONDING TAPE 45kV
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Item
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Type designation
Voltage level,
Material standard
Length of Tape per reel,
TS-CO-03 S
Unit
Requirement
kV
m
VII) PLUG-IN TERMINAL, BOLTED TYPE 45kV
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Item
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Type designation
Cross-section of cable,
Power impulse withstand voltage,
Bid Offer
TS-CO-03 S
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
mm2
kV
kV
g
Page 6
Date: 06/05/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-CO-04
LV XLPE Power Cables
Rev-2-April 2013
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
25/1/2011
First Issue
Rev1
Dec2012
Some text modified
Rev2
April 2013
Drum specifications updated
TS-CO-04 R2 LV XLPE Power cables.docx
Rev-2-April 2013
Page: 1 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
Description
Page No
LV POWER CABLES (XLPE INSULATED)
1.
SCOPE
2.
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
2
1
1
1
1
3.1
CONFLICT:
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
TYPE TESTS
ROUTINE TESTS
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
2
2
2
2
5.
DESIGN
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
GENERAL
CONDUCTORS
RATING
INSULATION
ARMOURING
OVERSHEATH
CORE IDENTIFICATION
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
6.
GENERAL PURPOSE & CONTROL LV CABLES
6.1
6.2
6.3
VOLTAGE & FREQUENCY VARIATION

MATERIAL
OUTER SHEATH
5
5
6
7.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
DRUM SIZES
CABLE DRUM LENGTH
DRUM MARKING
DRUM WARRANTEES
SHIPMENT
6
7
8
8
9
9
10
8.
SCHEDULES
10
8.1
8.2
8.3
SCHEDULE FOR LV POWER CABLES(XLPE INSULATED)

10
10
11
TS-CO-04 R2 LV XLPE Power cables.docx
Rev-2-April 2013
Page: 2 , 11-Apr-13
SECTION 1- SCOPE
EEPCO
LV POWER CABLES XLPE INSULATED

1.
SCOPE
(i)
2.

0.6/1kV XLPE insulated cable having stranded copper conductors with extruded
XLPE insulation. The insulated cables offered shall be armoured and unarmoured
type.

3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
3.1
IEC60028
Standard resistance for copper
IEC60071
IEC 60502
LV PVC insulated cables
IEC60228
IEC60229
Tests on cable over sheaths
IEC60230
Impulse tests on cables and accessories
IEC60304
Standard colours for insulation for low-frequency cables and

wires
IEC60446
Identification of insulated and bare conductors by colours
IEC60507
Artificial pollution tests on high-voltage insulators to be used

on a.c. systems
IEC60724
Short-circuit temperature limits of electric cables with rated

voltages of 1 kV
IEC60811
Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials

of electric cables and optional cables
IEC60885
DIN/VDE0273
Cross-linked Polyethylene Insulated Cables.
CONFLICT:
See spec TS-GN-02
4.

See spec TS- GN-02
LPA-GECE/TS-CO-04 R2 LV XLPE Power cables.docx
Rev-2-April 2013
Page: 1, 11-Apr-13
SECTION 5- DESIGN
EEPCO
4.1
TYPE TESTS
When such tests are specified Shield Stripping Test per IEC or AEIC CS-5.
4.2
ROUTINE TESTS
The routine and acceptance tests shall be performed at the manufacturer's works
in accordance with the relevant IEC/ISO standards supplemented by the specific
requirements indicated below and shall be free of charge to the Purchaser..
a)
The tests will be divided into the following categories and conducted as per the
relevant standard.
b)
Check for compliance with specifications herein and with the schedule
c)
Conductor electrical resistance measurements
d)
High-voltage test
e)
Conductor examination
f)
Check of dimensions
4.3
4.4
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
a)
Annealing test
b)
Conductor resistance
c)
Thickness of insulation and sheath
d)
Tensile strength and elongation at break of insulation and sheath
e)
Insulation resistance test
f)
High voltage test at room temperature

The Contractor shall carry out an insulation test of the installed cable and its
accessories before energizing the cable
5.
DESIGN
5.1
GENERAL
The cable shall be constructed in accordance with IEC 60227 and IEC 60228.
The outer sheath shall be ultra violet stable black PVC. Cable shall be suitable for
direct burial in soil of temperature 25oC and soil thermal resistivity of 1.5
Km/W.LV cables will be buried at a depth of 600mm.
The cable design offered shall meet the following requirements.
5.2
CONDUCTORS
The copper conductors shall conform to IEC 60228.
5.3
RATING
Rev-2-April 2013
Page: 2, 11-Apr-13
SECTION 5- DESIGN
EEPCO
5.4
Size of
Cable
Cont
.
Curr
ent
ratin
g(A)
Curre
nt
rating
in
emerg
ency
use(A)
S.C.
Rating
(kA)
3x35/
16
180
195
3x50/
25
215
245
3x70/
35
265
300
10
3x95/
50
315
350
16
3x120
/70
365
450
20
3x185
/95
405
530
25
3x240
/120
465
540
40
3x300
/150
610
645
50
INSULATION
The insulation shall be in accordance with IEC standards and shall be
thermosetting cross linked extra-clean polyethylene compound or an approved
equivalent which is rated for 90oC continuous operation and which is applied
directly over and in intimate contact with the conductor shield.
5.5
ARMOURING
Armouring, where specified, shall be applied helically forming a layer of
galvanised steel wire over an inner covering and shall comply with the
requirements of IEC 60502.
5.6
OVERSHEATH
PVC over sheaths shall be of a heat, moisture, and sunlight resistant material that
is fire retardant and low acid emitting when subjected to the temperature limits of
the underlying insulation. Solutions to which the over sheath is resistant shall
include petrol, oil, acids and alkalis. The over sheath shall contain a termite, insect
and rodent repellent of a permanent nature.
Rev-2-April 2013
Page: 3, 11-Apr-13
SECTION 6- GENERAL PURPOSE &

CONTROL LV CABLES
EEPCO
The over sheath shall be of a single extrusion of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) applied
over the armour wire and shall be in accordance with IEC 60502-1. In addition
the PVC over sheath shall be coloured black. The outer PVC sheath shall be
termite resistant.
5.7
CORE IDENTIFICATION
Individual cores shall be colour coded as per Table 1
5.7.1
Cable Construction
LV cables shall be constructed and delivered as summarised in Table 1.
No. of
cores
6.
Material/Shape
Insulation
colour
Armour
Conductor
size mm
3x35/16
Copper / Stranded
Circular or shaped
Black, Blue,
Red & Yellow
Steel
Wire
3x50/25
Copper / Stranded
Circular or shaped
Black, Blue,
Red & Yellow
Steel
Wire
3x70/35
Copper / Stranded
Circular or shaped
Black, Blue,
Red & Yellow
Steel
Wire
3x95/50
Copper / Stranded
Circular or shaped
Black, Blue,
Red & Yellow
Steel
Wire
3x120/70
Copper / Stranded
Circular or shaped
Black, Blue,
Red & Yellow
Steel
Wire
3x185/95
Copper / Stranded
Circular or shaped
Black, Blue,
Red & Yellow
Steel
Wire
3x240/120
Copper / Stranded
Circular or shaped
Black, Blue,
Red & Yellow
Steel
Wire
3 x300/150
Copper / Stranded
Circular or shaped
Black, Blue,
Red & Yellow
Steel
Wire
GENERAL PURPOSE & CONTROL LV CABLES

These general purpose insulated cables shall be suitable for use where the
combination of ambient temperature and temperature rise due to load results in
conductor temperature not exceeding 90C for normal continuous operation.
The cables shall be suitable for laying in covered/open trenches, ducts, trays or
buried directly underground under dry or wet conditions. Suitable additives to
prevent attack by rodents, termites shall be added to the outer sheath PVC
compound. Also, the outer sheathing shall be so designed as to afford a high
degree of mechanical protection besides making it resistant to heat, oils,
chemicals, abrasion, weather conditions etc. Common acids, alkalis, contaminants
saline solutions etc., shall not have adverse effects on the PVC sheathing material
used.
Rev-2-April 2013
Page: 4, 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
6.1
SECTION 6- GENERAL PURPOSE &

CONTROL LV CABLES
VOLTAGE & FREQUENCY VARIATION

The cables shall be capable of operating continuously under the system frequency
variation of+ or - 5%, Voltage variation of + or - 10% and a combined frequency
- voltage variation of+ or - 10%.
6.2
MATERIAL
6.2.1
CONDUCTOR
The conductor shall be composed of plain annealed copper wires made out of
high conductivity copper rods. The rated voltage shall be 1kV. The other
parameters to be specified are mentioned in the technical schedule.
6.2.2
FORM:
The conductors shall be circular and stranded. They shall be clean, reasonably
uniform in size and shape, smooth and free from all harmful defects.
6.2.3
JOINTS
Joints shall be permitted in the individual wires of which the conductor is formed
but no joint shall be within 300mm of any other joint within the same layer. The
joints shall be made by resistance butt welding, fusion welding, cold pressure
welding, electric welding, gas welding, brazing or silver soldering.
6.2.4
Classification
Class-2 for stranded circular non-compacted cables used for fixed installation.
6.2.5
SIZE, NUMBER, RESISTANCE

The wires in the conductor shall have the same nominal diameter before
stranding. The number of wires in the conductor shall be not less than 3.
6.2.6
INSULATION
The insulation shall be in accordance with IEC or AEIC Section C. In addition
the insulation shall be an extrusion of Union Carbide HFDA 4202 thermo setting
cross-linked extra-clean polyethylene compound or an approved equivalent which
is rated for 90oC continuous operation and which is applied directly over and in
intimate contact with the conductor shield.
6.2.7
APPLICATION
The insulation shall be so applied that it fits closely on the conductor and it shall
be possible to remove it without damage to the conductor.
6.2.8
CORE IDENTIFICATION
See Clause 5.7, above.
6.2.9
ARRANGEMENT OF MARKING
See Clause 5.8, above.
6.2.10
LAYING UP OF CORES
In the twin and multi-core cables, the cores shall be laid up together with a
suitable lay; the outermost layer shall have right hand lay and the successive layers
Rev-2-April 2013
Page: 5, 11-Apr-13

SHIPMENT
EEPCO
shall be laid with opposite lay, where necessary. The interstices shall be filled with
non-hygroscopic material.
The following lay-up of core shall be applicable,
No. of cores
Lay-up
6.3
OUTER SHEATH
6.3.1
MATERIALS
For cables with general purpose insulation, the outer sheath shall be of Type ST-1
PVC compound as recommended for general purpose sheaths intended for use in
cables operating at a maximum rated conductor temperature 70 C. Composition
of the outer sheath shall be as above.
6.3.2
CONSTRUCTION
This outer sheath shall be applied by extrusion over the inner sheath as applicable
for un-armoured twin and multi-core cables. It shall be so applied that it fits
closely over inner sheath and it shall also be possible to remove it without
damaging the inner sheath. The colour of the outer sheath shall be black.
6.3.3
THICKNESS
The average and minimum thickness of the PVC outer sheath shall be not less
than the values specified hereunder:
Calculated diameter under the Thickness of outer sheath for unouter sheath
armoured cables.
Over (mm)
7.
Upto and including Nominal(mm)
Minimum (mm)
---
15
1.8
1.24
15
25
2.0
1.40

7.1
Cable identification shall includes embossing of the PVC over sheath with the
EEPCO
b)
Manufacturers name
c)
Cable size
d)
Rated Voltage
e)
Year of Manufacturer
Rev-2-April 2013
Page: 6, 11-Apr-13
EEPCO

SHIPMENT
process.
7.1.2

Each cable over sheath shall be sequentially marked at one (1) metre intervals
7.2

The LV cables shall be packed in non-returnable wooden drums suitable for
Cable drums shall conform to DIN 46391 or equivalent standards.
a)

drawings.
b)

c)
Construction
d)
Spindle holes
Rev-2-April 2013
Page: 7, 11-Apr-13

SHIPMENT
EEPCO

e)
Cable ends
visible.
f)

g)
7.3
Lugging
The cables shall be lagged or covered with suitable material to provide

physical protection during transit and during storage and handling
operations.
Preferable mode of lugging shall be by wooden lagging on the

circumference with a thickness of at least 40 mm.
DRUM SIZES
Max.
Diameter:
Max.
Width:
2280
mm;
1140
mm;

7.4
CABLE DRUM LENGTH

length of cable for drum shall be as specified in the technical schedules.
Rev-2-April 2013
Page: 8, 11-Apr-13
EEPCO

SHIPMENT
7.5
DRUM MARKING
a)

b)
Drum Labels/Marking
2) Contract Number,
7.6
DRUM WARRANTEES
Rev-2-April 2013
Page: 9, 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
7.7
SHIPMENT
8.

9.
SCHEDULES
9.1
SCHEDULE FOR LV POWER CABLES(XLPE INSULATED)

9.2

Specification
Clause
Rev-2-April 2013
Page: 10, 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
9.3

Specification
Clause
Rev-2-April 2013
Page: 11, 11-Apr-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for LV Cables(XLPE) - 3x35/16 and 3x50/25mm2
No
Item
Unit
Requiremen
t
Bid Offer
Requiremen
t
Bid Offer
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of Origin
3 Type designation
4 Standard
5 Cross-section of conductor
IEC 60502
mm2
3x35/16
3x50/25
Copper
Copper
0.6/1
4
XLPE
PVC
90
0.6/1
4
XLPE
PVC
90
12 Permissible conductor
temperature rise of insulation for
laying in the earth 20
70
70
laying in the air,30
60
60
14 Maximum resistance of
conductor at 20C
15 Inductive reactance at 50HZ for
4 core
ohm/kM
0.524
0.387
ohm/kM
0.081
0.076
16 Continuous current rating in soil

in given service condition
180
215
17 Current rating in emergency use

in given service conditions
18 Short circuit rating in given
service condition
19 Outer diameter
20 Standard delivery length per
drum per drum
21 Weight
195
245
kA
6 Material of conductor
7
8
9
10
11
Rated voltage Uo/U

Number of cores
Insulation material of conductor
Sheath material
Maximum temperature of
conductor in continuous use
21 Weight per drum

22 Maximum Drum length that can
be provided by the manufacturer
kV
m
kg
kg
m
File:TS-CO-04 S R1 LV Power cables(XLPE).xlsm- sheet:TS-CO-04-S1
Page 1
Date: 11/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for LV Cables(XLPE), 3x70/35mm and 3x95/50mm2
No
Item
Unit
Requiremen
t
Bid Offer
Requiremen
t
Bid Offer
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of Origin
3 Type designation
4 Standard IEC60502
Yes
Yes
3x70/35
3x95/50
Copper
Copper
0.6/1
4
XLPE
PVC
90
0.6/1
4
XLPE
PVC
90
laying in the earth,20
70
70
60
60
conductor at 20 C
15 Inductive reactance, ohm/kM at
50HZ for 4 core
Ohm/kM
0.268
0.193
0.075
0.073

265
315

service condition
19 Outer diameter
drum per drum
21 Weight
300
350
kA
10
16
mm2
7
8
9
10
11
Rated voltage Uo/U

Number of cores
Sheath material
21 Weight per drum

kV
Ohm/kM
m
kg
kg
m
Page 2
Date: 11/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for LV Cables(XLPE), 3x120/70mm2 and 3x185/95mm2
No
Item
Unit
Requiremen
t
Bid Offer
Requiremen
t
Bid Offer
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of Origin
3 Type designation
4 Standard
IEC 60502
mm2
3x120/70
3x185/95
Copper
Copper
0.6/1
4
XLPE
PVC
90
0.6/1
4
XLPE
PVC
90
70
70
60
60
0.153
0.124
0.073
0.072
7
8
9
10
11
Rated voltage Uo/U

Number of cores
Sheath material
laying in the earth,20 o
laying in the air,30 o
conductor at 20C
15 Inductive reactance, ohm/Km at
50HZ for 4 core
kV
Ohm/kM
Ohm/kM

365
405

service condition
19 Outer diameter
drum per drum
21 Weight
450
530
kA
20
25
21 Weight per drum

kg
m
Page 3
Date: 11/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for LV Cables(XLPE), 3x240/120mm2 and 3x300/150mm2
No
Item
Unit
Requiremen
t
Bid Offer
Requiremen
t
Bid Offer
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of Origin
3 Type designation
4 Standard
IEC 60502
IEC 60502
3x240/120
3x300/150
Copper
Copper
0.6/1
4
XLPE
PVC
90
0.6/1
4
XLPE
PVC
90
70
70
60
60
0.0991
0.0601
0.072
0.072
mm2
7
8
9
10
11
Rated voltage Uo/U

Number of cores
Sheath material
laying in the earth,20 o
laying in the air,30 oC
conductor at 200C
50HZ for 4 core
kV
Ohm/kM
Ohm/kM

465
540

service condition
19 Outer diameter
drum per drum
21 Weight
610
645
kA
40
50
21 Weight per drum

m
kg
kg
m
Page 4
Date: 11/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule for LV Cables(XLPE control cable), 2x2,.5mm, 2x4mm and 2x6mm2
No
Item
Unit
Requiremen
t
2x2.5
Bid Offer
Requireme
nt
2x4
Bid Offer
Requireme
nt
2x6
Bid Offer
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of Origin
3 Type designation
4 Standard
6
7
8
9
10
Material of conductor
Rated voltage Uo/U
Number of cores
Sheath material
mm2
kV
IEC 60502
IEC 60502
IEC 60502
2x2.5
2x4
2x6
Copper
0.6/1
2
XLPE
PVC
Copper
0.6/1
2
XLPE
PVC
Copper
0.6/1
2
XLPE
PVC
11 Maximum temperature of
90
90
90
70
70
70
60
60
60
7.4
4.61
3.08
30 C
laying in the
air,30 Cof
14 Maximum
resistance
ohm/kM
conductor at 20 C
15 Inductive reactance at 50HZ for
4 core
ohm/kM

service condition
19 Outer diameter mm
37
50
63
37
50
63
kA
0.36
0.57
0.86
mm
10.1
10.9
11.9

drum, m (+/-5m)
2000
2000
2000
21 Weight per drum

kg
m
Page 5
Date: 11/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for LV Cables(XLPE control cable), 2x10mm, 4x2.5mm 4x4mm2
No
Item
Unit
Requirem
ent
2x10
Bid Offer
Requireme
nt
4 x2.5
Bid Offer
Requireme
nt
4x4
Bid Offer
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of Origin
3 Type designation
4 Standard
IEC 60502
IEC 60502
IEC 60502
2x10
Copper
0.6/1
2
XLPE
4 x2.5
Copper
0.6/1
4
XLPE
4x4
Copper
0.6/1
4
XLPE
oC
PVC
90
PVC
90
PVC
90
70
70
70
60
60
60
1.83
7.41
4.61
ohm/K
m
A
82
35
45
82
35
45
kA
1.43
0.36
0.57
drum, m (+/-5m)
mm
m
13.9
2000
11.9
2000
13.1
2000
21 Weight per drum
kg

5
6
7
8
9
Cross-section of conductor
Rated voltage Uo/U, kV
Number of cores
10 Sheath material
conductor at 20C
50HZ for 4 core
service condition
mm2
kV
ohm/k
m
Page 6
Date: 11/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for LV Cables(XLPE control cable), 4x6mm, 4x10mm and 4x16mm2
No
Item
Unit
c
Requirem
ent
4x6
Bid Offer
Requireme
nt
4x10
Bid Offer
Requireme
nt
4x16
Bid Offer
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of Origin
3 Type designation
4 Standard
IEC 60502
IEC 60502
IEC 60502
4x6
Copper
0.6/1
4
XLPE
4x10
Copper
0.6/1
4
XLPE
4x16
Copper
0.6/1
4
XLPE
PVC
90
PVC
90
PVC
90
20C
70
70
70
30C
60
60
60
3.08
1.83
1.15
ohm/K
m
A
57
75
97
57
75
97
kA
0.86
1.43
2.23
drum, m (+/-5m)
mm
m
14.6
2000
16
2000
18.5
2000
21 Weight per drum
kg

5
6
7
8
9
Cross-section of conductor,
Rated voltage Uo/U,
Number of cores
10 Sheath material
conductor in continuous use,
laying in the earth
laying in the air,
conductor at 20C,
50HZ for 4 core
service condition
mm2
kV
ohm/K
m
Page 7
Date: 11/4/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-CO-05
MV and LV Insulators
Rev -2- March 2013
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
25/1/2011
First Issue
Rev 1
Feb 2013
Spec.no. changed and fitted in the specified template
Rev 2
5 March 2013
Performance figures changed and other minor mods.
ts-co-05 mv and lv insulators r2-c 2013-3-21.docx
Rev -2- March 2013
Page: 1 , 3-Apr-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
MV AND LV INSULATORS
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
TYPE TESTS
ROUTINE TESTS
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
2
2
2
5.
LINE POST INSULATOR
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
USE
TYPE
GENERAL
MEASUREMENTS
MATERIAL
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
MARKING
PACKING
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
6.
PIN INSULATORS
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
USE
PERFORMANCE
MATERIAL
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
SPINDLE DESIGN
MARKING
4
4
4
5
5
5
7.
CAP & PIN / DISC STRAIN INSULATORS
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
USE
PERFORMANCE
NUMBER OF INSULATORS ON A STRING
MATERIAL
MARKING
5
5
6
6
6
6
8.
POLYMER ROD INSULATOR
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
USE
GENERAL
MATERIAL
PACKING
7
7
7
7
9.
STAY INSULATORS
Rev -2- March 2013
Page: 2 , 3-Apr-13
EEPCO
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
PERFORMANCE
MATERIAL
DIMENSIONS
MARKING
7
8
8
8
10.
SHACKLE INSULATORS (LV)
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
PERFORMANCE
MATERIAL
DIMENSIONS:
MARKING:
8
8
8
8
11.
12.
13.
ASSOCIATED HARDWARE
PACKING
SCHEDULES
9
9
10
13.1
13.2
13.3
SCHEDULE FOR MV INSULATORS

10
10
11
Rev -2- March 2013
Page: 3 , 3-Apr-13
SECTION 1- SCOPE
EEPCO
MV AND LV INSULATORS
1.
SCOPE
Medium Voltage Insulators.
2.

See Specification TS-GN-01 General System Data
The insulators have in this document are intended to be used with a 15kV and
33kV system at altitudes of up to 3000M.
Due to altitude requirements the insulators to be provided will be effectively
designed for a 22kV and 45kV system at sea level respectively.
Hence all requirements for the insulators shall be such that satisfy the 22kV and
45kV system at sea level.
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The insulators supplied shall conform to the latest edition of the appropriate IEC
standards and/or other recognized international standards. The following IEC
publications or other national or international standards, which ensure equal or
higher quality, shall be applicable:
BS 3288-2
Insulator and conductor fittings for overhead power lines Part

2: Specifications for a range of fittings.
IEC 60060
High voltage testing techniques -Part 1: General definitions

and techniques
IEC 60071 -1
Insulation co-ordination -Part 1: Terms, definitions, principles

and rules
IEC 60168
Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of ceramic

material or glass for systems with nominal voltages greater
than 1 000 V
IEC 60273
Characteristics of indoor and outdoor post insulators for

systems with nominal voltages greater than 1 000 V
IEC 60383
Test on insulators of ceramic material or glass for overhead

lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1,000 V
IEC 60383-1
Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above

1000 V-Part I: Ceramic or glass insulator units for a.c. systems
-Definitions, test methods and acceptance criteria.
IEC 60383-1
Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above

1000 V-Part 2: Insulator strings and insulator sets for a.c.
systems -Definitions, test methods and acceptance criteria
IEC 60437
Radio interference test on high voltage insulators
Rev -2- March 2013
Page: 1, 3-Apr-13
EEPCO
3.1
IEC 60471
Dimensions of clevis and tongue couplings of string insulator

units
IEC 60720
Characteristics of line post insulators
IEC 61109
Composite Insulators for ac overhead lines with a nominal

voltage greater than 1000 V-Definitions, test methods and
acceptance criteria
CONFLICT
See spec TS-GN-02
4.

Please see TS- GN-02
4.1
TYPE TESTS
The following type tests as per the relevant standard shall be conducted on the
Insulators of identical design to prove that the offered insulator satisfies all the
design requirements set out in this specification.
(i)
Verification of the dimensions
(ii)
Electro-mechanical or mechanical failing load
(iii)
Thermal-mechanical performance test
(iv)
Dry lightning impulse withstand voltage test
(v)
Wet Power-frequency withstand voltage test
(vi)
Residual strength test
4.2
ROUTINE TESTS
The manufacturer shall carry out, at his own expense, the routine tests; specified
in IEC 60383. The routine tensile load shall be 50% of the electromechanical
failing load.
(i)
Routine visual inspection
(ii)
Routine mechanical test
(iii)
Routine electrical test
4.3
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
(i)
Verification of the dimensions
(ii)
Temperature cycle test
(iii)
Electro-mechanical failing load test
(iv)
Residual strength test
(v)
Porosity test
Rev -2- March 2013
Page: 2, 3-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 5- LINE POST INSULATOR
5.
LINE POST INSULATOR
5.1
USE
The Insulators shall be used with the 15kVand 33kV system
5.2
TYPE
The Line Post Insulator according to IEC 60720 shall be of the type
IEC C10-125 for the 15kV system and
C10-250 for the 33kV system.
5.3
GENERAL
Line post insulators shall be tie top pattern (Class A). The neck and groove
dimensions shall be Standard Head as in IEC 60720 for horizontal or vertical
fitting.
The side and top grooves shall have a semi-conducting glaze to reduce radio
interference.
5.4
MEASUREMENTS
The line post insulator shall have dimensions according to IEC 60720, and
generally as in the figure shown herewith.
5.5
MATERIAL
The insulating part shall be made of porcelain, glaze colour brown or grey as
specified in technical schedules.
All ferrous parts shall be of hot-dip galvanized. The materials shall be free from
folds, cracks and other exterior and interior defects, which can affect its strength,
ductility, durability or ability to function.
All material shall be inspected and tasted in full to prove compliance with the
requirements of the specifications. The free surface of insulating parts shall be
cleaned from cement and other impurities.
5.6
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

The line post insulator shall have the following characteristics:
Test
22kV
Insulators
Rev -2- March 2013
45kV
Insulators
Page: 3, 3-Apr-13
SECTION 6- PIN INSULATORS
EEPCO
5.7
Test
22kV
Insulators
45kV
Insulators
Radio Interference Test Applied Voltage (50Hz)

Measured voltage @ 1MHz.
BS 60305
BS 60305
50kV
95kV
Lightening impulse withstand voltage
125kV
250kV
Creepage Distance for medium pollution level
480mm
1040mm
Mechanical Failure Load
10kN
10kN
MARKING
The insulating part shall be clearly and permanently marked with the name of the
manufacturer or trade mark, year of manufacture and lightning impulse voltage
according to the table above.
5.8
PACKING
Line post insulator units shall be packed in crates containing 6 insulator units and
fittings. The crates shall be packed on a pallet. The packing shall afford adequate
protection for the insulators during international transportation and rough
handling during delivery to site
6.
PIN INSULATORS
6.1
USE
The Pin Insulators shall be used with the 15kVand 33kV system
6.2
PERFORMANCE
The following performance figures shall be met
6.3
Test
22kV
Insulators
45kV
Insulators
Radio Interference Test Applied Voltage (50Hz)

Measured voltage @ 1MHz.
BS 60305
BS 60305
50kV
95kV
Lightening impulse withstand voltage
125kV
250kV
Creepage Distance for medium pollution level
480mm
1040mm
Mechanical Failure Load
10kN
10kN
MATERIAL
The insulator shall preferably be of porcelain glazed colour brown or gray
specified in the technical schedules, but toughened glass insulators may also be
offered.
Rev -2- March 2013
Page: 4, 3-Apr-13
SECTION 7- CAP & PIN / DISC STRAIN

INSULATORS
EEPCO
All ferrous parts shall be of hot-dip galvanized. The materials shall be free from
folds, cracks and other exterior and interior defects, which can affect its strength,
ductility, durability or ability to function.
All material shall be inspected and tasted in full to prove compliance with the
requirements of the specifications. The free surface of insulating parts shall be
cleaned from cement and other impurities.
6.4

The relevant vertical dimensions of the insulator shall be such that when
combined with the pin insulator spindles the design requirement at the relevant
voltage level for conductor clearance from the cross-arm, shall be met. The design
shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part of the
insulator shall not lead to deterioration. Precautions shall be taken to avoid
chemical reaction between cement and metal fittings.
The insulating material shall not engage directly with hard metal. Pin insulators
shall be provided with a thimble of suitable material. Cement used in the
construction of the insulator shall not cause fracture by expansion or loosening by
contraction and proper care shall be taken to locate the individual parts correctly
during cementing.
6.5
SPINDLE DESIGN
The insulator spindle shall be in accordance with BS 3288 Part 2 Ref. 29 or
equivalent.
6.6
MARKING
All insulators shall have clearly and permanently marked on them: Name or
Trademark of the maker and year of manufacture.
7.
CAP & PIN / DISC STRAIN INSULATORS
7.1
USE
7.2
PERFORMANCE
The Cap and Pin or disk Strain insulators shall be standard IEC sea level specified
insulators. The requirement for the Altitude will be accommodated by the use of
additional discs. The following performance figures, for the OVERALL STRING
of insulators, shall be met. The preferred type of Insulators shall be U70BL
according to IEC 60305.
Table 7.1.1 Requirements for the Overall String
Unit
22kV
Insulator
string
45kV
Insulator
strings
1min. Power frequency withstand
kVrms
50
95
Impulse withstand
kVpeak
125
250
Requirement
Rev -2- March 2013
Page: 5, 3-Apr-13
SECTION 7- CAP & PIN / DISC STRAIN

INSULATORS
EEPCO
Unit
22kV
Insulator
string
45kV
Insulator
strings
Overall Leakage (Creepage) Distance
mm
480
1040
Mechanical Failing Load
kN
70
70
BS 60383
BS 60383
Requirement
Radio Interference Test Applied

Voltage(50Hz) Measured voltage @
1MHz.
7.3
NUMBER OF INSULATORS ON A STRING

The basic requirement of the standard complete string of insulators shall be 2
Insulators for the 15kV system and 4 Insulators for the 33kV system. In special
circumstances the contractor installing the insulators shall determine the exact
number to suit the particular site requirements such as a very heavy polluted area,
road crossings etc..
7.4
MATERIAL
The insulator shall be of glazed porcelain, glass or polymer.
Each insulator shall be supplied with clevis and tongue end fittings to enable the
strain insulator to be attached to an eye nut on the cross-arm.
7.5

The design of the insulator shall be such that stresses due to expansion and
contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration. Precautions
shall be taken to avoid chemical reaction between cement and metal fittings, e.g.
by the choice of suitable materials, or by the method of construction.
The porcelain or glass shall not engage directly with hard metal.
Cement used in the construction of the insulator shall not cause fracture by
expansion or loosening by contraction, and proper care shall be taken to locate
the individual parts correctly during cementing.
Ferrous parts, unless of stainless steel, shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance
with BS EN ISO 1461, with the exception of cotter pins which shall be phosphor
bronze or stainless steel
7.6
MARKING
All insulators shall have clearly and permanently marked on them: Name or
trademark of the maker and year of manufacture.
Rev -2- March 2013
Page: 6, 3-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 8- POLYMER ROD INSULATOR
8.
POLYMER ROD INSULATOR
8.1
USE
8.2
GENERAL
Composite strain insulators to IEC 61109 and IEC 60471 complete with fittings
shall be supplied. The fittings supplied with each insulator shall consist of one (1)
galvanized steel bow shackle, one (1) 16 mm galvanized steel pins complete with
stainless steel cotter pins and one (1) clevis thimble to suit the particular
conductor for which it is to be used.
The following minimum characteristics shall apply to the Complete Insulator:
System Voltage
8.3
24kV
Insulators
36kV
Insulators
kN
70
70
Minimum total creepage distance
mm
480
1040
1min. power frequency withstand

voltage
kV
50
95
kVp
125
250
MATERIAL
The insulators shall be in accordance with IEC 61109. Each insulator unit shall be
marked with the name or trade mark of the manufacturer and the year of
manufacture in accordance with IEC 61109 and means to ensure a system of
traceability for each of the component parts. In addition, each insulator unit shall
be marked with the specified mechanical failing load in conformity with lEC
61109.
The insulators shall be constructed on a fibre glass core rod with a one-piece
EPDMor silicone rubber sheath/weather shield. The end fillings shall be
compression crimped to the core and sheath to ensure a weatherproof seal. Hot
dip galvanized ferrous end fillings shall be supplied. A full description of the
materials and construction shall be provided with the bid.
8.4
PACKING
Insulator units shall be packed in crates and each crate shall contain 3 or 6
insulator units and fittings. The crates shall be packed on a pallet. The packing
shall afford adequate protection for the insulators during handling and shipping.
9.
STAY INSULATORS
9.1
PERFORMANCE
The following performance figures, per individual insulators, shall be met.
Rev -2- March 2013
Page: 7, 3-Apr-13
EEPCO
9.2
SECTION 10- SHACKLE INSULATORS (LV)
Voltage application
LV System
15kV System
33kV System
Frequency
50 Hz.
50 Hz.
50 Hz.
Wet Withstand Voltage 8kV Min.

(RMS)
24kV Min.
24kV
(2
nos
series)
Minimum Breaking Load
44kN
88kN
88kN
Safe Working Load
18kN
18kN
36kN
Min. Creepage Distance
65mm
105mm
105mm
in
MATERIAL
The insulators shall be of glazed porcelain or toughened glass.
9.3
DIMENSIONS
Each stay-wire hole shall have a minimum diameter of 22mm, and shall be such
that a straight stay wire can be passed through it.
9.4
MARKING
All insulators shall have clearly and permanently marked on them the name or
trademark of the manufacturer.
10.
SHACKLE INSULATORS (LV)
10.1
PERFORMANCE
10.2
Power frequency withstand

voltage(wet)
3000 Volts RMS
Minimum Breaking Load
1500 kgs
Safe Working Load
600 kgs
MATERIAL
The insulators shall be of porcelain and glazed brown. The surface of the
insulators should be perfectly smooth and free from all defects and cracks.
10.3
DIMENSIONS:
Principal required overall dimensions are height -78mm (max.), diameter -90mm,
axial hole dia. -21mm, (flared at ends) groove radius -12.5mm.
10.4
MARKING:
All insulators shall have clearly and permanently marked on them the name and
trademark of the manufacturer.
Rev -2- March 2013
Page: 8, 3-Apr-13
EEPCO
11.
SECTION 11- ASSOCIATED HARDWARE
ASSOCIATED HARDWARE
Hooks, conductor clamps and other associated hardware shall be in accordance
with associated Specification for "Insulator and Conductor Fittings for Overhead
Lines"
12.
PACKING
The insulators shall be packed securely. See spec. No.TS-GN-02.
Rev -2- March 2013
Page: 9, 3-Apr-13
EEPCO
13.
SCHEDULES
13.1
SCHEDULE FOR MV INSULATORS

Please see separate technical scheduleTS-CO-05 S.
13.2

Specification
Clause
Rev -2- March 2013
Page: 10, 3-Apr-13
EEPCO
13.3

Specification
Clause
Rev -2- March 2013
Page: 11, 3-Apr-13
Technical Schedule No: TS-CO-05-S1
8-Town Distribution Rehabilitation Project Rural Electrification
LPA - EEPCo
Technical Schedule for MV Pin Insulators

The 22kV and 45kV Insulators shall be used with for 15 and 33kV system at 3000m
Please note that the insulator requirements stated below are for standard IEC ratings at 0-1000m.
No corrections to the figures stated are required for altitude
Please fill more schedules if more types of equipment offered that can fit on this sheet.
No
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer Requirement
22kV Insulator for
use in the 15kV
system at 3000m
PIN Insulators
1
General Specification for Insulators
Dry Impulse withstand voltage
Wet 50Hz 1 Min. Withstand (Type Test

IEC 60383)
Min.Mechanical Failing Load
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Puncture @ 50Hz. Sample Test IEC

60383
Radio Interference
Maximum RIV at 1MHz
Leakage/Creepage distance
Protected Leakage distance
50Hz Dry Critical flashover (RMS)
50Hz Wet Critical flashover (RMS)
Dry critical impulse flashover (+/-)
TS-CO-05-S R2c MV Insulators C.xlsm, TS-CO-05-S1
Bid Offer
45kV Insulator for

use in the 33kV
system at 3000m
IEC 60383
IEC 60383
kV
125
250
kV
50
95
kN
10
10
(IEC 60437)
BS 60305
480
(IEC 60437)
BS 60305
1040
kV
mm
kV
Page 1/5
Date: 12/3/2013, 07:04
LPA - EEPCo

Technical Schedule for MV Disc-Strain Insulators

Please note that the insulator requirements stated below are for standard
IEC ratings at 0-1000m.
No Item
Unit Requirement Bid Offer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
STRAIN INSULATORS
General Specification for Insulators
Dry Impulse withstand
Material (Porcelain or Glass or
Composite)
Wet 50Hz 1 Min. Withstand (Type Test
IEC 60383)
Mechanical Failing Load
Puncture @ 50Hz. Sample Test IEC
60383
Pinhole gauge test, Sample Test - this
specification and see also BS 60383,
60305
Radio Interference
Maximum RIV at 1MHz
No of disks required for 22kV system at
pollution level II
No of disks required for 45kV system at
pollution level II
Overall Leakage/Creepage distance
Weight per unit
Page 2/5
kV
IEC 60305
125
kV
50
kN
70
kV
Sample Test
(IEC 60437)
BS 60305
No
No
mm
kg
480
Date: 12/3/2013, 07:04
Technical Schedule for Post Insulators

No
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
22kV Insulator for use in the 15kV system at
3000m
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
LPA - EEPCo
Requirement
Bid Offer
45kV Insulator for use in the 33kV system at

3000m
Manufacturer
Manufacturer's Code N"
Type of insulator
Material
Colour of glaze if porcelain
Standard
IEC
Type
IEC
Dimension:
Line Post
Line Post
Porcelain or Glass
Porcelain or Glass
Brown or Grey
Brown or Grey
C10-125
C10-250
60273
60273
305 1
560 1
mm
mm
mm
Highest Equipment Voltage at MSL
kV
24
52
Overall creepage length at MSL
mm
>480
>1040
Power freq. withstand voltage (wet)
kV
50
95
Impulse Flashover voltage

Critical Impulse Flashover voltage
(Negative)
kV
125
250
kN
10
10
Cantilever strength
kN
12.5
12.5
Mounting stud diameter
mm
Stud length - overall/ thread
mm
Weight
kg
kV
Page 3/5
Date: 12/3/2013, 07:04
LPA - EEPCo
Technical Schedule for Composite Insulators

No
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Requirement
22kV Insulator for

use in the 15kV
system at 3000m
45kV Insulator for

use in the 33kV
system at 3000m
Strain/suspension
Strain/suspension
Composite polymer
Composite polymer
kV
kV
15
33
24
52
mm
480
1040
Grey
Grey
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
50
95
kV
125
250
kN
70
70
Bid Offer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer's Code
Type of insulator
Material
Standard
IEC, ANSI
Designation
Dimension (D x L)
Nominal System Voltage:
- Nominal
- Highest
Equipment Highest Voltage
Overall creepage length
mm x mm
Water shield Material

Water shield Colour
Humpback Split Pin Material
Power freq withstand voltage (wet)
kV
Power freq withstand voltage (dry)

(positive)
kV
Number of Shed
End fitting type
Page 4/5
Date: 12/3/2013, 07:04
No
20
21
22
23
24
25
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
LPA - EEPCo
Requirement
Bid Offer
End fitting material

Weight
kg
Cantilever strength
kN
Mounting stud diameter
mm
Stud length - overall/ thread
mm
Weight
kg
12.5
Page 5/5
12.5
Date: 12/3/2013, 07:04
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-CO-06
Spun Concrete Poles and Accessories
Rev -2- Mar 2013
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO

Revisi
on
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
25/1/2011
First Issue
Rev 1
Feb 2013
Some text modified and spec. Number changed to TS-CO-6 and

spec. fitted in specified format.
Rev 2
Mar 2013
Earthing provision included
TS-CO-06 R2a Spun concrete poles and accessories C.docxRev -2- Mar 2013
Page: i , 4-Apr-13
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
SPUN CONCRETE POLES & ACCESSORIES
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
4.
1
5.
DESIGN OF POLES
4
6.
POLE LENGTH, SHAPE AND DESIGN LOADING
5
7.
POLE ACCESSORIES
6
8.
MARKING AND PACKAGING
10
9.
SCHEDULES
10
Page: ii , 4-Apr-13
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO
SPUN CONCRETE POLES & ACCESSORIES

1.
SCOPE
This specification covers the Design, Manufacture, Testing and delivery of spun
concrete poles and their accessories
2.

The Equipment/Material shall be used in installations at altitudes up to 3000M
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The requirements of the following standards / specifications shall be met where
applicable unless otherwise stated in this specification.
ASTM C39
Concrete compression strength testing
ASTM C143
Concrete slump testing
ASTM C150
Specification for Portland cement
ASTM C172
Sampling freshly mixed concrete
ASTM C494
Chemical admixtures for concrete
BS 4190
ISO metric black hexagonal bolts, screws and nuts.
BS 5896
High tensile steel wire and strand for the prestressing of

concrete
ISO9001/ISO9002 Quality Systems

ISO 3839
3.1
Classification by compressive strength
CONFLICT
See Spec .TS-GN-02 General Contractual obligations
4.

Please see TS- GN-02 General Contractual obligations.
4.1
TESTING ARRANGEMENT
Poles shall be tested in the horizontal position in a testing frame. The testing
arrangement shall be provided with sufficient supports to ensure that bending
moments developed by the self-weight of the pole are minimal. These supports
shall be detailed to give no horizontal resistance to the applied test load. The
accuracy of all load and deflection measuring equipment shall be 2 percent.
Note -To eliminate the effects of movement of the reaction blocks at ground level
and the butt of the pole, the zero position of the deflections measuring ruler at
Page: 1 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 4 - INSPECTION AND TESTING
the top of the pole must be corrected before each deflection reading. This
correction can be made each time by projecting the line between centre marks at
the butt and ground level reaction posts.
4.2
COST OF TESTING
The cost of all pole testing shall be allowed for in the Bid Price. This shall include
any additional testing instructed to be carried out by the Purchaser to prove that a
class of pole satisfies all design requirements. These shall be carried out before full
scale manufacture of a class of pole commences, after any changes are made to
the approved design of a class of pole, or at any time the Purchaser 's
Representative considers necessary to confirm that any class of pole still satisfies
the design requirements.
4.3
TYPE TEST
These shall be carried out before full scale manufacture of a class of pole
commences, after any changes are made to the approved design of a class of pole,
or at any time the Purchaser's Representative considers necessary to confirm that
any class of pole still satisfies the design requirements.
A sample consisting of three of each pole class (selected at random) for each
loading shall be subjected to the Type Test. The test results shall comply with the
acceptance criteria at the end of this Section.
Type tests shall be carried out in 2 stages:
1stStage:
The load shall be gradually and uniformly applied in increments of 10% of the
ultimate design load up to 125% of the design working load. At each increment of
load the deflection of the pole tip shall be measured. Deflections shall be graphed
against the applied load and the graph shall indicate a consistent relationship
between load and deflection.
When measuring deflection at the tip of the pole, allowance shall be made for any
strain movement in the reaction posts of the testing arrangement.
The loads at which any cracks become visible shall also be recorded as well as
their location and their extent. A volatile liquid such as methylated spirits (methyl
alcohol) shall be applied to the concrete surface so that cracks may be readily
observed at all load increments.
The 125% loading shall be maintained for 5 minutes, and the pole shall be
inspected for any cracks. The load shall then be gradually reduced to zero and the
amount of permanent deflection of the pole top recorded.
2nd Stage:
The test load shall be gradually reapplied up to the design working load and the
deflection recorded. The load shall then be increased in 10% increments until
failure occurs. At each load increment the load and deflection shall be recorded.
The following particulars shall be recorded for both types of test:
(i)
Manufacturer's name and plant location.
(ii)
Pole classification and type.
Page: 2 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
(iii)
Dimensions of the pole.
(iv)
Date manufactured.
(v)
Date tested.
(vi)
Concrete compression strength at the time of testing.
(vii)
Increments of load.
(viii)
Deflections at each increment of load -for both Stage 1 and Stage 2 loads.
(ix)
Permanent deflection after removal of 1st stage loading.
(x)
Location of all cracking on a plan and elevation drawing of the pole, and the loads
when cracking occurred.
(xi)
Load at failure.
(xii)
Nature of failure.
Colour photographs along the axis of the pole at design working and design
ultimate loads, plus photographs of the failure zone on the pole.
A sample of three poles for each pole class shall be considered acceptable if:
(xiii)
No visible cracking occurs up to 125% of the design working load in any of the
poles tested.
(xiv)
Permanent deflection of the tip of each pole, after the 1st stage test loading is
removed, does not exceed 1 mm per meter of pole length.
(xv)
The average failure strength of the three poles tested equals or exceeds the
specified ultimate design strength, and the failure strength of any single pole is not
less than 0.90 times the ultimate design strength.
The Contractor shall keep records of all Type Tests, and provide three copies to
the Employer's Representative.
4.4
ROUTINE TESTS
Routine tests shall consist of,
4.5
(i)
Dimension checks.
(ii)
Weight checks.
(iii)
Visual checks (signs of cracks and chips, quality of surface finish, longitudinal
alignment, insufficient cover over reinforcement, treatment of stressing wires at
ends of poles, etc)
(iv)
Position of holes for attachment of fittings.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
This test shall be carried out on poles selected at random by the Employer at the
rate of 1 per 100 or fewer of each class of pole manufactured at the plant. Test
loadings shall be applied in the same increments as the Type Test 1st stage loading.
The poles will be considered acceptable if the deflection at each load increment
and the permanent deflection upon removal of load does not exceed by more
than 15% the average of acceptable tests of the corresponding values for 1st stage
Page: 3 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 5 - DESIGN OF POLES
loading of the Type Tests. The Contractor shall keep records of all Proof Testing,
and provide two copies to the Employers Representative.
4.6
FAILURE TO SATISFY ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

In the event that a pole does not satisfy any of the above acceptance criteria for
Type or Acceptance Tests, then one more pole (from the same batch if a pole fails
a Proof Test) shall be tested for everyone that does not meet these acceptance
criteria. If any of these additional poles fail to satisfy the acceptance criteria then
the Employer's Representative will hold consultations with the Contractor, and if
so instructed the Contractor shall modify his pole design or manufacturing
procedure to increase the strength of the pole and/or remove the manufacturing
deficiency.
In the event that any of the above acceptance criteria are not satisfied, and at the
discretion of the Employer, any poles manufactured in the same manner as those
that have failed the acceptance tests may be rejected or Downgraded in strength
rating. Where the strength rating is downgraded than the permanent strength
rating markings on each affected pole shall be adjusted.
5.
DESIGN OF POLES
5.1
GENERAL
Each type of pole shall be designed to resist without failure, the ultimate strength
bending moment at ground level defined in this specification. The proof of the
ultimate strength of each type of pole will be in accordance with the Type Tests
carried out as defined in the section on Testing of Poles"
Serviceability calculations shall also be made in accordance with an appropriate
international pre-stressed concrete design standard to ensure adequate
performance of the poles under the design working loads defined in this
specification. Refer also to the acceptance criteria defined in the section on, "Type
Testing", last paragraph.
The Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser, detailed design calculations and
construction drawings for all aspects of design of all of the pole classes scheduled
herein.
5.2
DEFLECTION
The maximum allowable top deflection under the design working load applied in
accordance with "Testing of Poles", shall be H/25 where H = total pole length.
5.3
POLE MARKINGS
All poles shall be clearly and indelibly marked at a position approximately 3.5
meters from the butt end with:
Date of manufacture and identification mark of manufacturer.
Length of pole in meters and its design working load, as defined in this
Specification.
For example a 9 meter pole with a 5 kN working load and safety factor 2.5 shall
be marked: 9/52.5.
Page: 4 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 6 - POLE LENGTH, SHAPE AND

DESIGN LOADING
Poles shall also be marked with a permanent horizontal at the design ground line
(determined as 1/10 of the pole length plus 600 mm), and at the design lifting
points.
5.4
DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES
The permitted variation from a stated dimension or cross-sectional shape of the
finished pole shall be as follows:
Length + 15 mm, -10 mm (allowance shall be made during design for length
reduction by prestressing forces).
Cross-section Overall dimensions and dimensions of parts, 2 mm
Straightness Deviation from a straight line joining the centre of the top and the
centre of the butt of a pole, 15 mm
Deviation from a straight line on the surface of a pole measured between the
ground line and a point 50 mm below the top, 5 mm
Holes Diameter -0, + 2 mm, Relative position 5 mm
Location of steel 3 mm, but specified covers shall not be reduced, and the pole
straightness reinforcement and shall remain within the specified tolerances.
Notwithstanding all of the above, the faces of every pole shall be straight and free
of significant local variation; any departure may lead to its rejection by the
Purchaser.
5.5
SURFACE FINISHES
All poles shall have a surface finish that is smooth, hard, uniform in colour and
appearance and free from any honeycombing and air pockets exceeding 4mm in
diameter, and 3mm in depth. All fins and other projections shall be rubbed down
or ground flush with the general surface of the pole. Repair of defective concrete
will not be permitted and any pole containing defective concrete will be rejected
by the Employer.
6.
POLE LENGTH, SHAPE AND DESIGN LOADING
6.1
GENERAL
Each pole shall be manufactured in one piece. All holes for the mounting of
equipment shall be cast in the poles during manufacture in accordance with the
drawings.
6.2
POLE LENGTH AND SHAPE

The assembled standard overall length of the poles manufactured under this
Contract shall be 9m, 12 m and 14m.
The Bidder shall submit a detailed description of the pole shape, method of pole
manufacture and detailed calculations for all aspects of design of the poles.
6.3
DESIGN LOADING
The standard design working loads in the transverse direction shall be as follows:
Page: 5 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
Total Length Meters

and Strength Class
SECTION 7 - POLE ACCESSORIES
Design Load Applied 300

mm Below Pole Top (kN)
Design Bending Moment

At Ground Level (kNm)
9m, 2kN
14.40
9m, 5kN
36.00
9m, 8kN
57.60
12m, 3kN
29.10
12m, 6kN
58.20
12m, 9kN
87.30
14m, 4kN
45.46
14m, 6.5kN
6.5
73.88
14m, 10kN
10
113.66
The ultimate pole top load to be used for designing each class of pole shall be a
factor of safety (F.O.S.) (k = 2.5) times the appropriate standard design working
load scheduled above. Ultimate design forces to be used for the pole design shall
result from this load applied to the pole when held in the standard test frame
specified in the pole testing section of this specification.
6.4
EARTHING
Earthing shall be provided by having a length of 8 SWG Galvanised Iron(GI) wire
embedded in concrete during manufacture and the ends of the wires left
projecting out from the pole to a length of 100 mm to enable extension of
earthing wire during installation. This shall come out of the pole at the top side at
250 mm from top and about 1m from the bottom of the pole. The earth wire
shall be mechanically connected as much as possible to the steel reinforcement of
the pole.
6.5
PREFORMED FIXING HOLES ON POLES

Equipment erecting holes shall be as shown on the attached drawings. These shell
be used to install cross arms, straps, transformers surge arresters etc.
7.
POLE ACCESSORIES
Pole accessories may or may not be order together with the poles. This shall be
specified in the scope of work and the schedule of prices. If this is part of a
turnkey contract then all accessories shall be included in the scope of works. Their
inclusion in the prices shall be stated clearly.
7.1
CROSS ARM
Cross arm shall be manufactured from channel and angle section steel, hot dip
galvanized after fabrication, particular care shall be taken so as to reduce
embrittling the steel during the galvanizing process. All holes for the mounting of
pin insulators and string insulators shall be drilled to suit the components to be
attached before galvanising.
Page: 6 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
Angle section cross arm shall in general be used for single and double pin and line
post insulator positions. The angle section shall have welded cleats at the pin
positions to allow the fitting of standard insulator pins and studs.
Strain (dead end) cross arm shall be constructed from channel section steel, with
suitable provision for pin and line post insulators for jumpers.
All cross arm shall be fitted with flat section hot dip galvanized steel cross arm
braces. The minimum thickness of all section shall be 6 mm.
The centre phase conductor shall be supported independently of the cross arm on
purpose designed brackets that attach directly to the pole.
All bolts associated with cross arm shall be M16 hot dip galvanized.
The conductor loads to be used for designing the cross arm and the insulator
brackets (in the case of the centre phase) shall be a factor of safety (F.O.S.) of 2.5
times the appropriate standard design working load scheduled below:
The following minimum characteristics shall apply to all cross arm:
Cross arm Type
Per Conductor Design Working Load (kN)

vertical
transverse
longitudinal
Single Pin or Line

post insulator
Double Pin or Line
post insulator
Tension insulator
7.2
2.0
5.0
3.0
4.0
8.0
5.0
4.0
16.0
20.0
POLE FITTINGS
The following pole fittings shall be provided: Single cross arm, complete with two
cross arm braces and all necessary nuts, bolts and washers for attachment to the
pole.
a)
Double cross arm, complete with two cross arm braces, spacers, and all necessary
nuts, bolts and washers for attachment to the pole.
b)
Distribution transformers pole mounting steelwork, complete with all necessary

nuts, bolts and washers for attachment to the pole.
c)
Line post insulator attachment fittings.
d)
Guy wire attachment fittings.

The fittings shall not compromise the strength of the pole and if required spacers
shall be installed to avoid compression of the pole. Pole fittings shall be
manufactured from the materials specified in this specification. They are to be
supplied complete with all necessary nuts, bolts and washers to attach the
respective equipment to the poles.
7.3
CROSS MEMBERS FOR TRANSFORMERS

Structural steel cross members are required for the two pole 15/0.4 kV and
33/0.4kV distribution transformers. These cross members are required to support
the surge arresters, the drop out fuses, and the distribution transformers. The
cross-members shall be designed to adequately support the static load of the
equipment plus the live load of maintenance personnel. The Contractor shall
Page: 7 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
submit detailed design drawings to the Employer's Representative for approval

prior to manufacture.
Suitable classes of steel for the cross members are low tensile steel (yield point
220 -260 N/mm2 and a high tensile steel (yield point 300 -350 N/mm2).
Steel shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A 143 and embrittlement tests
shall be made in accordance with that specification.
Bidders shall note that all components/sub-items required to complete the
assemblies are included in this scope.
7.4
GALVANIZING
All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized. Large steel parts shall be hot-dip
galvanized to a mean thickness of 70 m and a minimum thickness of 65 m.
Steel sheets with a thickness of less than 5 mm may be hot-dip galvanized to a
mean thickness of 60 m and a minimum thickness of 50 m.
The zinc coating shall meet the requirements according to BS 729, ASTM, A 123,
A 153, A239 and A385. The purity of the zinc in the galvanizing bath shall not be
less than 98%.
All steel shall be fully fabricated before galvanizing, no machine or shop work,
boring, punching etc., will be allowed after galvanizing.
7.5
NUTS AND BOLTS

Nuts and bolts shall conform to ISO recommendations, as applicable, for metric
threads and spring washers to ISO 630 "Structural Steels" strength 41 kg/mm2 or
more. Nuts and heads of all bolts shall be of the hexagonal type and of uniform
outline dimension.
All washers are to be included under this Contract, including locking devices and
anti-vibration arrangements, which are to be subject to the approval of the
Employer's representative. The washers shall be of adequate thickness to abridge
the projection of the shaft and the commencement of the threaded portion.
Nuts shall be finger tight on the bolt and will be rejected if they are, in the opinion
of the Employer's Representative, considered to have an excessively loose or tight
fit. Bolts with re-cut threads after galvanizing will be rejected.
7.6
GUYING
Materials for guying include pole eyebolts, thimbles, guy wire, guy grip dead ends,
guy insulators, and anchor rods. The design and supply of buried concrete dead
end will be the responsibility of the erection Contractor.
7.6.1
Pole eyebolts.
Galvanized steel eyebolts shall be used to attach the guy wire to the concrete
poles. The eyebolts shall be M16, of length to suit the pole dimension at the point
of fixing, with an eye of internal diameter 40mm. The thread length shall be
sufficient for the range of pole dimensions. Each eyebolt shall be supplied fitted
with 75 x 75 x 6mm square galvanized washer and two galvanized nuts. The shape
of the eye shall be such that when the eyebolt is fully tightened that the eye does
not damage the concrete pole.
Page: 8 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
The pole eyebolts shall be packed in durable non-ferrous containers holding

approximately 100 eyebolts and suitable for outdoor storage. The containers shall
be legibly and durably marked in the English language with a description of the
contents. Multiple containers shall be secured to pallets for transport.
7.6.2
Eyebolt thimbles
Galvanized steel thimbles are required on the eyes of pole eyebolts and anchor
rods. The thimbles shall be suitably dimensioned for the loop on the helical guy
grip dead end fittings. The minimum failing load shall be not less than 98kN. The
thimbles shall be of the open type suitable for eyes formed from both 16mm and
20mm diameter rod.
Thimbles shall be packed in durable non-ferrous containers containing
approximately 100 thimbles and suitable for outdoor storage. The containers shall
be legibly and durably marked in the English language with a description of the
contents. Multiple containers shall be secured to pallets for transport.
7.6.3
Stay wire
Galvanized steel stay wire shall be suitable for the guying of concrete poles in a
tropical outdoor environment. The stay wire shall be 7/4.00 SC/GZ, constructed
of high tensile grade strand, and of minimum ultimate breaking load 103kN. The
stay wire shall be in accordance with AS1222.1 or equivalent. Alternatives to
another recognized national standard may be proposed by the bidder provided
that it is shown they are equal or better. A copy of the relevant parts of any
alternative Standard shall be included with the bid.
The stay wire shall be packed on substantial, reinforced, non-returnable drums.
The drums shall be of robust construction suitable in all respects for international
transport, outdoor storage in a tropical climate for a least three years without
harmful deterioration, and rough on-site handling. All drums that have a gross
weight greater than 500 kg shall have a reinforced central bore. The drums shall
be fully lagged.
Each drum disc shall be legibly marked on the outside with lettering not less than
50mm high showing the makers name, stay wire stranding and material, packed
length, and gross weight. The required drum lengths are shown in the Technical
Data Sheets.
7.6.4
Guy Grip Dead End

The guy grip termination fittings shall be supplied for termination of
7/4.00SC/GZ stay wires on thimbles fixed to pole eyebolts, thimbles fixed to
anchor bolts, and directly to the porcelain guy strain insulators. The helical fittings
shall be manufactured from galvanized steel and shall be compatible with the stay
materials.
The minimum failing load of the fittings shall be not less than 100% of the
breaking load of the matching stay wire. The loop dimensions shall be suitable for
the matching clevis-thimble fittings and the guy insulators. The fittings shall have
marks to show the crossover points for correct installation.
The fittings shall be packed in sets of twelve units cardboard or similar durable
boxes. Each box shall be clearly labelled with the makers name or trade mark, and
Page: 9 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 8 - MARKING AND PACKAGING
a description and quantity of the contents. Each box shall include full installation
instructions.
7.6.5
Guy Insulators
Guy strain insulators shall be suitable for insertion in tensioned guys in outdoor
service in a hot humid tropical climate. The insulators shall be porcelain, of a
heavily fluted profile, and glaze colour mussel grey or similar. The minimum
failing load shall be 70kN. The insulators shall have a minimum power-frequency
wet r.m.s. flashover voltage of 20kV.
8.
MARKING AND PACKAGING
8.1
INSULATORS
Each insulator shall be durably and legibly marked with the name or trade mark of
the manufacturer, the year of manufacture, the catalogue number, and the
minimum mechanical failing load.
The insulators shall be packaged in heavy duty cardboard boxes containing 6
insulators. The boxes shall be packed in an outer timber crate containing
approximately 100 insulators and placed on a pallet. The packing shall afford
adequate protection for the insulators during international transportation and
rough handling during delivery to site.
8.2
ANCHOR RODS
Anchor rods are required for attachment of the stay wire to a buried dead pan or
anchor block installed with the eye close to ground level. The rods shall be of
galvanized steel, minimum failing load 98kN, 2000mm x M20, with an eye of
internal diameter 40mm. The rods shall have a thread length not less than 50mm
and be supplied fitted with one 200 x 200 x 6mm square galvanized steel washer,
and two full sized galvanized M20 nuts.
Anchor rods shall be securely bundled in packs of 10 rods. For international
transport the packs may be further bundled in packs of 10 (100 anchor rods total).
9.
SCHEDULES
9.1
SCHEDULE FOR SPUN CONCRETE POLES

Please see separate technical schedule TS-CO-06 S
Page: 10 , 4-Apr-13
SECTION 9 - SCHEDULES
EEPCO
9.2

Schedule Ref TS-CO-06 NC1
Specification Clause
Page: 1 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
9.3

Item Reference TS-CO-06 -TC1
Specification
Clause
Page: 2 , 4-Apr-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule: TS-CO-06-S

Technical Schedule for Spun Concrete Poles
No
Item
Unit
Requirement Bid Offer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer's Code N0
Type
Cross-section of pole
Length of pole
- 9m, Type T (8kN)
mm
9000
- 9m, Type A (5kN)
mm
9000
- 9m, Type S (2kN)
mm
9000
- 12m, Type T (9kN)
mm
12000
10
- 12m, Type A (6kN)
mm
12000
11
- 12m, Type S (3kN)
mm
12000
12
13
14
- 14m , Type T (10kN)
mm
14000
- 14m , Type A (6.5kN)
mm
14000
- 14m , Type S (4kN)
mm
14000
15
Diameter at pole base
16
- 9m, Type T (8kN)
mm
260
17
- 9m, Type A (5kN)
mm
260
18
- 9m, Type S (2kN)
mm
260
19
- 12m, Type T (9kN)
mm
350
20
- 12m, Type A (6kN)
mm
350
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
- 12m, Type S (3kN)
mm
350
- 14m , Type T (10kN)
mm
377
- 14m , Type A (6.5kN)
mm
377
mm
377
- 9m, Type T (8kN)
mm
160
- 9m, Type A (5kN)
mm
160
- 9m, Type S (2kN)
mm
160
- 12m, Type T (9kN)
mm
190
- 12m, Type A (6kN)
mm
190
- 12m, Type S (3kN)
mm
190
- 14m , Type T (10kN)
mm
190
- 14m , Type A (6.5kN)
mm
190
mm
190
Prestressed
Spun concrete
Circular
Diameter at pole top
Weight of pole
File:TS-CO-06-S Spun concrete Poles C.xlsm- sheet:TS-CO-06-S
Page 1
Date: 04/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
Item
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
EEPCo
Technical Schedule: TS-CO-06-S

Unit
- 9m, Type T (8kN)
kg
- 9m, Type A (5kN)
kg
- 9m, Type S (2kN)
kg
- 12m, Type T (9kN)
kg
- 12m, Type A (6kN)
kg
- 12m, Type S (3kN)
kg
- 14m , Type T (10kN)
kg
- 14m , Type A (6.5kN)
kg
kg
Design bending moment all K=2.5

- 9m, Type T (8kN)
kN.m
57.6
- 9m, Type A (5kN)
kN.m
36
- 9m, Type S (2kN)
kN.m
14.4
- 12m, Type T (9kN)
kN.m
87.3
- 12m, Type A (6kN)
kN.m
58.2
- 12m, Type S (3kN)
kN.m
29.1
- 14m , Type T (10kN)
kN.m
113.66
- 14m , Type A (6.5kN)
kN.m
73.88
kN.m
45.46
Details of earthing arragement/ wire

provided
File:TS-CO-06-S Spun concrete Poles C.xlsm- sheet:TS-CO-06-S
Page 2
Date: 04/04/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-GN-01
EEPCO System and Environmental Data
Rev -2- Mar 2013
SPECIFICATION TS-GN-01
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
12 Dec 2012
Revised EEPCo Specification with LPA consultants comments
Rev 1
Feb 2013
Certain clauses modified .
Rev 2
Mar 2013
Insulation parameters modified.
TS-GN-01 R3 System and Environmental data C.docx
Rev -2- Mar 2013
Page: i , Rev -2- Mar 2013
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
1.
SCOPE
2.
SYSTEM PARAMETERS AND DESIGN DATA
3.
CLIMATIC & GEOGRAPHIC CONDITION
Rev -2- Mar 2013
PAGE NO
1
1
2
Page: ii , Rev -2- Mar 2013
SECTION 1- SCOPE
EEPCO
SYSTEM AND ENVIRONMENTAL DATA

1.
SCOPE
This specification defines and declares the System and the Environmental data
applicable to the EEPCO system.
This data forms the basis for the design and system operation and all equipment
and material specification refer to this specification by default if it is not
mentioned exclusively in the particular specification.
2.
SYSTEM PARAMETERS AND DESIGN DATA

Parameter
33 kV System
15kV System
LV System
Nominal voltage Un
33 kV
15 kV
400/230 V
Maximum Voltage Variation
10%
10%
10%
Highest Voltage of the

Equipment Umaxas per IEC at
Sea level and for equipment
with internal insulation, eg in
oil.
36 kV
17.5 kV
440/253 V
Highest Voltage of the

Equipment at 3000M for
equipment exposed to air. This
is effectively the highest
52 kV
24 kV
0.6/1 kV
Rated frequency
50 Hz
50 Hz
50 Hz
3 phase, 3 wire
3 phase, 3 wire
3 phase, 4 wire
System configuration
1 phase, 2 wire
Earthing
Via earthing trans- Via earthing

former/ resistor
trans-former/
resistor
IEC 60071-1, -2
IEC 60071-1, -2
Neutral Solidly
earthed
IEC 60071-1, -2
Standard power frequency

short duration voltage 1min at
3000M for equipment exposed
to air.
95 kV
50 kV
3 kV
Standard Lightning Impulse

Withstand voltage (peak) at
3000M for equipment exposed
to air.
250 kV
125 kV
6 kV
25 kA/1 sec
20 kA/1 sec
12.5 kA/1 sec
450 mm
350 mm
200 mm
Rated Short Circuit Current

Minimum phase-to-phase air
clearance at 3000M for
Page: 1, Rev -2- Mar 2013
SECTION 3- CLIMATIC & GEOGRAPHIC

CONDITION
EEPCO
Parameter
equipment exposed to air.
33 kV System
15kV System
LV System
Minimum phase-to-earth air

clearance at 3000M for
equipment exposed to air.
400mm
300
150
Creepage distance outdoor

selected for medium pollution
20mm/kV
20mm/kV
60mm
Dyn 5
Dyn 5
Transformer
MV/LV
3.
Vector
group
CLIMATIC & GEOGRAPHIC CONDITION

Item
Altitude
Annual Rainfall
Period of exceptional Rains
Ambient Air Temperatures:
Average
Minimum
Maximum
Relative Air Humidity
Wind Velocity:
Maximum wind( height above
ground level)
0-30m
30-50m
Parameter
Any altitude up to 3000 m
1250 mm
June to September
Isoceraunic Level
Seismic Level
Upto 100 thunderstorm days/year

No records of any activity
+ 250c
-50c
450c
70%
35m/s
45m/s
Page: 2, Rev -2- Mar 2013
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-GN-02
General Contractual Obligations
Rev -1- Feb 2013
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
12 Dec 2012
Rev 1
Feb 2013
Some text modified regarding inspection and testing
TS-GN-02 R1 General contractual obligations.docx
Rev -1- Feb 2013
Page: i , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
GENERAL CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
SUFFICIENCY OF THE WORKS
1
4.
DESIGN OF THE WORKS
1
5.
SUBMITTALS WITH THE BID
1
6.
SAFETY PRACTICES
2
7.
LANGUAGE
3
8.
SYSTEM OF UNITS
3
9.
STANDARDS
3
10.
INSTALLATION, OPERATING, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
4
11.
DOCUMENTS AND DRAWINGS TO BE SUBMITTED
WITH BID
4
12.
SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS AND DRAWINGS
5
13.
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS
6
14.
DETAIL DRAWINGS
6
15.
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
6
16.
WIRING DIAGRAMS
7
17.
MATERIAL SELECTION
7
18.
TRANSPORT TO SITE
7
19.
PACKING AND SHIPPING
8
20.
INSPECTION, TESTING AND EXPEDITING
9
21.
TRAINING OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE STAFF 10
22.
CONTRACTORS CONSTRUCTION PERSONNEL
11
Rev -1- Feb 2013
Page: ii , 4-Apr-13
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO
GENERAL CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS

1.
SCOPE
This specification defines and declares the General Contractual Obligations
applicable with installation contracts in the EEPCO system.
These obligations form the basis for the scope of works and basic specification of
works, equipment and materials. This is applicable by default to all scope and
specifications unless it is modified in the particular specification or scope.
2.

3.
SUFFICIENCY OF THE WORKS

The Supplier shall design, supply, and test all materials, items and components so
that the materials described herein shall be satisfactory for their intended purpose.
4.
DESIGN OF THE WORKS

Where the specified materials and assemblies require design to determine
dimensions, strength, rating, durability, etc, the Supplier shall undertake all
necessary design work in accordance with the design criteria and specifications
given in this Bid Document, and as shown on the Bid Drawings. The Supplier
shall optimize the design of each component in accordance with the design
criteria and specifications, and as shown on the Bid Drawings, in order to achieve
the most economic design.
All construction shall be in accordance with the relevant parts of the Employerss
Design Standards.
Where appropriate design criteria or specifications are not indicated in the
specifications s Requirements or shown on the Bid Drawings, then the Supplier
shall carry out the design work in accordance with generally accepted engineering
design theories, principles and criteria, to the satisfaction of the Employer.
The Supplier shall provide the Employer with fully detailed design drawings,
detailed design reports and design calculations relating to the Goods. All design
work shall be subject to the approval of the Employer
5.
SUBMITTALS WITH THE BID
5.1
GENERAL
In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions of Contract, the
Conditions of Particular Application, and the Employers Requirements, the
Bidder shall submit with the bid full technical details of all equipment/materials
and supplied for installation on the Works. This shall include but not be limited to
confirmation of:
The information listed in the Technical Schedules
Type test reports of equipment/materials offered issued by an international
test laboratory.
Rev -1- Feb 2013
Page: 1 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 6 - SAFETY PRACTICES
Compliance with the specification sections of the Employer 's Requirements

Provision of dimensioned drawings
Other information as may be reasonably required to confirm that the materials
are of satisfactory quality and of technical characteristics so as to be suitable
for the Works.
5.2
APPROVALS
The Contractor shall submit for approval to the Employer and/or the
Employer's Representative full technical design details of all proposed
construction. This shall include but not be limited to confirmation of:
Detailed designs supported by relevant calculations
Drawings showing the location of all works.
The designs shall show:
Constructional features of planned buildings, and substations
Overhead line routes.
Underground cable route
Standard pole configurations
Electrical ratings and equipment selection (transformer capacity, cable size,
fuse size, etc)
Approval shall be obtained before any installation or construction is
commenced. The Employers undertakes to respond to any request for
approval in a reasonable period of time.
6.
SAFETY PRACTICES
All work shall be undertaken with close attention to high standards of safety to
works, the public, and to the Employer and other owners plant equipement.
All of the Contractors personnel shall be effectively trained and competent in
safe working practices that must be adhered to at all times. All personnel shall be
issued with and use at all times relevant personal and work gang relared safety
equipment that shall be maintained in good order and condition by the
Contractor.
Personal safety equipment for linesmen and others working on the network shall
include but not be limited to :
Safety helmet
Safety clothing that covers arms and legs
Safety footwear
Protective gloves
Water proof gear.
In addition linesmen who work on poles or from ladders or elevated platforms
shall be supplied with and use at all times:
Safety belts and/or harnesses
Insulating gloves for when working on or in proximity to energised LV circuits
Suitably rated insulated gloves when operating energised MV equipment.
Rev -1- Feb 2013
Page: 2 , 4-Apr-13
SECTION 7 - LANGUAGE
EEPCO
The Contractor shall encourage and adhere at al time to safe working pratices.
7.
LANGUAGE
The English language shall be used on all Contract documents and in all
correspondence between the Contractor and the Employer' Employers s
Representative, and between the Contractor and the Employer .
8.
SYSTEM OF UNITS
In all correspondence, in all technical schedules and on all drawings metric, units
of measurement (Systeme Internationals) system of units shall exclusively be used.
Dimensions in meters and millimetres unless specified otherwise
The unit of mass is the kilogram (kg)
The unit of force is the Newton (N).
9.
STANDARDS
The equipment supplied under this contract shall conform to the latest edition of
the appropriate IEC specifications or other recognized international standards.
All workmanship employed on, and materials incorporated into the Goods shall,
except where specified otherwise or where specific Standards are referred to,
comply with the latest issues of the Standards and Codes of Practice, as relevant
and appropriate, published by the following organizations:
ISO
International Standards Organization (ISO)
IEC
International Electro technical Commission standards
BSI
British Standards Institution
AASHTO
American Society of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ACI
American Concrete Institute
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS
American Welding Society
DIN
German Institute for Standardization
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
JIS
Japanese Industrial Standard
SAA
Standards Association of Australia
SABS
South African Bureau of Standards
USBR
United States Bureau of Reclamation
The use of Standards and Codes of Practice other than those mentioned above
shall be subject to the approval of the Employer . The Contractor shall provide
the Employer with a complete list of all Standards and Codes of Practice that he
intends to use, other than those specified herein, within eight calendar weeks from
the Effective Date, for the approval of the Employer .
The Contractor shall provide to the Employer , English language copies of any
Standards and Codes of Practice, which the Contractor wishes to use. The
Contractor shall provide English language translations of any Standards and
Rev -1- Feb 2013
Page: 3 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 10 - INSTALLATION, OPERATING,

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS
Codes of Practice which the Contractor wishes to use and which are in a language
other than English.
All Goods supplied shall conform to the latest editions of the International
Electro technical Commission (IEC) Specifications unless stated otherwise.
Goods offered from a country where the relevant Standards to which the items
and components conform that are, in the opinion of the Employer, equal to or
better than IEC are acceptable, but details of the relevant Standards shall be
provided to the Employer. Full details of differences that affect the design or
performance of the Materials shall be stated in the bid and English translations of
any such alternative Standards shall be supplied by the Contractor when requested
by the Employer.
10.
INSTALLATION, OPERATING, SERVICE AND

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
The Contract Price shall be deemed to include illustrated installation, operating,
service and maintenance instructions for the Materials, which shall be written in
the English language.
Two copies of every manual shall be provided to the Employer prior to the
commencement of delivery to the Employer warehouse.
The manuals shall include parts catalogues, and details of equipment installation,
operation, maintenance and repair. If the manufacturers standard bulletins are
supplied, they shall be clearly marked to indicate the specifications applicable to
the particular equipment that is supplied. Each manual shall include a full set of
assembly drawings, including wiring diagrams, reduced where necessary to A3
size.
Prior to taking over, the manuals shall be revised to as-built status and ten copies
shall be re-produced as a book or books of approximately A4 size and bound into
strong durable covers. All drawings of original size bigger than A3 or larger shall
be produced as A4 size with proper cross referencing.
11.
DOCUMENTS AND DRAWINGS TO BE

SUBMITTED WITH BID
As a minimum, the following documents and drawings shall be submitted with
the Bid.
Drawings and brochures showing details of construction, dimensions and
technical feature of:
Auto-reclosers
Conductors, cables and accessories
CTs, VTs
Earthing materials
Guying
Insulators
LV capacitors
LV fuse switch disconnections and LV fuses
Rev -1- Feb 2013
Page: 4 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 12 - SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS AND

DRAWINGS
Measuring equipment and tools

Meters and meter cabinets
MV arrester
MV Fuse cut-out Fuse cut out assembly and MV fuses
MV load break switch
Sectionalisers
Sundry materials
Transformers
Voltage Regulators
Circuit Breakers
Ring Main Units
Independent type test certificate for:
Conductors and cables

Capacitor Banks
Insulators
kWh meters
LV capacitors
MV arrester
MV Fuse cut out assembly and MV fuses
MV load break switch
Transformers
CTs, VTs
Sectionalisers
Circuit Breakers
Ring Main Units
Voltage Regulator
General bar chart of the manufacturing, shipping, and delivery schedule for all
items of the Goods
12.
SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS AND DRAWINGS
12.1
GENERAL
The Supplier shall be responsible for the submission, re-submission and approval
as may be required of all the documents and drawings listed below, so that there
shall be no delay to the work due to the absence of such documents and drawings.
Any approval by the Employer will not relieve the Supplier of any obligations
under the Contract.
Any alterations to the documents and drawings which may be required by the
Employer for approval shall be made by the Supplier at his own expense. All
materials and work involved in their manufacture shall be as indicated in such
drawings.
Rev -1- Feb 2013
Page: 5 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 13 - GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

DRAWINGS
No work shall be done on any part of the Goods, the design or construction of
which is dependent on the approval of such drawings or data, until such approval
has been given. The Supplier shall submit three prints of each drawing for
approval marked Proposal Drawing. One copy will be returned to the Supplier
marked up with approval or any proposed alterations.
The Supplier shall provide the same number of further prints for any drawings
that are altered. All drawings, information, design reports, etc shall be neatly type
written or drafted in the English language, and be presented as bound documents.
The documents presented shall have neatly drawn title pages that clearly show the
name of the Employer, identify the project and site name, the contract number,
the date, the revision number, etc, and shall be provided with a table of contents.
The format and content of drawing titles shall be to the Employers standard.
Translations into Amharic (Ethiopia national language) may be included as
appropriate to facilitate construction work in the field.
13.
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS

The Supplier shall supply general arrangement drawings to show major
dimensions and with schedules listing all items with all relevant information
relating to rating, range, type, voltage, and manufacturer.
14.
DETAIL DRAWINGS
The Supplier shall supply detail drawings that shall show sufficient detail to
demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this specification.
15.
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
The Supplier shall provide schematic diagrams showing all the wiring work in all
the Equipment supplied. Schematic diagrams shall comply with the following
requirements:
Terminal numbers shall be clearly shown on the drawing and the equipment to
which they belong shall be identified.
Where a relay coil is shown, all contacts shall be indicated adjacent to it. All
contacts illustrated on another part of the diagrams shall be cross-referenced
and a brief description of their purpose given. The use of dotted lines to
associate a contact with its coil is acceptable.
All terminal numbers on panels, relays, instruments and the like shall be shown
on the schematic diagram.
It shall be possible to determine the location of any item of equipment from
the schematic diagram. All equipment labels and identification discs on valves
shall correspond with the schematic diagrams.
The schematic diagrams provided under this Contract shall show other
equipment when it is connected to equipment supplied under this Contract,
where necessary to ensure ready understanding of the drawings.
Schematic diagrams shall also be supplied for oil or any other system supplied,
and shall be prepared accordingly
Rev -1- Feb 2013
Page: 6 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
16.
SECTION 16 - WIRING DIAGRAMS
WIRING DIAGRAMS
The Supplier shall provide wiring tables and / or wiring diagrams.
16.1
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS, COMMISSIONING AND

COMPLETION REPORT
In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions of Contract, the
Conditions of Particular Application, and the Employer s 's Requirements the
Contractor shall submit to the Employer and/or the Employer s 's Representative
comprehensive as-built information of the Works as constructed and as at
takeover.
This shall include but not be limited to:
Accurately scaled drawings of all works
Comprehensive technical descriptions and operating instructions
Comprehensive maintenance manuals
Protection relays settings
Schedules and description of spares.
Drawings of line and cable routes shall be on A1 drawing sheets, to scale 1:2,000
(except where otherwise agreed or appropriate). Drawings of equipment and
buildings shall be in sufficient detail and of suitable scale to adequately show all
constructional features and detail. All drawings shall be in AutoCAD format using
internationally recognized symbols.
The Supplier shall submit 10 sets of As-Built drawings, and Commissioning and
Completion Report to the Employer. As-Built drawing sets shall be bound into
bound into strong durable imitation leather covers, matching the Installation,
Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
17.
MATERIAL SELECTION
In choosing materials and their finishes due regard shall be given to the humid
tropical conditions, and at some sites proximity to a coastal environment. The
Supplier shall submit to the Employer for approval details of his practices and
recommendations to prove the appropriateness of the chosen materials.
18.
TRANSPORT TO SITE
The Contract Price shall include all expenses in connection with the transport to
the specified destinations of all equipment, materials and items including handling,
permits, taxes, duties, insurance, and other charges that the Supplier may incur.
The Supplier shall arrange and bear the cost of insurance during transport, as
specified.
The Supplier shall observe any regulations which limit loads on roads and bridges
over which material or equipment may be conveyed, or alternatively at his own
cost make arrangements for any temporary strengthening or widening which may
be necessary.
After hand over, the handling and storage of any materials and equipment at the
specified destinations shall be at the risk of the Employer, and without
responsibility to the Supplier. The Supplier shall advise the Employer of any
Rev -1- Feb 2013
Page: 7 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 19 - PACKING AND SHIPPING
particular requirements for the protection of all materials and equipment against
corrosion and mechanical damage during storage and transport to the final
installation site.
The Supplier shall make all arrangements for taking delivery of the Materials, at
the various seaports or border crossing points involved, and for their
transportation to the specified destinations including the payment of port duties
and all charges. The Supplier shall allow in his programmed for any delays which
may be caused by port congestion or customs clearance, and allow for any
additional charges that may be incurred as a result of such delays.
19.
PACKING AND SHIPPING

Any items liable to be damaged in transit shall be effectively protected and
securely fixed in their cases. All lifts of over 2 tones shall be marked to show
where slings should be placed. All cases shall be clearly identified giving
particulars of the manufacturers name and type of equipment.
All identification marks on the outside of cases shall be waterproof and
permanent. All delicate electrical equipment shall be adequately sealed and
desiccating agents used where necessary to prevent damage from condensation.
All Materials and Equipment shall be adequately and suitably packed and
protected, bearing in mind that it will be shipped to a tropical zone, that covered
storage may not always be obtainable, and that a considerable time period may
elapse between its arrival at the warehouse and final installation.
All materials used in packing shall comply with the relevant local regulations.
Adequate protection and precautions are to be taken to exclude termites and
other vermin, noxious insects, larvae or fungus from the packing materials or
plant. All packaging and containers shall be clearly marked with the contents for
easy identification against the packing list.
The Supplier shall protect all steelwork before shipment, to prevent corrosion and
/ or damage by oxidation. Bundles of steel sections shall be securely tied together
by an approved method and care shall be taken to ensure that they are robust and
that they can be handled easily during shipment.
Bolts and nuts shall be double bagged and crated for shipment. Crating of
dissimilar metals is not permitted.
Packing cases shall be strongly constructed and in no case shall timber less than
20 mm in thickness be used. Timber used in packing cases shall be durable and
suitable for outdoor storage in a tropical climate for not less than 1 year. The
contents of packing cases shall be securely bolted or fastened in position with
struts or cross battens. Cross battens supporting weight in any direction shall not
rely for their support on nails or screws driven lengthways into the grain of the
wood, but shall be supported by cleats secured from the inside.
Particular attention shall be given to strutting before packing cases are fastened
down. Cases shall be up-ended after packing to prove that there is no movement
of the contents. Timber wedges or chocks shall be firmly fastened in place to
prevent their displacement when the timber shrinks.
If light parts are fastened to the sides of a case, hoop iron straps secured by
screws shall be used for the purpose. Nails driven in and bent over shall not be
permitted. Where bolts are used, large washers shall be fitted under the head and
Rev -1- Feb 2013
Page: 8 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 20 - INSPECTION, TESTING AND

EXPEDITING
nut to distribute the pressure, and the timber shall be strengthened by means of a
bearing pad.
The Supplier shall note that the use of untreated or un-impregnated conductor
and cable drums is at the Suppliers risk. If any evidence is found of deterioration
in drums during storage or on site which in the opinion of the Employer might
lead to delays in erection work, he shall forthwith require all remaining drums to
be strengthened, suitably protected, or the contents rewound on to replacement
drums at the Suppliers cost.
All machined parts shall be thoroughly protected against corrosion. Where
practicable, items such as electric motors, switch and control gear, instruments
and panels, machine components, etc., shall be cocooned or covered and the
enclosure provided internally with an approved desiccators.
20.
INSPECTION, TESTING AND EXPEDITING

The Employer/Employers representative shall be given access to the
Manufacturing Works(Factory) at all reasonable times for the purpose of
inspection of the manufacturing and testing facilities available in addition to
inspection of equipment/material.
The tests will be divided into the following categories:
1. Type Tests, 2.Rouitne Tests and 3. Acceptance Tests.
Prior to the tests the Contractor shall submit an outline of the procedures and
tests in its plans, to demonstrate fulfilment of the requirements specified in
subsequent sections of the detailed technical specification
Before regular manufacturing commences, samples of the equipment/
materials(i.e conductors/cables, insulators cross arms, transformers, Switchgear,
meters, meter boxes Auto reclosers load break switches and , fittings etc ) shall
be made available for testing to ensure compliance with the design.
The Employer reserves the right to call for type tests on the equipment/ material
at the contractors expense, on samples selected at random at the Manufacturer's
Works and witness these tests. If type test facilities are not available at the
Manufacturer's Works the tests would be conducted at an approved standard
Laboratory .Failure to meet the conditions of test could result in the rejection of
a complete batch of equipment/material.
The Employer will have the authority to delay delivery of any items of equipment,
which have not been tested and approved in accordance with the Contract.
The contractor shall report on progress and will compare the contractors
production programme with actual progress and shall report in a timely manner to
the Employer the reason for any delays.
During the course of manufacturing/fabrication, Routine tests shall be conducted
in accordance with the relevant IEC/BS/ISO standards.
The contractor shall submit copies of the Routine test reports of the equipment/
material along with the inspection offer.
Rev -1- Feb 2013
Page: 9 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 21 - TRAINING OF OPERATION

AND MAINTENANCE STAFF
The inspection and acceptance tests shall be carried out in accordance with the
provisions in the applicable standard, supplemented by the specific requirements
indicated in the technical specifications free of cost to the Employer.
At least 45 days notice of the date, time and place of all tests shall be given to the
Employer so that arrangements can be made to have the test witnessed.
21.
TRAINING OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

STAFF
The contractor shall provide training for the Employers operation and
maintenance staff in the correct use of the equipment/ materials supplied. The
training shall be carried out at each installation site in conjunction with scheme
installation and/or commissioning, and shall comprise:
Formal training in a classroom situation
Informal training and instruction during installation and commissioning of the
equipment
Hands-on training in operating and maintaining the distribution network and
component parts, after commissioning is completed.
For this training the Supplier shall provide at the Suppliers expense one electrical
expert who has knowledge of the electrical and mechanical systems for all the
materials provided under the contract. The Supplier shall liaise with the Employer
and Installation Supplier for the timing of the training and access to the
construction/installation site and equipment.
The training shall include appropriate course notes, and shall be presented in
English and Amharic (Ethiopian language). The trainees will be deputed by the
Employer,. The number of trainees per site will not be less than:
One operations manager
Two electrical test technicians
Two electric linesmen
Two cable jointers.
An outline of the proposed on-site training course for maintenance and operating
personnel for each distribution network shall be provided with the Bid. To
constitute the basis for effective staff training adequate training materials, such as
technical illustrative charts, schematics, detailed graphs of equipment, etc., shall be
included. The curriculum vitae of the proposed electrical expert shall be provided
with the Bid.
21.1
SITE TESTING
On completion of erection and before commissioning .the equipment shall be
fully tested to a schedule of tests previously agreed with the Employers's
Representative, to demonstrate its suitability for commercial use. The tests shall
include, but not be limited to.
Insulation resistance
Operation and load checks.
Earthing Resistance
Other tests, if any
Rev -1- Feb 2013
Page: 10 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
21.2
SECTION 22 - CONTRACTORS
CONSTRUCTION PERSONNEL
CERTIFICATES
Suitable certificates shall be prepared and completed for these tests and for each
site as required.
22.
CONTRACTORS CONSTRUCTION PERSONNEL

In addition to its project and site managers the Contractor shall provide work
gangs for specialist electrical work.
22.1
SUPERVISING FOREMAN
A Supervising Foreman will be required to be in overall charge of the Works at
each work site,
The Supervising Foreman shall be competent person who will not engage in the
actual physical work, but shall have oversight of all work and full control of his
staff. He shall be familiar with the Employer's and Contractor's design and safety
requirements.
22.2
LEADING HAND
A leading Hand or Working Foreman will be required to be in charge of each
Construction gang if cable installation is required.
The Leading Hand shall be a competent person with leadership qualities, be
familiar with the requirements of the Scope of Work, and shall lead his
construction gang in the execution of the Works. He shall be familiar with the
Employer's and Contractor's design and safety requirements.
22.3
LINESMEN
A minimum of four Linesmen will be required in each line construction gang.
The Linesmen will be competent and experienced, and familiar with the
requirements of the Scope of Work. They shall be familiar with the Contractor's
design and safety requirements.
22.4
CABLE LAYERS/JOINTERS
A minimum of two cable layers and two cable jointers will be required in each
construction gang if cable laying is included in the scope of works.
Cable jointers shall be experienced in terminating and jointing MV and LV XLPE
cables. Cable layers shall be responsible for installing cables in accordance with
the Employers design standards and shall be familiar with the cable
manufacturer's cable bending radius, pulling and installation recommendations.
22.5
LABOURERS
Sufficient labourers will be required in each Construction Gang to support the
linesmen, jointers and cable layers and to carry out the non-skilled tasks. This will
include the excavating of foundations for poles, earth wires, etc., handling of
equipment and digging cable trenches where mechanical excavators cannot be
used. They will assist the linesmen/cable layers in the running out of conductor
/cable without damage and to direct traffic where obstructed by the Works, etc.
Rev -1- Feb 2013
Page: 11 , 4-Apr-13
SECTION 22 - CONTRACTORS
CONSTRUCTION PERSONNEL
EEPCO
22.6
ELECTRICAL FITTERS
At least two experienced and competent electrical fitters shall be available at each
site to undertake the installation of MV switchgear, LV frames and associated
items, transformers, etc.
22.7
TEST TECHNICIANS
At least two competent and experienced test technicians familiar with distribution
equipment, relevant test equipment and testing procedures shall be available as
required at each work site.
22.8
METER INSTALLERS
The Contractor shall employ a sufficient number of competent personnel to wire
and install metering Boxes Etc.
22.9
CERTIFICATION OF STAFF
All Supervising Foremen, leading hands, and linesmen shall be adequately trained
and knowledgeable in the construction of up to 33 kV lines and erection of LV
ABC, erection of distribution substation equipment, earth installation procedures,
cable installation and related tasks. All other staff shall be competent with relevant
experience in their designated tasks.
Rev -1- Feb 2013
Page: 12 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-GN-03
General Management Requirements
Rev -0- April 2013
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
April 2013
First Issue
TS-GN-03 R1a General Management Requirements 2013-04-28.docx

Rev -0- April 2013
Page: 1 , 28-Apr-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION WORKS
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
DOCUMENTS AND DRAWINGS
1
3.
O&M MANUALS
2
4.
GUIDE LINES
2
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
COMMON REQUIREMENTS OF MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT

SERVICE CONDITIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
CONSTRUCTION WORKS
2
3
3
3
4
5.
ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY.
5.1
5.2
5.3
GUIDING PRINCIPLES
5
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS
5
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN FOR DISTRIBUTION LINES 6
6.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
REPORTING PERIOD
PROGRESS MEETINGS
TRANSMITTALS
USE OF CONSULTANTS
DOCUMENT REVIEW AND APPROVAL RIGHTS
PROJECT SCHEDULE
IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE [LEVEL 2]
CONTRACTOR ACTIVITIES
THE ENGINEERS ACTIVITIES
DOCUMENTATION SCHEDULE
PROGRESS REPORTING
SUGGESTED PROGRESS REVIEW MEETING AGENDA

Rev -0- April 2013
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
10
10
10
11
11
Page: 2 , 28-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
GENERAL MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS

1.
SCOPE
This technical specification should be read along with general terms and
conditions of the contract. This specification covers the general requirements as
listed below
The scope of the bid covers Engineering, Procurement and Execution of the
project on a turnkey basis. The bidder shall be responsible for the following.
(i)
Engineering design,
(ii)
Identification of materials and the equipment required to execute the works

contemplated in the project,
(iii)
Procurement of materials and equipment required for the project, as per

specifications given in the bidding document,
(iv)
Storage and transport of the materials received to the work location,
(v)
Execution of works envisaged in the project as per specifications given in the

bidding document,
(vi)
Erection, testing and commissioning of contract works,
(vii)
Reporting
(viii)
Preparation of project completion report,
(ix)
2.
Handing over the works to the Employer for taking into commercial service,
DOCUMENTS AND DRAWINGS

Documents and drawings shall be prepared by the contractor as per the general
terms and conditions of the contract
All drawings in the technical specification are typical examples only and not for
straight away adoption. The Contractor is required to prepare drawings based on
the technical specifications and statutory requirements on his own, for all the
works covered in the contract.
The Contractor is required to submit along with the offer,
4 sets of drawings, samples, models giving constructional details of structures of
equipment and foundations for the structures and equipment along with design
calculations.
Any other information as indicated in the contract documents (general terms and
conditions of contract) and the technical specification and such drawings of the
general arrangement and details of work as specified in the contract or Engineer
may require during the progress of work.
The successful bidder shall submit to the Engineer (representative of EEPCO)
four sets of documents as mentioned above for approval of the Engineer.

Rev -0- April 2013
Page: 1 , 28-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 3 - O&M MANUALS
The Engineer will signify his approval or disapproval. If he fails to do so within

the time given in the contract or programme or if no time limit is specified, within
30 days of receipt, they shall be deemed as approved.
Approved drawings, samples, models shall be signed by the Engineer or otherwise
identified. Approval by the Engineer of the contractors drawings shall not relieve
the contractor from any responsibility under the contract.
The Contractor shall supply additional copies of approved drawings in the form
and numbers stated in the contract. The agreed version of the drawings etc shall
be incorporated in the contract document.
On completion of works, the contractor shall prepare and furnish the relevant
drawings pertaining to Design, Engineering, Procurement of materials and
equipment, their installation, testing and commissioning into service, operation
and maintenance. He is also required to furnish drawings as built and other
documents, incorporating any deviations from the specification, according to the
written approvals obtained from the Engineer.
3.
O&M MANUALS
Six sets of nicely printed bound volumes of operation, maintenance and erection
manuals and approved drawings in English language shall be supplied covering all
the equipment erected.
4.
GUIDE LINES
Some guide lines are given in the specification to facilitate planning for systematic
and expeditious execution of the project which is obviously of common interest
to both the Employer and the Contractor. Reference is specifically invited to
General terms and conditions of contract, which are to be observed strictly,
in the execution of the contract.
The Contractor has to carry out the execution of the works as per relevant
standards and codes of practice. Although some guide lines have been given with
regard to the execution of the works, it remains the responsibility of the
contractor to do the works complying to the specifications/statutory requirements
and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, conduct the need site check and tests
(apart from factory tests of materials and equipment) before and after energisation
and commissioning of equipment and lines into service before handing over to
the Employer for commercial operation.
The contractor shall always keep in mind that the entire project is being executed
on TURNKEY BASIS.
4.1
COMMON REQUIREMENTS OF MATERIALS &

EQUIPMENT
The technical requirement common to all Equipment and materials are defined in
Technical specification no. TS-GN-02, General Contractual Obligations.

Rev -0- April 2013
Page: 2 , 28-Apr-13
EEPCO
4.2
SECTION 4 - GUIDE LINES
SERVICE CONDITIONS
The materials shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate
conducive to rust and fungus growth. The environmental conditions under which
materials and equipment shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation
are specified in Technical specification no. TS-GN-01, EEPCO system and
Environmental data.
4.3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The contractor shall observe all applicable regulations regarding safety on the site.
Unless otherwise agreed, the Contractor shall from the commencement of work
on site until taking over provide,
(i)
Fencing, lighting, guarding and watching of the works and
(ii)
Temporary roadways, footpaths, guards and fences which may be necessary for
the accommodation and protection of owners and occupiers of adjacent property,
the public and others.
4.4
INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

The general instructions on installation testing and commissioning of equipment
are listed below.
(i)
The scope shall cover complete installation of all equipment and accessories
covered under this contract
(ii)
Installation work pertaining to equipment, cabling, etc., should be in accordance

with the applicable standards, safety codes, etc.
(iii)
Installation shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the approved drawings.
Modifications, if any, required to suit site conditions, shall be carried out only with
the prior approval of the Engineer. All such changes shall be incorporated in As
built drawings to be furnished by the contractor.
(iv)
It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to store, move/transport from

stores / storage yard etc, relevant items and accessories to the place of installation
and wherever necessary assemble all parts of equipment, in accordance with the
specific installation instructions as desired by Engineer. The contractor shall
transport, unload, and install all the equipment and accessories included in the
contract as per Annex.
(v)
All tools, welding equipment, crane, scaffolding, rigging materials, ladders,

consumables, hardware etc., required for installation shall be provided by the
contractor.
(vi)
It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to engage specialists to supervise

installation work for transformers, switchgear, batteries etc., where felt essential.
Such services shall be arranged by the contractor at no extra cost to the employer.
(vii)
Should the specialist called for by the Engineer, if required, the contractor shall
bear the expenditure in full.
(viii)
The contractor shall ensure that the equipment under erection as well as the work
area and the site are kept clean to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In case, the
Engineer is not satisfied about the cleanliness, he will have the right to carryout

Rev -0- April 2013
Page: 3 , 28-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 4 - GUIDE LINES
the cleaning operations and expenditure incurred by him in this regard will be to
contractors account. Packing cases and packing materials shall be cleared from
sites.
(ix)
In order to avoid hazards to personal moving around the equipment such as

switchgear etc, which is kept charged after installation and before commissioning,
such equipment should be cordoned off by suitable barriers to prevent accidental
injury.
(x)
Where assemblies are supplied in more than one section, the contractor shall
make all necessary mechanical and electrical connections between sections
including the connections between busbars / wires. The contractor shall also do
necessary adjustments, alignments necessary for proper operation.
(xi)
Care shall be taken in handling instruments relays and other delicate devices.
Where instruments and relays are supplied separately they shall be mounted only
after the associated switchgear/control panels are erected and aligned.
4.5
CONSTRUCTION WORKS
4.5.1
Approaches
The approaches to the location of work, if necessary, will have to be formed by
the contractor at his own cost and will be an access both for personal and
equipment.
4.5.2
Water and Power

The contractor has to make use of the Water Supply available, if any, at the work
site for construction purpose. Transport of water from the source to the working
area will be contractors responsibility. It is essential that the contractor shall
prevent wastage of water at all times failing which necessary charges will be
collected from the contractor. In case, water is not available at site, the contractor
has to make his own arrangements and any extra claim on account of this will not
be entertained. Power required for construction will be made available at one
point on chargeable basis. The power shall be used exclusively for the works
awarded in this contract.
If power is not available at site, the cost to bring power to site should be with the
Contractor as per the terms and conditions of EEPCO.
4.5.3
Supervision, skilled and unskilled labour

The contractor shall provide experienced, technically qualified, and supervising
Engineers for supervision. The contractor shall engage only competent skilled
workers.
4.5.4
Site Stores
The contractor shall establish temporary stores at his own cost at the substation
site for storing cement and equipment. The stores should be dismantled and site
cleared after the work is completed.
4.5.5
Cement
Cement shall conform to the relevant standard.

Rev -0- April 2013
Page: 4 , 28-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 5 - ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY.
a)
The contractor has to make his own arrangements for the procurement of cement
to required specifications required for the works and shall make his own
arrangements for adequate storage of cement,
b)
The contractor shall procure cement in standard packing e.g., 50 Kg., bag or
drums,
c)
The contractor shall forthwith promptly remove from the works area any cement
that the Engineer may disallow for use.
d)
The contractor shall further, at all times satisfy the Engineer on demand by
production of records and books or by submission of returns and other proofs as
directed that the cement being used is tested and approved by Engineer for the
purpose and the contractor shall at all times, keep his records up to date to enable
the Engineer to apply such checks as he may desire.
e)
Cement which has been unduly long in storage with the contractor or alternatively
has deteriorated due to inadequate storage and thus become unfit for use in the
works will be rejected by the employer and no claim will be entertained. The
contractor shall forthwith remove from the work area, any cement the Engineer
may disallow for use on work and replace it by cement complying with the
relevant Indian Standards.
4.5.6
Wastage
The contractor shall keep the additional materials required to cover wastage and
ensure that his obligations of the contract are met. The cost of such wastage shall
be deemed to be included in the contract price.
5.
ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY.
Employer has high concern for clean Environment, Ecology and sustainable
development in its every activity of power transmission.
5.1
GUIDING PRINCIPLES
The guidelines indicated below should be followed.
a)
Avoid Right of Way (RoW) through environmentally and socially sensitive areas
to minimise environmental and social Impacts.
b)
Adoption of advanced technologies, expertise and management techniques for

mitigation of unavoidable negative impacts arising out of its project during
operation and maintenance.
5.2
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS
Attention shall be paid to the following aspects.
a)
To avoid forests, plantations in the course of line routing, care is taken to route
through a path of minimum disturbance.
b)
To adopt manual stringing in thick forests and slopes to minimise damage to

environment.
c)
To use hand and mechanical clearing operations to minimise damage to

vegetation to facilitate stringing and maintenance of RoW.

Rev -0- April 2013
Page: 5 , 28-Apr-13
EEPCO
d)
5.3
SECTION 5 - ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY.
Care is taken to maintain minimum clearances to avoid electrical interference

when the power lines and telecom lines pass parallel or crosses.
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN FOR

DISTRIBUTION LINES
Sl.No
Environmental impact
Mitigation Measures
Responsible for
implementation
Responsible
for
monitoring
Planning :
Impact on
environmental sensitive
areas such as forest
lands, wetlands, bird or
wild life sanctuaries, bird
habitats, culturally and
historically important
resources.
While selecting
ROW for lines
sensitive areas shall
be avoided. No
impact on sensitive
areas.
EEPCO
Engineer/
Contractor
EEPCO
Engineer
Power
EEPCO
telecommunication
Engineer/
coordination
Contractor
clearances are
obtained for the
lines. The protection
measures to telecom
lines are
EEPCO
Engineer
Loss of forest lands
While selection of
ROW for lines
reserve forests are
avoided.
Involvement of
forests under
distribution lines is
nil.
Loss of human
habitation
The ROW of lines

are selected avoiding
human habitations.
Construction:
Erosion problems at
pole locations
Electrical interference to
telecom lines due to
induced EMF
The pole locations

are properly graded
to prevent erosion
problems. The
erosion will be
controlled by
construction of
retaining walls,
stone pitching.

Rev -0- April 2013
Page: 6 , 28-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 6 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT
implemented.
6
Electrocution hazards
due to public access
Standard Clearances
as per Electricity
Rules are
maintained.
Guarding is
provided at all road
crossings, telecom
and power line
crossings. Danger
boards are fixed
wherever necessary
Operation and
maintenance:
Way leaves clearance
Way leaves
clearance is carried
out manually
------
Foreign materials on
lines
Checked regularly
------
6.
EEPCO
Engineer
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
This section describes the project management, schedule, quality assurance,
documentation and implementation plan requirements for the project.
6.1
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
The Contractor shall assign a Project Manager with the authority to make
commitments and decisions that are binding on the Contractor. The Project
Managers responsibility shall include interface and co-ordination with the
EEPCO Engineer and his sub-contractor(s). EMPLOYER will designate an
Engineer to co-ordinate all project activities. All project correspondence and
communications between EMPLOYER and the Contractor shall be co-ordinated
through the Project Manager. The project shall be staffed from the list of project
management, engineering, system analysis, hardware and software personnel
presented in the proposal. Principal participants shall have previous experience in
a similar position on at least two other projects of similar scope to this project.
The assignment and reassignment of the principal participants in the project shall
be subject to EMPLOYERs approval.
6.2
REPORTING PERIOD
The Project Manager shall provide updated project schedules. and complete
progress reports on a monthly basis for the duration of the project. All references
to the reporting period throughout this Specification shall refer to this monthly
period. The format of report shall be as approved by the Engineer.
6.3
PROGRESS MEETINGS
The Project Manager shall schedule and attend Progress Meetings as necessary but
not less than once every month.

Rev -0- April 2013
Page: 7 , 28-Apr-13
EEPCO
6.4
TRANSMITTALS
Every document, letter, progress report, change order, and any other written
electronic media transmissions exchanged between the Contractor and
EMPLOYER shall be assigned a unique transmittal number. Discussions and
phone calls where project related information is exchanged shall be documented
in a transmittal. The Contractor shall maintain a correspondence index and assign
transmittal number consecutively for all Contractor documents. EMPLOYER will
maintain a similar correspondence numbering scheme identifying documents and
correspondence that EMPLOYER initiates.
6.5
USE OF CONSULTANTS
EMPLOYER has utilized consultancy services in the development of the project
requirements and technical specifications for the project. No limitations shall be
imposed in EMPLOYERs use of consultants in any activity related to the project.
The consultants, at the discretion of the EMPLOYER/Engineer shall participate
in project activities and be accorded the same access to the Contractors facilities
as any member of EMPLOYERs project Engineering team. The involvement of
the consultants may include, but shall not be limited to, progress and technical
meetings, conference call, documents review, and system testing/validation.
EMPLOYER shall have the option of adding consultants to the transmittal
document distribution list to receive all or selected correspondence initiated by
contractor. The consultant will be bound by the same confidentiality restrictions
imposed in EMPLOYER personnel.
6.6
DOCUMENT REVIEW AND APPROVAL RIGHTS

To ensure that the proposed systems conform to the specific provisions and
general intent of the Specification, the contractor shall submit documentation
describing the systems to the EMPLOYER for review and approval.
EMPLOYER will respond with written comments to the Contractor within
thirty(30) calendar days after receipt of the documents. Documents requiring
correction must be resubmitted by the Contractor to EMPLOYER within 30
calendar days. EMPLOYER will respond to resubmitted documents within fifteen
(15) calendar days after receipt of the document. No implementation schedule
relief is to be implied for documents requiring correction and resubmission of
EMPLOYER. EMPLOYER shall have the right to ask the Contractor to make
any necessary documentation changes at no additional cost of EMPLOYER to
achieve conformance with the specification. Any purchasing, manufacturing or
programming implementation initiated prior to written approval of the
EMPLOYER, relevant documents or drawings shall be performed at the
Contractors risk. Review and approval by EMPLOYER shall not relieve the
Contractor of his overall responsibilities to satisfy system function and
performance requirements in accordance with the specification. To help
EMPLOYER manage the review and approval of documents during any given
period, the contractor shall stagger the release of documents over the time
allocated in the project schedule. The number and size of documents shall be
factored into the document release schedule. At any time, no more than five
documents shall be submitted to EMPLOYER for review and approval.

Rev -0- April 2013
Page: 8 , 28-Apr-13
EEPCO
6.7
PROJECT SCHEDULE
The project schedule shall consist of an implementation schedule, and
documentation schedule.
A tentative project schedule shall be included with the Tender.[level one]
6.8
IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE [LEVEL 2]

(i)
Within four weeks of contract signing, the Contractor shall submit a detailed
project schedule, as described below. The project schedule shall include all tasks
to track overall direction and integration of the project from inception through to
completion. The implementation schedule shall include the project section
milestones, the Contractor activities and the EMPLOYER activities. The project
schedule shall be an accurate representation of the progress and planned activities
of the project. Activities (other than at the Contractors premises) shall be
scheduled only on customary EMPLOYER working days, i,e Monday to Saturday,
excluding EMPLOYER holidays. The Contractor shall produce and maintain the
implementation schedule using commercially available project management
software with capabilities similar to those found in Project Schedule. Microsoft
Project is the preferred project management software. A copy of the
implementation schedule files on CD shall also be provided to EMPLOYER.
(ii)
Mile stones shall be identified on all schedules.
(iii)
The actual progress made to date and the scheduled delivery date for the major
plant items and the scheduled date for the completion of works shall be closely
monitored by the Contractor.
The following information shall be reported to Project Manager and Engineer in a
clear and concise manner using the tabular and graphic capabilities of the selected
project management software.
1) An overview and general assessment of all EMPLOYER and Contractor activities

and any progress or delays in these activities since the previous reporting period.
2) Identification of tasks in the critical path together with an analysis indicating any
required remedial action.
3) The amount of contingency time (float) remaining in the schedule.
4) Information on each task, including:
(i)
Estimated start and finish dates.
(ii)
Any change in the estimated dates since the last reporting period.
(iii)
Estimated total number of calendar days to complete the task.
(iv)
Percentage of tasks completed.
(v)
An indication of whether the start date was manually entered or computed.
(vi)
Total project resources.
(vii)
The tasks to begin in the next two reporting periods.
(viii)
The tasks to be completed in the next two reporting periods.
(ix)
The tasks completed in the last two reporting periods.

Rev -0- April 2013
Page: 9 , 28-Apr-13
EEPCO
The content and format of the project schedule shall be subject to Engineers
approval. The Contractor shall update and submit the project schedule to
Engineer at least one week prior to each progress meeting.
6.9
CONTRACTOR ACTIVITIES
The implementation schedule shall be compiled by the Contractor summarizing
all activities and shall include but not be limited to the following.
(i)
Documentation preparation and release.
(ii)
Documentation revision and release, following the Engineer review.
(iii)
Type Tests and Factory testing.
(iv)
Shipment.
(v)
Receipt, forwarding and storage.
(vi)
Installation
(vii)
Field testing.
(viii)
Commissioning
Each scheduled task shall have an estimated duration for completion and
predefined relationships with other tasks. Relationships shall be used to enforce
the logical progression of work in as much as certain tasks cannot start until
others have been completed.
6.10
THE ENGINEERS ACTIVITIES

The implementation programme shall contain all the Engineers activities
required in order, for the Contractor to complete his systems and integration
tasks, including the following document reviews and approvals.
6.11
(i)
Licensing and Regulatory Clearances, with the assistance of the Contractor.
(ii)
Participation in all levels of testing.
(iii)
Site preparations, where appropriate
DOCUMENTATION SCHEDULE
The documentation schedule shall include an entry for each document and
drawing to be delivered throughout the project. Each documentation schedule
entry shall include the document or drawing title, number, revision level, actual or
future submittal date for Engineers review or approval, date of completion of
review or approval by Engineer and outcome of review or approval by Engineer.
When Engineer requires correction to any document, the documentation schedule
shall be upgraded with a new entry for the next revision of the document. The
content and format of the documentation schedule shall be subject to the
Engineers approval. The documentation schedule shall allow for at least two
submissions of each document requiring review or approval of the Engineer shall
be allowed a minimum of thirty calendar days for document review or approval.

Rev -0- April 2013
Page: 10 , 28-Apr-13
EEPCO
6.11.1
Drawings
All drawings shall be no larger than A3 (B size) and shall be reproduced by
Xerographic or offset lithographic technology. All drawings shall be be given in
AUTOCAD.
6.11.2
Documents
The documents shall be written in grammatically correct English to understand
clearly. Manuals and other written documents shall be legibly printed on sheets of
standard A4 format and all shall be bound. The final versions of documents and
manuals shall be copied double-sided, review copies may be copied single-sided.
Double spaced lines are required in review and final documentation. A complete
table of contents, listing all numbered sections and the corresponding starting
page numbers, shall be included for each document. A complete identical table of
contents shall be provided in each volume of a multi-volume document. A
complete list of exhibits shall follow the table of contents. A dictionary of
acronym terms shall be included with each set of documents. An index shall also
be included with each document. Where a document is revised to reflect a change
in design, or a change for any other reason, each such revision shall be shown by a
revision number, date, and subject in a revision block, indication of official
approval by the Contractors Project Manager shall also be included. To permit
rapid location of the revisions, all changes shall be highlighted on the revised
pages of the document. Such highlighting shall be removed from the final version
of documents.
6.12
PROGRESS REPORTING
With the intent to assure quality management and project progress as per the
implementation schedule, progress reports submitted for each reporting period
and Progress Review Meetings shall focus on the following.
a)
Monthly progress review meeting
b)
Progress review meetings shall be scheduled by the project managers and attended
by the Contractor, the Engineer and EMPLOYER to review progress of the
project. Progress meetings shall be used to review the progress reports for the
previous reporting periods, written correspondence exchanged since the last
meeting, and open action items.
c)
The Contractor shall also attend technical meetings as required to discuss

technical aspects of the project and to review Engineer comments on approval
documents. When appropriate, these short notice meetings shall be conducted as
extensions to the progress review meetings.
d)
Unless specifically agreed to the contrary all meetings shall be held at

EMPLOYERs offices. The Contractors Project Manager shall record the
minutes of each meeting and shall provide hard copies to EMPLOYER and all
attendees, on the same day whenever possible and in any case not later than two
working days after the meeting.
6.13
Sl.No
SUGGESTED PROGRESS REVIEW MEETING AGENDA

Title
Description

Rev -0- April 2013
Page: 11 , 28-Apr-13
EEPCO
Meeting minutes
Review minutes from previous meeting, with

comments.
Open action items
Review all outstanding action items.
Progress review
Review most recent project schedule with

participating Project Managers and Contractors.
Update schedule and develop action items.
Technical discussion
Discuss technical issues.
Action items
Assign responsibilities for new action items.
Administrative matters
Discuss administrative matters
Next meeting
Schedule time and place for next meeting and agree

on agenda
Close
Close meeting

Rev -0- April 2013
Page: 12 , 28-Apr-13
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-GN-05
Street light materials
Rev -3- Jun 2013
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
12 Dec 2012
Rev 1
Feb 2013
Spec fitted in specified template
Rev 2
May 2013
Spec. limited to Street lights with Sodium Vapour lamps only.
Rev 3
June 2013
Luminaires technical specification elaborated.
TS-GN-05 R3 Street lights
Rev -3- Jun 2013
Page: 1 , 27-Jun-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
STREET LIGHT MATERIALS
0
1.
SCOPE
0
2.
0
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
0
3.1
CONFLICT:
4.
4.1
TESTS
5.
DESIGN
5.1
5.2
5.3
DEFINITIONS
SODIUM VAPOUR LAMPS
MARKINGS
2
3
3
6.
FIXTURE FOR SODIUM VAPOUR LAMPS
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
FIXTURE
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION OF STREET LIGHT LUMINAIRES
MOUNTING
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PHOTOMETRIC PERFORMANCE OF STREETLIGHT LUMINAIRES
MARKING
3
3
3
7
8
8
7.
8.
INSTALLATION
CONTACTOR
8
8
8.1
8.2
REQUIREMENTS
MARKINGS
8
9
9.
PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL SWITCH
9.1
9.2
REQUIREMENTS
MARKINGS
9
9
10.
11.
DELIVERY
SCHEDULES
9
9
11.1
11.2
11.3
SCHEDULE FOR STREET LIGHT MATERIALS

Rev -3- Jun 2013
10
10
11
Page: 2 , 27-Jun-13
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO
STREET LIGHT MATERIALS

1.
SCOPE
This specification defines the technical characteristics of Street lights and the
associated materials and equipment for the street light system.
Street lighting luminaires are used for the lighting of public thoroughfares and
roadways, contributing to road safety as well as public safety. The reliability and
safety of these luminaires have a direct impact on levels of customer satisfaction
as well as quality of supply.
Luminaires shall be delivered completely assembled with control gear, high
pressure Sodium Vapour lamp(250W /400W), lamp holder, reflectors, diffuser
(bowl) housing
In addition this specification defines the requirements for Electromagnetic 3-pole
three-phase contactors photoelectric control switch to be installed at the
transformer stations supplying the street light conductors.
2.

See Specification TS-GN-01 EEPCO system and environmental data.
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The equipment supplied shall conform to the latest edition of the appropriate IEC
Specification/
Title
Standard Number
IEC 60061
Lamp caps for holders together with gauges for control of
interchangeability
IEC 60662
High pressure Sodium Lamps
IEC 60459
Ballast for high pressure Sodium lamps
IEC 60144
Degree of protection of enclosures of low voltage
switchgear and controlgear
IEC 60598
Luminaries for Roads and street lights
IEC 60188
Design and testing of lamps
SANS 475:2006
Luminaires for interior lighting, street lighting and
floodlighting - Performance requirements
ARP 035: 2005
Guidelines for the installation and maintenance of street
lighting
SANS 1088: 2004 Luminaire entries and spigots
SANS 1250: 1991 Capacitors for use with fluorescent and other discharge
lamp ballasts
SANS 1266: 2002 Ballasts for discharge lamps (excluding tubular fluorescent
lamps)
SANS 1574: 2004 Electrical cables flexible cords and flexible cables
SABS IEC
Ballasts for discharge lamps (excluding tubular fluorescent
60923:2001
lamps) Performance requirements
Rev -3- Jun 2013
Page: 0 , 27-Jun-13
EEPCO
SABS IEC
926:1995
SABS IEC
60927:2005
SANS 529: 2001
SANS 1507: 2002
Auxiliaries for lamps Starting devices: General and safety

requirements
Starting devices (other than glow starters) - Performance
requirements
Heat-resisting wiring cables
Electric cables with extruded solid dielectric insulation for
fixed installations
VC 8011:1999
Lamp holders
SANS 1777:2004 Photoelectric control units for lighting (PECUs)
SABS ISO
Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel
1461:2000
articles - Specifications and test methods
SANS 556-1:2004 Low-voltage switchgear Part 1: Circuit-breakers
BS 1490: 1988
Specification for aluminium and aluminium ingots and
castings for general engineering purposes.
All standards and specifications are subject to revision, and parties to agreements
based on this specification are encouraged to investigate the possibility of
applying the most recent editions of the documents.
3.1
CONFLICT:
See spec TS-GN-01
4.

See Spec. No.TS-GN-02.
4.1
TESTS
The test reports shall be issued by an SANS or IEC accredited test authority.
4.1.1
a)
Type tests
The tests for ingress of dust, solid objects and moisture shall be carried out in
accordance with section 9 of SANS 60598-1 and clause 3.13 of SANS 60598-2-3.
Test reports confirming that the tests have been carried out as prescribed shall be
the only acceptable verification of IP ratings.
Note: In accordance with the test requirements of the above documents, the
luminaire shall be energised and brought to a stable operating temperature
(thermal equilibrium) at its rated voltage before commencement of the tests.
Test reports shall have been issued by SABS or a test authority accredited by
SANS.
Tests as described in clauses 3.6.3 through 3.6.5 and clauses 3.7 through 3.15 of
SANS 60598-2-3 shall be carried out and the test reports shall be supplied with
the Bid.
b)
Luminaire housings shall also be subjected to resistance to corrosion and

accelerated ageing testing and hence give a reasonable indication of premature
failure and life expectancy of luminaires.
The acceptance criteria for the accelerated ageing test are as follows:
Rev -3- Jun 2013
Page: 1 , 27-Jun-13
SECTION 5 - DESIGN
EEPCO
1.No signs of material degradation
2.No cracks on any part of the luminaire; and
3.No compromise of any of the IP ratings of the luminaire.

The list of test certificates required are:
(i)
Static wind-force test
(ii)
External and internal wiring
(iii)
Protection against electric shock
(iv)
Thermal tests
(v)
Resistance to dust, solid objects and moisture
(vi)
Power factor and lamp voltage
(vii)
Photometric requirements
(viii)
Resistance to corrosion
(ix)
Insulation resistance and electric strength
(x)
Resistance to heat, fire and tracking; and
(xi)
Accelerated ageing tests

Luminaires offered under this contract shall bear the SABS certification mark for
approved performance shown by an A enclosed by a diamond and shall be
tested to the SANS 475 standard.
5.
DESIGN
5.1
DEFINITIONS
The following definitions and abbreviations shall apply to this specification:
HPS: High Pressure Sodium.
PECU (Photoelectric control unit): A device, which comprises a

photoelectric sensor responding to variations in illumination combined
with means for switching an electric load.
Socket (NEMA base): A receptacle into which a one-part control unit may
be inserted.
(i)
Luminaires shall be Class 1 as per SANS 60598-1 and shall be of totally enclosed
type.
(ii)
Luminaires shall have a high pressure Sodium vapour lamp, control gear and
spigot compartment and shall have a degree of protection rating of a minimum of
IP65 on the lamp compartment and a minimum of IP54 on the control gear
compartment.
Rev -3- Jun 2013
Page: 2 , 27-Jun-13
SECTION 6 - FIXTURE FOR SODIUM

VAPOUR LAMPS
EEPCO
5.2
HIGH PRAESURE SODIUM VAPOUR LAMPS
5.2.1
REQUIREMENTS
Rated wattage.............................. 250 and 400 W
Rated voltage...........................
230 V
The lamp cap shall meet the requirement of IEC 60061 or equivalent standards.
The lamp will be used with ballast conforming to IEC 60459.
The Sodium vapour lamp shall be used with a lamp cap in a Street fixture meeting
the requirements mentioned in the relevant IEC.
5.3
MARKINGS
The marking on the lamp shall be in accordance with the IEC 662.
6.
FIXTURE FOR SODIUM VAPOUR LAMPS
6.1
FIXTURE
6.2
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION OF STREET LIGHT

LUMINAIRES
6.2.1
General
a)
Luminaires shall be robustly constructed, weather proof, hail proof, insect proof,
corrosion proof, and vandal resistant and made of LM6 high pressure die cast
Aluminium .
b)
All external parts and components of the luminaire shall be designed to shed
water and no accumulation of condensation or precipitation shall occur. An
exterior lip shall be provided on the housing to ensure that there is no direct
rainwater contact with the gasket between the housing and the diffuser, thus
ensuring that no moisture is sucked into the diffuser when the luminaire is
switched off and cools down.
c)
Ferrous components shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with SABS ISO

1461:2000 for heavy-duty applications. External small components (clips, screws,
bolts, nuts, washers, etc.) shall be manufactured from stainless steel (grade 304 or
better).
6.3
MOUNTING
6.3.1
General
(i)
Spigot entries shall be designed to fit easily over the bracket pipe and shall be truly
parallel to the fitting axis and shall comply with Table 1 of SANS 101088:1990 as
follows:
For Type 2 luminaires (side entry): Nominal size 42 mm
For Type 3 luminaires (bottom entry): Nominal size 76 mm
The luminaries and its 300 mm long shaft shall resist dynamic wind pressure
of 230N/m2 with a load safety factor of 1.4. There shall be provision for
draining of condensed water from the body.
Rev -3- Jun 2013
Page: 3 , 27-Jun-13
EEPCO

VAPOUR LAMPS
The streetlights shall be marked with a NEMA wattage label to aid

workers.
(ii)
Spigot entries shall be designed to fit easily over the spigot and shall be truly
parallel to the fitting/lamp axis. Spigot entries shall be constructed of corrosionresistant materials and compatible with the galvanized mild steel spigot such that
deterioration by electrolytic action shall not occur.
(iii)
Luminaires shall be secured to the spigot by means of at least two stainless steel
M10 hexagonal head screws..
(iv)
Luminaires should incorporate a positive and substantial means of fixing to the

pole or bracket, designed to allow adjustment and to ensure that once set to the
required position, the luminaires remain locked in that position.
6.3.2
Diffusers
(i)
Diffusers shall have no external prisms that could accumulate dirt and thus reduce
the light output of the luminaire. Diffusers shall be constructed in such a manner
that the wall thickness of the material is maintained at a constant thickness, hence
preventing the projection of lines of patterns onto the road surface.
(ii)
Diffusers shall be heat-resistant and shall not discolour, even after prolonged
exposure to light, both atmospheric and artificial. The mechanical strength shall
be sufficient to prevent warping or distortion to occur. Diffusers shall be
manufactured from injection moulded high impact acrylic. Bidders shall submit
documentation with respect to the properties of the material under service
conditions (i.e. Depreciation in light transmission over time and material
degradation). Diffusers made of polycarbonate shall not be acceptable.
(iii)
Diffusers shall have a means to prevent direct contact by rainwater with the onepiece gasket, which shall be permanently fitted into the housing (e.g. in a tongue
and groove arrangement). The gasket shall form a seal when the diffuser is in the
closed position, preventing the entry of dust, moisture and insects into the lamp
compartment. The gasket shall be made from silicon sponge, which shall not be
subject to permanent compression or deterioration in service. The gasket should
be fitted into a groove in the housing and should be kept in place by a tongue
provided on the diffuser, thus ensuring the integrity of the IP rating and shall not
work loose during maintenance of the luminaire.
(iv)
Luminaire bowls shall be capable of being removed from the luminaire body
simply by unclipping for cleaning purposes. The bowl shall not detach from the
luminaire body in the unlikely event of the bowls being left in the open or hanging
position when mounted on the pole. The diffuser should also remain attached to
the housing when hinged open for maintenance or lamp replacement. This hinge
mechanism should be incorporated into housing to ensure that it is protected
against damage during transport, installation and maintenance.
6.3.3
Lamp-holders and brackets

(i)
Lamp-holders shall comply fully with VC 8011(Standard) and be of the type E40,
and shall be capable of maintaining efficient electrical contact with the lamp
terminals without deterioration due to temperature, climatic conditions and
vibration which will be encountered in service.
Rev -3- Jun 2013
Page: 4 , 27-Jun-13
EEPCO

VAPOUR LAMPS
(ii)
For additional insulation against ignitor spark-over a suitable fibre washer for
lamp holders shall be used.
(iii)
Lamp-holders shall be rated to withstand 240C and be rated at the appropriate

lamp ignition voltage.
(iv)
A lamp fully inserted into the lamp-holder shall be rigidly held with its axis
substantially coincident with that of the lamp-holder under conditions of wind,
vibration and mechanical shock to be expected in service.
(v)
The lamp-holder shall have zero degree rake i.e. its axis shall be parallel to that of
the spigot entry.
(vi)
Lamp holder brackets and lamp supports shall accept and retain lamps which are
within the dimensional tolerances stated in the appropriate lamp standard and
shall locate the light source in the correct relationship to the optical control
devices of the luminaire. The lamp holder shall be mounted firmly to an
aluminium bracket.
Alternatively the lamp holder is to be mounted directly onto aluminium bosses,
which protrude into the lamp housing from the gear compartment.
6.3.4
Reflectors
(i)
Reflector surfaces shall be of high-grade 99,98% super pure deep

electrochemically brightened anodised aluminium.
(ii)
Reflectors or any other light-controlling component shall be such that they can
only be fitted or replaced in the correct relationship to their light source.
(iii)
Reflectors in luminaire bowls shall not deform due to heat from the lamp.
Reflectors shall be well secured into position to prevent it from deforming thus
causing false photometric performance of the luminaire.
(iv)
Where provision is made for alternative reflector positions, the adjustment means
shall be positive and be firmly retained in clearly identified positions.
6.3.5
Control Gear
(i)
Control gear shall be fully housed within the body of the luminaire and be
suitable for operation with the specified rating of lamp. Under no circumstances
shall control gear be mounted above the lamp or in a position where it may be
adversely affected by the heat generated by the lamp.
(ii)
For safety and thermal reasons, the control gear compartment shall be
manufactured from a sturdy and reliable housing of high-pressure die cast,
corrosion resistant, aluminium of grade LM6 (EC1706 AC 44100), or higher
(iii)
The control gear compartment shall be so designed that there is sufficient space
to permit repairs, replacement of components and reassembly without difficultly,
without the removal of the luminaire from its mounting. To this end, and for
maintenance reasons, preference will be given to luminaires where all control gear
is mounted onto a removable tray. Where this is provided, removable connectors
are required for disconnecting the supply to the tray for easy removal and
subsequent replacement. Control gear wiring is to be terminated in a five-way
termination block to facilitate the removal of the gear tray in the control gear
compartment.
Rev -3- Jun 2013
Page: 5 , 27-Jun-13
EEPCO

VAPOUR LAMPS
(iv)
Control gear compartment (containing the copper ballast, capacitor, ignition

devices if applicable, and terminal connectors) shall be sealed by a hinged,
lightweight, non-corroding cover and shall be accessible from underneath. No
components shall be mounted onto this cover. Access to the gear compartment,
via the gear tray cover, shall not be possible without the use of a screwdriver or
key, thus protecting unqualified staff, doing lamp replacement, against electric
shock.
(v)
Luminaires shall be supplied with a thermal circuit breaker, which conforms to

SANS 556-1, rated 5A/2.5kA, incorporated inside the luminaire and mounted on
the removable gear tray. The exposed lever shall be accessible from the outside of
the luminaire and shall be protected in a manner ensuring the integrity of the IP54
rating requirement for the control gear compartment.
(vi)
All control gear shall be suitable for operation with the specified rating of the
lamp on a 230V 10% 50Hz single-phase system.
6.3.6
Ballasts
(i)
Ballasts shall comply with SANS 1266, SABS IEC 922 and SABS IEC 60923 and
shall bear the SABS mark or IEC mark.
(ii)
Ballasts shall be of the encapsulated or vacuum impregnated type. The process of

vacuum impregnation shall be such that the interstices of the windings are
completely filled with the impregnating material. Connections shall be brought
out to a suitable brass screw terminal block mounted on the ballast housing.
Terminal blocks with steel screws will not be acceptable.
(iii)
Vacuum impregnated ballasts shall be constructed in such a manner that the

lamination is engaged within a galvanised steel cover which cover shall with stand
the test specified in SABS ISO 1461:2000.
6.3.7
Capacitors
(i)
Capacitors shall comply with SANS 1250, SABS IEC 61048 and SABS IEC 61049
and shall bear the SABS mark or IEC mark.
(ii)
Capacitors shall only be connected to the primary (line) side of transformer

ballasts. After connection of the power factor correction capacitor, the power
factor shall not be less than 0,85 (lagging).
(iii)
All capacitors shall be fully encapsulated and filled with self-extinguishing resin.
6.3.8
Ignition Devices
(i)
Ignitors shall comply with SANS 101630 and shall bear the SABS mark or IEC
mark. Ignitors shall be of the superimposed-pulse solid-state electronic trigger
type.
(ii)
Ignitors shall be of the standard type to allow striking of the lamp without
switching the power off after replacement of a faulty ignitor.
(iii)
Ignitors shall be suitable for operating any make of lamp in conjunction with any
make of ballast at temperatures up to 90 C. The ignitor shall be connected in
series with the ballast and installed between the ballast and lamp holder. Systems
that operate with the ignitor in parallel with the lamp, or with special tapped
ballasts, will not be acceptable.
Rev -3- Jun 2013
Page: 6 , 27-Jun-13
EEPCO
(iv)
6.4

VAPOUR LAMPS
All ignitors shall be suitable for connection in the circuit so that the ignition pulse
is confined between the ignitor and lamp holder.
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
(i)
All Internal wiring of the luminaires shall comply with clause 3.10 of SANS
60598-2-3.It shall be flexible and suitably rated and insulated to withstand the
voltages and temperatures encountered in service. All wiring shall comply with the
requirements of SANS 1507 and, where applicable, SANS 529. The wiring colours
to be used shall be as follows: live - red (or brown), neutral black (or blue) and
earth green/yellow.
(ii)
The neutral conductor of the incoming supply shall be connected to the screw
thread portion of Edison screw type lampholders and the live conductor shall be
connected to the central contact and the internal wiring shall be arranged
accordingly.
(iii)
Terminals and electric connections shall comply with clause 3.9 of SANS 605982-3. In addition, the luminaire shall incorporate a terminal block mounted in a
reasonably accessible position as close to the point of entry as possible. The
material of the terminal block shall be non-tracking and the terminals shall be
made of non-corroding material such as brass. Terminals made of aluminium shall
not be acceptable.
(iv)
Any wiring passing through metal shall have suitable grommets or otherwise
protected to avoid abrasion of the insulation.
(v)
Luminaires shall be earthed in accordance with clause 3.8 of SANS 60598-2-3.
(vi)
Metal parts of luminaires which may become alive in the event of an insulation
fault and which are not accessible, when the luminaire is mounted, but which are
liable to come into contact with the supporting surface, shall be permanently and
reliably connected to an earth terminal and shall withstand the test specified in
SANS 60598-2-3. An earth terminal shall be provided in all instances, even if the
luminaire is fully insulated and even if all conductive parts, which could become
alive in the event of an insulation fault, are not accessible. This is to facilitate
future wiring should a unit, which requires an earth connection, replace the
luminaire.
(vii)
Protection against electric shock (of at least IP 2X) shall be maintained for all
methods and positions of installation in normal use. Protection shall also be
maintained after removal of all parts that can be removed by hand.
(viii)
All parts of an earth terminal shall be made of brass or similar corrosion-resistant

material and the contact surfaces shall be bare metal and not painted or varnished
surfaces.
(ix)
All earth connections shall be effected by means of suitable lugs. All possibility of
electrolytic corrosion shall be avoided.
(x)
The luminaire shall be able to be supplied with the following optional extras:
(xi)
A flat glass or shallow diffuser option for very specific light sensitive areas.
(xii)
A bottom entry casting, incorporated into the spigot compartment and not
attached as a side entry.
Rev -3- Jun 2013
Page: 7 , 27-Jun-13
SECTION 7 - INSTALLATION
EEPCO
6.5
6.6
PHOTOMETRIC PERFORMANCE OF STREETLIGHT

LUMINAIRES
(i)
Photometric data shall be supplied with the tender. This data shall be issued by
the SABS or SANAS accredited lighting laboratory. The photometric
requirements as listed in SANS 475, Clause 4.7.1.1, shall be provided.
(ii)
Bids shall be accompanied by a CD, containing the following data: luminous

intensity tables in accordance with CIE Publication 27, in a form compatible with
CIE 140 compatible computer software.
MARKING
The marking on the fixture shall be in accordance with the relevant IEC or
equivalent standard.
7.
INSTALLATION
The fixtures shall be mounted on concrete poles with the following dimensions.
Maximum pole top diameter
190mm for 12m poles
Minimum pole top diameter
160mm - for 9m poles
Installation height from ground level
7-9m
The fixtures shall be convenient for side mounting on steel arms.
8.
CONTACTOR
Contactors will be utilised and associated with each transformer supplying the
street light system, together with the photoelectric switch described later.
8.1
REQUIREMENTS
The contactors shall meet the following requirements:
Rated thermal current
125 A, 200 A
Rated operating voltage
230V
Utilization category
AC - 1
Rated control voltage, AC
230 V
Rated frequency
50 Hz
Mechanical endurance
600,000 cycles for 125 A

700,000 cycles for 200 A
Terminals shall be suitable for copper conductors from 6 mm2 up to 70 mm2.
Rev -3- Jun 2013
Page: 8 , 27-Jun-13
EEPCO
8.2
SECTION 9 - PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL

SWITCH
MARKINGS
The contactors shall be marked according to IEC 158 or equivalent standard.
9.
PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL SWITCH
9.1
REQUIREMENTS
Rated voltage
230 V
Rated current
10 A
Rated frequency
50Hz
Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 us)
6 kV
Rated power frequency withstand voltage
2kV
Degree of Protection of Enclosure
>=IP54
Light sensitiveness adjustment range
3 70 lux
Terminal shall be suitable for copper conductors. The switch shall be equipped
with a connecting cable. Connecting cable shall be made of multi-core stranded
copper of at least 1.5 mm2 cross section. Connecting cable must have black,
weather-resistant sheath. The length of the cable shall be at least 1.5m.
The light sensitiveness of the switch shall be adjustable. The switches shall be
adjusted to sensitiveness of 10 lux before dispatch from the manufacturers works
in case such an adjustment is tedious to do in operation. The switch shall have a
delay mechanism against nuisance switching e.g. due to sudden darkness.
Preference shall be given to switches integrating the sensitive part and the
switching part.
All plastic parts shall be weather-resistant.
9.2
MARKINGS
Switches shall be marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer and the
rated voltage and current.
10.
DELIVERY
The photocell shall be delivered complete with connection cable, mounting
bracket and fixing screws ready for installation on concrete poles.
11.
SCHEDULES
Rev -3- Jun 2013
Page: 9 , 27-Jun-13
EEPCO
11.1
SCHEDULE FOR STREET LIGHT MATERIALS

Please see separate technical schedule TS-GN-05 S.
11.2

Schedule Ref TS-GN-05-NC1
The bidder shall provide a list of non-compliances with this specification,
documenting the effects that such non-compliance is likely to have on the
equipments life, operating characteristics and system performance. Each noncompliance shall make reference to the relevant specification clause.
Specification
Clause
Rev -3- Jun 2013
Page: 10 , 27-Jun-13
EEPCO
11.3

Item Reference TS-GN-05-TC1
Specification
Clause
Rev -3- Jun 2013
Page: 11 , 27-Jun-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule: TS-GN-05-S1

Technical Schedule for HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR LAMPS
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Item
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type designation
Standard referred
Rated wattage
Nominal life, hours
Rated voltage
Warm-up lamp current as a percentage
of rated current
Warm-up
voltage at lamp terminal
Operating noise of ballast
Warm-up time
Compensated Lamp current
Minimum open circuit voltage for
Stable
Power operation
factor with reference to ballast
Illumination
Rated luminous flux, lumen
Lamp external diameter
Lamp total length
Standard package size, pcs
Unit
W
hrs
V
%
V
db
min
A
V
lm/m2
lm
mm
mm
pcs
File:TS-GN-05 R3 S Sodium Vapour Street light 2013-06-07 (2).xlsm - sheet:TS-GN-05-S1
Requirement Bid Offer Requirement Bid Offer

250W
400W
IEC 662
250
24000
230
1.3
125V
<40
4.5min
3
200 V
0.43
>=60
Min.30000
IEC 662
400
24000
230
1.3
125V
<40
4.5min
4
200 V
0.43
>=77
Min.50000
Page 1 Date: 27/06/2013,
LPA-GECE
Technical Schedule for

No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
EEPCo
Item
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Type designation
Standard referred
Rated wattage
Rated voltage
Length of luminary shaft
Tolerance of material thickness
Wind area of the luminary
Power factor with rated wattage
Lamp holder size
Capacitor size
Material of REFLECTOR
Material of body
Length of wire
Cross-section of wire
Protection class (IEC 144)
Weight of complete luminaries
LUMINAIRES FOR SODIUM VAPOUR

LAMPS
Unit
Requirement
W
V
mm
%
SANS475/2006
250 or 400
230
300
0.05
m2
%
F
m
mm2
m
kg
Bid Offer
>90%
E-40
>=30
Corrugated
Aluminum
High pressure
3diecast LM6
Sufficient to carry
rated
IP54- current
IP66
>=45
Page 2 Date: 27/06/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for Contactor for Street Lights
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Item
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Rated operational current
Type designation
Standard referred
Protection class
Utilization class
Power dissipation with thermal Current
Rated frequency
Rated operational voltage
Rated insulation voltage
Rated thermal current
Rated making current
Rated breaking current
Maximum fuse protecting (HRC, DIN)
Short circuit current Carrying capacity, 1s
Coil control voltage, AC
Drop-out voltage in percentage of rated control voltage
Can the coil be replaced?
Number of normally open auxiliary contacts
Permissible operation frequency per hour
Electrical life of contacts
Unit
23
Mechanical life of contacts under load condition
cycles
24
Mounting arrangement
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
Bid Offer
W
Hz
V
V
A
A
A
A
kA
V
%
Yes/No
IEC 158-1
IP20
AC-1
90
50
230/400
1.2 kV
125
IEC 158-1
IP20
AC-1
132
50
230/400
1.2 kV
200
230
230
Yes
Yes
600,000
700,000
hrs
Page 3 Date: 27/06/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
No
25
25.1
Item
Main circuit terminals
Material
25.2
25.3
25.4
Design
Conductor range
Terminal screw size
26
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
Copper
Copper
6mm2 up to 70mm2
6mm2 up to 70mm2
Material of breaking contacts
Copper
Copper
27
Class of insulating material
28
Material of outer covering
PVC or other
equivalent materials
PVC or other
equivalent
materials
29
30
Standard package quantity

Weight per piece
mm2
Bid Offer
kg
Page 4 Date: 27/06/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule for PHOTO ELECTRIC CONTROL SWITCH

No
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Item
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Type designation
Standard referred
Time constant of switching
Light sensitiveness adjustment range
Rated voltage
Rated current
Rated breaking capacity
Rated marking capacity
Impulse withstand voltage
Number of mechanical operating cycles
Number of electrical operating cycles
Protection class (IEC 144)
Connecting wire cross-sectional area
Material of contacts
Color of cover
Net weight
Unit
Sec
lux
V
V
A
A
A
kV
kV
1 sec
3 70 lux
230
230V
10A
10A
10A
3
6
mm
pcs
g
>=IP54
min 1.5
Silver
200 g
Page 5 Date: 27/06/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-GN-06
SCADA & DMS SYSTEM FOR 7 TOWNS
Rev -1- 6 June 2013
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
20 May 2013
First Issue
Rev 1
6 June
Revision of scope
LPA GECE / ts-gn-06 r1 scada for 7 regional towns 2013-06-06
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: i, 2-Jul-13
EEPCO
CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION
1.
PAGE NO
INTRODUCTION .............................................................1
1.1
2.
TOWN NETWORK DETAILS........................................................... 1
SCOPE OF WORK .........................................................3
2.1
SYSTEM FACILITIES .............................................................. 4
2.1.1
Control Centre Equipment -- One control centre with equipment
listed for each Town in the lot........................................................................ 4
2.1.2
Feeder Remote Terminal Units (F RTUs) ......................................... 5
2.1.3
Electronic Trivector Meters ............................................................... 5
2.1.4
Radio Links ....................................................................................... 6
2.1.5
Training ............................................................................................. 6
3.
GENERAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS .........................6

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
4.
SOFTWARE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .................13

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
5.
General Technical Requirements ......................................................... 6

System General Characteristics ........................................................... 7
System Architecture ............................................................................. 7
Capacity and Expandability .................................................................. 7
SECURITY & SAFETY ......................................................................... 8
MAINTAINABILITY ............................................................................... 8
RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY ....................................................... 9
Distributed Open System Requirements ............................................ 10
Performances ..................................................................................... 11
OPERATING SYSTEM ....................................................................... 13

SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE AND DEVELOPMENT TOOLS .......... 14
OPEN SYSTEM INTERFACE ............................................................ 15
DATA MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS ..................................................... 15
INTER FACE TO PC SERVER BY WEB SERVER ............................ 16
DATA AND DISPLAY MAINTENANCE .............................................. 16
MAIL SYSTEM ................................................................................... 18
System Monitoring and Diagnostic Programs ..................................... 19
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION .................................19

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS............................................................. 19
Servers ............................................................................................... 19
Workstations ....................................................................................... 21
Monitors .............................................................................................. 21
Front-End Servers .............................................................................. 21
Large Scale Display System ............................................................... 22
Printers ............................................................................................... 22
Networks ............................................................................................ 23
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: ii, 2-Jul-13
EEPCO
6.
USER INTERFACE .......................................................23

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
7.
SCADA FUNCTIONS ...................................................33

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
8.
Use of Web Server ............................................................................. 24

Access Security .................................................................................. 24
User Interaction General Features ..................................................... 25
Trending ............................................................................................. 28
Display Hardcopy ............................................................................... 29
Displays .............................................................................................. 29
DATA ACQUISITION.......................................................................... 33
Data Conversion ................................................................................. 34
Dynamic Network COLOURING and Circuit Tracing .......................... 35
Data Processing ................................................................................. 36
Supervisory Control ............................................................................ 38
Alarms and Events Processing ........................................................... 39
Tagging .............................................................................................. 42
Disturbance Recording and Play-back ............................................... 43
Historical Data Management .............................................................. 43
Data Communication with Other Control CENTRES .......................... 44
POWER Distribution Network Information System (NIS) .................. 45
FRTU .............................................................................45
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
General............................................................................................... 45
COMMUNICATION PORTS ............................................................... 46
ANALOGUE INPUTS ......................................................................... 47
STATUS INPUT.................................................................................. 48
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS (SOE) FEATURE ..................................... 48
CONTROL OUTPUTS ........................................................................ 48
CONTACT MULTIPLYING RELAYS (CMRs) ..................................... 50
TIME FACILITY .................................................................................. 50
9. SUBSTATION FEEDER AND DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMER ACQUISITION ..........................................53
9.1
Smart Meter based AMR for Distribution TRANSFORMER data
ACQUISITION ............................................................................................... 53
10. POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS .......................................53

10.1
10.2
10.3
UPS FOR CONTROL CENTRE ......................................................... 53

48 V DC at Control Centre .................................................................. 54
48 V DC at Substations ...................................................................... 55
11. RADIO LINK SYSTEMS ...............................................55

11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ................................................................... 55

RADIO LINK AND BASE STATION EQUIPMENT ............................. 55
ANTENNAE ........................................................................................ 56
CABLING ............................................................................................ 57
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: iii, 2-Jul-13
EEPCO
11.5
11.6
Civil Works for Communication Equipment ........................................ 58

Radio Coverage and Link Survey ....................................................... 59
12. DOCUMENTATION ......................................................59

12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
GENERAL .......................................................................................... 59
SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION ............................................................ 60
EquipmentDocumentation .................................................................. 60
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS................................. 61
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ............................................................ 61
13. TRAINING .....................................................................62

13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................ 62
SCADA MAINTENANCE TRAINING .................................................. 62
RADIO LINK MAINTENANCE TRAINING .......................................... 62
OPERATOR TRAINING ..................................................................... 63
14. SCHEDULES ................................................................64

14.1
14.2
14.3
Schedule for offered equipment.......................................................... 64

Non Compliance schedule .................................................................. 65
Test Certificates Schedule .................................................................. 66
15. APPENDIX-1: SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ..................67

16. APPENDIX -2: COMMUNICATION DIAGRAM ............68
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: iv, 2-Jul-13
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION
EEPCO
1.
INTRODUCTION
This technical specification is for the implementation of SCADA & DMS facility
for Monitoring and Control of 15 kV MV network in 7 towns namely Mekele,
Bahir Dar, Dessie, Nazareth, Dire Dawa, Jimma, Awassa, of Ethiopian Electric
Corporation under 8 Town Distribution Rehabilitation project
The 8 Town Distribution Rehabilitation project financed by the World Bank
under IDA credit No. IDA 5126-ET.The project Network design and bid
documents are developed by the consultants London power associates, in
association with Global Energy Consulting Engineers India and Hagbes, Ethiopia.
The consultant will also be responsible for supervising together with the EEPCo
authorities for Project Implementation.
The Project is subdivided into three lots as follows.
LOT -1: Design, supply, installation on site, testing and commissioning of a
section of LV distribution network rehabilitation, respective distribution
transformer rehabilitation in Addis Ababa city, No SCADA and DMS component
in LOT 1.
LOT -2 : Design, supply, installation on site, testing and commissioning of a) MV
Overhead line & Under Ground cables, b) Installation of new distribution
transformers c) Installation of LV ABC network and d) removal of existing lines
in Mekele, Bahir Dar and Dessie, d) SCADA &DMS System for Mekele, Bahir
Dar and Dessie
Lot-3: Similar to Lot 2 but for the cities of Nazareth, Dire Dawa, Jimma, Awassa.
The bidders can submit offers for one or two or three lots. The SCADA &DMS
component is an integral part of Lot 2 and LOT 3. Separate Bid for SCADA
&DMS alone is not permitted
1.1
TOWN NETWORK DETAILS

The existing 15 kV network for LOT 2 Towns is given in Table 1 and that of
LOT 3 towns is given Table 2
1.1.1 EXISTING 15 KV SYSTEM IN LOT 2 TOWNS :

S.
No
Description
item
of Dessie
Mekele
Bahir-Dar
Total
Area of Town
sq.km
34.4
78.3
46.5
159.2
Population of
Town
185745
273528
272757
732030
Location of
town
132 kV or 66kV
/15 kV
118N 3938E 1329N 3928E 1136N 3723E

1
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 1,02/07/13
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION
EEPCO
substations
5
15 kV feeders
10
19
15 kV line length
km
178.03
315.74
259.05
752.82
15 kV /400Volts
Distribution
Transformers
245
410
400
1055
15 kV Ring main
switch boards
12
15 kV Automatic
Sectionalizers
14
22
10
15 kV Switched
capacitors
10
30
43
83
11
15 kV Automatic
Voltage Boosters
12
15 kV
autoreclosers
13
15 KV
substation feeder
circuit breakers at
132 kV or 66
KV substations
10
19
15 kV
transformer
Circuit Breakers
at 132 kV or 66
KV substations
14
1.1.2 EXISTING 15 KV SYSTEM IN LOT 3 TOWNS :

S.
No
Description
item
of Nazret
Area of Town sq
.km
Population of
Town
Location of town
Jimma
Dire-Dawa
Awassa
65.0
29.2
32.2
44.4
271500
149132
386464
350143
8.55N
39.27E
740N
3650E
Total
170.8
1157239
936N 4152E 73N 3828E
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 2,02/07/13
SECTION 2 - SCOPE OF WORK
EEPCO
4
132 kV or 66kV
/15 kV
substations
15 kV feeders
12
26
15 kV line length
km
223.09
83.89
232.25
345.82
885.05
15 kV /400Volts
Distribution
Transformers
402
168
356
408
1334
15 kV Ring main
switch boards
18
15 kV Automatic
Sectionalizers
11
10
15 kV Switched
capacitors
22
21
26
76
11
15 kV Automatic
Voltage Boosters
12
15 kV
autoreclosers
13
15 KV
substation feeder
circuit breakers at
132 kV or 66 KV
substations
12
26
15 kV
transformer
Circuit Breakers
at 132 kV or 66
KV substations
14
2.
SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of supply of the Contractor - as defined in this section of the Tender
Documents shall include all equipment and software required to ensure
satisfactory operation of the systems and facilities. All materials, parts, devices and
services that are essential or necessary for the proper functioning of the complete
installations shall be supplied, even if not explicitly called for.
In addition to supply of equipment and software the Contractor shall provide:
Detailed engineering and design services
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 3,02/07/13
EEPCO
Procurement services
Manufacturing services
System integration services
Factory acceptance testing
Transportation, storage and handling services
Installation and erection services
Site testing and commissioning
Documentation
Training services
The contractor is also responsible attending defects together with administrative

and commercial obligations and all other liabilities and obligations set out or
implied in the Contract.
2.1
SYSTEM FACILITIES
All systems and facilities defined hereafter shall be provided in strict accordance
with the technical specifications. However, the drawings enclosed to the Tender
Documents are tentative only and prepared for sole purpose of illustrating the
Scope of Supply. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final design, subject
to approval by the Employer.
Before starting the design work, the Contractor shall visit the Sites of this contract
to obtain all necessary information, drawings and documents for radio link path,
adaptation and modification engineering. The cost of the site survey shall be at the
Contractors expense.
All temporary offices, housing facilities, plants and equipment as well as other
temporary structures and works, which will be used or needed for the
performance of the works, shall be considered part of the contract.
Moreover, the Contractor shall provide all the tools, machinery, testing equipment
and other required auxiliaries as well as consumables necessary for proper
implementation of the works.
2.1.1
Control Centre Equipment -- One control centre with equipment

listed for each Town in the lot
The proposed Architecture of SCADA&DMS control Centre is shown in
Appendix -1 . The details are given below
Item
Qty
Description
SCADA server with dual Xeon Processor of 2.5 GHZ or more 5x1 TB
hard Disk with Raid, and 2 x500 GB Internal Disk drive, 512 GB Ram in
Hot standby mode, Windows 2012 Server 10 cal License
Data Engineering (DE)/ Training Server (PC)
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 4,02/07/13
EEPCO
Operator workstation including: - i7 Quad Processor 2.5 GHZ and

above - 2 x 21" flat screen high resolution monitors - 128 MB Ram, 1 TB
Disk storage - Keyboard - Mouse - windows 2008 Professional
Operating system licenses
Web Server .
PC's as web server clients - i7 processor, 500 GB hard Disk, 16 GB ram

.
Large Scale Display
GPS Time Base System
Laser printer, colour, A3/A4
Laser printer, B/W, A3/A4
Duplicated Local Area Network (LAN) system including Cables - Data

switches
11
Remote Communications server (RCS) (Front-end)
12
1 set
Furniture for the workstations
13
2 set
UPS
14
2 set
48 V DC Rectifier/Battery to supply Radio Link terminals at Control

Centre
10
2.1.2
Feeder Remote Terminal Units (F RTUs)

Feeder Remote Terminal Units with I/O covering 8 digital inputs,4 controls shall
be installed for monitoring of digital status and Controls of all devices on
Distribution network like Capacitor banks, Sectionalizers, Voltage Boosters ,
Auto reclosers. FRTU's already provided as a part of RTU
2.1.3
Electronic Trivector Meters

Electronic Trivector Meters of 0.5 class accuracy are installed to acquire the
following analogue parameters of all feeders and transformers in substation and
also at Rehabilitated Distribution Transformers and Switching devices on
Distribution network, including RMU based switch Boards. SCADA vendor has
to install these meters . These are included in SCADA schedule
Voltage in all 3 phases
Current on all 3 phases
Power factor on all 3 phases
Active, reactive and apparent power
Phase angles
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 5,02/07/13
EEPCO
2.1.4
SECTION 3 - GENERAL SYSTEM

REQUIREMENTS
Radio Links
The bid shall include radio links from the Control Centre to the FRTUs installed
on Distribution network. The bid shall include an antenna tower of height 30 m,
guyed type, to Control Centre Site. The bid shall include a steel tube of height 5 m
for antenna installation at RTU Sites. Cables
The bid shall include cables for Plant Adaptation, Radio Links, Power supplies,
etc. The Bidder shall assess the required lengths during the compulsory site visits
arranged in connection with the compulsory pre-bid meeting.
2.1.5
Training
The bid shall include the training packages specified in Item 13. Training
3.
GENERAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
3.1
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1
Environmental Conditions
The environmental conditions for Control Centre sites and substations are:
3.1.2
Air temperature 0+50 C
Max. rate of change 10 C/h
Relative humidity 5100%, including condensation
Ventilation, if any, is by natural means
All the cubicles shall be IP54.
Power Supply Variations

AC Supply
The voltage tolerance of all the equipment supplied from the UPS shall be as
follows:
Nominal voltage 230 V AC, 50 Hz.
Voltage variation +10-10% (temporarily +15-15%)
Frequency variation +1-1% (temporarily +5-5%)
Harmonic level less than 5% (temporarily less than 20%)
The voltage tolerance of all the equipment not supplied from the UPS shall be as
follows:
Nominal voltage 230 V AC, 50 Hz.
Voltage variation +10-15% (temporarily +15-20%)
Frequency variation +5-5%
Harmonic level less than 20%

DC Supply
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 6,02/07/13

REQUIREMENTS
EEPCO
The voltage tolerance of all the equipment, e.g. RTUs and Radio Link terminals,
supplied from 48 V DC systems shall be:
3.2
Nominal voltage 48 V DC
Voltage variation 4060 V
Positive on earth
Voltage ripple max 1%
SYSTEM GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

The SCADA System shall be made of integrated, well-documented, and field
proven standard software applications.
The system shall have but not limited to the following characteristics:
Scalable architecture: All the functionalities of the SCADA system should be
integrated in a modular concept.
Open System Architecture: To offer upgradeability with non-proprietary
products and extensive use of open standards thus extending the lifetime of
the system.
Reliability: System redundancy should be incorporated in SCADA system in
order to ensure a high level system availability (typically, more than 99.95%).
Security: Allow access only to authorized personnel and blocks access to
unauthorized personnel an Authority Control Function.
The product must be scalable, configurable, robust and conform to the
international standards. The manufacturer of the product shall have field
proven reliability references in various electricity utilities around the world.
3.3
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
The proposed
SCADA &DMS Architecture of MV network is shown
in Appendix -2
3.4
CAPACITY AND EXPANDABILITY

The Control System equipment (hardware and software) shall be scalable and
expandable throughout the expected life time of fifteen (15) years for both the
System Control and the RTUs, wherever they are located in the field, at Control
Centre or remotely. These changes may be consequent to power system
expansion or technological advances.
In view of this, it is of utmost importance that the Control System design
provides sufficient capacity and expandability to handle not only the present but
also expected future power system requirements.
The technical specifications contain all the information the Supplier requires to
estimate the size and capacity requirements of hardware and software.
System design, insofar as concerns capacity and expandability, shall meet the
following general requirements:
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 7,02/07/13
EEPCO

REQUIREMENTS
It shall be designed, delivered and commissioned with sufficient capacity for

performing specified requirements, inclusive of` all applicable optional software
packages.
Hardware and software shall be of modular design. Neither system functions nor
hardware structure shall be subject to major disruptions when expanding, adding
to, modifying or testing the hardware or software.
Further, clear defined procedures shall be given for the improved performance of
all modifications related to the addition of one or more supplementary RTU(s)
/FRTU's or the modification of software to reflect changes in the electrical
network:
The Supplier shall detail how the system that he proposes fulfils the
performance requirements.
It shall be designed, not only to be able to handle the required amount of
information, but also with a 50% spare capacity in database for each required
category of information.
3.5
SECURITY & SAFETY

Security is crucial for the Control System. Consequently the system shall
be designed with a high degree of security which entails for each unit
the following minimum requirements:
Each module shall be designed so that it always goes to a safe status when it
fails. Failed module shall not initiate inadvertent indications or operations on
the power system,
Failure of one component or module shall be localized and cause no further
component or module failures,
Incorrect instructions and data, inadvertent operations and unauthorized
commands shall be refused.
System security must be given special attention, in particular no incorrect outputs
nor inadvertent operations shall be possible under the following conditions:
3.6
single component or module failure,
when switching over to redundant equipment,
During preventive or corrective maintenance of equipment, or while testing,

notably with reference to the removal or replacement of a plug-in module
with software development, debugging, integration or testing,
when modifying, expanding. adding or testing hardware, The above list is

not exhaustive.
MAINTAINABILITY
The supplied system shall involve, with reference to maintenance, the following
minimum features:
a comprehensive and detailed set of alarms to alert operation staff and identify
any malfunction within the system,
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 8,02/07/13
EEPCO

REQUIREMENTS
this set of alarm will be of modular design,

diagnostic and troubleshooting procedures shall be provided to enable field
replacements down to module level, when applicable,
maintenance shall be performed, as far as possible, with standard general
purpose instruments and tools.
Supplier shall provide, for all the various units and sub-units of the system, the
pertinent maintainability information including at least:
Mean Time to Restoration (MTRS), defined as the mean time needed to locate
the failure, replace faulty component(s) and perform check tests for system
restoration This will not include the time needed to reach the site and obtain
the required spare parts,
Mean Maintenance Down Time (MMDT) as recommended by Supplier.
3.7
RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY
3.7.1
It is a fundamental requirement that the System (and individual items of
equipment within it) shall be designed for high reliability and that hardware and
standard existing software used within the System should have been proven in
service.
The System availability shall be at least 99.95%, assuming an 8-hour Mean Time
To Repair (MTTR) for equipment at the Control Centre. This figure includes
availability of all critical functions that is the SCADA functions (Historical Data
Management function not included) and all the Real-time Network Analysis
applications.
The following facilities are the minimum that shall be available with this
probability:
All real time functions for which the system is designed, including:
Data acquisition, without the compilation of historical data records
Supervisory controls
The availability of the system shall be confirmed by the fact of record of past
experience in delivering control systems delivered to Electric Utilities.
3.7.2
AVAILABILITY CALCULATIONS
Theoretical and practical figures used for this calculation shall be given in the
Tender Schedules for the reliability of each individual unit of the System in terms
of Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF). Reliability figures of existing equipment
shall be supported by evidence from operational experience at similar types of
installation.
Calculations for the availability of the System shall be included in the Supplier's
offer.
These calculations shall be based upon the MTBF data of items of equipment and
a MTTR data stated above.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 9,02/07/13
EEPCO

REQUIREMENTS
From those data, the unavailability of each sub-system shall be calculated taking in
account each item redundancy. The global availability shall then be calculated
from those different unavailability data. This calculation shall lead to the failure
probability and equivalent global MTBF data for the control centre system.
The overall assessment of System availability shall be provided in the form of an
overall System block diagram with each main item shown, complete with its
reliability data. The calculation of overall availability shall be provided with this
diagram.
3.7.3
Availability Evaluation
The availability data will be collected on site by the Employers personnel and his
representative for each component of the control system during the availability
test period of one month.
The results of the availability calculations will govern the delivery of the relevant
Acceptance Certificates.
For each of these components the number of` outages will be counted. Outage
time will be calculated as follows:
The time required for spare part procurement, on-site delivery and installation
is not taken into account.
With each failure, regardless of whether or not it causes an outage, the
Employer staff will troubleshoot and Supplier will be immediately advised
thereof. Supplier's staff shall then diagnose and repair. If the failure did cause
an outage, the total repair time (diagnosis time plus actual repair time plus time
to put function back in service) will be counted as outage time.
All outage time will first be counted but if it can be proven to be caused by
hardware or software not of Supplier's supply, it will then be deducted.
For each deducted or excluded outage time, the same amount of time will be
deducted from the cumulative period.
Only outages on critical function will be cumulated as downtime.
3.8
DISTRIBUTED OPEN SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The configuration of the SCADA system shall comprise a distributed computing
environment with open system architecture.
The system architecture shall be open to accommodate hardware or application
software additions, whether they are supplied by the original supplier or obtained
from third party Vendors.
The operating system, support software, and applications, as well as APIs that
provide standardized interfacing between System software and application
software, shall be completely documented.
The following distributed and open-system design concepts shall be used:
The SCADA Configuration shall be based on Open Systems Standards in
which the software is totally transparent, and any hardware can be
replaced/upgraded/ expended with a functionally similar device and not
necessarily manufactured by the original Vendor.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 10,02/07/13
EEPCO

REQUIREMENTS
The system must be built as independently as possible from the operating

systems and hardware in order to enable the later evolutions.
The system shall be designed to provide the highest possible level of hardware
and software independence through the use of standard products, standard
toolkits, and application modularity.
The Supplier shall prove that the critical functions can operate with different
hardware platforms and operating systems. Supplier shall also prove that the
software corresponding to the critical functions have been able to follow the
past operating systems and hardware evolutions.
All processing units of the system shall be interconnected using industry
standard Local Area Networks (LANs). The LANs shall support the exchange
of data from various system components that include: servers, user consoles,
communications processors, terminals, gateways, etc.
3.9
PERFORMANCES
According to the Distribution Network size and to the operating scenarios, the
system shall answer the performance requirements stated hereunder.
The provider shall demonstrate its ability to reach the performance requirements.
Performance tests shall be carried out during the Factory Acceptance Tests.
3.9.1
Computer Start Up
Total time for the start-up of a computer, including automatic program load,
initialization and database updating, shall not exceed five minutes for critical
functions (SCADA, front-ends servers). Automatic restart following a power
outage shall also not exceed five minutes.
Complete SCADA functionality shall be available within a further five minutes
following a start-up or automatic restart of the last computer in the minimum set
of computers required to be running to support this functionality. Updates from
RTUs may extend beyond this time but the full update of the System with data
from the field shall not exceed a further five minutes. Thus, a complete restart of
the System, including full update from the field, shall not exceed 15 minutes.
3.9.2
Transfer of Operation
No operational feature of the SCADA System shall be unavailable for more than
30 seconds at any time due to the transfer of operation from one processor to
another following processor failure (e.g. fail-over to a hot standby computer or
reconfiguration of networked tasks) or for any other reason. Immediately after
fail-over, all functions shall be available to the operators. The operators shall not
need to login again and the display selections should remain as they were prior to
the fail-over. No data shall be lost during the transfer of operation.
3.9.3
System Response Times

The performance of the System shall meet or better the maximum response times
specified in the Following Table.
If a display is suspended during panning and zooming, the time for the display to
be refreshed shall be no more than one (1) second after the panning/zooming
operation has completed.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 11,02/07/13
EEPCO

REQUIREMENTS
The Supplier shall provide detailed calculation that demonstrates that the
proposed system has the capacity and response capability to meet the full
requirements for performance initially and when a fully expanded. The
calculations shall demonstrate that there is sufficient processing power to achieve
the requirements.
Normal
Activity
High
Activity
Confirmation of point selection on a VDU
The time between selection of a display and the VDU diagram

fully updated shall not exceed
Acceptance of a single alarm
Acceptance of a page of alarms
The time between selection of a control function and check

back from the RTU as to whether or not the control can be
performed shall not exceed (*)
The time between execution of a control function and initiation

of the control at the RTU shall not exceed
a) MW, MVAR & Voltage measurements
10
20
b) Other measurements
20
40
The time between successive updates of the main computer

database with pulse meter values shall not exceed
30
30
15
Description
The time between the occurrence of a change of state or an

alarm at a RTU and display on the SCADA shall not exceed
(*)
The time between the occurrence of a change of state or an
alarm at a RTU and output on a logging device on the SCADA
shall not exceed (*)
The time between a change of state at a RTU due to a control
action and display on the SCADA shall not exceed (*)
The time between successive updates of the main computer
database with analogue measurements shall not exceed
Time from request of hard copy output to the commencement

of printing shall not exceed
Table Maximum System Response Times (Seconds) *) Communication time

between the Front End and the FRTU on site not included.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 12,02/07/13
EEPCO
4.
SECTION 4 - SOFTWARE GENERAL

REQUIREMENTS
SOFTWARE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The system software shall be organized using a modular approach so that it allows
later and easy integration of functional components for its lifecycle: system
implementation, maintenance and upgrades.
This software shall be fully developed as a standard product. Programs shall be
modular with each module performing a clearly defined task, with user friendly
interface and field proven capabilities.
The software of the control centre can be broken down into system software and
application software (i.e. SCADA, power application, distribution applications and
MMI functions).
4.1
OPERATING SYSTEM
Operating system for the main servers:
In order to allow a high level of independency concerning the server machines
and their technological evolution and availability on the market, SCADA real
time software shall be designed to be portable and running on both Windows
and Linux Operating systems, or substantially equivalent.
The provider shall demonstrate such portability, by detailing existing
references on the two Operating systems.
Operating system for the work stations, peripheral servers and communication
interfaces:
The Operating System for peripheral servers, workstations, communication
interfaces shall be Microsoft Windows or substantially equivalent.
In order to optimize the maintenance, the spare parts and the system
administration tasks, a all Windows solution shall be preferred (with
Windows 2008 for servers, Windows 2008 for workstations), or
substantially equivalent.
4.1.1
General
The SCADA computers at the Master Station shall form the main means of
controlling the power network. These shall be of high integrity, industrial units.
The Master Station shall provide for data acquisition from RTUs, storage in a
logically structured database, alarm management and real-time data presentation
(in text and graphic form). It must also provide all the system support functions
associated with providing the above operational functions. The facility to remotely
control plant via the RTUs shall be provided.
All points shall be identified by a unified referencing system. The numbering
system to be incorporated will be determined during the Contract and will be
assigned by the Engineer. The system shall accommodate point reference
numbers of at least seven (7) alpha-numeric characters for location, at least
twenty-four (24) alpha-numeric characters for point descriptions and at least eight
(8) alpha-numeric characters for parameter type.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 13,02/07/13
EEPCO

REQUIREMENTS
4.2
SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE AND DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
4.2.1
General requirements
A set of software shall be provided to enable maintenance of application software
and development of new software in software development mode.
All hardware and software facilities shall be provided to allow creation,
modification and debugging of programs in all languages that are supplied.
The following shall thus be possible:
Program and data editing
Program compiling and assembling
Linking
Loading, executing and debugging program.
In addition, Supplier shall demonstrate that the software being delivered has been
developed and is maintained using software management tools. These tools shall
at least support the following features:
Software components identification
Version management
Concurrent development capability
Easy to use build procedures.
The software management tools shall be delivered along with the system, so that
the Owner can use it for:
His own software development
System upgrades.
All those tools must be also available on engineers PCs running Microsoft
Windows for ease of use by programmers and engineers. It shall therefore be
possible to compile applications and run executable images on these
PCs for engineers to develop and test extensions of the system.
Source code should be available for SCADA applications used by operators.
4.2.2
Command language
A complete command language shall be provided that allows interactive use of
any console to interactively create, modify and debug programs in all languages
provided.
It should also be possible to create and save command procedure file and to
execute it sequentially.
4.2.3
Programming languages
Language compiler shall be provided for all languages that are used in application
software. In addition, the following language compilers shall be provided:
C, C++
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 14,02/07/13
EEPCO

REQUIREMENTS
FORTRAN.
All compilers should, as far as possible, have the ability of optimizing the object
code in order to increase speed of execution and better use of main memory.
For all languages, diagnostic data, error summary and cross-reference listings shall
be available.
The output lists and error messages shall be clear and comprehensive.
4.2.4
Linkage Editor and Loader

A linkage editor and loader shall be provided to link object modules and load it in
executable modules.
As far as possible, the loader shall accept object modules issued from various
language compilers.
4.2.5
Debugger
A debugger shall be provided to allow halting execution of a program at
predefined points, reading and modifying the registers and memory locations and
executing step by step a program.
Tender shall describe the features of debuggers for each type of equipment.
4.2.6
General utilities
The following utilities shall be provided for all computers in the configuration:
Full screen editor
Library management
Programs allowing to copy and print any data or program files
Media conversion to copy from one support device to another (e.g. disk to
magnetic tape)
File comparison
Sort and merge package
Programs that allow to partially save and recover volumes
Core and memory dump.
In addition all specific utilities that are used by the application software shall be
provided.
4.3
OPEN SYSTEM INTERFACE

Using already existing APIs (Application Programming Interface) and standard
interfaces, it shall be possible to adapt interfaces for the connection to any type of
system in the company such as accounting system, inventory, maintenance and/or
customers management, network planning, geographical information system.
4.4
DATA MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

The databases organization shall be designed to meet the following major
functional requirements:
Data consistency
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 15,02/07/13
EEPCO

REQUIREMENTS
Compliance with the system performance requirements including both

response times and expansion capabilities
Historical information system
.CADA Systems shall be provided with Historical Information System (HIS) with
limited retention periods. For the Historical Information System, a Relational
Database Management System (RDBMS) shall be supplied; it shall conform to the
latest Structured Query Language (SQL) standards. The RDBMS shall accept
interactive and pre-compiled SQL statements to provide at least the following
functions:
Definition of schemas, relational tables, views and fields
On line modification of the database schema
Data manipulation commands such as update, insert, delete, join, and select.
Multiple concurrent accesses to the database shall be possible. Support services
shall be provided for deadlock prevention, locking, and access authorization. The
RDBMS shall support Transaction monitoring and rollback and Industry standard
Application Programming Interfaces (API), including Open Database
Connectivity (ODBC).
4.5
INTER FACE TO PC SERVER BY WEB SERVER

The SCADA system shall provide a multi-purpose Web server interface opening
to the system.
The Web server shall enable office PCs to view station displays, alarm list, event
lists, sequence of event lists and reports. Only the Web server should have access
to the SCADA LAN through the fire wall. The office PCs should not have access
to SCADA LAN, instead they shall communicate with the Web server.
4.6
DATA AND DISPLAY MAINTENANCE
4.6.1
User Interface Development

A display editor shall be provided to allow displays to be easily modified to
incorporate changes. The display editor shall be fully compatible with the database
generation and editing function. The editor shall support the creation of libraries
of standard and custom symbols or components to be created, modified, and used
to facilitate the editing process.
The display editor shall support the listing, dumping, reloading, and validating of
display definitions. The display editor shall support the important construction
options like:
Copy/move/delete/modify,
Building at different zoom level,
Linking of any defined graphics symbol to any database point,
Pop-up menus,
Protection of any data field on any display against user entry based on log-on
identifiers
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 16,02/07/13
EEPCO

REQUIREMENTS
Activation of new or modified displays for any application or across all

applications of the system by a simple command that causes no noticeable
interruption of on-line system activity.
Displays shall be composed of display elements, primitives, symbols, and macros.
Within a display, each display element shall be assigned a position, in rectangular
co-ordinates, within the display space. The individual dynamic data fields and data
arrays in defined displays shall be logically identifiable.
It shall be possible to reference multiple data sets by the same display. Database
items shall be presented in the formats like Numerical text, Symbol, Colours,
textures, Blink conditions, graphical presentation and a Combination of the above
formats. The condition of the data shall be displayed by quality code and by
tagging. Colour, appended symbols, and other display features may be used for
this purpose. For user interaction, cursor targets shall send a message displaying
record identities, cursor position, database, application and application system
associated with the display. There shall be different display layers and each layer
shall be a self-contained world co-ordinate space onto which display elements,
including data, shall be placed.
The selective presentation of layers de-cluttering shall be controlled by the
scale (zoom or magnification) level and by user selection. Each layer shall be
visible over a range of scale level set defined as the display is built. Facility shall be
there to create display macros to aid in the display construction process. Each
display shall have headings at a fixed location, placed either vertically, horizontally
or both. Database references shall survive any type of data change, including
record insertion, record deletion, and schema redefinition.
4.6.2
Automatic Generation of Distribution Network Single-line

Schematics
An automatic display generator shall be provided to facilitate the display building
activity, and further display maintenance. This tool shall be used to generate
automatically graphical single-line diagrams.
This tool shall use the Power System database as the main input. Based on the
network connectivity contained in this database, the display generator shall
automatically:
Place the network devices on the one-line display
Create data base linkages for each device
Associate a dynamic behaviour to each device.
The tool shall allow manual modification of the automatic lay-out by manually
moving objects on the drawing page. This associated software, that shall be a tool
integrated to the overall system software, shall be clearly described by the
Supplier.
All the usual features of a display editor shall be available to animate the generated
displays, including but not limited to representation of analogues values, switching
states, alarming states, feeder colouring, and so forth
The tool shall support an update mode, by which a modified version of the
network data can be imported to update existing displays. Additions, deletions or
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 17,02/07/13
EEPCO

REQUIREMENTS
modifications of objects shown on the display shall be made automatically based

on the new network description. All modifications made to the existing display
shall be logged and kept for the users review. In case the display had been
modified manually before the update, all manual edits shall be preserved across
the update process.
4.6.3
Automatic Generation of Substation Tabular displays

Finally, substations tabular displays shall be automatically generated and
maintained from the database.
4.6.4
Database Construction & Maintenance

Database construction refers to the definition of the initial database structure,
population of the structure with its initial contents, and revision of the structure
when necessary. Database maintenance refers to the subsequent addition of new
database contents and the modification of existing contents. The database
Construction & Maintenance tool shall support validation mechanism for Data
Entries. In addition, global validation of the database shall be available.
At the time of database construction, the tool shall build and maintain database
directories sufficient to fully describe the database, and which structure is
independent from the data themselves. It should be possible to maintain the
database by adding, deleting or modifying database records. This shall not require
any recompilation of the source code.
Operations on the different portions of the model definitions in the database shall
be independent. Easy access to database content shall be provided in order to
perform modification (add/change/delete) of any record or its attribute.
4.6.5
Report Generation and Modification

A report compiler for historical data shall be supplied for report generation and
modification. The report generation tools shall specifically work with the RDBMS
used for HIS data. The format of each report shall be defined via the report
compiler. Some reports, however, may be dynamically generated.
4.6.6
On-line Help
On-line help facilities for Database Construction & Maintenance, Documentation
management, System Operation, Applications and Diagnostics shall be provided
along with each of the software module.
A dual LAN shall be offered or an alternative system that offers equal or better
security.
All main computers, workstations, communication servers and other equipment
essential for the continuous operation of the SCADA system shall be connected
to both networks.
4.7
MAIL SYSTEM
A mail system shall be provided for multi-users applications. In particular, the
mail system shall be interfaced with the alarm management system and the
network-monitoring tool.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 18,02/07/13
EEPCO
SECTION 5 - HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
The interface with the alarm management system shall provide a filtering utility to
allow sending of only main events.
4.8
SYSTEM MONITORING AND DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAMS
4.8.1
Performance and Utilization Monitoring Programs

Performance and utilization monitoring software package shall be provided to
verify system loading, performance and utilization of all computers. It shall
provide on-line statistics on computer systems utilization on a user selectable
cyclical basis or at one time upon request.
4.8.2
Diagnostic programs
Diagnostic programs shall be provided for all the servers, workstations, and
LAN/WAN. They shall be simple to operate including interactive procedures and
print out or hard copy facilities.
5.
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
5.1
The proposed system shall be designed for an open & scalable configuration, to
ensure inter-compatibility with other systems of the Utility, the future smooth
expansion as well as the easy maintainability. The proposed hardware
configuration should be extended by adding either CPU processors / memory
boards / disks etc. in delivered units or additional units for capacity extension. All
hardware shall be manufactured, fabricated, assembled, finished, and documented
with workmanship of the highest production quality and shall conform to all
applicable quality control standards. The hardware architecture shall be based on
open system with a very high level of operational security and safety.
All computer equipment shall be current models from main world-wide computer
manufacturers selected for efficient operation of a real-time system.
No proprietary hardware will be accepted for workstations, servers,
communication front-end computers. No modification of the Operating System
software is allowed.
The processors shall include facilities for orderly shutdown and resumption of
processor operation upon detection of power loss and subsequent resumption of
power.
Redundancy of equipment supporting critical functions is mandatory.
The hardware shall be connected to a SCADA LAN. The system architecture
shall ensure fast communication between servers and workstations. The SCADA
LAN shall include the redundant local networks at the Control Centre.
5.2
SERVERS
The servers shall be of high performance type with:
power supply (redundant as option)
fan system (redundant as option)
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 19,02/07/13
EEPCO
Disk units shall be configured in RAID, preferentially through hardware RAID

controllers. In case of use of mirroring software, the dimensioning of CPU shall
take in account the additional loading.
5.2.1
Main application SCADA servers

The Main Application Servers shall be implemented according to the full hotstandby redundancy concept (two physically independent servers) and shall be
equipped with sufficient hard disc capacity and main memory to hold the
complete real-time data base and to perform basic data analysis, verification, filter
and calculation functions like topology analysis, etc., which are required for
efficient application server sharing.
5.2.2
Communication servers
Redundant and non-proprietary communication servers shall be linked through an
appropriate number of signal loops to the RTUs and other metering equipment
connected in point-to-point configuration or to data concentrators collecting data
from several Remote Terminal Units.
Each processor, running preferably under Windows operating system or
substantially equivalent, of a redundant set of servers shall be connected to both
LANs in order to cope with the high availability requirements.
Communication Server interfacing to the RTUs shall be based on the standard
asynchronous IEC 870-5-101 or 104 and DNP 3 protocol. Free slots shall be
made available inside the FE server, so as additional communication boards can
be plugged-in to meet the network future expansion. Each channel shall be
assigned a different protocol and the front-end shall be able to manage several
protocols in parallel.
The redundancy of front-end servers shall allow handling of RTUs connected
either through single channel or redundant channels. In both cases, one FE server
shall be able to take control of all RTUs channels. In order to meet networks
expansion behind the full capacity of a pair of FE servers, it shall be possible to
connect additional FE servers pairs to the LANs.
Off-the-shelf, multi-source communication boards are required. Each
communication line shall be able to support its own communication protocol.
The Communication Servers shall be able to process time stamped data and
shall also provide automatic start-up functions.
Both servers can be active at a time (but not simultaneously for the same RTU
channel).
5.2.3
Data Engineering servers

The main application servers shall also serve as historical servers. The system
must withstand failure of one server, without loss of historical data.
5.2.4
Auxiliary devices
A gong shall provide an acoustic signal when an alarm occurs. It must be
integrated in each operator console.
A GPS clock shall be provided for time synchronization.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 20,02/07/13
EEPCO
5.2.5
Hardware Configuration
Servers of core system should be rack mounted, in cubicles.
Sufficient space shall allow mounting of network equipment (switches, routers,
firewalls, etc.) and proper cabling.
Adequate mechanical devices shall allow easy access to equipment, allowing
maintenance intervention on individual equipment without disruption of others.
Two separate power distribution units in cubicles shall feed the servers redundant
power supplies.
5.3
WORKSTATIONS
Each Operator Workstation shall be equipped with two (2) screens, and be able to
support up to four (4) screens for future extension.
It shall be possible to assign different applications to each screen, such as, for
example a minimum for each operator, a screen with the network general display,
a screen with the substations displays, a screen with the alarms and events
displays, a screen with analogues Trending.
5.4
MONITORS
Screens provided shall be of flat TFT. Workstations for operators shall be fitted
with minimum two (2) full graphics screens, with the ability to be extended
ultimately to four (4). Size shall be 20 inches minimum.
Minimum resolution shall be of 1280 x 1024 pixels at a minimum of 75 Hz.
Automatic detection of, and switching to, all resolutions and refresh rates shall be
provided.
Glare reduction features such as tinted, anti-glare screen coating, shall also be
proposed; devices attached to the monitor are not acceptable.
5.5
FRONT-END SERVERS
Redundant Front-End servers (FE) shall be provided to handle communications
with RTUs. The FE servers shall be able to communicate with and to handle all
RTUs located in the various substations and power stations. They shall preprocess the RTUs data and send them to the data servers for further processing.
The front end computers shall be able to simultaneously communicate with
different equipment using different protocols.
Moreover, different types of processing shall be available.
These Front-End servers shall be able to communicate with RTUs on WAN (IP
based protocols) and/or serial communication channels.
Supported serial channels shall be either point to point or point to multi point.
Asynchronous (byte protocols) and synchronous communications (bit protocols)
shall be supported.
The Front-Ends shall support the IEC 60 870-5-101 and 104 and DNP3.0 (serial
and over IP) protocols for the links to the RTUs.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 21,02/07/13
EEPCO
The Supplier will give the list of protocols supported in standard by its SCADA
product as well as the type of RTUs to which it is already interfaced with.
Each of the FE servers shall offer at least 64 data channels. Free slots shall be
made available inside the FE server, so as additional communication boards can
be plugged-in to meet the network future expansion.
Each channel shall be assigned a different protocol and the front-end shall be able
to manage several protocols in parallel.
The redundancy of front-end servers shall allow handling of RTUs connected
either through single channel or redundant channels. In both cases, one FE server
shall be able to take control of all RTUs channels.
In order to meet networks expansion behind the full capacity of a pair of FE
servers, it shall be possible to connect additional FE servers pairs to the LANs.
Proprietary hardware shall not be accepted. Off-the-shelf, multi-source
communication boards or interfaces are required.
In case of a problem on the SCADA server, the front-end server shall be able to
provide to the operator a display showing a clear and comprehensive view of the
network current state. In such a case, the front-end server shall also be able to
inform the operator of the communication links state toward the RTUs that it is
managing.
5.6
LARGE SCALE DISPLAY SYSTEM

A large scale display system (LSDS) shall be proposed. It shall enable the display
on a wall board of the same alphanumeric and graphical images as the ones shown
on the operator consoles. As an option, the LSDS could also be able to show the
images derived from video signal sources such as closed circuit TV and VCR
output channels, etc.
The LSDS shall be interfaced with the SCADA LAN. The control of the display
wall shall be possible from any workstation connected to the LAN network.
The LSDS displays shall be visible under large viewing angle 180 vertical and
horizontal.
The LSDS size shall be at minimum of 1.2 meters wide for 2.8 meters high for
good vision of operators seated at 3 meters distance. For the comfort of the
operators, contrast should be of 1000:1, and adjustment of the luminous
brightness of the lamp shall range from 50% to 100%.
5.7
PRINTERS
At least, the following set of printers shall be provided in order to enable proper
operation of the SCADA system:
Two Black & White printers, laser technology, all sizes up to A3 format
One Colour printer, laser technology, all sizes up to A3 format, reasonably
good colour print engine speed (4 pages per minute), colour calibration
facilities
For logging, historical data review and printing shall be available from any
workstation on operator request.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 22,02/07/13
EEPCO
SECTION 6 - USER INTERFACE
All the printers shall be interfaced with the SCADA LAN.
5.8
NETWORKS
5.8.1
Standards
Communications within and among the computing networks supplied by the
Supplier shall conform to standards, in particular:
IEC 60 870-5-101 and 104, and DNP 3.0 (serial/over IP) for the
communication links between the Front End computers and the RTUs in the
primary substations.
IEC 60 870-6 ICCP protocol for the communication between control centre
systems,.
Proprietary protocols for RTUs and inter-centre links will not be accepted.
Emphasis shall be placed on security features as described hereunder in Office
LAN chapter.
5.8.2
System LAN
The communication between the equipment of the SCADA system at the control
centre shall be made through high performance redundant (two independent
LAN sets in parallel) LAN switches with minimum throughput of 10/100 Mbits
auto-sense per connection ports. Full duplex connections are preferred (no
connection grouping through hub or concentrator).
5.8.3
Office LAN
WAN Connections with other local systems shall be secured through firewalls.
Firewall appliances are preferred. Furthermore, when applicable (depending on
external system capability), communication shall be encrypted (SSL sockets, VPN,
etc.).
5.8.4
Maintenance link
It shall be possible to diagnose and maintain the system through a secure Virtual
Private Network (VPN) channel.
5.8.5
Network Time system

All equipment of the SCADA hardware network shall maintain the network time
from a GPS synchronized Network Time Server.
The Network Time server shall be provided with Ethernet 100 TX port (NTP on
TCP/IP), Front display, administration port, GPS antenna and antenna/converter
unit.
Sufficient length of antenna cable should be provided.
6.
USER INTERFACE
The network diagrams shall be displayed by two-dimensional graphical
representation. The principal interface between users and the SCADA will be the
consoles. Console is an operating position consisting of one or more monitors
and user interaction devices. The interface shall support the following functions:
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 23,02/07/13
EEPCO
multi-windowing, scrolling, panning, zooming, de-cluttering, display navigation,

point and click selection of further layer of detail.
Language of user interface shall be English (operator and maintenance).
The graphics system supplied with the SCADA system shall execute on all
consoles provided by the Supplier and on personal computers running the MS
Windows operating systems.
6.1
USE OF WEB SERVER

The user interface software shall be based on state-of-the-art web-based
technology to present interactive, full-graphics views of system data via LAN,
corporate intranet or the internet. The same displays shall be used.
It is essential that the same web-based user interface (same navigator, same tools
bars) be available to the operator either for local use in the dispatching centre or
remotely. For this doing, it shall not be added more than one server at the
dispatching centre for the external communications.
Specifically, it shall be possible to:
visualize the full-graphics displays using a web browser and using also a
specific browser equipped with all the infrastructure required by operational
activity
call up any information supported by a web browser : web page, pdf file,
MSWord file, Excel document, any other format supported by a web browser.
use all features of the user interface from the browser, including dialog popups, data entry and modification, selecting device, issuing controls, etc.
simultaneously show, in different frames of the web browser, displays
presenting real-time data as well as no-real-time like historical data
customize the user interface by adding links to corporate or external web sites,
by inserting standard html web pages
create scripts to automate display interaction and/or navigation using clientside scripting language like java script or vbscript
It shall be possible to call-up the operator displays via the web using light-weight
clients (web browser) when needed.
The web technology shall be natively supported by the product, which means that
having the displays shown in the web browser shall not bring additional work to
the maintenance engineer at display building time. Nor shall it require additional
third-party software products like specific plug-ins.
The web user interface shall support and enforce all security features described in
the following section.
6.2
ACCESS SECURITY
A mechanism for defining and controlling user access to the SCADA system shall
be provided. This security scheme shall be in addition to that included with the
operating system. That is, even though a user has logged onto the windows
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 24,02/07/13
EEPCO
platform, access to the SCADA functionality shall be subject to additional security

checks.
6.2.1
User Login
Password security shall be provided for access to the SCADA. A system manager
or analyst selectively assigns levels of capability through access rights to consoles,
specific computers, and/or individual users.
It shall be possible to assign a level of security for either the consoles or the
physical people. When a physical individual connects it-self to the system via a
workstation, access rights associated to this session shall depend on the access
right defined for the user and the ones granted to the workstation:
If the workstation has been defined by the system manager as User centric,
then any user connecting him-self to the system via this workstation shall
benefit from the access rights associated to him
If the workstation has been defined by the system manager as Workstation
centric, then any user connecting him-self to the system via this workstation
shall benefit from the access rights associated to the workstation
Finally, if the workstation has been defined by the system manager as
Hybrid, then any user connecting him-self to the system via this workstation
shall benefit only from the access rights common to the user and to the
workstation.
Encrypted passwords and/or strong authentication (one time password,
certificates) shall be proposed.
The transfer of access rights from a physical individual to another shall be
possible for the monitoring of critical areas on the Distribution network. When
none of the workstations normally connected to these critical areas, then, the
system shall automatically grant the corresponding access rights to another
workstation designed in advance as backup workstation.
Each log-on and log-off shall be reported as an event. The event message shall
indicate the date and time the procedure was executed, the name of the console
and the identification of the user. The log-in status of the user shall be unaffected
by any failure recovery procedure of the SCADA system.
6.2.2
Function and Data Access Authorization

System security shall be available at multiple levels. Once logged on, access to
SCADA functionalities shall be managed by assigning a set of permissions to each
workstation and/or user.
The permissions allocated to each console shall be stored in the SCADA database.
Management of console permissions shall be a function itself subject to
permission validation.
6.3
USER INTERACTION GENERAL FEATURES

The following features shall be included in the user interface. Alternatives may be
offered but must be functionally equivalent to the features specified.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 25,02/07/13
EEPCO
6.3.1
Windows
The User Interface must be a multi-windows system. It shall be possible to
manage as many as desired displays on the same screen. The system manager shall
be able to limit the number of windows a user can open on a single screen.
Each screen shall support the simultaneous presentation of at least four userdefined windows. These windows shall be in addition to those dedicated for the
common display features. The presentation of any display in any window shall be
allowed. Window position and dimensions shall be independently adjustable to a
screen resolution of four pixels or less. The windows shall be displayed in either
overlapping or tiled fashion depending on the window definition of the user. In
addition to the defined windows, user definition of windows shall be supported.
Efficient techniques for switching between windows on a screen and between
screens shall be provided.
6.3.2
Display Selection
Rapid, convenient, and reliable selection of displays shall be provided using the
following methods:
Selection from a menu display
Cursor target selection on any menu, graphic, or tabular display
Selection of an alarm: in this case, it shall call up the one-line display
containing the alarms location,
Entry of a display name in a display select field,
Forward and backward paging through a series of displays,
Selecting a display recall command. This shall cause the display that was on
view immediately prior to the current display to be recalled, and,
Selecting function keys or cursor targets dedicated to displays.
The user shall be provided window selection techniques to independently direct a
display to any window on any screen at the console.
6.3.3
Scaling and Translation

The user shall be able to scale (zoom) the image of a world co-ordinate space or
display in a smooth fashion to any convenient scale factor. The scale factors shall
allow the presentation of an entire world co-ordinate space or display on the full
screen or a window. Static and dynamic data shall be displayed and updated
during a scaling operation, and display text shall be scalable to be consistent with
the scaled image. At defined scale factors, levels of de-clutter shall be invoked.
The user shall be able to select an area of a world co-ordinate display by cursor
manipulation (rubber-banding) and cause the display to be redrawn with the
selected area centred in the display and with the selected area magnified to best fit
the full window. The window dimensions shall not be changed by such an action.
The user shall be able to translate (pan) the display image in steps no larger than
16 pixels to permit the observation of other portions of a display within a selected
window. Static and dynamic data shall be displayed and updated during a
translation operation.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 26,02/07/13
EEPCO
Panning speed shall be proportional to the distance between the cursor and the
point from which the panning operation was initialized.
6.3.4
Supervisory Control Initiation

All the controls in SCADA shall be implemented using the Select - check back
Execute method. Supervisory control functions shall be performed through
dialog boxes that present commands dependent on the type of element to be
controlled. As the final step of the supervisory control process, the user shall be
presented with a clear description of the device to be controlled and the specific
command to be issued and shall be required to confirm the command (execute)
or terminate the command (cancel). The SCADA shall issue the command only
after the user confirms the operation.
The supervisory control procedure shall support the control permissive check and
control interlock requirements.
6.3.5
Manual Data Entry

The operator should be able to block by manual data entry the following
functions:
Data Acquisition
Blocking of data acquisition to prevent data gathered by RTUs from updating the
database. Blocking should be possible for individual data points, points belonging
to a bay or a whole station.
Alarm Processing
Blocking prevents updating of audible alarms and unacknowledged alarms. Event

handling should be blocked for individual data points, points belonging to a bay
or a whole station.
Command
It should be possible to block remote control for individual power system device,
power system device belonging to a bay or a whole station.
In the display pictures of a blocked data point shall be marked with a special
colour indicating the type of blocking. Blocking and de-blocking actions should be
logged in the event list.
6.3.6
Inactivity Timeout
The progress of all user operations shall be monitored. If the user does not
complete to a step within a multi-step operation within a pre-defined time, the
process shall reset, and the user shall be informed of the reset. A partially
completed action shall be reset if the user begins another non-related sequence.
6.3.7
User Guidance
The SCADA shall respond to all user actions indicating whether the action was
accepted, was not accepted, or is pending. For multi-step procedures, the SCADA
shall provide feedback at each step. Indications such as text messages, colour
changes, and blinking shall provide this feedback.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 27,02/07/13
EEPCO
6.3.8
User Help
General and specific context-sensitive on-line help shall be available to the
SCADA user. Context sensitive means that the help information provided shall be
applicable to the next steps or steps in the sequence being performed. Access to
user help shall be available by:
A Help command on the window menu bar;
A Help button in a dialog box; and
Topics from a Help menu
Pressing help key or poke target on the specific field.
The Help menu shall present a list of topics available for reference. The topics
shall refer to the SCADA user documents. The ability to scroll through the topics
explanatory text shall be supported.
The Help button in a dialog box and help key shall present the text of the
SCADA user documents where use of the dialog box is explained. The user shall
be able to scroll through this text. Exit from the help facility shall return the user
to the same point in the sequence for which help was requested.
Context sensitive help facilities shall be provided for each application software
package and operator display. The capability to easily edit or add additional help
facilities in the future shall be provided.
The provided help facility shall also support:
search mechanism
navigation links between related topics within the help documents
select/copy mechanism
print facilities
6.4
TRENDING
The SCADA shall include facilities to generate graphic trend curves for real-time
and historical data.
Selection of a trend shall be automatically called and displayed, by selecting any
value by the operator, without the need to go back in the configuration tools.
Selecting a point and designating a trend curve shall result in the display of a
dialog box where the user can enter information on how the selected point is to
be displayed:
Value name
Trend direction
Scaling factor
Offset
Trend number and colour (for multiple trends on one display)
Time base values
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 28,02/07/13
EEPCO
Trend rate
Trend start time (historical data)
Trend period (historical data).
Minimum of sixteen tracks shall be displayable in the same window.
6.5
DISPLAY HARDCOPY
A means shall be provided to produce printed copies of any display on printer.
Colour displays shall be translated for black and white printers using a mapping
table (or similar) that can be changed by the user.
6.6
DISPLAYS
6.6.1
Power System Overview

The power system overview shall facilitate the operators navigation between
geographically distinct operating areas.
It will present a geographic view of all the power system under SCADA
responsibility. The user shall be able to navigate between substation displays or
distribution network displays by selecting poke points on the overview display.
6.6.2
Distribution Network Displays

Distribution Network Displays are the main user interface for Network operation.
From those displays, the operator shall be able to:
send controls to the substation through the SCADA system
update the Distribution Network database for non-remotely controlled
equipment
place other dressings manually : tags, earthing, cuts, etc.
The system shall support two types of such displays Geographical &
Schematics. The geographical shall support a static geographical background &
dynamic network representation. The schematic shall give a functional view of
power flows.
6.6.3
Primary Substation One-Line

These displays show the interconnected elements of individual substations. The
elements shall include buses, incoming and outgoing lines, transformer banks,
circuit breakers, capacitor banks, and disconnects. The displays shall present
telemetered and calculated data, including all alarm conditions. Highlighting and
colours shall be used to distinguish the operating states of the different substation
elements shall be consistent with all other one-line displays. The user shall be able
to interact with the substation one-line displays to perform any associated user
interactions such as data entry and supervisory control.
The SCADA shall support the capability to assign a digital picture or text file to
any device located on a one-line display. It shall be possible to open the picture or
text file by selecting from a pull down menu once the device has been selected. If
selected, the picture or text file shall immediately be opened in a window on the
active display.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 29,02/07/13
EEPCO
The user shall be able to navigate to other substation displays from poke points
on distribution line segments on the one-line. The user shall also be able to call-up
the associated substation tabular display from a poke point on the one-line.
6.6.4
Substation Tabular
These displays list the value of measured and calculated data associated with each
substation as well as related information such as alarm limits. The user shall be
able to interact with the substation tabular displays to perform any associated user
interactions such as data entry, supervisory control, tagging and scan requests. The
user shall be able to call-up the associated substation one-line display from a poke
point located on the tabular display.
These displays shall be built-in displays of the SCADA; no modelling shall be
required to obtain them. Upon call-up, they shall display all the current contents
of the database. Points displayed shall be all non-spare database points that are
associated with the substation:
For status points - The information displayed for each point shall include :
Name descriptors
All data attributes
Current status
Quality codes and tags
Unique point ids.
For analogue points - The information displayed for each point shall include :
Name descriptors
All data attributes
Current value
All limit values
Quality codes
Unique point ids.
For accumulator points - The information displayed for each point shall
include :
Name descriptors
All data attributes
Current value
Quality codes
Unique point ids
For calculated points - The information displayed for each point shall include :
Name descriptors
All data attributes
Current value
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 30,02/07/13
EEPCO
All limit values, if applicable

Quality codes
Unique point ids.
6.6.5
Access Control Display

This display shall allow a designated authority to control user access to the
SCADA either through the console or through the web interface. The display
shall enable the designated authority to enter, modify, and delete user IDs and
passwords and to assign console areas-of-jurisdiction and operating modes.
6.6.6
SCADA Directory Display

This display shall list all SCADA displays in alphabetical order. Each entry in the
list shall have a cursor target for display selection.
6.6.7
Alarm Summary
Alarm summaries shall be provided to show power system alarms. When called to
a screen or window, the most recent alarms shall be presented first. The user shall
be able to acknowledge and delete messages on the display. Flashing shall identify
unacknowledged alarms (to facilitate reading unacknowledged messages, only the
time field shall flash).
When the full complement of alarm messages will not fit on a single page,
multiple pages shall be provided and a message shall appear on each page of the
display, indicating there are more alarm messages on other pages. If the capacity
of the alarm summaries is limited and an alarm summary display becomes full, the
oldest messages shall be automatically deleted and the newest messages shall be
added. It shall be possible to perform any alarm interaction from the alarm
summary displays.
A single user action shall be used to call an alarm summary that presents only
those alarms for the jurisdictions assigned to the console from which the display is
called. All alarms in all classes shall be presented. The user shall be able to filter
the alarms to present selected classes.
6.6.8
Event Summary & System Activity Log

The event summary shall be similar to the alarm summary with the exception that
all alarms and events as well as records of user actions (such as supervisory
control commands, tag placement, and data management actions) shall be listed.
The system activity log display shall present all important system events in a
timely manner. The content of the display shall be similar to the information sent
to the printer.
6.6.9
Abnormal Summary
This display shall list devices and values that are not in their normal state.
Measured, calculated, and manually entered status, analogue, and accumulator data
points shall be included. The displays shall show the off-normal data points in the
following groups:
Status points for which the present measured state is different from the normal
state stored in the database; and
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 31,02/07/13
EEPCO
Analogue and accumulator points that current values exceeding alarm limits
For those points with an undefined normal state, the system shall provide a
convenient mechanism for redefining their normal states. The off-normal status
displays shall use dynamic colouring facilities to identify the different conditions
associated with the points.
6.6.10
Alarm Inhibit Summary

This display shall list devices and data values for which the user has suspended
alarm processing. The summary shall be an information only display. No user
interaction shall be associated with it.
6.6.11
Tag Summary
This display shall list and describe all active tags for all devices. The user shall be
able to place or remove a tag from this summary. Information on this display shall
list each device tagged and shall include: date and time of tag placement, user who
placed the tag, tag level, station identifier, device identifier, and comment field.
6.6.12
Manual Replace Summary

This display shall list all points that have been replaced by manual entries. The
user shall be able to change the manual entry of a point from this summary for
those points assigned to the console. For each point, there shall be facilities for
fast access to the display containing the point, such that the user can further
modify the value or return the point to automatic data acquisition.
6.6.13
Application Program Displays

All displays associated with all specified application programs and functions shall
be provided. Displays that allow the user to interact with SCADA application
programs shall use a common look-and-feel approach. The information provided
shall help expedite the users interactions.
6.6.14
Trend and Bar Chart Displays

Trend displays shall show the trend curves defined by the user for selected
analogue values.
Up to sixteen separate simultaneous trends shall be allowed on a single track, each
curve having its own scale. Curves colours shall be selectable independently from
at least a 256 colour range.
It shall be possible to associate the trend or bar-chart display to any display in the
same window.
6.6.15
Memos
From the consoles or through web, users shall be able to assign memos that
contain directly entered free-form text and graphics to displays. It shall be
possible to assign memos to any display and at any location within a display. A
unique icon or indicator shall be provided that will visually highlight to the user
that a memo is assigned to the display. The memo icon shall be visible at all declutter levels during a zoom operation.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 32,02/07/13
EEPCO
7.
SECTION 7 - SCADA FUNCTIONS
SCADA FUNCTIONS
The main SCADA functional areas shall be as follows:
Data acquisition which is the process of receiving telemetered data from

field devices.
Data from Electronic Trivector meters installed at Rehabilitated

Distribution Transformers
Data from Electronic Trivector meters installed along with FRTU at

Distribution devices like RMU switch boards, switched Capacitors, Voltage
Boosters, sectionalisers etc.
Data conversion which is the process of converting the telemetered data

received from the Front End servers into a standard format.
Data processing which analyses converted data for violations to be reported

to operators or for processing, depending on the state of data.
Data Network colouring which updates single line diagrams colours

according to operation status of network elements
Supervisory control which allows operators to request control of switching

devices and set point on devices.
Tagging which allows operators to place information on devices (special

conditions prohibiting operation on these devices for example)
Alarms and event processing which notifies operators of unsolicited

changes in the system's state.
Historical data recording
Communication with other control centres
SCADA and distribution network functions should run on the same server.
7.1
DATA ACQUISITION
The data acquisition module shall receive telemetered data from front end
computers used to communicate with field devices.
7.1.1
Operator Requests
Operators shall be given the opportunity:
to issue demand scans to scan RTUs.
and to remove or restore from service entire parts of the communication
system (communication lines, RTUs, groups of data, etc.)
7.1.2
Periodic or Triggered Requests

It shall be possible to scan analogue or accumulator data, synchronize RTU times,
or issue demand scans on a periodic basis or triggered from specific events.
It shall be possible to define different periodic scans for status point and analogue
scans, status point being scanned the most often in order to catch a change of
state as soon as possible. The scanning period shall be customizable in order to be
adapted to the communication network architecture and performances.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 33,02/07/13
EEPCO
It shall be possible to report the values defined for a specific group of points or to
issue a command to the RTU. It shall be used for infrequent scans and special
scanning functions.
7.1.3
Report by Exception
All status changes shall be reported by exception. Accumulator readings shall also
be reported by exception as soon as they are presented by the RTU.
For analogue data, it shall be possible to report a new value if the difference
between this value and the previous one exceeds a specific dead-band to be
specified by the operator.
7.1.4
Integrity Scanning
It shall be possible to report the values of all scanned points (regardless of
whether they changed) in the following cases:
On start-up of the system,
After loss of communication with the RTUs,
Periodically while running
On operators request.
7.1.5
Error & Mismatch Messages

It shall be possible to manage different messages indicating a mismatch between
the SCADA server and the Front End server database or an error in
communication path.
7.1.6
FRTU Synchronization Requests

The system shall provide capability to synchronize the FRTU clocks.
7.1.7
Acquisition Paths Automatic Configuration

The SCADA system shall enable the automatic removing from service of the
communication paths with the RTUs, and with the scan groups.
In that case, the SCADA System shall test periodically the connection and restore
the acquisition module into service when the problem is solved.
7.1.8
Statistics Gathering
On the hourly basis, the SCADA server shall request communication statistics
from the communication equipment.
7.2
DATA CONVERSION
The SCADA system shall provide a data conversion function taking telemetered
data received from the RTUs and converting it to a standard internal form for
further processing.
7.2.1
Sequence of Event Data (SOE)

The system shall provide accurate time value of status changes for devices
monitored by suitable RTUs. A Sequence Of Event RTU shall have its clock
periodically synchronized. The precision of this value capture is given in a table of
the above chapter 2 -General System Requirements / Performances.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 34,02/07/13
EEPCO
7.2.2
Telemetered Status Point

The raw input bits shall be stored by the conversion function before performing a
versatile input conversion on the raw value.
7.2.3
Telemetered Analogue Point

The raw value shall be converted to engineering units using linear translation or
non-linear translation.
7.2.4
Telemetered Pulse Accumulator Point

Each pulse accumulator value shall be stored as floating point value in the
database. In their conversion, pulse accumulator values shall differ somewhat
from analogues because they involve some history, not just the current reading.
7.2.5
Sequence of Events Reporting

SOE status point changes shall be reported and processed. The host SCADA
shall be responsible for processing the SOE log data received from the front end
servers and for displaying the information to the operators.
7.3
DYNAMIC NETWORK COLOURING AND CIRCUIT

TRACING
The Dynamic Network Colouring shall enable the SCADA operator to visualize
the operational conditions present in the distribution network.
Different types of colouring shall be available:
automatic colouring
on-demand colouring.
The two Colouring functions shall be dynamic: they shall at any time reflect the
actual state of the distribution feeders. In particular, on-demand colouring
requests shall not be lost should the feeder topology changes. Colouring functions
shall be available in real time and in study mode.
7.3.1
Automatic Colouring
Electrical conditions shall be automatically identified on the distribution single
line diagrams. Distribution lines and cables shall be coloured using a set of userpredefined colours according to their electrical status:
overload conditions
participation in a loop (limited to lines in the radial part of the network)
energization / de-energization status
earthing status.
7.3.2
On-demand Colouring
The on-demand colouring function shall provide the SCADA operator with the
capability to highlight electrically connected elements of a designated feeder. This
designation shall be performed by direct point and click operation on any of the
feeder branches on the distribution single line diagrams.
Two different modes shall be provided:
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 35,02/07/13
EEPCO
feeder colouring mode, where the entire feeder shall be coloured with the same
uniform representation
Circuit tracing mode, where the two parts of the feeder, upstream and
downstream of the designated branch, shall be coloured with two different
representations. For the upstream part, all actual paths to the feeder source
shall be coloured. In case of loop conditions, the different sources of the
feeder shall also be coloured.
A set of predefined colours shall be allocated to the on-demand colouring.
Selection of the colour amongst this set shall be possible in order to differentiate
neighbouring feeders.
7.4
DATA PROCESSING
Data processing involves a value which has been converted to internal form and
analysed for violations of limits. The data processing shall set various data
attributes depending on the results of the checks and shall trigger any additional
processing or calculation.
There shall be several normal sources of SCADA data:
telemetry
calculation
manual entry
host external process to SCADA.
Different data quality flags shall be provided about data quality, status points,
analogues, special calculations and accumulators, with a minimum of fifteen basic
flags.
It shall be possible to manually replace SCADA values. Acquired values shall be
first removed from service by the operator. This shall allow the operator to
replace the current value by a manual value. The SCADA status of the replaced
value shall become manually replaced. This status shall also be propagated to all
calculated values using the replaced value as an input argument.
A summary display shall show all the currently replaced values.
At any time, it shall be possible to put a replaced value back in service.
7.4.1
Data Quality
Data quality shall be indicated to the operator through quality flags associated to
each data.
Those flags are the ones transmitted by the RTUs according to the
communication protocol in use and completed by the ones issued by the checking
operations made on the data by the SCADA acquisition function, with, as a
minimum:
Un-initialized value: no meaningful amount has been stored in the value.
Bad value: the value is likely to be incorrect because it came from RTU
determined to be bad.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 36,02/07/13
EEPCO
Converter overflow: the value may not be as large (or small) as it shall be
because the analogue value was at the physical limit of the A / D converter
7.4.2
Status Point Processing

A status point shall be defined as being either legal or illegal, and normal or
abnormal:
Illegal state: The first check on a new input to a digital status point is the
legality check. If the new state is illegal, then the old value shall be left in the
database and marked old.
Abnormal state: If the new state is legal, it shall be checked to see if it is among
the normal states defined for the point. If not, the status point shall be marked
as abnormal. While abnormal, it shall appear in the summary display of
abnormal conditions.
Alarm checking: Each new value shall be checked to see if transitions into that
state are to be alarmed. If so, and if no control action is pending on the status
point, then an alarm action shall be triggered.
7.4.3
Analogue Processing
An analogue value shall have one or more limits assigned to it to be checked each
time its value changes. For each analogue value, there shall be two basic types of
limits: on the analogue value itself and on the rate of change of that analogue:
Value limits: They shall be used to check the current value of the analogue
against limit values. Up to four limit values can be set. Limit values shall always
come in pair, a high limit and a low limit.
Reasonability limits: There shall be on each analogue a pair of reasonability
limits beyond which no value is even believable. If a value violates these limits,
then the checked value shall be kept and marked old.
Forbidden range limit: A forbidden range is a limit pair which is considered to
be violated when the value of the analogue falls within the pair. A forbidden
range would be used if there were a particular area where operation must be
prevented.
Limit dead-band: To minimize cycling between the violated and un-violated
states, a dead-band shall be specified on the return of a limit to the un-violated
state. Dead-bands shall be individually specifiable for each limit pair either as
an engineering units value or as a percentage of the range between the high
and low limits.
Rate of change limits: They are those which check the rate at which an
analogue value changes. There shall be a positive limit and a negative limit to
catch excessive rises in the analogue value.
7.4.4
Special Calculation Processing

In addition to scanned and manually entered data, some values in the system shall
be automatically calculated from others. These calculated values may be calculated
from digital status, analogue or pulse accumulator measurements.
It shall be possible to introduce new calculations and associated formulas both at
the data base configuration and on-line.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 37,02/07/13
EEPCO
Calculations shall be executed either on an exception basis whenever the inputs of

the calculation changes or on a periodic basis within a range from 1 second to 1
month.
The following calculations shall be possible:
Boolean operations: AND, OR, NOT.
mathematical operations: +, -, /, *, >, <, , ,,
COS, SIN, TAN,
LN, LOG, EXP,
min, max, average,
absolute values.
The definition of calculated analogue values and status shall be possible on line
and on a specific display.
7.4.5
Accumulator Processing
The system shall be able to store accumulator history.
Two methods of storing accumulator history shall be provided: a method that
stores data only once per hour and a method that stores data each time new data
enters the system.
It shall be possible to use the two methods concurrently for any pulse
accumulator, making it possible to maintain two records for data that are read
more than once an hour.
7.5
SUPERVISORY CONTROL
The operator shall be able to request digital status control, set-point control and
raise/lower control on selected points and analogues.
7.5.1
Digital Status Control

A digital control output results in the activation of an output relay in a RTU.
Different commands shall be possible for these digital status controls:
Select before operate (SBO): These are the relays typically used to control the
breakers. This SBO procedure shall be a multi-step procedure.
Direct operate: A direct operate relay is selected and activated all in one
command from the SCADA to the RTU.
Several conditions shall be checked before a requested control action is actually
allowed to be sent as for example: the control point is in service .
A digital status cannot have a control command issued until any outstanding
control to that relay has been completed.
7.5.2
Set-point Controls
A set-point involves a numerical value being sent to an RTU, resulting either a
digital or analogue value out of the RTU to external equipment.
Several conditions shall be checked before a requested set-point action is actually
allowed to be sent as for example: the set-point is in service .
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 38,02/07/13
EEPCO
7.5.3
Values Manual Control

The operator shall be allowed to replace a telemetered value (either digital status
or analogue) by a manual value when necessary, for example in order to prevent
continuous changes due to problems in a RTU. The operator shall then be able to
set a state Not in Service for the corresponding data.
For normally scanned values, the system shall propose two different operation
modes:
Either directly, the data not being stated Not in Service
Either after a specific previous operators request to put the data Not in
Service.
7.5.4
Sequence Switching
The Switching Sequence Management function shall enable the SCADA operator
to edit online and subsequently execute sequences consisting of remote controls
such as switching operations or analogue set-points.
7.5.5
Editing
Online editing facilities shall be provided for the operator to:
create, modify or delete sequences, and
add, modify, or delete control operations within a sequence.
Addition of operations shall be possible by direct point and click from the
network single line diagram, without the necessarily entering manually the
identification of the device. However, manual editing shall also be possible.
A configurable period of time shall be entered for each operation, as a time-out at
execution time.
Verification
Verification of the sequence shall be performed before a sequence can be put in
service and executed. An operator action shall be required to allow the sequence
to be actually used and executed.
Execution
Two modes shall be provided for the execution of the sequences: either fully
automatic after selection by the operator, or step-by-step with an operator action
required to initiate each operation.
Completion of the current operation shall be required before proceeding to the
next operation.
In case of failure of one operation in automatic mode, the sequence shall be
paused, an alarm shall be generated and control shall return to the dispatcher.
7.6
ALARMS AND EVENTS PROCESSING

Systems conditions change or operators actions are events that shall be recorded
by the SCADA system. Systems conditions that require user notification shall
launch an alarm when detected.
The alarm function shall provide the following facilities:
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 39,02/07/13
EEPCO
Methods for notifying operators of unsolicited changes in the system's state.

Notification shall include audible and visual indicators of the presence of
unacknowledged state changes.
The visual indicators shall include a dedicated display region linked via
poke-points to other displays that provide more detailed information about
the state of the power system.
Access to the latest unacknowledged alarm messages.
Ability for operators to acknowledge and/or delete alarm messages on

several displays (including single line diagrams). Alarm messages shall be
acknowledged and/or deleted either individually or on a page basis from an
operator console.
Mechanisms to silence audible alarms.
A chronological history of events or system activity log, archived in files

which can be copied to long-term storage media.
Formatting and printing of event messages.
All events are registered in a log book.

This log book shall be able to keep on line several days of events (up to 1 month
at a minimum). It shall be archived by the historical data management application.
A paper edition of this book shall be possible on the operators request or
launched automatically following a criteria defined by the operator.
7.6.1
System and Substation Alarm Lists

The alarm function shall maintain summary information that include a list of all
acknowledged and/or unacknowledged messages for each substation, a list of all
acknowledged and/or unacknowledged messages for each functional criterion and
a list of all acknowledged and/or unacknowledged messages for each order of
priority.
Up to 8 levels of priority shall be available as a minimum.
Other summaries such as the following shall also be available:
All points not in service.
All points inhibited.
All points being manually overridden.
All points not in their normal state of operation.
7.6.2
Annotating Logs
The operator shall be able to annotate or add comments to the messages of the
system activity log.
7.6.3
Alarm Report and Inhibition

The SCADA shall use up to five different exception reporting actions when an
abnormal state is encountered:
Event Logging
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 40,02/07/13
EEPCO
When a point becomes abnormal or returns to normal, a message is logged

in the system activity log. It shall not be possible to inhibit the system
activity log.
Un-acknowledgement
When a point becomes abnormal or returns to normal, the point is
unacknowledged. The point remains unacknowledged until an operator
acknowledges the point. If the acknowledgement function is inhibited, the
point is automatically acknowledged by the system, and logged as designed
in that case.
Abnormal counting
When a point becomes abnormal, an alarm is issued. When abnormal
counting is inhibited, no alarm is issued when the point becomes abnormal.
Nevertheless the point is registered into the system activity log as usual.
Abnormal indication
When a point becomes abnormal, it is indicated as such by means of
database flags. If abnormal indication is inhibited, the flags are set as if the
point is normal even if it is in the abnormal state.
Tone
When a point becomes abnormal or in some cases returns to normal, an
alarm tone is sounded to alert the operator of the condition. If toning is
inhibited, no tone is sounded when the point becomes abnormal.
7.6.4
Audible Alarm Tone

Tones shall be definable on a console basis. For each console, multiple tones shall
be available. Tones shall be of continuous type requiring the operator to silence it.
It shall be able to associate a tone to an alarm. The sound capabilities of the
workstation might be used instead of external device.
7.6.5
Logging Facility
It shall be possible to print:
Power system events,
Data processing, tele-control and telecommunication system events.
It shall be easily possible to direct any of these events printing to any printer on
the SCADA LAN.
A spooling area shall be provided in order to limit the number of lost messages or
statements in case of temporary unavailability of a printer.
7.6.6
Intelligent Alarm Processing of multiple alarms in real-time

(Option)
An Intelligent Alarm Processing of multiple alarms in real-time shall be proposed
in order that, at the time of heavy disturbances upon the electrical network, the
operator does not find himself overloaded by floods of messages and alarms that
are then coming in a very short time.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 41,02/07/13
EEPCO
This tool shall reduce in a significant way, the number of alarms to be managed by
the operator while facilitating his understanding of the incident and his decision
process.
Very different criteria shall be proposed in order to regroup the alarms; for
example:
cutting out of a well-defined network component
re-closing scenarios following a line fault
malfunction of the network protection system.
As needed, the operator shall be able to define him-self some alarms grouping.
For each diagnostic, the tool shall be able to display on the screen the regrouped
alarms or events detail; it shall then be possible to choose between an automatic
alarm acknowledgement, made by the tool itself, or a manual, and individual,
acknowledgement made by the operator.
This tool shall not lead to any overload of the computerized control system.
7.7
TAGGING
The system shall allow the user to place tags on devices in order to warn or
inform operators of special conditions in the power system. Placing tags on
devices usually prevents controlling these devices.
7.7.1
Tagging Definition
The tagging definition function shall enable the system analyst to define tag types.
A tag type defines the effects of tags when placed on a device. Tag types shall
have one or more of the following characteristics:
Inhibit opening and/or closing of a device
Restrict opening and/or closing of a device.
Place on only opened or closed device.
Each tag type shall also specify a priority which allows the different tag types to be
uniquely identified on the SCADA one-line diagram.
7.7.2
Tag Placement
The tag placement function shall allow the operators to place tags on devices to
prevent them from closing or opening, or to inform the operators of any special
condition. Tags could be also placed at substations for informational purposes.
Operators shall be able to enter informational texts associated to the tags.
7.7.3
Tag Removal
Operators shall be allowed to remove tags. The system shall keep track of tag
placements along with the name of the operator who issued the request.
7.7.4
Tag Group
A set of individual tags shall be able to be grouped together.
For example, when a distribution line segment needs to be electrically isolated,
several breakers or switches may need to be opened. Each breaker or switch is
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 42,02/07/13
EEPCO
tagged. The tags may then be grouped together using a tag group to track the
association between the tags. This information can be kept through a displays
note as described in the following chapter.
7.7.5
Displays Notes
A tool shall be provided for operators to make notes on displays so that they can
communicate information to the next shift or other. A rich text editor supporting
text and pictures shall be provided for this doing.
Display notes, as the name suggests, shall be a repository for information and can
be placed at an arbitrary location on a display. They can be used to indicate a work
permit.
Display notes shall be created for informational purposes, but shall also be
associated with a group of tags. When the display note is created, a movable
picture representing the display note shall appear on the display which the user
can position anywhere on the display.
7.8
DISTURBANCE RECORDING AND PLAY-BACK

All the SCADA data, including all their modifications, shall be recorded in the
SCADA system. It should not be necessary to configure any trigger to record data
evolutions.
This tool shall enable the operator to replay sequences, and to visualize the data
evolution both in the schematics displays and in tabular forms.
The operator shall be able to set a time-date corresponding to the beginning of
the sequence and to adjust the replay speed. Once the operator has started the
replay, he shall be able to pause the replay, enter a new time date and restart from
this new time date.
7.9
HISTORICAL DATA MANAGEMENT
7.9.1
Data Capture
A general utility shall be provided for transferring data from real time database to
a relational database supporting the SQL standard. The relational database shall be
a commercially available product (such as ORACLE or MS SQL Server). For
interoperability with other software products, Microsoft ODBC interface shall be
supported. The primary functionality of the Historical Data Management software
(HIM) shall be to allow collecting historical data from a real-time system into the
relational database, from where a variety of tools can be used to produce statistics
and reports.
The HIM system shall take care of the definition of the real-time data to be stored
along with the periodicity of sampling and duration of storage.
As an example, the following data shall be stored in the historical system:
All the analogues, calculated or coming from the RTUs, sampled every 15
minutes and stored in daily tables on a duration of two (2) months
All the events of the system stored in monthly tables on a duration of two (2)
months
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 43,02/07/13
EEPCO
7.9.2
Reports Facility
Within its offer, the supplier must propose a tool in order to enable operators to
build and customize reports from the historical data gathered into the database of
the man machine interface product. This tool has to be able to build in a userfriendly manner, reports about all the systems data.
For example, the supplier shall provide the following reports:
Daily report
Weekly report
Monthly report
With the possibility to operate processes such as averages, sums, comparisons on
the data presented in the report.
The product may be a third party product, reports built with this third party
product must be displayable through an Internet browser.
Resulting reports must be exportable in several formats such as Excel spread
sheets, ASCII format, CSV format, etc.
7.10
DATA COMMUNICATION WITH OTHER CONTROL

CENTRES
It shall be possible to perform data exchanges with other control centres using
ICCP / TASE 2 protocol. Whatever the type of control centre, it shall be possible
to exchange at least the following data:
real-time telemetered data,
non-telemetered data,
control data,
SOE data,
scheduling data,
historical data,
energy accounting data
operator messages.
The communication protocol shall support the following data transfer
mechanisms:
One shot data - This mechanism shall be used to transfer data immediately,
typically on behalf of a control centre application,
Periodic data - This mechanism shall be used to transfer a set of control centre
values within a strict time interval,
Event data - This mechanism shall be used to transfer the data values from the
server to the client every time any one of a set of event conditions occur at the
server control centre,
Exception data - This mechanism shall be used to transfer only data values
which have changed since the last report.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 44,02/07/13
EEPCO
7.11
SECTION 8 - FRTU
POWER DISTRIBUTION NETWORK INFORMATION

SYSTEM (NIS)
.EEPCO is currently maintaining Power distribution system with town base
maps in AutoCAD files. The AutoCAD files shall be imported to GIS module
of SCADA system and the Real time data shall be displayed on GIS
8.
FRTU
8.1
GENERAL
The Feeder Remote Terminal Unit (FRTU) shall be installed at Ring Main Units
(RMUs), sectionaliser locations FRTU shall also be used for control of switching
devices such as breaker, isolator switches etc. inside RMU panel, sectionaliser etc.
from Master station(s). The supplied FRTUs shall be interfaced with the RMUs,
FPI, communication equipment, power supply distribution boards; for which all
the interface cables, TBs, wires, lugs, glands etc. shall be supplied, installed &
terminated by the Contractor.
8.1.1
DESIGN STANDARDS
The FRTUs shall be designed in accordance with applicable International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineer
(IEEE), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), and National Equipment
Manufacturers association (NEMA) standards, unless otherwise specified in this
Technical specification. In all cases the provisions of the latest edition or revision
of the applicable standards in effect shall apply.
8.1.2
FRTU Functions
All functional capability described herein shall be provided by the Contractor even
if a function is not initially implemented.
As a minimum, the FRTU shall be capable of performing the following functions:
Acquiring analogue values from Multifunction Transducers or alternatively
through transducer- less modules and the status inputs of devices from the
substation, processing and transmitting to Master stations. Capability to
acquire analogue inputs from analogue input cards receiving standard signals
viz current loops 4-20Ma, RTD etc.
Receiving and processing digital commands from the master station(s).
Data transmission rates - 300 to 19200 bps for Serial ports for MODBUS. And
10/100 mbps for TCP/IP Ethernet ports. Use of IEC 60870-5-104/101
protocol to communicate with the Master station(s).
Use of MODBUS over RS485 interface, Protocol to communicate with the
MFTs.
Have required number of communication ports for simultaneous
communication with Master station(s), MFTs and FRTU configuration &
maintenance tool.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 45,02/07/13
EEPCO
SECTION 8 - FRTU
FRTU shall have the capability of automatic start-up and initialisation

following restoration of power after an outage without need of manual
intervention. All restarts shall be reported to the connected master stations.
Remote database downloading of FRTU from master station from
SCADA/DMS control centre.
Internal battery backup to hold data in SOE buffer memory & also
maintaining the time & date.
As the SCADA/DMS system will use public domain such GPRS/CDMA etc.,
therefore it mandatory to guard the data/ equipment from
intrusion/damage/breach of security & shall have SSL/VPN based security.
Shall support SNMP
Further it should be possible to have following capabilities in the FRTU by
way of addition of required hardware limited to addition of I/O modules &
communication card only & using the same firmware at later date:
Communication with at least two master stations simultaneously on IEC
60870-5-104 /101
RTU shall be capable of acquiring analogue values through transducers having
output as 4-20 mA, 0-10 mA, 0-+10 mA etc. using analogue input modules.
8.2
COMMUNICATION PORTS
The RTUs shall have following communication ports to communicate with
master station MFTs and configuration & maintenance terminal.
FRTU shall have one TCP/IP Ethernet port for communication with
Master station(s) using IEC 60870-5-104/101 protocol or serial port in case
IEC60870-101.
FRTU shall have required number of RS 485 ports for communication with
MFTs/ to be connected in daisy chain using MODBUS protocol. Minimum
15 analogue values (including 4 energy values) to be considered per energy
meter.. The RTU shall be designed to connect maximum 5 MFT per port.
Further, bidder to demonstrate during testing that all analogue values
updated within 2 sec.. The updating time shall be demonstrated during
testing. 5.
FRTU shall have one port for connecting the portable configuration and
maintenance tool for FRTU. SSL/VPN,NERC/CIP complaint
It shall be possible to increase the number of communication ports in the FRTU

by addition of cards, if required in future. The FRTU shall support the use of a
different communication data exchange rate (bits per second) and scanning cycle
on each port & different database for each master station.
8.2.1
Master Station Communication Protocol

FRTU shall use IEC 60870-5-104/101 communication protocol for
communicating to master station. The FRTU communication protocol shall be
configured to report analogue (except energy values) & status changes by
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 46,02/07/13
EEPCO
SECTION 8 - FRTU
exception to master stations. However, FRTU shall support periodic reporting of

analogue data and periodicity shall be configurable from 2 sec to 1 hour.
Digital status data shall have higher priority than the Analogue data. The deadband for reporting Analogue value by exception shall be initially set to 1% (in %)
of the full scale value. In addition, analogue values shall also be reported to Master
station by exception on violation of a defined threshold limit. All the analogue
values and status data shall also be assigned to scan groups for integrity check by
Master stations at every 10 minutes configurable up to 60 minutes FRTU wise.
FRTU shall report energy values to master station periodically. The periodicity
shall be configurable from 5 minutes to 24 hours (initially set for 15 minutes)
8.2.2
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL BETWEEN FRTU & MFTs

The FRTU shall acquire data from the MFTs using the MODBUS protocol. In
addition, usage of IEC 60870-5-101/104 protocols is also permitted. The MFT
will act as slave to the FRTU. The FRTU shall transmit these values to the master
station in the frame of IEC 60870-5-104/101 protocol.
8.3
ANALOGUE INPUTS
The real time values like, Active power, Reactive Power, Apparent power three
phase Current & Voltage and frequency, and power factor & accumulated values
of import /export energy values will be acquired FRTU from the following in the
given manner:
MFTs installed in RMU/DTs
RTU shall also take 4-20 mA, 0-20mA, 0- -10mA, 0-+10mA, 0-5V etc. as
analogue inputs to acquire DC power supply voltage etc.
The FRTU analogue-to-digital (A/D) converters shall have a digital resolution of
at least twelve (12) bits plus sign. The overall accuracy of the analogue input
system shall be at least 0.2 %( i.e. 99.8%) at 25 C of full scale. Mean accuracy
shall not drift more than 0.002% per degree C within the temperature range of 5
to +55 degree Linearity shall be better than 0.05%. The FRTU shall be designed
to reject common mode voltages up to 150 Vac (50 Hz). For dc inputs, normal
mode noise voltages up to 5 Vac shall be rejected while maintaining the specified
accuracy.
Each input shall have suitable protection and filtering to provide protection
against voltage spikes and residual current at 50 Hz, 0.1 ma (peak-to-peak) and
overload. Loading up to 150% of the input value shall not sustain any failures to
the FRTU input.
The ability of the FRTU to accommodate dc inputs shall include the following
signal ranges:
Unipolar Voltage:0-0.5V, 0-1V, 0-5V, 0-10V,
Unipolar Current: 0-1mA, 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20Ma,
Bipolar Voltage: 0.5V, 2.5V, 5V, -20-0-20mA (- to +)
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 47,02/07/13
EEPCO
SECTION 8 - FRTU
The total burden imposed by the FRTU analogue input circuit shall not exceed
0.5 volt-ampere for current and voltage inputs. As an option, contractor may also
provide transducer less solution to connect direct CT/PT secondaries.
8.4
STATUS INPUT
RTU shall be capable of accepting isolated dry (potential free) contact status
inputs. The RTU shall provide necessary sensing voltage, current, optical isolation
and de-bounce filtering independently for each status input. The sensing voltage
shall not exceed 48 Vdc/220VAC.
The RTU shall be set to capture contact operations of 20 ms or more duration.
Operations of less than 20 ms duration shall be considered no change (contact
bounce condition). The RTU shall accept two types of status inputs i.e. Single
point Status inputs and Double point status inputs.
To take care of status contact chattering, a time period for each point and the
allowable number of operations per time period shall be defined. If the allowable
number of operations exceed within this time period, the status change shall not
be accepted as valid. Single point status input will be from a normally-open (NO)
or normally-closed (NC) contact which is represented by 1-bit in the protocol
message.
The Double point status input will be from two complementary contacts (one
NO and one NC) which is represented by 2-bits in the protocol message. A
switching device status is valid only when one contact is closed and the other
contact is open. Invalid states shall be reported when both contacts are open or
both contacts are closed.
All status inputs shall be scanned by the FRTU from the field at 1 millisecond
periodicity.
8.5
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS (SOE) FEATURE

To analyse the chronology or sequence of events occurring in the power system,
time tagging of data is required which shall be achieved through SOE feature of
RTU. The RTU shall have an internal clock with the stability of 100ppm or
better.. The RTU time shall be set from time synchronization messages received
from master station using IEC 60870-5- 104 protocol. SOE time resolution shall
be 10 ms or better
The RTU shall maintain a clock and shall time-stamp the digital status data. Any
digital status input data point in the RTU shall be assignable as an SOE point.
Each time a SOE status indication point changes the state, the RTU shall time-tag
the change and store in SOE buffer within the RTU. A minimum of 300 events
can be stored in the SOE buffer. SOE shall be transferred to Master Station as
per IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. SOE buffer shall be maintained by FRTU on
power supply interruption.
8.6
CONTROL OUTPUTS
The FRTU shall provide the capability for a master station to select and change
the state of digital output points. These control outputs shall be used to control
power system devices such as Circuit breakers, isolator, reset, relay disable/enable
and other two-state devices, which shall be supported by the RTU.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 48,02/07/13
EEPCO
SECTION 8 - FRTU
A set of control outputs shall be provided for each controllable device. On receipt
of command from a master station using the select check-before-execute operate
(SCBO) sequence, the appropriate control output shall be operated for a pre-set
time period which is adjustable for each point from 0.1 to 2 seconds.
Each control output shall consist of one set of potential free NO contact. The
output contacts shall be rated for at least 0.2 Amp. at 48 Vdc. These output
contact shall be used to drive heavy duty relays. In case Control output module of
FRTU does not provide potential free control output contact of this rating, then
separate control output relays shall be provided by the contractor. These relay
coils shall be shunted with diodes to suppress inductive transients associated with
energizing and de-energizing of the relay coils & shall conform to the relevant
IEC requirements.
8.6.1
HEAVY DUTY CONTROL OUTPUTS RELAYS

The control output contact from the FRTU shall be used for initiating heavy duty
relays for trip/close of switching devices. The contractor shall provide heavy duty
relays. Each control output relays shall consist of at least 2 NO contacts. The
output contacts shall be rated for at least 5 Amps Continuous at 220Vdc and shall
provide arc suppression to permit interruptions of an inductive load. Relay coils
shall be shunted with diodes to suppress inductive transients associated with
energizing and de-energizing of the relay coils. The relays shall conform to the
IEC255-1-00 and IEC 255-5 requirements.
8.6.2
CONTROL SECURITY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

The FRTU shall include the following security and safety features as a minimum
for control outputs:
Select- check-before-operate operate (SCBO) sequence for control output.
No more than one control point shall be selected/executed at any given time.
The control selection shall be automatically cancelled if after receiving the
"control selection" message, the "control execute" command is not received
within the set time period.
No control command shall be generated during power up or power down of
FRTU.
8.6.3
LOCAL/REMOTE SELECTOR SWITCH

A manual Local/Remote selector switch shall be provided for each FRTU to
disable all control outputs by breaking the power supply connection to the control
output s. When in the "Local" position, the Local/Remote switch shall allow
testing of all the control outputs of FRTU without activating the control outputs
to field devices. A status input indication shall be provided for the Local/Remote
switch to allow the SCADA system to monitor the position of the switch.
8.6.4
DUMMY BREAKER LATCHING RELAY

The Contractor shall provide a latching relay to be used to simulate and test
supervisory control from the Master station. The latching relay shall accept the
control signals from the FRTU to open and close, and shall provide the correct
indication response through a single point status input.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 49,02/07/13
EEPCO
8.7
SECTION 8 - FRTU
CONTACT MULTIPLYING RELAYS (CMRS)

Contact Multiplying Relays (CMRs) are required to multiply the contacts of
breaker, isolators and protection relays etc. The contacts of these relays shall be
used to provide status inputs to the RTUs. The relays shall be DC operated, selfreset type. The rated voltage for relay operation shall be on 24/48/110/220V DC
depending on the station DC supply. The relay shall be able to operate for +/20% variation from nominal voltage. The relay shall have a minimum of two
change over contacts, out of which one shall be used for telemetry purposes. The
contacts shall be rated to carry minimum current capacity of 5A.
The relay shall conform to following requirement.
Power Frequency withstand voltage2kV for 1 minute as per IEC 255-5.
Insulation Resistance of 100M ohms measured using 500V DC megger.
5KV Impulse test as per IEC 255-5
The relays coils shall be shunted with diodes to suppress inductive transients
associated with energizing and de-energizing of the relay coils. The relays shall
conform to the IEC 255-1-00 and IEC 255-5 requirements. The relays must be
protected against the effects of humidity, corrosion & provide with a dust tight
cover. The connecting terminals shall be screw type & legibly marked. The relays
may optionally have a visual operation indicator. The relays are to be mounted in
junction /termination box and therefore shall be equipped with suitable mounting
arrangements. In case suitable space is not available in junction /termination box
the same shall be mounted in FRTU panel.
8.8
TIME FACILITY
The internal FRTU time base shall have a stability of 100 ppm. The RTU shall be
synchronised through synchronisation message from master station at every 5
minutes (configurable from 5 minutes to 60 minutes) over IEC 60870-5104/101/NTP/SNTP
8.8.1
DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE
Diagnostic Software shall be provided to continuously monitor operation of the
FRTU and report RTU hardware errors to the connected master stations. The
software shall check for memory, processor, and input/output ports errors and
failures of other functional areas defined in the specification of the RTU.
8.8.2
INPUT DC POWER SUPPLY

The FRTU will be powered from a 48 V DC power supply system. The RTU shall
not place additional ground on the input power source. The characteristics of the
input DC power supply shall be
Nominal voltage of 48 Vdc with variation between 40.8 and 57.6 Vdc.(i.e.
48(+20%/-15%).
Maximum AC component of frequency equal to or greater than 100 Hz and
0.012 times the rated voltage peak-to-peak.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 50,02/07/13
EEPCO
SECTION 8 - FRTU
The FRTU shall have adequate protection against reversed polarity, over current
and under voltage conditions, to prevent the RTU internal logic from being
damaged and becoming unstable causing mal-operation.
8.8.3
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
The FRTU will be installed in inside RMU Panel or in open environment with no
temperature or humidity control.
The RTUs shall be capable of operating in ambient temperature from 0 to +55
degree C with rate of temperature change of 20 degree C/hour and relative
humidity less than 95%, non-condensing. FRTUs to be installed in the hilly region
with the history of snowfall, the same the lower ambient temperature limit shall be
-5 degree C.
8.8.4
FRTU SIZE AND EXPANDABILITY

FRTU shall be equipped for the point counts defined in the BOQ (Basic+20%
spare (wired & hardware). It shall be possible to expand the FRTU capability for
additional 100 % of the basic point counts by way of addition of hardware such as
modules, racks, panels,, however, FRTU software and database shall be sized to
accommodate such growth without requiring software or database regeneration.
8.8.5
FRTU PANELS
At least 50% of the space inside each enclosure shall be unused (spare) space that
shall be reserved for future use. The Contractor shall provide required panels
conforming to IEC 529 for housing the FRTU modules/racks, relays etc. and
other required hardware. The panels shall meet the following requirements:
shall be pole/ wall mounted compact size cabinet. The size shall be preferably
in the order of 400 mm. All doors and removable panels shall be fitted with
long life rubber beading. All non-load bearing panels/doors shall be fabricated
from minimum 1.6 mm thickness steel sheet and all load bearing panels,
frames, top & bottom panels shall be fabricated from minimum 2.0 mm
thickness steel sheet
shall have maintenance access to the hardware and wiring through lockable
doors.
shall have the provisions for bottom cable entry
The safety ground shall be isolated from the signal ground and shall be
connected to the ground network. Safety ground shall be a copper bus bar.
The contractor shall connect the panels safety ground of to the owners
grounding network. Signal ground shall be connected to the communication
equipment signal ground.
All panels shall be supplied with 230 Vac, 50 Hz, single-phase switch and
15/5A duplex socket arrangement for maintenance.
All panels shall be provided with an internal maintenance lamp, space heaters
and gaskets.
All panels shall be outdoor, dust-proof with rodent protection, and meet class
of protection. IP41 if housed in RMU panel & IP54 in case of in open
outdoor.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 51,02/07/13
EEPCO
SECTION 8 - FRTU
There shall be no sharp corners or edges. All edges shall be rounded to

prevent injury.
All materials used in the enclosures including cable insulation or sheathing,
wire troughs, terminal blocks, and enclosure trim shall be made of flame
retardant material and shall not produce toxic gasses under fire conditions.
8.8.6
WIRING/CABLING REQUIREMENTS
The FRTU panels shall gather all signals from and to the devices located in
Control & Relay panels in the substation control room. All wires that carry lowlevel signals shall be adequately protected and separated as far as possible from
power wiring. All wires shall be identified either by using ferrules or by colour
coding. In addition, cables shall be provided with cable numbers at both ends,
attached to the cable itself at the floor plate where it enters the cubicles.
Shielded cables shall be used for external Cabling from the FRTU panels. The
external cables (except communication cables) shall have the following
characteristics:
All cables shall have stranded copper conductor.
Minimum core cross-section of 2.5 mm2 for PT cables, 4 mm2 for CT cables, if
applicable and 2.5 mm2 for Control outputs and 1.5mm2 for Status inputs
Rated voltage Uo/U of 0.6/1.1KV
External sheathing of cable shall have oxygen index not less than 29 &
temperature index not less than 250. Cable sheath shall meet fire resistance test
as per IS 1554 Part- I.
Shielding, longitudinally laid with overlap.
Dielectric withstand 2.5 kV at 50 Hz for 5 minutes
External marking with manufacture's name, type, core quantity, cross-section,
and year of manufacture.
The Communication cable shall be of shielded twisted pairs and of minimum
0.22sq mm size.
8.8.7
Terminal Blocks (TBs)

Terminal blocks shall be having provision for disconnection (isolation), with fulldepth insulating barriers made from moulded self-extinguishing material.
Terminal blocks shall be appropriately sized and rated for the electrical capacity of
the circuit and wire used. No more than two wires shall be connected to any
terminal. Required number of TBs shall be provided for common shield
termination for each cable.
All terminal blocks shall be suitably arranged for easy identification of its usages
such as CT circuits, PT circuits, analogue inputs, status inputs, control outputs,
auxiliary power supply circuits, communication signals etc. TBs for CT circuits
shall have feature for CT shorting (on CT side) & disconnection (from load side)
to facilitate testing by current injection. Similarly, TBs for PT circuit shall have
feature for disconnection to facilitate voltage injection for testing.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 52,02/07/13
EEPCO
9.
SECTION 9 - SUBSTATION FEEDER AND

DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
ACQUISITION
SUBSTATION FEEDER AND DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMER ACQUISITION
The representative Schematic lay out of Electronic Trivector meters with Data
concentrator to be installed at substation for real time feeder data acquisition is
shown in Fig.
Three phase Energy meters of 0.5 class are connected to each feeder in 3phase 4-wire configuration for gathering instantaneous values of phase wise
currents, voltages. 6to 8 of such feeder meters are connected on a RS485 LAN
in a multidrop configuration. Each of these meters supports MODBUS RTU
protocol.
A data concentrator (DC) connected to the feeder meters on a RS485 LAN
interrogates each meter (poles) on a MODBUS RTU protocol and gathers
meter data at pre-programmed intervals. Further the information gathered
from each meter is stored in the Data Concentrator till it is transmitted to
Control centre The DC is connected to the control centre through MARS and
communicates in MODBUS RTU protocol.
9.1
SMART METER BASED AMR FOR DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMER DATA ACQUISITION
GSM / GPRS Communication is used to transmit data between DCC and Meter
placed at DTs to acquire smart/ AMR meter data. Please refer to Appendix-2
for a tentative equipment/communication configuration diagram for the
proposed 15kV distribution network.
10.
POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS
10.1
UPS FOR CONTROL CENTRE
10.1.1
System Description
The UPS System to be provided shall be of 3-phase On-line Double Conversion
type (EN 50091-3 VFI, Voltage and Frequency Independent), i.e. the critical loads
shall be fed through rectifier/inverter, thus the output voltage/frequency being
independent from the input voltage/frequency.
The rectifier unit of the UPS shall be so dimensioned that it is capable of feeding
the total critical load current to the inverter and simultaneously- charge the
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 53,02/07/13
EEPCO
SECTION 10 - POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS
batteries even in case of major fluctuation of input voltage/frequency (UN

+15-20%, fN 5%). The load shall be fed from the batteries only when input
voltage/frequency falls outside of the said limits.
An automatic switch-over facility to by-pass supply through static switch shall be
provided to handle overload situations, such as starting currents, blown fuses, etc.
The system to be provided shall be completely doubled, i.e. the system shall
consist of two independent UPS equipment continuously operating in parallel,
each alone capable of feeding the rated full load for the specified back-up time.
Fault in one of the UPS equipment shall not affect the operation of the other UPS
equipment.
A manual by-pass facility of the UPS system shall be provided.
A critical loads distribution board shall be provided 3L (TN-S, 5-wire system),
400/230 VAC, 50 Hz, of appropriate size and ratings.
10.1.2
Technical Requirements
Environmental requirements as per Item 3 of the technical specifications, with the
addition that the noise level shall not exceed 60 dB(A), measured at 1 meter
distance.
AC supply to UPS system according to Item 3 of the technical specification, with
the exception that the input voltage shall be 3-phase, 400/230 VAC.
The input power factor of UPS system shall be >0.95 and the total efficiency
>85%.
Output voltage:
Output requirement:
400/230 VAC, 5%
Frequency:
50 Hz, 0.5%
Distortion (THD):
< 5% (Total Harmonics Distortion, nonlinear load)

120, 5%
Phase displacement:
Max. down time due to
switching operations:
Back-up time:1)
< 10 ms
>2 h at full load
Rated output power For one UPS equipment and battery bank
Adequate to supply the master station including all related peripherals. Provision
for emergency lighting (0.5 kVA) as well as 30 % provision for future extensions
shall be provided (master station + peripherals + 0.5 kVA < 70% of rated output
power).
10.2
48 V DC AT CONTROL CENTRE
The Control Centre shall be equipped with two rectifier/battery charger units, for
supplying 48 V DC to the Radio Link terminals at the Control Centre.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 54,02/07/13
EEPCO
SECTION 11 - RADIO LINK SYSTEMS
Each unit (one rectifier and battery bank) shall be capable of supplying the total
load of radio link terminals plus 50% spare capacity. The back-up time (of one
rectifier and battery bank) shall be > 2 h at full load.
10.3
48 V DC AT SUBSTATIONS
The Switching stations and Other locations where FRTUs and Radio Link
terminals will be located are equipped with 60V DC rectifiers which provide the
required DC voltage for the station.
11.
RADIO LINK SYSTEMS
11.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The specified radio link equipment shall provide data stream between the links
from the Control Centre to each FRTU site
The system delivery shall be complete including antenna towers, installation
accessories, antennae, etc.
The availability (measured over a month) shall be equal or better than the
following:
30 dB fade margin for hops < 20 km
99.7% for hops > 20 km
Equipment redundancy such as hot stand-by is not required. The equipment shall
be powered from a 48 V DC bus, existing or otherwise to be supplied in this
Contract.
11.2
RADIO LINK AND BASE STATION EQUIPMENT
11.2.1
Capacity
The equipment shall support user data rates up to 9.6 kbit/s. The bid shall
describe possibilities to upgrade the data rate up to 64 kbit/s. However, the
possibility for the upgrade is not a mandatory requirement.
The Bidder shall state the bandwidth, modulation used combined with the
required SNR.
11.2.2
Interface for the Data Stream

The data interface shall be compatible with the specified data traffic between
Control Centre and RTU, using specified RTU data communication protocols.
11.2.3
Network Management and Maintenance

The equipment should incorporate an element of management via built-in menu
or command line interface.
11.2.4
Transmitter
Frequency Range
The radio equipment shall be programmable. The Bidder shall propose the
transmission frequency he considers most favourable under the prevailing
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 55,02/07/13
EEPCO
topographical, ambient and propagation conditions of the respective area and

with consent from National Communications Authority (NCA).
Transmitter Output Power
The transmitter RF output power at the antenna port shall be better than +30
dBm and programmable, sufficient to cover the required specifications. If the
output power is specified at another point, information shall be provided to
enable the power level at the feeder connection to be computed. Protection shall
be provided against open or short-circuit loads, overheating and mismatching.
Frequency Stability
The radio frequency output stability shall be 1.5 ppm over the temperature range
from 0 C to + 50 C.
Reverse Polarity
The equipment shall be protected against reverse polarity at the supply input.
Diagnostic Functions
The equipment shall incorporate Front Panel LED status indications for,
Transmit Power active, Receive failure and Input/output alarm.
In addition the equipment shall incorporate an LCD Display to indicate
measurements of Power levels, SNR and BER.
11.2.5
Receiver
RF Input Impedance
The RF input impedance shall be 50 ohms.
Sensitivity
-6
Sensitivity for a data rate of 9.6 kbit/s and BER of 10 should be at least
90dBm.
Spurious Responses
The spurious responses attenuation shall be better than -60 dBc below carrier
level.
Spurious Emissions
Total spurious emissions shall be less than 5(10) nW from the antenna socket.
Reverse Polarity
The equipment shall be protected against reverse polarity at the supply input.
Adjacent Channel Selectivity
The adjacent channel selectivity shall be better than 70 dB.
11.3
ANTENNAE
11.3.1
Directional Antennae
The Bidder shall offer a robust directional antenna with a Gain of > 10 dB. The
actual antenna for each site may be adjusted according to the result of the detailed
site survey.
The type offered shall be fully described and shall be supplied complete with the
necessary mounting hardware to enable the installation at all locations.
The antenna mountings shall permit adjustment of the antenna in elevation and
azimuth after installation. The amount of adjustment provided shall be stated in
the Tender.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 56,02/07/13
EEPCO
The following information shall be provided in the Bidder 's technical proposal in
respect of each type and size of antenna offered:
The forward gain with respect to a standard half wave dipole.
The beam-width at the half power points.
The VSWR.
A plot of the polar radiation pattern of a typical antenna of each main type, in
a horizontal plane.
11.3.2
Antenna Feeders
All antenna feeder cables and terminations required to complete the installations
shall be provided and correctly fitted.
The provision and installation of any feeder support gantries, catenary wires, etc.
is the responsibility of the successful Bidder under this project, as it is the
installation of the feeder cables on the building structures with appropriate
clamping devices and at existing and new masts.
All feeder cables of the co-axial type shall be of the solid of foam dielectric
construction and not require pressurisation. Low loss cables shall be used.
The attenuation per 100 meters of all types of cable offered for the antenna
system, at a stated nominal frequency, shall be given in the Tender.
11.3.3
Antenna Structures
The purpose of this Item 11.3.3 is to have comparable bids. The actual heights of
antenna structures shall be defined after the Contractors detailed Site Survey
specified in Item 11.6.
The Tender shall include an antenna tower of height 30 m, guyed type, for
Control Centre Site in town Regarding the other sites, the Bidder shall base his
Tender on the assumption that a 5 m steel tube installed can be used at the
remote station . The Tender shall include these steel tubes with all the necessary
mounting accessories.
The unit prices shall be complete including the design (including soil
investigation), fabrication, shipment, erection and grounding of all antenna
towers.. The Contractor shall also be responsible for provision of aircraft warning
lights and painting, as applicable. The Tender shall submit details of proposed
antenna towers with his tender. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for
approval strength calculations.
11.4
CABLING
11.4.1
General
All cabling shall be arranged in such a way that disturbances on the other systems
at control centre and substations are avoided both during normal conditions and
faults. All cables except the grounding wires shall be marked in accordance with
the cable and numbering plan. All cabling shall be rated for continuous service
under climatic conditions stated. Protection against rodents shall be considered
when designing cubicle external cabling.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 57,02/07/13
EEPCO
All grounding shall be made with sheathed copper cable. The sheath shall have
green-yellow colour. All connections to the grounding grid of the station shall be
made with a minimum cable area of 16mm2. Grounding wires inside cubicles can
be made with thinner grounding cable but dimensions less than 10mm2 should be
avoided.
Outdoor cables shall be armoured. Indoor cables shall normally be shielded.
Vertical cables running outdoor or through floor indoors shall be mechanically
protected up to a height of 1 m over the floor or ground. The latter also applies
for the antenna cable included in the delivery.
11.4.2
Coaxial Cable / Antenna Feeder

The coaxial cable shall be rated to operate in the same frequency band as the
radios. The coaxial cable system shall include all mounting hardware, wall or roof
feed-through and grounding kits as required.
The coaxial cable shall meet the following requirements:
Power rating shall be based on the continuous use at system operating levels in
the assigned frequency band
Inner dielectric material shall be foam polyethylene containing a nondiscolouring antioxidant
Outer shield shall be UV-light protected
The shield of the antenna feeder shall be properly grounded at the tower and
overvoltage protection shall be applied at the connection point to the radio.
11.4.3
Auxiliary Power Supply Cables

The auxiliary power cables shall be fire resistant with Cu-conductors, extruded
solid PVC or XPLE insulation and outer PVC sheath. The cable shall be routine
tested with 2 kV at 50 Hz.
11.4.4
Low Speed Data / Voice Cables

The data and voice cables shall be shielded. The shield shall be connected to the
grounding system at one end only. If possible the data and voice cables shall be
separated from the power cables.
The wires of the data and voice cables shall be coloured or numbered for easy
identification of each wire.
11.5
CIVIL WORKS FOR COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT

Existing buildings should be used to house the communication equipment.
The buildings (and the antenna towers) must be shared with existing or planned
equipment supplied in other contracts. The Contractor has to inform himself
about these installations.
In general, civil works related to the telecommunications are of minor nature,
however, the Contractor shall be responsible for all civil engineering and
construction works required to carry out the telecommunications works
successfully to the full satisfaction of the Employer.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 58,02/07/13
EEPCO
SECTION 12 - DOCUMENTATION
Brief description of the extent of the civil works is given below, however, the
Bidder should familiarise himself with the subject matter during the compulsory
site visit.
Cable routes, either trenches or conduits need to be constructed from the existing
cable trenches to the locations of the new panels, as required. Some facilities to
house the equipment shall rehabilitated. This mainly consists of cleaning-up, rust
removal and rust proofing as well as of touch-up painting.
11.6
RADIO COVERAGE AND LINK SURVEY

The Coverage and Link Surveys shall be made by the Contractor during the
Detailed Site Survey after project Kick-off.
The Contractor is responsible for obtaining the topographical maps, and for
defining the exact location and altitude of the stations.
The Contractor shall also assess and submit to the Employers consideration
proposals to use third party infrastructure (antenna towers, equipment housing).
The Contractor has to assess that these constructions will be strong enough for
his proposed antennae including the already installed or planned by others.
Based on the Survey, the Contractor shall make and present calculations
supported, where applicable, by Coverage tests from sites where radio equipment
is to be located. It is required to determine the following:
Radio Link propagation path loss.
Antennae types and heights to ensure the specified operating margins.
All necessary investigations, measurements, calculations, drawings, frequency coordination, frequency allocations and other services shall be carried out by the
Contractor.
In the offer, the Bidder shall propose the transmission frequency he considers
most favourable under the prevailing topographical, ambient and propagation
conditions of the respective area and with consent from National
Communications Authority (NCA).
The Employer is responsible for and takes care of the costs for applying the
frequencies and licence fees thereof. However, the Contractor shall fill-in the
technical data to the application.
12.
DOCUMENTATION
12.1
GENERAL
All drawings and documentation shall be in English. The number of copies and
the dates of submission of the documentation shall be as follows:
Five(5)hard copy sets of preliminary drawings
Five(5)hard copy sets of system manuals
Six(6)hardcopysetsofAsBuiltdrawingswithinthree(3)monthsaftersuccessfully
performed SAT.
Two(2)softcopy(pdf)sets of system manuals
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 59,02/07/13
EEPCO
Two (2) softcopy (pdf) sets of As Built drawings within three (3) months
after successfully performed SAT.
Documentation shall, where possible, relate solely to the actual equipment

supplied. It should not include any irrelevant/superfluous information (e.g.
relating to variants not supplied on the contract).
All drawings, manuals, specifications, component lists etc. shall have an issue or
revision number and a record of modification.
Documentation/drawings shall be provided for the following:
System documentation
Equipment documentation
Test documentation
Installation documentation
System operating instructions shall be included with the above. With a computer
based project the software task definition documentation may be presented in
such a way that it can also be used as the system operating instructions.
The documentation detailed above shall be in three major divisions, drawings,
operating manuals and maintenance manuals.
All drawings shall be to scale where applicable, be fully detailed and shall not
normally exceed A3 size. All dimensions shall be given in metric units.
All drawings shall have a title, drawing number, issue record, contract number,
and where appropriate a graphic scale and site reference. The revision notes shall
detail the nature of each revision.
12.2
SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
Block diagrams shall show the flow of information between the identifiable parts
of a system, with thickening of lines where necessary, to show the main flow of
information.
Cubicle wiring diagrams and charts shall show the inter-unit wiring within cubicles
in addition to miscellaneous services provided, i.e. supplies, distribution, alarms
etc.
Interconnecting diagrams and charts shall show the necessary connections
between cubicles of equipment and all items connected to the equipment by
means of external cables. They shall show the type of cable to be used for these
connections and any special arrangements for terminating.
Maintenance manuals shall be supplied covering all subsystems. The maintenance
manuals shall be written round the fault location levels which the Contractor
recommends for on-site maintenance. This documentation shall include all fault
tracing and clearance procedure.
12.3
EQUIPMENTDOCUMENTATION
Equipment instruction manuals shall include circuit diagrams for each unit, subunit and plug- in board used in the complete equipment.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 60,02/07/13
EEPCO
Equipment drawings shall show the layout of equipment in racks for cubicles, and
the essential mechanical features of all racks, cubicles, units and sub-units.
The circuit diagram for any one unit shall be completely self-contained, selfexplanatory, readily to other diagrams and shall include such information as
supply voltage values and interconnections. Components external to a unit or subunit but essential to its operation shall be shown on the circuit diagram enclosed
in dotted lines and be appropriately identified. All component symbols shall be
marked with their circuit references and the nominal value of components shall be
marked on the circuit diagram where the component list is not included on the
same diagram. The function of all controls, switches and indicating devices shall
be indicated in accordance with the inscription on the equipment. Spare contacts
fitted to relays and switches shall be shown on the diagram.
Component lists shall state the value, tolerance, rating, type number,
manufacturer, and the Contractor's circuit reference number.
12.4
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

Maintenance and operating manuals shall conform to the following requirements:
Maintenance and operation instruction manuals shall contain fully detailed
information relating to the maintenance and operation of the complete installation
and its components parts, and include a schedule of all items of plant supplied
under the contract.
Planned maintenance data sheets recommended by the Contractor shall be
completed for the particular installation and its component parts and include
commissioning performance details and measurements.
Spare parts list covering all equipment and indicating those parts and components
which are interchangeable.
12.5
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
The Contractor shall also provide all the drawings and documentation required
for successful installations and commissioning as well as for subsequent
operations and maintenance of the plant.
As a minimum requirement, the following shall be included
Material specifications
Principle drawings of process adaptation
Location (layout) drawing of new equipment installations
Cable routes drawing
IFC panel internal circuit diagrams
Cable list
Wiring (connections) schedule for RTU IFC cables
Wiring (connections) schedule for IFC - Process cables
Up-date of existing process drawings: the Contractor shall up-date the existing
process circuit diagrams regarding the modifications / additions to the existing
process. Connections of signals readily available on terminal blocks are not
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 61,02/07/13
EEPCO
SECTION 13 - TRAINING
required to be up-dated in the existing drawings, however, they shall be shown

in the respective wiring schedule.
IFC FAT procedure, schedule and report
Pre-commissioning and commissioning procedures and records
Adaptation works SAT procedure, schedule and reports
Operation and Maintenance Manual, mainly consisting of material
specifications, principle drawings and brief written description of
modifications to existing process
13.
TRAINING
13.1
INTRODUCTION
The Contractor shall make suitable and adequate arrangements for the training of
Employer's maintenance and operational staff, during the engineering,
manufacture, construction, commissioning and defects liability periods.
The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Employer a training
programme for the staff who are to maintain and operate the equipment.
Training for the following categories of staff shall be included in the contract. In
below, the quantities of courses and staff are per Control Centre System i.e. the
bid shall include two complete sets of training packages.
13.2
SCADA MAINTENANCE TRAINING

The SCADA/EMS training package shall be for six (6) persons in total. The
venue for training is Manufacturers premises.
Three (3) participants shall be trained in SCADA/EMS functions. The objective
of the training is to fully familiarise with the purpose and use of the SCADA
functions.
Three (3) participants shall be trained in maintenance of SCADA/EMS hardware
& software. The hardware includes the master station, RTUs, modems and
adaptation equipment such as transducers. The objective of the hardware training
is to provide the participants with proper knowledge and skills for maintaining the
equipment. The objective of the software training is to provide the necessary skills
for data entry and database maintenance/data engineering.
In addition to training in the factory, the Contractor shall provide on-the-job
training on site during site surveys and engineering, installation, precommissioning, commissioning and defects liability period.
The Tenderer shall include in the offer costs for the trainees travel,
accommodation, meals and out of pocket allowance.
13.3
RADIO LINK MAINTENANCE TRAINING

Two (2) persons shall be given training for maintenance of Radio Links.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 62,02/07/13
EEPCO
13.4
SECTION 13 - TRAINING
OPERATOR TRAINING
The Operator training package shall be for thirteen (13) persons in total. Operator
training will be organised on Site at Control Centre.
The objective of the Operator training is to provide the trainees with in-depth
knowledge of the use of the various functions, for effective day-to-day operation
of the power system from the Control Centre.
Rev -1- 6 June 2013, Page: 63,02/07/13
EEPCO
14.
SCHEDULES
14.1
SCHEDULE FOR OFFERED EQUIPMENT

Please fill one schedule for each type of equipment offered.
Technical Schedule Reference TS-GN-06-S1
No
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
General
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.
3
3.1
3.2
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
ts-gn-06 r1 scada for 7 regional towns 2013-06-06
Rev -1- 6 June 2013 / Page: 64, / 2-Jul-13
EEPCO
14.2

Schedule Ref TS-GN-06-NC1
Specification
Clause
Rev -1- 6 June 2013 / Page: 65, / 2-Jul-13
EEPCO
14.3

Item Reference TS-GN-06-TC1
Specification
Clause
Rev -1- 6 June 2013 / Page: 66, / 2-Jul-13
EEPCO
15.
SECTION 15 - ERROR! NUMBER CANNOT BE

REPRESENTED IN SPECIFIED FORMAT.
APPENDIX-1: SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

GENERAL SYTEM ARCHITECTURE DIAGRAM
Rev -1- 6 June 2013 / Page: 67, / 2-Jul-13
EEPCO
16.
SECTION 16 - ERROR! NUMBER CANNOT BE

REPRESENTED IN SPECIFIED FORMAT.
APPENDIX -2: COMMUNICATION DIAGRAM

EQUIPMENT COMMUNICATION DIAGRAM
Rev -1- 6 June 2013 / Page: 68, / 2-Jul-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule for SCADA for 7 Towns

No
Item
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
6
6.1
Main server
Name of manufacturer
Country of origin
Type
Processor
Processing speed
HDD with Raid
Internal Didk drive
RAM speed
FEP servers
Country of origin
Type
Processor
Processing speed
HDD
RAM speed
Unit
Requirement
GHz
TB
GB
GB
Xeon
>2.5
1
500
256
GHz
TB
GB
Xeon
>2.5
1
256
GHz
TB
GB
Xeon
2.5
1
256
GHz
TB
GB
Xeon
2.5
1
256
GHz
GB
GB
Xeon
2.5
500
16
Bid Offer
Data Engg servers

Country of origin
Type
Processor
Processing speed
HDD
RAM speed
Web Servers
Country of origin
Type
Processor
Processing speed
HDD
RAM speed
Web Client PCs
Country of origin
Type
Processor
Processing speed
HDD
RAM speed
Dual Monitor Workstations
Processor
File:TS-GN-06 R1-S Scada for 7 Regional towns 2013-06-06.xlsm - sheet:TS-GN-06-S1
i7 quad
Page 1 Date: 12/06/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
6.2
6.3
6.4
7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
8
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
10
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
11
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
12
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
13
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
14
14.1
14.2
EEPCo
Item
Unit
Requirement
Processing speed
HDD
RAM speed
GPS Receiver
Country of origin
Type
Type tested
Standard to which complies
WAN Router
Country of origin
Type
Type tested
Modem
Type
Type tested
Video Projection System
Type
Type tested
UPS
Main system
Battery
Type tested
Dual Master MAR Radio system
Type
Type tested
Remote MAR Radios
Type
Type tested
Communication Link Equipment at Remote
Station
Type
GHz
TB
GB
2.5
1
32
Baud
19.2
Bid Offer
Ah
Page 2 Date: 12/06/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
14.3
14.4
15
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
16
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
17
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
18
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
19
EEPCo
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Type tested
Data Concentrator
Type
Type tested
Electronic Trivector Meter
Type
Type tested
FRTU
Type
Type tested
Diagnostic Test Kit
Type
Type tested
Protocol Test Set H/W and S/W
Page 3 Date: 12/06/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule for SCADA - System Performance

S.No.
Description
Requirement
Bid Offer
Normal Activity
1
2
Confirmation of point selection on a VDU

The time between selection of a display and
the VDU diagram fully updated shall not
exceed
3 Acceptance of a single alarm
4 Acceptance of a page of alarms
5 The time between selection of a control
function and check back from the RTU as to
whether or not the control can be performed
shall not exceed (*)
6 The time between execution of a control
function and initiation of the control at the
RTU shall not exceed
7 The time between the occurrence of a change
of state or an alarm at a RTU and display on
the SCADA shall not exceed (*)
8 The time between the occurrence of a change
of state or an alarm at a RTU and output on a
logging device on the SCADA shall not exceed
(*)
9 The time between a change of state at a RTU
due to a control action and display on the
SCADA shall not exceed (*)
10 The time between successive updates of the
main computer database with analogue
measurements shall not exceed
10.1 MW, MVAR & Voltage Measurements
10.2 Other measurements
11 The time between successive updates of the
main computer database with pulse meter
values shall not exceed
12 Time from request of hard copy output to the
commencement of printing shall not exceed
High Activity
1
2
1
4
2
2
2
2
4
4
10
20
30
20
40
30
15
Page 4 Date: 12/06/2013,
APPENDIX-1
SCADA/DMS Control Centre CONFIGURATION
ENTATIVE SCHEME FOR PROPOSED SCADA SYSTEM OF TOWN
INKJET PRINTE
OPERATOR WORK STATIONS

#1
VPS
LASER PRINTER
GPS RECEIVERS
#2
LAN
SWITCH
DOT MATRIX PRINTER

SCADA/DMS SERVERS
COMMUNICATION
SERVERS
MASTER MAR RADIOS
EEPCo
ENGG.& TRAINING
SERVERS
WEB SERVERS
APPENDIX -2 SCADA & DMS MV NETWORK Configuration
15kV LINES
SECTLISER
SECTLISER
15kV LINE
15kV LINE
FDR FROM SS2
CAPACITOR
CAPACITOR
DTR METER
15kV LINE
15kV LINE
DTR METER
RMU
RMU
CAPACITOR
CAPACITOR
15kV LINE
FRTU
15kV LINE
FRTU
DTR METER
DTR METER
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-IN-01
Installation of Overhead Lines and

Pole Mounted Equipment
Rev -1- April 2013
SPECIFICATION TS-IN-01
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
Mar 2013
First Issue
Rev 1
April 2013
Enhancements in installation.
TS-IN-04 R1a Installation of OHL pv 2013-04-28.docx
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: i , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
INSTALLATION OF OVERHEAD LINES AND POLE MOUNTED
EQUIPMENT
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
2.1
CONFLICT:
3.
4.
ASSUMED SCOPE OF WORKS

1
2
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
SUPERVISION
QUALITY OF MATERIAL
STANDARD OF WORKMANSHIP
WAYLEAVES AND ACCESS TO SITE
TREES
2
2
2
2
4
5.
6.
EXTENT OF INSTALLATION
ESTABLISHING PROPOSED ROUTE OF LINE
4
5
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
PROVISIONAL SURVEY OF LINE

AREAS TO BE AVOIDED
PROFILE OF ROUTE
PROVIDE FAILURE CONTAINMENT
WAY LEAVES
TREE CUTTING
5
5
5
6
6
6
7.
COMPLIANCE WITH STATUTORY CLEARANCES
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.4.4
7.5
7.5.1
7.6
7.7
GENERAL
LINE TO GROUND CLEARANCE
CLEARANCE TO BUILDINGS
CLEARANCES BETWEEN POWER LINES
Clearances to communication lines
RAILWAY CLEARANCES
Minimum Clearance between Railway track and overhead lines
TELEPHONE LINE CROSSINGS
RIVER CROSSING
7
7
8
9
9
10
10
10
11
8.
REQUIREMENTS FOR LINE CONSTRUCTION
11
8.1
8.2
8.3
33KV OVERHEAD LINES

15KV OVERHEAD LINES
LOW VOLTAGE OVERHEAD LINES
11
12
12
9.
ERECTION OF POLE
13
9.1
9.1.1
9.2
POLE FOUNDATION DEPTH

Excavation of Pits for Poles
FOUNDATIONS
13
13
14
Rev -1- April 2013
EEPCO
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.8.1
9.8.2
9.8.3
BASE CONCRETING
POLE ERECTION
POSITION OF POLE
BACK FILLING
ERECTION OF DOUBLE POLE (D.P) STRUCTURE
CONCRETING OF POLES
Locations to be Concreted
Size of Concrete
Guidelines for Concreting
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
16
10.
OVERHEAD LINE DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION

STANDARDS
17
10.1
10.2
10.3
FACTORS OF SAFETY
NEW 33KV AND 15KV OVERHEAD NETWORK
LV BARE OVERHEAD LINES
17
18
19
11.
SUPPORT GUYS - STAYS
19
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
LOCATION OF GUYS
COMPONENTS OF GUY ASSEMPBLEY
GUIDELINES FOR ERECTION OF GUYS
STAY WIRE
GUY INSULATORS
19
19
19
21
21
12.
FIXING CROSS-ARMS, INSULATORS AND POLE

FITTINGS
21
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
12.10
12.11
FABRICATION OF POLE FITTINGS

FIXING OF CROSS-ARM AND TOP CLAMP
FIXING OF CROSS ARMS
SUPPORTING STRAPS FOR CROSS ARMS
FIXING OF TOP CLEAT
OFFSET ARRANGEMENT
SIZE OF FLAT FOR CLAMPS
SPECIAL NOTE FOR SPUN POLES
GENERAL
GALVANIZING
FIXING OF INSULATORS
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
23
13.
PAVING AND STRINGING OF LINE CONDUCTORS
23
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
TRANSPORT OF CONDUCTOR DRUMS

PAVING OFF THE CONDUCTOR
CONDUCTOR JOINTS AND TERMINATIONS
PRECAUTIONS TO BE FOLLOWED WHILE JOINTING
TENSIONING AND SAGGING
METHOD OF MEASURING SAG
FIXING OF CONDUCTOR TO THE SUPPORT
TYING OF CONDUCTOR ON PIN INSULATORS TRADITIONAL
PROCEDURE
JUMPERING
DOS AND DONTS FOR STRINGING
23
23
24
24
25
26
26
13.9
13.10
Rev -1- April 2013
27
28
29
EEPCO
14.
15.
MAPPING SPANS FROM SUBSTATION

DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER INSTALLATION
30
30
15.1
15.2
15.3
POLE MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS - GENERAL

TRANSFORMER MOUNTED ON SINGLE POLE
TRANSFORMER MOUNTED ON DOUBLE POLE
30
30
31
16.
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
32
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
LINE DISCONNECTOR
LINKS
DROP OUT FUSES (DO'S)
SURGE ARRESTERS
32
32
32
32
17.
18.
WORKS RELATING TO ROAD CROSSINGS

MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
33
33
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
EQUIPMENT NUMBERING AND LABELLING

TRANSFORMER NUMBERING METHOD
POLE NUMBER PLATES
ANTI CLIMBING DEVICES AND DANGER BOARDS
WORKMANSHIP
33
33
34
34
34
19.
EARTHING
34
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
GENERAL
COMMON REQUIREMENTS
MV EARTHING REQUIREMENTS
LV SYSTEM EARTHING REQUIREMENTS
EARTHING OF CONCRETE POLES
34
35
36
37
38
20.
21.
FINAL CHECKING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

POLE SCHEDULES
38
39
21.1
21.2
21.3
21.4
21.5
33KV LINE POLE SCHEDULES

15 KV LINE POLE SCHEDULES
LV LINE POLE SCHEDULES
POLE SCHEDULE FOR CABLE CROSSINGS
GUARDING DETAILS
39
40
40
41
41
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: iv , 26-Apr-13
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO
INSTALLATION OF OVERHEAD LINES

AND
POLE MOUNTED EQUIPMENT
1.
SCOPE
This specification includes the installation requirements of Overhead Line of bare
or insulated conductor as well as the installation of Pole mounted Distribution
Transformers
2.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
2.1
TS-GN-01
EEPCO system and environmental data.
TS-CO-01
AAA conductors,
TS-CO-02
Aerial Bundled Cables,
TS-CO-05
Insulators,
TS-CO-06
Spun concrete poles
CONFLICT:
See spec TS-GN-02 General Contractual obligations.
3.
ASSUMED SCOPE OF WORKS

For the purposes of this specification and pricing in the schedule of prices, the
following extent of works has been assumed with regards to the installation of the
Overhead lines and equipment.
The actual scope may vary as indicated in the tender document that this
specification forms part of. In the case where the scope in the tender document
and the technical schedules is in conflict with the assumptions in this specification
the contract requirements shall prevail. The scope of this specification may
change from time to time without prior notice. The specification version however
include with the tender document shall be the legal document for the contract.
The assumed scope is:
The site survey of the overhead line routes for use in the Contractors detail
design.
The supply of all sundry materials and equipment not provided by the
Employer required for the erection of the overhead lines, transformers,
switchgear, distribution pillars, and all other items as required in the
Specification and Schedules.
The transport to site and taking out work insurances.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 1 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 4 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
If applicable the taking Over from the Employer, delivery to site, erection,
site testing and setting to work in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions the equipment and materials as listed.
Final route planning of the overhead lines, and site location of transformers
and all other equipment together with the provision of the drawings for
wayleaves, municipal approval purposes and final records.
The digging and clearing after pole installation of ground around the poles.
The erection, site testing, setting to work and remedying of defects of the
items of work in accordance with the Specification and Schedules.
The overhead line, substations, distribution pillar and other equipment

locations indicated on the drawings are provisional and for Bid purposes
only.
The Contractors detail designs shall be submitted to the Project Manager

for approval.
The Contractor must allow for all material, plant and labour required for the
supply and erection of the structures as indicated on the detail drawings and
as per the Bill of Quantities.
Bidders must allow for the supply and installation of all material required
for the service connection to each consumer.
4.
4.1
SUPERVISION
All work on site shall be supervised by a sufficient number of representatives of
the Contractor who are fully experienced in work of the type covered by the
Specification.
4.2
QUALITY OF MATERIAL
Only new and unused material of superior quality may be used. All materials shall,
where relevant comply with the applicable Standard and specification. It should be
noted that all materials supplied under this contract as being IEC, BS approved
shall bear the relevant approving body mark unless no such mark is applicable for
a specific item.
4.3
STANDARD OF WORKMANSHIP
The electrical installation of this contract must be carried out by qualified
electricians and cable jointers in accordance with the best modern methods.
The Project Manager reserves the right to reject any work which, in his opinion, is
not completed in a neat and orderly fashion and in accordance with accepted
practice.
4.4

Wayleaves and access facilities subject to the requirements of landowners and
occupiers and subject to the provisions below and will be provided by the
Employer to enable the Contractor to carry out the erection of the Works but
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 2 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 4 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
such facilities will not include facilities for storing material. The necessary
agreements for both the removal of obstructions such as trees and pipes and for
the removal or guarding of telephone and power lines will be arranged by the
Employer.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, do what is necessary to make every
access suitable for his use and shall take all reasonable precautions to avoid
damage to land, property, roads, crops, field drains, fences, walls, hedges, gates
and the like and shall ensure that the work is adequately supervised so that
damage is reduced to the minimum. The Contractor will be liable for all damage
arising by or in consequence of the works except damage to crops and shall pay
compensation or make good at the option of the Employer. The Contractor shall
dispose of all spoil and surplus material after erection.
The Contractor shall at all times keep sites free from obstruction, waste materials
and rubbish and shall remove from the sites at his own expense all surplus
materials and temporary works as soon as they are no longer required for the
erection of the Works. On completion of the Works, the Contractor shall leave
the sites clean and in a workmanlike condition to the satisfaction of the Project
Manager.
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining agreed access routes, without
undue widening, in a usable condition for the duration of the Contract and the
wayleave grantor shall not be put to any inconvenience in gaining access to his
land or buildings and no unauthorised access route shall be taken by the
Contractor.
Adequate provision shall be made by the Contractor to prevent the straying of, or
damage to, livestock during the execution of the Works and until the permanent
reinstatement of fences, walls, hedges, gates and the like is completed.
The Contractor shall be liable for any damage to or loss of livestock due, in the
opinion of the Project Manager, to failure to comply with the above requirements.
By the date for access to the overhead line and underground cable routes stated
by the Contractor in his Master Programme, the Employer shall (subject to the
Contractor being then ready to commence work) provide over the whole length
of the routes such right of access for the Contractors staff to carry out survey
work, investigation of the general foundation conditions, construction, testing and
commissioning of the required Works in accordance with the Specification.
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements (other than questions of
wayleaves and access) with the occupiers of the routes, but if any difficulty shall
arise the Contractor shall inform the Project Manager thereof. The Project
Manager shall thereupon take such steps as may be necessary to resolve the
difficulty.
The Contractor shall make any necessary arrangements and take any necessary
precautions where the routes cross roads, tele-communication lines or cables,
buildings, power lines or cables, orchards, gardens, or other obstacles or ground
over which erection cannot be carried out in the normal manner. The Contractor
shall provide all necessary temporary works to overcome the obstacles and shall
comply with all reasonable requirements of the Authorities concerned.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 3 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 5 - EXTENT OF INSTALLATION
The Contractor shall give the Project Manager at least 14 days notice of his
intention to install any service connection, to enable the Employer to make the
necessary arrangements for access to the consumers premises.
4.5
TREES
No trees shall be damaged, cut or pruned during the execution of the contract
unless specifically authorised by the owner of the plot/s nearest to the tree.
Should any trees have to be removed by the Contractor he shall arrange for the
complete uprooting and trimming of tree trunks as well as the stacking of all
trunks and branches. Holes caused by the uprooting shall be filled and
consolidated. Rubble shall be removed to leave the site neat and tidy. The
Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage which may occur during the
felling of trees.
Where trees are to be pruned, this shall be done neatly to the satisfaction of the
Project Manager.
5.
EXTENT OF INSTALLATION
The scope of overhead line installation work is subdivided into several parts and is
given below.
(i)
Establishing route of the proposed line,
(ii)
Digging of pole pits,
(iii)
Erection of poles,
(iv)
Concreting of poles,
(v)
Providing guys for supports,
(vi)
Fixing cross arms, insulators and pole fittings,
(vii)
Paving and stringing of line conductors,
(viii)
Earthing,
(ix)
Works relating to road crossings,
(x)
Miscellaneous items,
(xi)
Final checking, testing and commissioning.

The specifications to be referred are,
TS-GN-01 for EEPCO system and environmental data.
TS-CO-01 for AAA conductors,
TS-CO-02 for Aerial Bundled Cables,
TS-CO-05 for Insulators,
TS-CO-06 for Spun concrete poles.
The constructional drawings given for OH line installation may also be referred.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 4 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 6 - ESTABLISHING PROPOSED

ROUTE OF LINE
6.
ESTABLISHING PROPOSED ROUTE OF LINE
6.1
PROVISIONAL SURVEY OF LINE

(i)
Prepare tentative route(most economic) map of the line to be erected,
(ii)
Conduct reconnoitre survey of the area in which the line has to pass,
The following points shall be kept in view while conducting survey.
(iii)
The route shall be shortest, as far as possible,
(iv)
Route shall be as near to the road as possible to facilitate easy transport of

materials, easy erection and easy maintenance,
(v)
Route shall cover future potential load growth areas,
(vi)
The number of angle points should be minimum,
(vii)
Provision shall be made for failure containment cut points / DP angle poles,
(viii)
Tree cutting and compensation shall be kept minimum,
(ix)
All road crossings river crossings should be perpendicular and not diagonal after
different cross points(buildings),
(x)
Crossing of power lines shall be perpendicular to each other,
(xi)
To avoid parallelism of telephone lines (trunk lines and power lines)shall be

perpendicular and not diagonal,
6.2
AREAS TO BE AVOIDED
The areas to be avoided for routing the line are,
(i)
Proximity to Aerodromes,
(ii)
Natural hazards like steep valleys, hills, forests and lakes,
(iii)
Difficult crossings such as rivers, railway lines and buildings,
(iv)
Military /police firing ranges and Explosives storage areas,
(v)
Sensitive areas such as, bird or wild life sanctuaries, bird habitants, culturally and
historically important resources, gardens,
(vi)
Overhead lines-shall not be erected in the vicinity of aerodromes until the

aerodromes authorities have approved in writing the route of the proposed lines
6.3
PROFILE OF ROUTE
(i)
Having provisionally fixed the route on the survey map, perform detailed survey
and fix angle points and mark with survey stones,
(ii)
Prepare a route map showing the proposed line and various railway lines,
communication lines, HV power lines, rivers and stream crossing on survey map
of at least 1:1,000 and details on scale as required, providing sufficient details.
(iii)
All LV lines along with pole locations are to be marked on local map to scale
1:1000.
(iv)
After fixing the angle points, intermediate spans are to be fixed, keeping the spans
uniform in length. They shall be as near as possible to the basic design span.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 5 , 26-Apr-13
SECTION 6 - ESTABLISHING PROPOSED

ROUTE OF LINE
EEPCO
6.4
(v)
In hilly areas poles are to be provided on ridges to maintain proper ground

clearance. Poles should not be placed along the edges, cuts or embankment or
along the banks of creaks of streams.
(vi)
For 15kV and 33kV lines, prepare a ground profile with pole positions, conductor
sags and ground clearances marked,
(vii)
Care shall be taken to see that protruding pegs marked during survey are not
damaged.
PROVIDE FAILURE CONTAINMENT

A failure containment structure shall be provided every 1000m to prevent cascade
failure along the entire line. A failure containment structure shall be one of the
following.
6.5
An in-line double pole with stays in both directions,
A double pole section angle,
A four pole section angle,
A double pole dead end,
WAY LEAVES
After finalizations of the route, the proposals for following way leaves and right
of way, as applicable have to be obtained from the following organizations.
6.6
Telecommunications Authority approval
Railway crossing approval
Forest approval
Prohibited areas like National Parks etc
TREE CUTTING
Tree cutting shall be done as mentioned in Table 6.6
Table 6.6
Sl.
No
Voltage
Tree Clearance Required
1.
LV
All growth with in 3.1Mts on either

side of the line and all trees that may
fall and foul the line
NIL
2.
15kV
Spur
lines
All growth within 4.6mts on either side

of the line and all trees that may fall
and foul the line
Nil
3.
15kV
trunk
lines
All growth with in 6.1mts on either

side of the line and all trees that may
fall and foul the line
Nil
Rev -1- April 2013
Relaxation
Page: 6 , 26-Apr-13
SECTION 7 - COMPLIANCE WITH

STATUTORY CLEARANCES
EEPCO
7.
Mark the trees for felling, by a ring of white paint at one meter height from
ground level and submit the proposals to the competent authorities for
granting permission.
If the line has to pass through gardens, orchards requiring tree cuttings, pay
compensation to the owners as fixed by the concerned authorities
(Department of Horticulture or department of forest etc.,) before tree
cutting,
Arrange for tree cutting or tree branches cutting as required,
Take all possible steps to see that standing crops etc., are not damaged while
attending to tree cutting,
Arrange to remove the cut trees as soon as possible, stack them neatly in
one place and hand over to the authorities.
COMPLIANCE WITH STATUTORY CLEARANCES

The clearances to be satisfied for the proposed OH Lines are as below.
7.1
GENERAL
For the purpose of computing, the vertical clearance of an overhead line the
maximum sag of any conductor shall be calculated on the basis of the maximum
sag in still air and the maximum temperature as specified in the Ethiopian
Building Code EBCS-10 Electrical Installation of Buildings.
Similarly, for the purpose of computing, any horizontal clearance of an overhead
line the maximum deflection of any conductor shall be calculated on the basis of
the wind pressure specified in the EBCS-10 (or may be taken as 350, whichever is
greater).
7.2
LINE TO GROUND CLEARANCE

The height from the ground of the bottom most conductors of distribution lines
and service lines should not be less than as given in the following Table 7.2 under
most severe conditions of temperature and wind.
Table 7.2
S.
No.
Vertical Clearance to Ground in Meters

Location
Upto
0.75kV
0.7515kV
15-50kV
Places inaccessible to vehicle

traffic and elsewhere than
along or across any street.
1
Along streets
5.5
6.1
6.7
Across streets
5.5
6.1
6.7
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 7 , 26-Apr-13

EEPCO
7.3
CLEARANCE TO BUILDINGS
7.3.1
Medium and low voltage lines and service lines

Power lines should not be taken over buildings .Every effort should be made to
divert the line away from all buildings.
7.3.2
(i)
When the line passes adjacent to the building a horizontal clearance of 1.2 m shall
be maintained,
(ii)
Any conductor so situated as to have a clearance less than that specified above,
shall be adequately insulated and shall be attached by means of metal chips at
suitable intervals to have earthed bearer wire having a breaking strength of not
less than 350 kg.
(iii)
The horizontal clearance shall be measured when the line is at a maximum

deflection from the vertical due to wind pressure.
Clearance from Buildings of High and EHV Lines
Where a high or extra-high voltage overhead line passed above or adjacent to any
building or part of a building it shall have on the basis of maximum sag a vertical
clearance above the highest part of the building immediately under such line, of
not less than,
For high voltage lines up to and including 15kV
2.5m
35kV
2.55 m
45kV
2.65 m
60kV
2.8 m
110kV
3.3 m
The horizontal clearance between the nearest conductor and any part of such
Building shall, on the basis of maximum deflection due to wind pressure be not
less than:For high voltage lines up to and including15kV
1.2 m
for high voltage line above 15kV and upto and

including 35kV Power Line Crossings
2.0 m
The minimum clearances(in meters) to be adopted between lines when crossing

each other for different voltages are given the table below
S. No.
Voltage in kV
L.V
15kV & 33kV
132kV
1
2
3
0.40
15
33
1.22
1.33
2.44
2.44
2.44
2.44
3.05
3.05
4.83
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 8 , 26-Apr-13

EEPCO
7.4
CLEARANCES BETWEEN POWER LINES
7.4.1
Clearance between lines of different or same voltage on

independent supports
If lines of different voltages or same voltage are carried on independent supports,
the supports should be so located that the clearance between the lines is not less
than the height of the taller supports.
7.4.2
clearances between Lines of different voltages carried on the

same supports
The vertical clearances (in meters) to be maintained given in the table below
S. No.
Voltage in
kV
Up to
0.75
0.75 to
8.7
8.7 to
50
Up to 0.75
0.61
0.61
1.22
0.75 to 8.7
0.61
0.61
1.22
8.7 to 50
1.22
1.22
1.22
Practices followed by EEPCO as mentioned in the construction manual are given

below.
If two or more lines are carried on the same pole the higher voltage line shall be
erected above the lower voltage line.
7.4.3
Clearance between HT lines of the same voltage carried on same

supports
Clearance between HT lines of the same voltage carried on same supports is given
in Table 7.4.3
Voltage Rating
7.4.4
Table 7.4.3
Clearance between
circuits in meters
(Vertical formation)
Phase to phase of each

circuit in meters
15kV
1.10
0.90
33kV
1.37
1.37
Clearances to communication lines

Clearance to Communication lines for different voltage levels are given in Table
7.4.4.
Table 7.4.4
S.
Item (Distance in Meters)
No.
1.
Minimum Vertical clearance between

power and communication lines
Rev -1- April 2013
Up to 0.75kV
0.75kV to 8.7kV
8.7kV to
50 kV
1.22
1.83
1.22
Page: 9 , 26-Apr-13

EEPCO
7.5
RAILWAY CLEARANCES
7.5.1
Minimum Clearance between Railway track and overhead lines

For non-electrified tracks: Minimum clearance between railway track and
overhead lines for non-electrified tracks is given in Table 7.5.1.
Table 7.5.1
Metre & Narrow
Broad Gauge
Gauges
Voltage
7.5.2
Inside
Station
Area
Outside
Station
Area
Inside
Station
Area
Outside
Station
Area
Remarks
Upto and
including
15kV
By UG Cable only
Above 15kV
including
33kV
10.06
7.62
8.84
Above 33kV
including
66kV
Subject to approval
by railways
6.40 otherwise U.G
cables or crossing
by tower lines
10.36
7.92
9.15
6.71
For electrified or likely to be electrified tracks shortly

Minimum clearance between railway track and overhead lines for electrified or
likely to be electrified tracks shortly is given in Table 7.5.2
Voltage
7.5.3
Table 7.5.2
For Broad, Meter and Narrow Gauges
Inside Station Area, m
Outside Station Area, m
Upto and including 15kV
By UG Cable only
Above 15kV upto 33kV
15.06
13.06
Above 33kV including

66kV
15.56
13.56
Additional for Railway crossings

An additional vertical clearance of 300 mm must be allowed to compensate for
long term creep than those mentioned in the charts.
7.6
TELEPHONE LINE CROSSINGS

The rules and clearances to be observed for telecommunication crossings ,
specified by Telecommunication Authority shall be followed.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 10 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 8 - REQUIREMENTS FOR LINE

CONSTRUCTION
The angle of crossing of power and telecom lines shall be as near to the right
angle but not less than 60o in any case.
Standard guarding is to be provided and earthed at crossings of telecom lines and
power lines
7.7
RIVER CROSSING
Minimum clearance of 3mts would be required for the conductors over the
highest flood level in at least last 50 years
Structures should be located at such places that they could be approached under
flood condition also. The foundation of structure should be sound so that it may
not get eroded or damaged due to rain water.
In case of navigable rivers, consultation with navigation authorities is necessary, to
determine the minimum clearance required.
8.
REQUIREMENTS FOR LINE CONSTRUCTION
8.1
33KV OVERHEAD LINES
8.1.1
General Description
The line shall be constructed as single circuit, three phase three-wire, single phase
two-wire (live-live) or single phase single wire earth return on earthed Spun
concrete pole with steel cross arms. These may be either single or double circuit
lines. Poles shall normally be directly embedded in the ground. The poles shall be
provided with stays at angle and terminal positions.
(i)
(ii)
Designs Spans
Pole height
12m & 14m
Basic span
50m
Line Conductor
The preferred conductor sizes are,100 and 150 and in some places 200mm, for
main lines.
(iii)
Conductor Sag and Tension

Refer to the sag and tension charts for the various conductor sizes.
Users shall ensure that the conductor tensile stress does not exceed a limit of 20%
Ultimate Tensile Strength (UTS) at 20oC without wind.
(iv)
Insulators
Pin or post insulators shall be used at intermediate and light angle positions. For
heavy angle and terminal positions, disc insulators complying with shall be used.
To achieve phase to earth clearance for jumper connections, additional insulators
shall be used, wherever necessary.
(v)
Max Conductor temperature 70C
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 11 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
8.2
SECTION 8 - REQUIREMENTS FOR LINE

CONSTRUCTION
15KV OVERHEAD LINES

General description
The lines shall be constructed as either single circuit 3 phase three-wire lines or
single phase 2 wire lines. They shall consist of earthed spun concrete poles with
steel cross arms. Poles shall normally be directly embedded in the ground. At
angle and terminal positions, the poles shall be stayed.
(i)
System parameters and service conditions are mentioned in spec No.TS-GN-01
(ii)
Design spans
Pole Height
(iii)
9m, 12m
Line conductors:
The preferred conductor sizes are 50, 100, 150 and 200mm2.
Express lines shall be 200mm2.
The preferred conductor size for the main line is 150mm2
The preferred conductor sizes for spur lines are 50 mm and 100 mm2.
(iv)
Conductor Sag & Tension:

Refer to the sag and tension charts for the various conductor sizes.
The conductor tensile stress should not exceed a limit of 20% UTS at 20oC
without wind.
(v)
Insulators
Pin or post type insulators shall be used at intermediate and light angle positions.
For heavy angle and terminal positions, disc insulators post insulators may also be
used for heavy angle position provided it can be established that the insulators are
capable of containing the forces in the line. To achieve phase to earth clearance
for jumper connections, pin insulators shall be used, where necessary.
(vi)
8.3
LOW VOLTAGE OVERHEAD LINES

(i)
General Description
The lines shall be constructed as single circuit/double circuit 3-phase four-wire, 1
phase 2-wire or 1 phase 3-wire lines on 9m poles. 9m poles shall be used for
construction activities in the urban centres.
The 9m poles shall also be used for rural electrification and on spur lines in the
urban areas. On minor roads they should be limited to stringing two conductors
on either side of the poles.
The lines shall be constructed on spun concrete poles with spool type insulators.
Poles shall normally be directly embedded in the ground. At angle and terminal
positions, the poles shall be stayed.
Bundled Aerial Conductors (ABC) may be used at the discretion of the Project
Engineer.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 12 , 26-Apr-13
SECTION 9 - ERECTION OF POLE
EEPCO
(ii)
Factors of Safety
As described in relevant clause of this specification
(iii)
Design Spans
Basic Span 50-60m
b)
Line Conductor
The preferred conductor size are 100 mm and in certain places based on the
requirement 150mm is also used. 50mm. 25mm2 AAAC conductors may be used
on spur distribution lines.
(i)
Conductor Sag and Tension:

Refer Sag and tension charts of the various conductor sizes.
(ii)
Insulators
To achieve phase to earth clearance for jumper connections, insulators shall be
used, where necessary.
(iii)
(iv)
Conductor Clearance
(v)
Proximity to Buildings
(vi)
Conductor Phase Spacing

Conductors shall be arranged in vertical configuration with 300mm spacing
between conductors.
(vii)
Poles
9m poles shall be used for rural electrification and at urban locations where major
roads are not likely to be crossed. At minor road crossings, two parallel wires shall
be strung on either side of the pole in the vertical plane.
9.
ERECTION OF POLE
9.1
POLE FOUNDATION DEPTH

The foundation design shall be prepared on the basis that kicking-blocks are not
employed. If it is proposed to include kicking-blocks, then the supporting
calculations shall be submitted.
9.1.1
Excavation of Pits for Poles

After receipt of approved, route map from the Engineer.
Excavate pole pits using either manual or mechanical tools.
At locations where blasting is involved using explosives, obtain approval

concerned authorities as required
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 13 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
The pits for the supports shall be excavated in the direction of the line, as
this will facilitate the easy erection of supports, in addition to giving greater
lateral stability.
The pits are to be excavated to a size of 1.2 meters x 0.6 meters with its
longer axis in the direction of line.
Planting depth of pole over the base concrete shall be as mentioned in

Table 9.1.1
Table 9.1.1
S.
Length of Pole
No. (m)
1
9.0 / 9.5
3
9.5 to 12.0
4
12.0 to 14.0
9.2
Planting Depth in
Ground (Mts)
1.5
1.8
2.0
Exceptions
In wet soil and black cotton soil
depth may be increased by 0.2 to
0.3 m and limit wind span
FOUNDATIONS
Depending on type of soils, the sub soil water table and the presence of surface
water five types of foundation designs will be used for locations classified in the
following manner.
9.2.1
Wet type
To be used at locations, where sub soil water is met at 1.8 meters or more below
the ground level ; Locations where surface water for long period with water
penetration not exceeding one meter below the ground level eg: paddy fields.;
Locations in black cotton soils.
9.2.2
Partially Submerged Type

To be used at locations where sub soil water is met at more than 0.90 meters from
the ground level.
9.2.3
Fully Submerged Type

To be used at locations where sub-soil water is met at less than 0.90 meters from
the ground level.
9.2.4
Rocky Type
To be used at locations where hard rock is met with and where the bond strength
between the rock and the concrete will be very high.
9.2.5
Dry Type
When the subsoil water is met at more than 1.8 meters below the ground level and
only dry crops are raised and soils are normal dry cohesive or non cohesive.
Prepare a statement of type of foundations to be used for each location for
approval by the Engineer.
The factor of safety for foundations shall be at least 2.20
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 14 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
9.3
BASE CONCRETING
Check alignment again after the excavation of pole pits is completed,
After satisfying with the alignment a pre-cast R.C.C Base plate of size 450x450x75
mm or 200x200x6mm MS Plate as Base Plate shall be put in the pit. Or
alternatively cement concrete padding of 1.2*0.6*0.075 mm depth with 1:3:6 mix
(0.05M cu mtr may be used to increase the surface contact between the pole and
the soil. The levelling of Base plate / cement concrete padding shall be checked to
ensure a level base for erection of the pole. The design details of the R.C.C Base
plate are furnished in the enclosed drawing (B1). If cement concrete padding is
provided, curing of concrete is to be done for a period of 14 days by covering the
concrete with gunny bags.
9.4
POLE ERECTION
The pole erection is done by five methods
Derrick Pole Method
Deadmans method
Bipod Method
Truck fitted with Crane method
Pole Erection Machine method
Deadmans method is more popular manual method of erection of poles. Truck

fitted with crane is most efficient, as about 50 poles can be erected in a day, with
minimum skilled personal.
It should be ensured that, at the time of erection, four men are at the ropes and
the supervisor should be at a distance for guiding correct position so that in the
event of breaking of rope, if pole falls, it will not result into an accident.
After the pole erection has been completed and having satisfied that the verticality
and alignments are all right, bolder filling and ramming is to be done. In swamp
and special location, before earth filling the poles are to be concreted up to the
ground level of the pit.
9.5
POSITION OF POLE
All poles in the tangent / intermediate locations shall be positioned in the pit and
that the bigger section modulus of the pole is always transverse to the length of
the line.
At tension points the bigger section modulus of the pole shall be in the length of
the line.
9.6
BACK FILLING
Back filling shall normally be done with excavated soil, unless it consists of large
boulders / stones in which case the boulders shall be broken to a maximum size
of 80mm.
The back filling materials should be clean and free from organic or other foreign
materials.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 15 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
The earth shall be deposited in maximum 200 mm layers, levelled and wetted and
rammed properly before another layer is deposited.
9.7
ERECTION OF DOUBLE POLE (D.P) STRUCTURE

For 15kV and 33kV lines tension points are to be provided at angle points where
the angle of deviation is more than 10 degrees. In straight runs, tension points are
to be provided at intervals of one Kilometre. Double Pole structures shall be
provided at all tension points.
Double pole structure is to be erected in the bisection of the angle of deviation.
The centre to centre spacing of the supports shall be 1500 mm. Double pole
structures is to be erected as per the drawings enclosed to the specification or as it
may be mutually agreed between the contractor and the engineer to suit local
conditions.
After erection of the D.P Structures, earthing of these supports is to be done as
per the specification and the poles are to be concreted with 1:3:6 ratio cement
concrete using 20/38 mm granite metal.
9.8
CONCRETING OF POLES
9.8.1
Locations to be Concreted
(i)
All angle locations.
(ii)
All tension locations
(iii)
All tapping poles.
(iv)
Locations in the valleys where uplift is anticipated.
(v)
All fully submerged locations
(vi)
Alternate poles of partially submerged and wet locations.
(vii)
Every fourth dry location.
9.8.2
Size of Concrete
The size of concrete shall be as mentioned in Table 9.8.2
Table 9.8.2
1
Size of Support(m)
Concrete size(m)
1.
9.0
0.75 x 0.60 x 1.8
2.
12 to 14.0
0.75 x 0.60 x 2.0
3.
Stay Concrete
0.6 x 0.6 x 0.6 or 1:3:6(0.2 cu.m)
Curing of concrete is to be done for 14 days by covering the concrete with gunny
bags and the balance portion of the pit shall be back filled with earth. The back
filling shall be done as per the specification.
9.8.3
Guidelines for Concreting

The following guide lines have to be observed in concerting of poles
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 16 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 10 - OVERHEAD LINE DESIGN &

CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
(i)
The cement concrete used for the foundations shall be of 1:3:6 Grade or as per
the schedule of quantities.
(ii)
The sand used for the concrete shall be composed of hard silicon materials and
well sieved. It shall be clear and of a sharp angular grit type and free from earthy
or organic matter and deleterious salts.
(iii)
The aggregate shall be of clean broken hard granite approved by the Engineer. It
shall be hard, close grained quality. It shall also be as far as possible cube like,
preferably angular, but not flaky, perfectly clean and free from earth, organic or
other deleterious matter. 20mm aggregate shall be used for base concreting and 38
mm aggregate for pole concreting.
(iv)
The water used for mixing concrete shall be fresh and it should be clean and free
from oil, acids and alkali. Saltish or brackish water should not be used.
(v)
Proper forms of moulds adequately braced to retain proper shape while

concreting should be used. The mould should be made water tight so that cement
cream will not come out leaving only sand and jelly consequently forming honeycombing in the concrete.
(vi)
After concreting to the required height, the top surface should be finished
smooth, with slight slope towards the outer edge to drain off the rain water falling
on the concrete.
(vii)
In wet locations, the site must be kept completely de-watered both during the
placing the concrete and for 24 hours after completion. There should be no
disturbances of the concrete by water during this period.
(viii)
The forms of moulds shall not be removed before a lapse of about 24 hours after
the completion of concreting. After removal of the form moulds, the concreted
surfaces, wherever required, shall be repaired with a rich cement and sand mortar
in the shortest possible time.
10.
OVERHEAD LINE DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION

STANDARDS
10.1
FACTORS OF SAFETY
The following factors of safety shall be maintained in all design and construction,
allowing for conductor sag and swing.
Conductor
2.5
Joints & Terminations
2.0
Supports (Pole & Mast)
2.0
Insulators & Hardware
2.0
Cross arms
2.5
Foundations
2.0
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 17 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 10 - OVERHEAD LINE DESIGN &

CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
10.2
NEW 33KV AND 15KV OVERHEAD NETWORK
10.2.1
General Description of Network

These general technical requirements are valid for both 15& 33kV lines using
Spun concrete poles. The new 33kV and 15kV lines shall be of a design
comprising single pole construction, with the conductors carried on one
horizontal cross arm. Pin type or Post type insulators shall be used, firmly bolted
to the cross arm. The cross arm shall be of galvanized steel and shall be braced
with two galvanized steel members.
The conductors 50, 100, 150 and 200mm2 AAAC shall be supported by pin, post
or suspension type insulators at the intermediate and light angle pole positions.
10.2.2
Poles
Predominant poles for 15kV and 33kV lines shall be 12 and 14 m high
respectively in the Towns. 9 &12m (respectively) poles may be used depending on
the terrain of the project location.
The poles shall be of spun concrete type and in selected instances they may be
wood or steel as it may be mutually agreed.
At pole mounted substations, voltage regulators, expulsion fusegear and load
isolator positions, consideration shall be given to the use of single class two poles,
unless the designs at these positions do not allow the use of single poles.
"H" pole structures shall be used where the installations of the above equipment
do not permit the use of single poles. The H structure shall be erected with
1.8m pole members and shall be in line or perpendicular to the overhead line as
appropriate.
10.2.3
Binding-in Wire
On 33kV and 15kV pin insulators, the conductor shall be bound-in on the top
groove, using two suitable stirrups in each case. The bind shall be formed of a
single layer of closely wound wire, extending at least 40mm beyond the stirrups.
The bind shall be wound in opposite directions, on each side of the insulator.
With Copper conductors, the bind shall be formed of a 2.0mm diameter annealed
copper binding wire.
In the case of Aluminium conductors, the bind shall be formed of two stirrups,
with 2.5mm diameter Aluminium binding wire. In addition, Aluminium chafe tape
shall be used, wrapped in a direction opposite to that of the conductor lay. The
chafe tape shall cover the portion of the conductor which is in contact with the
insulator, and extend at least 40mm under the bind, on each side.
Aluminium chafe tape shall also be used on Aluminium earth-wire, underneath
the clamps or binds. Where a clamp is used (on existing poles only), the chafe tape
shall extend at least 10mm beyond the bearing surface.
At 33kV and 15kV angle and terminal pole positions where disc type strain
insulators are used, the conductors shall be held in suitable strain clamps,
manufactured to an approved design, and of a material suitable for the
conductors.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 18 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
10.3
SECTION 11 - SUPPORT GUYS - STAYS
LV BARE OVERHEAD LINES

The standard pole for LV Urban lines shall be 9m long. Single poles shall be used
in all locations except double circuit 90o angle position where a twin-pole
construction shall be used. The poles shall be 1metre apart
11.
SUPPORT GUYS - STAYS

This shall be used mainly outside towns or town suburbs.
11.1
LOCATION OF GUYS
Guys are to be provided to counter balance the load on the supports due to
pulling of the conductors, so that the supports remain straight in vertical position
without bending in any direction.
The guys shall be provided at the following locations.
(i)
Angle locations
(ii)
Dead end locations
(iii)
Tee off points
(iv)
Steep gradient locations to avoid uplift on the poles
(v)
Two numbers storm guys to the central pole between two cut points
Perpendicular to the line direction.
11.2
COMPONENTS OF GUY ASSEMPBLEY

The Components of Guy insulators are mentioned in Table 11.2
Anchor Plate
Anchor Rod :
Table 11.2
R.C.C plate of size 450x450x 75mm or MS plate of
200 x 200 x 6MM.
16 1800mm length for 7/10 stay wire.
20 1800mm length for 7/8 or 7/10 stay wire
11.3
Eye Bolt
20 450 mm length with two Nos hexagonal nuts
Turn buckle
16 rod for 7/10 stay wire
Cross channel for turn

buckle
75 x 40 channel or 65x65x6 angle for 7/12 stay wire
M.S washer
50 x 50 x6 m
Thimble
As per drawing
100 x 50 x 6 mm channel for 7/10 and 7/8 stay wires
GUIDELINES FOR ERECTION OF GUYS

The installation of stay will involve the following works
(i)
Excavation of pit
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 19 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 11 - SUPPORT GUYS - STAYS
(ii)
Fixing of base plate to the stay rod and concreting and back filling of the pit.
(iii)
Fastening guy wire to the support along with stay clamp and turn buckle, after
fixing guy insulator(s) as per the drawing.
(iv)
Tightening guy wire and fastening to the anchor.

The following guidelines shall be followed in providing guys for supports
(v)
The marking of the guy pit for excavation, the excavation of pits and setting of
the anchor rod must be carefully carried out. The stay rod shall be placed in a
position such that the angle of inclination of the rod with the vertical face of the
pit is 45o.
(vi)
The anchor plate shall be of size 450 x 450 x 75mm, made of RCC with 1:2:4 ratio
and using 20mm machine crushed granite metal. Alternatively M.S. Plate of size
450 x 450 x 10mm or 600*1200*75mm (DWG. No B2) may also be used. The pit
shall be filled with 1:2:4 cement concrete using 20mm granite metal. The size of
concrete block shall be 600x1200x0.075mm at the bottom covering the anchor
plate completely. The concrete shall be cured for 14 days and balance portion of
the pit back filled with earth as per the specification 10.0.
(vii)
Proper form of moulds adequately braced to retain proper shape shall be used.
The moulds should be made water tight so that cement cream will not come out.
After concreting to the required height the top surface should be finished smooth,
with 1:6 slopes towards the outer edge to drain off water.
(viii)
In wet locations, submerged locations and marshy locations, the site shall be
completely dewatered during concreting and for 24 hours after completion.
Moulds shall not be removed before a lapse of 24 hours after completion of
concreting. After removal of form boxes, the concrete surfaces where ever
required shall be plastered with a rich mix of cement and sand mortar in the
shortest possible time.
(ix)
After the curing time of concrete is over, the free end of the guy wire is passed
through the eye of the anchor rod, bent back parallel to the main portion of the
guy and bound after inserting the G.I. Thimble. The loop is protected by G.I.
Thimble where it bears on the anchor rod. Where the existence of guy wire
proves hazardous, it should be protected with suitable asbestos pipe of 50 mm
diameter and 2mts length, filled with concrete, duly painted with black and white
stripes with enamel paint of approved quality and make, so that it may be visible
at night.
(x)
The Turn buckle shall be mounted at the pole end of the stay and guy wire so
fixed that the eye bolt is half way in the working position, thus giving the
maximum movement for tightening or loosening.
(xi)
Where stay angles of less than 45o are unavoidable the use of stay angles from 30o
to 44o or bow guys or flying stays shall only be done with the approval of the
Engineer. The anchoring and providing of guys for supports shall be done as per
the drawing no G11.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 20 , 26-Apr-13
SECTION 12 - FIXING CROSS-ARMS,

INSULATORS AND POLE FITTINGS
EEPCO
11.4
STAY WIRE
The stay wires used for anchoring shall conform to BS 183. The individual wire
used to form stranded stay wire is to be of tensile grade 4 having minimum
tensile strength of 1000N /mm2.
The Sizes of stay wire used shall be as mentioned in Table 10.2.3
Table 10.2.3
11.5
S. No.
Size of Wire
Safe Working
Load
1.
7/2.65
1000 kg
2.
7/3.15 or 7/10 (normal)
1450 kg
3.
7/4.0 or 7/8
2340 kg
GUY INSULATORS
(i)
Guy insulators shall comply with IEC standards.
(ii)
Guy insulators shall be provided to prevent the lower part of the guy from
becoming electrically energized by contact with the upper part of the guy, when
the conductor snaps and falls on them or due to leakage. No guy insulator shall be
located at less than 3.5mts (vertical distance) from the ground. The minimum
distance along the stay between the point of contact with the pole and the top of
stay insulator is 1.8mts
(iii)
Two numbers guy insulators are to be provided for 33kV line.
12.
FIXING CROSS-ARMS, INSULATORS AND POLE

FITTINGS
12.1
FABRICATION OF POLE FITTINGS

All the pole fittings are to be fabricated with the approved quality steel
conforming to the relevant standard by using suitable machines for cutting,
drilling, bending, welding and for grinding the sharp edges. The finished products
shall appear neatly and elegantly to the satisfaction of Engineer in charge of
works.
All M.S.parts shall be hot dip galvanished .
12.2
FIXING OF CROSS-ARM AND TOP CLAMP

Type design of cross arms and tapping cross arms for 15kV and 33kV lines,
ordinary cross arms for LT lines, top clamps (top fittings) for LV, 15kV and 33kV
lines are to be as per the relevant standard. The steel materials used for
manufacture of the pole fittings shall conform to the relevant standard.
12.3
FIXING OF CROSS ARMS

The poles shall be fully dressed with cross arms before they are errected. When
errected the cross arms must be fully alligned with the direction of the line route.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 21 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 12 - FIXING CROSS-ARMS,

INSULATORS AND POLE FITTINGS
Only G.I bolts and nuts and G.I Flatwashers and spring washers shall be used for
fixing the pole fittings. The bolts and nuts and washers used .
12.4
SUPPORTING STRAPS FOR CROSS ARMS

Cross arms shall be fixed with two galvanised supporting straps to ensure that
they are kept in the horizontran position. The typical minimum size shall be
25x4mm and shall be fixed at an apprpropriate angle, to suit the pole and cross
arm construction.
12.5
FIXING OF TOP CLEAT

Top Cleat for fixing to the support should be as per the drawings enclosed. It
shall be hot dip galvanised neatly before fixing.
Additional stay clamp may be provided for better grip in addition to the two
numbers through bolts & nuts. Only G.I Bolts & nuts and G.I.washers shall be
used for fixing the top cleat.
12.6
OFFSET ARRANGEMENT
Where it is not possible to maintain clearances to buildings etc., line conductors
shall be supported offset from the pole by means of a side arm and strut. In such
cases A type pedastals fabricated with 50x8 flat shall be used for fixing pin
insulators. The A type pedastal to be hotdip galvanished before fixing.
12.7
SIZE OF FLAT FOR CLAMPS

The sizes of flat for clamps for different voltages are given in Table 12.7.
Table 12.7.
Voltage
Size of Flat (min)
LV
50 x 6 mm
15kV
65 x 8 mm
33kV
75 x 8 mm
All clamps shall be of hot dip galvanised .
12.8
SPECIAL NOTE FOR SPUN POLES

Where the cross arm is to be fixed to the spun (circular) pole, additional
arrangement is to be made to increase the contact area between support and cross
arm. The cross arm along with this additional arrangement shall be hot dip
galvanised before fixing.
12.9
GENERAL
A rubber packing of 3 to 4mm thickness is to be provided between back clamp
and the support. The cross arm shall be perpendicular to the line direction and
both ends shall be horizontal to the spirit level.
12.10
GALVANIZING
Galvanisation shall be done by hot dip process where any materials is to be
galvanised it should be free form greases and paint etc., During and after
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 22 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 13 - PAVING AND STRINGING OF

LINE CONDUCTORS
galvanising there shall be no logging of blow holes due to the stay of zinc in the
holes after galvanising.
Tests on galvanised samples shall be carried out regularly strictly in accordance
with the relevant standard.
12.11
FIXING OF INSULATORS
The pins for insulators shall be fixed in the holes provided in the cross arm and
the pole top brackets. The hexogonal nut provided to the pin shall be tightened
fully. Spring washer shall necessarily be provided to the pins. The insulators shall
be mounted in their places over the pins and tightened. Slacken the Pin and align
the top groove of the insulator to the conductor direction Retighten pin. Strain
fittings are to be provided at all tension points. One strap of the strain fittings is
placed over the cross arm before placing the bolts in the hole of the cross arms.
The nut of the straps is so tightened that the strap can move freely in horizontal
direction, as this is necessary to fix the strain insulator. The insulators shall be
cleaned and examined for defects before fixing. Insulators with cracks or chips
shall not be used. Disc insulators are to be used for 15kV and 33kV lines and
shackle insulaors for LT lines, at all tension points.
13.
PAVING AND STRINGING OF LINE CONDUCTORS

In conductor erection the main operations are
13.1
Transport of conductor drums to work spot,
Paving off the conductor,
Jointing of conductors,
Tensioning and sagging of conductors,
Fixing of tension clamps, pin binding and jumpering.
TRANSPORT OF CONDUCTOR DRUMS

The conductor drums shall be transported to tension point by using motor
vehicles. The conductor drums are to be unloaded with cranes or by using skids as
in the case of loading. In handling transportation and unloading, conductor drums
shall be protected against injury / damage. If it becomes necessary to roll the
drum on the ground for a small distance, it should be slowly rolled in the direction
of the arrow marked on the drum.
13.2
PAVING OFF THE CONDUCTOR

The paving off (reeling out) the conductors to be done by pulling the conductors
from stationery reels. The reels (drums) are to be raised off the ground and fixed
at one end of the tension point. The reels are to be supported in their carriages in
such a way that they are free to rotate. The conductors are to be pulled out, there
by rotating the reels and unwinding the conductors.
While unreeling, the conductor should not rub against any metallic fittings of the
pole or ground. As the conductor is paved out it is passed through the gloved
hands and examined for defects and damage by feel. When the defect is found,
paving out is discontinued and the faulty section is either cut out or repaired.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 23 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO

LINE CONDUCTORS
While unreeling, the conductor is to be suspended in air in tension so that it will

not touch the ground. The conductor should be passed over the poles on wooden
or aluminium snatch pulley blocks provided with low friction bearings.
Each conductor drum is to be supported on a shaft which permits the reel to
rotate while wire is being strung. Each reel shaft shall be provided with an
external brake band which is adjusted to prevent over running when wire is being
unreeled.
The work shall be so arranged that before the end of the day the conductor shall
be raised to a minimum height of 5 meters above the ground, by rough sagging.
13.3
CONDUCTOR JOINTS AND TERMINATIONS

After paving off the conductors, mid span jointing of conductors is allowed to be
carried out.
Midspan joints shall be kept to a minimum and where unavoidable, shall be made
with approved full tension line splices. Care to be taken to see that there shall be
no joint nearer than 20 mts distance to the support. It is also to be ensured that
there shall be no joints in the Road Crossing or communication lines crossing
spans.
It is a specific requirement that midspan joints shall only be made by a person
tested and certified as being competent to do such joints by either the Contractor,
Employer or the supplier of the joint.
Where phases are to be interconnected double P.G. clamps of a suitable size
shall be used.
All joints of conductors and earth wires shall be recorded and their exact position
indicated.
Trails and bridge wires must be neatly disposed and connected with clamps or line
taps with a minimum of two per connection or by means of other approved
mechanical connectors.
The jointing and termnation of conductors shall be carried out by using a Spring
Loaded automatic splice, preformed helical armour rods, splices, dead-ends and
stay make-offs. Alternatively the joints may be made with suitable joinitng
materials approved by the conductor manufacturer.
Extreme care shall be exercised in the handling and storage of these items. It shall
be stored in their original packing, under cover, until actually used. When being
installed, care shall be taken that abrasive grit is not lost through mishandling.
13.4
PRECAUTIONS TO BE FOLLOWED WHILE JOINTING

Clean the conductor and sleeve thoroughly to remove the oxides, with a wire
brush.
Apply conductor jointing grease to the portion of conductor to be inserted into
the joint and repeat the wire brushing through the grease to remove any remaining
surface oxide.
Measure and mark the conductor to determine how much length must be inserted
to reach the center of the splice.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 24 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO

LINE CONDUCTORS
Insert the conductor smoothly to the center stop, referring to the mark to assure
complete insertion.
After both ends have been inserted, pull down on the splice to set the Jaws for
permanent installation.
Ensure that, after Jointing the conductor and splice are in straight alignment.
13.5
TENSIONING AND SAGGING

After paying off and jointing of conductors is completed tensioning operation
should be commenced. Conductor to be pre-tensioned for two hours at the 10oC
sag then increase sag to the rated temperature on that day.
First step is to connect one end of the conductor at one end of the tension point
(Fixed end) firmly by fixing the tension insulators and tension metal parts as per
the standards. Care should be taken to see that sufficient conductor is left for
jumpering. Temporary guys have to be provided for both the anchoring supports
in the section. Aluminium tape to be wrapped over conductor at the tension metal
parts for proper grip.
As the conductors are reeled out they are hoisted upto the cross arm. This may be
done by means of a hand line. Since the cross arms are steel, the conductor should
not be allowed to rest on the cross arm, since the conductor would get damaged
when drawn over the cross arms during the unreeling and tightening process.
Hence the conductors should always be hung in snatch blocks.
A snatch block is a single sheave block so arranged that it opens on as one side
there by permitting the conductors to be inserted or removed. The snatch block
also aids the conductor in taking a uniform tension through out its length when
the conductor is pulled up.
When the conductors are hoisted in their place they are ready to be pulled up. To
carry out this operation a come a long clamp is to be fastened to the other end of
the line conductor.
The conductor may be pulled from the ground by using manilla rope for initial
tensioning chain pulley block or any other pulling and lifting machine of sufficient
safe working load for final tensioning. It is better, easier and faster to pull from
the ground, since the chain block or tirfor can be operated more easily on the
ground than on the pole.
Care should be taken in pullying up that splices and sleeves do not catch in the
sleeves of snatch blocks. Any catch of this sort may prevent the conductor from
coming up as it should .
At tensioning end, one of the conductors is to be pulled manually upto a certain
point and then come along clamp is fixed to the conductor to be tensioned. The
grip of the come along clamp is attached to the pull lift machine and gradually
tensioned.
Immediately after pulling the tension is some what greater near the pulling end
than it is at the fixed end. Hence the conductor should be pulled up to pretension
(10o C) and allowed to settle for 23 hours, otherwise the sag will not be uniform.
Also the conductors will be too tight near the pulling end and too loose near the
fixed end. If they should be tied in this condition, it should place an unbalanced
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 25 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO

LINE CONDUCTORS
strian on the poles, cross arms, pin insulators, tie wires and conductors, which
might lead to ultimate failure.
The initial stress of the conductor also has to be taken out in order to avoid the
gradual increase in sag, due to setting down of the individual wire. This may be
done by pulling up the conductor to a tension a little above the theoretical tension
for the prevailing temperature and fixed up at that tension with a corresponding
reduced sag. After certain time the conductor will settle down to the corect sag
and tension. A tension of six to seven percent more than the theoretical value
mentioned in the sag tables needs to be given.
Final tensioning and sagging shall be in accordance with the sag and tension chart
of the particular conductor used.
It shall be ensured that maximum tension at 0oC with maximum wind pressure
and no ice loading not to exceed 50% of the ultimate strength.
Tension at 32.2oC (90oF) and still air not to exceed 25% of the ultimate tensile
strength.
The sag should be adjusted in middle span in short sections of line of about five
to six spans and at two spans in other sections. Even when the sheaves are used it
may be necessary to bounce the conductor at intermediate points with a handline
in order to equalise the tension in the various spans. Soaping the conductor
grooves at the supports so that the conductor will slide more freely may also be
resorted to.
13.6
METHOD OF MEASURING SAG

Sagging can be accomplished by sighting. In sighting for sag it is well to select a
span near the middle of the length pulled up, which is of similar length to the
basic / ruling span. Measurement is by use of targets placed on the poles below
the cross arm. The targets may be light strip of wood clamped to the pole at a
distance equal to the sag below the conductor when the conductor is placed in
snatch block. The line man sees the sag from the next pole. The tension of the
conductor is then reduced or increased until, the lowest part of the conductor in
the span coincides with the lineman line of sight.
In lengthy sections more than six spans, sag shall be checked in two spans.
13.7
FIXING OF CONDUCTOR TO THE SUPPORT

Traditional wrapped terminations may be used to terminate LV Conductors.
Three bolt Anchor clamps shall be used for termination of HV lines upto 80 Sq
mm conductor size and four bolt Anchor clamps shall be used for 100 Sqmm and
above sizes.
When sagging is completed, the tension clamps shall be fixed. The clamp can be
fitted on the conductor without releasing the tension. A mark is made on the
conductor with PVC steel grip tape at a distance from the cross arms equal to the
length of complete strain insulator assembly. Before the insulator set is raised to
position all nuts should be free. A come along clamp is placed on the conductor
beyond the conductor clamp and attached to the pulling unit. The conductor is
pulled in sufficiently to allow the insulator assembly to be fitted to the clamp.
After the conductor is clamped to the insulator assembly, the tension may be
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 26 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO

LINE CONDUCTORS
released gradually. If the tension is released with a jerk, an abnormal stress may be
transferred to conductor and support, which may result in the failure of the cross
arms, stay or pole in some cases.
After stringing is completed, all poles, cross arms, insulators, fittings conductor
joints etc are to be checked up to ensure that there have been no deformities etc.
The temporary guys provided at the anchoring supports may be removed .
The excess conductor is to be cut by leaving sufficient length for jumpering. The
ends of the conductor shall be taped properly before cutting.
Once again it shall be checked and ensured that sag is uniform through out the
length and sufficient ground clerances are maintained as per IE rules.
13.7.1
The Precautions to be observed in tying conductor to pin insulator

are listed below
Helical formed ties are precision devices which should be handled carefully to
prevent distortion or damage ties should be stored in cartons under cover
preferably shelf storage until used.
The lay direction of the tie must be the same as that of the outer layer of the
conductor to which it is applied.
The orrect size helical formed ties manufactured for the conductor size shall be
used. Please note that 100 mm ties can only be used on 100 mm conductor they
are not range taking.
The Elastomer tie pad is placed around the conductor when it rests on the
insulator with the slit upper most, there by preventing the contact between the
conductor and the insulator.
Undue force shall not be used or have to bend the ties to make them fit if he
does it is the wrong tie or he is installing it incorrectly.
Note also that on small angle the conductor sits on the side of the insulator, than
a special side tie has to be used which is different in design from the top tie used
in in-line poles
when helical formed ties are used there is no need to reinforce the conductor, as is
common practice with hand bound ties.
13.8
TYING OF CONDUCTOR ON PIN INSULATORS

TRADITIONAL PROCEDURE
The important steps of Procedure are Listed below
After the conductor is fixed at the tension points, the next step is to place the
conductor on the top of the pin insulators, from the snatch blocks and removing
the snatch blocks. This can be done by one person sitting on the cross arm. If it is
felt necessary a hand line may be used for this purpose. For placing the conductor
in position the pin insulators are provided with top groove and also side groove.
In straight runs of line, the conductos are placed on the top groove of the
insulators. When there is a small angle of deviation upto 10o the conductor is
placed on the side groove. The conductor shall occupy such a position on the
insulator as will produce minimum strain on the tie wire.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 27 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO

LINE CONDUCTORS
Before tying the conductor to the insulators two layers of aluminium tape should
be wrapped over the conductor in the portion where it touches the insulator. The
width and thickness of aluminium tape to be used shall be as specified in the hand
books of aluminium conductor manufacturers. For 15kV and 33kV lines main
conductor to be reinforced with another conductor piece of 500 mm length and
same size and quality as that of main conductor, bent upwards at right angles at
both ends to a height of 50mm. The ends of the stiffner piece to be wrapped with
aluminium tape or provided with binding.
13.8.1
Rules of Tying
Only fully annealed tie wire to be used.
SWG No 6 sizeof aluminium tie wire shall be used.
Sufficient length of tie wire for making the complete tie including an end
allowance for gripping with the hands shall be used. Normally the wire length
varies from one meter for LT lines to 4 meters in 33 KV lines. The extra length
should be cut at each end after the tie is completed. The binding shall be for
400mm length on stiffner piece and 30mm on either end of the stiffner piece.
Tie should provide a secure binding between line conductor, insulator and stiffner
piece.
There shall be positive contacts between the line wire and the tie wire so as to
avoid any chafing contacts.
Use of pliers shall be avoided
Nicking the line conductor shall be for bidden.
Tie wire which has been previously used shall not be used
Harddrawn or AAAC wires or fire burned wires shall not be used, since they are
either partially annealed or injured by over heating.
13.8.2
Steps for Making Tie

Bend tie wire around the insulator above conductor to form U
Holding the tie wire tightly against insulator throw two tight close wraps around
the conductor on each side of insulator keeping these wraps snugly against the
conductor.
Cross the legs of the tie wire around the insulator, right to left and left to right.
With both legs of the wire crosses tightly wrap each leg around the conductor
upto the end of stiffner piece.
13.9
JUMPERING
After the stringing is completed jumpering shall be given at the tension points
with the same line conductor by using P.G.Clamps. Two numbers double bolted
P.G.Clamps shall be provided for each jumper. Under no circumstances
P.G.Clamps or binding, to the main line conductors shall be permitted while
providing jumpering except at Tee-off poles, where jumpers are to be given on
the main conductor. Hence precaution has to be taken to leave sufficient
conductor at each tension point for jumpering purpose
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 28 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO

LINE CONDUCTORS
While making jumpers chromite or graphite conducting, oxide inhibiting grease

should be applied in the P.G.Clamps and also to the conductor where jointing
takes place. Then the P.G.Clamps and conductor shall be cleaned with wire
brush.The wire brushing should be done through the Conductor grease to rpevent
oxide instantly reforming.
The material used for P.G Clamps should be aluminium alloy ad the bolts must be
galvanised.
13.10
DOS AND DONTS FOR STRINGING

For the guidance certain DOS and DONTS are given below while stringing the
conductor.
13.10.1
Dos
Use proper equipment for binding aluminium conductors at all times.
Use skids or similar method for lowering conductor drums from transport.
Examine reel before unreeling for presence of nails or any other object which
might damage conductor.
Rotate the reel while unwinding the conductor in the direction marked on the reel.
Grip all strands while pulling out the conductor.
Control the unreeling speed with a suitable braking arrangement.
Use wooden rods for suitable braking arrangement.
Use long straight, parallel jaw grip with suitable liners when pulling conductor,
thus avoiding nicking or kinking of the conductor.
Use free running sleeves or blocks with adequate grooves for drawing / paving
conductors.
Use proper sag charts.
Mark conductors with adhesive tape which will not damage the strands.
Make all splicing with proper tools
Chromite or graphite conducting oxide inhibiting grease, should be applied before
cleaning with wire brush, where ever jointing takes place.
13.10.2
Donts
Do not handle conductor without proper tools at any stage.
Do not pull conductors without ensuring that there are no obstructions on the
ground.
Do not pull out excess quantity of conductor than is required.
Do not make jumper connections on dirty or weathered conductor; clean the
conductor using wire brush.
Do not handle aluminium conductor in a rough fashion but handle it with a care it
deserves.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 29 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
14.
SECTION 14 - MAPPING SPANS FROM

SUBSTATION
MAPPING SPANS FROM SUBSTATION

The following precautions shall be taken while erecting (stringing) 33kV and 15kV
Over head lines from the substation structures.
Maximum Tension: Maximum tension in each line conductor strung from
substation structure is 450 Kg.
Maximum Span: Maximum permissible first span from the substation structure
shall be 60m.
Uplift on Adjacent spans: Maximum slope (mean of three conductors) at the
point of attachment in 1:8 above horizontal.
15.
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER INSTALLATION
15.1
POLE MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS - GENERAL

Pole mounted transformer installations comprise:
Pole mounted transformer

Fuse cut out
MV surge arresters
Supporting structure
Lighting earthing
Frame earthing
Neutral earthing
LV Fuse Switch and metering system if applicable
The Fuse cut out shall be cross arm mounted above the transformer and
positioned so that the fuses can be safely operated by pulling stick from a ladder
or platform from the opposite face of the pole from the transformer.
The surge arresters shall be mounted adjacent to the Fuse cut out and connected
on the upstream side of the fuses. The surge arresters shall be directly earthed to
the substation MV grid. Alternatively the Surge Arrester may be an integral part of
the transformer.
The drop lead from the MV line, the connection to the surge arresters and also
the drop lead to the MV bushings shall be single core 35 mm2 XLPE covered. An
insulated boot shall be provided over the exposed metal parts of the MV bushing
to protect against interruptions from bird, snakes, wind-blown debris, etc.
15.2
TRANSFORMER MOUNTED ON SINGLE POLE

A single pole supporting structure shall be at least 6 kN, and provided for
installation of single-phase transformers and up to 160 kVA for three-phase
transformers.
The transformers shall be mounted directly on the concrete pole or on a purpose
built bracket. The transformer structure shall be oriented to ensure that for threephase transformer the transformer vector group is provided. This will ensure
paralleling capability with LV feeds from adjacent three-phase transformers.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 30 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
15.2.1
SECTION 15 - DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER

INSTALLATION
LV connection without LV Pillar

Distribution Transformers of up to 100 KVA and below will bw connected to the
LV system with pole type fuses and not LV Pillars.
a)
For completely self-protected transformers (CSPT)

If CSPTs are used the ABC LV line will be connected directly to the LV terminal
of the Transformer.
b)
For conventional Transformers

For Overhead LV lines:
For 25 and 50 kVA transformer one pole type fuse switch shall be provided. Up
to two outgoing LV distributors shall be supplied from the fuse switch.
For 100 kVA transformer one LV pole type fuse switch shall be provided for each
outgoing LV distributor. ABC XLPE LV cables as in the table below shall be used
from the transformer LV bushings. Separate circuits shall be taken directly to each
overhead LV fuse switch or lopped to other fuse switches as required.
No and size (mm) of
Cable/phase
1 x 95
1 x 95
Transformer Rating
50 and 100 kVA 3 phase
All Single phase
If ABC cable is used then the same cable shall be used for the above connections.
15.3
TRANSFORMER MOUNTED ON DOUBLE POLE

A two pole supporting structure shall be at least 6 kN and provided for
transformer of 200kVA three-phase transformers and above. Two-pole
transformer structures may be required at other locations as directed by the
Employer's Representative.
The transformers shall be mounted directly on steel bearers. The phasing
connection shall be observed to allow paralleling capability with LV feeds from
adjacent three-phase transformers.
The LV cabinet (if specified), shall be fixed to the structure at a height that does
not obstruct pedestrian or other traffic but is still reasonably accessible for
operational purposes.
Single core copper XLPE LV cables as in the table below shall be used from the
transformer bushings to the LV cabinet. The neutral shall be full size. Where
these cables are less than 2.5m above ground suitable mechanical protection shall
be provided.
Transformer Rating
200 kVA 3 phase
315 KVA 3 phase
N0 and Size (mm) of

Cables per phase
2x 95
2x95
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 31 , 26-Apr-13
SECTION 16 - INSTALLATION OF
EQUIPMENT
EEPCO
The overhead LV distributor tails for the outgoing LV circuits shall be left
sufficiently long to reach the LV cabinet. Where these cables are less than 2.5m
above ground suitable mechanical protection shall be provided. Where
underground LV cable is installed for the outgoing LV circuits the cable shall be
routed from the LV cabinet and provided with suitable mechanical protection.
All cables fixed to the poles shall be nearly secured by stainless steel banding at
intervals of not more than 750 mm.
16.
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
16.1
LINE DISCONNECTOR
Three-phase line disconnector, of the solid link type, shall be provided at all
points shown on the drawings.
The disconnector shall be mounted on galvanised steel cross-arms as indicated on
the relevant drawings.
The actuator in question shall operate, causing all three links to operate via a
common operating shaft, thus isolating the secondary circuit.
16.2
LINKS
Links shall be provided within the MV rings positioned as shown on the layout
drawings. Line links shall be three single phase units to be operated by means of a
link stick.
The three single phase units shall be bolted to a sturdy "U" channel or cross arm
which in turn shall be clamped to the pole by means of two "U" bolts. All metallic
parts shall be hot dip galvanised after cutting, drilling and welding.
16.3
DROP OUT FUSES (DO'S)

These units shall be installed, at the Tee-off where the line Tees-off from the
existing line.
Drop out fuses shall be rated as per schedule of material and shall be so installed
to ensure that melting of the fuse elements leads to the cut out link being expelled
from the line contacts.
Drop out fuses shall also be installed as indicated on the construction drawing if
such a drawing is provided in the Contract. In the case of the contractor
providing construction drawings the DO fuses shall be clearly indicated.
16.4
SURGE ARRESTERS
Surge arresters will be installed at the following places:-
a)
All transformer HV bushings and between neutral and tank.
b)
Incoming and outgoing side of a four pole structure.
c)
Both sides of sectionalisers.
d)
On poles both sides of auto reclosers and Tri-link structures.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 32 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
17.
SECTION 17 - WORKS RELATING TO ROAD

CROSSINGS
WORKS RELATING TO ROAD CROSSINGS

Guardings shall be erected at all road crossing locations, communication lines
crossings as per the standards and as per the drawings enclosed to the
specification. All these guardings are to be provided with pipe earthing. These
guardings shall comply with Ethiopian Building Code maintaining minimum
required clearances as mentioned in Clause 5.0 of the specification.
Works such as erection of support underneath an existing power line and paying
out of conductor and earth wire and stringing the power line crossing span or a
railway crossing span or road crossing span will have to be done only after receipt
of the line clear from concerned authorities and approval from the concerned
departmental officers
18.
MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
18.1
EQUIPMENT NUMBERING AND LABELLING

All major equipment such as Distribution Transformers, Sectionalisers,
Autoreclosers etc. as well as poles shall be numbered. The numbering system shall
be provided by the employer. In the case where the employer does not have a
suitable system the contractor shall propose a system to be used.
The numbering system shall be agreed during the design approval stage.
All the marking tags shall be fastened on the equipment side facing the road
where applicable or shall face in the same direction where a road does not exist
alongside the overhead line.
18.2
TRANSFORMER NUMBERING METHOD

Transformer structures shall be identified by means of a similar unique zone
identification number.
Transformer numbering shall be on a plate at least 300mm x 200mm mounted on
the transformer mounting platform.
This labelling must be done in the form of permanent letters using a stencil and
permanent, durable good quality spray paint or punched and painted.
The height of the letters must be at least 70mm. and shall be clearly visible from
ground level.
In addition to the label, the rating (in kVA) of the transformer shall also be
stencilled in a similar fashion and the phase rotation shall be indicated on the
secondary side.
In general these numbers shall be as indicated on the drawings but before
manufacture thereof, confirmation of the final numbers must be obtained from
the Project Manager.
The materials used for the numbering shall have a design life, matching that of the
equipment it is accompanying.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 33 , 26-Apr-13
SECTION 19 - EARTHING
EEPCO
18.3
POLE NUMBER PLATES

In general the pole numbering system shall be of such a nature as to reference
poles to the feeder and substation.
The number plates shall be manufactured from a 100mm x 50mm, 2mm thick
aluminium strip and shall be capable of being bent into an arc of radius 100mm
without damage.
The text will be thick, 25mm high and 10 mm wide numbers
It shall be fixed at 3.5m above ground level facing the road.
The year of erection of the pole shall be punched on the plate on the lower
left-hand corner.
The base line of the number shall be the centre line of the plate.
No finish is required as the numbers will be punch stamped onto the aluminium
surface.
For wood poles four nail holes 4mm diameter shall be drilled, one at each corner,
and centred 5mm from each edge.
For steel or concrete poles the plate shall be fixed with stainless steel strap.
18.4
ANTI CLIMBING DEVICES AND DANGER BOARDS

Anti-climbing devices and enamel danger boards are to be provided at all railway
crossings, road crossings and double pole structures. Only G.I materials shall be
used in order to prevent unauthorised persons from climbing HT and LT
supports at vulnerable places, anti climbing devises and danger boards are to be
provided.
18.5
WORKMANSHIP
It shall be ensured that for the correct erection of line as per specification /
approved drawings and their correct setting and alignment, If the supports and
D.P. Structures after the erection are found to differ from approved route maps
and drawings or to be out of alignment is noticed, they shall dismantle and re
erect them correctly .The supports must be truly vertical and in plumb after
erection and no straining will be permitted to bring them to vertical position.
Verticality of each support shall be checked by the by the Engineer.
Maximum permissible tolerance is 50 mm in respect of verticality.
19.
EARTHING
19.1
GENERAL
Earthing shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Ethiopian
Building Code(EBCS-10)Electrical installation of buildings and in particular as
mentioned below.
All metallic supports shall be provided with earthing as per drawing G3.
For spun concrete poles, the metal cross arms and insulator pins shall be bonded
and earthed at every pole with earthing as per drawing G3.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 34 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
All special supports on which AB Switches etc are mounted shall be provided
with pipe earth as per drawing G4.
Supports on either side of the road, railway track or river crossing shall be
provided with pipe earthing as per G4.
At all tension points at double pole locations the steel and metal parts are to be
provided with pipe earthing as per drawing G4.
All AB Switch handles to be earthed with pipe earth plus operators earth mat as
per drawing G4.
Bentonite shall be used as shown in the drawing No. G3 and G4. Charcoal and
salt shall not be used under any circumstances.
The earthing shall be as per the drawings enclosed to the specification (Drawing
No G3 & G4).
19.2
COMMON REQUIREMENTS
All MV connections of the buried earthing grid shall be constructed with bare
copper conductor not less than 35 mm in cross section. Copper conductor for
earthing may be hard drawn or soft drawn.
1) Earthing rods
All earth rods shall be extensible copper clad steel (or hot dip galvanized) nominal
length 1,500 x 15 mm diameter. Earth rods shall be used singly or jointed as
necessary to achieve a satisfactory earth test. Rods shall be driven so that the top
is not less than 500 mm below ground surface.
Each earth rod assembly shall be fitted with a purpose-designed clamp suitable for
up to three 35 mm2 copper conductors
2) Earthing grids
The conductors and the tops of the earthing rods shall be not less than 500mm
from the natural ground surface.
3) Down conductors
Where the pole top equipment require to be connected to the earthing grid this
shall be of stranded galvanized bare steel 70mm.
For mechanical protection, the earth lead between 2.5 m above ground to 400
mm below ground shall be installed inside a 20 mm diameter black polyethylene
pipe. The polyethylene pipe and conductor shall be secured to the pole by
stainless steel banding at intervals of not less than 500 mm.
The earth lead to each of these earth grids shall be fitted with a test link located
on the pole immediately above the polyethylene pipe and arranged to isolate the
system neutral from the earth grid for testing.
The test link shall be insulated or positioned so that it does not make electrical
contact with the pole or adjacent metal when it is opened.
The connection of the down conductor to the earthing grid will be shall be made
with suitable bimetallic clamps for the sizes of cables to be installed.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 35 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
For mechanical protection, the earth lead between 2.5m above ground to 400 mm
below ground shall be installed inside a 20 mm diameter polyethylene pipe, colour
black. The polyethylene pipe and conductor shall be secured to the pole by
stainless steel banding at intervals of not less than 750 mm. All buried earth
conductors shall be not less than 500 mm below the ground surface.
All above ground connections on earth leads shall be made with bolted or
compression fittings rated for not less than the 3-second fault rating of the
associated conductor.
19.3
MV EARTHING REQUIREMENTS
1) Earthing of frames/matalwork
Within the MV network all exposed metalwork not normally alive shall be directly
earthed to a locally established earth system fitted with a test line Locations
include distribution transformer, ABCs, LBS's, MV Capacitor installation, voltage
regulators, etc. Concrete poles, steel cross arm and similar items on other poles do
not require direct earthing. The maximum resistance of the local earth grid for the
metalwork/frames earthing shall be 30 ohm.
2) Earthing of MV surge arresters
MV lightning arresters shall be earthed by an independent connection and shall be
less than 10 ohms. A test link must not be inserted in any lighting arrester earth
connection.
3) Common earthing of lightning arrester and frames
The HV Equipment frame earth and the lightning arresters earth may be
effectively a single earthing system provided that the overall MV earthing
resistance grid at the transformer is less than 10 Ohms.
4) Construction of earthing grid
The MV buried earth grids shall comprise not less than three standard earth rods
spaced 3m or more in a triangular pattern and the prop up structure, substation,
or equipment building. Where site conditions make this impractical the earth grid
shall comprise not less than three standard earth rods spaced 2m or more installed
in a straight line underneath the line of the overhead MV distributor. If additional
earthing is required to achieve the 10 ohm minimum resistance, the earthing grid
shall be extended in a radial pattern with bare copper conductor and rods at not
less than 2 m spacing or the length of the earthing rod whichever is greater.
5) Connection of equipment to earthing grid
All exposed metal at the substation including transformer tank, transformer
bearers, MV fuse supports, LV cubicle frame, etc, shall connected to the earthing
grid with down conductors . The equipment connection shall preferably be in a
ring circuit so that the failure of anyone lead or connection does not leave any
item isolated from earth.
Within buildings and at package substations a suitably rated earth bar shall be used
to connect all earth leads. Two separate earth leads shall be installed from the
equipment above ground to different parts of the buried earth grid. Each lead for
indoor equipment shall be not less than 35 mm2 copper PVC covered
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 36 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
19.4
LV SYSTEM EARTHING REQUIREMENTS

1) Earthing philosophy
The overall resistance of the LV distribution neutral shall be less than 10 ohm
anywhere in the system. Where the recommended practices are followed the
overall value will usually be less than about 5 ohm (transformer location) and at
the end of the LV distribution line the neutral/earth resistance shall be less than
10 ohms.
2) Earthing of neutral LV conductor.
At every distribution transformer substation One LV earthing grid at the first LV
pole away from the transformer on each LV distributors. This is necessary to
ensure satisfactory earthing separation and prevention of potential transfers from
the MV to the LV grid during faults at the transformer. Each grid shall be directly
connected to the LV neutral.
Each of these earth grids must have a measured resistance of less than 20 ohms.
If there is only one outgoing LV feeder then the resistance shall be 10ohms. The
provision of a separate earth grid with each outgoing feeder provides security
against damage to one of them and allows for routine testing without running the
system without earthing.
Sometimes however it is not possible to install LV earth grids on separate poles
away from the transformer. In such cases the LV earth grid may be installed
adjacent to the transformer pole and connected to the transformer neutral. It is
required that this earthing grid is separated by not less than 5 m from any part of
the MV earth grid, and the buried leads to the LV grid are electrically independent
(e.g. PVC covered conductor installed in polyethylene pipe).
3) Connection of LV neutral to earthing grid
The LV neutral at the pole top shall be connected to the grid with a single 70mm2
galvanised down conductor, with a test link.
4) Earthing grid
The LV earth grids adjacent to the transformer shall comprise not less than three
standard earth rods spaced 3 m or more in a triangular pattern around the LV
pole. Where site conditions make this impractical the earth grid shall comprise not
less than three standard earth rods spaced 2 m or more installed in a straight line
underneath the line of the overhead LV distributor. If additional earthing is
required to achieve the earthing resistance in either case, the earth grid shall be
extended in a radial pattern with bare 35 mm2 (or larger) copper conductor and
rods at not less than 2 m spacing.
5) Earthing of LV neutral along the route
The LV neutral shall be earthed at intervals of approximately 200m and not more
than 250m and at the end of each LV distributor. LV Feeders of less than 300m
shall have no intermediate earthing points.
Example 1. For a transformer earthed neutral for a feeder of 600m long the
neutral will be earthed at the transformer, two intermediate points and at the end
of the feeder.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 37 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 20 - FINAL CHECKING, TESTING

AND COMMISSIONING
Example 2. For a feeder earthed at the first pole and the distance from this
earthed pole to the end of the feeder is say 500m, the feeder neutral shall be
earthed at one intermediate point and at the end of the feeder.
Earth connections along the LV distributor and at the ends of the distributor shall
comprise a single earth stake solidly connected to the neutral conductor with
galvanized steel 70mm installed inside a 20 mm diameter polyethylene pipe,
colour black.
Where LV distributors from adjacent transformers meet, the neutrals shall be
interconnected and earthed.
19.5
EARTHING OF CONCRETE POLES

All concrete poles shall be earthed thought the earthing tale provided with the
pole.
All steel cross arms that do not from part of other earthing arrangements shall be
bonded to the earthing conductor of the steel pole at the pole top.
The earthing of the concrete pole shall be achieved with the use of 5m of
galvanised wired bonded to the earthing tail of the pole. The galvanised wire shall
be coiled and buried between the bottom and middle of the pole pit.
20.
FINAL CHECKING, TESTING AND

COMMISSIONING
After the completion of the works final patrolling and checking of the line shall be
done to ensure that all the foundations works, pole erection and stringing has
been done as approved by the Engineer and also to ensure that they are complete
in all respects. All works shall be thoroughly inspected keeping in view of the
following main points.
(i)
Sufficient back filled earth is lying over each foundation pit and it is adequately
compacted.
(ii)
Concreting and muffing of poles is in good and finally shaped condition.
(iii)
Meggar the line
(iv)
Checks weather the guy / stays is straightened and weather the guy / stays are
intact.
(v)
Check weather the earthing connection of supports and fittings are intact.
Measure the earth resistance with earth tester.
(vi)
Obtain approval from electrical inspectorate
(vii)
Obtain acknowledgement of the all work men in writing
(viii)
Give wide publicity.
(ix)
All the accessories and insulators are strictly as per the drawing and are free from
any defects or damages, whatsoever.
(x)
All the bolts and nuts and pole fittings are galvanized and as per contractual
provisions.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 38 , 26-Apr-13
SECTION 21 - POLE SCHEDULES
EEPCO
(xi)
The stringing of the conductors has been done as per the approved sag and
clearances as per IE rules are available.
(xii)
No damage, minor or major to the conductor, earth wire, accessories and

insulators strings, still unattended are noticed.
(xiii)
At all tension points, jumpers are provided to each phase with two Nos.
aluminium alloy PG clamps.
(xiv)
In addition to the above testing, it shall be ensured that the total and relative sags
of the conductors are within the specified tolerance. Such tests shall be carried out
at selected points along the route as required.
(xv)
After satisfactory tests on the line and approval by the Engineer the line shall be
energized at full operating voltage before handing over.
21.
POLE SCHEDULES
Pole schedules are to be prepared in Proforma mentioned below and hand it over
to the Engineer. All approach roads available and power lines crossing locations
shall be marked in the drawings.
The pole schedules shall be prepared in the following formats.
21.1
33KV LINE POLE SCHEDULES

The format of pole schedules for 33kV line is given in Table 21.1.
Table 21.1.: Format of Pole Schedules for 33kV line
S. No
Top cleat
12
Stay wire size
23
Loc. No
Horizontal x arm
13
Coil earth
24
Type of
support
Strut for X-arm
14
Pipe earth
25
Height
(Mts.)
Pedestal clamps
15
Pole concrete full/sleeve/nil 26
SP/DP/4P
Pins with insulators
16
Danger boards
27
Structure
pole
Discs
17
Anti climbing devices
28
Type / HT
Metal parts
18
Bolts & nuts (No)
29
Span length
Bracing sets
P.G. Clamp
30
Ground
clearance
Back clamps
20
Conductor joints
31
Size of
conductor
10
Stay clamps
21
Road crossing (Specify road

name)
32
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 39 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
Guy insulators
(No)
V cross arm 11
21.2
22
River / canal crossing

(specify name)
33
15 KV LINE POLE SCHEDULES

The format of pole schedules for 15kV line is given in Table 21.2.
Table 21.2.
S. No
Strut for X-arm
15 Guy insulators No
29
Loc. No
15 KV pins with
insulators
16 Pipe earth
30
Type of support
15 KV discs
17 Coil earth
31
Span length
15 KV metal parts
18 A type pedestals
32
Size of conductors HT
LV pins with
insulators
19 Top channels for special

structures
33
No of LT conductors
LT
Bolts & nuts (No)
20 Bracing sets for DPS
34
Size of LT conductor
L.V shackles
21
Ground clearance
CI. Knobs
22 P.G. Clamps
36
Clearance between
HT&LT
L.V. Straps
23 Conductor joints
37
V cross arm
10
Back clamps
24 Danger boards
38
Top cleat
11
Stay clamp
25 Anti-climbing devices
39
LT 3 cross arm
(Type)
12
Strut pole
26 Guard-rings
40
LT S x-arm (Type)
13
Stay sets
27 Road crossing (Name)
41
Horizontal X-arm
14
Stay wire size
28 Canal crossing (Name)
42
21.3
Pole concrete full/sleeve/

nil
35
LV LINE POLE SCHEDULES

The format of pole schedule for 33kV line is given in Table 21.3..
Table 21.3.
S. No
Pins with
insulators
14 Danger boards
27
Loc. No
Shackles
15 Anti climbing devices
28
Type of support
C.I. Knobs
16 Bolts & nuts No
29
Height (m.)
Straps
17 P.G. Clamps
30
Top cleat
18 Conductor joints
31
Tangent / cut point 5
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 40 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
Strut pole
Back clamp
19 Road crossing (Specify name)
32
Type / Height
AB cable size
20 Canal crossing (specify name)
33
Span length
Stay clamp
21 Guarding (length)
34
No of conductors
Stay wire size
22 Side arm structure
35
Size of conductors
(Phase)
10
Coil earth
23 Ground clearance
36
Size of conductor
(Neutral)
11
Pipe earth
24
12
Guy insulators
(No)
25
13
Pole concrete
Full/sleeve/ Nil
26
X arm / type
S X arm type
21.4
Clearance between HT & LT if

any
37
POLE SCHEDULE FOR CABLE CROSSINGS

The format of pole schedule for Cable crossings is given in Table 21.4.
Table 21.4.
21.5
S. No
Pipe earth
10
Loc. No
LAS
11
Voltage
Size and length of G.T. Pipe

used
12
Type of support
Stays
13
Span
Strut
14
Size of cable
Size of stay wire
15
Length of cable
Back clamps
16
Angle of crossing
End of terminal
Cable below ground level
17
Loop length provided
GUARDING DETAILS
The details of Guarding are given in Table 21.5.
Table 21.5.
S. No
Between guard wire & telecomm wire
10
Loc
Size of guard wire
11
Voltage
Size of lacings
12
Type of support
No of guard wires
13
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 41 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
Height of support
No of lacings
14
Span length
Length of guarding X-arm
15
Distance between guard

wire & ground
Earth resistance
16
Distance between guard

wire & phase conductors
Angle of crossing
17
Phase conductors & earth
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 42 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
SP-IN-02
Installation of Aerial Bundled Cables
Rev -1- April 2013
SPECIFICATION SP-IN-02
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
Mar 2013
First Issue
Rev 1
25 April 2013
Some text modified regarding traffic management during cable

stringing.
TS-IN-02 R1 Installation of ABC 2013-04-28.docx
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: i , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
INSTALLATION OF AERIAL BUNDLED CABLES
1.
SCOPE
2.
HANDLING OF AERIAL BUNDLED CABLE
3.
ERECTION OF AERIAL BUNDLED CABLES
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
PAGE NO
1
1
1
1
TOOLS
PULLING OF AB CABLE
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
STRINGING OPERATION
ATTACHMENT OF SUSPENSION CLAMPS
MAKING AN AB CABLE JOINT
JOINING OF THE PHASE CONDUCTORS AND THE STREET LIGHTING
CONDUCTOR
2
3
3
4
4
5
4.
SPAN LENGTHS AND WORKING STRESS
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
CLEARANCES TO GROUND
CLEARANCES TO BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES
RUNNING ABC THROUGH TREES
REPLACEMENT OF OPEN WIRE SYSTEMS WITH ABC
6
7
7
7
5.
6.
PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECKS AND TESTS

EARTHING
8
8
Rev -1- April 2013
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO
INSTALLATION OF AERIAL BUNDLED CABLES

1.
SCOPE
This Section covers Installation of Low Voltage Aerial Bundled Cable. LV Aerial
Bundled Cable shall conform to IEC 60811, VDE 0276 part 626, NFC 33-0211998, NFC 33-041-1998, NFC 33-020 - 1998, NFC-004-1998.The bidder may
refer the technical specification TS-CO-02 for AB cables.
2.
HANDLING OF AERIAL BUNDLED CABLE

The ground clearance for the LV-line to normal ground shall be 5.8 m. There is
no need for clearance from ABC line to tree branches and high bushes, but the
line should not be "leaning" on them.
Other general design assumptions are the same as those for the overhead lines.
The following guidelines should be observed in storing and handling of L.V. AB
cables.
3.
(i)
The drums must be stored and transported in upright position,
(ii)
The Aerial Bundled Cable drums must not be thrown down from the
transportation vehicles. The drums shall be unloaded using crane or skids as is
done during loading,
(iii)
When handling the cable, contact with sharp articles shall be avoided,
(iv)
When pulling the Aerial Bundled Cable it must not touch the ground,
(v)
When using a fork lift, damaging the cable with the fork shall be avoided.
(vi)
The Aerial Bundled Cable shall be cut with a special cutter to prevent the strands
from spreading,
(vii)
Nylon ties shall be used to prevent the cable from spreading after the cutting. The
end of the cable on the drum shall be stapled to prevent loosening,
(viii)
The protective boards from the Aerial Bundled Cable drum shall not be removed
before the drum is set in alignment for pulling
(ix)
When moving the drum by rolling it on the ground always roll the drum in the
direction indicated by the arrow on the flange. When pulling the cable the
spinning direction must be opposite.
(x)
The drums shall not be stored on wet soil, sandy or humid places. Improve the
ground if necessary.
(xi)
The accessories shall be stored in good order to enable quick and easy
installation.
ERECTION OF AERIAL BUNDLED CABLES

Before starting the actual ABC line installation, the following shall be kept ready.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 1 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 3 - ERECTION OF AERIAL

BUNDLED CABLES
1. Route map, location for keeping the cable drums , tools etc. Approved by the
Project Engineer/EEPCO.
2. Permission from Municipal authorities for road digging etc taking support of
the Project Engineer,
3. Intimation and acknowledgement copy to the local traffic police regarding the
tentative dates of the cable laying work and traffic diversion timings required.
Before the work is started, the condition of all the required tools and equipment
shall be checked and that all necessary materials are at the work site.
When installing a cable across a road, warning signs should be put on the road.
Crossing protections should be made and traffic should be stopped/diverted on
the Road where the cable is pulled.
3.1
TOOLS
The tools used for the ABC line erection work, i.e. installation of Cross arms and
conductor stringing are mentioned below. The tools are in two parts, one which
consists of tools common for the whole group and one which consists of
personal tools.
3.1.1
Tools for the group:

(i)
Pulleys for straight line and for angles,
(ii)
Tackles,
(iii)
Come alongs for ABC and for stay wires,
(iv)
Swivels,
(v)
Winch,
(vi)
Cable drum stands,
(vii)
Compression tools with dies,
(viii)
Pulling ropes,
(ix)
Dynamometers,
(x)
Maintenance grounding equipment,
(xi)
Pulling socks,
(xii)
Wire cutters,
(xiii)
Levels,
(xiv)
Testing instruments like Meggar etc.
3.1.2
Individual tools:
(i)
Tool box,
(ii)
Torque wrench,
(iii)
Set of socket wrench,
(iv)
Fork and ring spanners,
(v)
Articulated spanners,
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 2 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
(vi)
Wire brush,
(vii)
Fork wrench,
(viii)
Wedges,
(ix)
Skinning knife
(x)
Joint compound
(xi)
Brace,
(xii)
Brace drill bits,
(xiii)
Pliers,
(xiv)
Safety belt,
(xv)
Safety helmet,
(xvi)
Climbing shoes,
(xvii)
Hammer.
3.2

BUNDLED CABLES
PULLING OF AB CABLE
The principle is to pull the Aerial Bundled Cable, under mechanical tension so
that contact with the ground or any other obstacle is avoided. The AB cable
should never be dragged on the ground. Normal care should be taken to assure a
smooth passage of the whole cable through the pulleys, especially on the first pole
and on angle poles. One worker should act as a brake-man at the cable drum so
that the cable is not loosened during pulling. One worker should follow the cable
going through the pulleys and stop the pulling e.g. with a walkie-talkie order if
anything is going wrong.
The important steps of pulling operation are described below.
(i)
Set up equipment on site,
(ii)
The cable drum is set in alignment with the line to be strung and fixed about 1520 m distance from the pole holding the first pulley. Open the cover of the drum.
Check that the insulation is not damaged,
(iii)
The pulling Winch is fixed to the last pole of the line to be pulled,
(iv)
The suspension clamp and pulley are hung to each suspension hook,
(v)
The double pulley is used on angle pole if the line deviates more than 60 degrees,
(vi)
Pull the pulling rope through all the pulleys,
(vii)
Install the pulling rope with the pulling sock to the cable. When using the swivel
between pulling sock and pulling rope, torsion stresses are avoided,
(viii)
The cable is pulled through the pulleys by using pulling winch Dolmar.
3.3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
The procedure for installation of the Aerial Bundled Cable and its attachment
hooks on the pole is described below ,
(i)
Not to leave sharp strands that may damage the cable later
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 3 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO

BUNDLED CABLES
(ii)
All joints should comply with electrical requirements. The joint compound shall
be applied sparingly but adequately.
(iii)
On connecting an Aerial Bundled Cable to another type of line or cable, the

Aerial Bundled Cable neutral messenger shall be joined to the neutral conductor
of the other line.
(iv)
It is recommended that the hook is attached at a minimum distance of 150 mm

from the top of the pole,
(v)
The hook shall be installed straight towards the line on terminal poles. If there are
angles on the line, the hook shall be attached on the inner angle side.
3.4
STRINGING OPERATION
The important steps of stringing operation are described below:
(i)
Fix a dead-end clamp to the messenger at the last pole of the line,
(ii)
Fix the heat shrinkable dead-end tubes to the conductors by using gas heating
equipment,
(iii)
Suspend the dead-end clamp on the hook at the last pole,
(iv)
Rewind the slack cable length back to the cable drum. First make the pre-stringing
of the cable near to the right tension or sag. The pre-stringing can be carried out
by man-power, pulling winch, Motor car etc.
(v)
Attach a come-along clamp to the neutral messenger by using separation wedges

at the first pole of the line,
(vi)
Tension the cable using a pull lift,
(vii)
Stop tensioning when the required sag is obtained ,
(viii)
Suspend the dead-end clamp on the hook and install it onto the messenger,
3.5
(ix)
Remove the come-along,
(x)
Bind the conductors together using nylon ties,
(xi)
Check the length of the cable needed and cut it at an appropriate length.
ATTACHMENT OF SUSPENSION CLAMPS
The procedure of attachment of suspension clamps is described below.
3.5.1
Straight line
Open the back support of the pulley from the hook. Separate the messenger wire
from the conductors using wedges. Lift the messenger to the open groove of the
suspension clamp and tighten the bolt using a 20 Nm torque. Remove the pulley
from the hook.
3.5.2
Angle pole
Attach a pull lift and come-alongs to the cable in each direction. Separate the
messenger wire from the phase conductors by using wedges. Tighten the pull-lift
until the cable comes close the suspension clamp. Lift the messenger wire, into
the open groove of the suspension clamp and remove the pulley from the hook.
Tighten the bolt in the suspension clamp by using 20 Nm torque. Remove the
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 4 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO

BUNDLED CABLES
pull-lifts and come-alongs. Bind the conductors together on both sides of the
suspension clamp by using nylon ties.
3.6
MAKING AN AB CABLE JOINT

The important steps in jointing Aerial Bundled Cable are listed below.
3.6.1
Standard
Jointing of AB Cable shall conform to the relevant standard.
3.6.2
Joining Messenger
Cut the neutral messenger about one meter from the end of the first Cable,
Push the ends of the messengers into the tension joint and pretension by pulling
the messengers to the opposite directions.
3.7
JOINING OF THE PHASE CONDUCTORS AND THE

STREET LIGHTING CONDUCTOR
(i)
Remove the insulation from the conductors at the length of the connector
without damaging the aluminium conductor,
(ii)
Brush the conductors with the steel wire brush and apply a thin film of jointing
compound over the conductor ends,
(iii)
Push the conductors into the grooves of the connector. Tighten the bolts with a
20 Nm torque using the articulated spanner holding fast with the fork spanner,
(iv)
Cut the necessary holes in the insulation covers for the conductors and street
lighting conductor together around the messenger using a few nylon ties,
(v)
Put the conductors into the connectors and tighten the bolts using the articulated
spanner by applying 20 Nm torque, holding fast with the fork spanner,
(vi)
Cut the necessary holes in the insulation covers for the conductors, using a knife
and attach the covers,
(vii)
Bind the conductors together using nylon ties.
3.7.2
Jointing the phase conductors with not-piercing connector

Measure and cut the phase conductors so that (i) there will be an overlap of about
50 mm of the two conductors of the same phase for the phase connector, and
(ii)a distance of about 200 mm between the different phase connectors.
The conductors with equal ridges are "of the same phase" and should be
connected together. For each conductor size the correct connector and connector
cover types should be used.
(i)
For normal connector:

Remove the insulation at the end of conductors for the length of the connector,
without breaking the aluminium conductor. Brush the conductors with the steel
wire brush and put on a thin film of joint compound. Lead the uninsulated
conductors into the grooves of the connector and tighten it (by a 20 Nm torque)
using the articulated spanner holding fast the connector. Cut necessary holes for
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 5 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 4 - SPAN LENGTHS AND

WORKING STRESS
the conductors in the covers, if necessary, and place the covers around the
connectors. Bind the phase conductors around the messenger using nylon ties.
(ii)
For Piercing connector

Lead the insulated conductors into the grooves of the connector and tighten it (by
20 Nm torque) using the articulated spanner holding fast the connector. Cut the
necessary holes for the conductors in the covers, if necessary, and place the covers
around the connectors. Bind the phase conductors around the messenger using
nylon ties.
3.7.3
Branching line
Install a hook on the branching pole and put the dead-end clamp on it. Cut off
about one meter of the neutral messenger of the branching cable. Fix the
messenger to the dead-end clamp. Cut off about 200 mm of one phase conductor
and about 400 mm of another phase conductor of the branching cable.
(i)
For normal connector:

Remove the insulation at the end of the conductors for the length of the
connector, without breaking the aluminium conductor. Remove the insulation for
the length of the connector from each phase conductor of the main line, at proper
position for connecting the corresponding phase conductor of the branching line
(check for similar identification ridges). Brush stripped areas of conductors and
apply a thin layer of grease. Fix the connectors to the main line conductors,
connect the conductors of the branching line, and add the covers in the same way
as when jointing conductors.
(ii)
For Piercing connector:

Fix the connectors to the main line conductors, connect the conductors of the
branching line, and add the covers in the same way as when jointing conductors.
4.
SPAN LENGTHS AND WORKING STRESS

The maximum span length allowed is 50m and maximum working stress in the
messenger permitted is 25 N / mm2.
4.1
CLEARANCES TO GROUND
Where the ABC is erected as an aerial system supported on poles the minimum
clearance to ground level shall be as given in Table 4.2.1.
Table 4.2.1
GROUND TYPE
MINIMUM CLEARANCE
Roadways
5.8m
Along the line of fences, boundary walls,

hedgerows and similar situations
4.0m
All other situations
5.2m
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 6 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 4 - SPAN LENGTHS AND

WORKING STRESS
Where the ABC is installed as an under eaves ( roof space) system attached to the
surface of buildings, the minimum clearances to ground level between buildings
shall be given in Table 4.2.2 .
Table 4.2.2
GROUND TYPE
MINIMUM CLEARANCE
Between domestic properties not

accessible to vehicles.
3.5m
It should be noted that the clearances given above are minimum design
clearances. When establishing actual clearances account should be taken of, the
use of the land, vegetation growth, the possibility of vehicular access under or
close to the line and future maintenance requirements of adjacent structures.
4.2
CLEARANCES TO BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES

The details of Clearances to buildings and structures are given in Table 4.3.1.
Table 4.3.1
4.3
The minimum vertical clearance to any

surface of a building or structure, on which a
Shall be
person may stand and which is accessible to
the public without access equipment
3.0m
The minimum horizontal clearance to any

surface described above,
Shall be
1.0m
(assumed to be in still
air)
The minimum horizontal and vertical

clearance to a building or structure not
normally accessible to the public to which
the cable system is not attached
Shall be
not less
than
500mm
under deflected cable
conditions
The horizontal and vertical clearance

between a cable system and any free
standing apparatus to which the cable is not
attached (e.g. street lighting columns, traffic
signs or Telecom supports etc.)
Shall be
not less
than
300mm
in the deflected
condition
RUNNING ABC THROUGH TREES

The use of the cable system through trees is permissible and can provide
considerable benefits when compared with open wire systems, while crossing
forest area or fruit gardens. The construction should take into account potential
dangers of abrasion and unauthorized access. As a guide all branches with a
diameter equal, or more, than the diameter of the ABC bundle if in contact should
be removed. If required, a tubular tree guard may be fitted to protect the ABC
bundle where the complete removal of the branch is not possible.
4.4
REPLACEMENT OF OPEN WIRE SYSTEMS WITH ABC

There are instance when ABC needs to be strung on the same poles as existing
open wire LV system as a temporary measure while replacing existing conductors.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 7 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 5 - PRE-COMMISSIONING
CHECKS AND TESTS
The following precautions shall be adhered to in all such cases, if supports are
designed to carry open conductor LV system alone.
(i)
The two systems must only be up together for a short period of time.
(ii)
Prior to work commencing, check all poles for decay (including 0.3m below
ground level).
(iii)
Strung the ABC on the opposite pole face at, or lower, than the level of the
Neutral conductor of the open wire system without infringing minimum ABC
ground clearances.
(iv)
Secure the ABC at all the terminal and suspension points and then make it live.
(v)
Transfer the services, one at a time, from the open wire to the ABC main.
(vi)
When all the services are transferred to the ABC, disconnect the open wire
conductors and remove from the supports.
5.
PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECKS AND TESTS

The tests and checks but not limited to those listed below shall be conducted
before commissioning.
6.
(i)
All cable, clamps fittings etc., used are as per the approved drawings /
specification
(ii)
Jointing of messenger wire and phase conductors is done as per the approved
method statement.
(iii)
Ground clearances are maintained as per Electricity Rules. (Minimum clearance to

ground is 5.8 m)
(iv)
Span lengths and working stresses are with in the limits mentioned in technical
standards.
EARTHING
Please refer to specification TS-IN-04 Installation of OHL
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 8 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
SP-IN-03
Underground Cable Installation
Rev -1- April 2013
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
Mar 2013
First Issue
Rev 1
25 April 2013
Additions - modifications
TS-IN-03 R1 Installation of Underground Cable 2013-04-28.docx

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: i , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
UNDERGROUND CABLE INSTALLATION
1.
SCOPE
2.
GENERAL
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
PAGE NO
1
1
1
SUPERVISION & COMPETENCE OF PERSONNEL

LOCAL ADMINISTRATION PERMIT
RISK OF FIRE
MATERIALS HANDLING
SAFETY
WORKING HOURS
TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
OBSTRUCTION
DAMAGES TO FENCES, WALLS, STREET SURFACES, KERB STONES
AND PROPERTIES
1
1
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
3.
4.
STORING AND HANDLING OF CABLES

CABLE TRENCHES
4
5
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
GENERAL
EXCAVATION
SHORING AND WATER - LOGGING
ROAD CROSSING
CABLE DUCTS FOR ROAD & RAIL CROSSING
BACKFILLING
CABLE AND CABLE ROUTE PROTECTION
TEMPORARY REINSTATEMENT OF SURFACES
ROADS CROSSING
JOINT HOLES
PRICING AND MEASUREMENT OF EXCAVATIONS
TIMBER LEFT AND BUILT IN
5.
PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN DURING CABLE LAYING 15
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
ADITIONAL PROCEEDURES FOR SINGLE CORE CABLES
PULLING FORCE ON CABLES USING WINCHES
CLEARANCES
15
16
17
17
6.
7.
CABLE LAYING
CABLE INSTALLATION FINISHING
17
20
7.1
7.2
7.3
CABLE ROUTE MARKERS

CABLE IDENTIFICATION TAGS
CABLE JOINT INDICATORS
20
21
21
8.
AFTER INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES
21

Rev -1- April 2013
5
5
8
8
9
10
12
13
13
14
14
15
EEPCO
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
GENERAL
CHECK LIST FOR LAYING CABLES
DOCUMENTATION DRAWINGS ROUTE PLAN
CABLE INSTALLATION RECORD
21
21
22
22
9.
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF CABLES
23
9.2
9.3
9.4
CHECKING OF THE CONTINUITY AND IDENTIFICATION OF THE

CORES
MEASURING OF IR VALUES
CONDUCTING HIGH VOLTAGE TEST
24
24
24
10.
FAULTS AND FAULT LOCATION
24
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
PROCESS TO DETERMINE CABLE FAULT LOCATION:

STAGE 1: DIAGNOSIS
STAGE 2: PRE CONDITIONING
STAGE 3: PRE-LOCATION
STAGE 4: PIN POINTING
24
24
25
25
26

Rev -1- April 2013
EEPCO
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
UNDERGROUND CABLE INSTALLATION

1.
SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements and procedures for the installation of
Underground Cables.
2.
GENERAL
2.1
SUPERVISION & COMPETENCE OF PERSONNEL

All work on site shall be supervised a sufficient number of representatives of the
Contractor who are fully experienced in work of the type covered by the
Specification.
The installation and handling of the cables shall be undertaken at all times by
adequate staff suitably trained and supplied with all the necessary plant, equipment
and tools.
It is a definite requirement that the contractor shall only employ jointing
personnel fully conversant with cable manufacturers recommendations for
joining and terminating cables.
2.2
LOCAL ADMINISTRATION PERMIT

The Contractor shall be responsible for informing the Police, Municipal
Authority and any other government/local administration dept. etc. of his
intention to commence excavation work of the project and for obtaining the
required permits and giving adequate notices. The Contractor shall apply 4 weeks
in advance for permits to carry out excavation work.
Prior to commencement of the Works, the Contractor shall submit to the
Employer, the clearances and permits secured from proper authorities giving
clearance to proceed with the Work. No work should be done by the Contractor
on the cable route without receipt of Employers approval.
Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to existing
services and electric cables, and he will be liable for any costs for repairing damage
caused in the execution of the contractual work and shall pay the damage,
penalties according to the local laws and regulations.
Unless otherwise agreed, provisions shall be made during excavation for
reasonable access of persons and vehicles to property or places adjacent to the
route. The provision shall be maintained until restoration has been fully
completed.
2.3

Wayleaves and access facilities subject to the requirements of landowners and
occupiers and subject to the provisions below will be provided by the Client to
enable the Contractor to carry out the erection of the Works but such facilities
will not include facilities for storing material. The necessary agreements for both
the removal of obstructions such as trees and pipes and for the removal or
guarding of telephone and power lines will be arranged by the Client.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 1 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 2 - GENERAL
The Contractor shall at his own expense do what is necessary to make every
access suitable for his use and shall take all reasonable precautions to avoid
damage to land, property, roads, crops, field drains, fences, walls, hedges, gates
and the like and shall ensure that the work is adequately supervised so that
damage is reduced to minimum.
The Contractor will be liable for all damage arising by or in consequence of the
works except damage to crops and shall pay compensation or make good at the
option of the Client. The Contractor shall dispose of all spoil and surplus materiel
after erection.
The Contractor shall at all times keep sites free from obstruction, waste material
and rubbish and shall remove from the sites at his own expense all surplus
materials and temporary works as soon as they are no longer required for the
erection for the Works. On completion of the Works the Contractor shall leave
the sites clean and in a workmanlike condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining agreed access routes, without
undue widening, in a usable condition for the duration of the Contract and the
way-leave grantor shall not be put to any inconvenience in gaining access to his
land or buildings and no unauthorised access route shall be taken by the
Contractor.
Adequate provision shall be made by the Contractor to prevent the straying of, or
damage to livestock during the execution of the Works and until the permanent
reinstatement of fences, walls, hedges, gates and the like is completed.
The Contractor shall be liable for any damage to or loss of livestock due, in the
opinion of the Engineer, to failure to comply with the above requirements.
By the date for access to the overhead line and underground cable routes stated
by the Contractor in his Master Programme, the Client shall (subject to the
Contractor being then ready to commence work) provide over the whole length
of the routes such right of access for the Contractors staff to carry out survey
work, investigation of the general foundation conditions, construction, testing and
commissioning of the required Works in accordance with the Specification.
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements (other than questions of
wayleaves and access) with the occupiers of the land but if any difficulty shall arise
the Contractor shall inform the Engineer thereof. The Engineer shall there upon
take such steps as may be necessary to resolve the difficulty.
The Contractor shall make any necessary arrangements and take any necessary
precautions where the routes cross roads, telecommunication lines or cables,
buildings, power lines or cables, orchards, gardens or other obstacles or ground
over which erection cannot be carried out in the normal manner.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary works to overcome the
obstacles and shall comply with all reasonable requirements of the Authorities
concerned.
2.4
RISK OF FIRE
All apparatus connections and cable installations shall be designed and installed to
minimise the risk of fire and any damage which may be caused in the event of fire.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 2 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 2 - GENERAL
Enclosed vertical runs of cables shall be provided with fire stops to limit the
spread of fire and shall be sealed to prevent chimney effects.
Wherever cables pass through floors, walls or other partitions a suitable method
of sealing shall be used. This sealing shall consist of one hour fire resisting
material, the whole being arranged to prevent the spread of fire, smoke and fumes
through each partition. Cable ways containing a large number of cables shall be
enclosed in one hour fireproof material. All large cable rooms, cable floors and
cable ways shall be divided by fire barriers which shall segregate cables as required
by the Engineer. Access shall be provided through fireproof doors.
2.5
MATERIALS HANDLING
It is the Contractors responsibility to take care of all kinds of dangerous materials
for the environment, contaminated water or oil products etc.
The material used belongs to the Employer and therefore he must be informed
and approval shall be obtained before such disposal.
If the contractor ignores this, he will pay the damages/ penalties according to the
local laws and regulations or in the way that is equivalent to damage of the
environment.
2.6
SAFETY
The Contractor is fully responsible for the safety of third person, installed material
etc. until the Employer fully takes over and a certificate is issued.
2.7
WORKING HOURS
Construction is normally to be carried out on ordinary days as agreed between
Employer and Contractor. (Daily time-period has to be agreed). However, the
Employer may call the contractor for twenty-four (24) hour service or for
weekends working, if they deem that necessary.
2.8
TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
The Contractor shall include provision for road signs, guards, fence, lighting, road
barriers, the stringing of danger tapes and the positioning of warning lamps
between sunset and sunrise. Flashing type warning lamps shall also be positioned
at strategic points in the construction areas to caution motor vehicle traffic. A
flagmen and watchmen may also be required. The measures shall be according to
the Employer and the local authorities requirements for the protection and safety
of all persons and adjacent properties.
2.9
OBSTRUCTION
When in the course of the Contract Works obstructions are encountered which
necessitate diversion of existing electric, water or sewage installations,
communication cables or other underground works, or alterations to buildings or
foundations or when conditions necessitate the adoption of a special form of
trench, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer, who will instruct the
Contractor in writing of the action necessary, to overcome the obstruction.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 3 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
2.10
SECTION 3 - STORING AND HANDLING OF

CABLES
DAMAGES TO FENCES, WALLS, STREET SURFACES,

KERB STONES AND PROPERTIES
Before the Contractor commences with any excavation work, he shall submit a
detailed list of all existing damages to fences, walls, street surfaces, kerb stones,
properties, etc. to the Engineer who will inspect and verify the list.
After the completion of all backfilling and compaction of cable trenches, the
installation Contractor may request an inspection to have all damages brought
about by his operations listed and verified by the Engineer.
The Installation Contractor shall then at his own, or his insurers cost, be
responsible for all such damages, except for damages so listed previously.
3.
STORING AND HANDLING OF CABLES

The following shall be observed in storing and handling of cables.
The cable drums shall be properly stored on a well-drained hard surface
preferably of concrete so that the drums do not penetrate the ground/soil causing
rot and damage to the cable drums and cable.
It should be ensured that both ends of the cable are properly sealed to prevent
ingress and absorption of moisture by the insulation.
Protection from rain and sun is important. Sufficient ventilation between cable
drums should be ensured during storage.
The drums shall always be rested on the flanges and not on the sides (Vertical
position).
The damaged battens of the drum etc. should be replaced if necessary.
When cable drums have to be moved over short distances, they should be rolled
in the direction of the arrow marked on the drum.
For transportation over long distances, the drum should be mounted on cable
drum wheels strong enough to, carry the weight of the drum and pulled by means
of ropes. Alternatively, they may be mounted on a trailer or other suitable
transport.
When unloading cable drums from the vehicle, a crane shall preferably be used.
Otherwise, the drum shall be rolled down carefully on a suitable ramp or rails
wherever necessary.
While removing cables, the drums shall be properly mounted on jacks or on a
cable wheel or any other suitable means making sure that the spindle jack etc. is
strong enough to take the weight of the drums.
While transferring the cable from one drum to another, the barrel of the new
drum shall have a diameter not less than the original drum.
Cable with kinks or with similar apparent defects shall not be reinstalled.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 4 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 4 - CABLE TRENCHES
4.
CABLE TRENCHES
4.1
GENERAL
4.1.1
Determination of cable route

(i)
The cable laying route should be decided keeping in view the immediate and
ultimate use of the cable as an integral part of the transmission and distribution
system,
(ii)
The side of the street which presents the least obstacles and the fewest roadway
crossings shall be chosen,
(iii)
Special attention should be paid to the load bearing capacity of the bridges and
culverts and other obstructions which fall en-route,
(iv)
If possible, cables should be laid along the foot path rather than the carriage way.
(v)
The route should be, as far as possible, away from parallel running gas, water
pipes and telephone/telecommunication cables.
(vi)
Suitable locations for cable joints and end terminations should be selected as
required.
The laying of the cables, pipes, etc. shall generally be performed according to the
drawings. However, when obstructions are encountered which necessitate
alterations or when conditions necessitate adoption of a special form of trench,
the Contractor shall immediately notify the Employer and propose a solution for
approval before the work proceeds. The cost for adoption of a special form of
trench and increase in the width of trench, if required to suit actual field
conditions and the required capacity of the cables should be undertaken at no cost
to the Employer.
The exact location of each trench and pit shall be as approved by the Employer
before beginning of the excavation work on the site.
The cables shall be laid along the routes and in the locations as finally approved.
The Employer shall have the right to alter the cable routes and locations, where
considered necessary.
4.2
EXCAVATION
Before opening a section of trench, the Contractor shall make sure that the line of
the trench is clear of underground obstructions, by taking out trial holes on the
line of the trench.
Trenches shall be kept as straight as possible and shall be excavated to approved
formations and dimensions.
All excavations may be carried out mechanically but the final shaping and
trimming of the soil close to other cables, pipes, foundations etc. shall be done by
hand-shovel if this is so required to achieve a suitable cable laying bed.
The trench shall be excavated in such a way that a free distance of min. 100 mm is
available between the outer cables or plastic pipes and the trench walls.
The edges of the trench shall be cleared to prevent stones and other debris from
falling into the trench and affecting the protection filling or damaging the cables.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 5 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to prevent damage to the road
or ground surface due to a slippage or breaking away from the walls of the trench.
If necessary the trench sides shall be close timbered and strutted to prevent
subsidence.
Where trenches pass from a foot path to a roadway or at other positions where a
change of level is necessary, the bottom of the trench shall rise and fall gradually.
In some areas, the existing level may be more or less than the value below the
surrounding level, etc. thus the Contractor shall backfill to stated levels of soil
upon the uppermost cable as a minimum in any case subject to the Employers
approval. The Contractor shall also ascertain the levels and related particulars.
In cases where the existing ground level is higher than the expected final ground
level, cables shall be laid to a depth as measured from the above-mentioned final
ground level.
Whenever trenches run parallel to existing services (such as water pipes, cables
etc.), the Contractor shall maintain a distance of at least 0.5 m between the
existing services, cables, etc. and the edge of the new trench .The Contractor shall
cross above/under existing services with utmost care and shall ensure that the
cables etc. are adequately protected. He shall obtain approval from the Employer
concerning the method and acceptable free distance of crossing existing services
in advance.
The Contractor is fully responsible for the protection of all cables, conduits,
pipes, ducts etc. that are existing close or crossing the trench being excavated.
Warning signs must be present until all excavation; construction, backfilling etc.
are done. Where there is necessary sturdy concrete or steel beam stoppers shall
be used to hinder vehicles to enter into the trench.
Warning signal lights and (or) powerful reflectors must be installed when
construction is carried out during night time.
At house entrances, shop entrance etc. excavated areas must be covered with steel
plates and secured to avoid accidents, of sufficient thickness to provide a
temporary path way.
The Contractor is fully responsible for the required covering materials and such
arrangements.
4.2.1
Trench dimensions and excavation depth

The minimum excavated depth of the cable trench shall be as indicated below.
Min Width for
1cct (mm)
Installation requirement
Depth (mm)
Low voltage cables
750
300
15 and 22 kV cables
900
500
33kV cables
1100
600
132kV cables (HV Cables)
1800
800
Cables at road crossings Minimum if less than 1000 to 1200

Rev -1- April 2013
600
Page: 6 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
Installation requirement
Depth (mm)
Min Width for

1cct (mm)
1000 to 1200
600
above
Cables at railway level crossings (measured
from bottom of sleepers to the top of pipe)
(minimum if less than above
If more than one circuit is required then the width shall be increased to allow
separation between circuits as stated below.
There must be a clearance from the cable (center) to the wall of about 150mm
4.2.2
Cable Spacing
Cables installed in the same trench shall be laid parallel to each other with the
following spacing between cables (LV; MV; HV):
LV: 2 cable diameters
MV: 300 mm minimum
HV: 500 mm minimum
Where MV and LV cables have to be installed in the same trench, the MV cable
shall be laid on the one side of the trench (away from the road and if no road
exists in the South- East side ) at the MV above and then covered with 300mm of
soil. The LV kV cable shall then be laid on the other side of the trench, i.e. not
above the MVV cable, and then completely backfilled.
Cables for telephones, communications systems and other low voltage systems
(less than 50V) shall be separated from power cables by at least 1m. All control or
pilot cables shall be laid at least 300mm from power cables.
Cables shall not be buried on top of each other unless layers are specified. The
minimum spacing between layers shall be 200mm.
4.2.3
Excavated Materials
All excavated materials which may be re-used later in the Works shall be
deposited and stored at places approved by the Employer so that these materials
cause as little damage and inconvenience as possible.
The materials excavated from each trench shall be placed so as to prevent
nuisance or damage to adjacent hedges, trees, ditches, drains, gateways and other
property or things. Excavated material shall be stacked so as to avoid undue
interference with traffic. Where, owing to traffic or for reasons of safety or other
considerations, this is not permissible the excavated material shall be removed
from the Site and returned for refilling the trench on completion of the laying.
Surplus material shall be disposed of by and at the cost of the Contractor, up to a
distance of 15 km from the Site.
In order to facilitate the re-use of excavated materials for road foundations and
surfacing, the excavated material shall be separated into hard road material, soil
and other materials.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 7 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
All excavations carried out in substations shall be executed in a manner which

provides for the separation and storage of the top surfaces and subsequent
reinstatement layer by layer to provide the same construction on completion
thereof as existed prior to commencement of excavation works.
In general he Contractor shall ensure that the excavations will not endanger
existing structures, roads, railways, other site constructions or other property.
4.2.4
Mechanical excavators
Power driven mechanical excavators may be used for trenching operations
provided that they are not used in close proximity to other plant, services or other
installation likely to be damaged by the use of such machinery.
The use of power driven mechanical excavators shall be subject to the approval of
the Local Authorities/The Project Manager. Should the excavator produce
trenches that exceed the required dimensions, payment based on volumetric
excavation rates will be calculated on the required dimensions only.
4.3
SHORING AND WATER - LOGGING

The Contractor shall provide shoring for use in locations where there is a danger
of the sides of the trench collapsing due to waterlogging or other ground
conditions.
The strength of shoring must be adequate for site conditions prevailing and the
shoring must be braced across the trench.
In general the contractor shall deal with and dispose of all water so as to prevent
any risk to the cables and other materials to be laid in the trenches being
detrimentally affected. He shall provide all pumps and appliances required and
shall carry out the necessary pumping and bailing.
Water or any other liquid removed shall be disposed of without any nuisance or
hazard.
4.4
ROAD CROSSING
Excavations across road shall be carried out with the minimum of inconvenience
to the public and the authorities.
Excavations across main roads where the width of the road between kerbs is 9
meters or more, shall be carried out in half road widths so that the flow of traffic
can be maintained.
Where tarred road surfaces are cut, such cuts shall be neat and straight and no
jagged edges shall be tolerated.
Road crossings shall be attempted to be at land plot boundary peg unless
otherwise shown.
The excavations shall be of such depth that the dimension from the top of pipe
ducts to the road surfaces shall not be less that the depth specified in this
document or as otherwise specified on detailed drawings.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of road warning signs as
specified in the relevant section in this document.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 8 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
4.5
CABLE DUCTS FOR ROAD & RAIL CROSSING

Where cables cross under roads, railway tracks, other service areas, etc. and where
cables enter building, the cables shall be installed in asbestos-cement pipes or
earthenware pipes, Ridgiduct type of pipes, or Polyethylene pipes shall also be
permitted. Pitch fibre and smooth PVC pipes are not acceptable because of the
adhesion that occurs after a period of time between the pipe and the sheathing or
outer serving of the cables.
Galvanised metallic pipes up to and including 75 mm dia. shall be supplied and
installed by the Contractor.
Pipes shall be flared at the two ends to avoid cable injury during pulling and
resting. If the pipes are or rigid construction special provisions shall be made to
ensure cables are not injured during pulling.
Sleeve pipes shall be joined in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Pipes shall cross roads and railway tracks at right angles.
Jointing of pipes shall be performed with special jointing pipes that give
mechanical robustness and a complete leakage tight joint.
Pipes shall have a minimum diameter of 100 mm and suitable for the drawing the
required cables. In any case the nominal inner-diameter of the pipe shall not be
less than 1.5 times the outer-diameter of the cable to be pulled into the pipe. For
three single-core cables in trefoil (or three empty optical cable pipes) the outerdiameter is counted as the diameter of the circumscribed circle.
The pipes shall extend at least 2 m beyond the tracks of a railway line or of the
outermost tracks where there is more than one line. In the case of roads, pipes
shall extend at least 1 m beyond the road edge or kerb on both sides of the road.
All pipes shall be graded at a minimum of 1% for water drainage.
Cable pipes shall be installed to the spacing to be agreed with the engineer.
The ends of all pipes shall be sealed with a non-hardening watertight compound
after the installation of cables.
The filling around the pipes shall be very well tamped down in order to avoid
future shrinking of the above road layers. The Contractor shall get the method of
back filling and tamping of the trench by the Employer. The protection filling
around the pipes shall be free from sharp stones or stones with a size larger than
12 mm.
4.5.1
Concreting of pipes
If the pipes require to be encased in concrete, the type of concrete shall be agreed
with the engineer. If there is no other pricing mechanism for the concrete, the

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 9 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
cost shall be deemed to be twice the purchase cost or market cost of ready-mix.
The cost shall be measured per cubic meter of concrete poured.
The cost of concrete installation shall include the steel mesh reinforcement that
may be required above and below the pipe encasing.
This provision is for intended mainly for road crossing where circumstances
dictate the need to protect the cables and provide the load bearing for the road.
4.5.2
Pipe filling after cable pulling

To ensure consistent cable rating after pulling the cables through the pipes they
are to be filled with a thermally stable material, (resistivity less than 1.5 km/W).
For instance bentonite or similar material with the Employers approval.
After complete filling, the ends of the pipes shall be sealed with an approved
method (for instance by polyurethane foam).
4.5.3
Spare pipes/ducts/sleeves
At road crossings when installing cables two spare sleeve shall be installed and
marked on the appropriate drawing.
All pipes intended for future use shall be clear inside and shall be sealed
appropriately to avoid materials and sediment to settle in.
Spare pipes shall be 150mm in diameter.
4.6
BACKFILLING
The Contractor shall not commence with the backfilling of trenches without prior
notification to the Project Manager so that the cable installation may be inspected.
Should the Contractor fail to give timely notification, the trenches shall be
reopened at the Contractors cost. Such an inspection will not be unreasonably
delayed.
The Contractor shall have allowed in his tender for the importation backfill
material if required.
The backfilling of the trench shall be carried out in maximum 200 mm layers,
which shall be well compacted and consolidated. Watering of the layers may be
necessary to achieve the best compactness.
The backfilling may consist of material from the excavation of the trench
consisting of clay, sand, silt and gravel fragments. The material shall not contain
any refuse, vegetation or organic material.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for ascertaining whether the soil is
chemically active and for taking special precautions to protect the cables against
chemical action and/or termite attack. The Contractor shall take precautions to
avoid electrolytic and/or electro-chemical action occurring in situations where the
cable and accessories are likely to be installed in close proximity to other dissimilar
metals in the presence of moisture.
4.6.1
Cable Bed (Protection Filling)

After the trench has been excavated to the necessary depth and before the cables
are laid, the bottom of the trench shall be lined with a protection filling of selected

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 10 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
riddled soil or sand or similar material having the required soil thermal resistivity
of maximum 1.5 km/W at a normal dried out condition. The filling shall be well
tamped down to a minimum thickness of 100 mm to form a proper bed for the
cables.
The Contractor shall measure and record the thermal resistivity of the backfilling
material after reinstatement every 500 meters and all efforts shall be made to
obtain uniform thermal resistivity all along the cable routes. Other ways to
guarantee the thermal resistivity may be adopted with the approval of the
Employer.
The cost for thermal resistivity tests is deemed to be included in the contract
price.
The protection filling shall be free from sharp stones or stones with a size larger
than 4 mm.
At places where there is a risk that the protection filling will pass through the
trench walls/bottom, special fibre-cloth or geo-textile filter shall be placed in the
trench to hinder the material migration and such contingency shall be deemed to
be included in the Contract.
Pulling of cables shall not commence until the Employer has inspected and
approved the depth of the trench and the bed of sand including its thickness.
4.6.2
Primary Covering (Protection Filling)

After the cables/pipes are laid, the first cover shall consist of a further layer of
protection filling having the required soil thermal resistivity of maximum 1.5
km/W. The filling shall cover the cables with a minimum thickness of 100 mm,
counted from the upper surface of the cables and after having been well tamped
down.
The protection filling shall be free from sharp stones or stones with a size larger
than 4 mm.
Until all the cables in the trench have been covered with their protection as
described below, no sharp tools such as spades, pick-axes or fencing stakes shall
be placed in such a position that they may fall into the trench.
If there is more than one horizontal layers of cables the above shall be repeated.
4.6.3
Backfilling above Protection filling

Following the laying of the protection filling as described above the trench may be
backfilled as follows.
The first 200 mm thick layer over the protective covering shall be free from sharp
stones or stones with a size larger than 20 mm. The sizes of stones in the rest of
the backfilling shall not exceed 100 mm and maximum 15 % of the material
volume shall consist of stones with a size between 50 and 100 mm.
If the excavation material is found to be unsuitable and does not fulfil the
requirements, the Contractor shall supply suitable backfill material. The cost of
the supply of suitable backfill shall be included in the contract price.
In the case of roadways or paved areas the excavations shall be consolidated to
the original density of the surrounding material and the surface finish reinstated.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 11 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
4.7
CABLE AND CABLE ROUTE PROTECTION

Installed cables shall be protected with either concrete slabs or synthetic cover to
provide protection to the cable after installation. The specifications of the
materials is as stated below
Directly centred over the second protecting filling layer, suitable protection shall
be placed as a mechanical protection.
4.7.1
Concrete protective slabs

Concrete protective slabs shall have the following dimensions:
Length
500 to 1000
mm
Width
350 mm
Thickness
50 mm
Concrete quality
20 MPa
The slabs shall be constructed of and each slab shall be reinforced with one
longitudinal and three transverse mild steel rod of minimum diameter 8 mm. The
slabs shall be manufactured in such a way that the slabs interlock with each other
thus avoiding shifting of the slabs after installation.
4.7.2
Synthetic Cable protection covers

Cable protection can also be provided with the use of suitable plastic protection
sheets placed above the cable as a mechanical protection.
The colour of the protection sheets shall be bright yellow and repeated along the
sheet the text "WARNING - ELECTRIC POWER CABLES" shall be printed in
black. The width of the sheets shall be min. 150 mm and the thickness min. 2,0
mm.
The sheets shall cover the full width of the installed cables, optical cable pipes etc.
plus min. 50 mm out on both sides. The Contractor shall in his bid indicate type,
material and design of the protection sheets.
4.7.3
Cable warning or marking tape

A continuous plastic warning tape shall be installed before the final top layer.
The plastic warning tape shall be installed with all cable routes (LV and MV) at an
average depth of about 300mm and generally between 200 above the protective
tiles and 200 from the road surface. Where a cable trenches exceeds width 600
mm multiple warning tapes shall be run in such a way that the space between
adjacent warning tapes does not exceed 300 mm.
The plastic cable warning tape shall consist of a strip of polyethylene of thickness
0,04 mm and width of at least 150 mm. The tape materials shall be durable and
not easily torn so that when excavators catch it, the tape will stretch but not snap
to make it visible to the excavator operator.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 12 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
The tape shall be Yellow colour with black colour warning letters. Warning signs
shall be printed at intervals of about 1m along its length. The sign shall consist of
a black-triangle and an electric flash symbol and the words "Danger, Electric
cable" or other appropriate sign approved by the Utility.
4.8
TEMPORARY REINSTATEMENT OF SURFACES

The surface of backfilled trenches shall be temporarily reinstated and maintained
by the Contractor in a thoroughly safe condition until complete consolidation of
the soil is achieved.
Where the responsible authority has a specification for temporary reinstatement
the Contractor shall comply with it to the approval of the authority.
Temporary reinstatement shall be maintained by the Contractor until
commencement of final reinstatement to ensure that the surface is always safe for
the passage of pedestrians and vehicular traffic. If the backfill, structures,
temporary surfacing or associated works settle before permanent reinstatement,
the Contractor shall attend to it.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of temporary protective
covers on the trenches where they cross access ways.
On completion, the surface shall be made good to match the surrounding area.
4.9
ROADS CROSSING
4.9.1
Road cuting & measurements

Where asphalted roads have to be cut and reinstated including curbs and
pavement on either side, the cost shall be quoted separately for road cutting and
reinstatement.
The measurement shall be in m2 of the surface to be cut and reinstated and shall
include the curb and the tiled or asphalted pavement.
The rest of trench opening and measurement shall be as above for soil or rock.
4.9.2
Boring - Trusting
Where required the contractor shall bore under roads to install cable sleeves for
pulling the required cables.
No work on headings, tunnels or thrust borings shall be undertaken without the
approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to
ascertain and record the position of all sewers, drains, pipes, structures and things,
on cross sectional drawings to be submitted for approval before work is
commenced.
If the thrust bore method is chosen (optional) a cross section drawing of the
road crossing trench shall be submitted with the Bid showing details of
configuration, type of layers, thickness of layers, pipe types etc. The current curing
capacity at the crossing shall not be lower than for the other parts of the land
route. Calculations and measures to obtain this shall be performed and included in
the scope of work by the Contractor.
Alternatively the contractor shall employ directional drilling for the installation of
cables. A lining shall be installed following the directional drilling.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 13 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
The boring shall be quoted per linear meter of road crossing and each sleeve,
including one meter on either side of the road.
The costs hall include all works from mobilisation to clearing the site to establish
the required holes. It shall also include the opening of any trench for the
installation of equipment. If this cost cannot be included in the linear meter
measurement the contractor shall introduce an additional cost item.
4.10
JOINT HOLES
Where cable joints are required to be made in the course of a cable run, a joint
hole shall be excavated of sufficient size to enable the cable jointer to work
efficiently and unimpeded. Where necessary joint holes shall be shuttered to
prevent subsidence and damage. During jointing, the joint holes shall be
adequately covered with tents or other waterproof sheeting suitably supported to
ensure suitable conditions and prevent as far as possible wind borne material
entering the joint.
The depth of the trench at the joint location shall be adjusted in such a manner
that the upper surface of the joints is buried to the same depth as the upper
surface of the cables.
The Contractor shall submit a dimensional drawing showing details of the jointing
area for the Employers approval before commencement of the work.
4.11
PRICING AND MEASUREMENT OF EXCAVATIONS

The tender prices for excavations shall include the following:-
a)
Route surveying and Marking / pegging
b)
Clearance of route of bushes, and other obstacles
c)
Excavations of cable trenches as stated below.
d)
Levelling of the bottom of trenches.
e)
Supply and laying of cable bedding of suitable sifted soil or sand.
f)
Supplying and covering the cables with a layer of sifted solid after the cables have
been laid and spaced and after the inspection and approval of the Engineer.
g)
Installation of cable protection and cable warning tape
h)
The backfilling and consolidation of trenches with soft soil.
i)
The removal of all surplus materials from the sites.
j)
Finishing and levelling of sites where excavations were done.
k)
Reinstatement of pavement or road surface.
4.11.2
Trench size for the purposes of measurement

The widths/sizes of cable trenches which will be used for the purpose of
measurements will be determined by the combination of the number of the cables
as specified in this document. For example for laying single circuit 15kV or 22kV
cable the trench size shall be considered as a nominal 500mm wide and 900mm
deep. For two 15-22kV cable circuits it shall be considered as 600mm wide (
300mm between cables and 150 + 150=300mm between cables and trench wall.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 14 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 5 - PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN

DURING CABLE LAYING
The standard trench width shall include the extra width required for the cable
joints / terminations.
4.11.3
Excavations in Soft Materials

Excavations which can, in the opinion of the Engineer, be carried out by pick and
shovel or a machine shall be considered as excavations in soft material. In case of
dispute the classification definition for soft excavations and intermediate
excavations as set in SABS 1200 DA-1982 or as revised, are combined in this
specification document as excavations in soft materials.
The cost of excavation shall be included as the standard cost for the cable trench
size specified in the Bill of quantities and shall be measured in linear meters.
This shall include oversize trench excavations and covering for cable jointing and
terminations.
The contractor shall ascertain if the material can be kept on the side of the
excavation or shall be removed and disposed properly at agreed sites.
4.11.4
Hard Rock Excavations

Excavations in formations that require blasting or wedging and splitting, will be
classified as hard rock excavations.
Excavations in material containing by volume more than 40% of rock that needs
to be blasted or wedged shall be considered in the measurement as Hard rock
excavation.
The rates shall include the blasting, loading and the removal of rock from site and
leaving a suitable bed to accept the cable bedding material. No rocks shall
protrude above the cable bed.
4.12
TIMBER LEFT AND BUILT IN

Where required for the security of the Works of adjacent buildings or structures,
timber installed for the support of trenches, joint bays, headings, tunnels etc., shall
not be withdrawn but shall be left in position. All timber left in on the
instructions of the Engineer shall be paid for in accordance with the quoted rates
or at rates to be agreed. In any case the cost of timber shall reflect current
replacement costs plus 50% mark up of average market price.
5.
PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN DURING CABLE

LAYING
5.1
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
The general precautions to be observed while drawing and laying cables are listed
below.
1) Examine the cable for exterior damage if any, after the drum planks have been
removed,
2) Cable should not be pulled across hard and sharp objects to avoid damage to the
protective covering and the insulation of the cable,
3) Cable should not be bent in an inadmissible way,

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 15 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 5 - PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN

DURING CABLE LAYING
4) Cable should always be pulled off the top of the drum by placing, the drum in
such a way that the painted arrow points to the opposite direction of the pulling,
5) Cable drum shall be jacked up with a drum axle to such a height that the plank
needed for braking is not jammed. Heavy drums should be jacked up with
hydraulic drum pedestals.
6) When pulling the cable, the drum shall be turned by hand in order to avoid
excessive tensional stress, which may damage the cables, particularly smaller unarmoured cables.
7) A drum brake is necessary to avoid further rolling and consequent buckling of the
cable in the event of a sudden stop. A simple plank can serve as drum brake.
8) The kinks (nooses) are particularly dangerous and should be avoided.
9) Cables should be warmed before laying out, if the temperatures are below 3C;
otherwise the bending would damage the insulation and protective coverings of
the cables. The cable laying must be carried out swiftly, so that the cable does not
cool down too much.
10) Warming of cables may be achieved by storing the cables for adequately longer
period (not less than 24 hours) in a heated building or in a tent with hot air
beaters. However, the cables should be heated to a minimum of about 10C to
facilitate easy laying,
11) The leading end of the cable is untied from the cable drum and a cable stocking
placed over it and secured firmly. A rope is attached to the cable stocking pulling
eye. No pull should be exerted on the end of the cable.
12) Identification strips/tags of metal or plastics should be attached to the cables,
particularly if several are laid in parallel, 8 to 10 m apart. Identification tags should
also be attached at every entry point into the buildings and at the cable end
termination.
5.2
ADITIONAL PROCEEDURES FOR SINGLE CORE CABLES

Additional guidelines in respect of single core cable laying are,
1) If single core cables are laid flat the spacing between three cables laid in one plane
should not be less than the cable diameter. When the cables are arranged on a
rack in this way, each one should be secured either to the base or to the others by
nonmagnetic, non-corrosive clamps every 0.5 to 0.8m.
2) When the cable run is for several kilometres, the cables should be transposed at
one-third and at two-thirds of the total length to provide balance impedance.
3) Cables can also be laid in trefoil arrangement in ducts or on racks, which
improves current distribution and reduces sheath losses. Non-magnetic clamps
may not be essential and it is sufficient to bind the cable with steel, copper,
aluminium or plastics tapes every 0.5 to 0.6 meters,
4) The cables do not have to be bound /clamped when laid in ground. Single-core
cables should not be installed individually in protective steel ducts; instead, all
three should be laid together in one single duct.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 16 , 26-Apr-13
SECTION 6 - CABLE LAYING
EEPCO
5) If several single-core cables are laid per phase, these should be arranged to ensure
balanced current distribution.
5.3
PULLING FORCE ON CABLES USING WINCHES

The pulling force to be used while pulling cables using a Winch shall be as given
below.
Force as % age of
Cable Weight
Type of installation
In trenches without large bends
15-20 %
In trenches with 1 or 2 bends of 90 each
20-40 %
In trenches with 3 bends of 90 each(assuming

the use of easy-running support and corner
rollers)
50-60 %
In ducts with bends totalling 360
5.4
Up to 100 %
CLEARANCES
The desired minimum clearance to be maintained between other lines is given
below.
Power cable to other cables
Minimum Clearance in meters.
Power cable to control cables
0.2 m
Power cable to communication cable
0.3 m
Power cable to gas/water main
0.3 m
Note: Larger clearances results in better current carrying capacity.

Even though the standard allows a minimum clearance of 0.2 metres between
power cable and control cable, it is always advisable to segregate power cables
from control cable to avoid untoward incidence of inductive influence of power
cables on sensitive control cables.
6.
CABLE LAYING
Cables shall be laid directly from the drums into the trenches and special rollers
placed at close intervals shall be employed for supporting the cables while pulling
and laying them. Rollers used during the laying of cables shall have no sharp
projecting parts which may damage the cables.
Cable rollers shall be used as far as possible to run out cables. Rollers shall be
spaced so that the length of cable in the trench will be totally suspended during
the laying operation and sufficiently close to prevent undue sagging and the cable
from touching the ground. Rollers shall also be placed in the trench in such a
manner that the they will not readily capsize. Cables rollers shall have no shape
projecting parts liable to damage the cables.
Alternatively cables may be laid off a lorry loaded with suitable drum unwinding
facilities but never laid off the side of the drum.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 17 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
Bending radius during laying and installation shall be as large as possible, and the
minimum shall be 15 x D along the route, and 10 x D adjacent to joints and
terminations (D being the overall diameter of the cable).
Instructions received from the cable manufacturer shall be followed during the
cable laying and installation.
Covering of cables/pipes with protection filling shall not commence until the
Employer has inspected and approved the laying and placement of cables, pipes
etc. in the trench.
The position of all the cables/pipes along the trench shall also be performed by
the Contractor with adequate equipment and with an agreed tolerance before
covering. The cost thereof shall be deemed to be included in the contract price.
6.1.1
Cable scraping and Sealing of Cable ends

The ends of cables which are cut shall immediately be sealed by means of suitable
end caps, should there be a delay before jointing is to take place.
Approved sealing caps of the correct size shall be supplied for the sealing of all
spare lengths of cable exceeding 10 m in length to enable them to be properly
stored for future maintenance purposes. Cable lengths less than 10 metres will be
treated as scrap.
The Contractor shall be responsible for immediate sealing of such cut lengths,
winding of the spare cable on a suitable drum and for the delivery to the
Employer's store or as directed by the Employer. The cost thereof shall be
deemed to be included in the contract price.
The sealing of cable ends by means of rubber or bitumised tapes shall not be
allowed.
Heat shrink caps manufactured by Raychem or similar may be used provided the
seal is correctly applied.
Where cable ends were left open for 24 hours or more, the cable ends shall be
tested for moisture ingress.
6.1.2
Fiber Optic cable installation

If fibre optic cable installation is required then a PVC or Polyethylene pipe shall
be installed together with the cable installation. The pipe size shall be not less than
32mm, and the walls shall be of suitable size to avoid pipe collapsing during soil
compaction.
The fibre optic cables to be pulled into the plastic optical cable-pipes later on may
be jointed at regular intervals in special jointing boxes of a sturdy concrete design
with steel lids. At some locations also pulling boxes of similar design may be
necessary to facilitate the pulling of the cables into the pipes.
The empty pipes for optical cables placed in parallel with the power cables in the
trenches shall be pulled into and terminated in these boxes.
The Bidder shall in his bid submit preliminary drawings showing the design of the
boxes, how to place these boxes close beside the trenches, depth, protection etc.
bearing in mind all the conditions that apply at site (heavy traffic, narrow routes
etc.).

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 18 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
6.1.3
Jointing
Joints in cable runs will not be allowed unless specified in the Detail Technical
Specification or authorised by the Project Manager.
Jointing shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions and by personnel competent in jointing the types of cables used.
During outdoor jointing operations, the joint bays shall be adequate covered by
tents of waterproof material suitably supported. Where necessary a trench shall be
excavated around the bay to prevent the ingress of moisture. The sides of the hole
shall be draped with small tarpaulin or plastic sheeting to prevent loose earth from
falling in during jointing operations.
The joint shall not impair the anti-electrolysis characteristics of the cable.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager in time, of the day on which
jointing is to be carried out in order than an inspection may be arranged if so
required. Any cable joint not inspected by the Project Manager because of
insufficient notice being given, shall be opened for inspection and redone at the
discretion of the Project Manager at the cost of the contractor.
Joints shall be fully water and air tight and shall be free of voids and air pockets.
The crossing of cores in joints will not be permitted under any circumstances.
Where cold pouring resin compound is used the manufacturers mixing and
pouring instructions shall be strictly adhered to when filling joint sleeves.
Care shall be taken to ensure that jointing compounds, resins etc., are in a
satisfactory state after storage and in a suitable condition for achieving a reliable
joint.
The Contractor shall ensure the correctness of continuity throughout the cable
lengths to achieve correct identification of all terminations.
The joints may be placed directly in the soil and completely surrounded by the
protection filling.
At the joint bays the joints shall be staggered over the length to minimize the
width of the trench.
A record shall be kept of all joints made. This record shall include the names of
the jointer and his mate, the cable drum number(s), the date of making, the date
of testing and weather conditions prevailing and the particular events that have
happened during installation.
6.1.4
Terminations
The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the termination into sealing ends
or end boxes of all cables erected under this contract. Cable sealing and jointing
shall be in accordance with the best current practices and of first-class
workmanship.
A record shall be kept of all terminations made. This record shall include the
names of the jointer and his mate, the cable drum number(s), the date of making,
the date of testing and weather conditions prevailing and the particular events that
have happened during installation.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 19 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 7 - CABLE INSTALLATION

FINISHING
All power cables to be supplied shall be connected to the relevant station

equipment and overhead lines in an approved manner.
Where cables terminate on overhead line poles, the Contractor shall provide
suitable sealing end supports with cable supporting steelwork attached to the pole
and comprising backboard, runners, galvanised sheet steel cover of not less than 3
mm thickness and all incidental items to provide secure protection for the cables.
Cable guards shall extend from 0.35 m below ground level to 2.5 m above ground
level. Adequate ventilation shall be provided for the cables.
Galvanised sheet steel guards shall be provided to protect cables exposed to
mechanical damage or rays of the sun.
The arrangement of the terminations, the supporting structures, including the
cable fastening, earthing of cable screen wires etc. shall be subject to the approval
of the Employer and shall be included in the contract price.
6.1.5
Cables supported on brackets/ladders etc.

The Contractor shall supply all brackets, ladders, racks, trays and supporting steel
work for the cables supplied and installed under this contract.
All cables shall be run with particular regard to neatness of appearance. Multiple
runs shall be marshalled so that cables entering or leaving the run do so in an
orderly and logical manner.
Except otherwise accepted, the power cables shall be placed on separate
brackets/cable ladders completely separated from other power cable groups. No
cable shall be laid on the floor.
Cable brackets/ladders arranged one above the other shall be positioned at least
0.3 m apart if not otherwise agreed.
The spacing of cable- supporting steel work along the cable circuit shall be to the
approval of the Employer.
Non-magnetic clamps must be used to brace the cables against static mechanical
forces and dynamic impulse forces during short-circuit at the ends of cable circuit
or other particular places.
Wherever cables and accessories can be exposed to mechanical damage (for
instance along poles), shields/covers of approved material and design shall be
installed by the contractor.
For the cable basement of substations the Contractor shall prepare the
arrangement and layout for all cables including all future cables in order that
crossings are avoided and sufficient space for future connections is provided. This
work shall be co-ordinated with the relevant substation contractors and the design
shall be subject to the approval of the Employer.
7.
CABLE INSTALLATION FINISHING
7.1
CABLE ROUTE MARKERS

Sturdy concrete cable markers of an approved type shall be provided along each
route of buried cables. The markers shall be erected after the final reinstatement

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 20 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 8 - AFTER INSTALLATION

ACTIVITIES
has been carried out and should be supplied with a stainless steel plate with
relevant information about the buried cables (proposal to be submitted to the
Employer).
Markers shall be installed at all joint positions, at all places where the route
changes the direction, and on straight routes at distances not exceeding 25 meters
in the city area and 50 meters in the countryside.
The Engineer shall approve the location of the markers.
The cost of providing and installing markers shall be deemed to be included in the
contract price.
7.2
CABLE IDENTIFICATION TAGS

After laying the cable in the trench and before closing the trench the cable
identification shall be provided on the cable with bright yellow coloured suitable
plastic tape min. 125 mm wide and min. 0.10 mm thick laid continuously, 200 mm
below the final surface level of the backfilling and before eventual road covering
layers to facilitate identification of the cable at a later date for maintenance. The
tapes shall be laid with max. 125 mm space and they shall together cover the
entire trench width.
The tape shall be continuous and indelible marked in English block lettering
(black letters) with the words "WARNING - ELECTRIC POWER CABLES":
The Contractor shall in his bid indicate type, material and design of the tape and
shall submit samples of the tape to the Employer for approval prior to purchase.
7.3
CABLE JOINT INDICATORS

Indicators similar to the route indicators are provided at all the straight through
joint locations with details above the ground level to identify the locations for easy
maintenance.
8.
AFTER INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES
8.1
GENERAL
The following five activities have to be undertaken to complete laying /
installation of cable.
(i)
Check List after laying
(ii)
Cable route indicators
(iii)
Cable Identification Tags
(iv)
Cable joint Indicators
(v)
Documentation Drawings
(vi)
Installation Plan
8.2
CHECK LIST FOR LAYING CABLES

As part of the cable laying, the following checks have to be followed.
(i)
Check again to see that all the cable ends are undamaged and sealed.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 21 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
8.3
SECTION 8 - AFTER INSTALLATION

ACTIVITIES
(ii)
If trench is partially filled with water, cable ends should be kept clear off water as
far as possible.
(iii)
If cable has to be cut, both the cable ends should be resealed immediately Lead
cap for paper cable and plastic cap or Heat Shrinkable cap for PVC, XLPE cable
should be used.
(iv)
Cable ends should overlap at the joint box point by at least half the length of
latter.
(v)
The ends may be looped to provide extra lengths in case of extruded dielectric
cables.
(vi)
Each cable length should be aligned immediately after it is laid, starting from one
end. To enable the cable to be laid on the inner or outer side of the trench, a
certain amount of slack is provided all along the cable by raising each one to
about the top edge of the trench every 20 to 30m from the beginning.
(vii)
When aligning the cable, it should be ensured that there is no external damage.
(viii)
The tensile forces should be continuously checked by means of a pulling rope

meter or dynamometer while pulling the cable.
(ix)
The duct should be cleaned before pulling the cable through it!
(x)
Long steel or plastic duct sections should be checked with a gauge and coated on
the inside with lubricant (for plastic and concrete ducts, boiled-down soap with a
low alkali content: for steel ducts, grease: and for PVC cables graphite powder can
be used as a lubricant).
DOCUMENTATION DRAWINGS ROUTE PLAN

It is very essential to prepare the As laid drawings (Documentation drawings) as
per the actual laying indicating all the particulars such as loops, landmarks, joint
locations, availability of other utilities adjacent to the cable etc., drum wise which
will help at the time of location of cable faults and also for maintenance.
Before the trench is filled in, all joints and cable positions should be carefully
plotted by draughtsman.
The cable route shall follow the standard cable route drawing requirements
according to international practices. This should show as a minimum
Depth of cable
Position of cable from reference points, such as distance from road centre,
fences, buildings
Cable joints positions
At reasonable intervals of straight lines, at corners and change of direction
All drawings shall be produced in electronic form preferably in AutoCAD with a

suitable layering.
8.4
CABLE INSTALLATION RECORD

On completion of laying, terminating and jointing of the cables, a plan should be
prepared, which should contain the following details of the installation.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 22 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 9 - TESTING AND

COMMISSIONING OF CABLES
(i)
Type of cables, cross-section area, rated voltage. Details of construction, cable

number and drum number.
(ii)
Name of the manufacturer of the cable and jointing kits.
(iii)
Purchase Order No. and date.
(iv)
Year and month of laying cable and jointing schedule of starting and completion
dates).
(v)
Soil resistivity test results,
(vi)
Actual length between joint-to-joint or ends,
(vii)
Profile drawings of Location of cables and joints (joint bay) in relation to certain
fixed reference points, for example, buildings, hydrant, boundary stones, etc.
(viii)
Name of the jointer who carried the jointing work.
(ix)
Date of making joint; and completing the joint.
(x)
Results of original electrical measurements and testing on cable installation. All

subsequent changes in the cable plan should also be entered.
9.
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF CABLES

Before any of the Contract Works are made alive the Contractor shall satisfy the
Engineer that any connections between the Contractors Works and other plant or
apparatus are correct.
The Contractor shall make the tests required to show that the Contract Works
comply with the Specification and with the appropriate Schedules. The tests shall
be made at the Contractors expense.
No acceptance of test results of plant or material by the Engineer shall relieve the
Contractor of his Contractual responsibility. The Contractor shall also be
responsible for proper carrying out any work by a Sub-Contractor to the same
extent as if the work, plant or materials were carried out or supplied by the
Contractor himself.
If further tests are necessary, due to the Contract Works and/or component
materials not complying with this Specification, the Contractor shall pay all
additional costs which may be incurred in re-testing.
Each cable shall be tested after installation in accordance to IEC 502 (up to 1 kV)
and IEC811/ (up to 33kV) as well as the requirements of the Local and Supply
Authorities.
0.4 kV cables shall be tested by means of a suitable meter at 1 kV and the
insulation resistance shall be tabulated and certified.
The following are the pre-commissioning checks to be made:
(i)
Checking of the continuity and identification of the cores
(ii)
Measuring of IR values
(iii)
Conducting High Voltage Test

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 23 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
9.2
SECTION 10 - FAULTS AND FAULT

LOCATION
CHECKING OF THE CONTINUITY AND IDENTIFICATION

OF THE CORES
The phase and the earth of the cable is shorted at one end and at other end, the
cable is megered by using suitable capacity insulation tester, From the values, the
core continuity and core identification can be done.
9.3
MEASURING OF IR VALUES
IR values of all the three cores i.e., R, Y, B with reference to earth and other
phases are to be measured. If the values are quite reasonable and satisfactory, the
cable is healthy.
9.4
CONDUCTING HIGH VOLTAGE TEST

HV test is conducted on the cable by applying DC High Voltage 1.5 times the
cable rated voltage between each core and earth for 5 minutes, measuring the
leakage current every minute; if the cable stands for this high voltage with
minimum leakage current of the order of 0.1 mA the cable is certified to be
healthy and the same can be commissioned. If the cable does not satisfy the above
said conditions, there may be some fault in the cable and the same is to be
identified and rectified before commissioning.
10.
FAULTS AND FAULT LOCATION

The cables may become faulty due to any of the following reasons:
a)
Manufacturing defect
b)
Improper storing and handling
c)
Improper laying
d)
Improper Jointing and termination
e)
Improper Loading
f)
External damages caused
10.2
PROCESS TO DETERMINE CABLE FAULT LOCATION:

Since, the cable is laid in the ground, patrolling of the cable route may give some
information, if the cable is physically tampered by other agencies. Tests are to be
carried out to locate the faults. The following are the four stages to pin point the
location of the fault.
(i)
Diagnosis
(ii)
Pre-Location
(iii)
Pre-conditioning
(iv)
Pin Pointing
10.3
STAGE 1: DIAGNOSIS
The objective of this stage is to ascertain the exact condition of the cable i.e.,
whether the cable is faulty or not. For this, purpose the following tests are
conducted

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 24 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO

LOCATION
a)
Measurement of Insulation resistance of cable between the (i) Core and earth (ii)
Core to Core with a suitable insulation tester / meger. If the IR values measured
are equal and reasonable the cable may not be faulty.
b)
High voltage test is carried out and if the cable stands for the test with the
minimum leakage current i.e., 0.1mA to 0.4mA, the cable is certified to be healthy
and can be taken back into service. If the values are not equal, the particular core
in which the value is less can be identified.
c)
From this, the faulty core and the nature of fault resistance can be arrived at to
proceed to the other stages of fault location.
From the IR values, the nature of fault i.e., (a) High Resistance (b) Low Resistance
and (c) open circuit can be identified. If the resistance of the fault is low, the test
can be directly conducted in the PRE LOCATION stage. If the resistance is high,
it has to go through the second stage Le, PRE-CONDITIONING.
10.4
STAGE 2: PRE CONDITIONING

The objective of this stage of to prepare the cable for next Stage i.e., Pre
Location the fault as Pre-location stage tests will not function effectively, if
fault resistance is high. Therefore, the high resistance of the fault is burnt with
the help of fault burner in this stage. The high voltage to the extent permitted
by the resistance is applied and allowed to continue with that high voltage. Due to
the above application, there will be sparking over at the high resistance location
and after some time the resistance substantially becomes lowest. The high voltage
applied starts reducing with the consequent rise in leakage current. The cable is
now ready to conduct the test in Pre-Location stage to arrive at the fault
distance theoretically.
10.5
STAGE 3: PRE-LOCATION
In this stage the cable is actually connected to the testing circuit and the fault
distance is arrived at from the testing end by Impulse Current equipment Method
described below.
Impulse Current Equipment Method works on the principle of wave propagation
theory of travelling waves. The test set-up is as below:
This equipment operates at 230 volts, single-phase supply. There is a step up
transformer, which steps up from 230 volts to 7.5kV or 15kV. The stepped up
voltage is converted into DC by the rectifier R in the circuit. This voltage is
applied across the capacitor and this capacitor gets charged and energy to the
extent of CV2 is stored in the capacitor. This energy is discharged into the
faulty cable through the test leads by closing the switch S, which travels along the
faulty core. When the energy reaches the low resistance faulty point, it creates a
spark and travels further. The spark created generates a travelling wave, which
travels back to the instrument through the earth of the cable. This wave has both
the current and voltage transients. The current transients are picked up by LCS
(Linear Coupler Selector) and feed it into the ICE (Impulse Current Equipment),
which is a microprocessor based analyser, which analyses the wave and display the
wave in the OSC (Oscilloscope). This wave is studied and the time of travel of
wave from the fault to the instrument and back to fault is measured by sending a
signal along the wave, (say T Sec). Once the time of travel is measured, the same

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 25 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO

LOCATION
is converted into distance by multiplying the time with the velocity of the
propagation VP/2 (mts/ Sec). The velocity of propagation depends on the type
of dielectric (insulating material) used for the cable. The distance of the fault
measured in meters is
Df
= T ( Sec) x Vp/2 (m/ Sec).
Thus, from this method the fault distance in mts is calculated.
10.6
STAGE 4: PIN POINTING

After arriving at the fault distance from the above method, the exact location of
the fault is pin pointed by using portable accessory equipment called
Seismophone. This is a pick up equipment and consists of ground microphone.
This microphone has two sensors, one for sensing the magnetic field and the
other for sensing acoustic disturbance created by the spark in the ground. The
spark at the faulty location creates disturbance of the ground on either side of the
fault, maximum at the exact location and minimum on either side up to a small
distance. The principle of pinpointing is to pick up the signals generated by the
magnetic field and the acoustic disturbance and match both the signals to arrive at
the point of fault.
The important steps of the process of pin pointing cable fault are described
below.
(i)
After obtaining the distance of fault in the previous methods, the documentation
drawings (as laid drawings) are verified and the approximate physical location of
the fault is arrived at.
(ii)
To pick up the signal generated at the fault (both magnetic and acoustic) the
signals are to be made available continuously. This is achieved by connecting a
timer in the circuit and the timings are set such that at the set time interval there
will be charging and discharging of the capacitor and the energy stored will be
sent into the faulty core creating sparking over subsequently.
b)
The seismophone as described above is taken to the physical location arrived at

with the help of documentation drawings and the ground microphone is placed at
intervals to pick up the signals. At the location where the effect of acoustic
disturbance is not there, only the magnetic sensor picks up signals and is indicated
in the amplifying unit. This shows that the seismophone is exactly on the cable. If
the seismophone is not on the cable, the magnetic signals cannot be picked up
and has to be moved on to the correct route of the cable.
(i)
When the ground microphone of the seismophone is kept in the area of the
acoustic disturbance near the fault, both the acoustic and magnetic sensors start
sensing the respective signals and indicate simultaneous movements in the
amplifying unit. This confirms to the testing engineer that the fault location is
being approached. The ground microphone is shifted at subsequent intervals
towards the fault, the effect of acoustic disturbance will increase and the point at
which both the indicators move simultaneously with maximum indications is
confirmed as the exact point of fault and this is called pinpointing of fault. On
final confirmation of the fault, the instrument is kept off.
(ii)
The nature of the fault is identified on exposure of the trench and necessary
rectification of the cable is done to restore the supply.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 26 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
10.6.2

LOCATION
Permanent reinstatement
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for obtaining the Standard
and/or specification for permanent reinstatement from the responsible authority.
The cables are to be partly buried within streets and some of them consist of a
concrete base covered by asphalt. This concrete base has to be cut or broken and
may be used for back-filling or original state is reinstated by a method approved
by the responsible authority.
Stone and pre-cast concrete paving kerbs, channels etc. shall also be finally
reinstated by the Contractor.
All costs for reinstatement shall be included in the contract price.
10.6.3
Approval
Before finally leaving the site, the Contractor shall obtain clearance from the
concerned local authority relieving the contractor of his responsibility of
permanent reinstatement, and all costs incurred shall be deemed to have been
included in the Contract price.
The whole of the site and any other areas disturbed by the Works shall be
reinstated to equal the conditions existing prior to the commencement of the
Works and shall be left clean and tidy.

Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 27 , 26-Apr-13
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-MA-02
Earthing Materials
Rev -0- May 2013
SPECIFICATION TS-MA-02
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
1 May 2013
First Issue
TS-MA-02 Earthing materials.docx
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: i , 1-May-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
SYSTEM PARAMETERS AND SERVICE CONDITIONS
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT
4.
4.1
TYPE TESTS
5.
DESIGN
5.1
5.2
EARTH RODS
EARTHING ACCESSORIES
2
2
6.
7.
PACKING AND MARKING

SCHEDULE FOR EARTHING MATERIALS
3
5
7.1
7.2

5
6
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: ii , 1-May-13
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO
EARTHING MATERIALS
1.
SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, supply, delivery and
performance requirements of earthing materials.
2.
SYSTEM PARAMETERS AND SERVICE

CONDITIONS
See specification TS-GN-01 EEPCO system & Environmental data.
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
standards and/ or other recognised international standards. In particular,
Specification /
Standard Number
Title
IEC-60364
Electrical installation of buildings ( Earthing

arrangements and protective conductors.
IEC 60228
ANSI C114.1
Recommended practice for earthing of industrial

and commercial power systems
BS 7884
Copper and copper cadmium conductors for

overhead Electric traction and power transmission
systems
BS6485
PVC covered conductors for overhead power lines
BS EN 10137
Weldable steels
See spec. No. TS-GN-01 shall apply
3.1
CONFLICT
See Specification TS-GN-02
4.

See Specification TS-GN-02.
4.1
TYPE TESTS
In addition to the tests as per the standards mentioned, the following tests shall be
conducted.
a)
Jacket Adherence Test

A 450mm length of rod cut at one end to a 45 degree point shall be driven
between two steel clamping plates or the jaws of a vice set 1mm less than the
diameter of the rod so as to expose the bond between the jacket and the rod.
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: 1 , 1-May-13
SECTION 5 - DESIGN
EEPCO
Peeling of the jacket by the steel plates or the jaws of the vice is acceptable, but
there shall be no evidence of separation of the jacket from the steel core.
b)
Bend Test
There shall be no evidence of cracking of the jacket if at room temperature a
length of rod is rigidly held in a clamp or vice and the free end bent by applying a
force normal to the rod at a distance from the clamping device equal to 40 times
the rod diameter. The magnitude of the force and the direction of application
shall be such that the rod is permanent bent through a 30 degree angle. There
should be no evidence of cracking or splitting of the steel or the copper.
5.
5.1
DESIGN
EARTH RODS
Solid copper clad steel earthing rods for earthing of low voltage lines and high
voltage equipment. The rods shall be extensible and suitable for driving into the
ground by a hand held hammer.
The copper exterior shall be electrolitycally applied to the steel core to form a
metallurgical bond between the steel core and the copper. The copper thickness
shall not be less than 0.33mm. Earthing rods of the steel bar(low carbon steel)
type with an external copper tube are not acceptable. Earth rods shall be 1500m in
length and not less than 15mm in diameter. The rods shall have a 45-degree
conical driving point, for electrode entry into the ground. At each installation the
rods shall be driven so that than 500mm below the finished ground level. A
minimum of four rods shall be provided for each transformer.
5.2
EARTHING ACCESSORIES
Earthing accessories shall include but not limited to,
5.2.1
Earth Rod Couplings

Removable electrode connectors for earth rods for attaching 70mm stranded
galvanised steel. The clamp shall have a high copper content alloy body suitable
for direct burial and include stainless steel U-bolts, isometric nuts and spring
washers. The clamp shall be suitable for connection of two conductor tails in the
right angle direction. The clamp shall be suitable for both parallel or right angle
alignment of the conductor to the earth rod axis.
Split bolt connectors designed for the connection of hard drawn copper
conductors up to 35mm cross sectional area. The connectors shall have metric
dimensioned flats on the head to permit holding the fitting with an adjustable jaw
wrench. All the threads shall be isometric. Thread length shall be sufficient to
clamp two conductors of 35mm. The nut shall be of isometric hexagonal form
and dimensions. The slot width shall be 8.3mm minimum and the slot depth shall
readily accommodate two 7.65mm diameter uncompressed conductors with the
nut applied two full turns, The split bolt hall be made from hard drawn brass
with an electro-tinned finish.
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: 2 , 1-May-13
EEPCO
5.2.2
SECTION 6 - PACKING AND MARKING
Earth Rod Driving Head

The driving head shall be of high strength steel, threaded to fit the Earth Rod
Couplings. The design shall ensure that there is direct driving head to rod contact
when the rod driving force is applied. The driving head shall be suitable for
re-use.
5.2.3
Earthing Conductor
The following Types of earthing conductors shall be used:
Bare hard drawn stranded copper wire, conductors in the following sizes,
35, 70, and 185mm2 1000V insulated,
stranded soft drawn copper wire in the following sizes:
150mm2 and 50mm2.
5.2.4
Clamps and Connectors

A full range of clamps and connectors will be required with the earthing material.
All clamps and connectors shall be constructed in high strength copper alloy
bodies and screws. They shall be suitable for use with the earthing conductor
sizes and with the earth rods. The Supplier shall provide a catalogue showing the
full range of clamps and connectors on offer together with dimensions in each
case.
5.2.5
Polyethylene water pipe

Polyethylene water pipe shall be supplied for protection of the 35mm earthing
conductor used on the distribution substations. The water pipe shall have a 20mm
internal diameter, be UV resistant and conform with BS3505 o similar standard
and be supplied in 4 meter lengths. The polyethylene pipe shall be installed on all
earth wires attached poles and equipment from 2.5m above ground to
approximately 0.4m below ground. Bending material securing polyethylene pipe to
poles shall be provided.
6.
PACKING AND MARKING

Cables shall be placed on drums, reels or delivered in coils as appropriate.
Three copies of each packing list shall be sent to the Client prior to dispatch.
Drums, reels and coils shall be labelled with
(i)
serial number,
(ii)
cable type/size,
(iii)
number of cores,
(iv)
cable length,
(v)
gross and net weight,
(vi)
year of manufacture,
(vii)
drum measurements,
(viii)
the Client's name,
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: 3 , 1-May-13
EEPCO
(ix)
Contractor's name,
(x)
Contractor's Agent in The clients country and his address,
(xi)
Contract number,
(xii)
Country of origin and any necessary handling instructions.

In the case of wooden drum the above information shall be marked on one
flange. The position of the cable nose and the direction for rolling as indicated by
an arrow shall be marked on the other flange. All markings shall be clearly and
indelibly made.
Each length of cable shall be durably sealed before shipment to prevent ingress of
moisture. The drums, reels and coils shall be lagged or covered with suitable
material to provide physical protection for the cables during transit and during
storage and handling operations. The lagging shall provide suitable protection
against all climatic conditions prevailing during transport and on site. The wood
used in the construction of drums or lagging should be suitably treated to ensure
that it will not be damaged from outside storage for a period of up to 5 years.
The drums shall be non-returnable and shall have the following dimensions: Max.
Diameter 1000mm; Max. Width: 700mm; Spindle hole 76mm diameter. The
spindle hole shall be reinforced with galvanised steel plates.
Each packing case shall be indelibly marked with the following:
(xiii)
its own individual serial number;
(xiv)
the Client's name;
(xv)
the Contract number, and loan agreement number if applicable;
(xvi)
the Contractor's name;
(xvii)
Contractor's Agent in the clients country and his address;
(xviii)
gross and net weights in kilograms;
(xix)
description of contents;
(xx)
case measurements;
(xxi)
country of origin;
(xxii)
and all necessary slinging and stacking instructions.

Each case shall contain a fully detailed packing list in a sealed waterproof
envelope.
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: 4 , 1-May-13
EEPCO
7.
SECTION 7 - SCHEDULE FOR EARTHING

MATERIALS
SCHEDULE FOR EARTHING MATERIALS

Please see separate technical schedule TS-MA-02.
7.1

Schedule Ref TS-MA-02-NC1
Specification
Clause
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: 5 , 1-May-13
EEPCO
7.2
SECTION 7 - SCHEDULE FOR EARTHING

MATERIALS

Item Reference TS-MA-02-TC1
Specification
Clause
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: 6 , 1-May-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule: TS-MA-02-S

Technical Schedule for Earthing materials
No
I
1
2
3
4
II
1
2
3
III
1
2
3
IV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
1
2
3
Description
Earthing Rods
Length
Diameter
Thickness of copper coating
Bonding process ( copper t
steel)
Clamps
Thickness
Diameter
Material
Split bolt connectors
Bolt Thread length
Slot width of the nut
Unit
Requirement Bid offer
mm
mm
mm
1500
15
0.33
mm
mm
mm
mm
Slot depth the nut

mm
Earthing conductor
Copper wire hard drwan
PVC covering
Over all diameter
Nominal cross sectional area
Max. resistance at 20 C
Standard nominal delivery
length
Max. gross delivery weight
Water pipe
Material
Thickness
mm
Internal diameter
mm
File:TS-MA-02-S R0 Earthing Materials.xlsx- sheet:TS-MA-02-S
Min. 8.3
Min.
Polyethylene
Page 1
Date: 1/5/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-ME-01
kWh Meters and HHMRs
Rev -0- April 2013
SPECIFICATION TS-ME-01
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
30 April 2013
First Issue
LPA GECE / ts-me-01 r0 tariff meters and hhmrs.docx
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: i, 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
TARIFF METERS
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
4.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
2
5.
TESTS
2
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
ROUTINE TESTS
TYPE TESTS
ADDITIONAL TYPE TEST
TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES
2
3
3
4
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
METER TYPES
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
COMMUNICATION & SOFTWARE
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF METERS
RECORDING FACILITIES FOR ELECTRONIC METERS
4
5
9
10
11
12
11.1
GENERAL
12
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
BIDDER INFORMATION
PACKING
CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION
SPARE PARTS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
MANUFACTURERS QUALIFICATIONS
13
14
14
14
15
15
17.1
17.2
MANUFACTURING EXPERIENCE
SUPPLEMENTARY QUALIFICATIONS
15
15
18.
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR KWH METERS
HAND HELD METER READERS (HHMR)
1.
SCOPE
2.
3.
BASIC FUNCTIONS
4.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
5.
DISPLAY
6.
KEYBOARD
7.
BATTERY
8.
MEMORY
9.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
10.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
11.
RADIO FREQUENCY READING FUNCTION
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: ii, 30-Apr-13
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
EEPCO
12.
13.
14.
ANTENNA FOR RF COMMUNICATION & RADIO

CHARACTERISTICS
OTHER CAPABILITIES OF HHMR
3
4
4
14.1
14.2
GENERAL
COMPUTER SOFTWARE
4
4
15.
16.
17.
18.
CUSTOMER DATA UPDATE

OTHER INFORMATION
TRAINING
SCHEDULES
5
5
5
6
18.1
18.2
18.3
SCHEDULE FOR METERS

NON-COMPLIANCE SCHEDULE
6
7
8
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: iii, 30-Apr-13
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO
TARIFF METERS AND HHMRS

1.
SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirement of design, manufacture and
testing of Tariff Meters and hand held meter readers (HHMRs). The Electronic
Meter is used for customer tariff meter in this project while Electro-Mechanical
Meter is optional.
2.

As per System Climatic and Geographic Condition specifications
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
standards. In particular:
BS EN 50160
Voltage characteristics of electricity supplied by public

distribution systems
IEC 61036
Alternating current static watt-hour meters for active

energy (classes 1 and 2).
Withdrawn, replaced with IEC 62052-11 Ed.1.0 (2003)
IEC 60211 (1966)
Maximum Demand Indicators, Class 1.0
IEC 60521
Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating-current watt-hour meters

Withdrawn, replaced with
IEC 62052-11 Ed.1.0 (2003) and
IEC 62053-22 Ed.1.0 (2003)
IEC 60687 (1990)
Alternating current static watt-hour meters for active

energy (classes 0,2 S and 0,5 S)
Withdrawn, replaced with
IEC 62052-11 Ed.1.0 (2003) and
IEC 62053-22 Ed.1.0 (2003)
IEC 61358 (1996)
Acceptance inspection for direct connected alternating

current static watt-hour meters for active energy (classes 1
and 2)
IEC 62052-11 Ed.1.0

(2003)
Electricity metering equipment (AC) - General

requirements, tests and test conditions - Part 11: Metering
equipment
IEC 62053 21 ed1.0

(2003-01)
Electricity metering equipment (AC) - Particular

requirements - Part 21: Static meters for active energy
(classes 1 and 2)
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 1 ,30/04/13
SECTION 4 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

CHARACTERISTICS
EEPCO
4.
IEC 62053-22 Ed.1.0

(2003)

Requirements - Part 22: Static meters for active energy
(classes 0,2 S and 0,5 S)
IEC 62053-22 ed1.0

(2003-01)

Requirements - Part 22: Static meters for active energy
(classes 0,2 S and 0,5 S)
IEC 62053-23 ed1.0

(2003-01)

requirements - Part 23: Static meters for reactive energy
(classes 2 and 3)
ISO/IEC 17025 Ed2.0

(2005)
General requirements for the competence of testing and

calibration laboratories
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS

The meters shall be suitable to measure energy usage on the following distribution
networks.
Frequency
50 Hz
LV system
3-phase, 4-wire, 400/230 V

1-phase, 2-wire, 230 V
System
earthing:
solidly earthed
Connection
arrangement:
- Single phase: symmetrical- 3 phase: 3-phase 4-wire

configurable connections with CT and VT
For the environmental conditions see section 2 of the specifications.
5.
TESTS
5.1
ROUTINE TESTS
The following routine tests as per IEC 60521 or its replacement shall be carried
out on all the meters ordered;
400% basic current, reference voltage and at unity power factor.
400% basic current, reference voltage and at 0.5 lagging power factor.
200% basic current, reference voltage and at 0.5 lagging power factor.
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 2 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
5.2
SECTION 5 - TESTS
Register test.
Starting current test.
Running with no load test.
Verifying minimum range of further adjustment.
TYPE TESTS
The Type Tests shall be carried out at the rated system LV voltage of 230V and at
a reference frequency of 50 Hz.
a)
Mechanical Requirements as per BS EN / IEC 60521 and as per Clause 5.0 of

this standard.
Mechanical Requirements and tests as per Clause 5 of BSEN 62052-11:2003
for Electricity Metering Equipment (AC)-General Requirements, tests and tests
conditions.
Terminal block Material test as per ISO 75.
Non-flammability Glow wire test as per IEC 60695-2-1.
b)
Electrical Requirements as per IEC 60521 and this specification
Power losses for voltage circuits and current circuits.
Heating.
Di-electric properties 1. Impulse withstand voltage test. 2. Power frequency

withstand Voltage tests. 3. Insulation resistance.
c)
Accuracy ( including change of error due to variation of voltage, ambient

temperature, frequency, level, stray field, etc. and mechanical load on register as
per Clause 5.11 of this Standard
d)
Starting and running no-load
e)
Adjustment
f)
Mean temperature coefficient
g)
Effect of high temperature Test as per Clause 9.4 of this Standard. The test
certificates shall clearly identify the kWh meter tested, showing the following;
5.3
Manufacturer's identity.
Model / type number.
Type of register.
Type of rotor bearing, break magnet and other basic parameters.
ADDITIONAL TYPE TEST

To verify the effect of high temperature the meters shall conform to the test
stipulated below. Subject the meter to 60C for 24h while energizing the voltage
circuit at reference voltage and current circuit at zero current and stabilize at
reference condition for 4 hours. The variation in percentage error shall not
exceed:
1.0 when the meter operates on 0.05Ib at unity power factor.
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 3 ,30/04/13
SECTION 6 - METER TYPES
EEPCO
5.4
0.5 when the meter operates on Ib at unity power factor and when the meter
operates on Ib at 0.5 lagging. (where Ib = base current).

Type test reports for the tests listed below shall be obtained from one of the
following Internationally Recognized Institutions / National Metrological
Laboratories. Each page of the test report shall be certified and stamped by the
Testing Authority. The client shall request Original Type Test Reports/Test
Certificates before the issue of award letter for perusal if considered necessary.
6.
United Kingdom - ASTA Certification Services (ASTA) or National

Metrological Laboratory in UK, accredited to Western European Legal
Metrology Corporation (WELMEC).
Italy - Centro Electtrotecnico Sperimentale Italiano S.P.A. (CESI) or

National CEB STANDARD 035 : 2005 6 Metrological Laboratory in Italy
accredited to Western European Legal Metrology Corporation (WELMEC).
France - Ensemble Des Stations DEssais a Grande Puissance Francaises

(ESEF) or National Metrological Laboratory in France accredited to
Western European Legal Metrology Corporation (WELMEC).
Netherlands B.V. KEMA (KEMA) or National Metrological Laboratory

in Netherlands accredited to Western European Legal Metrology
Corporation (WELMEC).
Japan National Metrological Laboratory in Japan accredited to National

Laboratory Accreditation System in Japan.
USA National Metrological Laboratory accredited to American

Association for Laboratory Accreditation.
Australia National Metrological Laboratory accredited to National

Association of Testing Authority (NATA).
India Central Power Research Institute (CPRI).
China - China Chonqing University, H.V. Technology & System

Information
Xian High Voltage Apparatus Laboratory (XIHARI).
CNAS -C china national accreditation service for conformity assessment.
METER TYPES
All meters types shall comply to the relevant IEC standards above.
They shall be of the following types and ratings (Ib/lmax) of mechanical or
electronic type as specified in the Technical schedules:
Meter Code
Meter Type
Class Voltag Current

e (V)
(A)
Electro /
Mechanical
Electro
nic /
Mecha
nical
Directly connected meters
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 4 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
SECTION 7 - CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
1ph-5/20-M
1 2 wire
230
5(20)
Yes
Mecha
nical
1ph-5/40-M
1 2 wire
230
5(40)
Yes
Mecha
nical
1ph-5/40-E
1 2 wire
230
5(40)
1ph-10/100-M
1 2 wire
230
10(100)
Yes
Mecha
nical
1ph-20/120-M
1 2 wire
230
20(120)
Yes
Mecha
nical
1ph-5/100-E
1 2 wire
230
5(100)
Electr.
3ph-5/100-E
3 4 wire
400
5(100)
Electr.
Electr.
CT connected meters
1ph-5/20-E-CT
1 2 wire
CT driven
230
5(10)
Electr.
3ph-5/20-E-CT
3 4 wire
CT driven
400
5(10)
Electr.
3ph-5/20-ECT-VT
3 4 wire
CT/VT
driven
100
5(10)
Electr.
The meter coding above will be used for quick meter referencing purposes.
7.
The meters shall have the following constructional characteristics as minimum:
7.1.1
Meter Fixing/Mounting
The meter will be fixed mounted in the meter box or generally on any surface
internal or external using a fixing method that will prevent removing the meter
without removing the terminal cover.
The fixing shall not require the opening of the metering compartment of the
meter and shall not interfere with the IP rating of the meter.
No adjustments for the levelling of the meter shall be necessary.
7.1.2
IP Protection
Protective class II.
Overall Metering compartment shall be IP 54 or better.
Meter terminal section shall be IP 33.
7.1.3
Housing
Base and terminal block shall be manufactured by high quality non-conductive,
high impact, smooth finish, durable, non-flammable, UV stabilized, UV resistant
and high resistance to weathering material.
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 5 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
Main cover and terminal cover design and sealing facilities shall be such that
access to working parts and adjustments is only possible by breaking the seal and
opening the meter cover.
Design of the meter shall be such that it shall not be possible to remove the meter
cover without removing the terminal cover.
The meter cover shall be secured by sealable screws.
7.1.4
Meter cover Housing Seals

Fool-proof seals have to be provided to the meter cover by the manufacturer.
The meter cover shall have a continuous gasket between the base and the cover
(fitted in a recessed groove in the cover to prevent entry of dust, water, insects
etc. so as to achieve degree of protection not less than IP54 as per IEC 60529.
The gasket/rubber seal shall be of high quality and life time to match the meter
lifetime shall be provided. It shall not be hard or become hard or harden with
time.
Gasket shall not be detached when meter cover is removed from the base.
The fitting of the cover over the base of the meter shall be such that it would not
allow or be possible to insert from outside the meter any rods, wires, films or
other material, which could be used to interfere with the meter.
7.1.5
Reading Window
If the meter cover is not made from transparent materials the meter reading
window shall be made of glass or a clear/transparent - flame retardant, high UV
resistance, high tensile and impact strength, permanently fastened to the meter
cover. It shall not be possible to remove the cover without breaking it.
7.1.6
Electrical Connection Terminals

The conductor terminal shall be front bottom access.
The terminals shall be suitable for both soft drawn and hard drawn conductor
(copper and aluminium). Cable connections shall be secured with two screws of
not less than 5 mm diameter of plated brass or equivalent material.
For Imax up to and including 30 amps the terminal holes shall be not less than 6.5
mm internal diameter. For Imax greater than 30 amps the terminal holes shall be
not less than 9.5 mm internal diameter.
7.1.7
Electrical Diagram
Meter connection diagram shall be engraved inside the terminal cover or it shall
be printed on material that can be fixed inside the cover without deterioration
with time.
7.1.8
Terminal Cover
A long extended terminal cover shall be provided. This shall be made of high
quality rust-proof material, non-flammable, UV stabilized, high tensile and impact
strength. It shall be fastened in position from the front by sealing screws.
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 6 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
7.1.9
Sealing Screws and Factory sealing

All sealing screws shall have a hole of 2 mm diameter.
Metering compartment shall be sealed by the manufacturer with durable seals with
the manufacturers stamp. The materials shall not be damaged with time or eaten
by termites.
The terminal compartment shall not be sealed
7.1.10
Lifetime of meter and recalibration/certification requirements

The meter lifetime shall be a minimum of 25 years.
Meter recalibration requirement period shall not be less than 10 years
The meter must be able to be recertified by the user.
7.1.11
Registers displays/Counters
Registers for Electromechanical meters
Digital- jumping mechanical registers shall be provided.
A 5 digit large jumping cyclometer register with the least significant digit to be 1s
of kWh. In addition, a display of fractions of kWh to 1/10th KWh resolution with
10 subdivisions, for test purposes and to be clearly identifiable as such.
Registers shall be registering energy regardless of connection polarity as positive
consumed, i.e. if the meter connection is reversed the meter shall continue to
register correctly the consumed energy.
Registers for Electronic Meters
Electronic meters shall be fitted with reverse running stop or reverse power
indicator (reset to require action by the Utility, such as disconnection of supply, or
software reset).
It shall also be possible to configure the meter to register the energy consumed
regardless of the direction of flow to account for reversal of current connections.
A 5 or 6 digit display with non-volatile memory (not battery backed), with the
least significant digit to be 1s of kWh. The display must be easy to read under the
normal expected conditions of service. A configurable display should not show
fractions of a kWh when in service. Reconfiguration at the Meter Test Station to
show fractions of kWh (to at least 1/100th kWh resolution) for test purposes is
then a requirement. Where this is not possible, 5 significant digits, a clear decimal
point and then 2 digits of decimals is an acceptable alternative.
Register counter shall be protected from external magnetic fields.
Large easy to read backlit LCD.
Also electronic meters with mechanical register will be acceptable if so specified in
the technical schedules.
Programmable display.
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 7 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
7.1.12
Meter Markings
All nameplate markings shall be in English languages. Other languages shall not
be used.
The phases and number of wires shall be marked in text, not graphical symbols
All markings shall be resistant to solar radiation.
The meter constant shall be marked, product trademark, type, model, serial
number, voltage, basic/rated current, frequency, rev/kWh, class, IP,
manufacturing year.
The nameplate shall be marked "Property of EEPCo.
In addition to the requirements of IEC 62052-11, 62053-21 and IEC 61036,
61030, each meter shall have a unique identification number indelibly marked on
the nameplate. The identification number sequence will be advised at the time of
ordering. This identification shall be additional to the maker's serial number.
Supplied with bar-coded type code/serial number label.
7.1.13
Pulse output
Where specified in the technical schedules pulse output shall be provided.
7.1.14
Rotor and Disk Requirements for Mechanical Meter Types

The rotor upper bearings shall be guided by stainless steel pin with a nonlubricated bearing bush mounted to the spindle. Lower bearing shall be magnetic
suspension type.
The upper surface of the rotor disc shall have black coloured markings dividing
the circumference into divisions.
The markings at each 1/100th of the circumference shall be longer than those
between. Markings at each 1/10th of the circumference shall be still longer and
shall be numbered from 0 to 9. These markings shall be visible through the name
plate window to facilitate manual calibration.
Rotor disc shall be of light weight electrolytic Aluminium metal die-cast to the
spindle.
Breaking magnet shall be positioned to the frame rigidly to prevent any
movement. The magnet shall be temperature compensated with respect to wide
range of temperatures and shall have high resistance to de-magnetization and low
temperature coefficient. The details of the method of temperature compensation
shall be fully described.
The edge of the rotor nearest to an observer viewing a meter from the front shall
move from left to right for positive registration. The direction of rotation shall be
marked clearly by a visible arrow. The edge of the rotor disc shall carry an easily
visible mark to facilitate testing.
With no current in the current circuit, the rotor shall not make one complete
revolution at any voltage between 80% and 110% of the rated voltage. The meters
shall be fitted with anti-reverse device.
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 8 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
8.
SECTION 8 - COMMUNICATION &

SOFTWARE

Communication facilities shall be provided for the respective meters as specified
in the technical schedules to enable communication between meter and hand held
meter readers or other equipment effectively and efficiently.
Where specified these communication facilities shall be an integral part of the
meter or it shall be provided as a dedicated module designed for the purpose and
forming part of the mater.
The following basic features must be included:
Extensive error checking is provided to assure data integrity during
communications.
Read tariff and modify tariff.
Set/reset meter time.
It shall not be possible to access the meter with unauthorized equipment.
Meter shall have password protection for communication.
It should be possible to disable communication with special software.
The communication facility shall be able to withstand magnetic inference or
strong light sources.
Training shall be provided in the use of the meter.
The following communication facilities shall be provided with the meter if
specified in the technical schedules or on the scope of supply or in other places, as
it may be decided by the client.
8.1.1
Radio Frequency -Meter Reading Facility

The function of radio frequency communication is to provide the Utility the
capability of reading meters via radio signals.
The meter shall be able to be read from a distance of up to 500m
All transmissions from meters within the reading route will be collected
together.
The antenna shall be permanently mounted externally or internally.
The Unit must be Part 15 FCC compliant.
Frequency to be agreed with the communications authority
8.1.2
Infrared
An infra-red device shall be an integral part of the meter with the following
characteristics.
Modulating Infrared.
ANSI standard optical port minimum 12,000 Baud rate.
IEC 62056-21 communication requirements.
ANSI C12.18 communications protocol.
CENELEC A-band power line communication channel.
It shall be able to be read at any time of the day or night.
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 9 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
a)
8.1.3
SECTION 9 - COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
The meter must be able to be read within a range of 2m or as stated in the

technical schedules through an additional glass or plastic barrier. RS 485 or RS232
Radio Spares communication terminal of the specified type shall be incorporated
with the meter.
Optical coupler
Optical terminal of the specified type shall be incorporated (if specified in the
technical schedules) with the meter.
Optical communication cable shall be a minimum of 5m.
8.1.4
Inductive Loop
Inductive loop method of communication shall be provided as an integral part of
the meter. It shall be possible to read the meter from a distance of 0.5m
8.1.5
Modem for standard land telephone lines

A standard modem for the use with the standard telephone line shall be provided
with an integral DIN telephone jack.
8.1.6
Modems with SIM cards for mobile telephones

A modem for the use with a SIM card for a wireless communication (GSM) with
an integral seat for a SIM card shall be provided. The device shall be suitable for
DATA communication.
The standard telephone line shall be provided with an integral DIN telephone
jack.
9.
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
The meter shall communicate using standard international protocols.
Data error checking in every data block.
As a minimum it shall accommodate the IEC 1107 and 62056.
At the moment no metering code exists in the country.
The required software to be installed in any computer of the clients office shall be
provided with the supply of meters. If the software is to be priced separately the
bidder must provide a separate entry in the bill of quantities and prices. If there is
no such entry it shall be deemed that the price for the software is included in the
supply price of the hand held meter readers.
The contractor shall install and configure the software for the meter reading on
the clients computers. A standard software set-up disk shall be produced which
can enable to load the meter program on other locations if the client established
another meter reading locations within his business.
The protocol used for the communication shall be disclosed to the client to
enable the integration of the meters to the existing systems. In the cases where the
protocol is considered intellectual property and cannot be disclosed the supplier
shall undertake to reprogram or enable in any case the existing equipment of the
client to communicate with the meters provided.
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 10 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
SECTION 10 - ELECTRICAL
CHARACTERISTICS OF METERS
The cost for modifying existing equipment shall be deemed to be included in the
price of the meter supplies unless it is included separately in the Bill of quantities.
If it is a separate cost then this will be considered as part of the bid price.
10.
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF METERS
10.1.1
Electromagnetic compatibility
To meet the Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements and, as a minimum, to
withstand the supply conditions described in BS EN 50160.
10.1.2
Power Loss
Maximum Power Loss shall be as stated in the technical schedules.
10.1.3
Accuracy
The accuracy class of the meter shall be according to IEC62053.21, as stated in
the particular meter type requirements below and technical schedules.
10.1.4
Adjustments
Meters shall be fitted with a ready means of adjustment for all factors that affect
the calibration.
The low load, power factor and full load adjustments shall be indelibly marked
and easy access to the same shall be available.
These shall be stable, sensitive and easily accessible and shall not comprise of
parts, which are fragile or complicate.
The adjustments devices would preferably be by means of micro screws.
The rotation direction of the adjustment devices shall be clearly indicated.
Full load adjustment shall be independent from low load adjustment.
Adjustment/Calibration are accessible from the front and do not require any
special tool.
10.1.5
Voltage and Current coils or transducers

The voltage and current coils/transducers shall be connected together by an easily
detachable link which shall be enclosed by the meter cover and not by the
terminal cover. Once detached sufficient clearance shall be available to prevent
short-circuiting when testing. With link detached, the voltage coil terminals shall
have suitable means for independent test voltage leads to be connected to them.
The voltage coil shall be designed to withstand high voltages without open
circuiting the coil shall be fully encapsulated to prevent ingress of moisture and
marked with its rated voltage. The method of encapsulation shall be described in
detail.
The impulse (1.2/ 50s) and the power frequency withstand voltages of the meter
shall not be less than 10kV peak and 2kV rms respectively.
10.1.6
Lightning Impulse Withstand

The meters will be used in an area of frequent and severe lightning. The withstand
voltage (testing voltage AC-50 Hz-1min) shall be not less than 2 kV. The impulse
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 11 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
SECTION 11 - RECORDING FACILITIES FOR

ELECTRONIC METERS
withstand voltage test (on 1.2/50s) shall be not less than 6 kV. In addition to the
requirements of IEC 60521 and IEC 61036, bidders are invited to submit
evidence of enhanced performance to withstand short-time overvoltages.
11.
RECORDING FACILITIES FOR ELECTRONIC

METERS
11.1
GENERAL
Recorded items used for consumer invoicing quantities shall be retained on nonvolatile memory. Other data shall be retained for a minimum of one month.
There shall be no batteries used for the purposes of retaining information in case
of supply disconnections, unless the battery life will suit the recalibration period
of the meter which shall be a minimum of 10 years or as stated in the technical
schedules whichever is higher.
Recordings of the following quantities shall be stored depending of technical
requirements as stated in the technical schedules:
11.1.1
Continuous Recording since meter life

The following quantities shall be recorded since the introduction of the meter into
service;
1) Continuous kWh recording since the start of the meter life or until reset at the
calibration station
2) Reactive energy kVArh consumed since
3) Reactive energy kVArh produced since
4) Load profiling half hourly integrating intervals capable of recording 6 months of
data on a rolling basis. Two channels may be preferable of recording power,
current, and voltage or power factor.
11.1.2
Period reading
1) Periodic Recording since last reading (Resettable during meter reading)
2) Energy (kWh) consumed since last reading
3) Reactive energy KVArh consumed since last reading
4) Reactive energy KVArh produced since last reading
5) Maximum (kW) demand since last reading (resettable)
6) Maximum Current (A) since last reading on each phase and total (resettable)
7) Maximum voltage (V) in each phase
8) Minimum voltage (V) in each phase (not including interruptions)
9) Number of power disruptions (resettable)
10) Total time of disruption
11) Event recording memory of not meeting statutory requirements
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 12 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
11.1.3
SECTION 12 - BIDDER INFORMATION
Present values
1) kW in each phase and total
2) Amperes in each phase
3) Volts in each phase
4) Power factor in each phase and total
12.
BIDDER INFORMATION
The following shall be furnished with the offer.
1) A full technical description of the meter(s) offered shall be provided with the bid.
All information shall be in English language. The bid shall include all technical
information listed in the Technical Schedules.
2) Type test certificates shall be provided with the bid. The certificates shall be less
than five years old.
3) Catalogues describing the meter and indicating the type and model number.
4) Literature describing the operational features of the meter.
5) Constructional features, materials used for components and relevant technical
literature for the following shall be furnished;
For Mechanical meters if applicable
Permanent magnet.
Magnetic bearing.
Register.
Voltage coil.
For electronic meters if applicable

Information on voltage and current transducers.
Information on integrating electronics.
6) Full details of the method of encapsulation of voltage coil and winding details of
current and voltage coils e.g. Type of frame used, Insulation of wires, etc.
7) Full details of temperature compensation methods used in magnets, giving details
of thermal compensating device, temperature ranges, etc.
8) Construction details of upper and lower bearings if applicable.
9) Complete dimensional drawing.
10) List of Electricity Supply Authorities who purchased similar meters during last 20
years. Details of such purchases including names of purchaser, year of sale,
quantity sold, purchase orders/tender numbers and model numbers of the meters
sold etc. shall also be furnished.
11) Manufacturing Experience stipulated in relevant clause below. Documents shall
be furnished to prove the manufacturing experience.
12) The details of the information that will be marked on the name plate of the meter.
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 13 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
SECTION 13 - PACKING
13) Completed schedule of technical particulars

14) Quality Assurance Certification conforms to ISO 9001 as per this specification.
15) Type test certificates.
13.
PACKING
If the meter does not form part of an integrated equipment then the following
shall apply.
Each meter shall be securely packed in an individual cardboard box. The box shall
be labelled in English language on the outside with a description of the contents.
Delivery, boxes shall be additionally packed in a weather protected outer box or
carton containing approximately 20 meters. This container shall be marked in
English language with a description of the contents.
The type, rating and serial numbers of the item shall be clearly stated on the box
labels.
14.
CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION

The Contractor shall provide the following information in English language
within 30 days of placing the contract:
1) Three sets of detailed dimensioned drawings showing constructional features of
the meters, outline views, sealing arrangements, terminal construction and
dimensions, terminal identification, and mounting arrangements and dimensions
2) Connection diagram
3) Recommended test and calibration procedures
4) Recommended maintenance procedures.
5) The Contractor shall provide the following information at the first delivery of
goods under the contract:
Schedule of meter serial numbers, and corresponding employers identification
numbers
Routine test certificates for each meter supplied.
15.
SPARE PARTS
With the supply of meters, the manufacturer shall provide the following spare
parts to the nearest highest number:
Terminal covers :
1.0% of the number of meters
Terminal screws of meter compartment and

terminal covers:
2.0% of each type
Voltage terminal isolation screws:
0.5%
Meter windows if fitted as separate windows
1.0%
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 14 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
16.
SECTION 16 - QUALITY ASSURANCE
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The manufacturer shall possess ISO 9001 : 2000 Quality Assurance Certification
for the design, manufacture and testing of kWh meters. In the event the meters
are manufactured in a plant under the licence of the manufacturer, the
manufacturing plant shall possess ISO 9001 : 2000 Quality Assurance Certificate
for manufacturing and testing of Single Phase kWh Meters.
The Bidder shall furnish a copy of the ISO Certificate certified as true copy of the
original from the manufacturers, along with the offer.
If the following items are purchased from other manufacturers, they shall have
ISO 9001 Quality Assurance Certification for the manufacture of same for the
plant where the manufacture is done. The Bidder shall furnish copies of the ISO
Certificates certified as true copies of the originals from the manufacturers, along
with the offer;
Permanent magnet.
Magnetic bearing.
Register.
Manufacturer shall have in-house meter testing facility comply with the
requirements of ISO/IEC : 17025 : 2005.
Proof document shall be submitted to prove this accreditation.
17.
MANUFACTURERS QUALIFICATIONS
The items listed below are considered important for safeguarding the quality of
the meters to be supplied and the Bid may be rejected if in the opinion of the
evaluating body the Bidder has not demonstrated that the meters offered meet the
quality requirements through the certification required.
17.1
MANUFACTURING EXPERIENCE
The meter manufacturer shall have at least ten years (10) of experience in the
manufacture of Energy Meters. Documentary proof for the manufacturing
experience shall be provided.
In addition, sufficient documentary evidence such as name of purchaser, year of
sale, quantity sold, purchase orders, model numbers of the meter sold etc. for the
last 10 years shall be furnished for at least 10 main major with the offer.
The meter manufacturer shall guarantee that the offered meters will operate
within the stipulated error limits for the period specified under calibration section
above without requiring re-calibration.
17.2
SUPPLEMENTARY QUALIFICATIONS
The following supplementary qualifications will be considered in the evaluation of
bids. Hence if the equipment offered meets any one or more of the following
criteria the bidder shall further qualify for the selection;
Certificates for Service life
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 15 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
SECTION 17 - MANUFACTURERS
QUALIFICATIONS
Certification issued by an electricity regulating institution certifying the minimum

service life, (certified copies of the certificates shall be attached to prove this).
Performance Reports/Certificates
Bidders may furnish performance reports/certificates obtained from electricity
supply authorities outside the country of manufacture to whom the bidder has
supplied meters of similar type/model during the last ten years.
The above certificates/reports shall indicate the name of purchaser, model of
the meter, year of purchase, quantity purchased, and the performance of the
meters based on field experience or field studies.
The purchaser reserves the right to communicate with electricity supply
authorities who have issued performance certificates with regard to the
performance of the meters and the authenticity of the performance certificate
issued by them.
The contact person and contact details of those utilities such as fax/telephone
numbers etc. shall be furnished by the Bidder in his offer.
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 16 ,30/04/13
SECTION 18 - SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

FOR KWH METERS
EEPCO
18.
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR KWH METERS

Based in the above specifications the meter types listed in section A-6 above will have the following requirements where multiple
options exist in the above specifications.
Meter Type Code
1ph5/20
-M
1ph5/40
-M
1ph5/40
-E
1ph10/100
-M
1ph20/120
-M
1ph5/100
-E
1ph5/20
-E-CT
3ph5/100
-E
3ph5/20
-E-CT
3ph5/20-E
-CT-VT
1
1.1
General Characteristics
M
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
No. of Wires
Operating Voltage (V)
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
400
400
110
Basic Current Ib (A)
10
20
Maximum Current (A)
20
40
40
100
120
100
10
100
10
10
Accuracy Class Index
No. of Tariffs
CT Operated
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Reading
communication
IR
IR
IR
IR
IR
GPRS
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
2.2
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
4
Mechanical Electronic
(M/E)
No. of Phases
Communication
Yes
Registers Continuous
Active Energy kWh
Reactive Energy
kVArh
Load profile
Registers- Periodic Resettable
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 1 ,30/04/13
SECTION 18 - SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

FOR KWH METERS
EEPCO
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Meter Type Code
1ph5/20
-M
1ph5/40
-M
1ph5/40
-E
1ph10/100
-M
1ph20/120
-M
1ph5/100
-E
1ph5/20
-E-CT
3ph5/100
-E
3ph5/20
-E-CT
3ph5/20-E
-CT-VT
Active Energy kWh

Reactive Energy
kVArh
Average Power Factor
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Max Power (kW)
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Max Power (KVA)

Max Reactive Power
(KVAr)
Max Current
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Max Voltage
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Min Voltage
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No. of disruptions
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Registers- Instantaneous
Power (kW)
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Power (KVA)
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Current (A)
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Volts (V)
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Power factor
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 2 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
HAND HELD METER READERS (HHMR)

1.
SCOPE
This specification defines the requirements for the design, manufacture, and
supply of hardware and software of hand held meter readers to be used in
conjunction with the meters to be supplied under the contract. The hand held
meter readers shall be used to read meters from other manufacturers and as such
the supplied equipment shall have suitable communication facilities to enable
them to communicate effectively and accurately with other manufacturers meters.
2.

3.
BASIC FUNCTIONS
The handheld data collection device shall have the capability to collect and store
readings at any time of the meter reading route by any of the following methods
unless otherwise stated so in the technical schedule:
Manual use through the use of an alphanumeric keypad.

Automatic reading through probing of meters with infrared interface.
Automatic reading through Inductive probing
Automatic reading through Via radio frequency RF as a separate option
The unit shall be able to obtain all readings stored in the energy meters on any
particular route without requiring:
Reprogramming of the handheld computer.
Physical change of software contained within the unit while in the field.
Access through special software menus contained within a given
route/program.
The meter shall be able to read meters manually and through infrared without
changing the program. If RF option is installed than the meter shall be able to
read the pre-programmed meters in the route when within range.
The instruction manual shall state clearly the procedure to follow to achieve the
method of meter reading.
4.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The handheld data collection device must be PC compatible and run under the
software interface program which the vendor shall provide free of charge.
The handheld devise shall be ergonomically designed to be comfortable for
handheld meter reading.
A hand strap must
be provided with each unit and must provide ease of use for
right- or left-handed operators.
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 1 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
5.
SECTION 5 - DISPLAY
DISPLAY
The handheld screen must be easily readable screen of more than 5 x5 cm visible
during the day and night. The size of the display characters must be selectable,
allowing the use of larger characters that are easiest to read.
There must also be a manual contrast adjustment feature which will allow the user
to adjust the contrast.
The display must have no degradation when exposed to temperatures stated in the
technical schedules
6.
KEYBOARD
The keyboard must have independent large keys of durable construction with
adequate separation for use with gloved hand.
The keyboard must provide tactile feedback
It shall be alphanumeric.
There must be an audible feedback on key press.
7.
BATTERY
The battery capacity must be sufficient for a minimum of 8 hours of meter
reading.
Preferred type shall be lithium ion rechargeable batteries.
However easily replaceable rechargeable batteries available in the market shall also
be possible to be used with the meter.
8.
MEMORY
The handheld data collection device must include sufficient memory to register at
least 5000 meter readings or as it may be specified in the technical schedule. The
unit shall retain the information in its memory even if the batteries are removed
(non-volatile memory)
The unit shall be able to accept a flash card type of external memory that can be
easily used to transfer information from the unit to the PC
9.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
The handheld must include but not be limited to the following:
The unit must operate in temperature range specified in the environmental
specifications.
The device shall be water resistant, capable of unlimited exposure to spray or
splash (such as rain).
The device must be protected against static discharge.
The device must be shock resistant exceeding IEC 68-2-32 method 1 (a 1meter drop on concrete).
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 2 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
10.
SECTION 10 - SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The handheld software must be easy to use and give the meter reader control over
the route in searching for accounts, tagging accounts for later action, entering
related notes and manually reading meters.
The handheld software must include entry of meter readings.
In addition, the handheld software shall include but shall not be limited to the
following basic features:
Allows manual or automatic entry of meter readings, ID numbers of meters
and note codes.
Performs high/low test on readings.
Date and time stamped to each reading.
Identifies type of reading manual keyed, probed or RF MIU.
Must be able to read encoders via either wireless probed reading or via RF
MIU.
Performs unread meter search.
Forward and reverse walk order allowed.
Data search capability
Auto-Search for automatic reading of encoded meters.
Displays the number of read and unread accounts on demand.
11.
RADIO FREQUENCY READING FUNCTION

Radio frequency reading ability may be specified in the technical schedules.
The function of the handheld in radio frequency mode is to provide the Utility the
capability of reading meters via radio signals. The handheld must be capable of
receiving RF readings.
The requirements below are for meters with RF interface capability.
All transmissions from meters within the reading route will be collected. The
reading of any meter shall be automatically stored in the proper account record
without the intervention of the meter reader.
Should any meter not be able to be read during the route, the software shall
support storage of a flag in the account record, indicating clearly that the meter
could not be read.
The unit shall be able to read meters within 200m radius
The unit must be capable of processing a minimum of 30 meter readings per
minute. Processing must include accuracy of the message confirmation.
12.
ANTENNA FOR RF COMMUNICATION & RADIO

CHARACTERISTICS
The antenna shall be externally mounted and replaceable.
The Unit must be Part 15 FCC compliant.
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 3 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
SECTION 13 - OTHER CAPABILITIES OF

HHMR
Receiving Frequency to be agreed with the communications authority

Protocol: data error checking in every received data
13.
OTHER CAPABILITIES OF HHMR

The Infra-red reading unit must be able to read meters within a range of 5m or as
stated in the technical schedules.
Language of HHMR shall be English.
Read tariff and modify tariff.
To be possible arrange on and off time of meters display.
Set/reset meter time
Entry rights levels must be protected by security code, to be possible change
security code.
The meter shall be possible to be connected to a suitable printer for printing
selected data.
Anti-tempering signal/device shall be included. The HHMR shall be built in dual
type: Manual Key-in and Infrared type.
The HHMR software shall be compatible with Utility existing billing system.
Historical load profile of these meters shall be built in program.
14.

The meter shall communicate using standard international protocols.
As a minimum it shall accommodate the IEC 1107 and 62056
At the moment no metering code exists in the country.
14.1
GENERAL
Communication facilities shall be provided to enable the hand held unit to
communicate effectively and efficiently with the host computer system. In
addition, the following basic features must be included:
Extensive error checking is provided to assure data integrity during
communications between the handheld and the PC.
A typical route could be loaded or unloaded in less than one minute.
Once loaded, routes may be individually selected on the handheld.
The communication shall be either through infrared or serial cables with or
without cradle.
Multiple handhelds must be able to be connected to the host computer.
14.2
COMPUTER SOFTWARE
The required software to be installed in any computer of the clients office shall be
provided with the supply of meters. If the software is to be priced separately the
bidder must provide a separate entry in the bill of quantities and prices. If there is
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 4 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
SECTION 15 - CUSTOMER DATA UPDATE
no such entry it shall be deemed that the price for the software is included in the
supply price of the hand held meter readers.
The contractor shall install and configure the software on the clients computers.
A standard software set-up disk shall be produced which can enable to load the
meter program on other locations if the client established anther meter reading
locations within his business.
The computer bases software shall be able to store the data in excel and database
format compatible with billing systems.
The stored data in excel shall also be able to be manipulated such as in cases of
substation metering data to determine the required information and analysis.
The supply of a billing system is outside the scope of this specification.
15.
CUSTOMER DATA UPDATE

It shall also be possible to update customer data on site either through dedicated
routines or through the use of notes for the meter reader to insert during the
reading walk.
16.
OTHER INFORMATION
The bidder shall state clearly the functions of the meter in addition the ones stated
above.
17.
TRAINING
The bidder shall provide training for the use of the meter readers and the
associated software to be provided for the base computers.
Rev -0- April 2013, Page: 5 ,30/04/13
EEPCO
18.
SCHEDULES
18.1
SCHEDULE FOR METERS

Technical Schedule Reference TS-ME-01-S
ts-me-01 r0 tariff meters and hhmrs.docx
Rev -0- April 2013 / Page: 6 , / 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
18.2
NON-COMPLIANCE SCHEDULE
Schedule Ref TS-ME-01-NC1
Specification
Clause
EEPCO
18.3

Item Reference TS-ME-01-TC1
Specification
Clause
Non-compliance description
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule: TS-ME-01-S1

Technical Schedule for Tariff Meters
No
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
1 Schedule Reference
TS-ME-01-S1-2
Requirement
TS-ME-01-S1-3
Meter Code
1ph-5/20-E-CT
3Ph-5/20-E-CT-3
2.1 Brief Description
1 phase electronic
meter with CT
3 phase electronic
meter with CT
Yes
Yes
No of Phases
No of Wires
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
Bid Offer
Manufacturer
Catalogue No
Manufacturer's Description if Item
Model
Country of Origin
Basic Meter Characteristics
Electronic type
Accuracy Class Index
Basic Current (Ib)
Maximum Current
10
10
Minimum starting and running current
% of Ib
0.02
0.002
Minimum starting and running current
mA
10
10
Operating Voltage
230
400
Maximum Operating Voltage
% of rating
+20
+20
Minimum Operating Voltage
% of rating
-35
-35
Min Operating temperature
degr C
-5
-5
Max Operating temperature
degr C
+65
+65
Hz
50
50
Frequency
File:TS-ME-01-S R0 Tariff Meters.xlsm - sheet:TS-ME-01-S1
Page 1 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
Item
2
3.15
3.16
3.17
4
4.1
5.11
5.12
5.13
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
TS-ME-01-S1-2
TS-ME-01-S1-3
1ph-5/20-E-CT
3Ph-5/20-E-CT-3
Hz+/-
IP
54
54
Yes
Yes
Yes/No & m
Yes
Yes
Yes/No & m
No
No
Yes/No & m
No
No
Yes/No
Yes
Yes
Yes/No & m
No
No
Digital
Digital
IP Rating
CT Operated
Bid Offer
Communication
Infrared or similar remote hand held meter
reading accessory
4.2 Radio Frequency communication

4.3
4.4
4.5
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
Unit
Meter Code
Frequency tolerance
EEPCo
RS 485 Link
Communication Protocol Provided
GPRS
Registers
Type of Register
No of Tariffs
min
Active Energy register
kWh
Yes
Yes
kVArh
Yes
Yes
Reactive Energy register

Active power register
kW
Yes
Yes
Reactive Power register
KVAr
Yes
Yes
Total Power register
kVA
Yes
Yes
Maximum power over period (resetable)
kVA
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Maximum Current over period (resetable)

Maximum Current over period for each phase
(resetable)
Maximum Current over period (resetable)
Maximum Current over period for each phase
(resetable)
Amperes
Page 2 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
Item
2
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
TS-ME-01-S1-2
TS-ME-01-S1-3
1ph-5/20-E-CT
3Ph-5/20-E-CT-3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Event recording Memory
N/R
Yes
Load Profile
Yes
Yes
Average Power Factor
Yes
Yes
Power Factor
Yes
Yes
English
English
Meter Code
5.14 Volts
5.15 Maximum Voltage over period (resetable)
5.16 Minimum voltage over period during operation
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
EEPCo
(resetable)
Number of power disruptions (resetable)
Bid Offer
Other Data
Language of Labels
Burden of each potential coil
VA
10
Burden of each current coil
VA
0.5
2max
2max
EEPCo
EEPCo
0.5
0.5
Power Consumption
Meter constant
Rev/kWh
Name of Utility (Initials)

o
Reference Temperature
Temperature Co Efficient
%oC
Overload capacity
b)For thermal consideration
a)For consideration of accuracy
Limit of error at:

a) 0.1 Ib to 0.5 Ib at unit PF
b) Ib to Imax at unit PF
c) Ib at 0.5 PF lagging
Type of Lower Bearing
Page 3 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
Item
2
Unit
6.20
7 Packaging & Other Details
7.1 Material of Meter Case
Bid Offer
Requirement
TS-ME-01-S1-3
1ph-5/20-E-CT
3Ph-5/20-E-CT-3
90
As per general
requirements
90
As per general
requirements
kV
kA
High quality, non

conductive
As per general
requirements
glass or
clear/transparent
long extended terminal,
high quality
High quality, non

conductive
As per general
requirements
glass or
clear/transparent
long extended terminal,
high quality
6.17 Maximum Humidity

6.18 AC withstand voltage to 40 C and 100%
6.19
Requirement
TS-ME-01-S1-2
Meter Code
humidity for 48h

AC withstand voltage to 40 C
and 100%
humidity for one minute
Short Circuit Current in 0.5 sec.
EEPCo
%
V
7.2 Material of Meter cover

7.3 Material of meter window
7.4 Terminal Cover
7.5
connection Terminal
mm
6.5mm for Imax 30 A

9.5mm for 30 A Imax
6.5mm for Imax 30 A

9.5mm for 30 A Imax
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
sealing screws hole
mm
Weight of Meter
kg
Type test report enclosed with shipment
Yes
Yes
Routine test reports enclosed with shipment
Yes
Yes
Meter covers sealed with manufacturer's seal
Yes
Yes
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.15
Catalogue enclosed
Yes/No
Yes
Yes
Guaranteed Lifetime
years
25
25
Recalibration period
years
min 10 years
min 10 years
Warrantee Period
Months
Meter tested as per IEC 60521
36
36
Yes
Yes
Bid Offer
Page 4 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
Item
2
7.16
7.17
7.18
7.20
Unit
Meter Code
Standard to which manufactured
Cable Terminal connection size
mm2
Reversal preventing mechanism

Sample to be supplied with bid
EEPCo

Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
TS-ME-01-S1-2
TS-ME-01-S1-3
1ph-5/20-E-CT
3Ph-5/20-E-CT-3
IEC 62052,53,
IEC 62052,53,
16
16
As per spec
As per spec
Bid Offer
Yes/No
Page 5 Date: 30/04/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-ME-02
Meter Boxes and Meter CTs
Rev -1- May 2013
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
30 April 2013
First Issue
Rev 1
1 May 2013
Option for Separate CT Box for Transformer metering added
LPA GECE / ts-me-02 r0 meter cabinets and meter cts 2013-04-30.docx
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: i, 1-May-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
METER CABINETS & METER CTS
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
CONSUMER METER CABINETS
1
3.1
3.2
3.3
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSUMER METER BOXES
SPARES FOR CONSUMER METER BOXES
1
6
7
4.
METERING FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
METER BOX REQUIREMENTS

CABINET CABLE ENTRY POINTS AND WIRING
MOUNTING OF CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
SEPARATE BOX FOR CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
METER INSTALLATION
7
10
11
12
12
5.
PACKING AND TESTS FOR METER BOXES
12
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
PACKING
TESTS
FULL TEST PROGRAM ON SAMPLES
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
12
12
13
13
6.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS FOR METERS
13
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
STANDARDS
CHARACTERISTICS
CONSTRUCTION
CURRENT TRANSFORMER LABELLING
TESTING
DOCUMENTS TO BE PROVIDED
13
14
14
15
15
15
16
7.
SCHEDULES
17
7.1
7.2
7.3
SCHEDULE FOR METER BOXES AND METER CTS

17
17
18
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: ii, 1-May-13
EEPCO
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
METER CABINETS & METER CTS

1.
SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirement of design, manufacture and
testing of a) Consumer Meter Cabinets b) Transformer Meter Cabinets and c)
Meter CTs.
2.

3.
CONSUMER METER CABINETS
3.1
3.1.1
Usage
Two types of meter cabinets are specified namely for a) three meter arrangement
and b) 5 meter (not through CTs) arrangement.
The meters shall be directly connected.
All meter cabinet types (3 and 5 meter) shall be used for single phase consumer
supply connections.
The three single phase meter type may also be used to supply one 3 phase
consumer, using three single phase meters if necessary.
3.1.2
Materials & Construction

The box must be designed for outdoor installation for climatic conditions as
stated in the relevant Client specification
Meter cabinets shall be made from glass fibre reinforced moulded polyester
(SMC), fire-resistant, self-extinguishing and high impact proof.
Average thickness must be at least 3 mm and in any case it shall be able to
withstand the mechanical strength requirements.
Meter boxes made of metal shall not be accepted.
Meter box colour shall be ivory or light grey
Meter cabinets shall be constructed in accordance with the drawings provided.
The bottom of the cabinet shall have the four sides extended downwards so that
falling rain water will not be directed to the cable entries/exits.
All ferrous parts shall be durable with hot dip galvanized or stainless steel.
3.1.3
Cabinet mounting/Installation
The cabinet shall be suitable for the following mounting:
On all type of concrete poles (round and square), or steel poles.
Direct fixing to a concrete or timber wall.
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 1 ,01/05/13
EEPCO
SECTION 3 - CONSUMER METER CABINETS
Recessed fitting in a concrete or timber wall.
Fixing to poles shall be by stainless steel banding.

For pole fixing the cabinet shall be supplied with all necessary brackets and parts.
Fixing to wall shall be screws not less than M8 accessible only from the inside of
the cabinet.
The complete set of installation straps for pole mounting shall be provided as lose
items with each meter box.
Alternatively the pole mounting straps may be provided as a separate item but
included in the meter cabinet cost.
Additional straps shall be provided as extra installation material as specified in the
spares requirements below.
The meter shall be installed at a height of about 2m measured from the ground to
the bottom of the meter box.
It must be noted that due to the multiple uses of poles, staff may stand on the
mounted meter boxes. The brackets and the support inside the boxes shall be
strong enough to support a person standing on the mounted box of weight 100kg,
The stainless steel strap shall also be of suitable strength to support the above
meter box mounting requirements.
3.1.4
IP Rating
The cabinet shall provide protection of IP43 or better standard with the meter
door closed according to IEC 60529.
1st degree 4: protection against solid bodies greater than 1mm.
2nd degree 3: protection against rain falling under the angle.
In addition the meter box shall be able to withstand the mechanical protection of
impact energy 20 joules (hammer of 5 kg falling from a height of 40 cm).
3.1.5
Cabinet door
The cabinet shall be designed with a door.
The door may be of two types a) removable and b) hinged on the side,
a)
Removable door type

The door shall be removable, hook top pattern and secured along the bottom
edge with a triangular head screw(s) with sealing.
b)
Hinged door type

The door may hinged on the side of the cabinet opening to the right side.
It shall allow door opening up to 180o
The door shall also be possible to be removed when opened.
The door hinging mechanism shall be sturdy and it shall withstand strong winds
blowing at the door when it is open.
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 2 ,01/05/13
EEPCO
Padlock facilities shall also be provided for all door types to take a hasp of up to
10mm.
The padlock mechanism shall also keep the door in the closed position if the
sealing screw is loosened or removed.
The cabinet door fitting shall be such that rain water shall not enter the cabinet
(IP43).
The lock closing/opening mechanism shall be operated through a standard
triangular key of 10mm sides.
3.1.6
Internal Back Panel

Back panel shall be provided for the mounting of kWh meters.
The back panel shall allow the meter cabling to run behind. Windows/openings
shall be incorporated for the cable entry/exit at each meter position to
accommodate meters of various types to be connected.
Back panel shall be fixed on the back of the box with at least four screws.
Two of the fixing screw positions shall be located in the area to be covered by
two of the meters, so that when the meters are installed it shall not be possible to
remove the back plate. Alternatively the screws shall be of a special type requiring
a special tool such as an internal star with pin socket.
3.1.7
Cabinet windows for meter reading

Integral polycarbonate or similar windows shall be part of the door, approximately
100 mm square pattern. Durable glass shall also be permitted.
Windows shall be permanently fixed on the meter front door. If the meter
windows are subject to breakage it shall be possible to replace the individual
windows.
The windows shall allow easy reading of installed meters without the need to open
the door. Meters will be read either visually or with the aid of infrared hand-held
meter readers.
The reading window material shall be non-yellowing or discolouring and generally
shall not deteriorate with time.
3.1.8
Cabinet MCBS - RESETTING door

A small door shall be provided for the resetting of the consumer MCBs.
The door shall be of transparent material, water-tight, top hinged, sealable with
easy access to the circuit breakers.
3.1.9
Cabinet Cable entry points

Cable entry holes shall be provided at the bottom of the cabinet.
a)
Utility supply entries for three meter box type

Four (4) utility supply entry holes, in line, shall be provided to allow for single or
three phase cable entries
Two (2) of the utility entries shall be opened and come complete with cable entry
glands for the utility connections.
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 3 ,01/05/13
EEPCO
The gland sizes shall be suitable to accommodate 8-35mm2 single core PVC
covered aluminium cable.
The other two entry wholes shall be constructed with knock-out type entry points
and shall be easy to tap-open the knockouts provided. These positions may be
used if the meter box is required to be used as a 3 phase consumer box.
b)
Utility supply entries for five box type

Two (2) utility supply entry holes, in line, shall be provided to allow for single or
three phase cable entries
The utility entries shall be opened and come complete with cable entry glands for
the utility connections.
The gland sizes shall be suitable to accommodate 8-35mm2 single core PVC
covered aluminium cable.
c)
Consumer supply entries

Three (3) or five (5) consumer cable entries shall be provided for the 3 or 5 meter
type box.
All consumer entries shall be fitted with cable glands.
The gland sizes shall be suitable to accommodate 4 16 mm2 twin core PVC
covered cable.
The glands shall be equipped with two flanges; one as a blanking flange and one
for the cable sealing. Both of the flanges shall be fitted in the gland.
Cable glands of high quality for utility and consumer cables. They shall be durable
and should last for the life time of the equipment i.e. more than 25 years.
d)
Spare glands
One spare glad shall be provided with each box supplied loose in the box in a
plastic bag.
3.1.10
Wiring
The cabinets shall be pre-wired for both meter box types (3 and 5 meter).
Each meter position shall be pre-wired with connections from the supply terminal
to the meter position and from the meter position to the consumer MCBs.
The connection philosophy that will be applied is as follows. The utility supply
will be terminated to the Utility terminal blocks. From the Utility terminal
blocks with pre-installed cables, connection will be made to the meter. From the
meter with pre--installed wired connection will be made to the consumer
MCBs.
The consumer connections will terminate on the load side (bottom) of the MCBs.
The wiring shall be with double insulated PVC, LV, single core 6 or 10mm2
copper cables as specified in the technical schedule.
The wiring colour from the supply point to the meter shall be Red and Black.
The wiring colour from the meter to the MCBs shall be Brown and Black
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 4 ,01/05/13
EEPCO
Black colour shall be used for the neutral in both cases and the red or brown for
the phase conductor.
3.1.11
Terminal blocks for utility connection

Two terminal blocks shall be provided (phase and neutral) to terminate the utility
supply cable and connect the meters.
The terminal blocks shall accept the aluminium incoming utility cable 6-35 mm2
on one side and the meter connection cables on the other side.
Two types of terminal blocks shall be provided a) a five terminal for the three
meter type and b) a seven terminal for five meter box types.
The terminal block shall be able to accept the copper connections to the meter
and the aluminium connection from the pole supply.
Screws shall be minimum 6mm diameter
The terminal block connections shall be clearly visible when the door is open for
inspection.
Terminal blocks shall be installed either directly on the back plate on an integral
base on the meter cabinet or on DIN rails.
The rating of the terminal for the meter connections shall be rated for 90A
The rating of the terminal block for the supply side shall be at least 150A.
The rating of the terminal bar shall be rated for 150A, shall be in-line type tinted
copper with two screws per terminal.
It shall be possible to change the terminal block.
The terminal blocks shall prevent direct contact by bare fingers (IP30)
Spare terminals
For the three meter box it shall be possible to install two additional terminal
blocks in the three-meter box type adjacent to the two provided/preinstalled in
order to enable to make a three phase four wire connection This connection will
be made on site by the utility staff.
For the five meter box no additional terminal blocks are required.
3.1.12
MCBs for consumer connections

Consumer connections will be connected/ terminated on MCB/Isolator pair.
Each pair shall be a module consisting of single pole thermal MCB and a single
pole isolator ganged and operated as a single unit (i.e. type SPN single pole and
neutral).
The SPN shall be a two module unit width type.
The Neutral shall be on the right hand side of the SPN (unit)
The unit shall accept cables up to 25mm2.
The rating of the MCB shall be selected from a range of 6/10/20/32/63A range
as specified in the technical schedules.
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 5 ,01/05/13
EEPCO
The MCB thermal characteristic shall be trip free, type C unless specified
otherwise in the technical schedules.
The preinstalled/ internal wiring shall be connected to the top of the MCB and
the consumer terminals at the bottom of the MCB.
The MCBs shall be trip-free IP 30, rated for fault rating of at least 6kA.
The MCBs shall be installed on rigid DIN rails for snap on fitting.
The MCB general construction and quality requirements shall be according to
IEC standard 60898 and 60947-2.
Electrical endurance shall be at least 4,000 operations
Mechanical endurance shall be at least 20,000 operations
Three (3) or five (5) double units shall be installed and wired in the three meter
or five meter type cabinet respectively.
3.1.13
Cabinet Marking
The exterior of the door shall be permanently embossed with the Client logo and
EEPCo in letters not less than 10 mm height.
Equipment code shall also be provided according to engineers instructions.
For the five meter box one nameplate shall be provided with dimensions 60 x
250mm.
For the three meter box two nameplates shall be provided of size 60x 120mm.
The nameplates shall be mounted on the meter box door, between the windows.
Predrilled holes shall be provided on the front door. The name plates shall be
fixed through two pre-drilled holes. Fixing screws shall be provided including a
spare screw with every box. The name plates shall be 3mm thick of good quality
aluminium and the edges shall me smooth.
3.2
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSUMER METER

BOXES
Item
Three meter box
Five meter box
MCB/isolator sets
Terminal sets
Meter wiring for number of

meters
Glands for utility supply

cables
Glands for consumer cables
Name plates
Key
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 6 ,01/05/13
EEPCO
3.3
SECTION 4 - METERING FOR DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMER
SPARES FOR CONSUMER METER BOXES

The following spare parts shall be supplied with the consumer meter boxes and
shall be part of the cost item for the meter boxes.
4.
Item
Quantity
SPN (MCB &

Neutral).
About 1% of MCBs of each type shall

be provided
Terminal
blocks.
1% of total quantity
Meter cabinet
locking./sealing
screws
1%
Windows
1% if windows are not an integral part

of the meter box
Pole
Installation
straps
2% of installation straps provided
METERING FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER

The metering system shall be used for measuring the supplied energy by pole
mounted distribution transformers. The measurement shall be generally through
CTs and a CT driven meter.
The box shall be suitable for both single phase and three phase metering.
The metering system for the distribution transformers shall comprise of a single
cabinet that will contain the current transformers and the meter.
The supply shall include all materials to establish the full metering system. The
meter may be provided and costed separately as it will be stated in the scope of
works and/or the Bill of quantities for the particular application.
4.1
METER BOX REQUIREMENTS
4.1.1
Materials & Construction

The box must be designed for outdoor installation for climatic conditions as
stated in specification TS-GN-01.
Meter cabinets shall be made from glass fibre reinforced moulded polyester
(SMC), fire-resistant, self-extinguishing and high impact proof.
Average thickness must be at least 3 mm and in any case it shall be able to
withstand the mechanical strength requirements.
Meter boxes made of metal shall not be accepted.
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 7 ,01/05/13
EEPCO

TRANSFORMER
Meter box colour shall be ivory or light grey

Meter cabinets shall be constructed in accordance with the drawings provided.
The bottom of the cabinet shall have the four sides extended downwards so that
falling rain water will not be directed to the cable entries/exits.
All ferrous parts shall be durable with hot dip galvanized or stainless steel.
4.1.2
Cabinet mounting/Installation
The cabinet shall be suitable for the following mounting:
On all type of wood poles, concrete poles (round and square), or steel poles.
Direct fixing to a concrete or timber wall.
Recessed fitting in a concrete or timber wall.
Fixing on the back of the Transformer LV pillar
Fixing to poles shall be by stainless steel banding.
For pole fixing the cabinet shall be supplied with all necessary brackets and parts.
Fixing to wall shall be with screws not less than M8 accessible only from the
inside of the cabinet.
The complete set of installation straps for pole mounting shall be provided as lose
items with each meter box.
Alternatively the pole mounting straps may be provided as a separate item but
included in the meter cabinet cost.
Additional straps shall be provided as extra installation material as specified in the
spares requirements below.
The meter shall be installed at a height of about 2m measured from the ground to
the bottom of the meter box.
It must be noted that due to the multiple uses of poles, staff may stand on the
mounted meter boxes. The brackets and the support inside the boxes shall be
strong enough to support a person standing on the mounted box of weight 100kg,
The stainless steel strap shall also be of suitable strength to support the above
meter box mounting requirements.
4.1.3
IP Rating
The cabinet shall provide protection of IP43 or better standard with the meter
door closed according to IEC 60529.
1st degree 4: protection against solid bodies greater than 1mm.
2nd degree 3: protection against rain falling under the angle.
In addition the meter box shall be able to withstand the mechanical protection of
impact energy 20 joules (hammer of 5 kg falling from a height of 40 cm).
4.1.4
Cabinet door
The cabinet shall be designed with a door.
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 8 ,01/05/13
EEPCO

TRANSFORMER
The door may be of two types a) removable and b) hinged on the side,
a)
Removable door type

The door shall be removable, hook top pattern and secured along the bottom
edge with a triangular head screw(s) with sealing.
b)
Hinged door type

The door may hinged on the side of the cabinet opening to the right side.
It shall allow door opening up to 180o
The door shall also be possible to be removed when opened.
The door hinging mechanism shall be sturdy and it shall withstand strong winds
blowing at the door when it is open.
Padlock facilities shall also be provided for all door types to take a hasp of up to
10mm.
The padlock mechanism shall also keep the door in the closed position if the
sealing screw is loosened or removed.
The cabinet door fitting shall be such that rain water shall not enter the cabinet
(IP43).
The lock closing/opening mechanism shall be operated through a standard
triangular key of 10mm sides.
4.1.5
Internal Back Panel

Back panel shall be provided for the mounting of kWh meters and the Current
Transformers.
The back panel shall allow the meter cabling to run behind. Windows/openings
shall be incorporated for the cable entry/exit at each meter position to
accommodate meters of various types to be connected.
Back panel shall be fixed on the back of the box with at least four screws.
Two of the fixing screw positions shall be located in the area to be covered by
two of the meters, so that when the meters are installed it shall not be possible to
remove the back plate. Alternatively the screws shall be of a special type requiring
a special tool such as an internal star with pin socket.
4.1.6
Cabinet window for meter reading

Integral polycarbonate or similar windows shall be part of the door, approximately
100 mm square pattern. Durable glass shall also be permitted.
Windows shall be permanently fixed on the meter front door. If the meter
windows are subject to breakage it shall be possible to replace the individual
windows.
The windows shall allow easy reading of installed meters without the need to open
the door. Meters will be read either visually or with the aid of infrared hand-held
meter readers.
The reading window material shall be non-yellowing or discolouring and generally
shall not deteriorate with time.
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 9 ,01/05/13
EEPCO
4.1.7

TRANSFORMER
Cabinet Marking
The exterior of the door shall be permanently embossed with the Client logo and
EEPCo in letters not less than 10 mm height.
Equipment code shall also be provided according to engineers instructions.
Two nameplates shall be provided of size 60x 120mm to mark the meter cabinet
with the required installation details. These details will be marked by the client or
the installation contractor...
The nameplates shall be mounted on the meter box door. Predrilled holes shall be
provided on the front door. The name plates shall be fixed through two predrilled holes. Fixing screws shall be provided including a spare screw with every
box. The name plates shall be 3mm thick of good quality aluminium and the
edges shall me smooth.
4.2
CABINET CABLE ENTRY POINTS AND WIRING

a)
Power cables
The cables from the transformer LV shall run through the top of the meter box
from left to right through the ring type CTs.
Only the three phases will run through the meter box.
The position of the cable entries and the current transforms shall be such that the
cable run inside the box shall form an upward bend to prevent rain water from
leaking along the cables and inside the meter box.
Cable glands shall be provided for the power cables such that they shall cushion
the cable entry and seal the meter box entry. These may be made of durable
rubber suitable for the purpose. Also a two part gland may be acceptable to form
a seal and protection for the cable entry/exit.
The power cables shall form a drip line curve before entering the meter box.
b)
Neutral cable
A separate neutral cable from the transformer terminal shall run directly to the
meter.
The neutral cable shall enter the meter box from either side of the box through a
cable gland, below the power cables of at the bottom of the cabinet. The cable
shall be at least 10 mm2 double insulated cable.
The cable shall be connected to the transformer neutral terminal point through
dedicated cable lug. The connection shall be made either directly on the
Transformer neutral lug or it shall be connected on the main supply take-of lug.
c)
Voltage supplies
The voltage reference for the energy measurements shall be derived from an IPC
type line taps connector used with ABC conductors. The taps shall be made on
the three phase main cables running through the meter box on the outgoing side
of the cables. These taps shall be completely sealed and not be possible to
dismantle without destroying them...
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 10 ,01/05/13
EEPCO

TRANSFORMER
These voltage connections (from the main supply cables) shall be connected to
the meter directly without any intervening terminals or MCBs.
The voltage wiring shall be with double insulated PVC, LV, single core 4mm2
copper colour coded cables - Red Yellow Blue.
d)
CT Connections
Connections from the CTs to the kWh meter shall be made using double
insulated PVC, LV, single core 4mm2 copper colour coded cables - Red Yellow
Blue.
4.3
MOUNTING OF CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
4.3.1
Mounting of CTs When LV Pillar is available

When a LV Distribution Pillar is installed the CTs will be installed inside the
distribution pillar on the incoming cables.
The Transformer Meter Box shall be installed either
a)
On the back / side of the LV pillar if a pillar is available and suitable or
b)
On the pole
If the meter box is installed on the LV pillar then the CT/Voltage cables shall run
through a hole between the meter box and the LV pillar, with suitable grommets
and sealing of the cables. Double insulated single core multistring cables may be
used.
If the meter box is installed on a pole then a multicore control cable shall be
installed between the LV pillar and the Meter box. The control cable shall run in a
protective steel or aluminum conduit.
4.3.2
Mounting of CTs Without LV Pillar

If there is no LV pillar the Meter box will be installed on the pole and the
transformer cables will have to run through the Meter box.
Current transformers shall be mounted at the top section of the box in line or
staggered. They shall be mounted on the back-plate of the meter box using rigid
brackets.
Alternatively the box shall come complete with the CTs required for the type of
transformer application (i.e. three CTs for three phase transformer, one CT for
single phase transformer).
The box application type i.e. for single or 3 phase shall be stated in the Bill of
quantities and priced accordingly to reflect the number of CTs to be provided and
installed with the box.
Cables shall be provided for the connection of the current transformers to the
meters. Cables shall be 4 mm2 double insulated copper PVC, LV, single core,
colour coded cables - Red Yellow Blue
CTs shall be as specified under the Metering CTs specifications below.
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 11 ,01/05/13
EEPCO
4.4
SECTION 5 - PACKING AND TESTS FOR

METER BOXES
SEPARATE BOX FOR CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

Notwithstanding the above a Separate box for accommodating the CTs may be
supplied if so requested and specified in the scope of works Technical schedules
or the Bill of quantities.
The CT Box shall be suitable in size and construction for accommodating the
CTs. It shall be made of the same material as the above described box OR
galvanised, OR made of sheet steel with three coats of painting as described in the
specification for LV Pillars. In general it shall be non rusting.
It shall be lockable with a padlock provided the box is securely closed. Once the
lock is in place the box lid shall be securely close and shall not allow vermin and
insects to enter the box.
The Box shall be secured at any convenient place to ensure smooth of heavy
transformer cables.
The power cables entering and leaving the box shall be properly glanded in such a
way as to prevent them from being injured and prevent ingress of water and
insects.
An armoured multicore control cable shall be used to connect the CT Box with
the meter box, of at least 2.5mm. The cable shall be protected in either a steel
pipe or HDPE, or PVC pipe with good protection against the sunlight and
temperatures.
The entry of the control cable shall be properly glanded with a metallic gland,
either stainless steel, brass or an alloy of similar strength.
4.5
METER INSTALLATION
Meters will be provided separately and included in the Bill of Quantities. They
shall be installed in the meter box.
5.
PACKING AND TESTS FOR METER BOXES
5.1
PACKING
The meter box shall be supplied fully assembled, packing each box inside a
transparent plastic bag and paper separators between boxes and into individual
cartons.
5.2
TESTS
The meter box unit must successfully pass the following type test program.
The quality process of the manufacturer for the production of glass-fibber
reinforced polyester boxes must be certified by a qualified association according
to international quality standard ISO 9001 or ISO 9002. Bidders that will not be
accompanied by certificates ISO 9001 or ISO 9002 will not be evaluated and will
be rejected.
5.2.1
Routine test
The following routine tests shall be performed to each box
Overall inspection (test 1 below)
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 12 ,01/05/13
EEPCO
5.3
SECTION 6 - CURRENT TRANSFORMERS FOR

METERS
Solidity of screws and nuts (test 8 below)
FULL TEST PROGRAM ON SAMPLES

The following series of tests shall be performed at the factory or shall be provided
as a Type test performed by an independent Type Testing accredited laboratory.
1) Overall inspection.
2) Deformation test: When applying 10 daN: deflection
on upper part
= 1mm
3) Temperature rise test: Heating limit 65C for electrical parts; 40 C for accessible
parts.
4) Accelerated wet heat test: Equivalent to IEC 68-2-4 cycles of 24 hours, 30C to
57C, Hr 95%.
5) Dielectric test: Impulse 6 kV - industrial frequency 3 kV.
6) Temperature variation and UV test: Equivalent to IEC 68-2-4 and 68-2-5: 20
cycles of 12 hours UV during 5h/12h- temperature 70C to - 25C in 7h; - 25C
to 70C in 2h; 70C during 3h.
7) Heating test: 100 during 5 h.
8) Solidity of screws and nuts.
9) Protection degree: IP 439 as per IEC 529. 20 Joules as per IEC 68.2.2 on window
and the centre of the GRP tank and cover.
10) Resistance to heat and fire: Ball test: applying a steel 5 mm diameter ball during 1
h at 125 with 20N force: deformation < 2 mm. Self-extinguishibility: IEC 695-21; 960C.
A test to prove the mounting arrangements of the box to withstand a person
standing on the box once mounted of weight 100kg.
5.4
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
The Purchaser representatives will inspect the meter boxes for the routine tests.
If type test certificates are not available the Full test program on samples
described above will be organised and executed by the manufacturer and will be
witnessed by the clients representative. The Contractor or his subcontractor shall
provide all reasonable facilities and assistance, including access to drawings and
production data at no charge to the Purchaser.
The costs for the meter boxes shall include the full cost of inspection and shall
include travel expenses from the clients place to the manufacturers premises,
local transport and reasonable accommodation.
6.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS FOR METERS
6.1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The LV current transformers for billing metering must be certified or at least be
certifiable. Full range transformers are to be used (i.e. transformers which
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 13 ,01/05/13
EEPCO

METERS
maintain the specified measuring accuracy throughout the range from 0 to the
permitted maximum current).
The current transformers shall be ring type.
The internal dimensions of the transformer are to correspond to the technical
regulations covering current carrying capacity (cross-section, bus-bar);
Single ratio CTs shall be provided.
6.2
STANDARDS
IEC 60044-1 - Instrument Transformers- Part 1 Current Transformers
IEC 60185 Instrument Transformers Withdrawn Replaced with 60044-1
6.3
CHARACTERISTICS
Primary current transformers shall be of the preferred transformation values of:
a)
b)
Ratios
Primary
nominal current,
In (A)
100
200
300
400
600
800
1000
1500
2000
Secondary
nominal current,
In (A)
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Item
15VA for electromechanical meters
Ratings
Thermal short-time
current:
Maximum voltage:
Dynamic short-time
current:
Thermal nominal
continuous current:
Over-current factor
Insulating material class
Electricity accounting
approval
Ith = 20 x IN
Umax = 0.72 kV
IDyn = 2.5 x Ith
ID = 1.2 x IN
M5 (10% total error up to 5 times the
primary nominal current)
E (continuous thermal stability up to
120C)
class 1.0
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 14 ,01/05/13
EEPCO
6.4

METERS
CONSTRUCTION
According to IEC 60044-1
The CTs shall be of ring type CTs without primary bar, suitable for outdoor use.
The core aperture shall be not less than 40mm diameter in order to accommodate
up to two 300mm2 copper cables.
The current transformer shall be of the cast epoxy resin insulated type suitable for
operation in outdoor tropical climatic conditions as stipulated in climatic
conditions specification. The insulation shall be suitably treated to prevent
deterioration due to ultra violet radiation of sunlight. The dielectric strength shall
not be less than the stipulated in the technical requirements.
The relative polarities shall be permanently marked on the current transformers as
per IEC 60044-1.
Nickel-plated secondary terminals each with 2 plus minus combined screws M5 x
10 mm for the connection of copper conductors up to max. 4 mm2.
Terminals and Terminal Covers
The secondary terminals of the current transformer shall be housed in a weather
resistant and waterproof terminal box with rubber grommet to take out the CT
leads. It shall not be possible for insects to enter the terminal cover.
Secondary terminal housing shall be sealable.
Terminal covers shall preferably be made of transparent material to easily inspect
the terminal conditions without opening the terminal.
6.5
CURRENT TRANSFORMER LABELLING
Manufacturer
Transformer type
Primary/secondary current and ratio
Nominal load (VA)
Instrument number
Accuracy class
Ith (thermal identification symbol)
Winding designation: primary K + L, secondary k + l
Certification seal showing year
6.6
TESTING
6.6.1
Routine Tests
The Routine Tests shall be carried out on all Current Transformers as per IEC 441 and the test report shall be submitted to the Clients representative.
1) Verification of terminal Markings
2) Power frequency withstand on primary winding
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 15 ,01/05/13
EEPCO

METERS
3) Power frequency withstand on secondary winding

4) Power frequency withstand between sections
5) Partial discharge measurement
6) Inter turn voltage test
7) Determination of errors
6.6.2
Type tests
Type test certificates according to IEC 60441-1 shall be provided namely:
1) Short time current curves
2) Temperature rise tests
3) Impulse withstand tests
4) Switching impulse test
5) Wet tests for outdoor type transformers
6) Determination of errors
7) Radio interference
8) Dielectric test
6.7
DOCUMENTS TO BE PROVIDED
a)
The following shall be furnished with the offer.

1) Catalogues describing the equipment and indicating the type and model number.
2) Constructional features, materials used and the relevant technical literature.
3) Complete dimensional drawings.
4) Details of the information indicated on the Name Plate
5) Completed Schedule of technical particulars
6) The B.H curve and saturation characteristic of each type of transformer.
7) Quality assurance certification conforming to ISO 9001.
8) Type Test Certificates conforming to IEC 44-1 from a recognized testing
authority
b)
The Type Test Certificates shall clearly indicate the following;

1) Name, Address and Country of the Testing Authority & Date of Testing.
2) Name of Equipment Type Tested and Basic Parameters
3) Manufacturers identification/Catalogue Reference Number etc.
4) The Standard to which the equipment Type Tested.
5) Comments and Observations of the Testing Authority.
The Type Test Certificates shall be submitted in complete form as furnished by
the testing Authority. Incomplete Type Test Certificates or parts of Certificates
will not be considered.
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 16 ,01/05/13
EEPCO
7.
SCHEDULES
7.1
SCHEDULE FOR METER BOXES AND METER CTS

Technical Schedule Reference TS-ME-02-S
7.2

Specification
Clause
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 17 ,01/05/13
EEPCO
7.3

Specification
Clause
Rev -1- May 2013, Page: 18 ,01/05/13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule for METER BOXES

Please fill more schedules if more types of equipment offered that can fit on this sheet
No
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Meter Box for
Transformers
Type
1
Manufacturer
Catalogue No
Country of Origin
IP rating
Protection devices for each meter
Fuse switch disconnector 1 pole
Type of circuit breaker for meters
Time curve characteristics
10
Rated current
11
Standard for MCBs/ELCBS
12
MCB
13
Neutral of MCB
14
IP rating
15
Fault rating
16
Electrical endurance
operation
17
operation
43 or better
A
IEC 60898,
60947-2
kA
Cable termination data

18
Neutral cable termination bar material
19
21
Neutral cable termination bar rating

Minimum No of cable connections of
Neutral/Earth bar
Gland size of utility supply entires
mm
22
Gland size of Consumer supply entries
mm
23
terminal rating of meter connection
24
terminal rating of supply side
25
terminal bar rating
20
Meter Box Data

26
Meter Box Type Metal (M) Non Metal (NM)
27
Locking Mechanism
28
Padlock Manufacturer
29
Dimensions Height / Width / Depth
Non Metal
Standard Padlock
mm/mm /mm
650x400x250
Requirements for non Metal box

30
Material
31
Thickness of walls
32
Colour (please specify)
Glass fibre
reinforced moulded
polyester (SMC)
mm
at least 3 mm
ivory or light grey
File:TS-ME-02-S R1 Meter Cabinets and Meter CTs 2013-05-01.xls - sheet:TS-ME-02-S1

Page 1 Date: 1/5/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
No
Item
33
Fire resistant
34
Construction/Design
35
Type of fibers
36
Cabinet Door
37
Humidity
Unit
Requirement
Fire resistant
glowing wire
960Cand flame
retardant.
Hot moulded by
compression
Long fiber multi
direction
removalbe with
hook up, or Hinged
door
60 to 95
Bid Offer
Requirements for Separate CT Box

38
Separate Meter Box
39
Material
As per scope
Thickness of walls
Wiring
40
supply point to meter
41
meter to MCBs
42
Wiring size
mm
2.5

Page 2 Date: 1/5/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule for CTs FOR METERS

No
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
1
Manufacturer
Catalogue No
Country of Origin
Type designation
VOLTAGE DATA
i) Rated voltage
ii) Max. voltage
720
iii) Rated frequency

iv) Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage at
sea level
Hz
50
kV peak
kV
kV peak
10
11
12
13
v) Rated power frequency one minute dry

withstand voltage at sea level; phase to ground
vi) Rated switching impulse withstand voltage
at sea level
CURRENT DATA
400
14
i) Rated primary current
15
ii) Rated secondary current
16
iii) Rated short time thermal current Ith

iv) Rated continuous. therm. current (% of
primary)
v) Security factor or accuracy limit factor for:
kA
100, 200, 300, 400,

600, 800, 1000,
1500,2000
5
20 IN
150
17
18
19
20
-metering cores
-protection cores
21
vi) Temperature rise at rated burden above
22
40 oC ambient temperature
23
CT CORE DATA
24
i) Rated output:
oC
25
-core 1
VA
10
26
-core 2
VA
10
27
-core 3
VA
10
28
ii) Accuracy class or knee point:
29
-core 1
Class
30
-core 2
Class
31
-core 3
Class
32
iii) Secondary resistance at 75 oC:
33
-core 1
ohms
34
-core 2
ohms
35
-core 3
MASS, DIMENSIONS &
MISCELLANEOUS
ohms
36

Page 3 Date: 1/5/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
EEPCo

Item
Unit
Requirement
37
i) Min Operating temperature
degr C
-35
38
degr C
+65
39
ii) Max Operating temperature

iii) Dynamic short time current, Idvn
kV
2.5 Ith
40
iv) Overcurrent Factor at 5 x I rated
41
v) Thermal continuous current
%
ID
10
1.2 IN
42
vi) Construction Standard
IEC
60044-1
43
vii) Overall dimensions l-w-h
mm
44
viii) Total mass of single phase unit
kg
45
ix) Material of conducting parts
46
x) Type of terminals and connectors
Bid Offer
shrouded

Page 4 Date: 1/5/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-ME-03
Consumer Service Cables
Rev -0- May 2013
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
May 2013
First Issue
TS-ME-03 R0 service cables.docx
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: i , 1-May-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERNECE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
TYPE TESTS
ROUTINE TESTS
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
2
2
3
5.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
5.1
5.2
CONDUCTOR SIZES FOR CONCENTRIC COPPER CABLES

CONDUCTOR SIZES SINGLE CORE ALUMINUM BUNDLED CABLES
3
3
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
MARKING
CONCENTRIC CABLE CONSTRUCTION DATA
PACKING
SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS OF CONCENTRIC CABLES
SCHEDULES
4
5
1
3
4
10.1
10.2
10.3
SCHEDULE FOR SERVICE CABLES

4
4
5
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: ii , 1-May-13
EEPCO
SERVICE CABLES
1.
SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, supply, delivery and performance
requirements of Service Cables.
2.

See Specification TS-GN-01-EEPCO system and Environmental Data.
3.
REFERNECE STANDARDS
The materials supplied shall conform to the latest edition of appropriate IEC
standard and/or other recognised international standards. In particular,
Specification
Standard Number
3.1
/ Title
IEC 60121
Commercial annealed
conductor wire
aluminium
electrical
IEC 60228
Conductors of Insulated Cables
IEC 60287
Electric Cables - Calculation of Current Rating
IEC 60391
Marking of Insulated Conductors
IEC 60446
Basic and safety principles for man-machine

interface,
marking
and
identification.
Identification of conductors by colours or
numerals
IEC 60502
Extruded solid dielectric Insulated Power Cables

for Rated Voltages form 1kV up to 30 kV
IEC 60540
Test on Insulation and sheaths of electric cables
IEC 60811
Test Methods for Insulating and sheathing

materials for Electric Cables.
VDE 0271
Power cables Insulated and Sheathed with PVC

for Voltages up to and including 6/10kV.
TS-GN-01
General Technical Requirements
CONFLICT
See specification TS-GN-02.
4.

See specification TS-GN-02.
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: 1 , 1-May-13
EEPCO
4.1
TYPE TESTS
Details of tests and requirements for the various sizes of service cables are as follows,
(i)
Test for low and high temperature response of insulation and outer sheath,
(ii)
Bending test,
(iii)
Elongation test,
(iv)
Impact resistance test,
(v)
Heat Shock Test on Insulation and Sheath.

(PVC/A is the insulation compound class designation applicable, and ST1 or ST2 is
applicable for the sheath compound).
(vi)
Insulation Tensile Strength before aging.(N/sq mm )
(vii)
Insulation Tensile Strength after aging (N/sq mm )
(viii)
Insulation Elongation at break before aging (%)
(ix)
Insulation Elongation at break after aging(%)

(The following tests shall be as per IEC 60502, Clause 17.4 with results as per Table
VIII of IEC 60502)
(x)
Sheath Tensile Strength before aging(N/sq mm )
(xi)
Sheath Tensile Strength after aging(N/sq mm )
(xii)
Sheath Elongation at break before aging(%)
(xiii)
Sheath Elongation at break after aging.(%)
(xiv)
High Voltage (1.8kV AC) Test for 4 hours as per VDE 0271, Clause 6.
(xv)
Determination of the Insulation Volume Resistivity as per IEC 60502, Clause 16.2.1
at,
(xvi)
(a)
Ambient Temperature>1E13 ohm cm
(xvii)
(b)
Max. Rated Temperature (70)>1E10 ohm cm
4.2
ROUTINE TESTS
Routine tests shall be carried out on all lengths of cables being supplied.
(i)
4kV AC (or 12kV DC) 5 min. voltage withstand test in accordance with Clause 6 of
VDE 0271 (1986).
(ii)
Measurement of core conductor resistance for each core - results to be in accordance

with Table II of IEC 60228.
(iii)
Concentric copper neutral resistance - results to be in accordance with Table II of

IEC 60228.
(iv)
Length of cable on drum - this shall vary by not more than 5% from the specified
value.
(v)
Resistance Tests.
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: 2 , 1-May-13
EEPCO
4.3
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
(i)
Sheath thickness shall be in accordance with VDE 0271, Clause 5.10.3
(ii)
Insulation thickness shall be in accordance with IEC 60502, Table 1.
(iii)
Cable construction to be such that the sheath can be stripped from insulation and the
cores can be separated from extruded bedding.
(iv)
The colours of the individual core insulations
(v)
Number and diameter of core conductor strands to be as specified above. Diameter

of bare core conductor to be less than the max. value specified.
(vi)
Embossing of sheath to be as specified above.
5.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
5.1
CONDUCTOR SIZES FOR CONCENTRIC COPPER CABLES

The following shall be the preferred sizes. The tendered shall complete the required
technical schedules.
5.1.1
Service Cables Preferred Cable sizes

No of cores
5.1.2
Size mm
Usage
Domestic small users
16
Domestic large Customers
16
Heavy duty house supplies & workshops
25
Large workshops
Insulation
The insulation on the cores shall be a different colour for each core. Insulation
colour for Single core and three core cables shall be according to IEC requirements.
Conductor Insulation EPR (ethylene-propylene-rubber insulation), extruded
insulation
Outer sheath shall be black, elastomeric such as PCP (Polycloroprene)
5.2
CONDUCTOR SIZES SINGLE CORE ALUMINUM BUNDLED

CABLES
The following shall be the preferred sizes. The bidder shall complete the required
technical schedules.
No. Of cores
Size mm2
Usage
10
Domestic small users
16
16
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: 3 , 1-May-13
EEPCO
No. Of cores
Size mm2
Usage
25
Heavy duty house supplies &

workshops
35
Large workshops
All conductors shall be Aluminium without Armour

All cores shall be black and marked with the numbers 1 , 2, 3 or I, II, III for the
three phases.
6.
MARKING
The cable outer sheath shall be marked at every meter interval as follows,
" Electric cable 600/1000V, Size (eg 3x16mm), Material (Al), Maker, Year of
manufacture, running metrage (m) "
The marking shall be either embossed on the cable with the same colour or shall be
painted with indelible paint on the sheath of the cable.
The height of letters and numerals shall not be less than 3mm in the case of single
core cable and 4mm in the case of three core cable.
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: 4 , 1-May-13
EEPCO
7.
CONCENTRIC CABLE CONSTRUCTION DATA
No of cores X number of conductors / cross section

mm2:
1X6/6
1x16/16
3X6/6
3x16/16
3x25/25
3x35/35
3x50/50
3.1
5.1
3.1
5.1
6.4
7.5
8.9
19
1.04
1.70
1.04
1.70
2.14
1.52
1.78
No of strands of neutral concentric conductor:
30
25
120
83
86
73
77
Nominal diameter of each strand of neutral concentric

conductors, mm:
0.5
0.93
0.25
0.5
0.6
0.8
0.9
Nominal thickness of insulation, mm:
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.4
Nominal thickness of outer sheath, mm:
1.4
1.4
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.9
12
16
21
25
28
32
Max phase conductor dc resistance at 20 oc, /km:
3.11
1.16
3.11
1.16
0.74
0.53
0.39
Max neutral conductor dc resistance at 20 oc, /km:
3.11
1.16
3.11
1.16
0.74
0.53
0.39
Coil length, +/- 1 m: if ordered in coils
150
100
100
100
Drum length, +/- 5% m: (if ordered in drums as a

supply only). If part of supply and install, contractor is
free to select sizes
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
Nominal diameter of phase conductor, mm:

No of strands of phase conductor:
Nominal diameter of each strand of phase conductors
before compacting, mm:
Appr. Cable overall diameter, mm:
Cable Marking distance, m:
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: 5 , 1-May-13
SECTION 8 - PACKING
EEPCO
8.
PACKING
Cables shall be placed on drums, reels or delivered in coils as appropriate.
Three copies of each packing list shall be sent to the Client prior to dispatch.
Drums, reels and coils shall be labelled with
(i)
serial number,
(ii)
cable type/size,
(iii)
number of cores,
(iv)
cable length,
(v)
gross and net weight,
(vi)
year of manufacture,
(vii)
drum measurements,
(viii)
the Client's name,
(ix)
Contractor's name,
(x)
Contractor's Agent in The clients country and his address,
(xi)
Contract number,
(xii)
Country of origin and any necessary handling instructions.

In the case of wooden drum the above information shall be marked on one
flange. The position of the cable nose and the direction for rolling as indicated by
an arrow shall be marked on the other flange. All markings shall be clearly and
indelibly made.
Each length of cable shall be durably sealed before shipment to prevent ingress of
moisture. The drums, reels and coils shall be lagged or covered with suitable
material to provide physical protection for the cables during transit and during
storage and handling operations. The lagging shall provide suitable protection
against all climatic conditions prevailing during transport and on site. The wood
used in the construction of drums or lagging should be suitably treated to ensure
that it will not be damaged from outside storage for a period of up to 5 years.
The drums shall be non-returnable and shall have the following dimensions: Max.
Diameter 1000mm; Max. Width: 700mm; Spindle hole 76mm diameter. The
spindle hole shall be reinforced with galvanised steel plates.
Each packing case shall be indelibly marked with the following:
(xiii)
its own individual serial number;
(xiv)
the Client's name;
(xv)
the Contract number, and loan agreement number if applicable;
(xvi)
the Contractor's name;
(xvii)
Contractor's Agent in the clients country and his address;
(xviii)
gross and net weights in kilograms;
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: 1 , 1-May-13
SECTION 8 - PACKING
EEPCO
(xix)
description of contents;
(xx)
case measurements;
(xxi)
country of origin;
(xxii)
and all necessary slinging and stacking instructions.

Each case shall contain a fully detailed packing list in a sealed waterproof
envelope.
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: 2 , 1-May-13
EEPCO
9.
SECTION 9 - SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS OF

CONCENTRIC CABLES
SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS OF CONCENTRIC

CABLES
Fig 1. Single phase concentric cable

Type: CU/EPR/PCP
1.
Round
stranded
conductor
tinned
copper
2.
EPR INSULATION
3.
TINNED COPPER CONCENTRIC CONDUCTOR
4.
PCP SHEATH
Fig 2. Three phase concentric cable

Type : CU/EPR/PCP
1.
Round
stranded
conductor
2.
EPR INSULATION
3.
EXTRUDED FILLING COMPOUND
4.
TINNED COPPER CONCENTRIC CONDUCTOR
5.
PCP SHEATH
tinned
copper
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: 3 , 1-May-13
EEPCO
10.
SCHEDULES
10.1
SCHEDULE FOR SERVICE CABLES

Please see separate technical schedule TS-ME-03.
10.2

Specification
Clause
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: 4 , 1-May-13
EEPCO
10.3

Specification
Clause
Rev -0- May 2013
Page: 5 , 1-May-13
EDTL
Distribution
Schedule: TS-ME-03-S1
Technical Schedule for Copper Concentric Consumer Service Cables
Item
Unit
Require
Require
Require
Require
Require
Bid Offer
Bid Offer
Bid Offer
Bid Offer
Bid Offer
ment
ment
ment
ment
ment
No
1
Manufacturer
Catalogue No
Country of Origin
Cable Type - No of cores X number of
conductors / cross section mm2:
Conductor and screem Material
Imax 30C ambient conductor 70C
1X6/6
1x16/16
3X6/6
3x16/16
3x25/25
Cu
Cu
Cu
Cu
Cu
Condudcor Insulation Material
ERP
ERP
ERP
ERP
ERP
Outer sheath covering material
ERP
ERP
ERP
ERP
ERP
10
Outer sheath colour
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
11
No of strands of phase conductor:
No
12
No of strands of neutral concentric conductor:
No
30
25
120
83
86
13
Nominal thickness of insulation,
mm
1.2
14
Nominal thickness of outer sheath,
mm
1.4
1.4
1.8
1.8
1.8
15
Max phase conductor dc resistance at 20 oC:
/km
3.11
1.16
3.11
1.16
0.74
16
Max neutral conductor dc resistance at 20 oC:
/km
3.11
1.16
3.11
1.16
0.74
17
Phase AC resistance (max)
18
Equivalent 3phase star reactance @50Hz
mohm/km
19
Maximum electrost. Capacity of cable
pF/core/m
20
Design & Normal working voltage (Eo/E)
1000/400
1000/400
1000/400
1000/400
1000/400
21
Power Frequency Withstand, 1 min
kV
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
22
Short circuit current carrying capacity
23
Minimum breaking stress
24
Max Operating Temperature
oC
90
90
90
90
90
25
Nominal weight per meter of completed cable
Kg
26
Max spacing distance of marking
27
Drum length
500
500
28
Drum weight
Kg
29
Cable identification per spec
YES
YES
TS-ME-03-S R0 Service cables.xls, TS-ME-03-S1
mm2
ohm/km
kA at 1 sec
N/mm2
YES
YES
Page 1/1
YES
Page 1/1, 1/5/2013, 20:31
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-SG-01
Pole mounted MV Drop out Fuses
Rev -2- Feb 2013
SPECIFICATION TS-SG-01
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
25/1/2011
First Issue
Rev 1
Jan 2013
Some text and Spec no. Modified from TS-MA-08
Rev 2
Feb 2013
Spec. fitted in the specified template
TS-SG-01 R2 Pole mounted MV Drop out Fuses.docx
Rev -2- Feb 2013
Page: i , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
POLE MOUNTED MV DROP OUT FUSES
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
SYSTEM PARAMETERS& SERVICE CONDITIONS
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT:
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
TYPE TESTS
ROUTINE TESTS
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
1
2
2
5.
DESIGN
5.1
5.2
5.3
GENERAL
CONSTRUCTION
FINISH
2
4
8
6.
7.
PACKING
SCHEDULES
9
9
7.1
7.2
7.3
SCHEDULE FOR POLE MOUNTED MV DROP OUT FUSES

Rev -2- Feb 2013
9
10
11
Page: ii , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 0- POLE MOUNTED MV DROP OUT

FUSES
POLE MOUNTED MV DROP OUT FUSES

1.
SCOPE
This Specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply, delivery and
performance requirements of 15kV and 33kV Pole mounted Dropout Fuses.
2.

3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
3.1
Specification/
Standard Number
Title
IEC 60060
High Voltage Test Techniques
IEC 60129
Alternating Current disconnectors and Earth Switches
IEC 60282-2
High Voltage fuses. parts 2: Expulsion and similar fuses
IEC 60383
Tests on insulators of ceramic material or glass for

overhead lines with nominal voltage greater than 1000V
IEC 60437
Radio Interference test on high voltage insulators
IEC 60507
Artificial pollution tests on high voltage insulators to be

used on A.C. systems.
IEC 60694
Common specification for high voltage switchgear and

control gear standards.
NEMA SG2
High Voltage fuses.
IEEE C37.41
Design tests for high voltage fuses, distribution enclosed

single pole switches, fuse disconnecting switches and
accessories.
ANSI C37.42
American national Standard Specifications for Distribution

Cut outs and Fuse Links.
CONFLICT:
See spec TS-GN-01
4.
4.1
TYPE TESTS
equipment of identical design to prove that the offered equipment satisfies all the
design requirements set out in this specification.
Rev -2- Feb 2013
Page: 1 , 4-Apr-13
SECTION 5- DESIGN
EEPCO
a)
The Fuse cut out

1) Dielectric tests (rated impulse withstand and rated one minute power frequency
withstand test voltages),
2) Temperature rise test.
b)
For Porcelain Fuse Base only.

1) Pull out test for embedded components of the fuse base,
2) Beam strength of porcelain base.
4.2
ROUTINE TESTS
Routine tests shall be carried out on the Equipment in accordance with
IEC60129, IEC 60282. All routine tests will be free of charge to the Employer
and any item not meeting the routine test requirements shall be rejected.
The following tests shall be conducted.
(i)
Visual inspection,
(ii)
Melting Current Tests,
(iii)
Temperature Rise Tests,
(iv)
Time/Current Characteristic Tests.
4.3
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
The following acceptance tests shall be conducted.
(i)
Visual inspection,
(ii)
Inspection of the complete equipment,
(iii)
Checking of the result of the routine and type test as per IEC,
(iv)
Carrying out all or part of tests mentioned in the routine test,
(v)
Checking of conformity to specification.
5.
DESIGN
5.1
GENERAL
5.1.1
Definitions
a)
Dropout Fuse
It is that in which the fuse holder automatically drops into an open position after
the fuse has interrupted the circuit.
b)
Fuse Holder
A fuse holder is an assembly of a fuse tube together with parts necessary to
enclose and provide means of making contact with the conducting element and
the fuse contacts. The fuse holder does not include the fuse link.
c)
Fuse Link
Rev -2- Feb 2013
Page: 2 , 4-Apr-13
SECTION 5- DESIGN
EEPCO
A fuse link is a replaceable part of the assembly, consisting of the conducting

element. It is usually to be replaced on circuit interruption to restore the fuse to
the operating conditions.
d)
Fuse link removing Eye

A hole in the fuse holder or fuse unit which is provided for receiving a fuse hook
or switch hook for inserting or removing the fuse into/out of the fuse support.
e)
Terminal (Terminal Connector)

A terminal is a connector for attaching a conductor to electrical apparatus.
f)
Rated Interrupting Current
g)
The rated interrupting current of a fuse is the designated highest available R.M.S
short-circuit current at which the fuse is designed to perform its disconnection
function under stated conditions.
h)
Recovery Voltage
Recovery voltage is the voltage, which occurs across the terminals of a pole of a
circuit interrupting device after an interruption of the current.
i)
Break Distance
The break distance of a fuse or switch is the minimum open-gap distance between
the live parts when the fuse holder is in the open position.
5.1.2
ELECTRICAL PERFORMACE CHARACTERISTICS

System Nominal Voltage
15kV
33kV
Highest Equipment voltage
24kV
52kV
Rated current carrying capacity
100A
100A
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage values

For the fuse base
To earth and between poles(peak)
125kV
250kV
Across the isolating distance
130kV
260kV
Rated one minute power frequency withstand voltage (dry & wet)
To earth and between poles (rms)
50kV
95kV
Across the isolating distance(rms)
76kV
105kV
Radio interference voltage
250mV
250mV
Temperature rise limit (In Air) as per IEC 60129

Copper contacts silver faced
65C
65C
Terminals
50C
50C
Rev -2- Feb 2013
Page: 3 , 4-Apr-13
SECTION 5- DESIGN
EEPCO
Metal parts acting as springs
The temp. shall

not reach such a
value
that
elasticity of the
metal is changed
The temp. shall not

reach such a value
that
elasticity of the
metal is changed
Rated breaking capacity 1sec.
12kA
16kA
5.2
CONSTRUCTION
5.2.1
MV Pole-Mounted Drop out Fuse Sets

The MV Pole mounted dropout fuses shall consist of:
a)
Cross-arm mounting bracket,
b)
Fuse holder,
c)
Fuses.
1) The MV Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse Sets shall be of the outdoor type, and
completely assembled and tested at the manufacturers workshop. The equipment
in the MV Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse Sets shall be installed with necessary
clearances, easy access to the HRC fuses for testing, maintenance, removal and
normal operation and to provide safety measures against all possible hazards.The
MV Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse Sets of similar ratings shall have the same
dimensions having components and devices interchangseable with those of other
units.
2) These Dropout Fuse Sets shall be designed to ensure that thermal interaction
does not unduly affect the performance of any of the components.Each set of
MV Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse Sets shall include a cross-arm mounting
bracket.The MV Dropout Fuse Sets shall be supplied with mounting bolts, nuts
and washers. Bolt threads shall conform to ISO. The nuts shall have a proper fit
so that the nut can be run over the entire length of the threads without an undue
force.
3) The MV Pole-Mounted Dropout Fuse Set shall be installed on cross-arms at PoleMounted MV/0.4 kV Transformer Substations.
4) Dropout Fuse Sets shall be hand-operated from ground level using a glass fibre
tube stick, which shall also be designed to facilitate replacement of the fuse links.
Dropout Fuse Sets shall be of single-phase type.
5) Contacts of the fuse cut-out shall be suitable to terminate the line conductors.
6) Fixing brackets, bolts, nuts, hooks and washers for mounting of the cut-outs shall
be provided.
7) Fuses shall be co-ordinated with the ratings of the related distribution
transformers.
8) The cut outs shall be of single vent type (downward) having a front connected
fuse carrier suitable for angle mounting.
Rev -2- Feb 2013
Page: 4 , 4-Apr-13
SECTION 5- DESIGN
EEPCO
(ii)
5.2.2
All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised in accordance with the relevant
standard .Nuts and bolts shall conform to IEC.Spring washers shall be electrogalvanised.
FUSE BASE TOP ASSEMBLY
The top current carrying parts shall be made of a highly conductive copper alloy
and the contact portion shall be silver plated for corrosion resistance and efficient
current flow. The contact shall have a socket cavity for latching and holding
firmly the fuse carrier until the fault interruption is completed within the fuse.
The top contact shall be actuated by a strong steel spring which keeps it under
sufficient pressure to maintain a firm contact with the fuse carrier during all
operating conditions. The spring shall also provide flexibility and absorbs most
of the stresses when the fuse carrier is pushed into the closing position.
The current carrying parts of the assembly shall be protected from water and dust
formation by a stainless steel top cover.
The top contact assembly shall have a robust galvanised steel hook to align
and guide the fuse carrier into the socket latch even when the fuse carrier is
closed at an off-centre angle.
The top assembly shall have an aluminium alloy terminal connector
The top assembly shall be robust enough to absorb the bulk of the forces during
the fuse carrier closing and opening operations and shall not over-stress the
spring contact. It shall also prohibit accidental opening of the fuse carrier due to
vibrations or impact.
5.2.3
FUSE BASE BOTTOM ASSEMBLY

The conducting parts shall be made of high strength highly conductive copper
alloy and the contact portion shall be silver plated for corrosion resistance and
shall provide a low resistance current path from the bottom fuse carrier contacts
to the bottom terminal connector.
The bottom assembly shall have hinge contacts made from highly conductive,
anti-corrosive copper alloy and shall accommodate and make a firm contact with
the fuse carrier bottom assembly. The fuse carrier shall be placed easily in or
lifted from the hinges without any manoeuvring. In addition, the bottom
assembly shall perform the following functions ;
When opened manually or after fault interruption the fuse carrier shall swing
through 180o to the vertical and its further travel shall be prevented by the fuse
base bottom assembly.
The fuse carrier shall be prevented from slipping out of the self locking hinges
during all operating conditions and only when the fuse carrier has reached its fully
open position can it be removed from the hinge support.
The assembly shall have aluminium alloy terminal connectors
5.2.4
FUSE CARRIER TOP ASSEMBLY

The fuse carrier top contact shall have a solid replaceable cap made from highly
conductive, anti-corrosive copper alloy and the contact portion shall be silver
plated to provide a low resistance current path from the fuse base top contact
Rev -2- Feb 2013
Page: 5 , 4-Apr-13
SECTION 5- DESIGN
EEPCO
to the fuse link. It shall make a firm contact with the button head of the fuse
link and shall provide a protective enclosure to the fuse link to check the
spreading of the arc during fault interruptions.
The fuse carrier shall be provided with a cast bronze opening eye (pull ring)
suitable for operation with a hook stick from the ground level to pull-out or closein the fuse carrier by manual operation.
5.2.5
FUSE CARRIER BOTTOM ASSEMBLY

The fuse carrier bottom assembly shall be made of bronze castings with silver
plating at the contact points to efficiently transfer current to fuse base. It shall
make smooth contact with the fuse base bottom assembly during closing
operation.
The bottom assembly shall have a lifting eye for the hook stick for removing or
replacing the fuse carrier.
The bottom assembly shall have a suitable ejector which shall perform the
following functions.
It shall keep the fuse link in the centre of the fuse tube and keep it tensioned
under all operating conditions.
It shall be capable of absorbing the shock when the fuse carrier is pushed into the
closed position and shall not allow the fuse link to be damaged. This is especially
important when the fuse link is of low-ampere rating.
The ejector at the instant of interruption shall retain the fuse carrier in the closed
position long enough to ensure that the arc is extinguished within the fuse tube
thereby excluding the possibility of arcing and subsequent damage at the contact
surfaces.
The ejector shall help the fuse link separation after fault interruption, allowing the
fuse carrier to drop out and clearing the pigtail of the blown fuse link through the
bore of the fuse tube.
5.2.6
FUSE BASE (PORCELAIN)AS PER IEC 60383

The fuse base shall be a bird-proof, single unit porcelain insulator with a
creepage distance (to earth) not less than 480mm for 15kV and 1040mm for
33kV. The top and bottom assemblies as also the middle clamping hardware
shall be either embedded in the porcelain insulator with sulphur cement or
suitably clamped in position. For embedded components, the pull out strength
should be such as to result in breaking of the porcelain before pull out occurs in
a test. For porcelain insulators, the beam strength shall not be less than 1000 kg.
The insulator shall be preferably marked with the rated voltage and the minimum
basic insulation level.
5.2.7
FUSE TUBE
The fuse tube shall be made of moulded fibre glass reinforced polyester
coated with ultraviolet inhibitor on the outer surface and having arc quenching
bone fibre liner inside. The tube shall have high bursting strength to sustain
high pressure of the gases during fault interruption. During switching operation
circuit interruption shall be accomplished entirely within the interrupter without
Rev -2- Feb 2013
Page: 6 , 4-Apr-13
SECTION 5- DESIGN
EEPCO
external arc or flame. As the blade begins to open, the current shall be
transferred to the interrupter by a shunt contact against the interrupters
external contact before the current carrying main contacts part, followed by the
arc extinction in the interrupter. During closing, the sequence shall be reversed.
The fuse tube cap may be of the expendable type.
The inside diameter of the fuse tube shall be 17.5mm. The solid cap of the fuse
carrier shall clamp the button head of the fuse link, closing the top end of the
fuse tube and allowing only the downward venting during fault interruption.
The assembly shall be designed such that the fuse tube can be closed without
using much undue care even when the closing force is applied from an angle. A
lifting eye shall be provided on the fuse tube and designed for use with a hookstick. The fuse tube shall be permanently marked with the following:
Supplier/Manufacturer, model, maximum continuous current rating, rated
maximum voltage phase to phase, rated symmetrical amperes as per IEC
requirements.
5.2.8
MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
The cut outs shall be provided with a suitable arrangement for mounting these
on suitable channel cross arm in such a way that the centre line of the fuse base
is at an angle of 15o to 20o from the vertical and shall provide the necessary
clearances from the support. Mounting arrangement shall be made of high
strength galvanised steel flat and shall be robust enough to sustain the various
stresses encountered during all operating conditions of the cut out.
The strength of the component shall be determined by clamping the member
with the shorter leg at the top to a rigid support by M-10 carriage bolts. A
downward force shall be applied along the axis of M-14 carriage bolt parallel to
the longer leg and in the direction of the longer leg of the member under test. A
load of 50 Kg. shall be applied and then removed to take up any slack in the
mounting arrangement before the measurement of the position is taken. The
permanent set measured at the axis of the M-14 carriage bolt shall not exceed
1.6mm when a load of 425 Kg. is applied and removed.
The strength of the M-14 bolt shall in no case be less than1900 Kg. and the
strength of M-10 bolts not less than 3500 Kg.
5.2.9
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS
The cut out shall be provided with two aluminium alloy terminal connectors at
top and bottom of fuse base assemblies to receive aluminium conductors of
diameters between 6.3mm to 10.05mm. These terminals shall be easily accessible
irrespective of the cut out location with respect to the pole. The terminals shall
meet the test requirements of relevant construction standard..
5.2.10
Earthing
The metal structure shall have a provision for earthing. Earthing terminals shall be
suitable for accepting copper conductors of the diameter of 6 to 11 mm. The
terminals shall be made of copper and shall be tin-plated. All metal parts not
meant to carry current shall be connected to a double earthing system and suitable
earthing terminals shall be provided with all the equipment.
Rev -2- Feb 2013
Page: 7 , 4-Apr-13
SECTION 5- DESIGN
EEPCO
Earthing terminals having clamping bolts of at least 12 mm dia. shall be provided

on the frame.
5.2.11
Operating Gear
a)
Each unit must be provided with the necessary operating gear to allow the load
isolator disconnector to be operated from the ground the operating handle being
mounted about 1.25 metres above the ground,
b)
The operating handle shall be arranged to take a standard padlock with 6mm
hasp,
c)
All joints employed in the operating link must be capable of withstanding

vibration due to wind so that no slackening can occur,
d)
A suitable insulating insert shall be fitted in the operating link to safeguard any
person operating the disconnector,
e)
The insulating medium to be used shall be stated by the Supplier in the attached
schedule,
f)
The length of the operating link shall allow its use on poles which have a
maximum over-ground height of 11 meters.
5.2.12
Operating Speed and Effort

The Supplier shall state the minimum speed of operation and the time for the
complete opening needed to interrupt the current. Also he shall state the initial
and follow through pull needed to do this, at any time during the life of the
switch, assuming that the recommended maintenance is regularly carried out.
5.2.13
Connections
a)
The terminals on the load isolator units for connection of the line conductors
shall be such that the danger of connections working loose due to vibration is
minimised,
b)
The terminals must be capable of taking up to 200mm2 conductors,
c)
The terminals shall be suitable for accepting both aluminium and copper
conductors without the risk of corrosion. The conductor tightening bolts shall
consist of silicon bronze,
d)
Alternatively, terminals shall be parallel groove type suitable for up to 200mm2

AAAC conductor.
5.2.14
Earthing Screws and Lugs

Each unit shall be provided with earthing screw and lugs in an accessible position
for earthing the operating gear and switch framework. The earthing screw shall
have a diameter not less than 6.5mm.
5.3
FINISH
All iron and steel parts shall be protected against corrosion by hot dip galvanising
to BS EN ISO 1461 or equivalent.
Rev -2- Feb 2013
Page: 8 , 4-Apr-13
SECTION 6- PACKING
EEPCO
6.
PACKING
The drop out fuses shall be packed securely. Please see also TS-GN-02.
7.
SCHEDULES
7.1
SCHEDULE FOR POLE MOUNTED MV DROP OUT FUSES

Please see separate technical schedule TS-SG-01.
Rev -2- Feb 2013
Page: 9 , 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
7.2

Schedule Ref TS-SG-01-NC1
Specification
Clause
Rev -2- Feb 2013
Page: 10, 4-Apr-13
EEPCO
7.3

Item Reference TS-SG-01-TC1
Specification
Clause
Rev -2- Feb 2013
Page: 11, 4-Apr-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule: TS-SG-01-S
Technical Schedule for Pole mounted MV Drop out Fuses (15 and 33kV)
Please complete schedule as required
No
Item
Unit
Requirement Bid Offer Requirement Bid Offer
Nominal System Voltage
1
Country of manufacture
Type
Type tested
5
6
Standards
Rated operating Line Voltage
7
8
15kV
Pole Mounted
33kV
Pole Mounted
Yes
Yes
kV
IEC/ VDE
15
IEC/ VDE
33
Maximum Equipment Voltage
kV
24
36
kVp
125
250
Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50

s,
dry)frequency
phase to earth
Power
withstand voltage
9.1
(1
min.,
phase
to wet)
earth
kV
50
95
9.2
across isolating distance
kV
76
80
10
Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50

s,
dry)
phase
to earth
kVp
Across isolating distance
kV
kV
75
95
170
195
11
Rated frequency
Hz
50
50
12
Rated current
100
100
13
Rated interrupt capacity
kA
12
16
14
Creepage distance phase to ground
mm
480
1040
15
Fuse type Link- current time

characteristics
Operation
single phase
drop out fuse
single phase
drop out fuse
10.1
10.2
16
File:TS-SG-01 S Pole mounted MV Drop out Fuses.xlsm- sheet:TS-SG-01-S
Page 1
Date: 04/04/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-SG-02
MV Surge Arrestors
Rev -2- Mar2013
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
12 Dec 2012
Rev 1
Feb 2013
Some text modified and spec fitted in specified template
Rev 2
Mar 2013
Insulation levels modified to suit higher altitudes
TS-SG-ts-sg-02 r2a docx surge arrestors.doc
Rev -2- Mar2013
Page: 1 , 10-Mar-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
MV SURGE ARRESTORS
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT:
4.
INSPECTION AND TEST TESTING
4.1
4.2
4.3
TYPE TESTS
ROUTINE TEST
ACCEPTANCE TEST
2
3
3
5.
DESIGN
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
GENERAL
BASIC CHARACTERISTICS OF SURGE ARRESTERS
USE 4
INTERFACIAL SEALING
TERMINALS
MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS
PROOF AGAINST MOISTURE
DROP OUT FEATURE
OVER PRESSURE RELIEF
WEIGHT
CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO EARTH.
GALVANIZING
POLLUTION PERFORMANCE
MARKING
PACKING MARKING AND DELIVERY
3
4
6.
7.
INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE SUCCESSFUL

BIDDER
SCHEDULES
6
7
7.1
7.2
7.3
SCHEDULE FOR MV SURGE ARRESTORS

7
7
8
TS-SG-ts-sg-02 r2a docx surge arrestors.doc
Rev -2- Mar2013
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
Page: 2 , 10-Mar-13
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO
MV SURGE ARRESTORS
1.
SCOPE
This specification covers the design, testing and performance requirements for
gapless metal oxide surge arresters (SA) for outdoor use, in the clients system
nominal voltages of 15kV and 33 kV.
2.

See Specification TS-GN-01 General System Data.
The Equipment/Material shall be used in installations at altitudes as specified in
the technical schedules and TS-GN-01 above.
This specification is produced for a nominal 15kV and 33kV system.
Care must be exercised to ensure that the clearances and creepage distances of the
surge arrester housing is suitable for the altitude specified in the General system
Data.
In addition to the system parameters stated in specification TS-GN-01 in view of
the uncertainties of the system earthing in urban and rural areas the surge arresters
shall be designed to be used both in networks with isolated neutral as well in
networks earthed via earthing transformers or resistively or solidly earthed.
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
standards and/or other recognized international standards. The following IEC
publications or other national or international standards, which ensure equal or
higher quality, shall be applicable
Standard
Title
IEC
International Electro-technical Commission
IEC-60071-1
Insulation co-ordination Part 1 Definitions, principles

and rules
IEC-60071-2
Insulation co-ordination Part 2 Application guide
IEC 60099-4
Surge arresters - Part 4 Metal-oxide surge arresters

without gaps for a.c. systems
IEC 60099-5
Surge arresters - Part 5 Selection and application

recommendations
IEC TC 37
Artificial Pollution testing of Surge Arresters
IEEE C62.1
Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits
NEMA LA1
Surge Arresters
BS EN ISO 1461
Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles
ts-sg-02 r2a docx surge arrestors.doc
Rev -2- Mar2013
Page: 1 , 10-Mar-13
EEPCO
3.1
CONFLICT:
International Standard IEC 60099-4: Surge arresters - Part 4 Metal-oxide surge
arresters without gaps for a.c. systems shall apply except where modified by this
Technical Specification.
Also See spec. TS-GN-01 General System Data
4.

4.1
TYPE TESTS
Type tests shall be carried out in accordance with the practices and tolerances of
IEC 60099, with the exception of the High Current Impulse Withstand Test.
Before proceeding with the high current impulse withstand test, the dry power
frequency spark over voltage and peak residual voltage at rated current shall be
measured according to the relevant clauses of IEC 60099. After the high current
impulse withstand test, which shall then be carried out in accordance with IEC
60099, these measurements shall be repeated. The test specimens shall be judged
by their physical conditions and by comparison of the oscillograms taken during
the residual voltage tests.
The dry power frequency spark over voltage shall not have changed by more than
10% and the residual voltage shall not have changed by more than 20%.
The following tests shall be conducted.
(i)
Voltage withstand tests of arrester insulation
(ii)
Power-frequency voltage spark over test
(iii)
Standard lightning voltage impulse spark over test
(iv)
Lightning-voltage impulse spark over voltage test
(v)
Switching-voltage impulse spark over voltage/time curve test
(vi)
Residual voltage test
(vii)
Current impulse withstand tests
(viii)
Operating-duty test
(ix)
Pressure-relief tests
(x)
Tests of arrester dis-connectors when fitted
(xi)
Temperature cycle test on porcelain housing
(xii)
Porosity test on porcelain components
(xiii)
Galvanizing test on metal parts
(xiv)
Visual examination of porcelain housing
(xv)
Sealing test
To prove the effectiveness of sealing of the surge arresters, either of the following
two tests shall be carried out:
Rev -2- Mar2013
Page: 2 , 10-Mar-13
SECTION 5 - DESIGN
EEPCO
1) Bubble Test
A positive pressure shall be created inside the arrester and it shall be immersed in
water to check if there are any bubbles.
2) Pressure/Vacuum Test
Leakage shall be checked by measuring leak rate either by monitoring drop in
pressure or rise in vacuum level with time or by
4.2
ROUTINE TEST
a)
Nominal Discharge Current
b)
Max. Standard Impulse Spark-over Voltage
c)
Cont. resistive current of the Arrestor
d)
Cont. capacitive current of the Arrestor
e)
Steep current impulse. Residual Voltage
f)
Max residual voltage at switching impulse of 0.5kA
g)
Leakage Current Test i.e. a measurement of the leakage current at voltage

corresponding to 100%, 60% and 40% of the rated voltage.
4.3
ACCEPTANCE TEST
The Acceptance test procedure for any delivery of equipment are as follows:
(i)
Dry power-frequency voltage spark over test on the complete arrester
(ii)
Standard lightning - voltage impulse spark over test on the complete arrester
(iii)
Residual voltage test at the nominal discharge current on the complete arrester or
sections
(iv)
Temperature cycle test on porcelain components
(v)
Porosity test on porcelain components
(vi)
Visual examination of housing
5.
DESIGN
5.1
GENERAL
The surge arresters shall be of the zinc oxide (ZnO) type without spark gaps. The
surge arresters shall be delivered complete with NEMA pattern mounting
brackets for mounting on steel cross arm and bearers. The surge arresters shall
conform to IEC 60099-4 where applicable together with draft IEC TC 37 WG4
suitable for given service conditions.
The surge arresters shall meet the following Performance Characteristics
requirements:
Any weather-exposed steel parts shall be hot-dip galvanized.
Rev -2- Mar2013
Page: 3 , 10-Mar-13
SECTION 5 - DESIGN
EEPCO
5.2
BASIC CHARACTERISTICS OF SURGE ARRESTERS

System Nominal Voltage
15kV
33kV
Rated Voltage (Ur)
18 kV
36kV
Max. cont. operating voltage(Uc)
14.4kV
28.8kV
Nominal Discharge Current In
10kA peak
10kA peak
Discharge Current Class
Rated frequency
50 Hz
50 Hz
Creepage distance of bushing
480 mm
1040 mm
Short-circuit capability
10 kA
10 kA
Max residual voltage at In
59 kV
108kV
Max. Standard Impulse spark over
53
97
<1.5
<1.5
<1.5
<1.5
(based on 8/20 microsecond waveform)
voltage(based on 8/20 wave microsecond

waveform) (kV Peak)
Cont. resistive current of the
Arrestor(mA)
Cont. capacitive current of the
Arrestor(mA)
Steep current impulse. Residual Voltage 59 kV peak
108kV peak
for 8/20 wave)
5.3
USE
The arresters will used to protect:
Distribution transformers with the LIWV/BIL level of which are as

specified in the technical schedules.
Interface between overhead line and cables
Interface with substation at terminal poles
Intermediate positions on distribution overhead lines
Rev -2- Mar2013
Page: 4 , 10-Mar-13
SECTION 5 - DESIGN
EEPCO
5.4
INTERFACIAL SEALING - PROOF AGAINST MOISTURE

The Supplier shall describe the sealing process used to keep out moisture and shall
state his experience with the design offered. The adhesion between the housing
and the metal-oxide resistors or any other metallic or non-metallic parts inside the
housing must be strong enough, homogeneous, robust and resistant to thermal
cycles and environmental stresses.
The method of factory testing of the seal shall be described.
5.5
TERMINALS
Live conductor terminals of SAs covered by this specification shall accept copper
or aluminium conductors without danger of corrosion. To this end, the arrester
terminal shall be cadmium plated or some other alternatives acceptable to the
Purchaser.
Terminals shall be suitable for use with the following ranges of conductor sizes:
Copper conductor- 35 to 70 mm2
Aluminium conductor - 50 to 200 mm2
The earthing terminal shall be suitable for stranded earth lead conductor
galvanised/stainless-steel or aluminium 25-75 mm2.
5.6
MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS
Arresters shall be suitable for horizontal, vertical or at an angle mounting. The
arresters shall be connected between phase and earth.
Distance between the arresters and the protected transformer shall not be more
than 2.5 m.
Mounting brackets shall be provided and supplied with each surge arrester
packaging to facilitate mounting of arresters on channel and angle iron crossarms.
5.7
DROP OUT FEATURE

A disconnecting device (ground lead isolator) shall be provided to disconnect the
arrester from the network in case of failure and to indicate visually the faulty
arrester in case of arrester failure.
The method of operation of the drop out shall be described.
5.8
OVER PRESSURE RELIEF

All arresters shall be fitted with a pressure relief device.
Pressure relief class shall be stated (A, B or C per IEC 60099-1). Additionally,
surge arresters shall fulfil the low current pressure relief key elements of the latest
recommendations of IEC TC 37 (WG-4).
5.9
WEIGHT
The Bidder shall state the net weight of the arrester(s) offered.
Rev -2- Mar2013
Page: 5 , 10-Mar-13
EEPCO
5.10
SECTION 6 - INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED

BY THE SUCCESSFUL BIDDER
CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO EARTH.

Minimum values of creepage distance to earth shall be:
a)
15kV arresters- 380mm
b)
33kV arrester- 1040mm
5.11
GALVANIZING
All exposed ferrous components, unless of stainless steel, shall be hot dip
galvanized in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461.
5.12
POLLUTION PERFORMANCE
The required creepage for housings is classified as medium pollution level with
specific creepage of 20 mm/kV (Um) at sea level.
5.13
MARKING
Each arrester shall be provided with a nameplate, according to IEC 60099-4
5.14
PACKING MARKING AND DELIVERY

Surge Arrestor units shall be packed in durable crates and each crate shall contain
3 units. The crates shall be packed on a pallet.
The packing shall afford adequate protection for the surge arrestors during
handling, transportation and storage.
The packaging should be signed the necessary information (delivery address,
product description, delivery condition, etc.) and included the list of contents.
6.
INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE

SUCCESSFUL BIDDER
Complete outline drawings (cross view, side view, top view) of the surge arrester
and top view of its metal fittings for approval (3 sets) prior to the construction of
the surge arrester.
Drawing indicating as how the arrester is to be mounted on a steel support
structure.
Assembly instructions for the arrester itself.
Proposed maintenance instructions (if any).
Rev -2- Mar2013
Page: 6 , 10-Mar-13
EEPCO
7.
SCHEDULES
7.1
SCHEDULE FOR MV SURGE ARRESTORS

Please see separate technical schedule TS-SG-02
7.2

Specification
Clause
Rev -2- Mar2013
Page: 7 , 10-Mar-13
EEPCO
7.3

Specification
Clause
Rev -2- Mar2013
Page: 8 , 10-Mar-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule TS-SG-02-S

Technical Schedule for MV Surge Arrestors
No
Item
System nominal voltage
Unit
Requirement
kV
15
Bid Offer
Requirement
Bid Offer
33
Manufacturer
Country of origin
Applicable Standards
Rated voltage (Ur)
kV
18
IEC 60099-4,
IEC 60099-5
IEC TC 37
WG4,
36
kV
14.4
28.8
Maximum continuous operating voltage of

the arrester(Uc)
Nominal discharge current (8/20 ms)
kA
10
10
Discharge class
Lightning impulse (8/20 wave) max. Voltage

at
10kA
Rated
frequency, Hz
kV
53
97
Hz
50
50
10
Continuous resistive current of the arrester, A
mA
<1.5
<1.5
11
Continuous capacitive current of the arrester,

A
Steep current impulse residual voltage max,
mA
<1.5
<1.5
kV
59
108
53
Suitable for
Alloy of copper
and aluminum
105
97
Suitable for
Alloy of copper
and aluminum
25-100
25-100
Galvanized,
stainless steel
No
No
Galvanized,
stainless steel
No
No
See TS-GN-01
See TS-GN-01
See TS-GN-01
See TS-GN-01
See TS-GN-01
See TS-GN-01
See TS-GN-01
See TS-GN-01
12
IEC 60099-4,
IEC 60099-5 IEC
TC 37 WG4,
kV
Maximum residual voltages at switching
13.1 impulse
at 0.5 kA
kV
13.2
kV
13
at 1.0 kA
14
Lightning impulse residual voltae at 8/20

microsec impulse wave
14.1 1.0 times nominal discharge current
14.2 2.0 times nominal discharge current
15
Material of arresters phase terminals
16
17
18
19
20
Material of arresters ground terminals

Conductor size suitable for line terminals,
mm2
Material of arrestor terminals
23
Equipped with counter

Equipped with leakage current indicator,
Yes/No
Cantilever strength allowed
Dimensions of the arresters
System Data
Ambient air temprature range
24
25
26
Altitude range, m
Lightning impulse protection level
Creepage distance of bushing, mm
21
22
kV
kV
mm2
Yes/No
C
M
kV(peak)
TS-SG-02-S R2 MV Surge Arrestors PV .xlsm, TS-SG-02-S
Date: 10/3/2013,10:54
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-SG-03
Pole Mounted Distribution Box with MCCBs
Rev -2- April 2013
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
Jan 2013
First Issue
Rev 1
Feb 2013
Rev 2
25 April 2013
Changes in MCCBs requirements
TS-SG-03 R2a Pole mounted Distn. box with MCCBs 2013-04-28.docx

Rev -2- April 2013
Page: i , 27-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
POLE MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION BOX MCCBS
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT:
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
TYPE TESTS
1
ON COMPLETE LV DISTRIBUTION BOX
1
MCCB
2
ROUTINE TESTS
2
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
2
TESTING & MANUFACTURING FACILITIES:
2
CTL(COMMITTEE OF TESTING LABORATORIES) TESTING OF MCCBERROR! BOO
5.
BOX DESIGN
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
GENERAL
BUSBARS AND CONNECTIONS
NEUTRAL BAR
EARTH BAR
DISTRIBUTION BOX CONSTRUCTION
CABLE TERMINATIONS
3
3
3
3
3
5
6.
MCCBS
6.1
GENERAL
7.
8.
9.
BOX NAME PLATE DETAILS

PACKING AND MARKING
SCHEDULE FOR POLE MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION BOX
WITH MCCBS
7
7

8
9
9.1
9.2

Rev -2- April 2013
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
POLE MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION BOX

WITH MCCBS
1.
SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply of pole
mounted Distribution Box with MCCBs to be employed with distribution
transformer substations.
2.

3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
3.1
Specification/ Standard
Number
Title
IEC 60144
Degrees of protection of enclosures for lowvoltage switchgear and control gear
BS 5486 part-12
Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear

assemblies
IEC 60408
Lowvoltageairbreakswitches,airbreak
disconnectorsandfusecombinationunits
DIN 43620
Low voltage high rupturing capacity fuses with

blade contacts
IEC 61439
Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear
CONFLICT:
See spec TS-GN-02
4.

4.1
TYPE TESTS
Type tests shall be carried out on Distribution boxes being offered, in accordance
with the relevant IEC/ BS standard.
4.2

(i)
Temperature rise test:
(ii)
High voltage test.
(iii)
Short time withstand current test on distribution box.

Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 1 , 27-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
(iv)
Test for degree of protection (IP-43) on complete unit.
(v)
Time/current characteristics test
4.3
MCCB
All type tests on MCCB as per IEC/BS
4.4
ROUTINE TESTS
These tests shall be carried out per IEC at the manufactures works to ensure that
the product is in accordance with the design offered. The manufacturer shall
supply a certificate indicating the result of the entire test carried out on the
equipment.
4.5
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
The Acceptance test procedure for any delivery of the equipment are as follows:
(i)
Visual inspection
(ii)
Checking of the results of the routine and type tests
(iii)
Carrying out all or part of tests mentioned in the routine test
(iv)
Checking of conformity to specification
4.6

The bidder must clearly indicate the testing facilities available in the works of the
manufacturer and whether the facilities are adequate to carry out all routine
acceptance and type tests.
4.7
(i)
Power operated shearing machine
(ii)
Power operated press brake.
(iii)
Power operated power presses
(iv)
Welding machines,
(v)
Assembling tools.
SAMPLE TESTING
To ensure the quality of MCCB, routine & acceptance tests on MCCBs may be
carried out at the works of original manufacturer. Besides this, dimensional
checking on one No MCCB from each lot may be carried out by dismantling the
MCCB and compare the same with the internal drawing of type tested MCCB.

Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 2 , 27-Apr-13
SECTION 5 - BOX DESIGN
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
5.
BOX DESIGN
5.1
GENERAL
The requirement is for a standard box design to accommodate
Types of circuits
Small
Large
Incoming circuits 3 phase

No MCCBs
Outgoing 3 phase with

3x1ph MCCBs
Street lighting 1 phase

One MCCB
630A
630A
Busbar rating
The MCCBs are connected between the bus bars in the Box and the outgoing
cables for distribution loads.
5.2

Bus Bars & inter connecting links provided inside the distribution box shall be of
anodized Electrolytic grade aluminium as per relevant standard. All bus bars &
links should be properly drilled, de-burred preferably brazed to minimize tearing
of joints and provided with durable PVC insulating sleeves, standard colour code
shall be used for different phases. In so far as possible shrouding shall be provided
to form an insulated barrier between operator and the live bus bars.
The size of the phase bus bars shall be depending on the current to be carried
from the transformer LV cables plus 50%.
5.3
NEUTRAL BAR
The neutral bar shall be rated at the full rating of the phase bus bars. It shall be
insulated from the frame of the distribution box but a bolted link shall be
provided to connect it to the frame.
5.4
EARTH BAR
A copper earth bar shall be fitted near the bottom of the Distribution box. A
number of copper lugs shall be provided bolted to the earth ready to accept
outgoing cables. The earth bar shall be insulated from the frame but connected to
the neutral bar by a removable strap/bar.
5.5
5.5.1
General
The L.V. Distribution boxes shall be designed for installation on the D.P.
structure of the outdoor 15/0.4 KV Pole Mounted Distribution substation. These
Distribution Boxes shall be fabricated with 2 mm CR sheet steel.

Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 3 , 27-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
The body of the boxes shall have sufficient reinforcement with suitable size of
channels keeping a provision for fixing these boxes on pole structure.
The roof of the box shall be slightly slanting both sides or to the back with an
overhang of 50mm all around.
The Distribution Box should be preferably of IP-54 protective category
There shall be provision for fluorescent lighting inside the cabinet which shall be
operated with a dedicated switch.
5.5.2
Cable entries
Cable entries shall be designed for ABC cables of sizes between 35, 50 and 95mm2
XLPE.
The bottom of the box shall have a 3.15 mm thick steel plate for securing the
outgoing/incoming cables. The plate shall be provided with knockout holes
suitable for cable sizes indicated. The bottom plate shall be provided with two air
vents with perforated M.S. sheet of 1.25mm thick welded from inside. Suitable
size of stainless steel cable glands should be provided for these holes.
A complete set of screw type compression cable glands shall be provided with
each box suitable for outdoor use with those cables specified in the schedules. The
glands shall not be PVC or plastic. Each gland shall be capable of carrying the
short circuit current rating of its associated cable and be provided with such
fittings necessary for fixing in tapped or untapped entry hole.
Alternatively 70mm pipe with smoothed edges of suitable size shall be welded
with each hole where the cable can enter and then sealed with a suitable hardening
compound to act as a gland. The compound can be a flexible bitumastic setting
compound.
5.5.3
Ventilation
Four sets of louvers shall be provided on the sides or doors to ensure that the
temperature inside the enclosure is not substantially different from that of the
atmosphere. The louvers shall be backed with perforated M.S. sheet of 1.25 mm
welded from inside the LV Distribution Box. The nuts, bolts, washers used in the
box shall be galvanized to avoid corrosion.
5.5.4
Finishing
All sheet metal works shall undergo the 7 tank chemical and mechanical cleaning
process before final paint. The entire box shall be duly acid treated.
Two coats of red oxide and two coats of final paints shall be applied. Colour of
outside/inside surface shall be mentioned in this specification. Electrostatic
painting with oven drying will also be acceptable.
M.S. parts such as Bolts& Nuts, washers etc. shall be electro galvanized for nonelectrical use.
5.5.5
Size of Box
The box shall be of standard design and size to take up to outgoing and incoming
circuits

Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 4 , 27-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
5.5.6
Earthing
The box shall have a solid earthing point and an earthing bar for the earthing of
the outgoing cables. Box earthing point shall be provided both on the inside and
the outside of the box, to allow earthing according to local requirements.
5.5.7
Doors and Hinges

The doors shall be provided on the front side. The Box shall have single/double
door with locking arrangement and a door handle. Padlocks shall be used for
door locking.
Doors shall be earth bonded to the main structure.
The door hinges shall not be visible from outside. Minimum 3 Nos. Hinges per
door made of heavy duty MS Sheet of minimum length of 75 mm shall be
provided from inside. The hinges shall be of such design to prevent them from
malfunctioning due to inadvertent rusting
5.5.8
Miscellaneous
All joints for current carrying parts shall be made using non-magnetic stainless
steel bolts or brass, 2 nuts & spring washers. The nuts and bolts should be of
hexagonal type with groove for bolt.
Electrolytic grade copper bus bars are mounted on epoxy resin cast bus insulators
fixed on suitable fixing arrangement. The bus bars shall be conveniently placed so
as to provide adequate clearance from the body of the box conforming to the
relevant standard.
The distribution boxes shall be duly wired with suitable size of PVC insulated
copper /aluminum flat. Cable glands of sufficient size and cable cleats for support
of the cables shall be provided. The bus bars shall be fitted with lugs of suitable
size for receiving the incoming cables from the transformer. Proper arrangement
shall be made for connection between the bus bars and the MCCBs and outgoing
cables. Sufficient space shall be provided for bending and termination of the
cables. Access shall be provided for insertion of clip on meters for taking load
readings on the feeders.
Instruction leaflet in Amharic should be provided as sticker in the LV Distribution
Box.door from inside.
The Danger marking with fluorescent paint shall be provided on one door and a
danger plate shall be riveted on another door, on front side.
5.6
CABLE TERMINATIONS
Cable terminations shall be provided for the transformer incoming cables to the
Busbars as well as the outgoing circuits.

Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 5 , 27-Apr-13
SECTION 6 - MCCBS
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
6.
MCCBS
6.1
GENERAL
These MCCBs shall be conforming to IEC61439 or any other relevant standard.
6.1.1
Rated current
63A,100A, 125A,160 A,200A, 300A
No. of poles per phase
Rated service short circuit breaking

capacity(kA)
Min. 18kA
Sequence of operation
O-t-CO-t-CO, and t=3 min.)
Test voltage, phase to phase
Phase to phase 400V
At 0.4 PF
Phase to earth 230V
Power factor for short circuit (Max.)
0.4 (lag)
TIME CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS

Single pole MCCB is to be provided with over load trip release with inverse time
current characteristics for overload protection and magnetic trip release for
instantaneous tripping in the wake of Short-Circuits. The characteristics shall be as
follows:
Multipleofratedcurrent(Ir)
Trippingtime(T)
1.05In
2.5hrs.
1.2In
>10min.and<2hrs
1.3In
30min.
1.4In
10min.
2.5In
1min.
4.0In
Notlessthan2sec.
5.0In
<5sec
12In
Instantaneousi.e.<40ms
The Distribution Box shall have 3 Nos. of single pole MCCBs per circuit to
control and protect outgoing circuits. The MCCBs shall be manually operated type
and shall have quick make quick break mechanism.

Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 6 , 27-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
SECTION 7 - BOX NAME PLATE DETAILS
The Terminal Connector strips of the MCCB shall be projecting out of the MCCB
for minimum length of 40 mm on bus bar side and 60 mm on outgoing cable side
connected through lugs.
All nut bolts used for assembly and connections shall be of non-magnetic stainless
steel only.
The MCCBs shall be marked with Brand Name of manufacture and Ics in kA by
embossing only whereas other particulars may be marked as per the manufacturers
standard practice.
The contacts of MCCB should be self-wiping type so as to keep the contacts clean
and milli-volt drop low.
7.
BOX NAME PLATE DETAILS

Each unit shall be provided with a rating plate of weather proof material showing
the following items indelibly marked.
1) Manufacturer's Name,
2) Manufacturer's Code Number,
3) Manufacturer's Serial Number,
4) Year of Manufacture,
5) MCCB particulars.
6) Voltage Rating,
7) Current Rating,
8) Short Circuit Rating,
9) Gross Weight.
8.
PACKING AND MARKING

See spec.No.TS-GN-02.

Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 7 , 27-Apr-13
SECTION 9 - SCHEDULE FOR POLE

MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION BOX WITH MCCBS
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
9.
SCHEDULE FOR POLE MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION

BOX WITH MCCBS
Please see separate technical schedule TS-SG-04 S.
9.1

Schedule Ref -NC1
Specification
Clause

Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 8 , 27-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
9.2

MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION BOX WITH MCCBS

Item Reference -TC1
Specification
Clause

Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 9 , 27-Apr-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule: TS-SG-03-S1

Technical Schedule for LV Pole mounted Distribution Boxes with MCBs
No Item
Unit
Box Reference
4 way
6 way
Type Designation
Standard
I
1
DISTRIBUTION BOX
Thickness of MS sheet on all sides
mm
Thickness of MS sheet for bottom plate
mm
3.15
3.15
3
4
5
II
1
2
3
4
5
6
Protective category
Colour
Total weight of the Distributio Box
BUSBARS
Size of main busbars HxW
Rating of Busbar
Size of dropper links
Outgoing circuit ways
Size of Neutral busbars
Rating of Busbars
IP-43
Gray
IP-43
Gray
630 Minimum
630
0.4
1000
0.4
1000
III ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTCS

1 Rated Voltage
2 Rated insulation voltage
IEC 61439
kg
mm
A
mm
No
mm
kV
V
File:TS-SG-03 S R2 LV Pole mounted Distn Box 2013-04-28.xlsm - sheet:TS-SG-03-S1
Page 1 Date: 28/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
No Item
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
EEPCo
Rated operational current of circuits

Rated Making capacity
Rated short circuit making capacity
Rated Short time withstand current
Impulse with stand voltage
Protection Class
Incoming Terminals cross section
12 Outgoing Terminals cross section

13 Clearance between open contact
14 Clearance between poles (center to
center)
15 Creepage distance,
16 Mechanical endurance
Unit
kA
kA
kA
kA
kV
kA
mm2
mm
mm
mm
mm
kN
400
1.2
1.2
20
10
3
8
IP23
Up to 300
400
1.2
1.2
20
10
3
8
IP23
Up to 300
Up to 2x90
Up to 2x90
92
80
92
80
As per IEC
60947
80
As per IEC
60947
80
Page 2 Date: 28/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for MCCBs for LV Pole mounted Distribution Boxes
No
Item
MCCB current rating reference
Type Designation
Standard
Rated Voltage per phase
No. of poles
4
5
Unit
A
Require Bid Offer

ment
63
Require Bid Offer

ment
100
Require Bid Offer

ment
125
Require Bid Offer

ment
160
Require Bid Offer

ment
200
Require Bid Offer

ment
300
IEC 61439
kV
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
63
100
125
160
200
300
Fixed overload setting
90%
90%
90%
90%
90%
90%
kA
>18
>18
>18
>18
>18
>18
Rated service short circuit breaking

capacity
kA
10
10
10
10
10
10
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
IV
1
2
3
4
Mutiple of rated current and time

Mutiple of rated current and time 2.5In
Mutiple of rated current and time 4In
Impulse with stand voltage
BUSBARS
Size of main busbars
hrs.
min.
sec
sec
millisec
kV
kA
2.5
1
2
<5
<40
3
8
2.5
1
2
<5
<40
3
8
2.5
1
2
<5
<40
3
8
2.5
1
2
<5
<40
3
8
2.5
1
2
<5
<40
3
8
2.5
1
2
<5
<40
3
8
mm
mm
mm
kg
Page 3 Date: 28/4/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-SG-04
Pole mounted Distribution Box with Fuse cut out
Rev -2- April 2013
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
Jan 2013
First Issue
Rev 1
Feb 2013
Rev 2
April 2013
Catridge type fuses links included.
TS-SG-04 R2 Pole mounted Distn. box with fuse cut out 2013-04-28.docx
Rev -2- April 2013
Page: i , 27-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
POLE MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION BOX WITH FUSE CUT OUT
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT:
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
TYPE TESTS
ROUTINE TESTS
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
1
1
2
2
2
5.
BOX DESIGN
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
GENERAL
NEUTRAL BAR
EARTH BAR
CABLE TERMINATIONS
3
3
3
3
3
5
6.
FUSE LINK REQUIREMENTS
6.1
6.2
6.3
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF HOLDERS

FUSE CUT OUT
CARTRIDGE FUSE LINK
6
6
6
7.
8.
9.
NAME PLATE DETAILS

PACKING AND MARKING
SCHEDULE FOR POLE MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION BOX
WITH FUSE CUT OUT
7
8
9.1
9.2
8
10

Rev -2- April 2013
SECTION 0 - POLE MOUNTED

DISTRIBUTION BOX WITH FUSE CUT OUT
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
POLE MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION BOX WITH FUSE

CUT OUT
1.
SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply of Fuse cut out
with catridge fuse links in a pole mounted Distribution Box for use at Pole
mounted distribution transformer substations for LV lines .
2.

3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
Specification/ Standard
Number
Title
IEC 60144
Degrees of protection of enclosures for lowvoltage switchgear and control gear

Low Voltage Fuses
Low voltage high rupturing capacity fuses with
blade contacts
IEC 60269-1
DIN 43620
BS 88
Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and including 1000

V a.c. and 1500 V d.c.
3.1
CONFLICT:
See spec TS-GN-02
4.

4.1
TYPE TESTS
Type tests shall be carried out on Distribution boxes being offered, in accordance
with the relevant IEC/ BS standard.
4.2

(i)
Temperature rise test:
(ii)
High voltage test.
(iii)
Short time withstand current test on distribution box.
(iv)
Test for degree of protection (IP-43) on complete unit.
(v)
Time/current characteristics test

Type tests shall be carried out on Fuse Cut outs in accordance with BS 88.
Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 1 , 27-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
4.2.2
Fuse Cut outs

(i)
Verification of Insulating Properties:

This test shall be carried out in accordance with Clause 8.2 of BS 88. The test
voltage shall be 2500V (rms) power frequency, applied
between both terminals with the fuse link removed.
between live parts and exposed conductive parts with the fuse link and fuse
carrier in place.
(ii)
Verification of Rated Power (Heat) Acceptance,
(iii)
This test shall be carried out in accordance with Clause 8.3 of BS 88,
(iv)
Verification of Breaking Capacity,
(v)
Test No. 1 on Table 8(a) in Clause 8.5 of BS 88, Part 6 shall be carried out on
complete assembly of fuse link and fuse cut out,
4.3
ROUTINE TESTS
These tests shall be carried out per IEC at the manufactures works to ensure that
the product is in accordance with the design offered. The manufacturer shall
supply a certificate indicating the result of the entire test carried out on the
equipment.
4.4
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
The Acceptance test procedure for any delivery of the equipments are as follows:
(i)
Visual inspection
(ii)
Checking of the results of the routine and type tests
(iii)
(iv)
4.5

The bidder must clearly indicate the testing facilities available in the works of the
manufacturer and whether the facilities are adequate to carry out all routine
acceptance and type tests.
(i)
Power operated shearing machine
(ii)
Power operated press brake.
(iii)
Power operated power presses
(iv)
Welding machines,
(v)
Assembling tools.
Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 2 , 27-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
5.
BOX DESIGN
5.1
GENERAL
The requirement is for a standard box design to accommodate
Types of circuits
Small
Large
Incoming circuits 3 phase

No Fuses/Links
Outgoing 3 phase with

3x1ph Fuse/Links
Street lighting 1 phase

One Fuse
630A
630A
Busbar rating
The fuse-links are connected between the bus bars in the Box and the outgoing
cables for distribution loads.
5.2

Bus Bars & inter connecting links provided inside the distribution box shall be of
anodized Electrolytic grade aluminium as per relevant standard. All bus bars &
links should be properly drilled, de-burred preferably brazed to minimize tearing
of joints and provided with durable PVC insulating sleeves, standard colour code
shall be used for different phases. In so far as possible shrouding shall be provided
to form an insulated barrier between operator and the live bus bars.
The size of the phase bus bars shall be depending on the current to be carried
from the transformer LV cables plus 50%.
5.3
NEUTRAL BAR
The neutral bar shall be rated at the full rating of the phase bus bars. It shall be
insulated from the frame of the distribution box but a bolted link shall be
provided to connect it to the frame.
5.4
EARTH BAR
A copper earth bar shall be fitted near the bottom of the Distribution box. A
number of copper lugs shall be provided bolted to the earth ready to accept
outgoing cables. The earth bar shall be insulated from the frame but connected to
the neutral bar by a removable strap/bar.
5.5
5.5.1
General
The L.V. Distribution boxes shall be designed for installation on the D.P.
structure of the outdoor 15/0.4 KV Pole Mounted Distribution substation. These
Distribution Boxes shall be fabricated with 2 mm CR sheet steel.
Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 3 , 27-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
The body of the boxes shall have sufficient reinforcement with suitable size of
channels keeping a provision for fixing these boxes on pole structure.
The roof of the box shall be slightly slanting both sides or to the back with an
overhang of 50mm all around.
The Distribution Box should be preferably of IP-54 protective category
There shall be provision for fluorescent lighting inside the cabinet which shall be
operated with a dedicated switch.
5.5.2
Cable entries
Cable entries shall be designed for ABC cables of sizes between 35, 50 and 95mm2
XLPE.
The bottom of the box shall have a 3.15 mm thick steel plate for securing the
outgoing/incoming cables. The plate shall be provided with knockout holes
suitable for cable sizes indicated. The bottom plate shall be provided with two air
vents with perforated M.S. sheet of 1.25mm thick welded from inside. Suitable
size of stainless steel cable glands should be provided for these holes.
A complete set of screw type compression cable glands shall be provided with
each box suitable for outdoor use with those cables specified in the schedules. The
glands shall not be PVC or plastic. Each gland shall be capable of carrying the
short circuit current rating of its associated cable and be provided with such
fittings necessary for fixing in tapped or untapped entry hole.
Alternatively 70mm pipe with smoothed edges of suitable size shall be welded
with each hole where the cable can enter and then sealed with a suitable hardening
compound to act as a gland. The compound can be a flexible bitumastic setting
compound.
5.5.3
Ventilation
Four sets of louvers shall be provided on the sides or doors to ensure that the
temperature inside the enclosure is not substantially different from that of the
atmosphere. The louvers shall be backed with perforated M.S. sheet of 1.25 mm
welded from inside the LV Distribution Box. The nuts, bolts, washers used in the
box shall be galvanized to avoid corrosion.
5.5.4
Finishing
All sheet metal works shall undergo the 7 tank chemical and mechanical cleaning
process before final paint. The entire box shall be duly acid treated.
Two coats of red oxide and two coats of final paints shall be applied. Colour of
outside/inside surface shall be mentioned in this specification. Electrostatic
painting with oven drying will also be acceptable.
M.S. parts such as Bolts& Nuts, washers etc. shall be electro galvanized for nonelectrical use.
5.5.5
Size of Box
The box shall be of standard design and size to take up to outgoing and incoming
circuits
Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 4 , 27-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
5.5.6
Earthing
The box shall have a solid earthing point and an earthing bar for the earthing of
the outgoing cables. Box earthing point shall be provided both on the inside and
the outside of the box, to allow earthing according to local requirements.
5.5.7
Doors and Hinges

The doors shall be provided on the front side. The Box shall have single/double
door with locking arrangement and a door handle. Padlocks shall be used for
door locking.
Doors shall be earth bonded to the main structure.
The door hinges shall not be visible from outside. Minimum 3 Nos. Hinges per
door made of heavy duty MS Sheet of minimum length of 75 mm shall be
provided from inside. The hinges shall be of such design to prevent them from
malfunctioning due to inadvertent rusting
5.5.8
Miscellaneous
All joints for current carrying parts shall be made using non-magnetic stainless
steel bolts or brass, 2 nuts & spring washers. The nuts and bolts should be of
hexagonal type with groove for bolt.
Electrolytic grade copper bus bars are mounted on epoxy resin cast bus insulators
fixed on suitable fixing arrangement. The bus bars shall be conveniently placed so
as to provide adequate clearance from the body of the box conforming to the
relevant standard.
The distribution boxes shall be duly wired with suitable size of PVC insulated
copper /aluminum flat. Cable glands of sufficient size and cable cleats for support
of the cables shall be provided. The bus bars shall be fitted with lugs of suitable
size for receiving the incoming cables from the transformer. Proper arrangement
shall be made for connection between the bus bars and the MCCBs and outgoing
cables. Sufficient space shall be provided for bending and termination of the
cables. Access shall be provided for insertion of clip on meters for taking load
readings on the feeders.
Instruction leaflet in Amharic should be provided as sticker in the LV Distribution
Box.door from inside.
The Danger marking with fluorescent paint shall be provided on one door and a
danger plate shall be riveted on another door, on front side.
5.6
CABLE TERMINATIONS
Cable terminations shall be provided for the transformer incoming cables to the
Busbars as well as the outgoing circuits.
Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 5 , 27-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
SECTION 6 - FUSE LINK REQUIREMENTS
6.
FUSE LINK REQUIREMENTS
6.1
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF HOLDERS

The fuse-cut outs shall be designed to meet the
following electrical characteristics
Rated voltage of network
Rated current of device
Load current making/breaking capacity
Rated frequency
Rated power frequency withstand voltage
Degree of protection withstand
6.2
400A
230/400V
400A
400A
50Hz
5kV
IP23
FUSE CUT OUT

J Type fuse links shall be preferable but no mandatory.
The unit shall be single pole type and shall comprise of fuse base, fuse contacts,
arcing tips, fuse carrier and cable reception. The fuse cut outs shall be mounted on
materials with similar thermal capacity as the bus bars.
The terminals of the fuse base shall be suitable to receive Aluminium or copper
cables up to 300sq.mm. from the bus bars. one cable shall be connected to the
neutral bar from the transformer neutral.
The insulation material for the fuse holder body shall be glazed porcelain or
approved cast resin (glass reinforced polyester D.M.C.). In the case of porcelain
the configuration shall be well rounded for resistance to mechanical shock. The
fuse carrier will be required to take cartridge fuse links of 92mm length or
equivalent. Tightening screws shall have insulated tops to enable the fuse carrier
to be removed without safety equipment tools (rubber gloves, etc.).
The terminals shall be suitable for taking either copper or aluminium, solid or
stranded conductors. The connector surface finishing material shall be tin. The
preparation and treatment, including tin analysis, quality of application and
thickness shall be arranged and supervised so that the resulting surface finish shall
give outdoor protection for 25 years. The connector tightening bolts shall consist
of Silicon Bronze. Special tools shall not be required for tightening up the
connectors.
The adhesion/strength of thumb screws shall be adequate for the forces applied.
The manufacturer shall show evidence of this. GRP and DMC materials are
preferred.
The current rating of the base and carrier shall be not less than 400 amps. All
metal parts shall be non-ferrous. Arcing tips shall be provided to safeguard the
fuse when it is removed from the live circuit. To facilitate maintenance, the design
shall be such that when the fuse carrier is withdrawn, a minimum number of parts
remain connected to the incoming conductors/cables.
All fuse cut outs shall be supplied complete with cartridge type fuse links.
6.3
CARTRIDGE FUSE LINK

The cartridge fuse link comprises of an insulated container, extinguishing medium,
fuse element and caps which enclose the tube ends and anchor the fuse element,
Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 6 , 27-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
SECTION 7 - NAME PLATE DETAILS
and end tags attached to the outside of the end caps and electrically connected to
the element. The fuse-links shall meet the requirements of IEC 269-1. The rated
current of the fuse link shall be carried continuously without deterioration and
shall be marked on it.
The fuse link shall be suitable for use with the fuse cut out described above.The
maximum value of power dissipation shall be in accordance with BS 88, Part 5.
The rated breaking capacity of the fuse link shall be 46kA as per BS 88, Part 5.
The pre-arcing characteristic for each fuse rating offered (to comply with BS 88)
and the operating time-current characteristic for each fuse rating offered shall be
provided.
All plastic parts shall be weather-resistant. All ferrous parts shall be protected by
hot dip galvanizing.
Fuse links once inserted into position the contacts shall be tightened with
insulated screw holders to ensure good contact.
Fuse link shall have a means to indicate whether the fuse has operated or not. The
fuse-links shall meet the following electrical characteristics:
1) Rated voltage of network 230/400 V,
2) Rated frequency 50 Hz,
3) Rupturing capacity 46 kA,
Current ratings of the fuse cut out sets required are given in the schedule of
prices.
The fuse links shall be designed to be removed safely from the fuse base without
any special tools while the circuit is alive.
The fuse links shall be designed to be inserted onto a faulty circuit safely from the
fuse base without any special tools while the circuit is alive. Under no
circumstances the insertion of the fuse link onto a faulty circuit shall endanger the
operator.
7.
NAME PLATE DETAILS

Each unit shall be provided with a rating plate of weatherproof material showing
the following items indelibly marked.
1) Manufacturer's Name,
2) Manufacturer's Code Number,
3) Manufacturer's Serial Number,
4) Year of Manufacture,
5) Voltage Rating,
6) Current Rating,
7) Short Circuit Rating,
8) Gross Weight.
Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 7 , 27-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
8.
PACKING AND MARKING

See spec.No.TS-GN-02.
9.
SCHEDULE FOR POLE MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION

BOX WITH FUSE CUT OUT
9.1

Schedule Ref -NC1
Specification
Clause
Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 8 , 27-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO

MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION BOX WITH FUSE
CUT OUT
Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 9 , 27-Apr-13

MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION BOX WITH FUSE
CUT OUT
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
9.2

Item Reference -TC1
Specification
Clause
Rev -2- April 2013
Page: 10 , 27-Apr-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for LV Pole mounted Distribtion box with Fuse Cut out
No Item
Unit
Box Reference
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
4 way
6 way
Type Designation
Standard
DISTRIBUTION BOX
Thickness of MS sheet on all sides
mm
Thickness of MS sheet for bottom plate
mm
3.15
3.15
Protective category
IP-43
IP-43
Colour
Gray
Gray
II
BUSBARS
Size of main busbars HxW
Rating of Busbar
630 Minimum
630 Minimum
mm
Outgoing circuit ways
No
mm
Rating of Busbars
Bid Offer
IEC
61439
kg
mm
A
File:TS-SG-04-S R2 Pole mounted Distn. box with fuse cut out 2013-04-28.xlsm - sheet:TS-SG-04-S1
Page 1 Date: 28/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

No Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
Bid Offer
III ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTCS

1
2
Rated Voltage
Rated operational current of circuits
0.4
1000
0.4
1000
400
400
kA
1.2
1.2
Rated Making capacity
kA
1.2
1.2
Rated short circuit making capacity
kA
20
20
kA
10
10
kV
kA
8
IP23
Up to 300
8
IP23
Up to 300
mm2
mm
Up to 2x90
Up to 2x90
92
92
14 Clearance between poles (center to

) distance,
15 Creepage
mm
80
80
mm
16 Mechanical endurance
kN
As per IEC
60947
80
As per IEC
60947
80
9 Impulse with stand voltage

10 Protection Class
11 Incoming Terminals cross section
12 Outgoing Terminals cross section
13 Clearance between open contact
21
Net weight
kV
V
mm
kg
Page 2 Date: 28/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for Fuse Links for the Pole mounted Distn. Box 63 to 200 A
No
Item
1
2
3
Reference
Type Designation
Standard VDE 043/620,IEC269-1
Rated Voltage
6
7

2
2
Pre-arcing joule integral, I t, A S
9
10
11
Operating joule integral, I2t, A2S

Convection fusing current
Convection non fusing current
12
13
Recovery voltage
Size according to IEC 269-1
14
15
16
Net weight
Standard package
Unit
A
Require
ment
63
Bid Offer
Require
ment
100
Bid Offer
Require
ment
160
Bid Offer
Require
ment
200
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
kV
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
A
kA
63
120
100
120
160
120
200
120
A
A
1.6xIn
1.25xIn
1.6xIn
1.25xIn
1.6xIn
1.25xIn
1.6xIn
1.25xIn
780
II
Copper
with
silver
surface
780
II
Copper
with
silver
surface
780
II
Copper
with
silver
surface
780
II
Copper
with
silver
surface
Bid Offer
kg
Pcs.
Page 3 Date: 28/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for Fuse Links for the Pole mounted Distn. Box 2/2 - 250 to 400A
No
Item
1
2
3
Reference
Type Designation
Standard VDE 043/620,IEC269-1
Rated Voltage
6
7

Pre-arcing joule integral, I2t, A2S
9
10
11
12
13
Operating joule integral, I2t, A2S

Convection fusing current
Convection non fusing current
Recovery voltage
Size according to IEC 269-1
14
15
16
Net weight
Standard package
Unit
A
Require
ment
250
Bid offer
Require
ment
300
Bid offer
Require
ment
350
Bid offer
Require
ment
400
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
kV
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
A
kA
250
120
300
120
350
120
400
120
A
A
V
1.6xIn
1.25xIn
780
II
Copper
with
silver
surface
1.6xIn
1.25xIn
780
II
Copper
with
silver
surface
1.6xIn
1.25xIn
780
II
Copper
with
silver
surface
1.6xIn
1.25xIn
780
II
Copper
with
silver
surface
Bid offer
kg
Pcs.
Page 4 Date: 28/4/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-SG-06
15kV Pole Mounted Load Break Switch
Rev -3- May 2013
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
Jan 2013
First Issue
Rev 1
Feb2013
Spec no. changed and fitted in the specified template
Rev 2
Mar 2013
Insulation values modified
Rev 3
23 May 2013
Specification number changed.
TS-SG-06 R3 15kV Pole mounted Load break switch.docx Rev -3- May 2013
Page: 1 , 30-May-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
15KV POLE MOUNTED LOAD BREAK SWITCH
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
TYPE TESTS
ROUTINE TESTS
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
1
2
2
5.
DESIGN
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
GENERAL
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIALS
MOUNTING
2
3
3
4
6.
7.
8.
MARKINGS
PACKING
SCHEDULES
4
4
4
8.1
8.2
8.3
SCHEDULE FOR 15KV LOAD BREAK SWITCH

4
1
2
Page: 2 , 30-May-13
EEPCO
SECTION 0 - 15KV POLE MOUNTED LOAD

BREAK SWITCH
15KV POLE MOUNTED LOAD BREAK SWITCH

1.
SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply, delivery and
performance characteristics of Out door 15kV Pole mounted Load Break Switch for
manual operation.
2.

3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
3.1
Specification/Standard
Number
Title
IEC 60120
Dimension of Ball & Socket coupling of string

Insulator Units
IEC 60129
Alternating Current disconnectors and Earth

Switches
IEC 60265
High Voltage Switches
IEC 60471
Dimension of Clevis & Tongue coupling of

string Insulator units
BS 3288
Insulator pins and conductor fittings for

overhead power lines
CONFLICT
See spec TS-GN-01
4.

4.1
TYPE TESTS
The following type tests as per the relevant standard shall be conducted on the equipment
of identical design to prove that the offered equipment satisfies all the design
requirements set out in this specification
The supplier shall confirm on the attached schedule that the following tests have been
performed according to the relevant IEC
(i)
Dielectric test (Impulse and one minute wet power frequency withstand voltages)
(ii)
Temperature rise test (for contacts and terminals)
(iii)
Rated mainly Active Load Breaking Capacity
Page: 1 , 30-May-13
SECTION 5 - DESIGN
EEPCO
(iv)
Rated transformer off-load current breaking capacity
(v)
Rated line charging breaking capacity
(vi)
Rated cable-charging breaking capacity
(vii)
Rated short-time current
(viii)
Rated peak withstand current
(ix)
Mechanical Endurance
(x)
Electrical Endurance
4.2
ROUTINE TESTS
Routine tests shall be carried out on the Equipment in accordance with the relevant The
following tests shall be conducted.
(i)
Power-frequency voltage dry test
(ii)
Measurement of resistance of the main circuit
(iii)
Operating test
4.3
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
(i)
Inspection of the complete equipment
(ii)
Checking of the result of the routine and type test as per IEC
(iii)
(iv)
5.
DESIGN
5.1
GENERAL
5.1.1
ELECTRICAL PERFORMACE CHARACTERISTICS

Rated voltage
15kV
Rated current
400A
RATED LIGHTNING IMPULSE WITHSTAND VOLTAGE )

i)to earth and between poles (peak)
125kV
ii)across the isolating distance of fuse base
135kV
RATED ONE MINUTE POWER FREQUENCY WITHSTAND VOLTAGE

(DRY & WET)
i)to earth and between poles (rms)
50kV
ii)across the isolating distance(rms)
60kV
Temperature rise limit (In Air) as per IEC

60129,
i)copper contacts silver faced
65 C
ii)Terminals
50 C
Page: 2 , 30-May-13
SECTION 5 - DESIGN
EEPCO
5.2
iii)Metal parts acting as springs
The temp. shall not reach such a value

that elasticity of the metal is changed
Rated mainly active load breaking capacity
400A
Transformer off-load current breaking

capacity
20A
Rated short time current
10kA for 1 sec.
Rated peak withstand current
20kA peak
1000 Operations
Minimum 20 operations at 400 A at

15kV,
Minimum 200operations at 200A at
15kV.
CONSTRUCTION
The switch shall be suitable for single pole mounting on concrete pole 9m or 12m length.
The load break switch shall be manually-operated triple-pole type with either singlebreak or double-break operation. The operation of the switch shall be through rotating
motion of the post insulators. All phases must open and close simultaneously.
The switch shall be fitted with a special interrupter unit to absorb the arc energy in an
insulated chamber. The interrupter unit shall be easily replaceable.
The contacts shall be made of silver-faced bronze/copper.
The speed of breaking of load shall be independent of the speed of operation.
The incoming and outgoing terminals shall be such as to directly receive AAAC
200sq.mm without the use of lugs. The terminals shall be suitable for current ratings
stipulated above. The terminals shall be so designed as to avoid bimetallic corrosion.
The frame of each of switch shall be provided with a separate earthing terminal/for
each phase for connection to an earthing conductor having a clamping bolt of not less
than 16mm dia. The terminal shall be marked with Earth symbol.
The vertical operating rod shall comprise of not less than 40mm (nominal bore)
Galvanised Steel tube (medium class) The length of the operating rod shall be 9m.
Provision shall be made for earthing of the operating handle.
Pipes shall be galvanised in compliance with the relevant standard and other metal parts
shall be hot dip galvanised.
Phase clearance i.e. centre-to-centre distance between the insulators of adjacent phase in
the assembled position of the switch shall not be less than 1200mm.
The centre-to-centre distance between insulators of the adjacent poles of the same phase
in the assembled position of the switch shall not be less than 600mm.
All similar materials and removable parts of similar equipment shall be interchangeable
with each other.
5.3
MATERIALS
The insulator material shall be porcelain or toughened or annealed glass or cast resin. The
terminal shall be compatible and ready connecting with aluminium conductor.
Page: 3 , 30-May-13
EEPCO
5.4
6.
SECTION 6 - MARKINGS
MOUNTING
(i)
The load break switch shall be suitable for mounting on single concrete pole and shall be
ready for mounting and operation. It shall be complete with all necessary items such as:
(ii)
Operating rod and handle for manual control with necessary fixing accessories and
padlock. The switch shall have pad lock arrangement both for ON and OFF positions
from the ground level..
(iii)
Cross arm where insulators strings with clevises can be fixed. Clevises are according to
IEC 471 or BS 3288 for ball eye of standard coupling size according IEC 120 and BS
3288 with minimum failing load 40KN.
(iv)
Earthing connection for protective earthing using 35mm2 copper conductor.
(v)
Clamps for connecting all aluminium conductors of AAAC 200 mm2 both for incoming
and outgoing side.
(vi)
All accessories and structures needed to mount on a single concrete pole.
(vii)
The length of the load break switch cross arm shall be preferably 1900mm. However,
alternatives may be quoted. The switch disconnected cross arm shall be suitable for
installing tension insulator strings of cap and pin type. The load break switch shall be
supplied with complete accessories and structures to mount on a single concrete/steel
pole. The purchaser should not use additional material to mount the load break switch on
a single pole.
MARKINGS
The load break switch shall be marked according to requirements of IEC 60265.
7.
PACKING
The Drop out Fuses shall be packed securely ..Please see also TS-GN-02
8.
SCHEDULES
If the technical schedules are to be included in the same file then use this section.
8.1
SCHEDULE FOR 15KV LOAD BREAK SWITCH

Please see separate technical schedule TS-SG-06 S
Page: 4 , 30-May-13
EEPCO
8.2

The bidder shall provide a list of non compliances with this specification, documenting
the effects that such non compliance is likely to have on the equipments life, operating
characteristics and system performance. Each non compliance shall make reference to the
relevant specification clause.
Specification
Clause
Page: 1 , 30-May-13
EEPCO
8.3

The bidder shall provide a list of the test certificates included with the bid. The list shall
include type test certificate routine test report references. Each certificate listed shall as
far as possible refer to the relevant specification clause.
Specification
Clause
Page: 2 , 30-May-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule for 15kV Pole mounted Load Break Switches

No
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Country of origin
Type
Type tested
Standards
Rated voltage
yes/no
kV
15
Highest Equipment Voltage
kV
24
Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 s, dry)

phase to earth
kVp
125
Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 s, dry)

kVp
135
10
Power frequency withstand voltage (1 min.,

wet) phase to earth
kV
50
11
Power frequency withstand voltage (1 min.,

wet) across isolating distance
kV
60
12
Rated frequency
Hz
50
13
13a
14
Rated continous current carying capacity

Rated Breaking Current
Rated short circuit current
A
A
kA
400
400
20
15
Rated capacitive breaking current
10
16
Creepage distance
mm
480
17
Minimum failing loads of cross-arm
17.1
Perpendicularly to line direction(Fx)
17.2
Vertical load (Fy)
17.3
18
19
20
21
22
In the line direction (Fz)

Length of operating rod,
Accessories included?
Weight of complete disconnector
Rated mechanical terminal load
Min. clearances in air between poles
m
Yes/No
kg
N
mm
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Min. clearances in air over isolating distance

Incoming terminals cross-section
Out coming terminals cross-section
Material of terminals
Material of coating
Material of insulating parts
Thickness of zinc coating of steel
Maximum operating force
Length of cross-arm
Spacing between poles
File:TS-SG-06 R3 15kV Load break switch.xlsm- sheet:TS-SG-06-S
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Yes
mm
mm2
mm2
200
200
Copper
Silver plated
porcelain
microns
N
mm
mm
Page 1
Date: 30/5/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-SG-07
Pole mounted 15kV Air Break Switch
Rev -2- April 2013
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
12 Dec 2012
Rev 1
Feb2013
Spec no. changed and fitted in the specified template
Rev 2
April 2013
Spec. changed to suit for Distribution Transformer control.
TS-SG-07 R2 Pole mounted 15kV Air Break Switch.docx Rev -2- April 2013
Page: i , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
POLE MOUNTED 15KV AIR BREAK SWITCH
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT:
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
TYPE TESTS
ROUTINE TESTS
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
1
2
2
5.
DESIGN
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
GENERAL
CONSTRUCTION
MOUNTING
MECHANICAL STRENGTH
SWITCH TERMINALS
LOCKING ARRANGEMENTS
POST INSULATORS
2
3
3
4
5
5
5
6.
7.
8.
MARKINGS
PACKING
SCHEDULES
5
5
6
8.1
8.2
8.3
SCHEDULE FOR POLE MOUNTED15KV AIR BREAK SWITCH

6
6
7
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO
POLE MOUNTED 15KV AIR BREAK SWITCH

1.
SCOPE
performance characteristics of outdoor 15kV ground operated, Pole mounted Air
Break Switch for manual.
2.

See Specification TS-GN-01 EEPCO system and Environmental Data
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
3.1
Specification/Standard
Number
Title
IEC 60129
Alternating Current disconnectors and Earth

Switches
IEC 60265
IEC60168
Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of

ceramic material or glass for systems with
nominal voltages greater than 1 000 V
IEC 60273
Characteristics of indoor and outdoor post

insulators for systems with nominal voltages
greater than 1 000 V
IEC 61109
Composite Insulators for ac overhead lines with a

nominal voltage greater than 1000 V-Definitions,
test methods and acceptance criteria
CONFLICT:
See spec TS-GN-02
4.

4.1
TYPE TESTS
design requirements set out in this specification
The supplier shall confirm on the attached schedule that the following tests have
been performed according to the relevant IEC
(i)
Dielectric test (Impulse and one minute wet power frequency withstand voltages),
Page: 1 , 11-Apr-13
SECTION 5 - DESIGN
EEPCO
(ii)
Temperature rise test (for contacts and terminals),
(iii)
Rated mainly active Load Breaking Capacity test at 20A.(Transformer off-load),
(iv)
Test for measurement of resistance of the main circuits,
(v)
Rated short circuit withstand current test,
(vi)
Mechanical and Electrical endurance test.
4.2
ROUTINE TESTS
Routine tests shall be carried out on the Equipment in accordance with the
relevant standard. The following tests shall be conducted.
(i)
Power-frequency voltage dry test
(ii)
Measurement of resistance of the main circuit
(iii)
Operating test
4.3
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
(i)
Inspection of the complete equipment
(ii)
Checking of the result of the routine and type tests as per IEC
(iii)
(iv)
5.
DESIGN
5.1
GENERAL
5.1.1
ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

Rated equipment voltage
15kV
Highest System Voltage for equipment
24kV
Rated current
400A
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage

i)to earth and between poles (peak)
125kV
ii)across the isolating distance of fuse

base
145kV
Rated one minute power frequency withstand voltage

i)to earth and between poles (rms)
50kV
ii)across the isolating distance(rms)

Temperature rise limit (In Air) as per
IEC 60129,
i)copper contacts silver faced
65 C
Page: 2 , 11-Apr-13
SECTION 5 - DESIGN
EEPCO
ii)Terminals
50 C
iii)Metal parts acting as springs
The temp. shall not reach such a value

that elasticity of the metal is changed
Transformer off-load current breaking

capacity
20A
10kA for 1 sec.
5.2
CONSTRUCTION
5.2.1
General
The switch shall be suitable for pole mounting on concrete 9m or 12m length
with the top diameter ranging from 160mm to 190 mm.
The Air Break switch shall be triple-pole gang operated type with single-break
manual operation. All phases must open and close simultaneously.
The contacts shall be made of silver-faced bronze/copper.
The speed of breaking of load shall be independent of the speed of operation.
The terminals shall be suitable for current ratings stipulated in the Contract .The
terminals shall be so designed as to avoid bimetallic corrosion.
The frame of each of switch shall be provided with a separate earthing
terminal/for each phase for connection to an earthing conductor having a
clamping bolt of not less than 12mm dia. The terminal shall be marked with
Earth symbol.
The vertical operating pipe shall comprise not less than 25mm (nominal bore)
Galvanised Steel tube (medium class). The length of the operating pipe shall be
suitable and adjustable to suit for the installation. Guide brackets should be fixed
to the down pipe. 2 Nos. guide brackets should be fixed / welded to the down
pipe.
Provision shall be made for earthing of the operating handle.
Tubes shall be galvanised in compliance with the relevant standard and other
metal parts shall be hot dip galvanised.
All current carrying parts shall be made of nickel plated 99.9% electrolytic copper
and shall be provided with stainless steel bolts.
The arcing horns shall be made of stainless steel rod of 5 mm dia & phosphor
bronze sheet of 14 guage and shall have spring assisted for operation.The arcing
horns are positioned in such a way that they are separated after opening of the
main contacts and close before the main contacts are closed. The speed of
breaking of load current shall be independent of the speed of operation.
The spacing between the phases shall be adjustable between 600 mm to 760 mm
suitable for mounting on single pole structure.
5.3
MOUNTING
The phase assembly shall have suitable sheet steel folded in the form of a channel
with a plate dimension of thickness 4 mm for mounting two 24kV Solid core
Page: 3 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 5 - DESIGN
insulators. The channel supports shall be mounted on 70 mm square tubular

beam. Alternatively the phase assembly shall be mounted on a base channel of 75
x 40 x 6 mm MS HDG(Mild Steel High Density Galvanised). The switch shall be
manually operated with rocking type arrangement through a coupling pipe of GI
30 mm seamless square (thickness) 2.5 mm of length 1.4 meters (1400 mm).
Aluminium Alloy Metal Bush made in two halves (to form 2 Nos. C-Sections) to
have firm grip on horizontal square rod, the bush will have 3 Nos. of threaded
holes for screwing the bolt on the bush to have firm grip on metal square Rod
(6Nos. of suitable bolts to be supplied for the above purpose). The moving
insulator base is firmly welded to the clamp and the clamp is fitted to the pipe and
locked through a bolt (the bolt is extruded, through a hole into pipe). Each phase
will be having 2 clamps made in MS Flat 65x6 mm.
All current carrying parts shall be made of Nickel plated 99.9% electrolytic
copper. The bolts provided shall be of stainless steel. The speed of breaking of
load current shall be independent of the speed of operation.
The spacing between the phases shall be adjustable between 600 mm to 760 mm
suitable for mounting on single pole structure.
The position of the operating handle shall be downwards when the switch is in
open position and suitable guides ( 2 Nos) shall be made out of HDG M.S Angle,
Flat and supplied along with Bolts & Nuts and ferrule for sliding vertical
operating pipe.
The Switch terminal shall be suitable for accepting bi-metallic clamps on the
incoming side to accommodate AAAC conductor of sizes up to 200 mm on the
outgoing side about a 1 meter long 3 Nos. jumpers with 30 x 0.6 mm brass sheet
with tin plating provided at connecting ends for each phase.
The fixed contacts shall be of high grade copper and capable of carrying the short
circuit current of minimum 10 KA and also capable of carrying rated normal
current of the switch continuously with large margin of safety at all times. The
contacts shall be nickel plated. The moving contacts shall be of HDEC copper
flat 30x 6 mm and capable of carrying the short circuit current of minimum 10
KA and also capable of carrying rated current of switch continuously with large
margin of safety at all times. The contacts should be spring loaded with stainless
steel springs to maintain constant contacts pressure. The contact should be nickel
plated. Moving contact cup should be made of 2.5 mm thick of Hard Drawn
Electrolytic Copper.
Both fixed and moving contacts shall be capable of breaking load current of 20
Amps and they shall be fixed with stainless steel bolts.
5.4
(i)
Clamps for connecting all aluminium conductors of AAAC from 50 to200 mm2
both for incoming and outgoing side.
(ii)
All accessories and structures needed to mount on a single concrete/steel pole.
MECHANICAL STRENGTH
The isolating switches shall be capable ofr withstanding the rated mechanical
terminal loads and electro magnetic forces, without effecting the operation and
current carrying properties. The switches, complete with the operating mechanism
should not come out of their own in closed position due to the effect of gravity,
wind pressure, vibrations and reasonable shocks. Their construction should be
Page: 4 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 6 - MARKINGS
such that they do not open under the influence of the short circuit current.
5.5
SWITCH TERMINALS
The terminal pad shall be made of rolled/ extruded electrolytic grade copper flat
having a cross sectional area equal to that of the blade. It shall be so constructed
that an intimate contact with the contact element is ensured. The connector to the
switch terminal shall be suitable for 50 to 200mm AAAC conductor. The
Aluminium connectors of appropriate size shall be supplied for each end and for
each phase of the switch.
5.6
LOCKING ARRANGEMENTS
The AB (Air Break) switches shall be constructed with suitable arrangement to
provide pad-lock the operating handle on ON and OFF positions. A pad
lock of reputed make shall be provided.
The insulators for the isolating switches shall be of porcelain solid core type and
shall be in accordance with the relevant IEC.(Polymer type insulators conforming
to IEC61109 are also accepted). The assembly of the metal parts and
porcelain/polymer shall be in such a manner that the metal and
porcelain/polymer part shall not have any deteriorating effect or create undue
stresses adversely affecting the mechanical and electrical strength of the unit
arising out from any harmful expansion. The insulators (porcelain and polymer
type) shall be of standard make.
5.7
POST INSULATORS
The porcelain / polymer insulators shall be sound, free from defects, thoroughly
vitrified and smoothly glazed.
Unless otherwise specified, the glaze shall be brown in colour. The glazes shall
cover all the exposed porcelain parts of the insulators except those areas, which
serve, as supports during firing and required to be left un-glazed.
The threads of the tapped holes in the post insulator metal fittings shall be cut
after giving anti-corrosive protection and shall be protected against rust by
greasing other similar means.
The insulator material shall be porcelain or toughened or annealed glass or cast
resin. The terminal shall be compatible and ready connecting with aluminium
conductor.
6.
MARKINGS
The Air break switch shall be marked according to requirements of IEC 60265.
7.
PACKING
The Air break switch shall be packed securely .Please see also TS-GN-02
Page: 5 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
8.
SCHEDULES
8.1
SCHEDULE FOR POLE MOUNTED 15KV AIR BREAK

SWITCH
8.2

Specification
Clause
Page: 6 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
8.3

Specification
Clause
Page: 7 , 11-Apr-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for Pole mounted 15kV Air Break Switches
No
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
15kV
1
Country of origin
Type
4
5
Type tested
Standards
Rated voltage
22
Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 s, dry) kV

phase to earth
Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 s, dry) kV
Power frequency withstand voltage across kV
phases and earth
125
10
Power frequency withstand voltage across kV

isolating distance
60
11
Rated frequency
Hz
50
12
13
Rated current
Rated short circuit current
A
kA
400
10
16
Creepage distance
mm
480
17
Minimum failing loads of cross-arm
18
Length of operating rod,
19
20
21
Accessories included?
Weight of complete AB Switch
Min. clearances in air between poles
Yes/No
kg
mm
suitable length
for operator to
use it from
ground
22
mm
23
Min. clearances in air over isolating

distance
Incoming terminals cross-section
24
Out coming terminals cross-section
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Material of terminals
Material of coating
Material of insulating parts
Thickness of zinc coating of steel
Maximum operating force
Length of cross-arm
Spacing between poles
8
9
Yes
yes/no
145
50
50-200
50-200
mm
mm
Copper
Silver plated
porcelain
microns
N
mm
mm
File:TS-SG-07S-R2 Pole mounted 15 kV Air break switch.xlsm- sheet:TS-SG-07-S
Page 1
Date: 11/4/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-SG-09
Pole Mounted MVAuto-reclosers
Rev -2- April 2013
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
Jan 2013
First Issue
Rev 1
Feb 2013
Spec no. changed and spec fitted in the specified template.
Rev 2
6 April 2013
Current ratings specified and communication link included.
TS-SG-09 R2 Pole mounted MV Autoreclosers C.docx
Rev -2- April 2013
Page: i , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
POLE MOUNTED MV AUTO-RECLOSERS
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT:
4.
4.1
4.2
TYPE TESTS
2
2
5.
DESIGN
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODE OF OPERATION OF THE AUTOMATIC RECLOSERS
MANUAL OPERATION
TANK FABRICATION
INDICATORS
POLE MOUNTING BRACKET
LIFTING LUGS
GROUNDING TERMINAL
BUSHINGS AND TERMINALS
INTERRUPTING MEDIUM
RECLOSER CONTROL
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6.
7.
MARKING
SCHEDULES
6
8
7.1
7.2
7.3
SCHEDULE FOR POLE MOUNTED MV AUTO- RECLOSERS

8
8
9
Rev -2- April 2013
SECTION 1- SCOPE
EEPCO
POLE MOUNTED MV AUTO-RECLOSERS

1.
SCOPE
performance characteristics of pole mounted automatic re closers, both 15kV and
33kV.
2.

See Specification TS-GN-01 EEPO system and Environmental Data.
This means that all parts of the equipment that come into contact with air, for the
use with the 15kV be rated for 24kV at Means Sea Level (MSL) and equipment
for 33kV shall be rated for 52kV.
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
Specification/Standa Title
rd Number
3.1
IEC 60056
High Voltage alternating current circuit breakers.
IEC 60137
Insulating Bushings for Alternating Voltages above

1000V
IEC 60296
Specification for unused Mineral Insulating Oils for

Transformers and Switchgear
IEC 60376
Specification and Acceptance of New Sulphur

hexafluoride
IEC 60437
Radio Interference Test on High Voltage Insulators.
IEEE C37.60 1981
Requirements for Overhead, Pad Mounted, Dry Vault

and Submersible Automatic Circuit Reclosers and Fault
Interrupters for AC Systems.
ISO 2063
Metallic Coatings - Protection of Iron and Steel against

Corrosion - Metal spraying of zinc and aluminium..
CONFLICT:
See spec TS-GN-02
4.

See Spec No. TS-GN-02
Rev -2- April 2013
LPA/GECE/Page: 1, 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
4.1
TYPE TESTS
design requirements set out in this specification
4.1.1
Auto-Recloser
a)
Mechanical Operation Tests
b)
Temperature rise test
c)
Basic Insulation Level
d)
Short-circuit making and breaking performance
e)
Rated duration of short-circuit current
f)
Performance characteristic test/Operating Duty Test
g)
Time-current characteristic tests
4.1.2
Current Transformers
a)
Verifications of terminal marking and polarity
b)
High voltage power frequency test on primary winding
c)
High voltage power frequency test on secondary winding
d)
Over- voltage inter-turn test
e)
Determination of error according to the requirements of appropriate accuracy

clause
f)
Short-time current test
g)
Temperature rise test
h)
Impulse voltage test for current transformers for service in electrically exposed
installations
4.2

Routine tests shall be carried out on the Equipment in accordance with the
practices and tolerances of IEEE C37.60. All routine tests will be free of charge to
the Employer and any item not meeting the routine test requirements shall be
rejected.
4.2.1
Autoreclosers
a)
Power frequency voltage dry tests on the main circuit
b)
Voltage tests on control and auxiliary circuits
c)
Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit
d)
Mechanical Operating tests
e)
Calibration tests
4.2.2
a)
Verification of terminal marking and polarity
Rev -2- April 2013
SECTION 5- DESIGN
EEPCO
b)
High voltage power frequency test on primary winding
c)
High voltage power frequency test on secondary winding
d)
Over - voltage inter-turn test
e)
Determination of error according to the requirements of appropriate accuracy

Clause.
5.
DESIGN
5.1
5.1.1
Rated Continuous Current

The rated continuous current shall be 400A for the 15kV & 33kVAutoreclosers,
as per specified requirements in the pricing schedule.
5.1.2
Maximum Current Interrupting and Making Rating

The short circuit levels correspond to maximum system short circuit currents as
specified in spec. No. TS-GN-01.
5.2
MODE OF OPERATION OF THE AUTOMATIC

RECLOSERS
The Autorecloser is required to operate with two instantaneous trips, followed by
two variable delayed trips.
The Autorecloser shall be capable of performing a sequence of four trips prior to
lockout event, when the line fault is close to the Autorecloser so that the line
voltage at the Autorecloser is essentially zero at the instant of the trip.
If upon the first, second or third reclose normal conditions are restored on the
line, the Autorecloser shall automatically reset after an adjustable time delay of 5,
10, 15 or 20 seconds. The Autorecloser will now be ready for a whole new
sequence of operations.
Means shall be provided to lock out the Autorecloser after one, two, three or four
trip operations. The selection of the reset time and the number of trip operations
shall be done by devices located in a control box.
5.2.1
Setting-Currents
As a minimum, one over current device shall be provided for fault detection in
each phase. The over current device shall have adjustable minimum phase
trip-current settings at the values of:
Rating of
Autorecloser
Phase current settings(A)
15kV 400A
Variable from 50A to 400A.
33kV 400A
Variable from 50A to 400A
The protective over current device shall have a adjustable inverse characteristics
Rev -2- April 2013
SECTION 5- DESIGN
EEPCO
For series coil Autoreclosers the highest value of minimum trip current should be
equal to 140% of the continuous coil rating. These coils shall be protected by
fuses as well as phase over current an earth fault current trip facility shall be
provided.
The earth fault tripping levels shall be selectable between 50A and 400 Amps.
5.2.2
Trip to Reclose Delay (Reclosing Interval)

Provision shall be made to obtain an individually adjustable time interval between
each opening and reclosing operation.
The range of "Dead Times" shall include the following 0.6, 1, 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10, 20,
30 and 60 seconds.
The selection of each "dead time" shall be independent and set from devices
located in the control box.
5.2.3
OPERATING DUTY
The minimum tested operating duty of the Autorecloser shall be as specified in
ANSI standard C37.60.
5.3
MANUAL OPERATION
Means shall be provided to permit manual tripping, closing and lockout of the
Autorecloser locally. These operations shall be done by hand or by operating
rods. The automatic Autorecloser shall be locked out after manual tripping and
shall reset after manual close.
5.3.1
Operation Counter
A mechanical operating counter shall be installed on the auto recloser which can
be read by a person standing at ground level. The counter shall be protected
against moisture ingress.
5.3.2
Radio Influence Voltage

The maximum radio influence voltage shall be 250 micro volts.
5.4
TANK FABRICATION
The tank shall be made of steel of minimum thickness 3mm and strong enough to
support dynamic short circuit forces and the vibration of the Autorecloser.
The tank and its accessories shall be adequately protected against corrosion and
the Contractor shall include a statement of the method of protection proposed.
Hot dip galvanising is preferred, where this is not practical the tanks shall be
shot-blasted and then immediately zinc sprayed to an average weight deposit of
not less than 550 g/m2 followed by a zinc chromate based primary paint, and two
coats of durable oil and weather resisting paint. Finish colour shall be grey.
The inside of tanks shall be coated with oil resisting varnish or paint so that the
oil cannot come into contact with the tank metal at any time.
The tank shall be perfectly sealed and dielectric fluid tight, with all fittings in
place. The head casting and the tank shall be weather-proof sealed under all
operating conditions.
Rev -2- April 2013
SECTION 5- DESIGN
EEPCO
5.5
INDICATORS
A contact position indicator (OFF -green, ON -red) shall be provided as well as a
"locked -out" indicator. These indicators shall be clearly visible from ground level.
5.6
POLE MOUNTING BRACKET

Pole mounted units shall be supplied with pole mounting brackets.
A double pole structure with 1.8m pole centres is used for mounting the
Autorecloser. The maximum pole diameter at the mounting height will be
240mm.Detailed drawings of mounting arrangements shall be submitted with the
tender.
5.7
LIFTING LUGS
Lifting lugs shall be provided such that the Autorecloser can be lifted with a single
hook without damage.
5.8
GROUNDING TERMINAL
All units shall be provided with a grounding terminal with a 10mm hole.
5.9
5.9.1
Bushings
The terminations shall be brought out through porcelain bushings. The bushings
used shall be rated for 24kV and 52kV respectively for 15kV and 33kV Auto
reclosers at MSL. They are rated to carry full line current and shall have in
addition spark gaps adjustable over the range 50-100mm.
Bushings shall be fitted with heavily tin plated terminals and galvanised hardware
to take tin plated aluminium compression lugs.
a)
Creepage Distance
The creepage distance of the bushings shall be 480mm and 1040mm for 15kV and
33kV, respectively.
b)
Bushing Labels
The bushings shall be clearly and unambiguously labelled. The labelling of the
phases shall be by raised lettering. Phase identification by adhesive stickers is not
acceptable.
5.10
INTERRUPTING MEDIUM
The current interrupting medium shall be vacuum breaker only.
5.11
RECLOSER CONTROL
The Autorecloser shall be fitted with a separate control box.
Protection relays for the IDMTL overcurrent and earth fault shall be installed in
this control box. This control box shall be suitable for fitting on the pole at a low
level than the Autorecloser to provide inspection maintenance and setting access
to utility personnel. All fittings required for mounting shall be supplied. All
operating parameters of the Autorecloser - minimum trip current, time - current
trip characteristics, reclosing and reset times, operating sequences - shall be
Rev -2- April 2013
SECTION 6- MARKING
EEPCO
controlled from the control box. All settings shall be either a) through a suitable
interface pad/keyboard designed for the harsh operating environment of the
Autorecloser, b) positive step selector switches or c) plug-in components. Ratings
shall be clearly marked in relevant units of measure with no interpretation
multipliers or conversion being required.
Each unit shall be equipped with an electronic control armoured capable of
operating in the environmental conditions specified in spec. No. TS-GN-01. The
cable shall be protected in either a metallic non rusting tube or a metallic cover
that can be fitted over the cable. The cable protection shall be securely fixed on
the pole and appropriate permanent fixings shall be provided. The fixings shall
not be plastic tie wraps. Stainless steel tie wraps are permitted.
5.12
Remote control shall be provided for the Autorecloser if so specified in the
technical schedule. The remote control shall be achieved through a
communication link between control centre and the Autoreclosers and necessary
provision shall be incorporated in the control box.
GSM/GPRS/ CDMA service is available in 7 towns and is proposed to be
deployed for communication between Control Centre and this device.
Alternatively communication may be provided through a radio link with the
Control room.
The Unit shall incorporate the necessary remote terminal interface equipment to
enable linkage between the unit control and the communication system.
The Unit shall incorporate an energy storage system to enable the equipment to
operate within one month of being disconnected/ powered-off from the network.
Full details and rights to use protocols for communication and operation of the
device shall be provided to the client/purchaser to enable the SCADA system to
interface with the unit. The cost of the provision of any protocol look up tables
etc. shall be included in the cost of the device. Full details shall be included with
the supply of the device to enable the Unit to be integrated with the SCADA
system.
6.
MARKING
Each Autorecloser shall be fitted with an easily readable nameplate of weather
proof material giving the following details:
(i)
Type of Autorecloser
(ii)
Manufacturer's Name
(iii)
Manufacturer's Serial Number
(iv)
Year of Manufacture
(v)
Rated Frequency
(vi)
Rated Voltage
(vii)
Rated Continuous Current
(viii)
Rated Minimum Tripping Currents
Rev -2- April 2013
SECTION 6- MARKING
EEPCO
(ix)
Rated Symmetrical Interrupting Current
(x)
Rated Symmetrical Making Current
(xi)
Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage
(xii)
Maximum number of closing operations before locking out
(xiii)
Rated Control Voltage
(xiv)
Gross Weight
Rev -2- April 2013
EEPCO
7.
SCHEDULES
7.1
SCHEDULE FOR POLE MOUNTED MV AUTORECLOSERS

7.2

Specification
Clause
Rev -2- April 2013
EEPCO
7.3

Specification
Clause
Rev -2- April 2013
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for Pole mounted MV Autoreclosers
No
Item
Nominal system Voltage
kV
15
33
Maximum equipment Voltage at

MSL
Basic Insulation Level
kV
24
52
kVp
125
250
Sec.
1 to 60
1 to 60
Sec.
5,10,15, & 20
5,10,15, & 20
3
4
5
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
TimeCurrent Curve Settings

Contractor
shall specify
of
Variable Reclosing
Timedetails
settings
to include
Resetting Time Settings
Continuous Current Rating
400
400
Minimum Trip Rating
20 to 400
20 to 400
Minimum Ground Fault Setting in

descrete steps of continous
variable
Interrupting Rating max.Symm.
10 to 400
10 to 400
kA(rms)
12.5
16
10
11
12
13
Value(rms)
Interrupting Rating max.Asymm.
Value(rms)
Interrupting Rating Max.
Maximum Making Current
Bid Offer
kA(rms)
A (peak)
kA (peak) 2 times of breaking
current
kV
2 times of
breaking current
14
One Minute Withstand Dry
15
One Minute Withstand Wet
kV
50
95
16
Creepage Distance
mm
480
1040
17
Spark Gap Setting Range
mm
50-100
50-100
File:TS-SG-09 S R2 Pole mounted MV Autoreclosers.xlsm- sheet:TS-SG-09-S
Page 1
Date: 11/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

No
Item
18
Current Interrupting Medium
Vacuum
Vacuum
19
Control Method
Electronic
Electronic
20
Radio Influence Voltage
250
250
21
22
Remote control facility

Mode of remote control
Yes
Radio
Yes
Radio
File:TS-SG-09 S R2 Pole mounted MV Autoreclosers.xlsm- sheet:TS-SG-09-S
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
Bid Offer
Page 2
Date: 11/4/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-SG-12
15kV SF6Extensible Ring Main Units
Rev -2- April 2013
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
Feb 2013
First Issue
Rev 1
Feb 2013
Spec modified and fitted in the specified template
Rev 2
April 2013
SF6 RMU is modified to 6 board RMU with VCBs.
Rev 3
30 April
RTU enhancements
TS-SG-12 R2 15kV SF 6 Fixed and Extensible RMU.docxRev -2- April 2013
Page: i , 30-Apr-13
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
15KV SF6 RING MAIN UNITS
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
TYPE TESTS
TESTS DURING MANUFACTURE
ADDITIONAL TESTS
TEST FACILITIES
1
2
2
2
2
5.
DESIGN
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
TYPES AND FUNCTIONALITIES

TRANSFORMER RMU (TRMU)
EXTENSIBLE RMU SWITCHBOARD(ERMU)
2
3
3
3
6.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF THE BOARD
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
LOAD BREAK SWITCH
CIRCUITBREAKER
INTERLOCKS
CABLES & CONNECTORS :
VOLTAGE INDICATORS
PROTECTION
EARTH FAULT LOCATORS
CTS
AUTOMATION FOR REMOTE CONTROL AND INDICATION
5
5
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
7.
SYSTEM AUTOMATION REMOTE CONTROL
7.1
7.2
7.3
RTUS
RADIO MODEM
CONTROL CENTRE
9
10
11
8.
SAFETY& TESTING
11
8.1
8.2
SAFETY
TESTING EQUIPMENT
11
11
9.
GENERALREQUIREMENTS FOR RMUS
12
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
EARTHING
PAINTING
TROPICALISATION
INFORMATION LABELS
12
12
12
12
EEPCO
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
CLEARANCES
OPERATING HANDLE
CONTROL MECHANISMS
LIST OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS
13
13
13
13
10.
11.
MANDATORY SPARES & TOOLS

SPECIFICATION OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES
13
13
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
SCOPE :
STANDARDS :
SYSTEM DETAILS :
POWER SUPPLY RATINGS :
TECHNICAL PARAMETERS :
13
13
14
14
14
12.
13.
PACKING
SCHEDULES
16
16
13.1
13.2
13.3
SCHEDULE FOR 15KV SF6 RING MAIN UNITS

16
16
18
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO
15KV SF6 RING MAIN UNITS

1.
SCOPE
This Specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply, delivery and
performance requirements of 15kV SF6 Extensible Ring Main Units for
Distribution transformer control and also feeder switching.
2.

See Specification TS-GN-01 - EEPCO System and Environmental Data.
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
standards and/or other recognized international standards. In particular
3.1
Specification / Standard
Number
Title
IEC 60265
IEC 60282
High Voltage Fuses
IEC 60298
AC Metal enclosed switchgear and control gear for

rated voltages above 1kV and up to and including
52kV.
IEC 60420
High Voltage AC Fuse-Switch Combinations
IEC 60529
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures.
IEC 60056
High Voltage Alternating Current Circuit Breaker
IEC 60273
Dimensions of Indoor & Outdoor post insulators

with voltages > 1000 volts
IEC 60129
Alternative current disconnectors and earthing

switches
IEC 60694
Common clauses for High Voltage switchgear and

control gear standards
CONFLICT
4.

See spec. No.TS-GN-02
4.1
TYPE TESTS
The following type tests shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant IEC,
a)
Short time current test on main circuits,
Page: 1 , 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
b)
Short time current test on earthing circuit,
c)
Partial discharge test,
d)
No load operation and mechanical endurance test,
e)
Impulse withstand test,
f)
Power frequency voltage withstand dry & wet test.
4.2
SECTION 5 - DESIGN

Routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with IEC 60265, 60298, 60420
and ISO 14001.
4.3
a)
Power frequency voltage dry tests of the main circuit,
b)
Partial discharge test,
c)
Resistance test for the circuits,
d)
Mechanical operating tests.
TESTS DURING MANUFACTURE

The Bidder shall furnish details of tests carried out during the process of
manufacture and end inspection by the bidder to ensure the desired quality of the
equipment to be supplied.
4.4
ADDITIONAL TESTS
The Employer reserves the right of having at contractors expense any other
tests(s) of reasonable nature carried out at Bidders premises, at site, or in any
other place in addition to the aforesaid type, acceptance and routine tests, to
satisfy himself that the equipment complies with the specification.
In case of failure in any type test, the Bidder is required to modify the design of
the equipment and type tested again for the modified design, without any extra
cost to the Employer. No delivery extension shall be given for this additional
testing.
4.5
TEST FACILITIES
The Bidder shall indicate the details of the equipment available with him for
carrying out the various tests as per relevant Standards.
Tests as per applicable standards should be carried out in respect of porcelain
bushings, galvanization, relays and meters.
5.
DESIGN
5.1
TYPES AND FUNCTIONALITIES

The Ring Main Units ( RMU) are installed on MV feeders for feeder automation
to detect faults on MV lines, isolating the fault through feeder sectionalisation and
restore power supply to the healthy part of feeder, by extending alternate power
supply. The RMU will also facilitate load balancing on the feeders by shifting
loads from one feeder to another feeder. The above network operations will help
Page: 2 , 30-Apr-13
SECTION 5 - DESIGN
EEPCO
in minimising duration of interruptions and improve the reliability and quality of

power supply.
Two types of RMUs are deployed in MV distribution system automation. These
are Transformer RMU(TRMU) and Feeder RMU switch board or Extensible
RMUs (ERMU).
5.2
TRANSFORMER RMU (TRMU)

These units are intended for protection and control of ground mounted
transformers of capacity 400 kVA and above. These units shall comprise of two
Load Break and Fault Making( LBFM) switches , one for control of incoming
feeder and the other for control of outgoing feeder . A vacuum circuit breaker is
also provided for HV protection of Distribution Transformer. These units are
non extensible and outdoor grounded mounted type.
This RMU isolates the Distribution transformer in the event of internal fault on
transformer by opening vacuum circuit breaker and there by ensures continuity of
supply on the feeder. In the event of fault on the line, the faulty section of feeder
can be isolated by opening LBFM switches at both ends of faulty section and
extend power supply to healthy part of Line.
5.3
EXTENSIBLE RMU SWITCHBOARD(ERMU)

These units shall comprise of a set of stand-alone units of Vacuum circuit
breakers to be coupled together to form a switching station or switch board in
SF6 insulation enclosure. The RMU switch board facilitates the transmission of
power from substation to load centre through high capacity express feeders(with
bigger conductor size say 200mm)and distribute the power received at load
centre among a set of low capacity feeders (with lower conductor sizes)
emanating from load centre and feeding Distribution Transformers .
Power supply from 2 or more main MV feeders emanating from same or
different substations may be accommodated, to extend alternate power supply in
the event of outage of any feeder, after isolating the faulty feeder. The general
configuration of Switch Board can be 1+4, 2+4 or 3+3. The first number denotes
the incoming feeder(s) and the second digit indicates the number of outgoing
feeders, feeding local feeders or transformers in load centre area. These units are
extensible type and any desired configuration can be obtained by combining the
required individual units. The units shall be outdoor ground mounted type.
5.4
I
Overall Unit
a)
Service
Outdoor
b)
Type
Metal enclosed
c)
Number of Phases
d)
System Voltage
15kV (+10% to-20%)
e)
Rated Frequency
50 Hz (+/- 5%)
Page: 3 , 30-Apr-13
SECTION 5 - DESIGN
EEPCO
f
Insulation
SF6
SF6 Monitoring system
Pressure Gauge and Low

pressure alarm.
II
Load Break and Fault making(LBFM)Switches
a)
No. of poles
b)
Switch Type
SF6-Single Break, Load

breaking and fault making
switch
c)
Rated voltage
15 kV
d)
Rated current
630 Amps
e)
Load breaking current
630 Amps at 0.7PF
f)
Short time Rating
20 kA
g)
Fault making capacity (kA peak/ min.)
40 kA
h)
Impulse withstand voltage to earth

between poles.
125kV
i)
Power frequency withstand voltage to

earth and between poles
50kV
III
Vacuum Circuit Breakers
a)
Type
Vacuum
b)
No. of poles
c)
Rated Voltage
15kV
d)
Rated Current
630A
e)
Breaking current
20kA for 3 Seconds.
f)
Making current
40kA
g)
Impulse flash over withstand voltage
125kV peak
h)
50kV
IV
Bus bars
a)
Material
Copper
b)
Rated Current
630 Amps
c)
Breaking Current.
16 kA for 3 seconds
d)
Insulation of bus bars
Epoxy or PVC sleeved

insulation to be provided.
e)
Bus bar connections
Anti-oxide grease
f)
Bus bar end Caps
Yes
Page: 4 , 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 6 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF

THE BOARD
a)
Three Nos. Cast-resin CTs around bushing on or split core type

around XLPE cables for .
b)
Current Transformer ratio
300-150/1-1 Amp. Resin cast
c)
Over current factor
To correspond to breaking
capacity circuit breaker
d)
Class of accuracy
5P10
e)
Rated burden
As designed to
protective relays
f)
125kV (peak)
d)
50kV
VI
Protection
a)
Self powered IDMT Protection relays (Numeric/ Micro Processor

based) 2 Nos. over current 1 No. earth fault element shall be of
IDMT relay for feeder control with Display for operator ease.
b)
It shall be provided with emergency OFF push button
drive
6.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF THE BOARD
6.1
the
The technical features of the RMU are the following:

(i)
The overall RMU unit shall be compact, modular in construction and suitable for
outdoor installation without any further covers/protection,
(ii)
All live parts except cable connections shall be insulated with SF6 enclosure. The
SF6 enclosure shall be made of stainless steel,
(iii)
The Ring Main Unit shall be tropicalised, for outdoor application with single bus
bar, and in a 2mm thick (minimum) metal enclosure provided with a pressure
relief arrangement ,
(iv)
Single line diagram indicating the operational status of the switchgear shall be
provided at the front of the cubicles, i.e. mimic diagram will be displayed on the
front of the Ring Main Unit.
(v)
The supply shall include all steel supports and necessary embedded parts and
anchor bolts for thoroughly fastening and securing the equipment.
6.2
LOAD BREAK SWITCH

The technical features of load break switch are,
(i)
Each load break switch shall have SF6 gas as insulating medium and SF6/Vacuum
interrupting medium.
Page: 5 , 30-Apr-13
EEPCO

THE BOARD
(ii)
Each load break switch shall be triple pole and simultaneously operated,
(iii)
The mechanism of the switch shall be quick-break and quick make type, the speed
of operation being independent of operation with mechanically operated
indicator.
(iv)
Each load break switch shall be fitted with a direct manually operated mechanism
having three positions, ON, OFF and EARTH provided with pad locking
facility. All operating handles shall be located on the front panel of the Ring Main
Unit.
(v)
The operating mechanism shall be maintenance free without the need for any
lubrication during its life time.
(vi)
The LBFM switches shall be motorised for remote closing and opening operation
from remote control centre.
(vii)
The details of remote operation switches is dealt in clause 7.
6.3
CIRCUITBREAKER
The circuit breaking shall be in vacuum interrupter housed in SF6 insulated
chamber,
The circuit breaker shall be suitable for remote operation from town control
centre,
Suitable spring, motor-charging mechanism shall be provided for closing the
circuit breaker,
The spring will get automatically charged while tripping or following tripping,
Motor operation is provided for charging of springs,
Tripping of circuit breaker is provided through shunt trip coils tripping activated
by (feeder control) over current and earth fault relays. The VCB shall be provided
with closing coil for remote control.
6.4
INTERLOCKS
a)
The following interlocking facility shall be provided.
b)
Operation of load break switch/Disconnector cannot be performed when the

cable compartment is open or Load Break Switch/Disconnector is padlocked, or
earthing switch is in open position.
c)
Operation of earthing switch cannot be performed when the Load break

switch/Disconnector is in closed position.
d)
Suitable interlocks shall also be provided for cables test terminals and shall be
only in earth position.
e)
Integral test bushings shall be provided for cable testing on the switches for
maximum operator safety, "to prevent operation from ON position to Earth
position or vice versa in a single operation.
6.4.2
Mechanical type interlocks

Interlocks shall be provided to prevent access to the switchgear compartment
unless the following conditions are satisfied,
Page: 6 , 30-Apr-13
EEPCO

THE BOARD
the switching device (load break switch circuit breaker or fuse switch,
isolator etc.) is in the open position.
the earthing switch is in the closed position.
any conducting parts, which extend outside the compartment are earthed.
opening of door or cover shall not be possible unless the Earthing switch is
closed.
a)
However the Earthing switch may be opened once the door is opened for cable
testing.
b)
Internal faults in any compartment such as arcing to earth, unsuccessful breaking

operation, arcing across isolating distance shall be of no consequence for
operators standing in front of the switchgear assembly. All construction
arrangements to avoid such risks shall be taken.
(i)
Switching shall not be possible to be performed when the cable compartment is

open.
Load breaks switch/circuit breaker is padlocked.
6.4.3
Padlocking
Provision shall be made for padlocking the load break switches/Circuit Breaker,
and the Earthing switches in open or closed positions.
6.5
CABLES & CONNECTORS :

The cable termination shall be suitable for PVC/XLPE Cables to conductor sizes
of up to 300 Sq.mm of copper or aluminium conductors.
All necessary material for connection of conventional cable sealing ends shall be
delivered with each RMU.
The ring cable connections shall only be accessible when the load break switch is
in EARTH position.
As long as the cable connections are accessible, it shall not be possible to switch
the load break switch to on `ON position.
The cable termination bushings for the RMU shall be placed on the sides and rear
of the RMU. This is to ensure maximum operator safety in case of explosion in
the cable termination.
6.6
VOLTAGE INDICATORS
Capacitive voltage indication facilities for connection to the cable terminations
shall be provided through sockets at the front of the modules. It shall be possible
to test the voltage indicators before use.
6.7
PROTECTION
Suitable numerical protection relay, microprocessor based shall be incorporated
with each circuit breaker module. The protection of each module shall be and act
independently from the other modules.
The protective relay shall be driven by three CTs on the outgoing circuits.
Page: 7 , 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 7 - SYSTEM AUTOMATION

REMOTE CONTROL
The protection relays shall be self-powered necessary through the resin cast
current transformers and shall be equipped with suitable good quality batteries to
ensure that protection operation is according to international practices.
Protection setting range shall be as per standard protective relays for Overcurrent
and earth fault.
6.8
EARTH FAULT LOCATORS

These shall facilitate quick detection of faulty section of a line. The fault
indication may be on the basis of monitoring earth fault current flow through the
device. The unit should be self-contained requiring no auxiliary power supply. The
unit preferably be encapsulated in resin moulding to provide a robust weather
proof assembly for installation around the 15kV cable at RMU. The principle of
operation of detector shall be indicated by supplier. The response value of short
circuit current, the no. of auxiliary contacts provided and its operation shall be
specified. Suitable inspection windows in the cable connection compartment
should be provided to observe the status of fault indicator. Earth fault locators
shall be incorporated with isolator circuits or generally circuits not equipped with
overcurrent and earth fault protection.
6.9
CTS
Three Current transformers shall be incorporated with the circuit bushings with
suitable rating to drive and provide operating power to the numerical protective
relays. The CTs shall be dual ratio as given in the technical schedules. The ratio
generally shall be designed to coordinate with the conductor sizes connected to it.
For the circuits not equipped with protection core type CTs shall be incorporated
with the incoming /outgoing cables.
6.10
AUTOMATION FOR REMOTE CONTROL AND INDICATION

The switchboard shall be designed for remote control and monitoring by the
Control centre they are connected to.
The details of automation of breaker operation is described in clause 7.
7.
SYSTEM AUTOMATION REMOTE CONTROL

The distribution network shall be designed to operate in conjunction with a
distribution control centre for remote control and operation to provide system
automation. System automation envisages the installation of the following
equipment on respective system positions.
Transformer RMU with remote operation of LBFM switches and vacuum

circuit breaker to provide remote indication and control from the control
centre,
Switching station or feeder RMU switch board providing remote control

and indication of circuit breakers and incoming/outgoing feeders from
control centre,
Sectionalisers and
Autoreclosers.
Page: 8 , 30-Apr-13
EEPCO

REMOTE CONTROL
The remote control of the items above shall be achieved through a dedicated
Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) with communication for the required control and
indication via the control centre.
Two way communication system shall be accommodated between control centre
and RTUs,
The connecting cables shall be protected in either a metallic non rusting tube or a
metallic cover that can be fitted over the cable. The cable protection shall be
securely fixed on the pole and appropriate permanent fixings shall be provided.
The fixings shall not be plastic tie wraps. Stainless steel tie wraps are permitted.
7.1
RTUS
7.1.1
General
The RTUs shall be Microprocessor based intelligent control unit and shall
facilitate self-healing.
RTUs shall be of mainly two types. a) Integrated within the main unit such as
RMUs b) in a pole mounted box together with the control gear for the items such
as Sectionalisers and Autorecloser and c) in Substations .
The RTUs shall be factory wired and form part of the switchboard.
The RTUs shall receive a command from control centre, and execute the execute
for operations such as open / close and it and also transmits data acquired from
equipment back to control centre. The basic functions are
a)
Execute remote commands such as Open/ Close through secure output

commands
b)
Status indication such as ON/ OFF status of RMU switches, capacitor switches,
Fault passage indicators, and tap position of voltage regulators etc.
c)
Analogue indication may include voltage, current, kW, kVAr etc., flowing through
RMU switches and Distribution Transformers.
The RTUs shall be designed to have the required number of inputs/outputs and
measurement inputs to suit the application.
The RTU shall be reconfigurable from control centre.
The RTUs shall be in general self powered from the protection CTs or VTs.
Alternatively they may powered through AC auxiliary supplies if available. RTUs
shall have internal batteries to enable them to provide uninterrupted operation
and data storage.
7.1.2
Ground Mounted Equipment RTUs

For ground mounted switchgear such as RMUs or substations the RTUs can be
either conventional small size units, developed for this type of application or they
may be an integral design of the RMUs.
RTUs for extensible RMUs shall have I/O capacity for an additional 2 circuits.
RTUs for non-extensible RMUS shall include spare inputs for back-up in case of
failure of one of the input/output modules.
Page: 9 , 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
7.1.3

REMOTE CONTROL
Pole Top RTU

For pole top equipment the RTU and communication equipment may be an
integral part of the control box mounted on the pole below the pole top
equipment.
The enclosure is weather proof, conforming to IEC 54.
Spare contacts shall be accommodated to allow for I/O failures.
7.1.4
RTU Communication
A communication link is required between the Control centre and RTU 's. This
communication can be achieved :-
a)
Through the mobile telephony system ( GSM/ GPRS/ CDMA) if the services
provide a reliable system. OR
b)
If the above is not reliable then communication may be through radio.

enable linkage between the RTU unit and the communication system.
The Bidder shall provide prices for radio communication with his bid.
Alternative prices shall be quoted for Telephony system.
The final decision will be undertaken either a) during the contract negotiations if
sufficient information /certainty is available or immediately after the contract
following the necessary investigation by the Contractor.
7.1.5
Protocols for RTUs and Communications

device as a complete unit, shall be provided to the client/purchaser to enable the
SCADA system to interface with the unit.
The cost of the provision of any protocol look up tables etc., shall be included in
the cost of the device. Full details shall be included with the supply of the device
to enable the Unit to be integrated with the SCADA system.
The principle is that these units shall be possible to be integrated with any
SCADA system that may be installed at the control centre.
7.2
RADIO MODEM
Radio data modem shall be designed, constructed and manufactured in
accordance with good engineering practice. It shall operate in transparent and
half-duplex mode without a need of keying control. However, Tx/Rx switching
times shall be limited to low values.
Radio data modem shall meet the following specifications.
Radio Standard
EN 300 113-1
EMC Standard
EN 301 489-1, -5
Electrical Safety Standard
IEC 60950
Frequency Range
330 470 MHz
Page: 10 , 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 8 - SAFETY& TESTING
Number of channels
160 / 100 / 80
Frequency Stability
< 1.5 kHz
Carrier Power
10 mW /20 mW / 50
mW / 100 mW / 200
mW /500 mW / 1W,
software adjustable
Data Speed of Radio Interface
19200 bps (25 kHz ch.

sp.)
9600 bps (12.5 kHz ch.
sp.)
Data Speed of Serial Interface
1200 ... 38400 bps
Serial Interface Level
RS-232, RS-485, RS-422
10W transmitter and diversity receiver must be available as an option.
7.3
CONTROL CENTRE
The control centre shall be located at the distribution control room in each town.
Please see separate specification for the control room.
8.
SAFETY& TESTING
8.1
SAFETY
8.2
(i)
Extensive interlocking shall be provided as per safety regulations to prevent maloperation,
(ii)
each switch board shall be identified by an appropriately sized label which clearly
indicates the functional units and their electrical characteristics.
(iii)
The switchgear and switch boards shall be designed so that the position of the
different devices is visible to the operator on the front of the switch board and
operations are visible as well through a window with fire proof transparent
material to see the physical isolation of contacts.
(iv)
In accordance with the standards in effect, the switch board shall be designed so
as to prevent access to all live parts during operation without the use of tools.
(v)
Any accidental over pressure inside the sealed chamber shall be limited by the
opening of a pressure limiting devices in the top rear part of the enclosure. Gas
will be released from the top rear of the switchboard away from the operator and
nearby pedestrians.
(vi)
All manual operations will be carried out on the front of the switch board.
TESTING EQUIPMENT
A gas pressure indicator or handy equipment to test the pressure of insulating gas
during the system operation shall be provided.
Page: 11 , 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 9 - GENERALREQUIREMENTS FOR

RMUS
9.
GENERALREQUIREMENTS FOR RMUS
9.1
EARTHING
The switchgear/switchboard shall have an earth bar. The earth bar shall be bolted
to the main frame and located so as to provide convenient facilities for earthing
cable sheaths and for use with earthing device. Means shall be provided for
coupling earth bars of adjacent units. The system earthing shall be such that at
least one of the neutral points of a three phase system is permanently earthed,
either solidly or through a resistor or reactance of low impedance. It shall not be
possible to remove the earth bar during operation.
All metal parts of the switchgear which do not belong to main circuit and which
can collect electric charge causing dangerous effect shall be connected to the
earthing conductor made of copper having CS area of minimum 75 mm2.Each
end of conductor shall be terminated by M12/equivalent quality and type of
terminal for connection to earth system installation. Earth conductor location
shall not obstruct access to cable terminations.
The following items are to be connected to the main earth conductor by rigid or
flexible copper conductors having a minimum cross section of 75mm (a) earthing
switches (b) Cable sheath or screen (c) capacitors used in voltage control devices,
if any.
9.2
PAINTING
All MS Structures shall be galvanized or epoxy painted in light Grey colour.
9.3
TROPICALISATION
Due regard should be given to the climatic conditions under which the equipment
is to work. Ambient temperature normally vary between -5o C and 30o C, although
direct sun temperature may reach 45o C. The climate is very humid and rapid
variations occur, relative humilities between 90% and 100% being frequently
recorded, but these values generally correspond to the lower ambient
temperatures. The equipment should also be designed to prevent ingress of
vermin, accidental contact with live parts and to minimize the ingress of dust and
dirt. The use of materials which may be liable to attack by termites and other
insects should be avoided.
9.4
INFORMATION LABELS
(i)
The name plates of the RMU functions shall be fixed on the front of the Ring
Main Unit.
(ii)
Specification plates of suitable size are to be screw fixed on the front of each
Ring Main Unit.
(iii)
Removable lifting lugs are to be fitted on the top of each panel.

Bolts and nuts used shall conform to ISO Standards (metric) and shall be rust
protected. Nuts and bolts for pressure parts shall be of best quality steel.
Page: 12 , 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
9.5
SECTION 10 - MANDATORY SPARES & TOOLS
CLEARANCES
(i)
Clearance between phases & earth in the insulating medium shall be as per latest
electricity rules and standards.
(ii)
Earthing switch shall be provided with independent manual operation. Earthing

switch must have a fault making capacity of minimum 40kA.
(iii)
A voltage control device shall be installed on each ring cable to show if the cable
is energized or not.
(iv)
The degree of safety of persons against hazardous approach to live parts and
moving parts shall be provided strictly as per latest safety standards.
(v)
Proper sealing for the safety against entrance of small animals/insects into the
compartment shall be provided.
9.6
OPERATING HANDLE
All operating handles for the switches/circuit breaker shall be located on the front
panel of the Ring Main Unit.
9.7
CONTROL MECHANISMS
Control mechanisms of switching devices shall be independent of manual
operation or motor operation.
9.8
LIST OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS

The bidder shall furnish four sets of following drawings along with his offer.
a)
General outline drawing showing plan, elevation and end view dimensions,
assembly and constructional drawings of the equipment.
b)
Name plate & schematic drawings.
c)
Operation manuals, leafless literature etc.
10.
MANDATORY SPARES & TOOLS

a)
SF6 Gas Cylinders of 50 Kg capacity 2 Nos.
b)
Spares required for trouble free operation of RMUs with their individual prices.
c)
List of recommended special maintenance Tools & Tackles together with their
individual prices for the equipment to be supplied against this specification
11.
SPECIFICATION OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES
11.1
SCOPE :
The specification covers specification of feeder Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) to
be fixed control and relay panel.
11.2
STANDARDS :
The applicable standards of IEDs are specified here below :
IEC 60255-5
Impulse withstand : 5 KV
Page: 13 , 30-Apr-13
SECTION 11 - SPECIFICATION OF
PROTECTIVE DEVICES
EEPCO
11.3
IEC 60255-22-4
Fast Transients, Class IV
IEC 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic Radiation, Class III:
IEC 60529
Degree of Protection, IP 52 on front panel
IEC 60255-21-1,
2, 3
Vibration, Shocks, Earthquakes, class-II
EIA-364-65A
The unit should have conformal coating for operation in

hazardous atmosphere
SYSTEM DETAILS :
The IEDs shall be suitable for outdoor and indoor installations with 3 Phase, 50 Hz,
33KV & 15KV system in which the neutral is effectively earthed and the same shall be
suitable for service fluctuations in supply voltage up to 10% and frequency variation of 3% and +2% (48.5 Hz to 51.0 Hz).
11.4
POWER SUPPLY RATINGS :

The protection and control unit range shall be designed to accommodate all types of
control power supply voltages from 18V DC to 250V DC voltages or be self-powered as
the application requires.
11.5
TECHNICAL PARAMETERS :
The relay should be micro processor based relay,
11.5.1
Protection Requirements
The relay should have all the protection functions in a single box like :
11.5.2
Instantaneous and Inverse time phase over current protection (50/51).
Instantaneous and Inverse time Earth fault protection (51, 51N)
Broken conductor detection protection (46BC)
Auto Reclose (79)
Measurement Requirements
The relay should provide Measurement for all basic and advance parameters like :
Phase Currents peak and average
Neutral current
Voltage
Frequency
Active and reactive power
Power Factor
No. of operations
Cumulative breaking current seen
The measurement shall also be helpful for switchgear health analysis.

Page: 14 , 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 11 - SPECIFICATION OF
PROTECTIVE DEVICES
The relays should have programmable LCD or LEDs Outputs, Digital inputs for
customized requirements.
11.5.3
General
The relay should have big alpha numerical display for showing measurement / settings
etc.,
It should be possible to withdraw the unit without prior current circuit short-circuiting.
The relay should have single button for resetting of the protection output and protection
function.
The relay should have remote and local selection provision.
11.5.4
Setting ranges over current (Overload) time delayed

PS
1% to 240% of In or better
TMS
0.002 to 2.00
Time delay at 10 I/Is:
0.05 to 300 S
Timer Hold Curve DT:
0.05 to 300 S
Timer Hold curve IDMT 0.5 to 20 S
11.5.5
11.5.6
Setting ranges of Phase short Circuit Protection (50)

PS
10 % to 2400 % of In or better
Time delay
50 ms to 20 S
Setting ranges of Earth Fault time delayed (51 N)

PS
1% to 100% of In or better
TMS
0.002 to 2.00
Time delay at 10 I/Is:
0.05 to 300 S
Timer Hold Curve DT:
0.05 to 300 S
Timer Hold curve IDMT 0.5 to 20 S
11.5.7
11.5.8
Setting ranges of Earth Fault time delayed (50 N)

PS
10 % to 1500% of In or better
Time delay
50 ms to 300 S
Auto recloser (79)

The relay should have auto recloser function with minimum 4 recloser Cycles.
Page: 15 , 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
11.5.9
Other facilities
The Relay should have WATCH DOG feature for continuous checking of
internal health of the relay and should have dedicated output for alarm and
tripping for the same.
The relay output should have enough capacity for energizing the direct tripping
and closing of the breaker.
The relay shall support and the user shall have a choice of curve types.
Protection tripping shall be indicated on the front of the device by a LED and
text indicating the cause of the fault.
The relay should interface with the RTU for communication
11.5.10
Guarantee
The relays shall be guaranteed for five years from the date of commissioning.
The manufacturer shall demonstrate the availability of spares for all the above
relays.
12.
PACKING
See spec. No.TS-GN-02
13.
SCHEDULES
13.1
SCHEDULE FOR 15KV SF6 RING MAIN UNITS

13.2

Schedule RefTS-SG-12-NC1
Specification
Clause
Page: 16 , 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
Page: 17 , 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
13.3

Specification
Clause
Page: 18 , 30-Apr-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

15kV SF6 Ring Main Units Extensible and Non
Technical Schedule for Extensible
No
I
Item
1
2
General Details
Manufacturers name
3
4
Switchgear model No
Type
Unit
Requirement
Bid offer
Ratings & Electrical Requirements
SF6 gas insulated
II
Applicable Standards
Enclosure
IEC 62271-200
Circuit Breaker
IEC 62271-100
III
General performance details
1
2
3
4
5
Rated voltage
Highest system voltage
Rated frequency
One minute power frequency withstand voltage
Lightning Impulse withstand voltage
kV
kV
Hz
kV
kV(peak)
15
24
50
50
125
kA
20
Rated duration of short circuit
Sec
kA
40
9
10
Operating cycle
Minimum SF6 gas pressure at 20C
kg/cm
0-0.3S -CO-3 MinCO

1.35
IV
1
Material ( Main Tank and LV compartment)
Enclosure
Steel
2
3
4
Thickness of material ( main Tank)

Thickness of material Doors
Separate compartments for each of VCB
Disconnector Switch, Busbar provided
SWG
SWG
Yes
14
18
5
6
V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Normal SF6 gas operating pressure

Type of pressure relief device & location
kg/cm
1.35
Rated normal current

Rated short circuit breaking current
Rated short circuit making current
DC component of short circuit breaking current
Rated power frequency recovery voltage
Small inductive breaking current:
Rated cable charging breaking current
A
kA
kA
630
20
40
kV
A
A
50
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Rated out of phase breaking current

On supply side of circuit breaker
On load side of circuit breaker
Opening Time
Maximum Arching Time
Rated maximum total break time
Closing time
Length of Each Break
A
kV (peak)
kV (peak)
ms
ms
ms
ms
mm
VI
Load Break and Fault

making(LBFM)Switches
No. of poles
Vacuum Circuit Breakers
File:TS-SG-12-S R2 15kV SF 6 Fixed and Extensible RMU.xlsm - sheet:TS-SG-12-SPage 1 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
Item
Switch Type
3
4
5
6
7
Rated voltage
Rated current
Load breaking current
Short time Rating
Fault making capacity (kA peak/ min.)
Impulse withstand voltage to earth between
poles.
Power frequency withstand voltage to earth and
between poles
8
9
VII
1
2
3
Unit
Requirement
SF6-Single Break,
Load breaking and
fault making switch
15 kV
630 Amps
630 Amps at 0.7PF
20 kA
40 kA
Bid offer
125kV
50kV
Type
Primary Transformation ratio
Secondary transformer ratio
Over current factor
4
(i)
(ii)
5
6
7
VIII
1
2
IX
1
2
3
4
5
X
Class of accuracy
Protection core
Metering core
Rated burden
Self powered IDMT Protection relays 2 Nos.

over current 1 No. earth fault elements
Over Load relay settings
Short circuit Prection seetings O/C
Short circuit Prection seetings E/F
2
3
4
XI
EEPCo
Cast resin
300-150A
to correpond to
breaking capacity
of crcuit breaker
5P10
0.2
as per requirement
125kVp
50kV
Earthing Devices
Rated short circuit withstand current
Duration of Short Circuit
kA
sec
20
3
kA
kV
20
24
Copper
SF6
Busbars & Connectors

Main Busbar Rating
Primary Busbar Insulation
Busbar Material
Busbar Insulation medium
Temperature Rise of Busbars at Rated Current
Protection
RTU
Make
Model
XII
Communication
XI
1
2
3
4
Type
Make
Model
Power
Cubicle
Degree of Protection:
HV compartment
LV compartment
Whether Space Heater is provided
Radio
IP65
IP42
YES
LPA-GECE
No
XII
Item
Interlocks provided for
XIII
1
2
3
XIV
1
2
3
4
5
XV
Earthing
Earthing of Circuits
Earthing of Busbar
Method of Circuit Earthing
Service Life
Operating design life (Rated Current)
Contact Life at Rated Interrupting Capacity
Type of Power Closing Devices
Method of Opening Devices
Control voltage
Recommended Maintenance Intervals
1
2
3
4
XVI
1
EEPCo
Recommended Life Expectancy

Operating mechanism
Contacts & Interrupting Mechanisms
Control & Ancillary Gear
Operation
Whether Closing Spring can be Charged with the
circuit breaker in closed position
2
Whether Circuit Breaker can be Closed whilst the
closing spring is being charged
3
Whether Locking Facilities are provided for the
manual tripping of the circuit breaker
4
Whether the following Position Indicators are
provided for circuit breaker
4(i)
Spring Charged Spring Free
4(ii) ON OFF
4(iii) Earth ON
4(iv) Earth OFF
XVII Number of Units making up the RMU
1
Standard RMU
2
RMU with Extensions
XVIII Dimensions of each unit/Total
1
Width
2
Depth
3
Height
Unit
Requirement
ELECTRICAL &
MECHANICAL
Yes
Yes
Yes
Throughout RMU
Times
Times
10000
30
Motor spring charged
Bid offer
230V a.c
Yrs/Ops
Yrs/Ops
Yrs/Ops
Yrs/Ops
Yrs/Ops
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2 Isolators & 4 VCBs
mm
mm
mm
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-SG-13
Pole mounted 15kV Switched Capacitors
Rev -0- Apr 2013
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
Apr 2013
First issue
TS-SG-13 R0 Pole mounted 15kV switched_capacitors.docx

Rev -0- Apr 2013
Page: i , 11-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
POLE MOUNTED 15KV SWITCHED CAPACITORS
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
TYPE TESTS
ROUTINE TESTS
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
1
2
2
5.
DESIGN OF CAPACITORS
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
GENERAL
GROUNDING TERMINALS
TANK FABRICATION
FINISH OF TANK
RATING AND CONNECTION PLATE
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
6.
AUTOMATIC CAPACITOR SWITCHES
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
RATED VOLTAGE
RATED CURRENT
RATED CAPACITIVE SWITCHING CURRENT
RATED SHORT TIME CURRENT
RATED MAKING CURRENT
BASIC IMPULSE LEVEL (BIL)
CONTROL SUPPLY
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
7.
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
7.1
7.2
CENTRAL PARAMETER
OPERATING MECHANISM
6
6
8.
9.
10.
MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL ENDURANCE

SCHEDULES
6
6
7
10.1
10.2
10.3
SCHEDULE FOR POLE MOUNTED 15KV SWITCHED CAPACITORS

7
8
9

Rev -0- Apr 2013
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
POLE MOUNTED 15KV SWITCHED

CAPACITORS
1.
SCOPE
performance requirements of pole mounted automatic switched capacitors for
installations comprising of,
(i)
15 kV Capacitor Banks of 600 kVAr rating, and
(ii)
15 kV SF6/ Vacuum automatic capacitor switches which Switch ON / OFF the

capacitor banks sensing line current of the line.
2.

See specification TS-GN-01-EEPCO System and Environmental Data.
The Equipment shall be used in installations at altitudes up to 3000M.
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The shunt capacitors shall comply with the latest editions of and amendments
to, the Standards/Specifications listed below.
3.1
Specification /
Standard Number
Title
IEC 60871
Shunt Capacitors for A.C Power Systems
IEC 60129
Alternating Current Disconnectors and Switches
IEC 60694
Common Clauses for HV Switchgear and Control gear

Standards
CONFLICT
4.

4.1
TYPE TESTS
4.1.1
Tests on capacitor Banks

The following type tests as per the relevant standards shall be conducted on the
Shunt Capacitors identical design to prove that the offered Capacitors satisfy all
the design requirements set out in this specification.
The tests shall be carried out in accordance with the Standard specified in each
case.
(i)
Thermal stability test,

Rev -0- Apr 2013
Page: 1 , 11-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
(ii)
Measurement of the tangent of the loss angle(tan delta) of the capacitor at

elevated temperature,
(iii)
AC voltage test between terminals and container,
(iv)
Lightning impulse voltage test between terminals and container,
(v)
Short circuit discharge test,
(vi)
Test of an external fuse in combination with a capacitor,
(vii)
Disconnecting test on internal fuses,
(viii)
Endurance test.
4.1.2
Tests on switches
(i)
Tests to verify the insulation level, including withstand tests at power-frequency

voltages on auxiliary equipment,
(ii)
Tests to prove that the temperature rise of any part does not exceed the specified
values,
(iii)
Making and breaking tests,
(iv)
Tests to prove the capability of the switch to carry the rated short-time current,
(v)
Tests to prove satisfactory operation and mechanical/electrical endurance.
4.2
ROUTINE TESTS
Tests on capacitor Banks
The shunt capacitor units shall be subjected to the following Routine Tests at the
manufacturers works.
(i)
Capacitance measurement,
(ii)
Measurement of the tangent of the loss angle (tan delta)of the capacitor,
(iii)
Voltage test between terminals,
(iv)
A.C voltage test between terminals and container,
(v)
Test of internal discharge device,
(vi)
Sealing test,
(vii)
Discharge test on internal fuses.
4.2.2
4.3
Tests on switches
(i)
Power-frequency voltage dry test,
(ii)
Voltage tests for auxiliary circuits,
(iii)
Measurement of the resistance of the main circuits,
(iv)
Tests to prove satisfactory operation.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
All acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant standards and as given below shall
be carried out by the supplier in the presence of the Employers representative.

Rev -0- Apr 2013
Page: 2 , 11-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
SECTION 5 - DESIGN OF CAPACITORS
(i)
Verification of the equipment to conform to the specification and drawings,
(ii)
Verification of all the routine tests,
(iii)
Verification Test certificates for the dielectric tests on bushings used.
5.
DESIGN OF CAPACITORS
5.1
GENERAL
This specification covers the requirement for outdoor 15kV 3 phase, shunt
capacitor banks and associated equipment,
(i)
Each bank shall consist of one capacitor unit of 200 kVAr per phase complying
with the relevant IEC,
(ii)
The capacitor banks shall be suitable Pole mounting and suitable for outdoor
mounting and for upper limit of ambient temperature category of 50 C.
5.2
(i)
The rated voltage of the capacitors shall be 17.5 kV (phase to phase). This
represents the highest system voltage corresponding to the nominal system
voltage of 15 kV but should be designed for insulation levels of 24kV because of
their installation at altitudes of up to 3000M.
(ii)
The standard rated output of a switched capacitor bank shall be 600 kVAr at
15kV rated voltage. The bank shall comprise of 3 single phase units of 200 kVAr
each connected in star with floating neutral.
(iii)
The maximum permissible overloads with regard to voltage, current and reactive
output shall conform to the relevant standard.
(iv)
The power loss in capacitors shall not exceed 0.2 Watt/kVAr (subject to a
tolerance of plus 10%).
(v)
Suitable discharge device shall be connected across the capacitor units in

accordance with the provisions of the relevant standard.
(vi)
The discharge device shall reduce the residual voltage from the crest value of the
rated voltage to 50 V or less within 5 minutes after the capacitor is disconnected
from the source of supply.
(vii)
The container of each capacitor unit shall be provided with suitable earthing
terminal clearly marked as EARTH.
5.2.2
Operating Conditions
The Capacitors shall be Capable of Operating in energized condition
continuously.
5.2.3
Fuses for Capacitor Banks

(i)
The capacitors shall be provided with either internal or external fuses as per
standard practice of the manufacturer. In the latter case, the manufacturer shall
supply a set of external fuses together with the fixing accessories and a set of three
spare fuse links along with the capacitor bank. Necessary protection against over
voltage and inrush current shall be provided.

Rev -0- Apr 2013
Page: 3 , 11-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
(ii)
SECTION 5 - DESIGN OF CAPACITORS
The capacitors shall be of non PCH type using propylene film as the dielectric.
5.3
5.3.1
Bushings
The Bushings shall conform to the relevant IEC and shall be sufficiently robust to
withstand normal transport hazards.
The bushings shall be fitted with galvanised hardware and suitable lugs to accept
the tin plated aluminium lugs or pure copper lugs,
5.3.2
Connections
For connecting to the terminals of the capacitor 16mm to 70mm Cu or 25mm
to 100mm Al. stranded conductors will be used.
5.4
GROUNDING TERMINALS
All capacitors shall be provided with a grounding terminal with a 10mm diameter
hole. The material shall be galvanised steel.
5.5
5.6
TANK FABRICATION
a)
Capacitor tanks shall not leak and shall be of hermetically sealed construction.
b)
The minimum thickness of steel used shall be 3mm. Thickness below the
minimum value will be considered only in exceptional cases, such as where special
protective finishes are used. The Contractor shall provide full information about
any such special finish, including any field experience.
FINISH OF TANK
1) The capacitor tank and its accessories shall be adequately protected against
corrosion and the Bidder shall include a statement of the method of protection
proposed.
2) The container shall be hermetically sealed by controlled arc welding process. The
metal flange of the bushing should be soldered / welded to the container covered
with epoxy compound providing a strong hermetical sealing of the container.
3) Hot dip galvanising is preferred, when this is not practical the tanks shall be
shot-blasted and then immediately zinc sprayed to an average weight deposit of
not less than 550 g/m followed by a zinc chromate based primary paint, and two
coats of durable oil and weather resisting paint. Finish colour shall be light grey.
4) Suitable mounting brackets for mounting the bank on concrete poles shall be
welded to the container.
5.7

Each capacitor unit and capacitor bank shall bear a weather proof rating plate
containing the following information in English.
The outside of the container shall be smooth and tidy looking and should be
coated with weather proof and corrosion resistant paint of white or light grey
outside.

Rev -0- Apr 2013
Page: 4 , 11-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
6.
SECTION 6 - AUTOMATIC CAPACITOR

SWITCHES
AUTOMATIC CAPACITOR SWITCHES

Unless otherwise stipulated in this specification, the capacitor switch shall comply
with the standards mentioned above. The switches shall be of SF6/ vacuum type,
compact in design and of light weight facilitating handling with ease
6.1
RATED VOLTAGE
The rated voltage for the capacitor switches shall be 17.5 kV. This represents the
highest equipment voltage corresponding to the nominal system voltage of 15 kV.
6.2
RATED CURRENT
The standard rated normal current shall be 400 A
6.3
RATED CAPACITIVE SWITCHING CURRENT

The rated capacitive switching current shall not be less than 30 A.
6.4

The rated symmetrical short time current for one second shall be 10 kA.
6.5

The rated making current shall be 20 kA.
6.6
BASIC IMPULSE LEVEL (BIL)

The rated basic impulse level of switch to earth and also across the open terminal
shall be 125 kV.
6.7
CONTROL SUPPLY
The capacitor switch shall be self-powered from the 15 kV line i.e., no AC or DC
control supply need be made available for its operation. The source of control
supply (auxiliary transformers etc) should work satisfactorily with voltage
fluctuations on the 15 kV line from +10% to 20%. The same supply may be
used to protect the capacitor in case of over voltage due to shifting of neutral due
to single phase fault. Suitable relay shall be included to trip the capacitor switch in
case of over voltage.
7.
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

The capacitor switches shall be of three phase gang operated construction as per
the standard design of the manufacturer.
The capacitor switch shall be of double break design per phase. The capacitor
switch shall be suitable for outdoor installation and shall have sealed weather
proof type construction. The capacitor switch shall be suitable for mounting on
single pole structure without any special accessories. The capacitor switch shall be
suitable for mounting on single pole structure without any special accessories. The
capacitor switch shall be provided with a mechanical indicator to show the contact
position in open/close position. Provision shall also be made for manual closing
and opening.

Rev -0- Apr 2013
Page: 5 , 11-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
SECTION 8 - MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL

ENDURANCE
The metallic enclosure of the capacitor switch shall be provided with two earthing
terminals (marked with the earth symbol), inverted V type top arrangement shall
be provided to prevent stagnation of rain water. The bushings provided on the
switch shall be of high quality porcelain and shall have clamp type of terminal to
directly receive aluminium conductors up to 10mm dia. in both horizontal and
vertical directions. The terminal arrangement shall be such as to avoid bimetallic
corrosion.
7.1
CENTRAL PARAMETER
The central parameter for switching operation shall be the line current at the point
of installation of the switch. The maximum value of the line current shall be 400A
and accordingly a current transformer of 400/5A ratio shall be supplied along
with an ammeter and switch to measure the line current in one of the phases for
the purpose of control. The switch shall have adjustable value of current at which
the capacitor bank shall be switched ON or switched OFF. This adjustment shall
be available in continuous variation in steps not exceeding 5A each over a
minimum range of 10-50 amps, line current.
There shall be an inherent delay of at least 5 minutes in each switching operation
to avoid any damage to the capacitor.
7.2
OPERATING MECHANISM
The operating mechanism shall be either solenoid or motor charged spring for
which the control supply shall be as per clause 6.7 Control Supply above.
Necessary relays to sense the CT secondary current and to control the capacitor
switch shall be included in the supply.
8.
MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL ENDURANCE

The switch shall be capable of performing not less than 30,000 mechanical
operations and 30,000 electrical operations at 50A capacitive current without
getting damaged.
9.

Each capacitor unit and capacitor bank shall bear a weather proof rating plate
containing the following information in English.
9.1.1
CAPACITOR BANKS
1) Manufacturer,
2) Manufacturer's designation,
3) Rated output ,
4) Rate voltage,
5) Year of manufacture,
6) EEPCO order number,
7) Rated current,
8) Rated frequency,

Rev -0- Apr 2013
Page: 6 , 11-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
9) Ambient temperature range,

10) Measured and corrected capacitance C20 of each phase,
11) Measured current at rated voltage and rated frequency,
12) Insulation level,
13) Discharge time to 50kV-phase to phase,
14) Connection symbol.
Marking of the terminals of the bank A, B and C.
10.
SCHEDULES
10.1
SCHEDULE FOR POLE MOUNTED 15KV SWITCHED

CAPACITORS

Rev -0- Apr 2013
Page: 7 , 11-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
10.2

Schedule Ref -NC1
Specification
Clause

Rev -0- Apr 2013
Page: 8 , 11-Apr-13
SPECIFICATION
EEPCO
10.3

Item Reference -TC1
Specification
Clause

Rev -0- Apr 2013
Page: 9 , 11-Apr-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for Pole mouunted 15kV Switched Capacitors
S.No. Item
1 Capacitor bank voltage (nominal)
2 Capacitor bank maximum Equipment
Withstand Voltage
3 Rated Equipment Withstand voltage for
bushings
4
Nominal Voltage across one capacitor unit
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Number of phases
Rated frequency
VAr rating of three phase capacitor bank
Rated current for the switch
Type of fluid
Rated making current for th switch
Rated capacitive switching current
Power frequency, 1 minute
Basic impulse level
Max.Tolerance of Capacitor bank rated
Connection
17
18
Mounting
19
20
21
22
23
24
Type of fluid
Fuse rating (type)
Maximum fuse blowing time
Number of slacks
Number of racks
25
Minimum fuse bus, stacking and base

insulator rating
Mechanical/electrical endurance at 50A
capacitive current
Insulation levels to earth of Capacitor
Bank
Minimum creepage distance
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Uit
kV
Bid offer
Requirement
15
kV
17.5
kV
24
kV
8.66
Hz
Var
A
kA
kA
A
kV
kV
3
50
600
400
10
25
>30
50
125
0 to +5%
Number of parallel units per series section

Outdoor
High energy all film
cripmed
Non PCB
-0.3 secs.
1
Composition
As per IEC 60871-1

(assume Un=8.66kV
Insulation levels of capacitor units
Design standards
Switchable or step units with multiple step
sequence control
Spare cans
Spare fuse links
Spare fuse holders
kV
Nos.
mm/kV
>30000/30000
20
IEC pub 60871-1 and
60871-2
Yes
10% of supplied units
File:TS-SG-13 S Pole mounted 15kV switched capacitors.xlsx- sheet:TS-SG-13-S
Page 1
Date: 11/4/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-SG-14
Pole Mounted 15kV Line Sectionalisers
Rev -0- Mar 2013
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
Mar 2013
First Issue.
TS-SG-14 R0a Pole mounted 15kV Line sectionalisers.docxRev -0- Mar 2013
LPA/GECE/Page: i , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
POLE MOUNTED 15KV LINE SECTIONALISERS
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT
4.
4.1
4.2
TYPE TESTS
ROUTINE TESTS
1
2
5.
DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
2
2
2
2
2
2
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
RATED VOLTAGE
RATED CURRENT
RATED BREAKING CAPACITY
RATED BASIC IMPULSE LEVEL
RATED ONE MINUTE POWER FREQUENCY WITHSTAND
VOLTAGE
CONTROL SUPPLY
FAULT BREAKING CAPACITY
OPERATION
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL ENDURANCE
FAULTY SECTION INDICATOR
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
TANK
COORDINATION WITH THE SUB-STATION BREAKER
6.
7.
8.
MARKING
6
SCHEDULES
8.1
8.2
8.3
SCHEDULE FOR POLE MOUNTED 15KV LINE SECTIONALISERS

7
7
8
APPENDIX A DESCRIPTION OF SECTIONALISER

OPERATION
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
GENERAL
TYPE-I VOLTAGE SENSING SECTIONALISER
TYPE-II COUNTING FAULT CURRENT PASSAGES
OVERALL RECOMMENDATION
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
9
9
13
13
LPA/GECE/Page: ii , 11-Apr-13
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO
POLE MOUNTED 15KV LINE SECTIONALISERS

1.
SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, supply, delivery and
performance requirements of Pole mounted 3-phase 15kV Automatic Line
Sectionalisers for outdoor installation for detection of fault, isolation of the faulty
branch line and restoration of power supply to healthy section, in the event of
fault, to improve reliability.
2.

The Equipment shall be used in installations up to an altitude of 3000M.
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
3.1
Specification /
Standard Number
Title
IEC 60694
Common specification for high voltage switchgear

and control gear standards.
IEC 60265-1
Switches for rated voltages above 1kV and less than

52kV.
IEC 62271-200
High Voltage switchgear and control gear Part200.A.C metal enclosed Switchgear and control gear
for rated voltages above 1kV and up to and including
52kV.
CONFLICT
See Specification TS-GN-02.
4.

See spec TS- GN-02.
4.1
TYPE TESTS
(i)
Tests
(ii)
to verify the insulation level, including withstand tests at power-frequency

voltage on auxiliary equipment,
(iii)
Tests to prove that the temperature rise of any part does not exceed the specified
values,
(iv)
Making and breaking tests,
Page: 1 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 5 - DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS
(v)
Tests to prove the capability of the switch to carry the rated short-time current,
(vi)
Tests to prove satisfactory operation and mechanical/electrical endurance,
(vii)
Tests to provide satisfactory operation under ice conditions.
4.2
ROUTINE TESTS
(i)
Power-frequency voltage tests,
(ii)
Voltage tests for auxiliary circuits,
(iii)
Measurement of the resistance of the main circuits,
(iv)
Tests to prove satisfactory operations.
5.
DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS
5.1
RATED VOLTAGE
The rated voltage for the line sectionaliser shall be 17.5KV. This represents the
highest system voltage corresponding to the nominal system voltage of 15KV
for all solid insulation, oil, vacuum, gas insulated equipment. For bushing the
highest equipment voltage level shall be 24kV.
5.2
RATED CURRENT
The standard rated normal current shall be 400 A.
5.3
RATED BREAKING CAPACITY
5.4
a)Mainly active load breaking capacity
400A
b)Transformer off-load breaking capacity
10A
c) Line-charging breaking capacity
10A
d) Cable-charging breaking capacity
10A

The rated short-time symmetrical current for one second shall be 10 kA.
5.5

The rated making current shall be 25 kA.
5.6
RATED BASIC IMPULSE LEVEL
5.7
a)To earth and between poles
125 kV
b)Across the terminals of open switch
150 kV
RATED ONE MINUTE POWER FREQUENCY WITHSTAND

VOLTAGE
(i)
To earth and between poles
50 kV
(ii)
Across the terminals of open switch
60 kV
(iii)
Control circuit to earth
2 kV
Page: 2 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
5.8
CONTROL SUPPLY
The line sectionalisers are provided with Voltage transformer on one side or
either side as the case may be to sense the powered supply and provide Control
supply for operation of sectionalisers.
5.9
FAULT BREAKING CAPACITY

The sectionalisers shall have no rated fault breaking capacity and will sectionalise
the faulty section (which it is to control) only when the power supply to the line is
interrupted by the controlling circuit breaker/auto recloser at the main
substation.
5.10
OPERATION
5.10.1
Purpose of sectionalisers
The sectionalisers are deployed in Distribution system to improve the reliability of
power supply. The sectionaliser is load breaking and fault making switch with
Voltage sensing and timing control mechanism. The sectionaliser has no fault
current interrupting capability and therefore always work in association with a
circuit breaker having auto reclosing facility.
5.10.2
Functions of Sectionalisers
The function of a sectionaliser is to isolate the faulty section and restore power
supply to healthy part of feeder when a permanent fault occurs on the feeder. If
the fault is transient in nature, then supply is restored after momentary
interruption on reclosing of feeder circuit breaker
5.10.3
Components of Sectionalisers
The sectionaliser consists of 3 parts
5.10.4
Load breaking and fault making SF6/ Vacuum switch called DM switch
Fault detecting and control relay box called TSR
Voltage Transformer on either side of sectionaliser on loop feeder and on

incoming side only for radial feeder.
Operation of sectionaliser
The principle of operations how the Sectionaliser operates in case of
transient fault and permanent fault on radial feeder and Loop feeder is explained
in Appendix A
5.10.5
Advantages of Sectionalisers
The advantages of Sectionaliser are
(i)
Any number of Sectionalisers can be deployed on line in series, improving

reliability index to desired level.
(ii)
The number of interruptions to any customer for any permanent fault is only two
irrespective of location
Page: 3 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
(iii)
5.11
The sectionalisers facilitates automatic power supply restoration from loop feeder
in case of fault providing supply to all healthy sections other than faulty section.
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL ENDURANCE

The voltage sensing sectionaliser shall be capable of performing not less than
20,000 mechanical operations and 20,000 electrical operations at rated current
without getting damaged.
5.12
FAULTY SECTION INDICATOR

An indicator to indicate the faulty section shall be provided on the controlling
breaker in the main sub-station. The indicator shall indicate the particular
sectionaliser which has locked out on permanent fault. The indicator will work on
the basis of discrimination of time elapsed between the first reclosing of the
circuit breaker and its next tripping due to permanent fault in a particular section.
5.13
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

The sectionalisers shall be of either vacuum of SF6 type.
The equipment shall be of outdoor type and suitable for mounting on single or
double-pole structures.
5.14
TANK
The switching contacts are housed in a steel tank of thickness 3mm. Thickness
below the minimum value will be considered only in exceptional cases where
protective finishes are used. The contractor shall provide full information where
any such special finish is used and also provide field experience, if any.
Each tank shall be provided with an explosion vent on the side (only for SF6
type) which shall safely release any over pressures developed by excessive internal
arcing. A mechanical low gas pressure interlock which prevents operation of the
sectionaliser if the gas pressure falls below certain safe pressure shall be provided.
There shall be a visible indication of low gas pressure through a window in the
tank and also through a flag which could be seen from the ground.
The sectionalisers shall be provided with a mechanically operated contact position
indicator. The provision shall also be made for manual opening and closing of the
sectionaliser from ground level using a hook stick.
A manual lock-out ring which when pulled by the hook-stick prevent operation of
the sectionaliser to take up maintenance work in the downstream of the
sectionaliser.
5.14.1
Indicators
Two nos. ON/OFF indicators shall be provided, one on the side of the tank by
the operating lever and one underneath the tank visible to the operator from
below.
Sectionaliser bushing terminals shall be designed so as to directly receive AAAC
conductor up to 200 mm size by using bolted clamps so as not to require the use
of lugs. The terminal arrangement shall be such as to avoid bimetallic corrosion.
Page: 4 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
5.15
SECTION 6 - REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
SF6 LOCKOUT
If the unit is SF6 insulated then a lockout on low pressure should operate and
prevent the unit from closing.
A visual alarm shall be incorporated in case of low gas pressure.
5.16
COORDINATION WITH THE SUB-STATION BREAKER

As the sectionalisers installed on a feeder work in coordination with the circuit
breaker or an auto-re-closer at the main sub-station controlling the feeder, this
aspect requires proper attention. In the case of manually operated circuit breaker,
the normal interval between the first and subsequent trials is two minutes or so.
In such cases only voltage sensing sectionalisers can be used. However, in the case
of an auto-re-closer, it is possible to use both Voltage and Current Sensing
Sectionalisers.
6.
REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
6.1
SECTIONALISER CONTROL
The Sectionaliser shall be fitted with a separate control box.
Protection and timer relays shall be installed in this control box. This control box
shall be suitable for fitting on the pole at a low level than the Sectionaliser to
provide inspection maintenance and setting access to utility personnel. All fittings
required for mounting shall be supplied. All operating parameters of the
Sectionaliser shall be controlled from the control box.
All settings shall be either a) through a suitable interface pad/keyboard designed
for the harsh operating environment of the Sectionaliser, b) positive step selector
switches or c) plug-in components.
Ratings shall be clearly marked in relevant units of measure with no interpretation
multipliers or conversion being required.
Each unit shall be equipped with an electronic control armoured capable of
operating in the environmental conditions specified in spec. No. TS-GN-01. The
cable shall be protected in either a metallic non rusting tube or a metallic cover
that can be fitted over the cable. The cable protection shall be securely fixed on
the pole and appropriate permanent fixings shall be provided. The fixings shall
not be plastic tie wraps. Stainless steel tie wraps are permitted.
6.2
Remote Terminal Unit / Remote control shall be provided for the Sectionaliser if
so specified in the technical schedule. The remote control shall be achieved
through a communication link between control centre and the Sectionalisers and
necessary provision shall be incorporated in the control box.
GSM/GPRS/ CDMA service is available in 7 towns and is proposed to be
deployed for communication between Control Centre and this device.
Alternatively communication may be provided through a radio link with the
Control room.
Page: 5 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 7 - MARKING
enable linkage between the unit control and the communication system.
The Unit shall incorporate an energy storage system to enable the equipment to
operate within one month of being disconnected/ powered-off from the network.
device shall be provided to the client/purchaser to enable the SCADA system to
interface with the unit. The cost of the provision of any protocol look up tables
etc. shall be included in the cost of the device. Full details shall be included with
the supply of the device to enable the Unit to be integrated with the SCADA
system.
Remote terminal unit (RTU) and modem is included in the standard equipment
for the automated switch.
Information on load break switch and sectionaliser states and fault values shall be
transmitted to the SCADA system
6.3
DATA TO BE TRANSMITTED TO SCADA

The following data shall be transmitted / enable interface with the SCADA
system
7.
Status information of sectionaliser
Lockout status of sectionaliser.
Voltage
Remote lockout reset.
No of operation of the unit.
Low SF6 if SF6 insulted
MARKING
The sectionalisers shall be provided with a name plate legibly and indelibly marked
with the following:(i)
Name of the manufacturer,
(ii)
Type, designation and serial number,
(iii)
Rated voltage and current,
(iv)
Rated frequency,
(v)
Number of poles,
(vi)
Rated normal current,
(vii)
Rated breaking capacity,
(viii)
Rated short-time current,
(ix)
Rated making current.
Page: 6 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
8.
SCHEDULES
8.1
SCHEDULE FOR POLE MOUNTED 15KV LINE
SECTIONALISERS
8.2

documenting the effects that such noncompliance is likely to have on the
Specification
Clause
Page: 7 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
8.3

Specification
Clause
Page: 8 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
APPENDIX A DESCRIPTION OF
SECTIONALISER OPERATION
A-1
GENERAL
The distribution system design is targeting to reduce power outage time and
improve power reliability. In order to achieve this it is possible to use automatic
equipment to isolate a section of the network where a fault occurred. This can be
achieved by employing Sectionalisers in conjunction with the Circuit breaker (CB)
at the substation, equipped with auto-reclosing features that will operate at the
occurrence of a fault and reclose automatically to cater for transient faults and
accommodate auto-sectionalisation of the system.
A Sectionaliser consists of 3 components basically and they are:
Line switch referred to as DM switch which is generally vacuum or SF6

switch for low maintenance operation.
Fault detecting or control relay Box called TSR, and
Voltage Transformer (for Type I units described below)
The DM switch is mounted on the line and is controlled by TSR.

The DM switch is closed or opened through a solenoid.
The voltage transformer provides power source for DM switch operation and
voltage for TSR.
Further the sectionaliser control relay has no time-current characteristics (as in the
case of relays which are used in power system protection scheme as it opens only
when supply fails and recloses after a pre-set time of resumption of supply. No
fault currents are interrupted by the Sectionalisers as they open out only when
supply fails and voltage is absent.
Sectionalisers are of two types. The operational features of these two types are
discussed below.
A-2
TYPE-I VOLTAGE SENSING SECTIONALISER

This type allows several Sectionalisers to be used in series (for example for a very
long rural line) and will isolate the faulty section on the second breaker re-closure.
It is essential the substation breaker accommodates two re-closures. In order to
establish the philosophy of operation of the this type of sectionaliser we consider
two cases a) one with one sectionaliser in the distribution line and b) two
Sectionalisers in series along the line length.
A-2-1
CASE A) ONE SECTIONALISER

With one sectionaliser the distribution line emanating from the substation is split
in two sections before and after the sectionaliser.
When a fault occurs along the line the substation breaker trips and clears the fault
and the line is disconnected from the system (dead). The sectionaliser when it is
senses no volts will open.
Page: 9 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
If the reclose relay has fault sensing facility then the breaker will see a fault in the
first section and will not close, i.e. it will remain open. Then the operator knows
that a fault occurred in the first section of the line.
If the breaker protection relay does not have a fault sensing relay or the fault is
not in the first section after a reclose time Tr the substation breaker will close.
If the fault is in the first section the substation breaker will trip for the second
time and reclose two times before locking out.
If the fault is on the second section then the sequence of sectionaliser starts after
the first re-closure.
When the Circuit Breaker (CB) at the substation closes after the 1st tripping, the
control relay TSR of sectionaliser receives voltage and it waits for a time of 10sec
before permitting closing of the DM switch. This time hereinafter called X time
of TSR relay is adjustable by programming to coordinate with the substation
reclose settings.
After the DM switch closes a timer starts to record elapsed time. This is of the
order of about 5 sec, (hereinafter called the Y time of the TSR relay) and it is
considered as the eliminating time of this lockout timer. This time is set to be the
maximum time that the substation breaker will clear any fault.
This timer is used to determine indirectly persistent faults beyond the point of the
DM switch. If the fault persists the substation breaker will trip again (within this
time) and this timer Y will effectively lock out the Sectionaliser as its time of 5 sec
has not elapsed to enable it to reset. The system has effectively determined that
the fault persists after the sectionaliser.
When the substation breaker re-closes this sectionaliser will remain open thus
isolating the faulty section.
A-2-2
CASE B) TWO SECTIONALIZERS IN LINE

Consider 2 Sectionalisers and three sections as follows:
Section 1 (S1) between substation and 1st sectionaliser (DM1),
Section 2 (S2) between 1st and 2nd Sectionaliser (DM2) and
Section 3 (S3) between 2nd sectionaliser and rest of line
If a fault occurs in section S1 the substation breaker will reclose, trip, reclose and
trip again and stay open as described in the previous case (A-2-1).
If the fault is in section 2 the operation will be also as described above.
If the fault is in section 3 the following sequence will occur.
Following a fault the substation breaker opens on fault at time T0.
Both Sectionalisers DM1 and DM2 open during dead time of substation reclose relay and the substation breaker is only connected to section S1, the
other two sections are disconnected.
The substation breaker recloses after time Tr and the sensing relay at 1st
Sectionaliser senses voltage.
Page: 10 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
After 10 seconds from sensing voltage (Tr + 10 sec) the 1st sectionaliser
S1, closes and the Y lockout timer arms and counts. Second sectionaliser S2
now sees voltage and its sensing relay Y starts counting the 10 sec it needs
before it will allow 2nd sectionaliser to close.
After 5 seconds the Y timer of the 1st sectionaler resets, hence does not lock
out.
After 10 sec from closure of 1st Sectionaliser, (ie after Tr +10 +10 sec), 2nd
sectionaliser closes to the faulty section.
The Y timer of the 2nd sectionaliser is armed and counting.
As the fault is persisting the substation breaker will trip, before the Y timer
of the 2nd sectionaliser resets, hence locking out the second sectionaliser.
The substation breaker trips and recloses for the second time.
The 1st recloser will reclose normally but the 2nd will remain open, thus
removing isolating the faulty section.
All operations sequences will clear within 2 recloses of the substation breaker.
A-2-3
GRAPHIC EXAMPLE OF OPERATION WITH 2 UNITS

Type-I Sectionaliser-Application to long radial feeders
Consider the following figure -1 with 3 sections and with 2-sectionalisers DM1,
TSR1 and DM2, TSR2 of their components. The fault exists at point P in section3
The sequence of operation for a permanent fault a P.
Page: 11 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
Fig.2
1) The auto reclose breaker at substation open (Point 1 in figure 2)

2) TSR relays of DM1 and DM2 sees no voltage,
3) DM1 and DM2 open,
4) The auto reclose breaker recloses at time Tr,
5) The TSR1 relay of DM1 receives voltage ( point 2),
6) DM1 switch closes after the lapse x time of TSR1 relay( point 3),
7) The TSR2 relay of DM2 receives voltage (the x time of TSR2 and Y time of
TSR-1 starts at this point 3),
8) DM2 switch closes after the lapse of X time of TSR2 relays (point 5),
9) (Here the supply to DM2 is still available up to point 5 since Y time of TSR1 has
already lapsed since the fault is not in Section 1 and hence DM1 is still in closed
position.
10) If the fault at point P is temporary in nature, normal conditions prevailed, Y timer
of DM2 resets and both Sectionalisers remain closed.
If the fault is permanent the following occurs.
11) Substation breaker trips before Y timer of DM2 times out and locks out DM2
12) DM1 and DM2 opens.
13) TSR2 relay of DM2 receives no voltage and hence the DM2 sectionaliser is locked
out by the TSR2 relay.
14) Section 3 has the fault and sectionalised automatically.
15) The circuit Breaker at Substation is reclosed again by reclosing relay.
Page: 12 , 11-Apr-13
EEPCO
16) DM1 switch closes after 10 seconds or at adjusted time of TSR1 relay.
17) DM2 will not close this time as it is in lock out stage.
18) Supply of healthy section 1 & 2 is restored.
19) Thus the faulty section No.3 is isolated.
The position of the sectionaliser provides clue to patrolmen to identify the fault
A-2-4
CONCLUSION
This type of sectionaliser is suited for very long lines where more than one
Sectionalisers are required and will clear /isolate the faulted section for any
number of sectionaliser.
A-3
TYPE-II COUNTING FAULT CURRENT PASSAGES

In this case, the Sectionalisers count the number of interruptions in close
successions and open out after a pre-set number of faulty interruptions. The main
difference with Type-I is that the X time of TSR relay will not be operative.
The sectionaliser does not open with every interruption and do not close.
They only drop out after the pre-set count of interruptions.
This limits the number of units that can be employed in a line.
Thus with one unit the number of enclosures at the substation must be 3. The
first re-closure allows for the transient faults anywhere in the line.
The second re-closure is required to cause the sectionaliser to open.
The third re-closure is to cater for close up faults and to discriminate from faults
beyond the sectionaliser.
A-3-1
CONCLUSION
Hence it can be seen that only one sectionaliser can be reasonably accommodated
under this scheme to provide the necessary selectivity and discrimination.
These type of sectionaliser however can be very cheap and simple compared to
the type I units described above.
They can be used on laterals of long lines if fuses are not employed. If laterals are
fused then these simple units are not required.
A-4
OVERALL RECOMMENDATION
It is recommended that both types are used in the system at the appropriate places
to achieve the best value for money system design.
Page: 13 , 11-Apr-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule for Pole mounted 15kV Line Sectionalisers

No
Item
Unit
Nominal system voltage
kV
Requireme
nt
15
kV
17.5
Highest Equipment Voltage for gas insulateded

equipment
Highest Equipment Voltage for air insulateded
kV
24
equipment
bushings
Rated acivesuch
loadasbreaking
capacity
400
Transformer off-load breaking capacity
10
Line charging breaking capacity
10
Rated short time symmetrical current
kA
10
kA
20
Rated basic impulse level
kV
125
10
Rated one minute power frequency withstand

voltage between phases
kV
50
11
Rated one minute power frequency withstand

voltage between control circuit to earth
kV
12
Voltage sensing relay
Yes/No
Yes
13
TSR timer settings
sec
0-10 sec
File:TS-SG-14-S R0 Pole mounted 15kV sectionaliser.xlsx- sheet:TS-SG-14-S
Bid Offer
Page 1
Date: 11/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
14
Lockout timer settings
sec
0-10 sec
15
Directional facility of voltage sensing - load

source
Interruption medium Vacuum or SF6
Yes/No
Yes
SF6 low pressure lock-out of SF6 insulated

operations
Vacuum
Yes
3000
19
operations
3000
20
No. of ON/OFF indicators provided
Nos.
2Nos.each
21
Radio interference voltage
250
22
23
Remote control facility

Mode of remote control
16
17
18
File:TS-SG-14-S R0 Pole mounted 15kV sectionaliser.xlsx- sheet:TS-SG-14-S
Yes
Radio
Page 2
Date: 11/4/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-TR-01
3 phase Distribution Transformers
Rev -3- Mar 2013
SPECIFICATION TS-TR-01
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
25/1/2011
First Issue.
Rev1
Dec2012
CSP features included for Ratings up to 315kVA.
Rev2
Feb 2013
Text modified and spec fitted in the specified template
Rev 2a
Mar 2013
Insulation parameters modified
Rev 3
19 Mar 2013
Final corrections
TS-TR-01 R3 distrn trans C 2013-03-21.docx
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page i , 23-Mar-13
EEPCO
.
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
3 PHASE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT
4.
INSEPECTION AND TESTING
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
TYPE TESTS
ROUTINE TESTS
AIR PRESSURE TEST
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SPECIAL TESTS
TESTS ON BUSHINGS (HV&LV)
2
2
2
2
3
3
5.
DESIGN OF TRANSFORMERS
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
SEALING AND COOLING

GENERAL
DESIGN OF CORES
WINDINGS
MV BUSHINGS
LV BUSHINGS
VIBRATION AND NOISE
DUTY UNDER FAULT CONDITIONS
EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL WIRING
DRYING OUT BEFORE OIL FILLING
ELECTRICAL DATA
OFF-LOAD TAP CHANGER
3
3
4
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
6.
7.
LOSSES
TRANSFORMER TANKS
8
9
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
TANK WITH ACCESSORIES

TANK BOTTOM
CORROSION PROTECTION
FILLING VALVES
OIL DRAIN VAVES
MONITORING DEVICES
9
10
10
11
11
11
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
TRANSFORMER OIL
UNDERCARRIAGE
INTEGRAL DESIGN - LIGHTNING ARRESTORS
EARTHING TERMINAL
EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES
MARKING
11
11
12
12
12
13
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page ii , 23-Mar-13
EEPCO
13.1
RATING, DIAGRAM AND PROPERTY PLATES
13
14.
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CSPT
14
14.1
14.2
14
14.3
14.4
INTERNAL FUSES ON THE HV SIDE OF TRANSFORMER

INTERNALLV CIRCUIT BREAKER ON THE LV SIDEOF THE
TRANSFORMER
LOAD MANAGEMENT SIGNAL LIGHT:
TYPE TEST FOR PROTECTION COORDINATION
15.
16.
TRANSPORT
SCHEDULES
16
16
16.1
16.2
16.3
SCHEDULE FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

16
1
2
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page iii , 23-Mar-13
14
15
16
SECTION 1- SCOPE
EEPCO
3 PHASE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

1.
SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, supply, delivery and
performance requirements of 3-phase, pole and ground mounted Distribution
Transformers.
2.

See Specification TS-GN-01 General System.
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The requirements of the following standards / specifications shall be met by the
Distribution Transformers where applicable unless otherwise stated in this
specification. The bid shall include typical dimensional and sectional drawings of
the transformers and accessories
3.1
.Specification/
Standard Number
Title
IEC 60076
Power Transformers
IEC60137
Insulating bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 V
IEC 60214
On-Load Tap Changers
IEC 60296
Specification for unused mineral insulating oils for

transformers and switchgear
IEC 60354
Loading guide for oil-immersed power transformers
IEC 60529
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IEC60551
Determination of Transformer and reactor sound level
IEC 60567
Guide for sampling of gases and oil from oil filled electrical
equipment and analysis of free and dissolved gases
IECITR 60616
Terminal and tapping markings for power transformers
IEC 60722
Guide to the lightning impulse and switching impulse

testing of power transformers and reactors
CONFLICT
See Specification TS-GN-02shall apply.
.
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 1 , 23-Mar-13
EEPCO
4.
SECTION 4- INSEPECTION AND TESTING
INSEPECTION AND TESTING

In addition to the requirements of specification TS-GN-02 the following
requirements shall apply and take precedence.
4.1
TYPE TESTS
In addition to the IEC requirements the following type tests shall be conducted
on the Transformers of identical design to prove that the offered transformers
satisfy all the design requirements set out in this specification..
1) Temperature Rise Test.
2) Dielectric tests
4.2
ROUTINE TESTS
The transformer shall be subjected to the following Routine Tests at the
manufacturers works..
Checking of weights, dimensions, fittings, accessories, tank sheet thickness, oil
quality, material, finish and workmanship as per Guaranteed Technical Particulars
and contract drawings.
1) Measurement of winding resistance.
2) Measurement of Voltage Ratio and check of phase displacement.
3) Measurement of short circuit impedance and load loss.
4) Measurement ofno load loss and current
5) Dielectric routine tests.
4.3
AIR PRESSURE TEST

The finished transformer with all the fittings, including bushings in position shall
be tested for leakage at a pressure that is 10% below the pressure at the altitude
specified under system conditions for 10 minutes. There should be no leakage at
any joint. (This may be carried out on a sample basis, say after every 50
transformers).
4.4
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
All acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant standards and as given below shall
be carried out by the supplier in the presence of the Employers representative.
1) Measurement of winding resistance
2) Voltage ratio measurement and check of polarity or vector group symbol - at all
tap positions. Bushing positions shall have permanent markings at this stage of
production.
3) Measurement of impedance voltages
4) Measurement of load loss
5) Measurement of no-load loss and no-load current
6) Induced over voltage withstand test - 30kV and 66kV for 60 seconds on the 15kV
and 33kV windings respectively.
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 2 , 23-Mar-13
EEPCO
SECTION 5- DESIGN OF TRANSFORMERS
7) Tap changer test.

8) Coordination test for LV circuit breaker and HV Fuse links.
4.5
SPECIAL TESTS
Other type and routine tests, as agreed between Employer and Bidder shall also
be carried out as per the relevant standards.
4.6
TESTS ON BUSHINGS (HV&LV)

Tests shall be conducted on the transformer bushings as detailed below:.
1) Dry flash over voltage
2) Wet flash over voltage
3) Dry one minute withstand voltage
4) Wet one minute withstand voltage
5) Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50Micro seconds +ve wave)
6) Minimum oil immersed flashover voltage.
5.
DESIGN OF TRANSFORMERS
5.1
SEALING AND COOLING

All transformers shall be of hermetically sealed type.
All transformers shall be core type oil immersed ONAN cooled, for outdoor
application, designed for continuous operation in the prevailing site conditions.
The design shall be based on site and service conditions as specified in this
specification.
5.2
GENERAL
The transformers shall be capable of operating continuously within their specified
temperature rise limits, i.e. the corrected maximum permissible temperature rise
of the oil (top oil) shall not exceed 55 C, the average temperature rise of the
winding is to be limited to 60C, and the winding hot spot temperature rise shall
not exceed 68C.
The transformers shall be capable of withstanding external short circuits for at
least 3 seconds
following application of loading conditions specified in IEC 60076-7.
Neutral points shall be brought out on a bushing to enable LV transformer
earthing.
All specific schedules of guaranteed characteristics are stipulated in the technical
schedule. The transformers shall be designed and tendered in full compliance with
all further applicable sections, articles and drawings of the Specification.
Furthermore, each transformer shall comply with the stipulations mentioned
hereunder.
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 3 , 23-Mar-13
EEPCO
The transformers of ratings 25kVA, 50kVA, 100kVA, 200kVA and 315kVA shall
be pole mounted on PMT structures with brackets. These transformers shall be
without terminal boxes.
Transformers of ratings 400kVA, 500kVA,630kVA, 800kVAand 1250kVA shall
be ground mounted on plinths.
5.3
DESIGN OF CORES
5.3.1
Mechanical construction of cores

Care shall be exercised in the selection, treatment and handling of the core steel to
ensure that as far as possible laminations are flat and the finally assembled core is
free from distortion. Particular care shall be taken to secure even mechanical
pressure over the laminations, to prevent subsequent settling of the core and to
reduce noise and vibration during operation.
All parts of the cores shall be of robust design capable of withstanding any shocks
to which they may be subjected during lifting, transport installation and service..
All structural members of the assembled cores shall be of steel. All castings shall
be fettled and structural steel adequately cleaned and painted before being built
into the structure.Any non-magnetic or high resistance alloy used shall be subject
to approval.
Adequate fitments shall be provided to enable the core and windings to be lifted
out of the transformer tank.
Adequate provision shall be made to prevent movement of the transformer
winding relative to the tank during transport and installation or while in service.
The supporting frame work of the cores shall be designed so as to avoid the
presence of pockets which would prevent
complete emptying of the tank through the drain valve or cause trapping of air
during filling.
The framework and core bolts shall be effectively insulated from the core so as to
reduce circulating currents to a minimum.
5.3.2
Core material
Only new materials shall be used for the core construction. The manufacturer
shall provide all necessary proof, if so required by the client. .
The design of the magnetic circuit shall be of non-ageing, Cold Rolled Grain
Oriented (CRGO) Silicon steel of high permeability without burrs and such as to
avoid static discharges, development of short circuit paths within itself or to the
earthed clamping structure and production of flux components at right angles to
the plane of laminations which may cause local heating. The flux density shall not
be more than 1.65T.Each lamination shall be insulated with high quality insulation
coating. The core and its Clamping plates shall form a rigid unit structure, which
shall maintain its form and position under the severe stresses encountered during
shipment, installation and short circuits.
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 4 , 23-Mar-13
EEPCO
5.4
WINDINGS
5.4.1
General
The windings shall be arranged so as to achieve, as far as possible, the

electromagnetic balance of the transformer at all voltage ratios but shall also be
positioned with due regard to the impulse voltages which may be impressed on
the windings.
The insulation of windings and of all connections shall be of approved materials
which shall not deteriorate under the action of hot oil or from other causes when
the transformers are operated continuously at maximum permissible loads.
The stacks of windings shall receive adequate shrinkage treatment before final
assembly.
All leads or bars from the windings to the terminal boxes and bushings shall be
rigidly supported. Stresses on coils and connections must be avoided.
The coil clamping arrangement and the finished dimensions of any oil ducts shall
be such that they will not impede the free circulation of oil through the ducts.
5.4.2
Bracing of Windings
The windings and connections of all transformers shall be braced to withstand
shocks which may occur during transport or due to switching and other transient
conditions during service.
Any metal pieces in contact with end rings shall be so designed and secured that
they do not weaken the electrical or the mechanical properties of the rings.
If the transformer winding is built up of sections or disc coils separated by spacers
the clamping arrangements shall be such that equal pressure is applied to all
columns of spacers. All such spacers shall be securely located, shall be of suitable
material and shall receive adequate shrinkage treatment before assembly.
5.5
MV BUSHINGS
5.5.1
Pole Mounted MV Transformer Bushings

For pole mounted transformers, MV bushings shall be located on the top. The
bushings on outdoor transformers shall be equipped with line clamps suitable for
the connection of aluminium/copper conductors.
5.5.2
Ground mounted MV transformer Bushings

For the ground mounted outdoor transformers the MV bushings shall be
shrouded.
5.5.3
Creepage distance for MV bushings

The outer creepage distance for outdoor bushings shall not be less than 20
mm/kV. The insulation levels of the bushings shall conform to the given in the
technical schedule.
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 5 , 23-Mar-13
EEPCO
5.5.4
General design
MV bushings shall be rated to withstand the highest system voltage and the
maximum fault current of the windings when connected to the 15kV or 33 kV
network and for the same period of time.
Current carrying outer parts shall be made of tinned copper, copper or copper
alloy.
It shall be possible to change the bushings without removing the transformer lid.
Each bushing shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer and type. The
marking shall be visible after assembly of the fittings.
5.6
LV BUSHINGS
Each MV bushing location shall be permanently and legibly marked on the tank
or lid with a label corresponding to the rating plate designation.
The LV bushings shall be equipped with line clamps suitable for connecting
aluminium and copper conductors as follows.
LV bushings for 3phase 25,50 and 100kVA transformers, phase clamp 95 mm2,
neutral clamp 70 mm2.
For other ratings suitable LV clamps and/or a terminal pad to take multiple
conductors shall be provided.
The clamps shall be complete with necessary screws, washers and nuts.
The position of each LV bushing shall be permanently and legibly marked on the
tank or lid with a label corresponding to the rating plate designation. The LV
neutral connection shall have a permanent, special marking, different from the
phase connections.
LV bushings shall be sufficiently rigid to take the weight of up to 95mm2 AB
cable connected between the LV bushing and the adjacent pole. Alternatively a
support bracket may be provided that can be attached to the tank of the
transformer, to offer support to ensure no damage of the bushings because of
movement of the AB cable.
5.7
VIBRATION AND NOISE

Every care shall be taken to ensure that the design and manufacture of all
transformers and auxiliary plant shall be such as to reduce noise and vibration to
the level of that obtained in good modern practice (Refer technical schedule).
5.8

Any transformer may be directly connected to an underground or overhead
transmission lineand switched into and out of service together with its associated
transmission circuit.
All transformers shall be capable of withstanding for three seconds without
damage any external short-circuit..
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 6 , 23-Mar-13
EEPCO
5.9
EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL WIRING

No riveted, screwed or soft-solder connections are to be used in the wiring and
cabling between the winding and the points of connection of the bushing or tap
changer.
Any wiring liable to come in contact with oil shall have suitable oil resisting
insulation. The ends of stranded conductors shall be treated to prevent creepage
of oil inside the wire. There shall be no possibility of oil entering connection
boxes for cables or wiring.
Unless otherwise approved high temperature insulation shall be provided on all
wiring when this comes into contact with the transformer tank.
Where the use of conduits is agreed the runs shall be laid with suitable falls and
the lowest parts of the run shall be external to the kiosks or boxes. All conduitruns shall be adequately drained and ventilated. Conduits shall not be run at or
below ground level. The external cabling on transformers shall be armoured or
alternatively protected from mechanical damage in an approved manner.
5.10
DRYING OUT BEFORE OIL FILLING

All transformers shall be dried out before filling them with oil, at the
manufacturers works and the transport and method of erection thereof so
arranged that unless otherwise approved they may be put into service without
further drying out on site. The method of drying out and the arrangement for
transport and erection shall be subject to approval. Any subsequent drying out
which may be necessary after taking over will generally be carried out on site, and
the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval details of the method
which he recommends. These details should be incorporated in the Maintenance
Instruction Manual.
5.11
ELECTRICAL DATA
5.11.1
Short-circuit Currents
The transformers shall withstand the thermal and mechanical effects of any shortcircuit that can appear at the terminal of any winding. The short-time current (3
sec(rms.) shall be for the specified system fault levels.
5.11.2
Insulation Level
The transformers shall be designed for the following insulation levels.
5.11.3
System
Highest voltage
Voltage(kV)
for equipment
Um kV (rms.)
Rated short duration

Rated lightning
power frequency
impulse withstand
withstand voltage,
voltage, kV(peak.)
kV(rms.)
15
24
50
125
33
52
95
250
Rated Power
The rated output at +45C maximum ambient temperature shall be one of the
preferred ratings 25, 50, 100, 200, 315, 400, 500, 630,800 and 1250kVA..
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 7 , 23-Mar-13
SECTION 6- LOSSES
EEPCO
5.11.4
Rated Voltage
The transformers are required to operate from the 15kV and 33 kV network as
follows:
.
.
Three-phase 4 wire LV
15,000/400-230 V
Three-phase 4 wire LV
33,000/400-230 V
.
All secondary voltage ratings shall be at full load current at nominal tap.
5.11.5
Vector Group
The vector group of the three-phase transformers shall be Dyn5..
5.11.6
5.12
Impedance Voltage
KVA
Rating
25
50
100 200
315 400
500
630 800
1250
% impedance
for15kV
4.5
4.5
4.5
5.0
5.5
5.5
% impedance
for33kV
4.5
4.5
4.5
5.0
5.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.5
6.5

The MV windings shall be provided with an off-load tap changer providing 5
positions and each step shall be 2.5%. The tap settings shall be 5% +2.5%, 0%, 2.5%, -5%, for three phase transformers..
The off-load tap changer shall have an externally operated mechanism for manual
operation. The selector switch shall be gang-operated by an accessible single
handle from the ground at convenient floor height. Tap positions shall be clearly
identified. The operating mechanism shall have an effective locking device for
locking the tap changer in any desired position. All transformers shall be capable
of operation continuously without injurious heating when operating on any
tapping position and at 150% continuous loading and over-voltage surges.
6.
LOSSES
The maximum losses at rated load and conditions shall be as given below:
Rating
15kV Distribution
Transformer
33kV Distribution
Transformer
Rating (kVA)
No-load loss
Load loss
No-load loss
Load loss
25 Three Phase
150
570
150
570
50 Three Phase
220
1000
220
1000
100 Three Phase
360
1700
360
1700
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 8 , 23-Mar-13
SECTION 7- TRANSFORMER TANKS
EEPCO
200 Three Phase
600
2700
600
2700
315 Three Phase
820
3640
820
3640
400Three Phase
990
4500
990
4500
500Three Phase
1180
5400
1180
5400
630Three Phase
1450
6400
1450
6400
800Three Phase
1650
8000
1650
8000
1250 Three Phase
2300
11000
2300
11000
The losses shall be stated and guaranteed in the technical specifications of the Bid.
Transformers with higher losses may be rejected. .
Should it be necessary for evaluation or other reasons losses will be capitalized at
the rates given below.
No Load Loss US$4000 per kilowatt.
Load Loss US$1000 per kilowatt.
If the Bid currency is other than US$ the exchange rate at the time of bid
submission will be used.
If, on delivery, the tested losses exceed the guaranteed losses then losses in excess
of the guaranteed values may be capitalized at the evaluation rate and the amount
deducted from the contract price. There will be no credit for losses less than the
guaranteed value other than for evaluation purposes.
7.
TRANSFORMER TANKS
7.1
TANK WITH ACCESSORIES

The tank shall be designed for natural cooling (ONAN) with corrugated walls if
additional cooling is required.
Only hermetically sealed type of tanks completely filled with oil shall be provided.
The transformer top cover shall be bolted.
Tanks with corrugations shall be tested for leakage test at a pressure of 0.8kg/cm
measured at the bottom of the tank.
Cooling fins shall be welded with round stiffening rods to prevent vibration
during operation of the transformers.
The tank design shall be such that the core coil assembly can be lifted freely.
Lifting lugs shall be available for lifting the core and coils out of the tank. The
hooks that will be used for anchoring the core shall be so located as not to foul
with the core coil assembly.
A U shaped pressure relief vent of 25mmdia pipe with 0.025 mm copper sheet
as diaphragm shall be provided on the top cover of the tank such that the
pressure released should be directed to the ground. The vent shall be provided on
the opposite side of the C.B. operating rod. The diaphragm shall be provided near
to the top cover and the other end of the vent pipe shall be guarded with suitable
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 9 , 23-Mar-13
SECTION 7- TRANSFORMER TANKS
EEPCO
mesh against the entry of worms and nesting of birds. The diaphragm should
burst at a pressure between 0.76 kg/cm2 to 0.9 kg/cm2.
Gaskets used shall be oil resistant and made of such a material that no serious
deterioration occurs under service conditions. Rubber gaskets used for flange
connections of the various oil compartments shall be laid in grooves. Gaskets of
neoprene and/or such material which can be easily damaged by over-pressing (e.g.
any kind of impregnated/ bonded cork) are not acceptable. Use of hemp as gasket
material is also prohibited.
Heat dissipation by tank walls excluding top and bottom should be limited to 500
W/m2 up to the oil level, 250 Watts/m2 above oil level.
Lifting lugs: 4 Nos. Heavy duty suitable lifting lugs
Pulling lugs: 4 Nos. Heavy duty suitable horizontal pulling lugs.
All transformers shall be capable of giving their continuous rated output without
exceeding the specified temperature rise.
Galvanized fixing bolts, nuts and washers shall be supplied.
7.2
TANK BOTTOM
Thickness of tank bottom shall not be less than 4 mm.
7.3
The inner surfaces of the tank, and radiators shall be coated by an oil resistant
paint.
The smaller parts such as brackets, etc. shall be hot-dip galvanized. Fasteners
mounted on hot-dip galvanized or ready painted part shall be galvanized or made
of stainless steel ISO class F1 or A2.
All steel surfaces shall be sand blasted in accordance with DIN 55928 Part 4 and
shall then be painted in the following sequences.
Coat
Kind
Layer thickness
One (1) primer

coat
two-component epoxy zinc phosphate
60m
One (1)
intermediate coat
Two-component epoxy micaceous iron 60m

oxide
One top coat(1)
Two-component polyurethane
40m
Total coating thickness(dry film)
160
The final coat of painting shall be of pore free and homogeneous quality and shall
be of a uniform shade of code RAL 7032(silica grey) paint for the outside
surfaces. Manufactures are free to select the inner transformer paint colour
If any hot dipped galvanised parts are provided the same painting method shall be
applied, however instead of two primer coats one adhesive coat and one base coat
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 10 , 23-Mar-13
SECTION 8- TRANSFORMER OIL
EEPCO
shall be applied. In this case the mean thickness of galvanising shall be 70 m.

Mechanical damage shall be repaired at site with original paint as above.
7.4
FILLING VALVES
A filling stub with an inner diameter of at least 25-mm shall be placed at the top
of the cover.
7.5
OIL DRAIN VAVES

Transformers shall have a lockable25-mm BSP oil drain plug placed at the bottom
of the tank.
The oil drain device shall conform to IEC 60076.
7.6
MONITORING DEVICES
Ground mounted transformers shall be equipped with an oil level indicator.
8.
TRANSFORMER OIL
The transformer shall be filled with oil before delivery. The oil shall contain at
least 0.3% by weight oxidation inhibitor of type Diter Butyl Para Bresol (DBPC)
according to IEC 60296.
Each transformer shall be supplied with standard insulating oil conforming to the
requirements of IEC 60137. The oil shall be new and satisfied to contain less than
1 ppm of PCBs. Each transformer shall be filled with the correct volume of oil at
the ambient temperature.
Mixing different products or products from different suppliers is not permissible.
Insulating liquid free of PCB and which can be mixed with insulating oil
corresponding to the Russian standard (type TK 1500) is to be used. The
manufacturer and type of insulating liquid used are to be indicated for each
transformer in the test report.
The type of insulating liquid, e.g. Mineral oil-based insulating oil pursuant to
DIN VDE 0370/relevant IEC is to be indicated on the rating plate of each
transformer..
Certification of the absence of PCB is to be submitted for each transformer.
9.
UNDERCARRIAGE
The following undercarriage shall be provided as specified in the technical
schedules.
Under frame for Pole mounted transformers
Transformers shall be fitted with an under frame suitable for bolting the
transformer to a pole mounted platform in case of pole mounted transformers. .
Under frame for Ground mounted transformers
The transformer shall be provided with skids welded to the underside of the tank
to facilitate transit over rough surfaces.
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 11 , 23-Mar-13
SECTION 10- INTEGRAL DESIGN LIGHTNING ARRESTORS
EEPCO
Welded to the tank on all sides; bi-directional rollers for longitudinal and
transverse travel.
The transformers should be delivered with the rollers fitted upside down. The
rollers must be stable enough to allow the transformer to be shifted at right angles
to the direction of travel.
10.
INTEGRAL DESIGN - LIGHTNING ARRESTORS

Lightening arresters shall be fitted with each phase as an integral external part of
the distribution transformer. They shall be fitted on one side of the transformer
(or as it may suitable for the transformer tank design) near to the HV bushings.
A bracket shall be incorporated in the tank design to enable standard design surge
arresters to be fitted readily available in the market.
A GI earth strip 25x4 mm connected to the body of the transformer with
necessary clamping arrangement.
Metal Oxide Lightning Arresters shall be in accordance with specification TS-SG02 with disconnector as per relevant standard, one number per phase.
The arresters shall be supplied loose and included with the delivery packaging. All
materials shall be supplied to fully erect the surge arresters and connect them to
the HV bushing.
11.
EARTHING TERMINAL
Stainless steel or a galvanised mild steel earthing flag approximately 63 mm square
and a thickness not less than 6 mm with a centre hole of 14 mm diameter shall be
welded externally to the tank, one on the tank cover and one on the base frame.
12.
EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES

Each transformer shall be provided with the following:.
1) Rating and diagram plates bearing the data specified in the appropriate IEC
recommendations.
Marking for the HV side 1W
1V
1U
Marking for the LV side
2V
2U
2W
2N from right to left of MV side.
2) Oil filling and drain valves. It shall only be possible to open these valves with a
special key/spanner to discourage tampering.
3) Tank earthing terminal. M12 size screws -2 Nos. one on the tank cover and
another on the base frame suitable for copper earthing wires.
4) Lifting fittings.
5) Oil level gauge
6) Pressure relief device
7) Oil level indicator.
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 12 , 23-Mar-13
SECTION 13- MARKING
EEPCO
8) Unit centre lines marked clearly on the tank sides.

9) Spark gaps on the HV bushing
10) Dehydrating Air breather with oil lock and filled with silica gel to conform to BS
3523( for the breathing type)
11) Pocket for contact thermometer
12) Oil.
13) Unit centre lines marked clearly on the tank sides.
14) Locking device for the off-circuit tap changer
13.
MARKING
Each transformer shall be provided with a rating plate showing the information
stated in the IEC standards. The plate shall be in both Amharic and English. The
words "Property of Ethiopian Electric Power Corporation", the EEPCO logo, the
contract number and loan number and a unique identification number (to be
advised by the Employer) shall also be engraved on the rating plate..
13.1

The following plates shall be fixed to the transformer tank at an average, readable
height.
1) A rating plate bearing the data specified in IEC 76 or other approved standard.
Indicating the following shall be fixed on the same side as LV bushings,
2) Name of manufacturer,
3) Manufacturers serial number,
4) Year of manufacture,
5) Rated power,
6) Rated frequency,
7) Rated voltages,
8) Rated currents,
9) Connection group symbol,
10) short-circuit impedance,
11) Total mass,
12) Mass of insulating oil,
13) Temperature rise limit of oil and windings,
14) Insulation level,
15) Type of cooling,
16) Tapping range and no. of taps,
17) Each bushing shall be marked with the name or trademark of themanufacturer,
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 13 , 23-Mar-13
EEPCO
SECTION 14- ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

FOR CSPT
18) A diagram plate showing the internal connections and also the voltage vector
relationship of the several windings. In addition, a plan view of the transformer
giving the correct physical relationship of the terminals shall be given. When links
are provided for changing the transformer group symbol and/or ratio, then means
shall be provided for clearly indicating in which mode the transformer is
connected. The transformer ratio shall be indicated for each tap,
19) A property plate engraved to the instructions of the Engineer,
20) The above plates shall be of stainless steel or of other material capable of
withstanding continuous outdoor service and shall all be suitably mounted to
prevent vibration, rattling or corrosion.
14.
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CSPT

Completely Self Protected Transformers (CSPT) shall incorporate in their design
as an integral part a) HV fuse and b) LV circuit breaker..
These requirements apply for ratings upto 315kVA.
14.1
INTERNAL FUSES ON THE HV SIDE OF TRANSFORMER

Suitable fuse shall be incorporated in series with the HV primary windings internal
to the transformer. This shall be designed to protect the electrical distribution
system which is behind - before the transformer bushings, from faults which
effectively occur inside the transformer..
The fuse rating shall be coordinated so that it does not operate for faults beyond
the LV circuit breaker. This means that if the HV fuse blows there is an internal
transformer fault and the transformer will have to be dismounted and taken for
repair.
14.2
INTERNALLV CIRCUIT BREAKER ON THE LV SIDEOF

THE TRANSFORMER
An internal LV circuit breaker (CB) shall be incorporated as part of the
distribution transformer. This shall be immersed in the same oil as the rest of the
transformer and shall be in the same space as the winding. The purpose of this
LV breaker is to minimize undesirable operations due to primary surges and
protect the transformer from thermal overloading and faults. It shall also act as a
warning mechanism that the transformer is operating near overloading conditions.
The LV CB shall be in series between the secondary winding and the LV bushing.
The following shall apply:
The LV CB can be either three single pole elements or a ganged three phase
unit.
All LV faults external to the transformer shall be cleared by this circuit

breaker.
The CB shall be designed for proper co-ordination with the HT Fuse

mentioned above and shall furnish the time current characteristic of the LV
circuit breaker and HV fuses showing clearly the discrimination times.
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 14 , 23-Mar-13
EEPCO
SECTION 14- ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

FOR CSPT
The circuit breaker shall be designed to match the thermal characteristics of

the transformer winding and protect it from burning out due to overloads
that may not cause CB operation.
The LV CB shall be operated via a handle mounted on the transformer

tank.
The LV CB shall be closed and opened manually from the ground with a
suitable device (stick).
Design characteristics of the LV CB.

The CB shall be an electro-mechanical device with three main elements viz., (a)
temperature sensing, (b) latching and tripping and (c) current interrupting.
The temperature sensing function might be accomplished through the use of
bimetallic strips (or other acceptable and reliable means). This shall sense either
the oil temperature or the load current to mimic the winding thermal behaviour.
In addition to this a magnetic tripping device is to be provided. The circuit
breaker shall be mounted inside the transformer, so that these bimetallic strips are
near the top oil layer of the transformer for better temperature sensing.
The current carrying parts of circuit breakers shall be copper or tinned copper.
The current interrupting contacts shall be copper tungsten or other approved
material..
The entire assembly shall be designed to withstand the full operating
characteristics of the transformer.
The response of circuit breaker to the thermal activity shall remain unchanged by
the addition of the magnetic trip element.
The specification to which the circuit breakers conform shall be indicated.
14.3
LOAD MANAGEMENT SIGNAL LIGHT:

A red signal light shall be provided and fixed in a prominent position on the
transformer tank and shall be clearly visible from the ground to provide indication
of protection operation. .
The light shall be made of cluster LED and shall be clearly visible during night
and day light with full sun.
The light shall be controlled through the circuit breaker assembly. A thermal
sensor shall switch on when the transformer load reaches a pre-determined level
indicating that the transformer has been over-loaded or overheated. The
transformer may then be changed without causing unplanned service
interruptions.
The load management signal light shall perform two functions. It shall show
visually a) when the particular transformer has been operating in an overload
condition but not tripped and b) when a fault occurred or the transformer
exceeded its thermal characteristic.
The signal light circuit shall be supplied either from the main winding or an
auxiliary transformer winding suitable to feed the signal light.
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 15 , 23-Mar-13
SECTION 15- TRANSPORT
EEPCO
The LV circuit breaker shall have a set of auxiliary contacts built in for signal light
operation. These normally open contacts shall form part of the signal light
circuit.
The thermal sensing mechanism shall be set so that the signal light contacts will
close at a pre-set thermal condition, which occurs before the main latching
system opens the main contacts. This will provide for overload warning before
tripping.
The signal light mechanism does not reset itself when the load drops off; the
signal light remains energised once the signal light contacts close and can only be
turned off by manually operating the external circuit breaker handle.
14.4
TYPE TEST FOR PROTECTION COORDINATION

A type test shall be carried out on one of the transformers demonstrating the
coordination characteristics. A similar test shall also be part of the acceptance
test.
15.
TRANSPORT
Irrespective of the actual method approved for transport to the individual site, all
transformers shall be suitable for transport with the transformers full of oil unless
otherwise approved.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining the methods and limitations
of transport to site and designs affected by these factors be subject to agreement.
16.
SCHEDULES
If the technical schedules are to be included in the same file then use this section.
16.1
SCHEDULE FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

Please see separate technical schedule TS-TR-01.
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 16 , 23-Mar-13
EEPCO
16.2

Schedule ref.TS-TR-01-NC1.
equipments life, operating characteristics and system performance. Eachnoncompliance shall make reference to the relevant specification clause.
Specification
Clause
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 1, 23-Mar-13
EEPCO
16.3

Item Reference TS-TR-01-TC1.
Specification
Clause
Rev -3- Mar 2013
Page: 2, 23-Mar-13
LPA-GECE
EEPC
Technical Schedule: TS-TR-01-S1

Technical Schedule for 15kV Pole mounted Distribution Tranformers(CSP)
No
Item
I.
General
Manufacturer
Kind of installation
Equipment Standard(IEC 60076)
Unit
Requirement Bid Offer Requirement Bid Offer Requirement Bid Offer Requirement Bid Offer Requirement Bid Offer
Outdoor
pole mounted
Yes
Outdoor
Yes
Outdoor
pole mounted
Yes
Outdoor
pole mounted
Yes
Outdoor
pole mounted
Yes
pole mounted
No. of phases
three-phase
three-phase
Yes
three-phase
three-phase
Type of tank
Bolted Cover
Bolted Cover
Bolted Cover
Bolted Cover
Bolted Cover
No. of windings
Two
Two
Two
Two
Two
8
9
10
11
12
13
Vector group symbol

Tapping range
Number of steps
Continuous power at all taps
Cooling method
Specification of oil ( 60296)
Dyn5
2.5
+2, -2
Yes
ONAN
Yes
Dyn5
2.5
+2, -2
Yes
ONAN
Yes
Dyn5
2.5
+2, -2
Yes
ONAN
Yes
Dyn5
2.5
+2, -2
Yes
ONAN
Yes
Dyn5
2.5
+2, -2
Yes
ONAN
Yes
14
II.
Ratings
Rated power
kVA
25
50
100
200
315
15
15.1
primary UN1
kV
15
15
15
15
15
15.2
secondary UN2
kV
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
16
Frequency
Hz
50
50
50
50
50
17
Principal tapping
kV
15
15
15
15
15
18
Maximum Continuous System withstand Voltage
kV
24
24
24
24
24
19
Impedance voltage at rated power
4.5
4.5
4.5
20
HV Windings
20.1
Material, wire or strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
20.2
Insulation
20.3
kV(rms) 50
50
50
50
50
20.4
Rated lightning, impulse withstand voltage
kV(peak) 125
125
125
125
125
File:TS-TR-01 S R3 dist trans C 2013-03-21.xlsm
%
steps
Date: 23/03/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
Item
21
LV Windings
21.1
21.2
Insulation
21.3
22
Magnetic flux density (at rated voltage and

frequency)
Core Material
22.1
Core Loss figure, Watt/kg

III.
23
EEPC

Unit
Tesla
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
max. 1.65
max. 1.65
max. 1.65
max. 1.65
max. 1.65
CRGO
CRGO
CRGO
CRGO
CRGO
45
45
45
45
45
30
30
30
Operation Details
Ambient temperature (max.)
24
Ambient temperature (average)
30
30
25
25.1
25.2
Temperature rise limit (at 3000 m )

oil / top
windings / average
C
C
55
60
55
60
55
60
55
60
55
60
25.3
windings hot spot
68
68
68
68
68
26
No-load loss at rated voltage and frequency
150
220
360
600
820
27
Full load loss ,W
570
1000
1700
2700
3640
28
29
Rated voltage at full load (P.F=0.95)
kV
29.1
29.2
30
30.1
30.2
Efficiency referred to 75oC at rated voltage and

frequency
100% rated output and P.F= 1 (%)
100% rated output and P.F= 0.95 (%)
No load current as percent of rated current
at 90% voltage (%)
at 100% voltage (%)
IV.
Bushings
31
31.1
Primary
manufacturer
31.2
31.3
rated current
power frequency test level (at 1000 m)
A
kV
50
50
50
50
50
31.4
lightning impulse level (at 1000 m)
kV
125
125
125
125
125
31.5
clearance across insulator (at 1000m)
mm
400
400
400
400
400
31.6
adjustable arcing horns
yes/no
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
31.7
creepage distance
mm
480
480
480
480
480
Date: 23/03/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPC
No
Item
Unit
32
32.1
Secondary
Manufacturer
32.2
32.3
32.4
type (DIN type or eqvt.)

rated current
A
kV
32.5
32.6

clearance across insulator
kV
mm
32.7
Min. creepage distance
32.8
33
Metal oxide Lightning Arrestor

V.
Tests
Routine tests: IEC 60076 and Specifications
34
Separate source over-voltage withstand test
35
Induced overvoltage withstand test,
36
test voltage / primary (tap 1) (IEC test standard)
kV
37
test voltage / secondary (IEC test standard)
38
39
Type tests: IEC 60076 and Specifications

test voltage / full wave (IEC test standard)
40
test voltage / chopped wave (IEC test standard)
41
Heat-run test
42
dB(A)
43
Noise level at a measuring distance of 0.3 m

VI. Materials, Masses, Measures and Drawings
Transformer tank,material
43.1
43.2
43.3
43.4
43.5
43.6
43.7
43.8
43.9
43.1
43.11
Transformer total mass

Overall dimensions including bushings:
height
depth
width
Thickness of tank plate
Top
Bottom
Sides
Colour of transformer
Thickness of surface treatment
kg
44
Drawing of dimensions
No.
45
Pamphlet
No.
Yes
400
min. 8
Yes
400
min. 8
Yes
400
min. 8
Yes
630
min. 8
Yes
1000
min. 8
mm
60
60
60
60
60
kV,kA
18,10
18,10
18,10
18,10
18,10
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
Yes
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
kV
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
kV
on one unit
Yes
on one unit
Yes
on one unit
Yes
on one unit
Yes
on one unit
Yes
kV
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
on one unit
on one unit
on one unit
on one unit
on one unit
<44
<44
<44
<44
<44
steel
steel
steel
steel
steel
Gray
140
Gray
140
Gray
140
Gray
140
Gray
140
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
m
Date: 23/03/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPC

Technical Schedule for 15kV Ground mounted Distribution Tranformers
No
Item
I.
General
Manufacturer
4
5
Unit
Outdoor

No. of phases
Outdoor
pole mounted
Yes
three-phase
6
7
Type of tank
No. of windings
Bolted Cover
Two
Bolted Cover
8
9
Vector group symbol

Tapping range
10
Number of steps
steps
11
12
13
19
20
20.1

Cooling method
II.
Ratings
Rated power
primary UN1
secondary UN2
Frequency
Principal tapping
Maximum Continuous System withstand
Voltage
HV Windings
20.2
20.3
Insulation
20.4
Rated lightning, impulse withstand voltage
14
15
15.1
15.2
16
17
18
Outdoor
pole mounted
Yes
Yes
Outdoor
pole mounted
Yes
three-phase
Outdoor
pole mounted
Yes
three-phase
Two
Bolted Cover
Two
Bolted Cover
Two
Bolted Cover
Two
Dyn5
2.5
Dyn5
2.5
Dyn5
2.5
Dyn5
2.5
Dyn5
2.5
+2, -2
+2, -2
+2, -2
+2, -2
+2, -2
Yes
ONAN
Yes
Yes
ONAN
Yes
Yes
ONAN
Yes
Yes
ONAN
Yes
Yes
ONAN
Yes
kVA
400
500
630
800
1250
kV
kV
Hz
kV
kV
15
0.4
50
15
24
15
0.4
50
15
24
15
0.4
50
15
24
15
0.4
50
15
24
15
0.4
50
15
24
5.5
5.5
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
kV(rms) 50
50
50
50
50
kV(peak) 125
125
125
125
125
pole mounted
Yes
three-phase
Date: 23/03/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
Item
21
21.1
LV Windings
21.2
Insulation
21.3
29.1
29.2
30
Magnetic flux density (at rated voltage and

frequency)
Core Material
Core Loss figure, Watt/kg
III.
Operation Details
oil / top
windings / average
windings hot spot
Full load loss ,W
frequency
30.1
at 90% voltage (%)
22
22.1
23
24
25
25.1
25.2
25.3
26
27
28
29
EEPC

Unit
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
max. 1.65
max. 1.65
max. 1.65
max. 1.65
max. 1.65
CRGO
CRGO
CRGO
CRGO
CRGO
C
C
45
30
45
30
45
30
45
30
45
30
C
C
C
W
W
kV
55
60
68
990
4500
55
60
68
1180
5400
55
60
68
1450
6400
55
60
68
1650
8000
55
60
68
2300
11000
Tesla
30.2
at 100% voltage (%)
31
31.1
IV.
Bushings
Primary
manufacturer
31.2
31.3
rated current
A
kV
50
50
50
50
50
31.4
kV
125
125
125
125
125
31.5
clearance across insulator (at 1000m)
mm
400
400
400
400
400
31.6
adjustable arcing horns
yes/no
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
31.7
creepage distance
mm
480
480
480
480
480
Date: 23/03/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
EEPC

Item
Unit
32
32.1
Secondary
Manufacturer
32.2
32.3
32.4
32.5
32.6
32.7
32.8
33
34
35

rated current
V.
Tests
36
37
38
39
40

41
Heat-run test
42
43
VI. Materials, Masses, Measures and

Drawings
43.1
43.2
43.3
height
mm
43.4
43.5
depth
width
mm
mm
43.6
43.7
43.8
43.9
43.1

Top
Bottom
Sides
mm
mm
mm
43.1
44
45

Pamphlet
m
No.
No.
Yes
1500
min. 8
Yes
1500
min. 8
Yes
2000
min. 8
Yes
2000
min. 8
Yes
>2500
min. 8
60
18,10
60
18,10
60
18,10
60
18,10
60
18,10
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
Yes
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
test voltage / primary (tap 1) (IEC test standard) kV
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
on one unit
on one unit
on one unit
on one unit
on one unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
on one unit
on one unit
on one unit
on one unit
on one unit
<44
<44
<44
<44
<44
steel
steel
steel
steel
steel
Gray
Gray
Gray
Gray
Gray
140
140
140
140
140
A
kV
kV
mm
mm
kV,kA
kV
kV
kV
dB(A)
kg
Date: 23/03/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPC
Technical Schedule: TS-TR-01 S3

Technical Schedule for 33kV Pole mounted Distribution Tranformers(CSP)
No
Item
I.
General
Manufacturer
4
5
6
Unit
Outdoor

No. of phases
Type of tank
Outdoor
pole mounted
Yes
three-phase
Bolted Cover
7
8
9
No. of windings
Vector group symbol
Tapping range
Two
Two
Dyn5
2.5
10
Number of steps
steps
11
12
13

Cooling method
14
15
II.
Ratings
Rated power
Outdoor
pole mounted
Yes
Yes
Bolted Cover
Outdoor
pole mounted
Yes
three-phase
Bolted Cover
Outdoor
pole mounted
Yes
three-phase
Bolted Cover
Dyn5
2.5
Two
Dyn5
2.5
Two
Dyn5
2.5
Two
Dyn5
2.5
+2, -2
+2, -2
+2, -2
+2, -2
+2, -2
Yes
ONAN
Yes
Yes
ONAN
Yes
Yes
ONAN
Yes
Yes
ONAN
Yes
Yes
ONAN
Yes
kVA
25
50
100
200
315
15.1 primary UN1
kV
33
33
33
33
33
15.2 secondary UN2

16
Frequency
kV
Hz
0.4
50
0.4
50
0.4
50
0.4
50
0.4
50
17
18
19
kV
kV
%
33
45
4.5
33
45
4.5
33
45
4.5
33
45
5
33
45
5
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
20.3 Power frequency withstand voltage, kV(rms)
95
95
95
95
95
20.4 Rated lightning, impulse withstand voltage, kV(peak)
250
250
250
250
250
Principal tapping
20
HV Windings
20.1 Material, wire or strip
pole mounted
Yes
three-phase
Bolted Cover
20.2 Insulation
Date: 23/03/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
21
EEPC

Item
Unit
LV Windings
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
max. 1.65
max. 1.65
max. 1.65
max. 1.65
max. 1.65
CRGO
CRGO
CRGO
CRGO
CRGO
45
45
45
45
45
30
30
30
30
30
C
C
55
60
55
60
55
60
55
60
55
60
25.3 windings hot spot
68
68
68
68
68
26
150
220
360
600
820
27
Full load loss ,W
570
1000
1700
2700
3640
28
29
kV
21.2 Insulation
21.3 Magnetic flux density (at rated voltage and
frequency)
22
Core Material
Tesla
22.1 Core Loss figure, Watt/kg

23
III.
Operation Details
24
25
25.1
25.2

oil / top
windings / average

29.1 frequency
29.2 100% rated output and P.F= 0.95 (%)
30
30.1
at 90% voltage (%)
30.2
at 100% voltage (%)

IV.
31
Bushings
Primary
31.1 manufacturer
31.2 rated current
31.3 power frequency test level (at 1000 m)
kV
95
50
50
50
50
31.4 lightning impulse level (at 1000 m)
kV
250
250
250
250
250
31.5 clearance across insulator (at 1000m)
mm
400
400
400
400
400
31.6 adjustable arcing horns
yes/no
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
31.7 creepage distance
mm
1040
1040
1040
1040
1040
Date: 23/03/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
32
EEPC

Item
Unit
1040
Secondary
32.1 Manufacturer
32.2 type (DIN type or eqvt.)
32.3 rated current
A
kV
Yes
400
min. 8
Yes
400
min. 8
Yes
400
min. 8
Yes
630
min. 8
Yes
1000
min. 8
kV
32.6 clearance across insulator

32.7 Min. creepage distance
32.8 Metal oxide Lightning Arrestor
mm
mm
kV, kA
60
36,10
60
36,10
60
36,10
60
36,10
60
36,10
on each unit
Yes
on each unit
Yes
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
Yes
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
Yes
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
Yes
33
34
35
36
V.
Tests
kV
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
Yes
37
kV
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
38
39
40
41
42

Heat-run test
on one unit
Yes
Yes
on one unit
<44
on one unit
Yes
Yes
on one unit
<44
on one unit
Yes
Yes
on one unit
<44
on one unit
Yes
Yes
on one unit
<44
on one unit
Yes
Yes
on one unit
<44
43
steel
steel
steel
steel
steel
43.1
43.2
43.3
43.4
43.5
43.6

height
depth
width
43.7
43.8
43.9
43.1
43.1
Top, mm
Bottom, mm
Sides, mm
Gray
140
Gray
140
Gray
140
Gray
140
Gray
140
44
No.
45
Pamphlet
No.
kV
kV
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
Date: 23/03/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPC

Technical Schedule for 33kV Ground mounted Distribution Tranformers
No
Item
I.
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
Bid Offer
General
Manufacturer
4
5
Outdoor

No. of phases
Outdoor
pole mounted
Yes
three-phase
Type of tank
No. of windings
Vector group symbol
Tapping range
10
11
12
13
Number of steps
Cooling method
14
II.
Ratings
Rated power
15
three-phase
Outdoor
pole mounted
Yes
Yes
Outdoor
pole mounted
Yes
three-phase
Outdoor
pole mounted
Yes
three-phase
Bolted Cover
Bolted Cover
Bolted Cover
Bolted Cover
Bolted Cover
Two
Two
Two
Two
Two
Dyn5
Dyn5
Dyn5
Dyn5
Dyn5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
steps
+2, -2
Yes
ONAN
Yes
+2, -2
Yes
ONAN
Yes
+2, -2
Yes
ONAN
Yes
+2, -2
Yes
ONAN
Yes
+2, -2
Yes
ONAN
Yes
kVA
400
500
630
800
1250
15.1 primary UN1
kV
33
33
33
33
33
15.2 secondary UN2
kV
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
16
Frequency
Hz
50
50
50
50
50
17
Principal tapping
kV
33
33
33
33
33
18
kV
45
45
45
45
45
6.5
6.5
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
95
95
95
95
95
250
250
250
250
250
19
20
HV Windings
20.2 Insulation
20.3 Power frequency withstand voltage, kV(rms)
20.4 Rated lightning, impulse withstand voltage,
kV(peak)
pole mounted
Yes
10
Date: 23/03/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
21
LV Windings
EEPC

Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
Bid Offer
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
Copper
wire/strip
max. 1.65
max. 1.65
max. 1.65
max. 1.65
max. 1.65
CRGO
CRGO
CRGO
CRGO
CRGO
45
45
45
45
45
30
30
30
30
30
25.1 oil / top
55
55
55
55
55
25.2
25.3
26
27
28
29
C
C
W
W
kV
60
68
990
4500
60
68
1180
5400
60
68
1450
6400
60
68
1650
8000
60
68
2300
11000
21.2 Insulation
21.3 Magnetic flux density (at rated voltage and
frequency)
22
Core Material
22.1 Core Loss figure, Watt/kg
III.
Operation Details
23
24
25
29.1
29.2
30
30.1
30.2
31
31.1
windings / average
windings hot spot
Full load loss ,W
frequency
at 90% voltage (%)
at 100% voltage (%)
IV.
Bushings
Primary
manufacturer
Tesla
31.2 rated current

A
kV
95
95
95
95
95
kV
250
250
250
250
250
31.5 clearance across insulator (at 1000m)
mm
400
400
400
400
400
31.6 adjustable arcing horns
yes/no
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
31.7 creepage distance
mm
480
480
480
480
480
11
Date: 23/03/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
32
Secondary
32.1 Manufacturer
32.2
32.3
32.4
32.5
32.6
32.7
32.8
EEPC

Item
33
34
35
36
37

rated current
V.
Tests
38
39
40
41
42

Heat-run test
Unit
A
kV
kV
mm
mm
kV,kA
kV
kV
kV
kV
dB(A)
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
Bid Offer
Requirement
Bid Offer
Yes
1500
min. 8
Yes
1500
min. 8
Yes
2000
min. 8
Yes
2000
min. 8
Yes
>2500
min. 8
60
36,10
60
36,10
60
36,10
60
36,10
60
36,10
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
Yes
Yes
on each unit
Yes
on each unit
Yes
Yes
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
Yes
Yes
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
Yes
Yes
on each unit
on each unit
on each unit
Yes
Yes
on one unit
Yes
Yes
on one unit
<44
on one unit
Yes
Yes
on one unit
<44
on one unit
Yes
Yes
on one unit
<44
on one unit
Yes
Yes
on one unit
<44
on one unit
Yes
Yes
on one unit
<44
steel
steel
steel
steel
steel
Gray
140
Gray
140
Gray
140
Gray
140
Gray
140

43
43.1 Transformer total mass

43.2 Overall dimensions including bushings:
kg
43.3
height
mm
43.4
depth
mm
43.5 width
mm
43.6 Thickness of tank plate

43.7 Top, mm
43.8 Bottom, mm
43.9 Sides, mm
43.1 Colour of transformer
43.1 Thickness of surface treatment
44
45
Pamphlet
m
No.
No.
12
Date: 23/03/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-TR-02
15 kV Compact Substation
Rev -2- April 2013
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
Dec 2012
First Issue
Rev 1
Feb 2013
Some text modified
Rev 2
April 2013
Spec. modified to cover only 15kV compact substations
LPA GECE / ts-tr-02 r2 compact substations 2013-04-28.docx
Rev -2- April 2013, Page: i, 27-Apr-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
TYPE TEST:
ROUTINE TEST
ACCEPTANCE TEST
2
2
2
5.
DESIGN OF COMPACT SUBSTATIONS
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION OF OUTER HOUSING
ELECTRICAL INTERCONNECTIONS
EARTHING
TANK BOTTOM
LIGHTING
VENTILATION
DOORS AND WALLS
DOOR LOCKS
NOISE LEVEL
LIFTING LUGS
COLOUR
3
4
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
6.
MV COMPARTMENT
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
ELECTRICAL DATA
LOAD BREAK SWITCH
TRANSFORMER BREAKER
PROTECTION RELAYS
BUSHINGS
CABLE TERMINATIONS
EARTH FAULT INDICATOR
EARTHING
ACCESSORIES
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
7.
TRANSFORMER COMPARTMENT
10
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
GENERAL
TRANSFORMER TYPE
VOLTAGE RATIOS
RATINGS
TEMPERATURE RISE
10
10
10
10
10
Rev -2- April 2013, Page: ii, 27-Apr-13
EEPCO
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
WINDING CONNECTION - VECTOR GROUP

TRANSFORMER MECHANICAL DESIGN
BUSHINGS SPACING
EMERGENCY LOADING
LOSSES
11
11
12
12
12
13
8.
LOW VOLTAGE COMPARTMENT
13
8.1
DETAILS OF EQUIPMENT IN LV COMPARTMENT
13
9.
10.
SPARE PARTS
DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED
15
15
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
FOR RING MAIN UNIT

FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
LV COMPARTMENT
HOUSING
GENERAL
15
16
16
16
16
11.
12.
13.
PACKING
TRANSPORT
SCHEDULES
13.1
13.2
13.3
SCHEDULE FOR COMPACT SUBSTATIONSERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.

NON COMPLIANCE SCHEDULE ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.
TEST CERTIFICATES SCHEDULE ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.
14.
SCHEDULES
17
14.1
14.2
14.3
SCHEDULE FOR AUXILIARY CABLES

17
18
19
16
16
ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.
Rev -2- April 2013, Page: iii, 27-Apr-13
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO
15 KV COMPACT SUBSTATIONS
1.
SCOPE
This specification specifies deign performance and general requirements for
outdoor Transformer compact substations for 15kV distribution network.
2.

3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The requirements of the following standards / specifications shall be met where
applicable unless otherwise stated in this specification.
Specification/
Standard Number
Title
IEC 61330
High voltage/Low voltage prefabricated Substations
IEC 60076
Power Transformers
IEC 60354
Loading guide for oil immersed Transformers
IEC 60317
Copper wire Rods
IEC 60137
Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1000V
IEC 60521
Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating current watt hour meters
IEC 60551
Determination of Transformer and reactor sound level
IEC 60296
Specification for unused mineral insulating oils for

transformers and switchgear
IEC 60722
Guide to the lightning impulse and switching impulse

testing of power transformers and reactors
IEC
60282-1, MCCBs
DIN VDE 0670-4
and DIN 43625
3.1
CONFLICT
See Specification TS-GN-02 General contractual Obligations
4.

Please see TS-GN-02. - General contractual obligations.
ts-tr-02 r2 compact substations 2013-04-28.docx
Rev -2- April 2013 / Page: 1 , 27-Apr-13
EEPCO
4.1
TYPE TEST:
4.1.1
GENERAL
The type tests as per the relevant standard shall be conducted on the prefabricated
compact substations of identical design to prove that the offered equipment
satisfies all the design requirements set out in this specification.
In addition to testing of the complete substation according to the relevant IEC
standard, the transformer measurements and tests shall be carried out as
mentioned in Spec No. TS-TR-01.
4.2
ROUTINE TEST
These tests shall be carried out on each individual of the equipment offered as per
IEC at the manufactures works to ensure that the product is in accordance with
the requirements of this specification.
These tests shall include:
Winding:
15kV
LV
Voltage
50kV
3kV
a)
Induced over voltage withstand test at 30kV for 15kV winding,
b)
Resistance test,
c)
No-load test,
d)
Short-circuit test,
e)
Measurement of transformation ratio and vector group,
f)
Measurement of impedance voltage,
g)
A test report containing the test results is to be drawn up for each transformer.
4.3
ACCEPTANCE TEST
The Acceptance test procedure for any delivery of the equipments are as follows:
a)
Visual inspection,
b)
Inspection of the complete equipment,
c)
Checking of the result of the routine and type test as per IEC,
d)
Carrying out all or part of tests mentioned in the routine test,
e)
Checking of conformity to specification.

The following tests on transformer shall also be carried out,
1) dielectric tests of high voltage and low voltage winding(s) at rated one minute
power frequency withstand voltage,
2) double voltage test ( 1 minute at double voltage and double frequency) induced
via the low voltage winding;
3) measurement of no-load loss and no-load current,
EEPCO
SECTION 5 - DESIGN OF COMPACT

SUBSTATIONS
4) measurement of load loss and impedance voltage with the off circuit tap changer
in the normal position,
5) Measurement of the insulation resistance (oil, paper and press board) between
high voltage and low voltage, and tank (Meggar test),
The Corporation reserves the right to apply, penalty or reject particular equipment
in the event of non-compliance with the guaranteed losses.
5.
DESIGN OF COMPACT SUBSTATIONS
5.1
GENERAL
The compact substation shall be outdoor type comprising
Fully Insulated 15kV Ring Main Unit
15kV /400 V hermetically sealed distribution transformer of various ratings
LV Distribution pillar equipped with MCCB
All the equipment shall be outdoor type, interconnected, factory assembled as an

integral unit, mounted upon galvanized steel base-frame, housed in an approved
vandal-proof and weather proof metallic housing, ready for placing into position
upon a concrete base pad.
The Transformer, LV and MV compartments shall be completely separated by
steel sheets. The Transformer shall be located in the middle of the Substation
while the MV and LV compartments are located at both ends of the Substation
adjacent to the corresponding bushing of the Transformer. The barrier between
the MV switchgear and the Transformer shall be provided with pressure relief flap
and the LV separator shall be provided with small door to access the Transformer
tap changer and the thermometer.
The Unit shall be delivered fully assembled and tested.
Where wiring, piping or ductwork passes through openings in equipment
housings, such openings shall be constructed to prevent ingress of vermin and
dust. Wiring and piping enclosures shall also be vermin proof. Operating boxes,
kiosks, cubicles and similar enclosed compartments forming part of auxiliary
equipment shall be adequately ventilated to restrict condensation. All contactors
or relay coils and other parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion. Anticondensation heaters of an approved make shall be provided inside each cubicle
or where necessary in each cubicle compartment.
Wherever possible all similar parts shall be made to gauge and be interchangeable
to enable substation or replacement by spare parts to be made easily and quickly
in case of wear or other failure.
The switchgear of the substation shall be complete with all required cable
connections.
The units are to be supplied as fully equipped packaged substations, including
1) Outer housing,
2) Medium voltage switchgear compartment,
EEPCO

SUBSTATIONS
3) Distribution transformer compartment,

4) Low voltage switchgear compartment.
As such only the incoming and outgoing cables need to be connected at site and
the site works are kept to an absolute minimum. And the required plug-in
termination kits for the connection of incoming and outgoing cables are to be
supplied by this contract supplier.
One set of medium voltage switchgear cable termination suitable for the offered
switchgear has to be supplied by the Supplier for connection of the incoming
cable from EEPCO. The connection between medium voltage switchgear and
medium voltage terminals of the transformer shall be via cables with touch-safe
plug-in terminations.
The connection between 0.4 kV switchgear and LV terminals of the transformers
shall be made with insulated bus bars. The terminals shall be touch-safe insulated.
Incoming and outgoing circuits shall be connected with cables entering from
below.
The entire unit shall be mounted on Skid Base capable of being moved and hauled
as a single unit. The unit shall be NON-EXTENSIBLE type metal enclosed
and suitable for outdoor installation.
5.2
DESCRIPTION OF OUTER HOUSING

The compact substation is completely self-contained, mounted upon a 3mm thick
galvanized steel base frame, factory assembled in a totally enclosed aesthetically
acceptable metal cladding, vandal-proof and weather proof housing ready for
placing into position upon a concrete base. The complete housing assembly is
provided with four lifting eyes located on the sloping roofs for easy lifting and
positioning the whole equipment at the site by the use of crane. The transformer
is located in the middle of the substation while the MV and LV compartments are
located at both ends of the substation adjacent to the corresponding bushing of
the transformer.
The substation forms a complete metallic structure bolted together and each
compartment is provided with grounding bus bars. Bonding and interconnection
of the grounding buses are made of 70mm2 bare stranded copper conductors.
The design shall be such that the roof shall be removable to allow easy lifting of
any major part of the unit. The metallic ceiling shall be of a double roofing system
to diminish heating due to solar radiation.
Generally the class of enclosure shall be 10, having sufficient thermal insulation of
the roof for the sun radiation at site.
5.2.1
Protection degrees:
The minimum Protection index which ensures the direct- contact protection of
each compartment is specified as follows:
MV compartment
IP43
Transformer compartment
IP23
EEPCO
LV compartment
5.2.2

SUBSTATIONS
IP23
Surface area
The design of the compact substation shall be such that it occupies minimum
space. The design concept is to use the substation is confined spaces.
5.3
ELECTRICAL INTERCONNECTIONS
Electrical connections to the Transformer shall be so designed that these may be
disconnected and re-connected at Site to facilitate the removal of any major
component of the unit. The inter-connection between 15kV Switchgear and
Transformer Terminals Bushings shall be by means of minimum 50 sq.mm for
sizes up to 1250kVA with plug-in type connection, of an acceptable make.
The connection between Transformer LV Bushing and the Feeder Pillar shall be
by means of flexible copper busbars passing through an air-insulated duct/flange.
5.4
EARTHING
5.4.1
General
Each unit Substation assembly shall be provided with copper Earth Bar of 40mm
x 5mm to which the Transformer LV neutral and metal frames of all items i.e.
H.V. Switchgear, Transformer and Feeder Pillar shall be connected. Two-earth
terminal shall be provided for connection to the external earthing system.
5.4.2
Metalwork Earthing Arrangements

All Substation metalwork, including Transformer tank, cable screens, feeder pillar,
doors and any internal structural steel work shall be securely bonded together so
that a firm metallic connection existing between each of them and the Substation
metal work earthing terminal.
The metal work-earthing terminal shall be provided in an accessible position.
The position of the earthing terminal shall be shown in the appropriate drawing,
and shall be approved by engineer.
Two bolted (removable) links shall be provided in the LV Feeder Pillar - ONE
between the Transformer neutral and neutral busbar. The OTHER shall be
between the neutral bar and the earth bar.
All panel and access covers or doors etc. rotating about hinges shall be earthed to
the adjacent main frames by copper flexible protective bonding conductors.
(ii) The frame of each switch shall be provided with reliable earthing terminal
having a clamping screw of not less than 12 mm in diameter.
(iii) All the earthing terminals shall be inter-bonded for equal potential and
brought to a main earthing terminals.
(iv) The earthing conductor or strap mainly of copper shall be mechanically
protected as well as against corrosion and be of adequate size for the coordinated
ratings as per schedule of particulars.
The details should be provided with the bid and shall also be incorporated into
the Maintenance Instruction Manual.
EEPCO
5.5

SUBSTATIONS
The Compact Substation housing shall be hot-dip galvanized. Galvanizing shall
consist of a continuous coating of zinc to a minimum weight of 600 g/m. The
zinc coating shall meet the requirements according to ASTM, A123, A143, A239
and A385. Other type of corrosion protection that can be shown to give a similar
protection as hot-dip galvanizing may be accepted after special agreement.
5.6
TANK BOTTOM
Thickness of housing bottom shall not be less than 4 mm.
5.7

Each Compact Substation shall be provided with a rating plate showing the
information stated in the IEC standards. The plate shall be in English.
The following plates shall be fixed to the Compact substation at an average,
readable height.
a)
A rating plate bearing the data specified in IEC or other approved standard
indicating the following shall be fixed on the same side as LV bushings.
b)
c)
Manufacturers serial number
d)
Year of manufacture
e)
Rated power
f)
Rated frequency
g)
Rated voltages
h)
Rated currents
i)
Connection group symbol
j)
Short-circuit impedance
k)
Total mass
l)
Temperature rise of oil and windings of the Transformer
m)
Insulation level
n)
Each bushing shall be marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer.
o)
A diagram plate showing the internal connections and also the voltage vector
relationship of the several windings and in addition a plan view of the transformer
giving the correct physical relationship of the terminals. When links are provided
for changing the transformer group symbol and/or ratio, then means shall be
provided for clearly indicating in which mode the transformer is connected.
p)
A property plate engraved to the instructions of the Employer.

The above plates shall be of stainless steel or of other material capable of
withstanding continuous outdoor service and shall all be suitably mounted to
prevent vibration, rattling or corrosion.
EEPCO
5.8

SUBSTATIONS
LIGHTING
HV, LV and Transformer compartments shall each be fitted with a florescent
lamp controlled from door-operated switch. The lamp shall be combined with an
accumulator-cum-charger and shall be installed in such position to illuminate the
respective compartment.
5.9
VENTILATION
Adequate ventilation for natural circulation of air shall be provided to keep the
inside temperature within the limit. Ventilation apertures shall be suitably screened
and louvered to prevent the entry of vermin, dust and other foreign bodies.
5.10
DOORS AND WALLS

Double-leaf Doors shall be framed and panelled type. Doors shall be fixed on
opposite sides of the package unit (LV and MV Compartments), and on both
sides of the Transformer compartment. The doors shall be provided with stainless
steel/brass hinges and provided with stoppers. The edges of the doors shall be
bent on both sides to assure they fit properly to the doorjambs to prevent
misalignment.
All door gaskets shall be of superior quality and capable of withstanding the
severe climatic conditions.
5.11
DOOR LOCKS
The doors shall be securely closed and then locked close with padlocks.
Each access door shall have arrangements to lock with a handle and secured
closed with a padlocks. Suitable door handles shall be fitted to the door.
Padlocks of a top quality make with a master key system shall be provided with
each unit including one spare padlock. The master key shall be advised by the
client.
The client is already using a master key system and the same shall be applied in
this compact substation.
5.12
NOISE LEVEL
The noise level of the completely assembled package Substation shall not exceed
70 dbA, when measured one (1) meter far from package unit housing in
accordance with IEC 60551. The package Substation shall be checked after
assembly to ensure that no rattling of individual components can occur.
5.13
The package Substation shall not require casting of concrete plinth at Site. Site
preparation shall be limited to levelling only.
5.14
LIFTING LUGS
Lifting lugs shall be provided so that the completely assembled package
Substation may be lifted without damage. The lifting lugs shall be designed to
carry the weight of the Substation complete with Transformer and switchgear.
Required number of lifting spread beams shall be supplied with each unit.
EEPCO
5.15
SECTION 6 - MV COMPARTMENT
COLOUR
The surface colour of HV and LV Switchgear, Transformer and Housing shall be
RAL 7032 light grey.
6.
MV COMPARTMENT
The medium voltage switchgear is gas insulated, consisting of cable switches
disconnector (Load break switch) and transformer T-off with VCB. For other
particulars spec no.TS-SG-12 may be referred.
All individual switches shall be lockable in open position with padlock.
The switchgear shall be sealed for life. The Spring Mechanisms shall be of longlife corrosion resistant material and dust proof. Degree of Protection shall not be
less than IP54.
6.1
ELECTRICAL DATA
Ratedvoltage
15kV
HighestsystemVoltage
24kV
Numberofphases
Three
RatedFrequency
50Hz
RatedShorttimeWithstandcurrentfor1s
20kA
Powerfrequencywithstandvoltage
50kV
125kV
LightningImpulsewithstandVoltage(1.2/50s)
6.2
LOAD BREAK SWITCH

The switching compartment shall be SF6 insulated. The load break switch shall be
operable manually to OPEN, CLOSE and EARTHING positions
The Load break switches shall be rated for the rated voltages of 15kV. The
temperature rise limit for the silver faced copper contacts shall be 60C and for
the terminals 50 C.
6.3
TRANSFORMER BREAKER
A transformer breaker shall be provided to protect and control the disitribution
transformer.
The Transformer breaker unit shall be fault-making and fault-breaking Tee-off
vacuum/SF6 circuit breaker. The CB shall have Trip Coil also connected to
Temperature Indicator of the Transformer to protect the Transformer against
over loading.
The HRC Fuse shall comply with the requirement of IEC 282. Dimensions shall
be as per DIN 43625. Details of tripping mechanism, tripping characteristics and
applicable setting shall be submitted with the Bid
EEPCO
6.4
SECTION 6 - MV COMPARTMENT
PROTECTION RELAYS
The circuit Breaker shall be equipped with self-powered numerical relay with
operating temperature of 5oC to +70oC, for OC/SC and E/F protection, which
can be adjusted to suit different Transformer capacities. The relay shall protect the
system from transformer faults, transformer through faults and transformer
overload.
6.5
BUSHINGS
MV bushings shall be rated to withstand the highest system voltage of 24 kV and
the maximum fault current of the windings when connected to the 15kV network
and for the same period of time. Current carrying outer parts shall be made of
copper or copper alloy.
Each bushing shall be marked with manufacturer name and type. The marking
shall be visible after assembly of the fittings.
The outer creepage distance for outdoor bushings shall not be less than 20
mm/kV. The insulation levels of the bushings shall be at least equal to those
specified for the windings.
6.6
CABLE TERMINATIONS
The cable boxes for Ring Circuits shall be suitable for accommodating 3 core or
single core cross-linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed over the range of
100 sq.mm to 240 sq.mm Copper or aluminium Conductor for Feeders.
The box shall be designed for air-insulated dry type heat shrinkable termination.
The design shall provide sufficient space for crossing of cores without damage to
core insulations. Cable glands and heat shrinkable termination kits of acceptable
make shall be supplied with the unit.
For Transformer Control Switch plug-in type Terminations of an acceptable
make, suitable for 50 sq.mm Single Core Cable shall be supplied.
6.7
EARTH FAULT INDICATOR

Through-fault current indicators with core-balance Transformer (associated with
the one of the feeders) shall be supplied. These shall be supplied fixed flush
mounted on units facing glass windows on the Package Unit access Door, in such
a way that they can be seen without opening the door.
The through-fault current indicator shall operate on the passage of fault current
through its core-balance C.T. The indicator shall be clearly visible from ground
level. The unit shall be self-reset type upon restoration of power supply. The unit
shall have time delay to avoid operation during brief periods of unbalance.
The through-fault indicator shall be of Siemens AG, GEC Measurement, U.K., or
REYROLLE AFB, ABB or other equivalent quality. The unit shall be adequately
protected to withstand severe weather conditions, as it is meant to be used for
outdoor installation on Ring Main Units.
EEPCO
6.8
SECTION 7 - TRANSFORMER
COMPARTMENT
EARTHING
Each unit assembly shall be provided with copper earth bar 40mm x 5mm, the
metal frames of all items shall be connected to one another firmly. Two earth
terminals shall be provided for connecting to the station earthing system.
6.9
ACCESSORIES
Each unit shall be supplied with the following accessories:
Voltage Indicator lamps fixed on the front of the panel for both feeder
switches.
Plug-in Voltage Indicator for phase comparison.
Test Plugs with each batch of 10 (ten) Units.
7.
TRANSFORMER COMPARTMENT
7.1
GENERAL
This section specifies the detailed requirements for distribution transformers,
complete with necessary fittings for 15/0.4kV Compact substations.
The transformer shall conform to the technical specification No.TS-TR-01. A
technical schedule TS-TR-01-S shall be completed for the transformer for ground
mounted substation.
7.2
TRANSFORMER TYPE
The transformer shall be hermetically sealed, tank type, ONAN naturally cooled,
skid mounted, un-inhibited mineral oil immersed, core type and copper windings
suitable for operation outdoor in exposed location. The Transformer oil shall
confirm to BS 148 Class 1 Category / IEC 296.
7.3
VOLTAGE RATIOS
The normal voltage ratio of the Transformer on normal tapping and no-load shall
be 15 /0.4 kV.
7.4
RATINGS
The Transformer rated kVA shall be the continuous steady load rating under the
specified temperature and humidity without exceeding the average temperature
rise limits given in specification TS-GN-01.
The full rating shall be at the rated output voltage with rated input voltage.
7.5
TEMPERATURE RISE
The Transformer shall be capable of carrying full rated current continuously
under the maximum specified ambient temperature at any tapping, without the
temperature rise of oil at top exceeding 45 degree C, as measured by thermometer
and of the winding not exceeding 55 degree C and of the hot spot not exceeding
60 degree C, as measured by resistance calculations demonstrating the above shall
be submitted with the Bid.
COMPARTMENT
EEPCO
7.6
WINDING CONNECTION - VECTOR GROUP

The winding connection of the Transformers shall be connected Delta Star in
accordance with the group of symbols in IEC 60076-4, Vector Reference Dyn5.
The neutral terminal shall be brought out and shall be fully rated in all cases.
7.7
TRANSFORMER MECHANICAL DESIGN

The tank shall be constructed of high grade steel plate, suitably reinforced to
withstand handling and pressure during fault condition without any deformation.
Gaskets shall be oil resistant. Rubber gaskets used for flange connections of the
various oil compartments shall be laid in grooves. Gaskets any kind of
impregnated/ bonded cork are not acceptable.
The tank shall be fitted with lifting lugs suitable for handling the mass of the
transformer complete with oil.
7.7.1
Accessories
At least the following accessories shall be included for the transformer:
a)
Pressure relief device
b)
Oil level indicator
c)
Two earthing terminals
d)
Oil thermometer
e)
Rating and diagram plates
7.7.2
Electrical Design
The transformer windings shall be designed to meet the following electrical
characteristics:
Nominal System voltage
15kV
Highest system voltage
24 kV
Ratted low-voltage at no-load
400 V
System frequency
50 Hz
Vector group
Dyn5
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage(1.2/50 s) for MV
125 kV
windings
Power frequency withstand voltage for MV windings
50kV
Rated one minute power frequency withstand voltage for LV
3 kV
windings
7.7.3
Impedance & Sound levels

Transformer ratings, kVA
400
500
630
800
1250
Nominal voltage (kV)
15
15
15
15
15
COMPARTMENT
EEPCO
7.7.4
Short circuit Impedance at

principal taping (%)
5.5
5.5
Sound level dB
51
53
53
54
56
Guaranteed values
The following values are guaranteed by the manufacturer as stipulated in the
guaranteed characteristic table.
1) No-load loss
2) Load loss
3) No-load current
4) short-circuit impedance
5) Voltage ratio
7.8

The MV transformer windings shall be provided with an off-load tap changer
providing 5 positions and each step shall be 2.5%.
The tap settings shall be +5%,+2.5%, 0%, -2.5%, -5%, for three phase
transformers.
The off-load tap changer shall have an externally operated mechanism for manual
operation. Tap positions shall be clearly identified. The operating mechanism shall
have an effective locking device for locking of the tap changer in any desired
position.
7.9
BUSHINGS SPACING
Transformers shall have the bushings for HV and LV which fulfil the
requirements of IEC 60137
Minimum Distances between bushings
7.10
HV
400 mm 50mm
LV
150 mm 50mm
EMERGENCY LOADING
The Tenderer shall demonstrate by calculation, the ability of the Transformer to
operate under emergency loading condition as per IEC 354 for the following
loading and ambient temperature conditions listed below with Transformer
winding hot spot temperature not exceeding 40 degree C, after thermal
equilibrium has been reached at rated load.
Transformer bushing, tap changer and terminations shall also be suitably rated for
over loading as specified in IEC 60354.
Load
(% of Rating)
Minimum Duration in Minutes at Ambient

Temperature
30 Degree C
40 Degree C
55 Degree C
120
SECTION 8 - LOW VOLTAGE

COMPARTMENT
EEPCO
130
150
7.11
LOSSES
The maximum losses at rated load and conditions shall be as given below:
Rating kVA
No-load loss (W)
Full Load loss (W)
400
990
4500
500
1180
5400
630
1450
6400
800
1650
8000
1250
2300
11000
The losses shall be stated and guaranteed in the Bid technical specifications (no
tolerance is permitted). For evaluation or other reasons losses will be capitalized at
the rates given below.
No Load Loss : US$ 4000 per kilowatt.
Load Loss : US$ 1000 per kilowatt.
If, on delivery, the tested losses exceed the guaranteed losses then losses in excess
of the guaranteed values may be capitalized at the evaluation rate and the amount
deducted from the contract price. There will be no credit for losses less than the
guaranteed value.
8.
LOW VOLTAGE COMPARTMENT

The main incoming cables/copper flat (provided with ring type current
transformers as per the details specified in the technical schedule ) shall be
connected to the bus bars of phases. These bus bars shall be connected to the
MCCBs which are in turn connected to the outgoing feeders.
One neutral bar and earth bar also provided to meet the requirement.
Please refer spec.no.TS-SG-03 regarding other particulars on MCCBs.
The glanding arrangement shall fully ensure earth continuity through cable armour
in the cases of armoured cables.
8.1
DETAILS OF EQUIPMENT IN LV COMPARTMENT

The following shall be part of the LV cubicle.
8.1.1
Busbars
Set of busbars of hard drawn, high conductivity, tinned copper and rigidly
supported. The busbars to be positioned to give maximum access and shall be
colour coded for identification by shrinkable insulating tube. The size of the
busbars shall be stated in the Bid as (Cross-section Area sq.mm).
EEPCO
8.1.2
SECTION 8 - LOW VOLTAGE

COMPARTMENT
LV Incoming Isolator
One incoming unit with hook operated slow make and break off load hinged
isolating switch-blade on each phase for control of the Transformer supply.
Switch- blades shall be fitted with contact tightening clamps. It shall be possible to
leave the incoming isolators open LIVE with the door closed.
8.1.3
MCCBs
The 0.4 kV switchgear shall be air insulated Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
(MCCB) for the outgoing circuits. See specification TS-SG-03 for full details
The outgoing feeder MCCB complete with overload and short circuit protection
with ratings specified in the schedule of requirements are connected to the bus
bars.
Required numbers as specified in Schedule of Bill of Quantities of 3 x MCCBs.
A separate MCCB shall be provided for street lighting.
A blank circuit label to be provided on each unit.
8.1.4
CTs
On each phase current Transformer shall be provided for operation of
instruments.
8.1.5
Energy Meter
The required wiring for connecting one electronic trivector meter at a future date
shall be complete and space made available. All wiring shall be terminated at a
meter terminating block to enable future meter installation and easy connection
8.1.6
Ameter
Three Single-Phase Ammeters with instantaneous elements plus maximum
current demand indicators of the thermal type. The ammeters shall be suitable for
operation from the current Transformers specified. The maximum demand
element shall be compensated for 55 degree Celsius ambient temperature.
8.1.7
Voltmeter
One Voltmeter 0-500V with phase selector switch.
8.1.8
Light fitting
One Light Fitting for cubicle illumination complete with a door operated switch.
The maximum demand indicator voltmeters, selector switch and light fitting to be
mounted on an instrument panel.
8.1.9
Earth Bar
An Earth Bar not less than 50mm x 10mm shall be provided at the bottom and
secured so as to give a positive electrical connection. In addition, two 12mm with
Earth terminal shall be provided on the pillar shell and connected to the earth bar.
A detachable link between neutral and earth bar shall also be provided.
8.1.10
Cable Glands
The cable glands shall be brass or stainless steel compression type as per BS
suitable for the bales provided for the LV system. The glands shall be supplied
EEPCO
SECTION 9 - SPARE PARTS
complete with earth tag PVC shrouds. Cross sectional details of the cable will be
supplied to the successful Tenderers. Earth tag of each gland shall be connected
to earth bar with tinned copper flexible earthing braid of adequate cross section
having at lest 50 % of that of the phase conductor of the cable to be connected.
Each cable gland shall be supported on a removable gland plate.
8.1.11
Miscellaneous
All instrument wiring shall be 2.5 sq.mm stranded copper conductor, 600 Volt
tropical grade PVC insulated.
The Base Plate of the feeder pillar shall be supplied with knockout holes.
Necessary Nuts, Bolts for cable lugs, spacers, etc., shall be supplied fitted with
feeder pillar. Cable clamps shall be provided at the bottom of the feeder pillar to
hold the cables in position.
The gland plate of the feeder pillar shall be so positioned to allow convenient
bend on the cable.
Cable glands with earth tag and plastic shrouds, cable lugs and fuses shall be
delivered separately.
9.
SPARE PARTS
Different items ordered against spares shall be packed in separate casing with item
number and quantity clearly marked.
10.
DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED
Prior to the tests the Contractor shall submit an outline of the procedures and
tests in its plans, to demonstrate fulfilment of the requirements specified in
subsequent sections of the detailed technical specification.
During the course of fabrications, tests shall be made on samples not less than 5%
of the respective items.
The Tenderer must submit all technical descriptions, data sheets, catalogues and
other supporting material with the Offer to enable the Purchasers Engineer to
fully evaluate the proposal as to its compliance with the Tender Specification. As a
minimum the Tenderer shall submit the following:
1) Technical Schedules.
2) Copies of required Type Test Certificates.
3) ISO 9000 certification and its relevant parts.
4) All drawings and information called for by this Specification, including:
10.2
FOR RING MAIN UNIT

1) General arrangement RMUs, dimensions, together with mountings/accessories.
2) Details of HV Cable Terminations.
3) Details of fault current indicator.
4) Characteristics of the Transformer Control Unit.
EEPCO
10.3
FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER

1) General arrangement of Transformer, dimensions etc.
2) Details of HV and LV Bushings
3) Details of HV Cable Box.
4) Details of Tap Changer.
5) Details of Temperature Rise Indicator.
10.4
LV COMPARTMENT
1) Details and characteristics of MCCBs.
2) Drawing Showing the Internal Arrangement of Feeder Pillar.
10.5
HOUSING
Construction details of the Housing.
10.6
GENERAL
1) Original Brochures and Catalogues for Standard Unit.
2) Applicable Design Specification.
3) Lists of Accessories included in the Bid.
11.
PACKING
The Compact Substations shall be packed in sea-worthy solid wall wooden cases
in a manner to avoid damage during transport, handling and storage. They shall
also be packed in such a way that no corrosion occurs on the equipments due to
salty moisture when stored at the port of destination.
Each package shall be marked with the main details of the equipment contained
therein, the type designation or the catalogue number and with the manufacturer's
name or trademark.
Each wooden case shall be clearly marked with the address of EEPCO and the
relevant contact number and title. All markings shall be legible and durable.
Bushing units shall be packed in a manner to avoid damage during transport,
handling and storage.
12.
TRANSPORT
Irrespective of the actual method approved for transport to the individual site, all
transformers shall be suitable for transport with the transformers full of oil unless
otherwise approved.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining the methods and limitations
of transport to site and designs affected by these factors be subject to agreement.
EEPCO
13.
SCHEDULES
13.1
SCHEDULE FOR AUXILIARY CABLES

Technical Schedule Reference TS-TR-02-S1
No
Item
Unit
Requirement
Bid Offer
General
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.
3
3.1
3.2
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
EEPCO
13.2

Schedule Ref TS-TR-02-NC1
Specification
Clause
EEPCO
13.3

Item Reference TS-TR-02-TC1
Specification
Clause
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule: TS-TR-02-S

Nos.
No
Item
Nominal kVA Rating
1.1
Manufacturer
15/0.4kV Compact Substations

Unit
Requireme Bid Offer

t 400
Requireme Bid Offer

t 500
Requireme Bid Offer

t 630
Requireme Bid Offer

t 800
Requireme Bid Offer

t 1250
IEC 61330
IEC 61330
IEC 61330
IEC 61330
IEC 61330
1.2
Country of origin
1.3
Type designation
1.4
Standard
1.5
1.6
1.7
Composition of Compact substation

Number of medium voltage compartments
Number of transformer compartments
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Number of low voltage compartments
II
Medium voltage compartment
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
Size of cubicle
Type
Protection class
Service voltage(kV)
Equipment Highest Voltage kV
Frequency, Hz
Insulation level
Power frequency withstand voltage,
Rated lightning, impulse withstand
Rated short-time withstand current for
IP
kV
kV
Hz
IP43
15
24
50
IP43
15
24
50
IP43
15
24
50
IP43
15
24
50
IP43
15
24
50
kV
kV
kV
50
125
20
50
125
20
50
125
20
50
125
20
50
125
20
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
Circuit Breaker for Transformer

Type
Rated Curent
Rated short circuit breaking current
A
kA
Vacuum
200
20
2.15
2.16
2.17
Load break fuse switch

Current rating, A
Rated cable charging breaking current
400
400
400
400
50
400
File:TS-TR-02-S R2 compact_substations 2013-04-28.xlsm- sheet:TS-TR-02-S
Page 1
Date: 28/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
Item
Nominal kVA Rating
III
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.23
Low Voltage compartment

Size of cubicle
Protection class
Bus Bar rating (A)
No.of ways for outgoing Cable
Terminations
Nominal voltage, kV
Rated frequency, Hz
Power frequency withstand voltage ,
kV(rms)
voltage, kV(peak), (1.2/50 ms)
MCCBs
Type
Nominal voltage, kV
Rated Current, A
Rated short-time current rating,kA
Number of MCCBs
Current transformer
Type
Quantity for each s/s
Voltage rating,V
Current ratio
Frequency, Hz
Burden,VA
Class
Ammeter with selector switch
3.24
3.25
3.26
3.27
3.28
3.29
3.30
Type
Quantity
Current range, A
Voltmeter
Type
Quantity
Voltage range,V
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
EEPCo

Unit
IP
A
Requireme Bid Offer

t 400
Requireme Bid Offer

t 500
Requireme Bid Offer

t 630
Requireme Bid Offer

t 800
Requireme Bid Offer

t 1250
IP23
Min. 1500
4
IP23
Min. 1500
5
IP23
Min. 2000
6
IP23
Min. 2000
8
IP23
Min. 3000
8
0.4
50
3 for one
minute
kV peak
6
0.4
50
3 for one
minute
6
0.4
50
3 for one
minute
6
0.4
50
3 for one
minute
6
0.4
50
3 for one
minute
6
0.4
400
50
12
0.4
400
50
15
0.4
400
50
18
0.4
400
50
24
0.4
400
50
24
Ring type
3
400
800/5
50
Ring type
3
400
1000/5
50
Ring type
3
400
1200/5
50
Ring type
3
400
2000/5
50
Ring type
3
400
2500/5
50
1
0-400-800
1
0-500-1000
1
0-600-1200
1
0-1000-
1
0-1000-
1
0-800
1
0-1000
1
0-1200
1
0-2000
1
0-2500
1
0-500
1
0-500
1
0-500
1
0-500
1
0-500
kV
HZ
kV rms
kV
A
kA
No
V
A
Hz
VA
Page 2
Date: 28/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
Item
Nominal kVA Rating
3.31
Space for kWh meter
IV
4.1
4.2
Transformer compartment
Protection class
Technical characteristics of the
distribution transformer
Method of cooling
No. of phases
Standard
Frequency, Hz
Rated Continuous Power, kVA
On HV side
On LV side
Rated Voltage, kV
On HV side
On LV side
Connections (Vector Group)
No-load loss at rated voltage and
frequency, W
Full load loss ,W
Rated voltage at full load (P.F=0.95), V
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21
4.22
4.23
4.24
4.25
4.26
4.27
Efficiency referred to 75oC at rated voltage

and frequency
At 90% voltage (%)
At 100% voltage (%)
At 110% voltage (%)
Mean level of noise at no load-Power level
(dB)
Colour of the transformer
EEPCo

Unit
Requireme Bid Offer

t 400
Requireme Bid Offer

t 500
Requireme Bid Offer

t 630
Requireme Bid Offer

t 800
Requireme Bid Offer

t 1250
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
ONAN
3
IEC 60354
50
ONAN
3
IEC 60354
50
ONAN
3
IEC 60354
50
ONAN
3
IEC 60354
50
ONAN
3
IEC 60354
50
400
400
500
500
630
630
800
800
1250
1250
15
0.4
Dyn5
990
15
0.4
Dyn5
1180
15
0.4
Dyn5
1450
15
0.4
Dyn5
1650
15
0.4
Dyn5
2300
W
V
4500
400
5400
400
6400
400
8000
400
11000
400
50
53
53
54
56
Gray
Gray
Gray
Gray
Gray
Hz
kV
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
db
Page 3
Date: 28/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
Item
Nominal kVA Rating
4.28
4.29
Thickness of surface treatment (m)

Short-circuit impedance at principle
tapping (%)
Ability to withstand unbalanced load (%)
4.30
4.31
4.32
4.33
4.34
4.35
4.36
4.37
4.38
4.39
4.40
4.41
4.42
4.43
4.44
4.45
4.46
4.47
4.48
4.49
4.50
4.51
4.53
4.54
4.55
4.56
4.57
4.58
4.59
EEPCo

Unit
Average temperature rise, C

Windings
Top oil
Dimensions of complete transformer, mm
Height
Length
Width
Weight, kg
Core
Winding
Transformer Oil
Complete transformer
Transformer tank
Material
Top, mm
Bottom, mm
Sides, mm
Core
Type
Material
Type (wire or coil)
HV Windings
Material
Insulation
Power frequency withstand voltage, kV
voltage, kV(peak)
Type wire or coil, round
Requireme Bid Offer

t 400
Requireme Bid Offer

t 500
Requireme Bid Offer

t 630
Requireme Bid Offer

t 800
Requireme Bid Offer

t 1250
m
%
140
4
140
5
140
5.5
140
5.5
140
6
>=90
>=90
>=90
>=90
>=90
60
55
60
55
60
55
60
55
60
55
CRGO
CRGO
CRGO
CRGO
CRGO
steel
steel
steel
steel
steel
Steel
Steel
Steel
Steel
Steel
Copper
round
Copper
round
Copper
round
Copper
round
Copper
round
50
125
50
125
50
125
50
125
50
125
wire or coil
wire or coil
wire or coil
wire or coil
wire or coil
oC
mm
mm
mm
kg
mm
mm
mm
kV
kV
Page 4
Date: 28/4/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
Item
Nominal kVA Rating
4.60
4.61
4.62
4.63
LV Windings
Material
Insulation
Power frequency withstand voltage,
kV(rms)
voltage, kV(peak)
Complete Compact Substation
Dimension Width x Depth x Height
Weight, kg
4.64
4.65
4.66
4.67
EEPCo

Unit
Requireme Bid Offer

t 400
Requireme Bid Offer

t 500
Requireme Bid Offer

t 630
Requireme Bid Offer

t 800
Requireme Bid Offer

t 1250
Copper
Copper
Copper
Copper
Copper
kV rms
kV peak
.
mm
kg
Page 5
Date: 28/4/2013,
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-TR-06
15kV Voltage Boosters
Rev -1- April 2013
EEPCO

Revision
Date
Brief Description
Rev 0
Mar 2013
First issue.
Rev 1
27 April 2013
Improved Specification .
TS-TR-06 R1 15kV Voltage Boosters 2013-04-28.docx
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: i , 27-Apr-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
15KV VOLTAGE BOOSTERS
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
TYPE TESTS
ROUTINE TESTS
SAMPLE / ACCEPTANCE TEST
2
2
3
5.
BASIC FEATURES
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
GENERAL
TYPE OF VOLTAGE REGULATORS AND OPERATING CONDITIONS
CONTINUOUS MAXIMUM RATING
VOLTAGE RATIO
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
LOSSES AND EVALUATION OF LOSSES
MAGNETIC CIRCUIT AND WINDINGS
HARMONIC SUPPRESSION
EARTHING OF MAGNETIC CIRCUIT
TANK FABRICATION FOR REGULATORS
BREATHER
TERMINAL BUSHINGS
SURGE ARRESTERS
VALVES
RADIATORS
EARTHING TERMINALS
VOLTAGE CONTROL
ON-LOAD TAP CHANGERS (OLTC)
OIL
OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATING DEVICES
GAS AND OIL-ACTUATED RELAYS (BUCHHOLZ RELAY)
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
9
9
6.
7.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
10
10
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
SPARES
RATING PLATE
PACKING
WARRANTY
10
10
10
10
8.
INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED WITH THE BID
10
8.1
TO BE FURNISHED WITH THE BID
10
Rev -1- April 2013
EEPCO
8.2
8.3
8.4

OTHER CERTIFICATES
TECHNICAL LITERATURE & DRAWINGS
11
11
11
9.
SCHEDULES
11
9.1
9.2
9.3
SCHEDULE FOR POLE MOUNTED 15KV VOLTAGE BOOSTERS

11
11
13
Rev -1- April 2013
SECTION 1 - SCOPE
EEPCO
15KV VOLTAGE BOOSTERS

1.
SCOPE
This specification covers oil-immersed, naturally cooled (type ONAN), outdoor
type, 50 Hz, 15kV Voltage Boosters/Regulators intended for improving voltage
regulation in 15kV lines having excessive voltage variations.
These are normally installed mid-way on long/ rural 15KV lines, where voltage
drop exceeds maximum permissible limit.
2.

The Voltage Boosters shall be used in installations at altitudes of up to 3000M.
3.
3.1
REFERENCE STANDARDS
Specification /
Standard Number
Title
BS 4360
Weldable structural steel
BS 729
Hot dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles
IEC 65029
Degree of protection provided by enclosures.
IEC 60076
Power transformers
IEC 600137
Bushing for alternating voltage above 1000V
IEC 600214
On load tap changers
IEC 600354
Loading guide for oil immersed power T/F
IEC 600542
Application guide for on load tap changer
IEC60296
Inspection for unused mineral insulating oil for

transformers and switchgears
ANSI 57.15
Standard Requirements, Terminology, and Test Code for

Step-Voltage Regulators
CONFLICT
4.

The Regulator shall be subject to inspection and test by the Client during
manufacture and before despatch. The costs of all tests including the provision of
the necessary test equipment shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be
deemed to be included in the Bid Price. Costs shall not include clients personnel
costs for travel and accommodation, per diems etc.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 1 , 27-Apr-13
EEPCO
At least 21 working days notice shall be given when the plant is ready for
inspection & tests and every facility shall be provided by the manufacturer to
enable the Client to carry out the necessary inspection and witnessing of tests.
4.1
TYPE TESTS
(i)
Measurement of winding resistance,
(ii)
Measurement of voltage ratio on all taps,
(iii)
Measurement of no load loss and no load current and load loss,
(iv)
Measurement of Insulation resistance,
(v)
Induced over voltage withstand test,
(vi)
Separate source voltage withstand test ,
(vii)
Tests on tap changer to the extent applicable,
(viii)
Lightning impulse test,
(ix)
Temperature rise ,
(x)
Short circuit test.
4.2
ROUTINE TESTS
4.2.1
General
The following Routine Tests shall be carried out on the Voltage Regulators by the
manufacturer and the test report shall be supplied with the regulator
1) Measurement of winding resistance (as per Clause No.10.2 of IEC 60076)
2) Measurement of voltage ratio and check of phase displacement (as per Clause No.
10.3 of IEC 60076)
3) Measurement of short circuit impedance and load loss (as per Clause No. 10.4 of
IEC 60076)
4) Measurement of No Load loss (as per Clause No. 10.5 of IEC 60076)
5) Characteristic of transformer oil (Break down value ,tan-delta and resistivity)
6) Dielectric routine test (as per IEC 60076-3)
High voltage power frequency test
Induced over voltage test at 125 Hz.
4.2.2
Voltage Control Equipment

The completely assembled switching apparatus is to be operated forty times
through a complete tap changing cycle in the normal manner with the transformer
unexcited followed by ten similar operations in the normal manner with the
transformer alive at normal voltage on open circuit.
NOTE: A complete tap changing cycle is to comprise movement from minimum,
to maximum and return to minimum tap, or equivalent.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 2 , 27-Apr-13
SECTION 5 - BASIC FEATURES
EEPCO
4.2.3
Magnetic Circuit
Each core completely assembled is to be tested for one minute at 2,500 volts A.C.
between core bolts, side plates, structural steel work. After the Voltage Regulator
is tanked and completely assembled, a further test is to be applied between the
core and the earthed structural steel work to prove that the core is earthed,
through the removable link, at one point only.
4.2.4
Gas and Oil-Actuated Relays

Oil Leakage - Gas and Oil actuated relays are to be subjected to an internal oil
pressure of 207kN/mm (30 p.s.i.g.) for 15 minutes. No leakage shall occur.
Gas Collection.
Oil Surge.
Voltage - 2 kV for one minute between electrical circuits and casings.
4.2.5
LV Equipment
Insulation tests shall be carried out on all LV equipment at 2 kV for one minute.
4.3
SAMPLE / ACCEPTANCE TEST

The following acceptance test shall be carried out on one Voltage Regulator of
each size and type and the tests shall be witnessed by the Inspector appointed by
the Client.
1) Measurement of winding resistance (as per Clause No.10.2 of IEC 60076).
10.3 of IEC 60076).
IEC 60076).
4) Measurement of No. Load loss (as per Clause No. 10.5 of IEC 60076).
5) Dielectric routine test (as per IEC 60076-3).
High voltage power frequency test.
Induced over voltage test at 125 Hz.
Impulse withstand test.
6) Temperature rise test (as per IEC 60076-2, to be conducted on the tapping
corresponding to the maximum losses)
7) On-Load-Tap-Changer (To check the OLTC).
5.
BASIC FEATURES
5.1
GENERAL
The 15kV automatic Voltage Regulators will be used in long overhead radial /
open-ring feeders to improve the down-stream network supply performance.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 3 , 27-Apr-13
EEPCO
5.2
TYPE OF VOLTAGE REGULATORS AND OPERATING

CONDITIONS
The Voltage Regulators shall be mineral insulating oil immersed with ONAN
cooling and suitable for outdoor installation.
5.3
CONTINUOUS MAXIMUM RATING

The Voltage Regulators shall have the rating stated in the Schedule of Technical
Requirements and shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60076 and IEC
60354 with regard to temperature rise on all tapings and over loading.
5.4
VOLTAGE RATIO
The nominal input voltage shall be 15 kV.
The output voltage shall be 15 KV.
5.5
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Voltage Regulator windings shall be of:-
5.6
Three phase auto-transformer type, star or delta connection OR.
Single phase (phase to phase) units.

The Voltage Regulator shall be capable of withstanding for 3 seconds without
damage against external short circuit between phases or between phase to earth,
with the short circuit level limited to 16kA for one sec.
Evidence shall be submitted with the offer as to the extent to which the
manufacturer has proved or is able to prove either by calculation or test the ability
of the specified Voltage Regulator to withstand short circuit. The Client reserves
the right to require calculations to prove that the design of Voltage Regulator
offered will satisfactorily comply with this Clause.
5.7
LOSSES AND EVALUATION OF LOSSES

The following shall be specified by the Bidder;
Load losses at rated MVA rating at 75 C.
Zero phase sequence/Phase in ohms.
No load current and power factor.
For the purpose of Bid assessment, the Bid price and the cost of Voltage
Regulator losses will be taken into account, the basis of comparison of losses
being as follows:The "Present Worth" of the cost of losses of each Voltage Regulator equals
No Load Loss US$ 4.000 per kilowatt.
Load Loss US$ 1,000 per kilowatt.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 4 , 27-Apr-13
EEPCO
5.8
MAGNETIC CIRCUIT AND WINDINGS

1) Reasonable low flux density shall be taken for economical design of magnetic
circuit. Care shall be taken to avoid static discharges. Magnetic circuit shall be
designed with mitred joint so as to get good performance out of magnetic circuit.
2) Core bolts shall not pass through limbs of the magnetic circuit, however if any
core bolt pass through, yoke shall be suitably insulated. Core bolts through yoke
shall be tested at 2000 volts RMS for 60 seconds withstand test.
3) Magnetic circuit shall be suitably clamped so that no Hum is experienced and the
average surface noise level shall not exceed 71 dB, when measured in accordance
with BS 6056 (1981).
4) Magnetic circuit shall be designed with utmost care that flux density is not more
than 1.8 Tesla when the supply is 15kV for the full voltage tap range and
frequency 50 Hz is connected on input terminals. Bidders shall demonstrate the
maximum flux density by way of design calculation, taking into account the effect
of V/F.
5) All metal parts of the Voltage Regulator with the exception of the individual core
laminations, core bolts and associated individual clamping plates etc. shall be
earthed at one point with suitable size of tinned copper strip of area not less than
0.8 cm.
6) Winding (electrical circuit) shall be designed so that no hot spot is generated. For
this purpose sufficient cooling duct axial/radial shall be provided, size of duct
shall be such that easy flow of oil is not blocked, and can easily take away the
generated heat.
7) Winding terminations and connections leads shall be rigidly supported with the
core frame.
5.9
HARMONIC SUPPRESSION
The Voltage Regulator shall be designed in such a way that in the output contains
minimum amount of harmonics. The sum of 3rd, 5th, 7th harmonics shall not be
more than 3% of RMS rated value and the individual value shall not be more than
2%. For this purpose, composite low pass filters may be added, so as to get nearly
sine wave output. Voltage Regulator supplier shall demonstrate the output wave
shape.
5.10
EARTHING OF MAGNETIC CIRCUIT

The magnetic circuit shall be earthed to the clamping structure at one point only
through a removable link placed in an accessible position just beneath the tank
cover and which, by disconnection, will enable the insulation between the core
and clamping plates, etc., to be tested at voltages up to 2.5 kV for the purpose of
checking deterioration during service. The connection to the link shall be on the
same side of the core as the main earth connection. These requirements are
compulsory.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 5 , 27-Apr-13
EEPCO
5.11
TANK FABRICATION FOR REGULATORS

The tank fabrication shall be done with low carbon steel conforming to BS 4360.
Tank construction shall be sufficiently strong. Suitable sizes of stiffeners both
vertical & horizontal shall be provided. The tank shall be mounted on skid.
Tanks shall be designed in such a way that no rain water is retained at cover of the
tanks. For this purpose tank covers shall be slopped both sides.
Lifting lugs shall be provided to lift the complete Regulator ready for service.
5.12
BREATHER
The Voltage Regulator shall be fitted with an oil seal type silica gel breather. This
breather shall be at least one size larger than would be fitted for use in a temperate
climate. All breathers shall be mounted at a height not exceeding 1.5m above
ground level.
5.13
TERMINAL BUSHINGS
The Voltage Regulator shall be provided with outdoor type 24kV bushing
insulators. All bushing shall comply with IEC 60137. These requirements are for
the 15kV system operating at altitudes up to 3,000m
The bushing shall be of the oil filled type or sealed construction suitable for
service under very humid conditions. Typical section of bushing insulators
showing the internal construction, method of securing the top cap and method of
sealing shall be submitted with the Bid.
5.14
SURGE ARRESTERS
Surge arresters shall be fitted and be an integral part of the regulator.
Surge arresters shall be fitted on both sides of the regulator.
5.15
VALVES
Complete set of valves shall be provided for draining, sampling, filtering, air
release, and isolation purposes.
Valves shall be of the sluice type, have non-rising spindles and shall be closed by
turning the hand-wheel in a clockwise direction. They shall have machined flanges
with facilities for locking in the closed and open positions.
Every valve shall be provided with an indicator to show clearly the position of the
valve and each hand-wheel shall be fitted with a brass nameplate indicating the
purpose of the valve.
5.16
RADIATORS
Radiator(s), if provided, shall be designed so that all painted surface can be
thoroughly cleaned and easily painted in site with brush or spray gun. The design
shall also avoid pockets in which water can collect. If detachable type radiators are
provided they shall be connected directly to the tank and shall be provided with
machined flanged inlet and outlet branches. Plugs shall be fitted at the top and
bottom of each radiator for filling and draining.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 6 , 27-Apr-13
EEPCO
5.17
EARTHING TERMINALS
Two earthing terminals, each capable of carrying the stipulated maximum earth
fault current shall be provided close to the base and on opposite side of the tank
structure.
5.18
VOLTAGE CONTROL
The Voltage Regulator shall have an automatic voltage control device (relay) to
control the on load tap changing type sector switch for varying the effective
transformation ratio. On-Load-Tap-Changer (OLTC) of "Machinenfabrik
Reinhausen" type design shall be provided with the Voltage Regulator.
The auxiliary supply for the automatic voltage control relay and the OLTC shall
be provided by an auxiliary winding incorporated in the Regulator main winding.
OLTC shall comply with IEC 60214 and shall be suitable for power flow in both
directions. Only designs which have been type tested in accordance with this
standard shall be accepted.
A counter shall be included with the tap change mechanism to indicate the
number of operations completed by the equipment.
All terminals shall be clearly and permanently marked with numbers
corresponding to the cables connected there to. Tap changers shall be suitable for
load flow through the Voltage Regulator as stipulated in the technical
requirements.
5.19
ON-LOAD TAP CHANGERS (OLTC)

1) On-load tap changer shall have minimum 16 steps (17 positions) with automatic
control system. OLTC shall be contained in separate tanks mounted in an
accessible position in or on the sides of the Voltage Regulator main tank. Designs
having the on-load tap changer contained within the main Voltage Regulator tank
are also acceptable.
2) The tap selectors shall be arranged so as to permit easy access for maintenance
and repair of the equipment thereon, preferably without the necessity of lowering
the oil level in the main Voltage Regulator tank.
3) Current making and breaking switches, integral with the tap selector equipment
shall be contained in a separate tank designed in a manner to make it impossible
for the oil therein to mix with oil in the tap selector and main Voltage Regulator.
The head of oil in this tank may be maintained by a separate compartment.
4) The OLTC motor shall operate on 230V AC normal auxiliary supply. A suitable 2
X 12 volt & 60 AH (Min.) rechargeable battery bank with inverter to obtain
230V 50Hz normal AC supply shall also be provided as a back-up to operate
OLTC operating mechanism. Automatic change over shall be provided to switch
supply from the former to the latter. The latter shall bring back the tap changer to
the zero position automatically during power failure. When the supply is restored
the change over shall automatically switch to the normal auxiliary supply. The
battery charger shall be provided with automatic trickle charge, float charge, and
boost charge with proper protection like over charge trip, low voltage trip etc.
The battery bank and a battery charger for the above purpose shall be supplied
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 7 , 27-Apr-13
EEPCO
housed in a suitable weather, vermin and insect proof cubicle with locking
facilities.
5) During power failure the tap changer shall return to the zero position to prevent
voltage rise in the downstream.
6) When the gas and oil actuated relay operates it shall send a signal to block the
operation of the OLTC after bringing back the OLTC to the zero position.
7) Auto - Local - Manual selector switch shall be provided for operation of motor
and the operating mechanism. Provision shall also be made available to operate
the tap changer manually without the motor using a manual operating handle. The
manual operating handle shall be provided and housed in the tap changer
operating mechanism cubicle.
8) An approved mean shall be provided to safe guard the Voltage Regulator when
the tap changer mechanism fails to perform a complete tap changing operation
and the indication " Tap change incomplete" shall be initiated.
A glass window shall be provided in the tap changer operating mechanism cubicle
to view the following;
Tap position
Tap change incomplete indication
9) The following operating conditions are to apply to the on-load tap selector
controls:It shall not be possible to operate the electric drive when the manual operating
gear is in use.
Operation from local control switch shall cause one tap movement only unless the
control switch is returned to the off position between successive operations.
All electrical control switches (auto- local - manual) and manual (hand) operating
gear shall be clearly labelled in an approved manner to indicate the direction of
tap changing.
5.20
OIL
The voltage regulator oil shall be filled with oil before delivery. The oil shall
contain at least 0.3 percent by weight oxidation inhibitor of type diterbutyl
paracresol (DBPC) according to IEC 60296.
Each transformer shall be supplied with standard insulating oil to the requirement
of IEC 60137. The oil shall be new and satisfied to contain less than 1 ppm of
PCBs. Each transformer shall be filled with the correct volume of oil for the
ambient temperature.
5.21
OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATING DEVICES

The oil temperature indicating device shall have a dial type indicator to indicate
the oil temperature of the Voltage Regulator. In addition a pointer to register the
highest temperature reached shall also be provided. When the pointer reached a
temperature of 90oC it shall close a contact to send signal to block the operation
of the OLTC after bringing back the OLTC to the zero position.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 8 , 27-Apr-13
EEPCO
5.22
GAS AND OIL-ACTUATED RELAYS (BUCHHOLZ RELAY)

The tap changer compartment of the Voltage Regulator shall be fitted with gas
and oil-actuated relay equipment having contacts which close on collection of gas
/ following oil surge or low oil level conditions in the tap changer compartment.
The closing of contacts shall send signal to block the operation of the OLTC after
bringing back the OLTC to the zero position.
The gas and oil-actuated relay shall be provided with a test cock to collect gas
sample.
The gas and oil-actuated relay shall be mounted in such a way so that all gas
arising from the tap changer compartment will pass into the gas and oil-actuated
relay.
5.23
1
2
3
4
4.1
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
Line capacity
Over loading
Short time withstand current/duration
Input voltage
4.2
5
6
7
8
9
Nominal Output voltage

Number of phases
Frequency
Type of Cooling
Oil Temperature Rise
10
11
Winding Temperature Rise

Connection
12
12.1
Insulation level
Impulse withstand voltage
12.2
13
13.1
13.2
14
15
16
17
Power frequency withstands voltage (wet

1min.)
Bushings
Total creepage distance
Protected creepage distance
Percentage regulation
Duty cycle and installation
Winding material
Mineral oil for Transformer
18
Core material
19
Tap changer positions
Rev -1- April 2013
5.2 MVA
As per IEC 60354
16kA /1 seconds
15kV Nominal
-15% of nominal
Minimum
+5% of Nominal
Maximum
15kV
3 or 1 phase units
50Hz
ONAN
50C
60C
Auto 3 phase, star or delta
connected. Single phase
units Phase-phase
125kV (1.2/50 s) kV
peak
50kV
480mm
Less than 1%
Continuous & outdoor
Copper
Mineral oil transformer oil
to BS144 IEC 60137
Cold rolled grain oriented
silicon Steel
17 Minimum
Page: 9 , 27-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 6 - QUALITY ASSURANCE
19.1
Tap changer IP rating
20
21
Max. Oil temperature indicator

Oil temperature Max. indicator
22
23
Marshalling box
Bucholz relay
6.
IP 54 enclosures suitable
for outdoor installation
Provided as per clause
above.
IP 54 enclosure
Provided as per Clause
above
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Bidder shall furnish documentary proof that the manufacturer posses the
Quality Assurance conforming to ISO 9001 for the manufacture of 15kV
Transformers for the particular plant where manufacturer is carried out. The
Bidder shall certify all the documents as true copies of the originals.
7.
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
7.1
SPARES
A list of recommended spare parts (along with the detailed prices) for five years
trouble free operation shall be furnished with the offer.
7.2
RATING PLATE
The Rating Plate shall be made of stainless and shall provide the ratings and data
of the voltage as per IEC 60076. The rating plate shall be positioned on the tank
at a height of 1.5 m from the base.
7.3
PACKING
Each item shall be packed properly and protected for shipment and transport
from the place of manufacture to Client's site. The Client may require to inspect
and approve the packing before the items are despatched but the Bidder shall be
entirely responsible for ensuring that the packing is suitable for transit and such
inspection will not exonerate the Bidder from any loss or damage to faulty
packing.
7.4
WARRANTY
The Bidder shall guarantee the efficient good working of the Voltage Regulators
supplied and guarantee the to be free of defects for a period of twelve months
from the date on which the Client takes over the
8.
INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED WITH THE BID
8.1
TO BE FURNISHED WITH THE BID

1) Particulars requested in technical schedule.
2) Constructional features and materials used for components
3) Separate explanatory drawings and dimensions of operation of on load tap
changing mechanisms etc.
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 10 , 27-Apr-13
EEPCO
4) Overall dimensional drawings
5) Drawing of rating plate to scale incorporating the particulars called for.

6) Quality Assurance Certification conforming to ISO 9001.
8.2

The following Certificate of Type Tests carried out on 15kV transformers of same
capacity, and in accordance with the specified standard. Copies of all the test
certificates shall be certified by the manufacturer as true copies of the originals;
1) Measurement of winding resistance (as per Clause No.10.2 of IEC 60076)
10.3 of IEC 60076)
IEC 60076)
4) Measurement of No Load loss (as per Clause No. 10.5 of IEC 60076)
5) Temperature rise test (as per IEC 60076-2)
6) Dielectric test (as per IEC 60076-3)
8.3
OTHER CERTIFICATES
Test Certificates, Performance Curves etc., furnished shall be based on the Type
Tests conforming to the relevant standard .The Test Certificates shall clearly
identify the equipment concerned, showing the manufacturer's identity, Type No.
and basic technical parameters, and shall be from a recognised Testing Authority
acceptable to the Client.
Copies of the Type & Routine Test Certificates shall be certified by the Bidder as
the true copies of the originals.
Failure to furnish the particulars requested in clause 8.1 and 8.2 will result in the
offer being rejected.
8.4
TECHNICAL LITERATURE & DRAWINGS

The selected Bidder shall supply along with the equipment the routine test report,
all relevant drawings with dimensions, technical literature, hand books etc., in
order to carry out the erection and commissioning of the Regulators and to
facilitate faultless operation and maintenance.
9.
SCHEDULES
9.1
SCHEDULE FOR POLE MOUNTED 15KV VOLTAGE

BOOSTERS
Please see separate technical schedule TS-TR-06.
9.2

Schedule Ref TS-TR-06-NC1
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 11 , 27-Apr-13
EEPCO
Specification
Clause
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 12 , 27-Apr-13
EEPCO
9.3

Item Reference TS-TR-06-TC1
Specification
Clause
Rev -1- April 2013
Page: 13 , 27-Apr-13
LPA-GECE Techncial Schedule TS-TR-06-S1
EEPCo
15 kV Voltage Boosters
Please fill more schedules if more types of equipment offered that can fit on this sheet
No
1
items
Class Designation (Catalogue ref. No.) Rated Capacity at rated voltage

Over loading
Short time withstand current (3 second)
Input voltage
i) minimum voltage
ii) maximum voltage
Nominal Output voltage
Highest Equipment Voltage exposed to Air
Highest Equipment Voltage in Oil
10
Rated Secondary Current at All Tap

Position
Rated Teriary Current
Number of phases
Frequency
Connection Auto 3 phase, star or delta
connected. Single phase units Phase-phase
Insulation level
i) Impulse withstand voltage (1. 2/50 ms)
kV peak
ii) Power frequency withstand voltage wet
(1min.)
iii) Power frequency withstand voltage dry
(1min.)
Bushings
i) Total creepage distance
ii) Protected creepage distance
Percentage regulation
15
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
23.1
23.2
23.3
23.4
24
Requirement
Bid Offer
Name of Manufacturer and country of origin
2
3
4
5
6
6.1
6.2
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
Unit
MVA
kA
kV
kV
kV
kV
kV
kV
5.2
As per IEC 60354
12.5
15
12.75
15.75
15
24
17.5
200
233
3 or 1 phase units
Hz
50
Yes/No Yes
kV
125
kV
50
kV
60
mm
480
Duty cycle and installation

Type of Cooling
Total Cooling Surface
Mineral oil for Transformer
Oil Temperature Rise
Winding Temperature Rise
Windings
i) Tertiary Winding Rating
ii) Winding material
iii) Winding construction
iv) Winding Weight
Oil filling Weight
FIle:TS-TR-06-S R1 15kV Voltage Boosters 2013-04-28.xlsx, Shet:TS-TR-06-S1
cm
deg.C
deg.C
kVA
Less than 1%
Continuous &
outdoor
Oil immersed with
ONAN cooling
703260
BS144 IEC 60137
55
60
2666
Copper
Continuous winding
kg
kg
Page:1, Date: 28/4/2013
LPA-GECE Techncial Schedule TS-TR-06-S1

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
36.1
36.2
36.3
36.4
37
Weight of The Part liftable from Tank

Weight of Complete Transformer with
OLCT
Weight of Oil Filling
Core Weight
Core material - Cold rolled grain oriented
silicon Steel
Tap changer positions
Tap changer IP rating IP 54 enclosures
suitable for outdoor installation
Max. Oil temperature indicator
Oil temperature Max. indicator Provided as
per clause above.
Marshalling box IP 54 enclosure
Bucholz relay Provided as per Clause above
EEPCo
kg
kg
kg
kg
Yes/No Yes
17 Minimum
Yes/No Yes
Yes/No Yes
Yes/No Yes
Yes/No Yes
Losses
i) Load losses at MVA rating at 75 deg.C
ii) Zero phase sequence/Phase
iii) No load current
iv) Power Factor
Total Weight including oil and auxiliaries
FIle:TS-TR-06-S R1 15kV Voltage Boosters 2013-04-28.xlsx, Shet:TS-TR-06-S1
Ohms
Page:2, Date: 28/4/2013
EEPCO
SPECIFICATION
TS-UV-01
Utility Trucks and Vehicles
Rev -0-April 2013
SPECIFICATION TS-UV-01
EEPCO

Revision
Rev 0
Date
29 April 2013
Brief Description
First Issue
TS-UV-012 R1 Utility Trucks and Vehicles.docx
Rev -0-April 2013
Page: i , 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO
UTILITY TRUCKS AND VEHICLES
1
1.
SCOPE
1
2.
1
3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1
3.1
CONFLICT:
4.
CRANE WITH AUGER
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
GENERAL
TRUCK OR TRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
CRANE REQUIREMENTS
AUGER
GENERAL COMMON REQUIREMENTS
1
2
2
2
3
5.
6.
7.
8.
CHERRY PICKER ELEVATING PLATFORM

TWIN CAB 4 WHEEL DRIVE
4 WHEEL DRIVE UTILITY VEHCLE
SCHEDULE FOR NON COMPLIANCE
3
4
4
5
8.1
8.2

5
6
TS-UV-012 R1 Utility Trucks and Vehicles.docx
Rev -0-April 2013
EEPCO
SECTION 1- SCOPE
UTILITY TRUCKS AND VEHICLES

1.
SCOPE
This specification covers the Supply of Utility Vehicles including:
Crane and Auger, Lifting platform/beam lifter/cherry picker, twin-cab utility
vehicle and personnel vehicle.
2.

3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
3.1
CONFLICT:
See spec TS-GN-02.
4.
CRANE WITH AUGER

This standard establishes the physical and performance requirements for a Truck
or tractor Mounted Hydraulic Crane-3 metric tons at 4m to be used by EEPCo
for the erecting and maintaining distribution networks.
4.1
GENERAL
The Truck or Tractor Mounted Hydraulic Crane with Auger shall conform in
all respects to the physical and performance requirements of this standard
and technical schedule TS-UV-01-S4.
Specification of the truck or tractor shall be furnished with the bid including
diesel engine size, manufacturer, transmission system, wheelbase and tire
size.
The crane & auger shall be mounted on Truck or tractor chassis with diesel
engine, water cooled and the supplier must furnish detailed information showing
that spare parts are available in the country of the client. Alternatively a dedicated
tractor based unit maybe employed. The unit shall be equipped with outrigger
stabilisers. It shall be suitable for use on and off the road.
LPA/GECE/TS-UV-012 R1 Utility Trucks and Vehicles.docx

Rev -0-April 2013
Page: 1, 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
4.2
SECTION 4- CRANE WITH AUGER
TRUCK OR TRACTOR REQUIREMENTS

A Turbo-diesel powered, 4 wheel drive, hydraulically powered.
The operators cab shall provide full rollover protection and have sufficient fan
assisted ventilation to give a comfortable working environment in the climatic
conditions stated. The following features shall also be supplied:-
4.3
4.3.1
Roof mounted amber rotating warning light.
Two omnidirectional facing work lights.
Metallic stone guards on all external lights.
Two spare wheels.
CRANE REQUIREMENTS
General
The boom shall be of rigid welded box design with 2 or three sections,
telescoping and with continuous 360 rotations. The fully extended length of the
boom will be no less than 12 M. It shall include a boom angle indicator fully
visible from the operator's position. All hydraulic boom fixtures should be either
totally enclosed within the boom sections or secured on the boom to ensure long
lasting performance.
The CAB instrumentation shall include at least oil pressure gauge, water
temperature gauge, fuel gauge and hour meter. All instruments must be located in
full view of the operator. The CAB shall also include combination foot and hand
throttle and all controls for safe operation of the unit, such as tipping warning and
over winding alarming device, etc.
Maximum speed on road to be specified by the bidder.
4.3.2
Crane Capacities
The crane shall be rated for no less than 3 metric tons at 4m and 1 metric
ton at 7m.
4.4
AUGER
The auger is intended to be used mainly for the planting of overhead line poles.
The auger assembly shall be permanently and securely mounted on the body of
the truck or tractor. It shall operate on a rail type sliding assembly. It shall be
hydraulically operated powered from the vehicles engine.
The vertical alignment of the auger head shall be adjustable so that the hole can
be opened to true vertical line.
The auger shall be capable of drilling a whole of minimum depth as shown in the
technical schedules without needing to change or add any components on the
auger assembly.
The auger tip shall be fitted with a head to drill a whole diameter as shown in the
technical schedules. It shall be suitable for soft and hard soil, sandy soil and loose
rocks and solid soft rock.

Rev -0-April 2013
Page: 2, 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
SECTION 5- CHERRY PICKER ELEVATING

PLATFORM
Two sets of hand ramming tools for soil compaction and finishing off pole
installation shall be provided with each tractor-mounted auger.
4.5
4.5.1
GENERAL COMMON REQUIREMENTS

Lockable toolbox and tools
Set of standard tools in a metallic lockable cabinet.
Tools shall be supplied with the unit that would be sufficient to attend minor
repairs away from the stores.
4.5.2
Spare Wheels
Two spare wheels (one for the front and one for the rear wheels if different).
4.5.3
Spare Parts
The supplier will supply the crane/Auger with the recommended spare parts
4.5.4
Documentation
Each unit shall include 2 copies of complete operators instruction, maintenance,
service and parts manuals. The supplier will also propose local services with
workshop and parts backup, if any.
4.5.5
Other standards
The physical and performance requirements of truck or tractor mounted
hydraulic cranes based on other international recognized standards are
acceptable only if the requirements of such standard are equivalent to or
exceed the requirements quoted in this document.
5.
CHERRY PICKER ELEVATING PLATFORM

A minimum 3000cc, diesel powered (preferable turbo), selectable 2 or 4 wheeldrive, rough terrain vehicle with variable reach and directional hydraulically
operated working platform for 2 persons nominal 200kg, that can reach a
working height of 13m from ground level with maximum overhang of about at a
radius of about 10m. The hydraulic system for the platform shall be powered
from the vehicles main engine and full control of the platform shall be from the
platform itself.
The following features shall also be supplied:
2/3 man crew cab.
Cab roof mounted Omni-directional spotlights (2 off).
Towing hitch (claw type).
Metallic stone guards to all external lights.
Lockable toolboxes (approx. 1000x400x400mm - 2 off).
Emergency Platform lower device from ground level.
2 spare wheels.

Rev -0-April 2013
Page: 3, 30-Apr-13
EEPCO
6.
SECTION 6- FOURTH
TWIN CAB 4 WHEEL DRIVE

The supplied vehicles shall comply to all the technical specifications listed in the
technical schedule.
Briefly the vehicle shall be a twin cab pickup, four wheel drive diesel driven, with
a fully synchronized power transmission with five (5) speeds forward and one
reverse. It should also have a low/high gear ratio to enable the vehicle to operate
in difficult terrain conditions
7.
4 WHEEL DRIVE UTILITY VEHCLE

The supplied vehicles shall comply to all the technical specifications listed in the
technical schedule.
Briefly the vehicle shall be a single cub passenger utility vehicle, four wheel drive
diesel driven, with a fully synchronized power transmission with five (5) speeds
forward and one reverse.
It shall conform to the specifications in the technical schedule.

Rev -0-April 2013
Page: 4, 30-Apr-13
SECTION 8- SCHEDULE FOR NON

COMPLIANCE
EEPCO
8.
SCHEDULE FOR NON COMPLIANCE

Please see separate technical schedule.
8.1

Schedule Ref TS-UV-01-NC1
Specification
Clause

Rev -0-April 2013
Page: 5, 30-Apr-13
SECTION 8- SCHEDULE FOR NON

COMPLIANCE
EEPCO
8.2

Item Reference TS-UV-01-TC1
Specification
Clause

Rev -0-April 2013
Page: 6, 30-Apr-13
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule: TS-UV-01-S1
Technical Schedule for Twincub Pickup Truck - Fur Wheel drive

No
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Item
Requirement
Bid offer
General
Make
Model
Country of Manufacture
Standard production vehicle
Yes
Vehicle conditions
New, latest model
Designated to comply with heavy duty conditions
1.6 and rough terrain, off road, gravel and unpaved
Yes
roads
1.7 suitable for operation in humid, tropical climate
Yes
Passenger and goods
1.8 Usage
transport
2 at front,
1.9 Passenger Capacity
3 at rear seats
Removable hard canopy for the rear trunk made
Not Required,
1.1
of fibreglass or other durable material, lockable
optional
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Dimensions and weights

Wheel base (front-rear)
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Ground clearance
Net Payload, excluding passengers
Towing Capacity of trailer without breaks
Towing Capacity of trailer with breaks
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
Engine
Cylinders
Valves
Nominal Engine Power
3.4 Engine Torque

3.5 Piston displacement engine capacity
3.6 Turbo charged system
3.7 Cooling System
4 Fuel System & Emmissions
4.1 Fuel
4.2 Fuel system
4.3 Fuel Tank capacity
Min 2800mm
4,800 mm 500mm
1,850 mm 200mm
1,800 mm 200mm
Min 200mm
Min 500kg
Min 700kg
Min 2500kg
4 Min
16 min
>=140 hp
>300 N-m at
optimum revs/min
>2,400 cm3
Yes
Water - closed circuit
Diesel
Direct injection
Manufacturers
standard
>60 litres
File:TS-UV-01 Utility Veficles and Trucks.xlsm - sheet:TS-UV-01-S1
Page 1 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
Item
Fuel tank protection under-shield if exposed to
4.4
underside
Lockable tank filler lid or remote control from
4.5
inside cab
4.6 Fuel consumption (combined cycle)
4.7 Emissions (CO2 g/km)
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
Transmission & Drive system

Wheels driven
Number of forward/reverse gears
Gearbox
5.4 2WD/4WD selection

5.5 Differential lock
5.6 Differential limited slip
6 Brake System
6.1 ABS (anti-block/lock system)
EBD (electronic Break distribution between rear
6.2
and frond wheels
6.3 Frond Brakes
6.4 Rear Brakes
6.5 Central Level Parking Break
7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
EEPCo
Wheels and tyres

Wheel
Full-size spare tyre
External / Internal
If external spare tire external lockable carrier
8 Suspension and steering

8.1 Steering
8.2 Left Hand drive
8.3 Suspension system front
8.4 Suspension System rear
9 Body
9.1 No of doors
9.2 Cabinet
Corrosion-protected panels, under body and
9.3
fittings
9.4 Colour
Requirement
Bid offer
Yes metallic
Yes
Less than 10
litres/100km
<160
2 and 4 Wheel
05-Jan
Manual
Selectable while
driving
Yes On Rear system
Yes
Yes
Preferable but not
mandatory
Disc
Disc or drum
Yes
Steel or Alloy
Yes
Please state
Yes
Power-assisted
Yes
Manufacturers
standard
Manufacturers
standard
4
Double cab
Yes to all
White
Page 2 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
No
Item
9.5 Upholstery
9.6 Sun visors for driver and front passenger
9.7 Front Bulbar with head lamps protection grills
9.8 External side mirrors
9.9 Internal rear view Mirror
Body construction and all fitments conform to
9.1
CAP
9.11 Airbags for driver and front passenger, min. 2
9.12 Side Door Beam Protection
Requirement
Bid offer
wear-resistant cloth,
leather, or good
quality vinyl, please
state
Yes
Yes
Yes 2
Yes
Yes
9.23 Air conditioner
Yes
Yes/Not mandatory
as per Purchaser's
default on both side
Yes
10
10.1
10.2
10.3
Yes claw-ball type

Yes
Yes
9.13 Customized lettering on side of car
Towing Facilities
Rear towing hook
Front towing hook
Front pulling cable with electric motor ( winch)
11 Accessories
11.1 Fire extinguisher
AM/FM radio with integrated CD player with
11.2
USB input,
Safety seat belts for all passenger seats front and
11.3
rear
11.4 Head rests for front seats
11.5 Head rests for rear seats
11.6
12
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
EEPCo
2kg fitted inside cab

Yes
Yes
Yes
Preferable but not
mandatory
User's manual in English language Inspection

booklet
Electrical system and instruments

Lighting conform to National requirements
Halogen Head Lights
Fog Lamp
Central locking with remote control
Electric windows
Antitheft electronic device
Alternator & Electrical system
Battery as per manufacturers design but not less
12.8
than
12.9 Search/spot light mounted at the top of the cabin
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
12V Nominal
>70Ah
Not mandatory
Page 3 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
No Item
Requirement
13 Tools
13.1 Standard Tool Set and wheel change equipment
Yes
Manual for the operation and maintenance of the
13.2
Yes
vehicle
Documentation of availability of spare parts and
13.3
Yes
maintenance facilities
13.4 Emergency triangle
2 sets
13.5 Jump start cable set
Yes
Bid offer
14 Warranty and services

14.1 Warrantee
14.2 Full manufacturer's warranty
Address list of authorised workshops with spare
14.3
parts stock throughout the country
3 years or 60,000
km, whichever
occurs first
Yes
Yes
Page 4 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Technical Schedule for Four Wheel drive Utility pasenger Vehicle

This is the specification for a Jeep type utility vehicle
No
Item
Requirement
1
General
1.1 Make
1.2 Model
1.3 Country of Manufacture
1.4 Standard production vehicle
Yes
1.5 Vehicle conditions
New, latest model
Designated to comply with heavy duty conditions
1.6 and rough terrain, off road, gravel and unpaved
Yes
roads
1.7 suitable for operation in humid, tropical climate
Yes
1.8 Usage
Passenger Transport
2 at front,
1.9 Passenger Capacity
3 second row
2 foldbable at rear
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
Dimensions and weights

Wheel base (front-rear)
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Ground clearance
Towing Capacity of trailer without breaks
Towing Capacity of trailer with breaks
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
Engine
Cylinders
Valves
Nominal Engine Power
3.4
Engine Torque
3.5
3.6
3.7
Piston displacement engine capacity

Turbo charged system
Cooling System
4
4.1
Fuel System & Emmissions

Fuel
4.2
Fuel system
4.3
Fuel Tank capacity

Fuel tank protection under-shield if exposed to
underside
Lockable tank filler lid or remote control from
inside cab
4.4
4.5
4.6
Fuel consumption (combined cycle)
Min 2800mm
4,800 mm 500mm
1,850 mm 200mm
1,800 mm 200mm
Min 200mm
Min 700kg
Min 2500kg
4 Min
16 min
>=140 hp
>300 N-m at optimum
revs/min
3
>2,400 cm
Yes
Water - closed circuit
Diesel
Direct injection
Manufacturers standard
>60 litres
Yes metallic
Yes
Less than 10
litres/100km
Page 5 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

No
4.7
Item
Emissions (CO2 g/km)
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Transmission & Drive system

Wheels driven
Number of forward gears
Gearbox
2WD/4WD selection
Differential lock
Differential limited slip
6
6.1
6.3
6.4
6.5
Brake System
ABS (anti-block/lock system)
EBD (electronic Break distribution between rear
and frond wheels
Frond Brakes
Rear Brakes
Central Level Parking Break
7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Wheels and tyres

Wheel
Full-size spare tyre
Spare Wheel - External / Internal
If external spare tire external lockable carrier
8
8.1
8.2
Suspension and steering

Steering
Left Hand drive
8.3
Suspension system front
8.4
Suspension System rear
9
9.1
9.2
9.4
Body
No of doors including rear
Cabinet
Corrosion-protected panels, under body and
fittings
Colour
9.5
Upholstery
6.2
9.3
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
Sun visors for driver and front passenger

Front Bulbar with head lamps protection grills
External side mirrors
Internal rear view Mirror
Body construction and all fitments conform to
9.1
CAP
9.11 Airbags for driver and front passenger, min. 2
Requirement
<160
2 and 4 Wheel
5 min
Manual
Selectable while
driving
Yes On Rear system
Yes
Yes
Preferable but not
mandatory
Disc
Disc or drum
Yes
Steel or Alloy
Yes
Please state
Yes
Power-assisted
Yes
Manufacturers
standard
Manufacturers
standard
5
Single space
Yes to all
White
wear-resistant cloth,
leather, or good quality
vinyl, please state
Yes
Yes
Yes 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 6 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

No
Item
9.12 Side Door Beam Protection
9.13 Customized lettering on side of car
9.23 Air conditioner
10
10.1
10.2
10.3
Towing Facilities
Rear towing hook
Front towing hook
Front pulling cable with electric motor ( winch)
11 Accessories
11.1 Fire extinguisher
AM/FM radio with integrated CD player with
11.2
USB input,
Safety seat belts for all passenger seats front and
11.3
rear
11.4 Head rests for front seats
11.5 Head rests for rear seats
11.6
User's manual in English language Inspection

booklet
12
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
Electrical system and instruments

Lighting conform to National requirements
Halogen Head Lights
Fog Lamp
Central locking with remote control
Electric windows
Antitheft electronic device
Alternator & Electrical system
Battery as per manufacturers design but not less
12.8
than
12.9 Search/spot light mounted at the top of the cabin
Requirement
Yes/Not mandatory
as per Purchaser's
default on both side
Yes
Yes claw-ball type

Yes
Yes
2kg fitted inside cab

Yes
Yes
Yes
Preferable but not
mandatory
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
12V Nominal
>70Ah
Not mandatory
Not mandatory
13 Tools
13.1 Standard Tool Set and wheel change equipment
Manual for the operation and maintenance of the
13.2
vehicle
Documentation of availability of spare parts and
13.3
maintenance facilities
13.4 Emergency triangle
13.5 Jump start cable set
Yes
Yes
Yes
2 sets
Yes
Page 7 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

No
14
Item
Warranty and services
14.1 Warrantee
14.2 Full manufacturer's warranty
Address list of authorised workshops with spare
14.3
parts stock throughout the country
Requirement
3 years or 60,000 km,
whichever occurs first
Yes
Yes
Page 8 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Four Wheel drive Utility pasenger Vehicle
Jeep type utility vehicle

Bid offer
Page 9 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Bid offer
Page 10 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Bid offer
Page 11 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo
Bid offer
Page 12 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for Cherry Picker - Beam Lifter - Lifting Bucket
Item
Maker's name
Maker's type and reference
Country of origin
Engine type
Fuel Consumption
Nominal truck length
Nominal wheel base
Truck weight
Cab as specified
Accessories as specified
Instrument panel as specified
Boom type
Unit
13 Boom maximum leakage current
mA
14
15
16
17
18
kV
0
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Boom five minute minimum withstand voltage

Boom elevation angle
Turntable
Bucket five minute minimum withstand voltage
Bucket capacity
Bucket height (ground level to bucket floor) at a
radious of 10m from boom centre.
Bucket rotation
Crane drive
Crane rope
Crane lift (SWL)
Automatic stowing of the boom
Cabin and toolbox avoidance system
Outriggers as specified
Control system as specified
Safety devices as specified
Minimum manufacturing experience
Manufacturing standard
Requirement
Bid offer
kV
kg
diesel
5 km/l approx
5.7 m. minimum
2.7 m minimum
6000 kg, minimum
Yes
Yes
Yes
fibre glass and steel
0.5 mA leakage at 100 kV
AC
66 kV AC
-13o to +80o
Yes
20 kV AC
200 kg minimum
13 m minimum
-100o to +90o
Yes
Yes
450 kg minimum
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5 years
ISO 9002 minimum
km
m
m
kg
kg
years
Page 13 Date: 30/04/2013,
LPA-GECE
EEPCo

Technical Schedule for Mobile Crane & Digger with Auger
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Item
Maker's name
Maker's type and reference
Country of origin
Complete truck
Maximum speed on the road
Total weight
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Type
Fuel
Cab as specified
Controls & safety devices as specified
Outriggers
17
18
19
20
21
Lifting height
Arc of boom travel
Boom slewing angle
Winch drive
Hook speed
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Hole diameter
Auger torque
Working radius
Digging depth
Instrument panel as specified
Accessories as specified
Additional attachments
Minimum manufacturing experience
Manufacturing standard
Unit
Requirement
Bid offer
Truk & Engine
Nos
Water cooled
Diesel
Yes
Yes
Four minimum
Crane
Power self contained from truck engine
Crane drive hydraulic
Truck pay load
Crane capacity
kg at 4m
kg at 7m
m
0
0
m/min
Yes
Yes
1300 kg minimum
3000 kg minimum
1000 kg minimum
12 metres minimum
-10 to +80
360o continuous
Hydraulic
40 m per minute
Auger
m
kgfm
m
m
years
0.35 and 0.45

600 to 725 kgfm
3-7 metres
5 metres minimum
Yes
Yes
Yes
5 years
ISO 9002 minimum
Page 14 Date: 30/04/2013,

PDF Specs Text and Tech Schedules

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PDF Specs Text and Tech Schedules

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EEPCO

Schedule of EEPCo Specifications

STANDARDISED SPECIFICATIONS PAPER

INTRODUCTION OF MODULAR SPECIFICATIONS

requirements. For example the distribution transformers specification could be

HOW WILL THE STANDARDISED SPECS BE USED

Rev -4- April 2013

DOCUMENT REVISION SHEET

Additional sizes of AAAC

Insulated XLPE added

Conductor sizes to conform to BS standards.

TS-CO-01 R4 Overhead Conductors & Accessories-C.docxRev -4- April 2013

INSPECTION AND TESTING

ALL ALUMINIUM ALLOY CONDUCTOR (AAAC)

INSULATED AAAC CONDUCTOR

CONDUCTOR DRUMS AND PACKING

AAA CONDUCTOR ACCESSORIES

TS-CO-01 R4 Overhead Conductors & Accessories-C.docxRev -4- April 2013

BOLTED PARALLEL GROOVE CLAMPS

QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

SCHEDULE FOR OVERHEAD CONDUCTOR AND ACCESSORIES

TS-CO-01 R4 Overhead Conductors & Accessories-C.docxRev -4- April 2013

Page: iii , 11-Apr-13

OVERHEAD CONDUCTORS & ACCESSORIES

SYSTEM PARAMETERS & SERVICE CONDITIONS

Conductors covered overhead for working voltages 6.35/11

International Standard of resistance for copper

High voltage test techniques

Aluminium-magnesium-silicon alloy wire for overhead line

Tests on cable over sheaths which have a special protective

Electric Cables -Calculation of the current rating

Common test methods for insulated and sheathing materials

Hard drawn aluminium wire for overhead line conductors

Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded

All Aluminium Alloy Conductor

Inclined plane non-tracking test method.

INSPECTION AND TESTING

TS-CO-01 R4 Overhead Conductors & Accessories-C.docxRev -4- April 2013

SECTION 4- INSPECTION AND TESTING

Mechanical tests (Tensile and Elongation tests and Wrapping tests)

Tests on sheath (of insulated conductors only)

ROUTINE TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS

Each Aluminium Wire Sample

Tensile Strength Measurement -IEC 61089

Resistivity Test IEC 61089

Wrapping Test IEC 61089

Each Complete Conductor Sample

Lay Ratio of Each Layer (to be measured).

Tensile Strength of Complete Conductor

This shall be measured in accordance with IEC 61089 . Alternatively, the

TS-CO-01 R4 Overhead Conductors & Accessories-C.docxRev -4- April 2013

SECTION 5- ALL ALUMINIUM ALLOY

Resistivity of Complete Conductor

This shall be measured in accordance with IEC 61089 , as applied to

Electrical tests on sheath as per IEC 62230 on insulated conductors only)

ALL ALUMINIUM ALLOY CONDUCTOR (AAAC)

AAAC 100 mm2

AAAC 150 mm2

TS-CO-01 R4 Overhead Conductors & Accessories-C.docxRev -4- April 2013

SECTION 5- ALL ALUMINIUM ALLOY

All greases shall permit operation of the conductors at a temperature of 80o.

No mixes of different greases in any one length of conductor shall be permitted

The specified characteristics of the grease shall be unimpaired after heating to

The grease shall not corrode component wires of conductors.